d-Copia3500MF 4500MF 5500MFsmY113351-4 PDF

Copier
d-Copia 3500MF/
4500MF/5500MF
SERVICE MANUAL
Code: Y1133551-4
PUBLICATION ISSUED BY:
Olivetti S.p.A.
Gruppo Telecom Italia
Via Jervis, 77 - 10015 Ivrea (TO)
Copyright 2015 Olivetti

All rights reserved
CAUTION
RISK OF EXPLOSION IF BATTERY IS REPLACED BY AN INCORRECT TYPE. DISPOSE

OF USED BATTERIES ACCORDING TO THE INSTRUCTIONS.
It may be illegal to dispose of this battery into the municipal waste stream. Check with your
local solid waste officials for details in your area for proper disposal.
ATTENTION
IL Y A UN RISQUE DEXPLOSION SI LA BATTERIE EST REMPLACEE PAR UN MODELE

DE TYPE INCORRECT. METTRE AU REBUT LES BATTERIES UTILISEES SELON LES
INSTRUCTIONS DONNEES.
Il peut tre illgal de jeter les batteries dans des eaux dgout municipales. Vrifiez avec les
fonctionnaires municipaux de votre rgion pour les dtails concernant des dchets solides
et une mise au rebut approprie.
This page is intentionally left blank.
Safety precautions
This booklet provides safety warnings and precautions for our service personnel to ensure the safety of
their customers, their machines as well as themselves during maintenance activities. Service personnel
are advised to read this booklet carefully to familiarize themselves with the warnings and precautions
described here before engaging in maintenance activities.
Safety warnings and precautions
Various symbols are used to protect our service personnel and customers from physical danger and
to prevent damage to their property. These symbols are described below:
DANGER: High risk of serious bodily injury or death may result from insufficient attention to or incorrect
compliance with warning messages using this symbol.
WARNING: Serious bodily injury or death may result from insufficient attention to or incorrect compliance
with warning messages using this symbol.
CAUTION: Bodily injury or damage to property may result from insufficient attention to or incorrect com-
pliance with warning messages using this symbol.
Symbols
The triangle ( ) symbol indicates a warning including danger and caution. The specific point of attention is
shown inside the symbol.
General warning. Warning of risk of electric shock.
Warning of high temperature.
indicates a prohibited action. The specific prohibition is shown inside the symbol.
General prohibited action. Disassembly prohibited.
indicates that action is required. The specific action required is shown inside the symbol.
General action required. Remove the power plug from the wall outlet.
Always ground the copier.

1. Installation Precautions
WARNING
Do not use a power supply with a voltage other than that specified. Avoid multiple connections to
one outlet: they may cause fire or electric shock. When using an extension cable, always check that
it is adequate for the rated current. .....................................................................................................
Connect the ground wire to a suitable grounding point. Not grounding the copier may cause fire or
electric shock. Connecting the earth wire to an object not approved for the purpose may cause
explosion or electric shock. Never connect the ground cable to any of the following: gas pipes, light-
ning rods, ground cables for telephone lines and water pipes or faucets not approved by the proper
authorities. ..........................................................................................................................................
CAUTION:
Do not place the copier on an infirm or angled surface: the copier may tip over, causing injury. .........
Do not install the copier in a humid or dusty place. This may cause fire or electric shock. .................
Do not install the copier near a radiator, heater, other heat source or near flammable material. This
may cause fire. ...................................................................................................................................
Allow sufficient space around the copier to allow the ventilation grills to keep the machine as cool
as possible. Insufficient ventilation may cause heat buildup and poor copying performance. ............
Always handle the machine by the correct locations when moving it. .................................................
Always use anti-toppling and locking devices on copiers so equipped. Failure to do this may cause
the copier to move unexpectedly or topple, leading to injury. ..............................................................
Avoid inhaling toner or developer excessively. Protect the eyes. If toner or developer is accidentally
ingested, drink a lot of water to dilute it in the stomach and obtain medical attention immediately.
If it gets into the eyes, rinse immediately with copious amounts of water and obtain medical atten-
tion. .....................................................................................................................................................
Advice customers that they must always follow the safety warnings and precautions in the copiers
instruction handbook. .........................................................................................................................
2. Precautions for Maintenance
WARNING
Always remove the power plug from the wall outlet before starting machine disassembly. ................
Always follow the procedures for maintenance described in the service manual and other related
brochures. ..........................................................................................................................................
Under no circumstances attempt to bypass or disable safety features including safety mechanisms
and protective circuits. ........................................................................................................................
Always use parts having the correct specifications. ............................................................................
Always use the thermostat or thermal fuse specified in the service manual or other related brochure
when replacing them. Using a piece of wire, for example, could lead to fire or other serious acci-
dent. ...................................................................................................................................................
When the service manual or other serious brochure specifies a distance or gap for installation of a
part, always use the correct scale and measure carefully. ..................................................................
Always check that the copier is correctly connected to an outlet with a ground connection. ...............
Check that the power cable covering is free of damage. Check that the power plug is dust-free. If it
is dirty, clean it to remove the risk of fire or electric shock. .................................................................
Never attempt to disassemble the optical unit in machines using lasers. Leaking laser light may
damage eyesight. ...............................................................................................................................
Handle the charger sections with care. They are charged to high potentials and may cause electric
shock if handled improperly. ...............................................................................................................
CAUTION
Wear safe clothing. If wearing loose clothing or accessories such as ties, make sure they are safely
secured so they will not be caught in rotating sections. ......................................................................
Use utmost caution when working on a powered machine. Keep away from chains and belts. ..........
Handle the fixing section with care to avoid burns as it can be extremely hot. ..................................
Check that the fixing unit thermistor, heat and press rollers are clean. Dirt on them can cause
abnormally high temperatures. ...........................................................................................................
Do not remove the ozone filter, if any, from the copier except for routine replacement. ......................
Do not pull on the AC power cord or connector wires on high-voltage components when removing
them; always hold the plug itself. ........................................................................................................
Do not route the power cable where it may be stood on or trapped. If necessary, protect it with a
cable cover or other appropriate item. ................................................................................................
Treat the ends of the wire carefully when installing a new charger wire to avoid electric leaks. ..........
Remove toner completely from electronic components. .....................................................................
Run wire harnesses carefully so that wires will not be trapped or damaged. ......................................
After maintenance, always check that all the parts, screws, connectors and wires that were
removed, have been refitted correctly. Special attention should be paid to any forgotten connector,
trapped wire and missing screws. .......................................................................................................
Check that all the caution labels that should be present on the machine according to the instruction
handbook are clean and not peeling. Replace with new ones if necessary. .......................................
Handle greases and solvents with care by following the instructions below: ......................................
Use only a small amount of solvent at a time, being careful not to spill. Wipe spills off completely.
Ventilate the room well while using grease or solvents.
Allow applied solvents to evaporate completely before refitting the covers or turning the power
switch on.
Always wash hands afterwards.
Never dispose of toner or toner bottles in fire. Toner may cause sparks when exposed directly to
fire in a furnace, etc. ...........................................................................................................................
Should smoke be seen coming from the copier, remove the power plug from the wall outlet immedi-
ately. ...................................................................................................................................................
3. Miscellaneous
WARNING
Never attempt to heat the drum or expose it to any organic solvents such as alcohol, other than the
specified refiner; it may generate toxic gas. ........................................................................................
Keep the machine away from flammable liquids, gases, and aerosols. A fire or an electric shock
might occur. ........................................................................................................................................
2LL/2LJ/2LH-1
CONTENTS
1-1 Specifications
1-1-1 Specifications . ........................................................................................................................1-1-1
1-1-2 Parts names . ..........................................................................................................................1-1-5
(1) Machine . ............................................................................................................................1-1-5
(2) Option . ...............................................................................................................................1-1-7
(3) Operation panel .................................................................................................................1-1-8
1-1-3 Machine cross section ............................................................................................................1-1-9
1-2 Installation
1-2-1 Installation environment. .........................................................................................................1-2-1
1-2-2 Unpacking and installation......................................................................................................1-2-2
(1) Installation procedure ........................................................................................................1-2-2
(2) Setting initial copy modes................................................................................................1-2-17
1-2-3 Installing the key counter (option).........................................................................................1-2-18
(1) Installing directly on the device........................................................................................1-2-18
(2) Mounting on the document table ......................................................................................1-2-27
1-2-4 Installing the cassette heater (option).....................................................................................1-2-36
1-2-5 Installing the gigabit ethernet board (option) ..........................................................................1-2-40
1-2-6 Installing the IC card reader holder (option) ...........................................................................1-2-42
1-2-7 Installing the keyboard holder (option) ...................................................................................1-2-48
1-3 Maintenance Mode

1-3-1 Maintenance mode . ................................................................................................................1-3-1
(1) Executing a maintenance item ..........................................................................................1-3-1
(2) Maintenance modes item list .............................................................................................1-3-2
(3) Contents of the maintenance mode items .........................................................................1-3-9
1-4 Troubleshooting
1-4-1 Paper misfeed detection .........................................................................................................1-4-1
(1) Paper misfeed indication ...................................................................................................1-4-1
(2) Paper misfeed detection condition ....................................................................................1-4-2
1-4-2 Troubleshooting ....................................................................................................................1-4-23
(1) First check items..............................................................................................................1-4-23
(2) Items and corrective actions relating to the device that will cause paper jam . ...............1-4-27
(3) Paper jam at feeding from cassette 1
Electrical parts that could cause paper jam during paper travelling
at the primary feeding (to regist roller).............................................................................1-4-37
at the primary feeding ( to regist roller)............................................................................1-4-39
(5) Paper jam during manual feeding
at the primary feeding ( to regist roller)............................................................................1-4-41
2LL/2LJ/2LH-3
(6) Paper jam at the duplex re-feeding part

at the primary feeding ( to regist roller)........................................................................... 1-4-44
(7) Electrical parts that could cause paper jam at the Secondary transfer part ................... 1-4-45
(8) Electrical parts that could cause paper jam at the fuser and eject parts ........................ 1-4-46
(9) Electrical parts that could cause paper jam at the duplex part ....................................... 1-4-48
(10) Electrical parts that could cause paper jam at the BR (bridge) part ............................... 1-4-50
(11) Electrical parts that could cause paper jam at the DF paper entry,
feedshift and subtray left eject part................................................................................. 1-4-52
(12) Electrical parts that could cause paper jam at the DF process part ............................... 1-4-54
(13) Electrical parts that could cause paper jam at the DF eject tray part ............................. 1-4-55
(14) Electrical parts that could cause paper jam at the CF conveying part............................ 1-4-56
1-4-3 Self-diagnostic function ....................................................................................................... 1-4-57
(1) Self-diagnostic function .................................................................................................. 1-4-57
(2) Self diagnostic codes...................................................................................................... 1-4-58
1-4-4 Image formation problems ................................................................................................. 1-4-136
1-4-5 Poor image (due to DP and scanner reading) ................................................................... 1-4-138
(1) No image appears (entirely white)................................................................................ 1-4-139
(2) No image appears (entirely black)................................................................................ 1-4-142
(3) Image is too light. ......................................................................................................... 1-4-144
(4) The background is colored. .......................................................................................... 1-4-148
(5) White streaks are printed vertically............................................................................... 1-4-151
(6) Black streaks appear longitudinally. ............................................................................. 1-4-154
(7) Streaks are printed horizontally. ................................................................................... 1-4-158
(8) One side of the print image is darker or brighter than the other. .................................. 1-4-161
(9) Black dots appear on the image. .................................................................................. 1-4-164
(10) Image is blurred............................................................................................................ 1-4-166
(11) The leading edge of the image is consistently misaligned with the original. ................ 1-4-169
(12) Part of image is missing. .............................................................................................. 1-4-171
(13) Image is out of focus. ................................................................................................... 1-4-174
(14) Image center does not align with the original center. ................................................... 1-4-176
(15) Moires........................................................................................................................... 1-4-177
(16) Skewed image .............................................................................................................. 1-4-179
(17) Abnormal image ........................................................................................................... 1-4-182
1-4-6 Poor image (Image rendering problems: printer engine .................................................... 1-4-185
(1) No image appears (entirely white)................................................................................ 1-4-187
(2) No image appears (entirely black)................................................................................ 1-4-188
(3) Image is too light. ......................................................................................................... 1-4-189
(4) The background is colored. .......................................................................................... 1-4-192
(5) White streaks are printed vertically............................................................................... 1-4-194
(6) Black streaks appear longitudinally. ............................................................................. 1-4-195
(7) Black or white streaks appear horizontally. .................................................................. 1-4-196
(8) Uneven density longitudinally. ...................................................................................... 1-4-197
(9) Uneven density horizontally.......................................................................................... 1-4-198
(10) Black dots appear on the image. .................................................................................. 1-4-199
(11) Offset occurs. ............................................................................................................... 1-4-200
(12) Image is partly missing. ................................................................................................ 1-4-201
(13) Image is out of focus. ................................................................................................... 1-4-201
(14) Poor grayscale reproducibility. ..................................................................................... 1-4-202
(15) Unevenly repeating horizontal streaks in the printed objects.
Spots in the printed objects. ......................................................................................... 1-4-203
(16) mage is blurred (Shifted transferring). ......................................................................... 1-4-204
(17) The leading edge of the image is consistently misaligned with the original. ................ 1-4-205
(18) The leading edge of the image is sporadically misaligned with the original. ................ 1-4-206
2LL/2LJ/2LH-2
(19) Paper is wrinkled. .........................................................................................................1-4-206

(20) Fusing is loose.............................................................................................................. 1-4-208
(21) Image center does not align with the original center. ................................................... 1-4-209
(22) Dirty paper edges with toner......................................................................................... 1-4-209
(23) Dirty reverse side of paper. .......................................................................................... 1-4-210
1-4-7 Electric problems ............................................................................................................... 1-4-211
1-4-8 Mechanical problems......................................................................................................... 1-4-219
1-4-9 Send error code ................................................................................................................. 1-4-221
(1) Scan to SMB error codes ............................................................................................. 1-4-221
(2) Scan to FTP error codes .............................................................................................. 1-4-222
(3) Scan to E-mail error codes ........................................................................................... 1-4-223
1-4-10 Error codes ........................................................................................................................ 1-4-225
(1) Error code..................................................................................................................... 1-4-225
(2) Table of general classification ...................................................................................... 1-4-226
(2-1) U004XX error code table: Interrupted phase B ................................................... 1-4-228
(2-2) U006XX error code table: Problems with the unit ............................................... 1-4-228
(2-3) U008XX error code table: Page transmission error............................................. 1-4-228
(2-4) U009XX error code table: Page reception error .................................................. 1-4-228
(2-5) U010XX error code table: G3 transmission......................................................... 1-4-229
(2-6) U011XX error code table: G3 reception .............................................................. 1-4-230
(2-7) U017XX error code table: V.34 transmission ...................................................... 1-4-231
(2-8) U018XX error code table: V.34 reception............................................................ 1-4-231
1-5 Assembly and disassembly

1-5-1 Precautions for assembly and disassembly........................................................................... 1-5-1
(1) Precautions....................................................................................................................... 1-5-1
(2) Drum................................................................................................................................. 1-5-1
(3) Toner ................................................................................................................................ 1-5-1
(4) How to tell a genuine 2OLYHWWL toner container................................................................. 1-5-2
1-5-2 Paper feed section................................................................................................................. 1-5-3
(1) Detaching and refitting the primary paper feed unit.......................................................... 1-5-3
(2) Detaching and refitting the forwarding pulley, paper feed pulley
and separation pulley. [35 ppm model]............................................................................. 1-5-7
(3) Detaching and refitting the forwarding pulley, paper feed pulley
and separation pulley. [45 ppm model / 55 ppm model]................................................. 1-5-10
(4) Detaching and refitting the MP tray paper feed unit ....................................................... 1-5-11
(5) Detaching and refitting the MP forwarding pulley,
MP paper feed pulley and MP separation pulley ............................................................ 1-5-14
1-5-3 Optical section ..................................................................................................................... 1-5-19
(1) Detaching and refitting the exposure lamp ..................................................................... 1-5-19
(2) Detaching and refitting the scanner wires ...................................................................... 1-5-22
(3) Detaching and refitting the ISU....................................................................................... 1-5-26
(4) Detaching and refitting the LSU...................................................................................... 1-5-31
1-5-4 Image formation section ...................................................................................................... 1-5-33
(1) Detaching and refitting the inner unit.............................................................................. 1-5-33
(2) Detaching and refitting the developer unit ...................................................................... 1-5-35
(3) Detaching and refitting the drum unit.............................................................................. 1-5-36
(4) Detaching and refitting the charger roller unit................................................................. 1-5-38
1-5-5 Transfer section ................................................................................................................... 1-5-39
(1) Detaching and refitting the paper conveying unit ........................................................... 1-5-39
(2) Detaching and refitting the transfer belt unit................................................................... 1-5-41
(3) Clean the conveying section........................................................................................... 1-5-43
1-5-6 Fuser section ....................................................................................................................... 1-5-45
2LL/2LJ/2LH-3
(1) Detaching and refitting the fuser unit.............................................................................. 1-5-45

1-5-7 PWBs................................................................................................................................... 1-5-47
(1) Detaching and refitting the main PWB............................................................................ 1-5-47
(2) Detaching and refitting the engine PWB......................................................................... 1-5-53
(3) Detaching and refitting the power source PWB.............................................................. 1-5-55
(4) Detaching and refitting the high voltage PWB ................................................................ 1-5-58
(5) Detaching and refitting the operation PWB .................................................................... 1-5-59
(6) Detaching and refitting the fuser heater PWB ................................................................ 1-5-63
1-5-8 Drive section ........................................................................................................................ 1-5-68
(1) Detaching and refitting the drum drive unit..................................................................... 1-5-68
(2) Detaching and refitting the developer drive unit ............................................................. 1-5-69
(3) Detaching and refitting the fuser drive unit and feed drive unit ...................................... 1-5-70
(4) Detaching and refitting the lift motor 1 and 2.................................................................. 1-5-76
1-5-9 Others .................................................................................................................................. 1-5-77
(1) Detaching the eject filter ................................................................................................. 1-5-77
(2) Detaching and refitting the toner filter............................................................................. 1-5-78
(3) Detaching and refitting the left filter ................................................................................ 1-5-79
(4) Detaching and refitting the belt filter ............................................................................... 1-5-80
(5) Detaching and refitting the LSU filter.............................................................................. 1-5-81
(6) Detaching and refitting the drum filter and developer filter ............................................. 1-5-82
(7) Detaching and refitting the hard disk unit ....................................................................... 1-5-83
(8) Detaching and refitting the eject unit .............................................................................. 1-5-85
(9) Direction of installing the principal fan motors ................................................................ 1-5-86
(10) Skewed paper feeding check/adjustment....................................................................... 1-5-87
1-6 Requirements on PWB Replacement

1-6-1 Upgrading the firmware ......................................................................................................... 1-6-1
1-6-2 Remarks on main PWB replacement..................................................................................... 1-6-4
1-6-3 Remarks on engine PWB replacement ................................................................................. 1-6-6
2-1 Mechanical Construction

2-1-1 Paper feed/conveying section ............................................................................................... 2-1-1
(1) Cassette paper feed section............................................................................................. 2-1-1
(2) MP tray paper feed section............................................................................................... 2-1-3
(3) Paper conveying section .................................................................................................. 2-1-5
2-1-2 Drum section ......................................................................................................................... 2-1-8
2-1-3 Developer section ................................................................................................................ 2-1-10
2-1-4 Optical section ..................................................................................................................... 2-1-12
(1) Image scanner section ................................................................................................... 2-1-12
(2) Laser scanner section .................................................................................................... 2-1-14
2-1-5 Transfer/Separation section ................................................................................................ 2-1-17
(1) Transfer belt unit section ................................................................................................ 2-1-17
2-1-6 Fuser section ....................................................................................................................... 2-1-19
2-1-7 Eject/Feedshift section ........................................................................................................ 2-1-21
2-1-8 Duplex conveying section .................................................................................................... 2-1-23
2-2 Electrical Parts Layout

2-2-1 Electrical parts layout ............................................................................................................ 2-2-1
(1) PWBs................................................................................................................................ 2-2-1
(2) Switches and sensors....................................................................................................... 2-2-4
(3) Motors............................................................................................................................... 2-2-6
(4) Fan motors ....................................................................................................................... 2-2-8
2LL/2LJ/2LH-3
(5) Others............................................................................................................................... 2-2-9

2-3 Operation of the PWBs
2-3-1 Main PWB.............................................................................................................................. 2-3-1
2-3-2 Engine PWB ........................................................................................................................ 2-3-11
2-3-3 Power source PWB ............................................................................................................. 2-3-29
2-3-4 ISC PWB ............................................................................................................................. 2-3-33
2-3-5 Operation PWB 1................................................................................................................. 2-3-38
2-3-6 Front PWB ........................................................................................................................... 2-3-43
2-3-7 Feed PWB 1 ........................................................................................................................ 2-3-49
2-3-8 Feed PWB 2 ........................................................................................................................ 2-3-59
2-3-9 Relay PWB .......................................................................................................................... 2-3-65
2-3-10 LSU relay PWB.................................................................................................................... 2-3-71
2-4 Appendixes
2-4-1 Appendixes ............................................................................................................................ 2-4-1
(1) List of maintenance parts ................................................................................................. 2-4-1
(2) Maintenance kits............................................................................................................... 2-4-3
(3) Periodic maintenance procedures .................................................................................... 2-4-4
(4) Inner Cleaning .................................................................................................................. 2-4-8
(5) Repetitive defects gauge ................................................................................................ 2-4-10
(6) Firmware environment commands ................................................................................. 2-4-11
(7) System Error (Fxxxx) Outline ......................................................................................... 2-4-17
(8) Timing chart.................................................................................................................... 2-4-22
(9) Chart of image adjustment procedures .......................................................................... 2-4-36
(10) Wiring diagram ............................................................................................................... 2-4-38
INSTALLATION GUIDE
DOCUMENT PROCESSOR
PAPER FEEDER
LARGE CAPACITY FEEDER
SIDE DECK
1000-SHEETS FINISHER
FINISHER ATTACHMENT KIT
CENTER-FOLDING UNIT
MAILBOX
PUNCH UNIT
INNER JOB SEPARATOR
100-SHEETS INNER JOB SEPARATOR
RIGHT JOB SEPARATOR
BANNER GUIDE
FAX System
2LL/2LJ/2LH

2LL/2LJ/2LH-1
1-1-1 Specifications
1-1 Specifications
Machine
Specifications
Item
35 ppm 45 ppm 55 ppm
Type Desktop
Printing method Electrophotography by semiconductor laser
Originals Sheet, Book, 3-dimensional objects (maximum original size: A3/Ledger)
Original feed system Fixed
Cassette 60 to 220 g/m2
Paper weight
MP tray 60 to 300 g/m2
Plain, Rough, Vellum, Recycled, Preprinted, Bond, Color (Colour),
Cassette Prepunched, Letterhead, Thick, High Quality, Custom 1 to 8
(Duplex: Same as simplex)
Paper type
Plain, Transparency (OHP film), Rough, Vellum, Labels, Recycled,
MP tray Preprinted, Bond, Cardstock, Color (Colour), Prepunched, Letterhead,
Thick, Coated, Envelope, High Quality, Custom 1 to 8
A3, B4, A4, A4R, B5, B5R, A5R, Ledger, Legal, Letter, LetterR,
Cassette
StatementR, Oficio II, 12 18", Folio, 8K, 16K, 16KR
A3, B4, A4, A4R, B5, ISO B5, B5R, A5R, B6R, A6R, Return postcard,
Paper size Postcards, Envelope DL, Envelope C5, Envelope C4, Envelope #10
(Commercial #10), Envelope #9 (Commercial #9), Envelope #6
MP tray
(Commercial #6 3/4), Envelope Monarch, Youkei 2, Youkei 4, Ledger,
Legal, Letter, LetterR, ExecutiveR, StatementR, Oficio II, 12 18", Folio,
8K, 16K, 16KR, Custom
Manual mode : 25 to 400%, 1% increments
Zoom level
Auto mode : Preset Zoom
A4 : 35 ppm A4 : 45 ppm A4 : 55 ppm
Letter : 35 ppm Letter : 45 ppm Letter : 55 ppm
A4R : 24 ppm A4R : 31 ppm A4R : 38 ppm
LetterR : 24 ppm LetterR : 31 ppm LetterR : 38 ppm
Copying speed A3 : 17 ppm A3 : 22 ppm A3 : 27 ppm
Ledger : 17 ppm Ledger : 22 ppm Ledger : 27 ppm
B4 : 21 ppm B4 : 27 ppm B4 : 33 ppm
Legal : 21 ppm Legal : 27 ppm Legal : 33 ppm
B5 : 35 ppm B5 : 45 ppm B5 : 55 ppm
First print time 5.6 s or less 4.7 s or less 4.3 s or less
(A4, feed from cassette)
Warm-up Power on 23 s or less 23 s or less 23 s or less
time 10 s or less
Low Power 10 s or less 10 s or less
(22 C/71.6
F, 60% RH) Sleep 16 s or less 16 s or less 16 s or less
Y113351-4 1-1-1 Service Manual

2LL/2LJ/2LH-1
Specifications
Item
550 sheets (64 g/m2)
Cassette
500 sheets (80 g/m2)
Paper A4/Letter or less
capacity 165 sheets (64 g/m2) 150 sheets (80 g/m2)
MP tray
More than A4/Letter
55 sheets (64 g/m2) 50 sheets (80 g/m2)
Inner tray 250 sheets (80 g/m2)
with inner 30 sheets (80 g/m2)
Output tray
job separator
capacity
with right 70 sheets (80 g/m2)
job separator
Continuous copying 1 to 999 sheets
Light source LED
Scanning system Flat bed scanning by CCD image sensor
Photoconductor a-Si (drum diameter 40 mm)
Image write system Semiconductor laser
Charging system Charger roller
Touch down developing system
Developing system Developer: 2-component
Toner replenishing: Automatic from the toner container and toner hopper
Transfer system Transfer belt and roller
Separation system Small diameter separation
Cleaning system Counter blade, Cleaning roller
Charge erasing system Exposure by cleaning lamp (LED)
Heat roller fusing
Fusing system Heat source: Halogen heaters
Abnormally high temperature protection devices: thermostat
CPU PowerPC 750CL/600 MHz
Main Standard 1024 MB

memory Maximum 2048 MB
Hard Disk 160 GB (standard)
USB Interface connector: 1 (Hi-Speed USB)
Standard USB port: 2 (Hi-Speed USB)
Interface Network interface: 1 (10 BASE-T/100 BASE-TX/1000 BASE-T)
Fax slot: 2
Option
Network interface: 1 (10 BASE-T/100 BASE-TX/1000 BASE-T)
Resolution 600 600 dpi
Service Manual 1-1-2 Y113351-4

2LL/2LJ/2LH-1
Specifications
Item
Temperature 10 to 32.5 C/50 to 90.5 F
Operating Humidity 15 to 80% RH

environment Altitude 2,500 m/8,202 ft or less
Brightness 1,500 lux or less
machine 668 767 747 mm
Dimensions only 26 5/16 30 3/16 29 3/8
(W D H) with paper 668 767 1053 mm
feeder 26 5/16 30 3/16 41 7/16
977 767 mm (using MP tray)
Space required (W D)
38 7/16 30 3/16 (using MP tray)
Weight 82 kg / 180.8 lb
220 - 240 V AC, 50/60 Hz, more than 7.2 A
Power source
Document processor, Original cover, Paper feeder, Large capacity feeder,

Side deck, 1000-sheet finisher, 4000-sheet finisher, Center-folding unit,
Mailbox, Punch unit, Inner job separator, Right job separator, Key counter,
Options
Fax kit, Expansion memory, Internet fax kit (A), Data security kit,
Printed document guard kit, Emulation option kit, Gigabit ethernet board,
Document table, IC card reader holder and keyboard holder
Printer
Item Specifications
Printing speed Same as copying speed.
Resolution 600 x 600 dpi
Windows XP, Windows Server 2003, Windows Vista, Windows 7,
Operating system
Windows Server 2008, Apple Macintosh OS 10.x
USB interface connector: 1 (Hi-Speed USB)
Interface
Network interface: 1 (10BASE-T/100BASE-TX/1000BASE-T)
Page description language PRESCRIBE

2LL/2LJ/2LH-1
Scanner
Item Specifications
CPU: 600 MHz or higher
System requirements
RAM: 128 MB or more
Resolution 600 dpi, 400 dpi, 300 dpi, 200 dpi, 200 100 dpi, 200 400 dpi
TIFF, JPEG, XPS, PDF (MMR/JPEG compression),
File format
PDF (high compression)
Scanning speed B/W : 80 images/min

(A4 landscape, Simplex Color: 50 images/min
300 dpi,
Image quality: B/W : 160 images/min
Text/Photo orig- Duplex Color: 80 images/min
inal)*1
Interface Ethernet (10 BASE-T/100 BASE-TX/1000 BASE-T)

Network protocol TCP/IP
PC transmission
SMB Scan to SMB
FTP Scan to FTP, FTP over SSL
Transmission system E-mail transmission
SNTP Scan to E-mail
TWAIN scan*2
WIA scan*3
*1 When using the dual scan document processor (except TWAIN and WIA scanning)
*2 Available operating system: Windows XP, Windows Server 2003, Windows Vista, Windows Server 2008,
Windows 7
*3 Available operating system: Windows Vista, Windows 7, Windows Server 2008
NOTE: These specifications are subject to change without notice.

2LL/2LJ/2LH
1-1-2 Parts names

(1) Machine
1
4
13 5
14 2
6
15
16 3
12
7 8 9 10 11
Figure 1-1-1
1. Original size indicator plate 9. Waste toner box

2. Slit glass 10. Waste toner tray
3. Toner container 11. Front cover
4. Platen (Contact glass) 12. Toner container release lever
5. Clip holder 13. Network interface connector
6. Operation panel 14. USB port
7. Handles 15. USB interface connector
8. Release button 16. Option interface

2LL/2LJ/2LH
19
24 22 23 24 17 18 20
26 36
27
28
29
30
25 31
32
33
34
21 35
Figure 1-1-2
17. Inner tray 27. Paper conveying unit lever

18. Document processor (option) 28. Duplex cover lever
19. Original cover (option) 29. Duplex cover
20. USB port 30. MP paper width guide
21. Cassettes 31. MP support Tray
22. Paper length guide 32. MP (Multi-Purpose) tray
23. Guide lock lever 33. Paper conveying cover lever
24. Paper width guide 34. Paper conveying cover
25. Paper width adjusting tab 35. Handle
26. Paper conveying unit 36. Main power switch

2LL/2LJ/2LH
(2) Option
3
10
2
7
9 5
Figure 1-1-3
1. Machine 6. Side deck

2. Document processor (dual scan DP) 7. 1000-sheet finisher
3. Document processor (reversed DP) 8. 4000-sheet finisher
4. Paper feeder 9. Center-folding unit
5. Large capacity feeder 10. Mailbox

2LL/2LJ/2LH
(3) Operation panel
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12
13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26
Figure 1-1-4
1. Program key 10. Power key 19. Memory indicator

2. Status/Job cancel key 11. Counter key 20. Enter key
3. Copy key 12. Main power indicator 21. Attention indicator
4. Accessibility display key 13. Application key 22. Start key
5. Help key 14. Document box key 23. Stop key
6. Quick no. search key 15. Send key 24. Interrupt key
7. Clear key 16. FAX key* 25. Authentication/Logout key
8. Reset key 17. Processing indicator 26. Energy saver key
9. System menu key 18. Numeric keys
*: Option

2LL/2LJ/2LH
1-1-3 Machine cross section
11
8
10
6 12
9
5
Paper path
Figure 1-1-5
1. Cassette paper feed section 7. Developer unit

2. MP tray paper feed section 8. Toner container section
3. Paper conveying section 9. Transfer/Separation sections
4. Optical section 10. Fuser section
5. Laser scanner unit 11. Eject/Feed shift sections
6. Drum unit 12. Duplex section

2LL/2LJ/2LH

2LL/2LJ/2LH
1-2-1 Installation environment

1-2 Installation
1. Temperature: 10 to 32.5C/50 to 90.5F

2. Humidity: 15 to 80% RH
3. Power supply: 220 - 240 V AC, 7.2 A
4. Power source frequency: 50 Hz 2%/60 Hz 2%

5. Installation location
Avoid direct sunlight or bright lighting. Ensure that the photoconductor will not be exposed to direct sun-
light or other strong light when removing paper jams.
Avoid locations subject to high temperature and high humidity or low temperature and low humidity; an
abrupt change in the environmental temperature; and cool or hot, direct air.
Avoid places subject to dust and vibrations.
Choose a surface capable of supporting the weight of the machine.
Place the machine on a level surface (maximum allowance inclination: 1).
Avoid air-borne substances that may adversely affect the machine or degrade the photoconductor, such
as mercury, acidic of alkaline vapors, inorganic gasses, NOx, SOx gases and chlorine-based organic sol-
vents.
Select a well-ventilated location.
6. Allow sufficient access for proper operation and maintenance of the machine.
Machine front : 100 cm/39 3/8"
Machine rear : 10 cm/ 3 15/16"
Machine right : 35 cm/13 3/4"
Machine left : 30 cm/11 13/16"
Machine top : 40 cm/15 3/4"
10cm/3 15/16"
Top 40cm/15 3/4"
30cm/11 13/16" 35cm/13 3/4"
100cm/39 3/8"
Figure 1-2-1

2LL/2LJ/2LH
1-2-2 Unpacking and installation

(1) Installation procedure
Start
Unpacking Installing other optional devices
Removing the eject spacer Installing the cassette heater (option)
Removing the tapes Connect the power cord
Installing the paper feeder (option) Installing toner
Release the lock of the scanner mirror frame Setting the delivery date
(maintenance item U278)
Release of lift plate stopper

Output an own-status report
(maintenance item U000)
Loading paper
Exit maintenance mode

Installing the toner containers
Print out the user setting list

Unlocking the developer waste exit
Make test copies

Replacing operation panel sheet
Completion of the machine installation.

Installing the original platen or DP (option)

2LL/2LJ/2LH
Moving the machine

When moving the machine, pull out three carrying handles, and move with carrying handles and the hand-
hold.
Carrying
handle Handhold
Carrying
handle Carrying
handle
Figure 1-2-2

2LL/2LJ/2LH
Unpacking
13
23
23
23
21 1
22
16,17, 12
18,19,20
23
23
15
23
10 7
4
14
11
8
6 5 3
9
Figure 1-2-3
1. Machine 13. Machine cover

2. Outer case 14. Document tray
3. Inner case 15. Power cord
4. Top pad 16. Plastic bag
5. Skid 17. Paper size plates
6. Bottom sheet 18. Paper media plates
7. Bottom pad 19. Operation panel sheets
8. Bottom front left pad 20. Operation guide etc.
9. Bottom front right pad 21. Eject spacer
10. Bottom rear left pad 22. Barcode label
11. Bottom rear right pad 23. Hinge joints
12. Rear pad
Place the machine on a level surface.

2LL/2LJ/2LH-1
Removing the eject spacer
1. Remove the eject spacer and silica gel

from the eject section.
Eject spacer
Silica gel
Figure 1-2-4
Removing the tapes
1. Remove the tape and then remove the Tape A3 papers

ISU lock leaflet. Tape
2. Remove three tapes and then remove Tape
two A3 papers. ISU lock
3. Remove seven tapes and then remove leaflet Tape
three protect sheets.
Tapes
Protect sheet
Tape
Tapes
Protect sheet
Tape
Tape
Protect sheet
Figure 1-2-5

2LL/2LJ/2LH
4. Remove eight tapes.

Tape Tape
Tape
Tape
Tapes
Tapes
Figure 1-2-6
Installing the paper feeder (option)
1. Install the optional paper feeder or large

capacity feeder as necessary.
2. Verify levelness at the four corners of
the contact glass using a level gauge,
and adjust the level bolts at the bottom
of the machine to optimize levelness.

2LL/2LJ/2LH-1
Release the lock of the scanner mirror frame
1. Remove the scanner lock cover.

2. Mount the scanner lock cover in the
reverse manner to restore in the original
location.
*: Unless unlocking is performed, C3100 is
caused.
Scanner lock cover
[Locked] [Released]
Figure 1-2-7

2LL/2LJ/2LH
Release of lift plate stopper
1. Pull cassette 1 and 2 out.

2. Remove the lift plate stopper from each
cassette and attach it to the storage
location.
When moving the machine, attach the
lift plate in original position. Lift plate
stopper
Cassette
Figure 1-2-8
Loading paper
1. Squeeze the ends of the bottom of the Paper length guide

paper length guide and move the guide
to fit the length of the paper.
Figure 1-2-9

2LL/2LJ/2LH-1
2. Press the guide lock lever to release

the lock.
3. Grasp the paper width adjusting tab and
move the paper width guides to fit the
paper.
Guide lock lever
Paper width paper width guides

adjusting tab
Figure 1-2-10
4. Align the paper flush against the right Paper

side of the cassette.
*: Before loading the paper, be sure that it is
not curled or folded.
*: Ensure that the loaded paper does not
exceed the level indicated.
*: Make sure that the paper length guide
and the paper width guides are correctly
abut with the paper. Be sure to remove
spaces between the guides and the
paper.
Figure 1-2-11

2LL/2LJ/2LH-3
5. Press the guide lock lever to lock.
Guide lock lever
Figure 1-2-12
6. Insert the paper size plate and the Paper media plate
paper media plate.
7. Gently push the cassette back in. Paper size plate
Figure 1-2-13

2LL/2LJ/2LH
Installing the toner containers
1. Open the front cover.

2. Hold the toner container vertically and
hit the upper part about 5 times. Invert
the toner container so that the other end
is up, and hit in the same way.
3. Shake the toner container in a wide ver-
tical curve like motion about 5 times.
Toner container
Toner container
Figure 1-2-14
4. Install the toner container.

5. Turn down the toner container release
lever to lock the toner container.
Toner container
Toner container
release lever
Figure 1-2-15

2LL/2LJ/2LH-1
Unlocking the developer waste exit
Caution
To ease setup, the device was shipped Tape
with the developer unit already replenished
with developer. Therefore, to prevent
developer from spilling during shipping, a
developer shutter is equipped with the
developer unit.
To disengage the shutter, use the following Set up leaflet
procedure: Note that if the shutter is not
completely disengaged and retained in
place, the developer in the developer unit
may clog at the outlet causing a damage to
the developer unit.
1. Remove the tape and then remove the

set up leaflet.
*: The setup leaflet must be affixed in posi-
tion before dispatching the machine.
2. Press the fixing pin and rotate.
*: Fully insert the fixing pin with keeping the
[Locked] [Released]
protrusions vertical and rotate it by 90
degrees clockwise. Make sure that the 1
protrusions are then horizontal.
2
Fixing pin Fixing pin
Protrusions
Protrusions
Figure 1-2-16

2LL/2LJ/2LH-1
3. Remove a screw and slide the lever

right wards.
4. Fix the lever using the screw previously
removed at the right screw hole and
unlock the developer waste exit.
*: When the device is shipped again or
removed, use the reverse procedure to
lock in the developer waste exit. Failure
to observe this caution could result in
deteriorated print quality and/or C call
(7460).
[Locked] [Released]
2 Lever
Lever
1
Screw Screw
Figure 1-2-17
Replacing operation panel sheet
1. Insert a flat-head screwdriver and slide

the operation panel covers A and B to
remove them.
Operation panel
cover B
Operation panel
cover A
Figure 1-2-18

2LL/2LJ/2LH-1
2. Remove the clear panel.

Clear panel
Figure 1-2-19
3. Remove the operation panel sheet. Operation

4. Replace the operation panel sheet of panel sheet
the corresponding language.
5. Refit the clear panel.
6. Refit the operation panel covers A and
B.
Figure 1-2-20
Installing the original platen or DP (option)
1. Install optional original platen or DP.
Installing other optional devices
1. Install the optional devices (job separa-

tor, document finisher and/or fax kit
etc.) as necessary.

2LL/2LJ/2LH-3
Installing the cassette heater (option)
1. Install the optional cassette heater as necessary (see page 1-2-64).
Connect the power cord
1. Connect the power cord to the power cord connector on rear lower of the machine.
2. Connect the power plug to the wall outlet.
Installing toner
1. Turn the main power switch on. Toner installation is started.

2. The drive chain is disengaged when toner installation is completed.
Run maintenance mode U132 if [Add Toner] remains displayed even after the drive chain is disengaged
(see page 1-3-77).
Adjusting the image
1. Performing calibration
(see the operation guide,U464 Setting the ID correction operation - performing calibration)
Press [Adjustment/Maintenance] and then [Next] of [Calibration].
Press [Execute] to perform calibration. When completed, press [OK].
*: Perform the high alitutude settings when a leakage is developed on images in a high alitude installation,
such as in Mexico City.
U140 - AC Calb - High Altitude - Mode 2
2. Adjusting the halftone automatically (see page 1-3-138)

Load the cassette with multiple sheets of A4 or Letter paper.
Enter the maintenance mode by entering 10871087 using the numeric keys.
Enter 410 using the numeric keys and press the start key.
Press [Normal Mode] and then press the start key. A test patterns 1 and 2 are outputted.
Place the output test pattern 1 as the original.
Place approximately 20 sheets of white paper on the test pattern 1 and set them.
Press the start key. Adjustment is made.
Place the output test pattern 2 as the original.
Press the start key. Adjustment is made.
[Finish] is displayed in [Phase] when normally completed.
Press the stop key twice to exit.

2LL/2LJ/2LH-1
Setting the delivery date (maintenance item U278)
1. Enter the maintenance mode by entering 10871087 using the numeric keys.
2. Enter 278 using the numeric keys and press the start key.
3. Select [Today].
4. Press the start key. The delivery date is set.
5. Press the stop key to exit.
Output an own-status report (maintenance item U000)
1. Enter 000 using the numeric keys and press the start key.
2. Select [Maintenance] and press the start key. A status report is output.
3. Press the stop key to exit.
Exit maintenance mode
1. Enter 001 using the numeric keys and press the start key. The machine exits the maintenance mode.
Print out the user setting list
1. Select [Report Print] to output the user various setting reports.
Make test copies
1. Place an original and make test copies.
Completion of the machine installation

2LL/2LJ/2LH
(2) Setting initial copy modes

Factory settings are as follows:
Maintenance
Contents Factory setting
item No.
U253 Switching between double and single counts DBL(A3/Ledger)
U260 Selecting the timing for copy counting Eject
U285 Setting service status page On
U323 Setting abnormal temperature and humidity warning On
U325 Setting the paper interval Off/1
U326 Setting the black line cleaning indication On/8
U327 Setting the cassette heater control Off
U343 Switching between duplex/simplex copy mode Off

2LL/2LJ/2LH-3
1-2-3 Installing the key counter (option)

(1) Installing directly on the device
Key counter installation requires the following parts:
Parts Quantity Part.No.

Key counter 1 $9*5*
Key counter set 1 $9*5%
Key counter wire 1 $9*58
M4 nut 2
Supplied parts of key counter set ($9*5%):
Parts Quantity
Key counter socket assembly 1
Key counter cover retainer 1
Key counter retainer 1
Key counter cover 1
Key counter mount 1
Edging 2*
Band 1*
M3 x 8 tap-tight P screw 1*
M4 x 10 tap-tight S screw 2*
M3 x 6 bronze flat-head screw 2
M4 x 20 tap-tight S screw 2
M3 nut 1
M3 x 8 bronze binding screw 1*
M4 x 6 chrome TP screw 5
M4 x 10 chrome TP screw 2*
*:Not used in this model.

2LL/2LJ/2LH-3
Procedure
1. Press the power key on the operation M4 x 6 screw Key counter
panel to off. Make sure that the power retainer
indicator and the memory indicator are M4 x 6 screw
off before turning off the main power
switch. And then unplug the power M3 nut
Key counter
cable from the wall outlet. M4 x 6 mount
2. Fit the key counter socket assembly to screw
the key counter retainer using two
screws and nut.
3. Fit the key counter mount to the key
counter cover using two screws.
4. Fit the key counter retainer to the key M4 x 6 screw
counter mount using two screws.
Key counter
M3 x 6 flat-head socket assembly
screws Key counter cover
Figure 1-2-21
Screws
5. Pull the paper conveying unit out.
6. Remove two screws and then remove ISU right
cover
the ISU right cover. Right upper cover
7. Remove the screw and five hooks and
then remove the right upper cover.
Screw
Right
upper cover
Hooks
Hook
Hook
Figure 1-2-22

2LL/2LJ/2LH
8. Cut out the aperture plate on the right

upper cover using nippers.
Aperture
Right upper cover
Figure 1-2-23
9. Remove seven screws and then

remove the rear upper cover. Rear upper
cover
Screws
Screws
Screws
Screw
Figure 1-2-24

2LL/2LJ/2LH
10. Open the controller lid.

11. Remove two screws.
12. Unhook six hooks and then remove the
left upper cover.
Left upper
cover
Controller lid Screws
Hooks
Hook
Left upper
cover
Hooks
Figure 1-2-25
13. Release seven wire saddles on the con- Wire holder

troller box. Wire Wire saddles
14. Remove the wire holder. saddles
Controller box
Wire
saddle
Wire
saddle
Figure 1-2-26

2LL/2LJ/2LH-1
15. Remove the following connectors that

connected to the main PWB from the
outside of the control box.
YC25
YC11
YC30
YC24
YC3 (FFC connector with a lock)
YC17 (BK)
YC21 (WH) Controller box
YC12 Main PWB
YC12
YC25 YC17
*: When removing the FFC from the FFC YC21
connector with a lock, remove the FFC YC11

YC30
after released by lifting down the lock
lever
(see figure a).
*: When connecting an FFC furnished with
the protrusions at both ends, address the
side with a blue-colored tape towards the
locking lever, insert the FFC into the con- YC24
nector until the protrusions are recessed,
and raise the lock lever to lock the FFC YC3
(see figure b).
Main PWB FFC connector with a lock
a [State of lock] [Lock release/FFC detaching]

Lock lever 1
Lock lever
2
FFC
b [FFC connection/Lock]
2 Projection
Lock lever
Projection FFC
Figure 1-2-27

2LL/2LJ/2LH-1
16. Remove five screws.

17. Unhook two hooks and then remove the
controller box.
Controller
box Hook
Hook
Screws
Screw Screws
Figure 1-2-28
18. Connect the connector of the key coun-

ter wire to the connector YC24 on the
engine PWB.
Engine PWB
Key counter wire
YC24
Engine PWB
Figure 1-2-29

2LL/2LJ/2LH-1
19. Remove two wire holders.

20. Route the key counter wire through the
wire guide and fix it at the wire holders.
key counter wire
Wire guide
Wire holders
Figure 1-2-30
21. Release three wire saddles.

22. Remove the wire holder. Wire guide
23. Route the key counter wire through the
three wire saddles and wire guide and
Wire saddles
fix it at the wire holder.
24. Refit the controller box.
25. Refit the left upper cover and the rear
upper cover.
Wire saddle
Wire holder
key counter wire
Figure 1-2-31

2LL/2LJ/2LH
26. Mount two M4 nuts at the back of the M4 nuts

right upper cover.
Right upper cover
Figure 1-2-32
27. Insert the projection of the key counter Right upper cover
cover retainer in the aperture of the
right upper cover.
28. Fit the key counter cover retainer using
the two M4 x 20 screws.
Aperture
M4 x 20 screw
Projection
M4 x 20 screw
Key counter
cover retainer
Figure 1-2-33

2LL/2LJ/2LH
29. Pass the connector of the key counter

wire through the aperture in the right
upper cover. Right upper cover
30. Refit the right upper cover. Aperture
31. Refit the ISU right cover.
32. Close the paper conveying unit.
Key counter wire
Figure 1-2-34
33. Connect the key counter signal cable to

the key counter wire.
34. Fit the key counter cover to the Key counter wire
machine using the M4 x 6 screw.
M4 x 6 screw
35. Insert the key counter into the key

counter socket assembly.
36. Turn the main power switch on and
enter the maintenance mode.
37. Run maintenance item U204 and select
[Key-Counter] (see page 1-3-95).
38. Exit the maintenance mode.
39. Check that the message requesting the
key counter to be inserted is displayed
on the touch panel when the key coun-
ter is pulled out. Key counter
40. Check that the counter counts up as cover
copies are made.
Key counter
wire
Key counter
signal cable
Figure 1-2-35

2LL/2LJ/2LH-2
(2) Mounting on the document table
Key counter installation requires the following parts:

Key counter 1 $9*5*
Key counter set 1 $9*5%
Key counter wire 1 $9*58
Document table 1
Supplied parts of key counter set ($9*5%):
Parts Quantity
Key counter socket assembly 1
Key counter cover retainer 1
Key counter retainer 1
Key counter cover 1
Key counter mount 1
Edging 2*
Band 1*
M3 x 6 bronze flat-head screw 2
M3 nut 1
M3 x 8 bronze binding screw 1*
M4 x 6 chrome TP screw 5
M4 x 10 chrome TP screw 2*
*:Not used in this model.

2LL/2LJ/2LH-2
Supplied parts of document tablet :
Parts Quantity
Tray stay 1
Tray mount 1
Tray cover 1
Tray lower cover 1
Tray retainer 1
Sheet 2*
Pin 2
M4 nut 2
M4 x 8 screw 7
M4 x 14 screw 2
*: Sheet x1 is not used.

2LL/2LJ/2LH
Procedure
1. Perform steps 1 through 25 as
explained in (1) Installing directly on the M4 nut M4 nut
device.
2. Mount two M4 nuts at the back of the

right upper cover.
3. Fit the tray stay to the right upper cover
using two M4 x 14 screws.
Right upper cover
M4 nut
M4 nut
Tray stay
M4 x 14 screw
Right upper cover

M4 x 14 screw
*: Secure the screws making sure that the

M4 x 14 screw
nuts do not fall.
M4 nut
Figure 1-2-36

2LL/2LJ/2LH
4. Fit the tray retainer to the machine

Tray retainer
using the M4 x 8 screw.
*: The procedure described above is not
required if an optional right job separator
has been installed.
M4 x 8 screw
M4 x 8 screw
Tray retainer
Figure 1-2-37
5. Pass the connector of the key counter Right upper cover

wire through the aperture in the right
upper cover.
6. Refit the right upper cover.
7. Refit the ISU right cover.
8. Close the paper conveying unit.
Screw
Aperture
Key counter wire
Figure 1-2-38

2LL/2LJ/2LH
9. Snap in the tray mount to the tray stay M4 x 8 screw

and fix using two M4 x 8 screws. M4 x 8 screw
Tray mount
Tray stay
Figure 1-2-39

2LL/2LJ/2LH
10. Cut out the aperture plate on the tray

cover using nippers.
Tray cover
11. Fit the tray cover to the tray stay using
four M4 x 8 screws. Aperture
M4 x 8 screws
M4 x 8 screws
Tray cover
Figure 1-2-40
12. Fit the key counter cover retainer using M4 x 20

two M4 x 20 tap-tight S screws. tap-tight S M4 x 20
screw tap-tight S
screw
Key counter
cover retainer
Figure 1-2-41

2LL/2LJ/2LH
13. Pass the key counter signal cable

through the aperture in the document
table. M4 x 6 screw Key counter
14. Fit the key counter cover to the docu- cover
ment table using the M4 x 6 screw.
15. Connect the key counter signal cable to
the key counter wire.
Key counter
signal cable
Aperture
Key counter
signal cable
Key counter wire
Figure 1-2-42

2LL/2LJ/2LH
16. Fit the tray lower cover.

Install the key counter signal cable and
key counter wire so that they are held
behind the tray lower cover.
Tray lower cover
Connector
Figure 1-2-43

2LL/2LJ/2LH
17. Secure the tray lower cover with two

pins.
Tray lower cover
Pin
Pin
Figure 1-2-44
18. Adhere the sheet onto right side of the Sheet

document table.
19. Insert the key counter into the key

counter socket assembly.
20. Turn the main power switch on and
enter the maintenance mode.
21. Run maintenance item U204 and select Document table
[Key-Counter] (see page 1-3-95).
22. Exit the maintenance mode.
23. Check that the message requesting the
key counter to be inserted is displayed
on the touch panel when the key coun-
ter is pulled out.
24. Check that the counter counts up as
copies are made.
Figure 1-2-45

2LL/2LJ/2LH
1-2-4 Installing the cassette heater (option)
Cassette heater installation requires the following parts:
Cassette heater set (240V) 1 $9*57
Supplied parts of cassette heater set ($9*57):
Parts Quantity
Cassette heater (240V) 1
Wire saddle 3

2LL/2LJ/2LH-3
Procedure
1. Press the power key on the operation
panel to off. Make sure that the power
indicator and the memory indicator are
switch. And then unplug the power
cable from the wall outlet.
2. Pull the cassette 1 forward.
3. Draw out Cassette 1 by releasing the
release lever. Cassette slider 1
Cassette 1
Release lever
Cassette slider 2
Figure 1-2-46
4. Pull the cassette 2 forward.

5. Draw out Cassette 2 by releasing the
release lever.
Cassette slider 1
Cassette 2
Release lever
Cassette slider 2
Figure 1-2-47

2LL/2LJ/2LH
6. Fit three wire saddles on the bottom

frame of the machine.
7. Fit the cassette heater using two M3 x 8
screws.
Wire saddle
Wire saddle
Screw
Wire saddle
Screw
Cassette heater
Figure 1-2-48

2LL/2LJ/2LH-3
8. Connect the connector of the cassette

heater to the connector in the rear
frame of the machine.
9. Pass the wire of the cassette heater
through three wire saddles and then
fasten the wire.
Wire saddle
Wire saddles
Cassette heater
Connector
Figure 1-2-49
10. To install Cassette 1 and Cassette 2,

align the cassette slider 2 and cassette
slider 1 with each other.
Cassette 1, 2
11. Push the cassette in fully.
Cassette slider 2
Cassette slider 1
Figure 1-2-50

2LL/2LJ/2LH-1
1-2-5 Installing the gigabit ethernet board (option)
Gigabit ethernet board installation requires the following parts:

Gigabit ethernet board 1 -
Procedure
indicator and the memory indicator are Slot cover
cable from the wall outlet. Pin
3. Remove two pins and then remove the
slot cover of the OPT2.
OPT2
Pin
Controller lid
Figure 1-2-51

2LL/2LJ/2LH-1
4. Insert the gigabit ethernet board along

the groove in OPT2 and secure the
board with two pins that have been
removed in step 3. Gigabit
*: Do not directly touch the gigabit ethernet ethernet board
board terminal.
Hold the top and bottom of the gigabit
ethernet board, or the projection of the Pin
board to insert the gigabit ethernet board.
Pin
Groove
Figure 1-2-52
5. Plug the modular connector cable into

the line terminal, Controller lid
6. Close the controller lid.
Modular
connector cable
Figure 1-2-53

2LL/2LJ/2LH-1
1-2-6 Installing the IC card reader holder (option)
IC card reader holder installation requires the following parts:

IC card reader holder 1 B4714 (option)
Supplied parts of IC card reader holder (B4714):

Card reader case 1 -
Card reader base 1 -
Card reader mount 1 -
Card reader tray 1 -
USB Wire (For extension) 1 -
Pin 3 303NS24410
Clamp 6 7YZM690002++H01
The card reader base, card reader mount, and the pin are packaged as an assembled kit.
Procedure
off before turning off the main power Card reader
switch. And then unplug the power base
2. Remove the pin of the card reader base
Card reader
and then remove the card reader mount
mount.
Pin
Figure 1-2-54

2LL/2LJ/2LH-1
3. Remove the cover next to the operation

panel using a flat-blade screwdriver.
4. Fit the card reader mount to the
machine using two pins. Cover
Card reader mount

Pins
Figure 1-2-55
5. Refit the card reader base to card

reader mount using the pin removed in
step 2.
Card reader mount
Card reader
base
Pin
Figure 1-2-56

2LL/2LJ/2LH-1
6. Fit the card reader tray to the card

reader base.
Choose the direction of mounting the IC A
card reader according to the depth of
the reader. Card reader
A
10mm to 22mm: Face the mark A tray
upwards.
Less than 10mm: Face the mark B
upwards.
Card reader
base
B B
Card reader
tray
Card reader
base
Figure 1-2-57
7. Route the USB wire of the IC card

reader through the aperture of the card IC card reader
reader base and mount the IC card
reader on the card reader base.
Aperture
USB wire
Figure 1-2-58

2LL/2LJ/2LH-1
8. Hook the two hooks of the card reader

case to fit the card reader case to the
card reader base.
Press its top until it clicks in.
Card reader
case
Hooks
A
A
Figure 1-2-59
9. Fit six clamps.

Right side: three
Rear side: three
Clamps
Clamps
Figure 1-2-60

2LL/2LJ/2LH-1
10. Cut out the breakaway cover on the

controller lid using nippers.
Controller lid
Breakaway cover
Figure 1-2-61
11. Pass the USB wire of the IC card reader

through six clamps and then fasten the
wire.
12. Connect the USB wire to the machine.
If the length does not suffice, use the
USB wire supplied.
Clamps
Clamps
USB wire
USB wire
Figure 1-2-62

2LL/2LJ/2LH-1
Enabling IC Card Authentication
Precautions
To install the optional function, you need the License Key. Please access the designated website of your
dealer or service representative, and register Machine No. indicated on your machine and Product ID indi-
cated on the License Certificate supplied with the product to issue the License Key.
1. Turn the main power switch on.

2. Press the System Menu key and then press [System].
If user login administration is disabled, the user authentication screen appears.
Enter your login user name and password and then press [Login]. For this, you need to log in with admin-
istrator privileges.
3. Press [Next] of Optional Function.
4. Select CARD AUTHENTICATION KIT(B) and press [Activate].
5. The License Key entry screen is displayed.
Enter the License Key using the numeric keys and press [Official].
6. Confirm the product name CARD AUTHENTICATION KIT(B) and press [Yes].
7. To use a SSFC card, run maintenance mode U222 and set SSFC.

2LL/2LJ/2LH-2
1-2-7 Installing the keyboard holder (option)
Keyboard holder installation requires the following parts:

Keyboard holder 1 -
Supplied parts of keyboard holder:
Parts Quantity
Upper keyboard holder 1
Lower keyboard holder 1
Keyboard cover 1
Velcro A 2
Velcro B 2
Film 1*1
M4 x 8 tap-tight P screw 3
M3 x 8 tap-tight S screw 2*1
*1: Not used in this model.

*2: Clamp x1 is not used.
Procedure
1. Press the power key on the operation Staple cover
2. Remove the staple holder and then
remove two screws.
Screws
Figure 1-2-63

2LL/2LJ/2LH-1
3. Fit the lower keyboard mount to the

machine using two screws removed in
step 2.
Lower keyboard
Screws mount
Figure 1-2-64
4. Fit the upper keyboard mount to the M4 x 8 tap-tight

lower keyboard mount using two M4 x 8 S screw M4 x 8 tap-tight
tap-tight S screws. S screw
Upper
keyboard
mount
Figure 1-2-65

2LL/2LJ/2LH-1
5. Latch the keyboard cover with the

upper keyboard mount by the five Hooks Upper keyboard
hooks. Hook mount
6. Fit the keyboard cover to the upper key-
board mount using three M4 x 8 tap-
tight P screws.
Hooks
Keyboard
cover
M4 x 8 tap-tight
M4 x 8 P screw
tap-tight
P screw
M4 x 8 tap-tight
P screw
Figure 1-2-66

2LL/2LJ/2LH-1
7. Adhere two Velcro tapes onto the upper Velcro tape

keyboard mount. Velcro tape
Upper keyboard
mount
Figure 1-2-67
8. Adhere two Velcro tapes onto back side Velcro tape

of the keyboard. Velcro tape
Keyboard (back side)
Figure 1-2-68

2LL/2LJ/2LH-1
9. Align the Velcro tapes with each other,

mount the keyboard onto the upper key- Keyboard
board mount.
Upper keyboard
mount
Figure 1-2-69
10. Fit the spaple cover.
Staple cover
Figure 1-2-70

2LL/2LJ/2LH-1
11. Cut out the breakaway cover on the

controller lid using nippers.
Controller lid
Breakaway cover
Figure 1-2-71
12. Fit five clamps.

Left side: three
Rear side: two
Clamps Clamps
Figure 1-2-72

2LL/2LJ/2LH-1
13. Pass the USB wire of the keyboard

through five clamps and then fasten the
wire.
14. Connect the USB wire to the machine.
Clamps Clamps
USB wire
Figure 1-2-73

2LL/2LJ/2LH
1-3-1 Maintenance mode

1-3 Maintenance Mode
The machine is equipped with a maintenance function which can be used to maintain and service the
machine.
(1) Executing a maintenance item
Start
Enter 10871087 using

Maintenance mode is entered.
the numeric keys.
Enter the maintenance item

number using the cursor up/down keys The maintenance item is selected.
or numeric keys.
Press the start key.
The selected maintenance item is run.
Press the stop key.
Yes Repeat the same

maintenance item?
No
Yes
Run another maintenance
item?
No
Enter 001 using the cursor
up/down keys or numeric keys Maintenance mode is exited.
and press the start key.
End

2LL/2LJ/2LH-1
(2) Maintenance modes item list
Item Initial setting

Section Content of maintenance item
No. 35ppm 45ppm 55ppm
General U000 Outputting an own-status report -
U001 Exiting the maintenance mode -
U002 Setting the factory default data -
U003 Setting the service telephone number -
U004 Setting the machine number -
U010 Setting the maintenance mode ID -
U019 Displaying the ROM version -
Initializa- U021 Memory initializing -
tion
U024 HDD formatting -
Drive, U030 Checking the operation of the motors -
paper feed
U031 Checking switches and sensors for paper con- -
and paper veying
conveying
system U032 Checking the operation of the clutches -
U033 Checking the operation of the solenoids -
U034 Adjusting the print start timing
LSU Out Top 0/0/0/0/0/0/0/0/0/0/0/0
LSU Out Left 0/0/0/0/0/0/0
U035 Setting the printing area for folio paper 330/210
U037 Checking the operation of the fan motors -
U039 Adjusting the magnification 0
U051 Adjusting the deflection in the paper 1/1/1/1/1/1/ -5/0/-5/0/ -8/-1/-8/-1/
1/1/1/1/1/1 -5/0/-5/0/ -8/-1/-8/-1/
-5/0/-3/0 -8/-1/-6/-1
U052 Setting the fuser motor control
Set Loop Sensor -
Loop Sensor Control On/On/On/On/On/On
Set Loop Sensor Valid On
U053 Setting the adjustment of the motor speed
Moter1 78 60 49
Moter2 953/-/29 736/33/22 596/27/18
Moter3 18/-30/26/ 13/-24/20/ 10/-20/15/
26/66/35/ 20/120/26/ 15/97/19/
-/-/-/0/0/0/ 72/-10/-10/ 58/-8/-8/0/
0 0/0/0/0 0/0/0
Moter1 Half 0
Moter2 Half 1907/-/56 1473/66/ 1191/54/
44 35

2LL/2LJ/2LH-1

Drive, U053 Moter3 Half 106/0/112/ 82/0/86/ 66/0/70/
paper feed 112/132/ 86/238/ 70/194/
and paper 210/ 164/143/ 133/116/
conveying -/-/- -20/-20 -16/-16
system
U059 Setting fan mode
Fan Mode Mode1
Cooling Mode 0
Optical U061 Checking the operation of the exposure lamp -
U063 Adjusting the shading position 0
U065 Adjusting the scanner magnification 0/0
U066 Adjusting the scanner leading edge registration 0/0
U067 Adjusting the scanner center line 0/0
U068 Adjusting the scanning position for originals 0/0
from the DP
U070 Adjusting the DP magnification 0/0/0/0
U071 Adjusting the DP scanning timing 0/0/0/0
U072 Adjusting the DP center line 0/0/0
U073 Checking the scanner operation -
U074 DP input response adjustment 1
U087 Setting DP reading position modification opera- 125/125/125
tion
U089 Outputting a MIP-PG pattern -
U091 Setting the white line correction 112/75/0
U099 Adjusting original size detection DP is not installed
20/30/40/20/30/40/20/30/40
DP is installed
50/50/50/50/50/50/50/50/50
High U100 Adjusting main high voltage
voltage
Adj AC Bias -
Set AC Auto Adj On
Set DC Bias -
Adj DC Bias 0/0
Set Low Temp 1
Set Charger Freq 9160
Chk Current -

2LL/2LJ/2LH-1

High U106 Setting the voltage for the secondary transfer
voltage
Light/Normal1 1st 150/143/ 174/165/ 146/140/
139 157 134
Light/Normal1 2nd 146/139/ 160/153/ 133/130/
124 135 120
Normal2/3 1st 150/143/ 174/165/ 146/140/
139 157 134
Normal2/3 2nd 146/139/ 160/153/ 133/130/
124 135 120
Heavy1-3 1st Half 122/122/ 130/130/ 116/116/
118 126 114
Heavy1-3 2nd Half 115/115/ 122/122/ 121/121/
105 109 109
Heavy4/5 1st Half 118/118/ 126/126/ 114/114/
110 115 107
Heavy4/5 2nd Half 114/114/ 120/120/ 110/110/
104 108 102
OHP 108/108/ 112/112/ 105/105/
101 104 101
Bias 163/163/ 163/163/ 164/164/
108/100 113/102 117/105
U110 Checking the drum count -
U111 Checking the drum drive time -
U117 Checking the drum number -
U118 Displaying the drum history -
U119 Setting the drum -
U127 Checking/clearing the transfer count -
U128 Setting transfer high-voltage timing -20/-/-13 -18/-/-15 -15/-/-18
Developer U130 Initial setting for the developer -
U131 Adjusting the toner sensor control voltage -
Manual 107 120 128
Mode Auto
U132 Replenishing toner forcibly -
U135 Checking toner motor operation -
U136 Setting toner near end detection 3
U139 Displaying the temperature and humidity outside -
the machine

2LL/2LJ/2LH-3

Developer U140 Displaying developer bias
Sleeve DC 62 62 70
Sleeve AC 159 159 150
Mag DC 148 148 180
Mag AC 101 101 199
Sleeve Freq 4580/5345 4580/5345 4580/5345
Sleeve Duty 63 63 43
Mag Duty 37 37 68
AC Calib
Magnification 12
High Altitude 0 Mode1
U147 Setting for toner applying operation
Timing 35/8 45/8 55/8
Mode Mode1
Upper Limit 2.0
Minimum 10
U148 Setting drum refresh mode 2
U155 Checking sensors for toner -
U156 Setting the toner replenishment level
Supply 512
Empty 100
U157 Checking the developer drive time -
U158 Checking the developer count -
Fuser U161 Setting the fuser control temperature
Warm Up 110/110/ 110/110/ 110/110/
155/150/ 160/155/ 170/165/
155/160 160/160 170/160
Print 160/170/0 165/175/0 175/185/0
U163 Resetting the fuser problem data -
U167 Checking/clearing the fuser count -
U193 Setting the fuser drive control On
U199 Displaying fuser heater temperature -

2LL/2LJ/2LH-1

Operation U200 Turning all LEDs on -
panel and
U201 Initializing the touch panel -
support
equipment U202 Setting the KMAS host monitoring system -
U203 Checking DP operation -
U204 Setting the presence or absence of a key card or Off/Coin Vender
key counter
U206 Setting the presence or absence of a coin
vender
On/Off Config Off
No Coin Action Off
Price 10/10/10/10/
U207 Checking the operation panel keys -
U208 Setting the paper size for the side deck Letter (Inch)/A4 (Metric)
U211 Setting the presence or absence of the job sep- Off
arator
U221 Setting the USB host lock function Off
U222 Setting the IC card type Other
U223 Operation panel lock Unlock
U224 Panel sheet extension -
U234 Setting punch destination Inch (Inch)/Europe Metric (Metric)
U237 Setting finisher stack quantity 0/0
U240 Checking the operation of the finisher -
U241 Checking the operation of the switches of the -
finisher
U243 Checking the operation of the DP motors -
U244 Checking the DP switches -
U245 Checking messages -
U246 Setting the finisher
Finisher 0/0/0/0/0/0/0/0
Booklet 0/0/0/0/0/0/0/0/0
U247 Setting the paper feed device -
U249 Finisher operation test -
Mode U250 Checking/clearing the maintenance cycle -
setting
U251 Checking/clearing the maintenance counter -
U252 Setting the destination -
U253 Switching between double and single counts DBL(A3/Ledger)
U260 Selecting the timing for copy counting Eject

2LL/2LJ/2LH-1

Mode U265 Setting OEM purchaser code -
setting
U271 Setting the page count 2/3
U278 Setting the delivery date -
U285 Setting service status page On
U323 Setting abnormal temperature and humidity On
warning
U325 Setting the paper interval Off/1
U326 Setting the black line cleaning indication On/8
U327 Setting the cassette heater control Off
U332 Setting the size conversion factor 1.0
U340 Setting the applied mode 50/1
U341 Specific paper feed location setting for printing -
function
U343 Switching between duplex/simplex copy mode Off
U345 Setting the value for maintenance due indication 0
Image U402 Adjusting margins of image printing 4.0/3.0/3.0/3.9
processing U403 Adjusting margins for scanning an original on
2.0/2.0/2.0/2.0
the contact glass
U404 Adjusting margins for scanning an original from 3.0/2.5/3.0/4.0/3.0/2.5/3.0/4.0
the DP
U407 Adjusting the leading edge registration for mem- 0
ory image printing
U410 Adjusting the halftone automatically Table1
U411 Adjusting the scanner automatically -
U412 Adjusting the uneven density -
U415 Adjusting the print position automatically -
U425 Setting the target -
U464 Setting the ID correction operation
Permission On
Time Interval 0
Mode Normal
On/Sleep Out On
AP/NE On
Leaving Time 60
Driving Time 300
Timing 0
Target Value 750/330
Calib -

2LL/2LJ/2LH-1

Image U465 Data reference for ID correction -
processing
U470 Setting the JPEG compression ratio
Copy 90/90/90/90
Send 30/40/51/70/90/30/40/51/70/90
30/40/51/70/90/30/40/51/70/90
15/25/90/15/25/90/
15/25/90/15/25/90
System 90/90
U485 Setting the image processing mode 1/0
Others U901 Checking copy counts by paper feed locations -
U903 Checking/clearing the paper jam counts -
U904 Checking/clearing the call for service counts -
U905 Checking counts by optional devices -
U906 Resetting partial operation control -
U908 Checking the total counter value -
U910 Clearing the print coverage data -
U911 Checking copy counts by paper sizes -
U917 Setting backup data reading/writing -
U920 Checking the copy counts -
U927 Clearing the all copy counts and machine life -
counts (one time only)
U928 Checking machine life counts -
U930 Checking/clearing the charger roller count -
U935 Relay board maintenance Mode0
U942 Setting of deflection for feeding from DP 0/0/0
U952 Maintenance mode workflow -
U964 Checking of log -
U969 Checking of toner area code -
U977 Data capture mode -
U984 Checking the developer unit number -
U985 Displaying the developer unit history -
U989 HDD Scan disk -
U990 Checking the time for the exposure lamp to light -
U991 Checking the scanner operation count -

2LL/2LJ/2LH
(3) Contents of the maintenance mode items

Item No. Description
U000 Outputting an own-status report
Description
Outputs lists of the current settings of the maintenance items, and paper jam and service call
occurrences. Outputs the event log or service status page. Also sends output data to the USB
memory.
Purpose
To check the current setting of the maintenance items, or paper jam or service call occurrences.
Before initializing or replacing the backup RAM, output a list of the current settings of the mainte-
nance items to reenter the settings after initialization or replacement.
Method
1. Press the start key.
2. Select the item to be output using the cursor up/down keys.
Display Output list
Maintenance List of the current settings of the maintenance modes
User Status Outputs the user status page
Service Status Outputs the service status page
Event Outputs the event log
Network Status Outputs the network status page
All Outputs the all reports
3. Press the start key. A list is output.

4. Press the start key. The interrupt print mode is entered and a list is output.
When A4/Letter paper is available, a report of this size is output. If not, specify the paper feed
location.
The output status is displayed.
Display Description
Ready List of the current settings of the maintenance modes
Active Outputs the user status page
Complete Outputs the service status page
Error Outputs the event log

2LL/2LJ/2LH

U000 Method: Send to the USB memory
1. Press the power key on the operation panel, and after verifying the main power indicator has
gone off, switch off the main power switch.
2. Insert USB memory in USB memory slot.
4. Enter the maintenance item.
6. Select the item to be send.
7. Select [Text] or [HTML].
Display Output list
Print Outputs the report
USB (Text) Sends output data to the USB memory (text type)
USB (HTML) Sends output data to the USB memory (HTML type)

Output will be sent to the USB memory.
Completion
Press the stop key. The screen for selecting a maintenance item No. is displayed.

2LL/2LJ/2LH

U000 Event log
Event Log
MFP (2) 27/Oct/2010 08:40
(3) (4) (5) (6)
(1) Firmware version 2LH_2000.000.000 2010.10.27 [XXXXXXXX] [XXXXXXXX] [XXXXXXXX] [XXXXXXXX]
(8) Paper Jam Log (12) Counter Log

# Count. Event Descriprions
16 9999999 0501.01.08.01.01
(f) J0000: 0 J0041: 1 (g) C0000: 0 (h) T00: 10
J0001: 1 J0042: 1 C0001: 1 T01: 20
15 8888888 4002.01.08.01.01
J0002: 11 J0043: 1 C0002: 2 T02: 30
14 7777777 0501.01.08.01.01
J0003: 222 J0044: 1 C0003: 3 T03: 40
13 6666666 4002.01.08.01.01
J0004: 1 J0045: 1 C0004: 4 T04: 50
12 5555555 0501.01.08.01.01
J0005: 1 J0046: 1 C0005: 5 T05: 999
11 4444444 4002.01.08.01.01
J0006: 1 J0047: 1 C0006: 6
10 3333333 0501.01.08.01.01
J0007: 1 J0048: 1 C0007: 7
9 2222222 4002.01.08.01.01
J0008: 1 J0049: 1 C0008: 8
8 1111111 0501.01.08.01.01
J0009: 1 J0050: 1 C0009: 9
7 999999 4002.01.08.01.01
J0010: 1 C0010: 10
6 888888 0501.01.08.01.01
J0012: 999 C0011: 11
5
4 0501.01.08.01.01
777777
666666
4002.01.08.01.01
0501.01.08.01.01
J0013: 1 C0012: 12
(a) (b) (c) (d) (e) J0014: 1 C0013: 13
3 555555 4002.01.08.01.01
J0015: 1 C0014: 14
2 444444 0501.01.08.01.01
J0016: 1 C0015: 15
1 1 4002.01.08.01.01
J0017: 1 C0016: 16
J0018: 1 C0017: 17
(9) Service Call Log J0019: 1 C0018: 18
# Count. Service Code J0020: 1 C0019: 19
8 1111111 01.6000 J0021: 1 C0020: 20
7 999999 01.2100 J0022: 1 C0021: 21
6 888888 01.4000 J0023: 1 C0022: 22
5 777777 01.6000 J0024: 1 C0023: 23
4 666666 01.2100 J0025: 1
3 555555 01.4000 J0026: 1
2 444444 01.6000 J0027: 1
1 1 01.2100 J0028: 1
J0029: 1
(10) Maintenance Log J0030: 1
# Count. Item. J0031: 1
J0032: 1
Log Data Nothing... J0033: 1
J0034: 1
J0035: 1
(11) Unknown toner Log
J0036: 1
# Count. Item.
J0037: 1
5 1111111 01.00
J0038: 1
4 999999 01.00
J0039: 1
3 888888 01.00
J0040: 1
2 777777 01.00
1 666666 01.00
(7) [XXXXXXXXXXXXXXXX]
Figure 1-3-1
Detail of event log

No. Items Description
(1) System version
(2) System date
(3) Engine soft version
(4) Engine boot version

2LL/2LJ/2LH

U000 Detail of event log
(5) Controller BROM version
(6) Operation panel mask version
(7) Machine serial number
(8) Paper Jam # Count. Event
Log The total page count Log code (hexadeci-
Remembers 1 to 16 of
occurrence. If the occur- at the time of the mal, 5 categories)
rence of the previous paper jam.
paper jam is less than (a) Cause of a paper
16, all of the paper jams jam
are logged. When the (b) Paper source
occurrence excesseds (c) Paper size
16, the oldest occur- (d) Paper type
rence is removed. (e) Paper eject
(a) Cause of paper jam (Hexadecimal)
For details on the case of paper jam, refer to Paper Misfeed Detection.
(P.1-4-1)
(b) Detail of paper source (Hexadecimal)
00: MP tray
01: Cassette 1
02: Cassette 2
03: Cassette 3 (paper feeder/large capacity feeder)
04: Cassette 4 (paper feeder/large capacity feeder)
05: Cassette 5 (side deck)
06 to 09: Reserved
(c) Detail of paper size (Hexadecimal)

00: (Not specified) 0B: B4 22: Special 1
01: Monarch 0C: Ledger 23: Special 2
02: Business 0D: A5R 24: A3 wide
03: International DL 0E: A6 25: Ledger wide
04: International C5 0F: B6 26: Full bleed paper
05: Executive 10: Commercial #9 (12 x 8)
06: Letter-R 11: Commercial #6 27: 8K
86: Letter-E 12: ISO B5 28: 16K-R
07: Legal 13: Custom size A8: 16K-E
08: A4R 1E: C4 32: Statement-R
88: A4E 1F: Postcard B2: Statement-E
09: B5R 20: Reply-paid post- 33: Folio
89: B5E card 34: Western type 2
0A: A3 21: Oficio II 35: Western type 4

2LL/2LJ/2LH-3

U000
(8) Paper Jam (d) Detail of paper type (Hexadecimal)
cont. Log 0A: Color 15: Custom 1
01: Plain
02: Transparency 0B: Prepunched 16: Custom 2
03: Preprinted 0C: Envelope 17: Custom 3
04: Labels 0D: Cardstock 18: Custom 4
05: Bond 0E: Coated 19: Custom 5
06: Recycled 0F: 2nd side 1A: Custom 6
07: Vellum 10: Media 16 1B: Custom 7
08: Rough 11: High quality 1C: Custom 8
09: Letterhead
(e) Detail of paper eject location (Hexadecimal)
01: Face down (FD)
02: Face up (FU)/1000-sheet finisher face up (FU)/
4000-sheet finisher left sub tray (FU)
03: 1000-sheet finisher face down (FD)
4000-sheet finisher main tray (FD)
05: Job separator tray
06: 4000-sheet finisher right sub tray (FU)
07: 4000-sheet finisher left sub tray (FD)
09: 4000-sheet finisher right sub tray (FD)
0A: Center-folding unit tray
0B: Mailbox tray 1 (FD)
0C: Mailbox tray 1 (FU)
0F: 100-sheets Inner Job separator tray (FD)
15: Mailbox tray 2 (FD)
16: Mailbox tray 2 (FU)
1F: Mailbox tray 3 (FD)
2A: Mailbox tray 4 (FU)
3D: Mailbox tray 6 (FD)
3E: Mailbox tray 6 (FU)
04/0D/0E: Reserved

2LL/2LJ/2LH

U000
(9) Service Call # Count. Service Code
Log The total page Self diagnostic error code
Remembers 1 to 8
of occurrence of self count at the time of (See page 1-4-2)
diagnostics error. If the self diagnostics
the occurrence of error. Example:
the previous diag- 01.6000
nostics error is less
than 8, all of the 01: Self diagnostic error
diagnostics errors 6000: Self diagnostic error
are logged. code number
(10) Maintenance # Count. Item

Log The total page Code of maintenance
Remembers 1 to 8
of occurrence of count at the time of replacing item
replacement. If the the replacement of (1 byte, 2 categories)
occurrence of the the toner container.
previous replace- First byte (Replacing item)
ment of toner con- 01: Toner container
tainer is less than 8, Second byte
all of the occur- (Type of replacing item)
rences of replace- 00: Black
ment are logged.
First byte (Replacing item)
02: Maintenance kit
Second byte
(Type of replacing item)
01: MK-6305A/
(11) Unknown # Count. Item

Toner Log The total page Unknown toner log code
Remembers 1 to 5
of occurrence of count at the time of (1 byte, 2 categories)
unknown toner the toner empty
detection. If the error with using an First byte
occurrence of the unknown toner 01: Toner container (Fixed)
previous unknown container. Second byte
toner detection is 00: Black
less than 5, all of the
unknown toner
detection are
logged.

2LL/2LJ/2LH-1

U000
(12) Counter Log (f) Paper jam (g) Self diagnostic (h) Maintenance item
error replacing
Comprised of
Indicates the log Indicates the log Indicates the log coun-
three log coun- counter of paper counter of self diag- ter depending on the
ters including jams depending on nostics errors maintenance item for
paper jams, self
location. depending on maintenance.
diagnostics cause.
errors, and Refer to Paper Jam T: Toner container
replacement of
Log. Example: 00: Black
the toner con- C6000: 4 M: Maintenance kit
tainer. All instances includ- 00: MK-6305A
ing those are not Self diagnostics
occurred are dis- error 6000 has hap- Example:
played. pened four times. T00: 1
The toner container has
been replaced once.

2LL/2LJ/2LH-1

U000 Service status page (1)
Service Status Page

MFP (2) 27/10/2010 12:00
(3) (4) (5)
(1) Firmware version 2LH_2000.000.000 2010.10.27 [XXXXXXXX] [XXXXXXXX] [XXXXXXXX]
Controller Information (30) FAX Information Slot1/Slot2

(31) Rings (Normal) 3
Memory status
(32) Rings (FAX/TEL) 3
(7) Total Size 2.0 GB
(33) Rings (TAD) 3
(34) Option DIMM Size 16 MB
Time
(8) Local Time Zone +01:00 Amsterdam
(9) Date and Time 27/10/2010 12:00 (35) FRPO Status
(10) Time Server 10.183.53.13 Default Pattern Switch B8 0
Default Font Number C5*1000+C2*100+C3 00000
Installed Options .
(11) Document Processor Installed .
(12) Paper feeder Cassette (500 x 2) .
(13) Side feeder Not Installed .
(14) Finisher 1000-Finisher .
(15) Job Separator Installed .
(16) Document Guaed (A) Installed .
(17) Card Authentication Kit (B) Installed .
(18) Internet FAX Kit (A) Installed .
(19) Security Kit (E) Installed .
Data Security Kit (E) Software Type I .
(20) UG-34 Installed .
(21) USB Keyboard Connected .
(22) USB Keyboard Type US-English .
.
.
Print Coverage
(23) Average(%) .
/ Usage Page(A4/Letter Conversion)
(24) Total .
.
K: 1.10 / 1111111.11
.
(25) Copy
.
K: 1.10 / 1111111.11
.
(26) Printer
K: 1.10 / 1111111.11
(27) FAX e-MPS error control Y6 0
K: 1.10 / 1111111.11
(28) Period (27/10/2010 - 03/11/2010 08:40)
RP Code
(29) Last Page K/C/M/Y(%) 1.00 / 2.22 / 3.33 / 4.44
(36) 1234 5678 9012
(37) 5678 9012 3456
(38) 9012 3456 7890
(39) 3456 7890 1234
1 (6) [XXXXXXXXXXXXXXXX]
Figure 1-3-2

2LL/2LJ/2LH-1

U000 Service status page (2)
Service Status Page

MFP 27/10/2010 12:00
Firmware version 2LH_2000.000.000 2010.10.27 [XXXXXXXX] [XXXXXXXX] [XXXXXXXX]
Engine Information Send Information

(40) NVRAM Version _1F31225_1F31225 (44) Date and Time 10/10/27
(41) Scanner Version 2LH_1200.001.089 (45) Address
(42) FAX Slot1
FAX BOOT Version 5JT_5000.001.001
FAX APL Version 5JT_5100.001.001
FAX IPL Version 5JT_5200.001.001
(43) MAC Address 00:C0:EE:D0:01:0D
1/2 (46) (47)

(48) 100/100
(49) 0/0/0/0/0/0/0/0
(50) 0000000/0000000/0000000/0000000/0000000/0000000/0000000/0000000/
0000000/0000000/0000000/0000000/
F00/U00/0/0/0/30/30/70/70/abcde/1/0/1/ (51) (52) (53) (54) (55) (56) (57) (58) (59) (60) (61)
(62) 0000/0000/0000/0000/0000/0000/0000/0000/0000/0000/0000/0000/0000/0000/0000/
0000/0000/0000/0000/0000/0000/0000/0000/0000/0000/
00000000000000000000000000000000/0000000000000000000000000000000000000000/000000/ (63) (64) (65)
(66) 0000000000000000/0000000000000000/0000000000000000/0000000000000000/0000000000000000/0000000000000000/000000000000/
0000000000000000/0000000000000000/0000000000000000/0000000000000000/0000000000000000/0000000000000000/000000000000/
0000000000000000/0000000000000000/0000000000000000/0000000000000000/0000000000000000/0000000000000000/000000000000/
0000000000000000/0000000000000000/0000000000000000/0000000000000000/0000000000000000/0000000000000000/000000000000/
(67) 0000000000000000/0000000000000000/0000000000000000/0000000000000000/0000000000000000/0000000000000000/000000000000/
0000000000000000/0000000000000000/0000000000000000/0000000000000000/0000000000000000/0000000000000000/000000000000/
0000000000000000/0000000000000000/0000000000000000/0000000000000000/0000000000000000/0000000000000000/000000000000/
0000000000000000/0000000000000000/0000000000000000/0000000000000000/0000000000000000/0000000000000000/000000000000/
(68) 0000000000000000/0000000000000000/0000000000000000/0000000000000000/0000000000000000/0000000000000000/000000000000/
0000000000000000/0000000000000000/0000000000000000/0000000000000000/0000000000000000/0000000000000000/000000000000/
(69) 0000000000000000/0000000000000000/0000000000000000/0000000000000000/0000000000000000/0000000000000000/000000000000/
0000000000000000/0000000000000000/0000000000000000/0000000000000000/0000000000000000/0000000000000000/000000000000/
0000000000000000/0000000000000000/0000000000000000/0000000000000000/0000000000000000/0000000000000000/000000000000/
0000000000000000/0000000000000000/0000000000000000/0000000000000000/0000000000000000/0000000000000000/000000000000/
(70) 0000000000000000/0000000000000000/0000000000000000/0000000000000000/0000000000000000/0000000000000000/000000000000/
0000000000000000/0000000000000000/0000000000000000/0000000000000000/0000000000000000/0000000000000000/000000000000/
0000000000000000/0000000000000000/0000000000000000/0000000000000000/0000000000000000/0000000000000000/000000000000/
0000000000000000/0000000000000000/0000000000000000/0000000000000000/0000000000000000/0000000000000000/000000000000/
(71) 0000000000000000/0000000000000000/0000000000000000/0000000000000000/0000000000000000/0000000000000000/000000000000/
(72) 12345678/11223344/00001234abcd567800001234abcd5678/01234567890123456789012345678901/0008/00/07
(73) XXXXXXXX
(74) 00070107FE/0700FE00FE/00FE000100/0000000000/0000000000/0000000000/00000A010A/0A0A0A3200/0000000000/0000000000/
0008000000/080000001D/0096009B00/9B009BFFFB/0082000000/000000001F/0000002C00/0000000000/0000000000/0000000000/
0000000000/0000000000/0000000000/
0/3/ (75) (76)
1/1/1/0/1/0/ 2010/12/15 12:34:56 (77)
1/5/ (78) (79)
ABCDEFGHIJKL/ABCDEFGHIJKL/ABCDEFGHIJKL/ABCDEFGHIJKL/ (80)
2 [XXXXXXXXXXXXXXXX]
Figure 1-3-3

2LL/2LJ/2LH-1

U000 Detail of service status page
No. Description Supplement
(1) Firmware version -
(2) System date -
(3) Engine soft version -
(4) Engine boot version -
(5) Operation panel mask version -
(6) Machine serial number -
(7) Total memory size -
(8) Local time zone -
(9) Report output date Day/Month/Year hour:minute
(10) NTP server name -
(11) Presence or absence of the Installed/Not installed
document processor
(12) Presence or absence of the Paper feeder/Large capacity feeder/Not Installed
paper feeder
(13) Presence or absence of the side Side deck/Side multi tray/Side paper feeder/
feeder Side large capacity feeder/Not Installed
(14) Presence or absence of the 1000-sheet finisher/4000-sheet finisher/
finisher Not Installed
(15) Presence or absence of the Installed/Not Installed
job separator
printed document guard kit
(17) Presence or absence of the IC Installed/Not Installed/Trial
card authentication kit
internet fax kit
data security kit
UG-34
(21) Presence or absence of the Connected/Not connected
USB keyboard
(22) USB keyboard setting display US-English/US-English with Euro
(23) Page of relation to the A4/Letter -
(24) Average coverage for total -
(25) Average coverage for copy -
(26) Average coverage for printer -
(27) Average coverage for fax -

2LL/2LJ/2LH-1

U000
(28) Cleared date and output date -
(29) Coverage on the final output -
page
(30) Fax kit information This item is printed only when the fax kit is
installed.
(31) Number of rings 0 to 15
(32) Number of rings before auto- 0 to 15
matic switching
(33) Number of rings before connect- 0 to 15
ing to answering machine
(34) Optional DIMM size -
(35) FRPO setting -
(36) RP code Code the engine software version and the date of
update.
(37) RP code Code the main software version and the date of
update.
(38) RP code Code the engine software version and the date of
the previous update.
(39) RP code Code the main software version and the date of the
previous update.
(40) NV RAM version _ 1F3 1225 _ 1F3 1225
(a) (b) (c) (d) (e) (f)
(a) Consistency of the present software version

and the database
_ (underscore): OK
* (Asterisk): NG
(b) Database version
(c) The oldest time stamp of database version
(d) Consistency of the present software version
and the ME firmware version
_ (underscore): OK
* (Asterisk): NG
(e) ME firmware version
(f) The oldest time stamp of the ME database ver-
sion
Normal if (a) and (d) are underscored, and (b) and
(e) are identical with (c) and (f).
(41) Scanner firmware version -
(42) Fax firmware version This item is printed only when the fax kit is
installed.
(43) Mac address -

2LL/2LJ/2LH-1

U000
(44) The last sent date and time -
(45) Transmission address -
(46) Destination information -
(47) Area information -
(48) Margin settings Top margin/Left margin
(49) Margin/Page length/Page width Top margin integer part/Top margin decimal part/
settings Left margin integer part/Left margin decimal part/
Page length integer part/Page length decimal part/
Page width integer part/Page width decimal part
Life counter (The first line) Machine life/MP tray/Cassette 1/Cassette 2/
Cassette 3/Cassette 4/Cassette 5/Duplex
(50) Life counter (The second line) Drum unit/Transfer belt unit/Developer unit/
Maintenance kit A
(51) Panel lock information 0: Off/1: Partial lock/2: Full lock
(52) USB information U00: Not installed/U01: Full speed/U02: Hi speed
(53) Paper handling information 0: Paper source unit select/1: Paper source unit
(54) Black and white printing double 0: All single counts
count mode 1: A3, Single count, Less than 420 mm (length)
2: Legal, Single count, 356 mm or less (length)
3: Folio, Single count, Less than 330 mm (length)
(55) Billing counting timing -
(56) Temperature (machine outside) -
(57) Relative Humidity -
(machine outside)
(58) Fixed assets number -
(59) Job end judgment time-out time -
(60) Job end detection mode -
(61) Prescribe environment reset 0: Off
1: On
(62) Media type attributes Weight settings Fuser settings
1 to 28 (Not used: 18, 19, 20) 0: Light 0: High
1: Normal 1 1: Middle
2: Normal 2 2: Low
3: Normal 3 3: Vellum
4: Heavy 1 Duplex settings
5: Heavy 2 0: Disable
6: Heavy 3 1: Enable
7: Extra Heavy

2LL/2LJ/2LH-1

U000
(63) Calibration information -
(72) RFID information -
(73) RFID reader/writer version infor- -
mation
(74) Maintenance information -
(75) Altitude 0: Standard
1: High altitude 1
2: High altitude 2
(76) Charger roller correction 1 to 5
(77) Data Sanitization information -
(78) Toner low setting 0: Enabled
1: Disabled
(79) Toner low detection level 0 to 100 (%)
(80) Drum serial number -
Code conversion
A B C D E F G H I J
0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9

2LL/2LJ/2LH

U001 Exiting the maintenance mode
Description
Exits the maintenance mode and returns to the normal copy mode.
Purpose
To exit the maintenance mode.
Method
1. Press the start key. The normal copy mode is entered.
U002 Setting the factory default data
Description
Restores the machine conditions to the factory default settings.
Purpose
To move the mirror frame of the scanner to the position for transport.
Method
2. Select [Mode1(All)].
The mirror frame of the scanner returns to the home position.
4. Turn the main power switch off and on. Allow more than 5 seconds between Off and On.
* : An error code is displayed in case of an initialization error.
When errors occurred, turn main power switch off then on, and execute initialization using
maintenance item U002.
Error codes
Codes Description
0001 Entity error
0002 Controller error
0003 OS error
0020 Engine error
0040 Scanner error

2LL/2LJ/2LH

U003 Setting the service telephone number
Description
Sets the telephone number to be displayed when a service call code is detected.
Purpose
To set the telephone number to call service when installing the machine.
Setting
The keys to enter the number are displayed on the touch panel.
2. Enter a telephone number (up to 15 digits).
3. Press the start key. The setting is set.
Completion
U004 Setting the machine number
Description
Sets or displays the machine number.
Purpose
To check or set the machine number.
Method
If the machine serial number of engine PWB matches with that of main PWB
Display Description
Machine No. Displays the machine serial number
If the machine serial number of engine PWB does not match with that of main PWB
Display Description
Machine No.(Main) Displays the machine serial number of main
Machine No.(Eng) Displays the machine serial number of engine
Setting
Carry out if the machine serial number does not match.
1. Select [Execute].
2. Press the start key. Writing of serial No. starts.
Completion

2LL/2LJ/2LH

U010 Setting the maintenance mode ID
Description
Sets the maintenance mode ID.
Purpose
Modify maintenance mode ID for more security.
Method
Display Description
New ID Enter a new 8-digit ID
New ID(Reconfirm) Enter a new 8-digit ID (to confirm)
Initialize Initialize the ID
Setting
1. Select [New ID].
2. Enter a new 8-digit ID on ten keys (0 9, *, #). * and # are mandatory to contain.
3. Select [New ID(Reconfirm)].
4. Enter a new 8-digit ID on ten keys (0 9, *, #).
Method: [Initialize]
1. Select [Initialize].
2. Press the start key. ID is initialized.
Completion

2LL/2LJ/2LH-1

U019 Displaying the ROM version
Description
Displays the part number of the ROM fitted to each PWB.
Purpose
To check the part number or to decide, if the newest version of ROM is installed.
Method
1. Press the start key. The ROM version are displayed.
2. Change the screen using the cursor up/down keys.
Display Description
Main Main ROM
MMI Operation ROM
Browser Browser ROM
Engine Engine ROM
Engine Boot Engine booting
Scanner Scanner ROM
Scanner Boot Scanner booting
RFID RFID ROM
Dictionary -
Option Language Optional language ROM
PDF1.7 Resource PDF1.7 resource ROM
Solution Framework Framework ROM
FMU FMU ROM
Weekly Timer Weekly Timer ROM
DP Document processor ROM
DP Boot Document processor booting
PF1 Paper feeder / Large capacity feeder ROM
PF1 Boot Paper feeder / Large capacity feeder booting
Side PF Side deck ROM
Side PF Boot Side deck booting
DF 1000-sheet finisher / 4000-sheet finisher ROM
DF Boot 1000-sheet finisher / 4000-sheet finisher booting
PH Punch unit ROM
PH Boot Punch unit booting
MT Mailbox ROM
MT Boot Mailbox booting
BF Center-folding unit ROM
BF Boot Center-folding unit booting

2LL/2LJ/2LH-1

U019
Display Description
Fax APL1 Fax APL 1
Fax Boot1 Fax booting 1
Fax IPL1 Fax IPL 1
Fax APL2 Fax APL 2 (dual Fax)
Fax Boot2 Fax booting 2 (dual Fax)
Fax IPL2 Fax IPL 2 (dual Fax)
Completion

2LL/2LJ/2LH

U021 Memory initializing
Description
Initializes all settings, except those pertinent to the type of machine, namely each counter, ser-
vice call history and mode setting. Also initializes backup RAM according to region specification
selected in maintenance item U252 Setting the destination.
Purpose
To return the machine settings to their factory default.
Method
3. Press the start key. All data other than that for adjustments due to variations between
machines is initialized based on the destination setting.
Error codes
Codes Description
0001 Entity error
0020 Engine error
0040 Scanner error

2LL/2LJ/2LH

U024 HDD formatting
Description
Initializes the hard disk.
Purpose
To initialize the hard disk when replacing the hard disk after shipping.
Caution
In addition, the following settings are also initialized by initializing the hard disk.
System menu (user login administration, job accounting, address book, one-touch keys and doc-
ument box etc.), shortcuts and panel programs
When fully formatted, the following pre-installed software are removed.
Option language, PDF1.7 resource, FMU, weekly timer
Method
2. Select the item.
Display Description
Full Full format
Data Data format (the application software are retained)
3. Press [Execute].
4. Press the start key to initialize the hard disk.

2LL/2LJ/2LH-3

U030 Checking the operation of the motors
Description
Drives each motor.
Purpose
To check the operation of each motor.
Method
2. Select the motor to be operated.
3. Press the start key. The operation starts.
Display Description
Feed Paper feed motor (PFM) is turned on
DLP(K) Developer motor (DEVM) is turned on
Fuser Fuser motor (FUM) is turned on
SB(CW) Eject motor (EM) is turned on clockwise
SB(CCW) Eject motor (EM) is turned on counterclockwise
Job Separator JS eject motor (JSEM) is turned on
Inner Job Separator(CW) JS conveying motor (JSCM) is turned on clockwise
Inner Job Separator(CCW) JS conveying motor (JSCM) is turned on counterclock-
wise
Regist* Registration motor (RM) is turned on
Bridge1 BR conveying motor 1 (BRCM1) is turned on
Bridge2 BR conveying motor 2 (BRCM2) is turned on
DU1* Duplex motor 1 (DUM1) is turned on
DU2* Duplex motor 2 (DUM2) is turned on
Mid Roller* Middle motor (RM) is turned on
*: 45 ppm/55 ppm model only

4. To stop operation, press the stop key.
Completion

2LL/2LJ/2LH-3

U031 Checking switches and sensors for paper conveying
Description
Displays the on-off status of each paper detection switch or sensor on the paper path.
Purpose
To check if the switches and sensors for paper conveying operate correctly.
Method
2. Turn each switch or sensor on and off manually to check the status.
When the on-status of a switch or sensor is detected, that switch or sensor is displayed in
reverse.
Display Description
MPT Jam MP feed sensor (MPFS)
Cassette1 Feed Feed sensor 1 (FS1)
Cassette2 Feed Feed sensor 2 (FS2)
Feed2(Feed B) Paper conveying sensor (PCS)
Regist Registration sensor (RS)
Belt Jam Loop sensor (LPS)
Exit Feed Switchback sensor (SBS)
DU1 Duplex sensor 1 (DUS1)
DU2 Duplex sensor 2 (DUS2)
Bridge2 Feed BR conveying sensor 2 (BRCS2)
Bridge Exit BR eject sensor (BRES)
Exit Paper Eject full sensor (EFS)
Fuser Feed Fuser eject sensor (FUES)
Feed1(Mid) Middle sensor (MS)
Exit Job Separator JS eject sensor (JSES)
Inner Job Separator Tray full sensor(JSTFS)
Regist Loop Sensor Regist deflection sensor (RDS)
Completion

2LL/2LJ/2LH-3

U032 Checking the operation of the clutches
Description
Turns each clutch on.
Purpose
To check the operation of each clutch.
Method
2. Select the clutch to be operated.
Display Description
Feed1 Paper feed clutch 1 (PFCL1) is turned on
Feed2 Paper feed clutch 2 (PFCL2) is turned on
Mid Roller *1 Middle clutch (MCL) is turned on
MPT Feed MP paper feed clutch (MPPFCL) is turned on
Regist *1 Registration clutch (RCL) is turned on
Feed Paper conveying clutch (PCCL) is turned on
DU1 *1 Duplex clutch 1 (DUCL1) is turned on
DU2*1 Duplex clutch 2 (DUCL2) is turned on
Assist1 *2 Assist clutch 1 (ASCL1) is turned on
Assist2*2 Assist clutch 2 (ASCL2) is turned on
*1: 35 ppm model only. *2: 45 ppm/55 ppm model only.

Completion

2LL/2LJ/2LH-3

U033 Checking the operation of the solenoids
Description
Turns each solenoid on.
Purpose
To check the operation of each solenoid.
Method
2. Select the solenoid to be operated.z
Display Description
Branch Exit Feedshift solenoid (FSSOL) is turned on
Pick Up1* Pickup solenoid 1,2 (PUSOL1,2) is turned on
Job Separator JS feedshift solenoid (JSFSSOL) is turned on
ID Clean Cleaning solenoid (CLSOL) is turned on
*: 45 ppm/55 ppm model only.

Completion

2LL/2LJ/2LH

U034 Adjusting the print start timing
Description
Adjusts the leading edge registration or center line.
Purpose
Make the adjustment if there is a regular error between the leading edges of the copy image and
original.
Make the adjustment if there is a regular error between the center lines of the copy image and
original.
Method
2. Select the item to be adjusted.
Display Description
LSU Out Top Leading edge registration adjustment
LSU Out Left Center line adjustment
Adjustment: LSU Out Top

1. Press the system menu key.
2. Press the start key to output a test pattern.
Setting Initial Change in
Display Description
range setting value per step
MPT(L) Paper feed from MP tray -3.0 to 3.0 0 0.1 mm
MPT Half(L) Paper feed from MP tray -3.0 to 3.0 0 0.1 mm
Cassette(L) Paper feed from cassette -3.0 to 3.0 0 0.1 mm
Cassette Paper feed from cassette -3.0 to 3.0 0 0.1 mm
Half(L)
Duplex(L) Duplex mode (second) -3.0 to 3.0 0 0.1 mm
Duplex Duplex mode (second) -3.0 to 3.0 0 0.1 mm
Half(L)
MPT(S) Paper feed from MP tray -3.0 to 3.0 0 0.1 mm
MPT Paper feed from MP tray -3.0 to 3.0 0 0.1 mm
Half(S)
Cassette(S) Paper feed from cassette -3.0 to 3.0 0 0.1 mm
Cassette Paper feed from cassette -3.0 to 3.0 0 0.1 mm
Half(S)
Duplex(S) Duplex mode (second) -3.0 to 3.0 0 0.1 mm
Half(S)
(L): When large size paper is used (218 mm or more in width of paper).
(S): When small size paper is used.

2LL/2LJ/2LH-1

U034 5. Change the setting value using the cursor +/- or numeric keys.
For output example 1, increase the value. For output example 2, decrease the value.
Leading edge
registration
(20 1.0 mm)
Correct image Output Output

example 1 example 2
Figure 1-3-4
6. Press the start key. The value is set.
Remark
When changing the setting value of [Large] each item is modified, equal to amount of the value
which is changed adds also the value of [Small] each item and is pulled.
Caution
Check the copy image after the adjustment. If the image is still incorrect, perform the following
adjustments in maintenance mode.
U066 U071
U034 (P.1-3-49) (P.1-3-54)
Adjustment: LSU Out Left

Display Description
MPT Paper feed from MP tray -3.0 to 3.0 0 0.1 mm
Cassette1 Paper feed from cassette 1 -3.0 to 3.0 0 0.1 mm
Cassette2 Paper feed from cassette 2 -3.0 to 3.0 0 0.1 mm
Cassette3 Paper feed from optional cassette 3 -3.0 to 3.0 0 0.1 mm

2LL/2LJ/2LH-1

U034 5. Change the setting value using the +/- keys or numeric keys.
Center line of printing

(within 2.0 mm)
Correct image Output Output

example 1 example 2
Figure 1-3-5
Caution
Check the copy image after the adjustment. If the image is still incorrect, perform the following
adjustments in maintenance mode.
U067 U072
U034 (P.1-3-50) (P.1-3-56)
Completion

2LL/2LJ/2LH

U035 Setting the printing area for folio paper
Description
Changes the printing area for copying on folio paper.
Purpose
To prevent cropped images on the trailing edge or left/right side of copy paper by setting the
actual printing area for folio paper.
Setting
2. Select the item to be set.
3. Change the setting value using the +/- keys.
Display Description Setting range Initial setting
Length Length 330 to 356 mm 330
Width Width 200 to 220 mm 210
Completion

2LL/2LJ/2LH

U037 Checking the operation of the fan motors
Description
Drives each fan motor.
Purpose
To check the operation of each fan motor.
Method
2. Select the fan motor to be operated.
Display Description Group
Fuser Cooling Fuser rear fan motor (FURFM) is turned on B
LSU Cooling LSU fan motor (LSUFM) is turned on B
Exit Cooling Eject front fan motor (EFFM) is turned on B
Toner Toner fan motor (TFM) is turned on A
Low Volt Power source fan motor (PSFM) is turned on A
Exit Rear Cooling Eject rear fan motor (EFRM) is turned on B
IH PWB Heater fan motor (HFM) is turned on A
IH Coil Fuser front fan motor (FUFFM) is turned on A
DLP Front Developer fan motor 1and 2 (DEVFM1, 2) is turned on A
Container Cooling Exhaust motor 1and 2 (EXFM1, 2) is turned on A
GroupA Fan motors of group A are turned on
GroupB Fan motors of group B are turned on
Completion

2LL/2LJ/2LH-1

U039 Adjusting the magnification
Description
Adjusts the magnification of the printing.
Purpose
Make the adjustment if the magnification in the auxiliary scanning direction is incorrect.
Caution
Adjust the magnification in the following order.
U065 U070
U039 (P.1-3-47) (P.1-3-52)
Method
Display Description
Sub Scan Magnification in the auxiliary -1 to 1 0 0.1 %
scanning direction
Adjustment: [Sub Scan]

1. Change the setting value using the +/- keys or numeric keys.
Increasing the value makes the image longer, while decreasing the value makes the image
shorter.
350 1.4 mm
Figure 1-3-6
Completion
Press the stop key. The indication for selecting a maintenance item No. appears.

2LL/2LJ/2LH-1

U051 Adjusting the deflection in the paper
Description
Adjusts the deflection in the paper at the registration roller.
Purpose
Make the adjustment if the leading edge of the copy image is missing or varies randomly, or if the
copy paper is Z-folded.
Method
Display Description
Paper Loop Amount Deflection adjustment
Adjustment
2. Place an original and press the start key to make a test copy.
Setting Initial setting

Display Description
range 35ppm 45ppm 55ppm
MPT(L) Paper feed from MP tray -30 to 20 1 -5 -8
MPT Half(L) Paper feed from MP tray -30 to 20 1 0 -1
Cassette(L) Paper feed from cassette -30 to 20 1 -5 -8
Cassette Paper feed from cassette -30 to 20 1 0 -1
Half(L)
Duplex(L) Duplex mode (second) -30 to 20 1 -5 -8
Duplex Duplex mode (second) -30 to 20 1 0 -1
Half(L)
MPT(S) Paper feed from MP tray -30 to 20 1 -5 -8
MPT Half(S) Paper feed from MP tray -30 to 20 1 0 -1
Cassette(S) Paper feed from cassette -30 to 20 1 -5 -8
Cassette Paper feed from cassette -30 to 20 1 0 -1
Half(S)
Duplex(S) Duplex mode (second) -30 to 20 1 -3 -6
Duplex Duplex mode (second) -30 to 20 1 0 -1
Half(S)
Change in value per step: 1.0 mm
(L): When large size paper is used (218 mm or more in width of paper).
(S): When small size paper is used.

2LL/2LJ/2LH

U051 5. Change the setting value using the +/- keys or numeric keys.
The greater the value, the larger the deflection; the smaller the value, the smaller the deflec-
tion.
Original Copy Copy

example 1 example 2
Figure 1-3-7
Completion

2LL/2LJ/2LH

U052 Setting the fuser motor control
Description
Enters the sensor data values described on the supplied sheet provided when the loop sensor is
replaced and performs correction processing for the fuser motor.
Purpose
To perform when replacing the loop sensor or paper conveying unit.
Method
2. Select the item.
Display Description
Set Loop Sensor Enter the data value for loop sensor
Loop Sensor Control Set the loop sensor detection control
Set Loop Sensor Valid Sets the presence or absence of the loop sensor
Chk Loop Sensor Display the data value for loop sensor
Method: [Set Loop Sensor] How to read the sensor data value
1. Select [Scanning Board1]. (e.g.) 1
2. Enter the sensor data value of supplied sheet DATA1 using 2
3
the +/- keys. 4
3. Select [Scanning Board2]. 5
6
4. Enter the sensor data value of supplied sheet DATA2 using 7
the +/- keys. 8
5. Press the start key. The value is set. 9
0
Setting: [Loop Sensor Control] 3 6 4

1. Select the item.
2. Select On or Off.
Display Description Initial setting
No.1 Sensor detection On/Off setting at 125 to 250 mm from On
the top of paper
the top of paper
the top of paper
the top of paper
No.5 On
No.6 On

2LL/2LJ/2LH-1

U052 Setting: [Set Loop Sensor Valid]
Initial setting: On
Completion
U053 Setting the adjustment of the motor speed
Description
Performs fine adjustment of the speeds of the motors.
Purpose
Basically, the setting need not be changed. Modify settings by interlock setting only if faulty
images occur.
Method
2. Select the item to be adjusted
Display Description
Moter1 Adjustment of drum motor speeds
Moter2 Adjustment of developer motor, registration motor and transfer motor
speeds
Moter3 Adjustment of eject motor, fuser motor, BR conveying motor 1/2, paper
feed motor, JS eject motor, middle motor and duplex motor 1/2 speeds
Moter1 Half Adjustment of drum motor speeds in half speed
Moter2 Half Adjustment of developer motor, registration motor and transfer motor
speeds in half speed
Moter3 Half Adjustment of eject motor, fuser motor, BR conveying motor 1/2, paper
feed motor, JS eject motor, middle motor and duplex motor 1/2 speeds
in half speed
Setting: [Motor1]

Display Description
Drum(K) Drum motor (DRM) -5000 to 5000 0 0 0

2LL/2LJ/2LH-1

U053 Setting: [Motor2]

Display Description
Dev(K) Developer motor (DEVM) -5000 to 5000 953 736 596
Regist* Registration motor (RM) -5000 to 5000 - 33 27
Sep Belt Transfer motor (TRM) -5000 to 5000 29 22 18
Setting: [Motor3]

Display Description
SB Eject motor (EM) -5000 to 5000 18 13 10
Fixing Fuser motor (FUM) -5000 to 5000 -30 -24 -20
Bridge1 BR conveying motor 1 -5000 to 5000 26 20 15
(BRCM1)
(BRCM2)
Feed Paper feed motor (PFM) -5000 to 5000 66 120 97
Job JS eject motor (JSEM) -5000 to 5000 35 26 19
Separator
Mid Roller* Middle motor (MM) -5000 to 5000 - 72 58
DU1* Duplex motor 1 (DUM1) -5000 to 5000 - -10 -8
DU2* Duplex motor 2 (DUM2) -5000 to 5000 - -10 -8
Bridge1 DF BR conveying motor 1 -5000 to 5000 0 0 0
High (BRCM1)
Low (BRCM1)
High (BRCM2)
Low (BRCM2)
Setting: [Motor1 Half]


Display Description
Drum(K) Drum motor (DRM) in half -5000 to 5000 0 0 0
speed

2LL/2LJ/2LH-1

U053 Setting: [Motor2 Half]

Display Description
Dev(K) Developer motor (DEVM) in -5000 to 5000 1907 1473 1191
half speed
Regist* Registration motor (RM) in half -5000 to 5000 - 66 54
speed
Sep Belt Transfer motor (TRM) in half -5000 to 5000 56 44 35
speed
Setting: [Motor3 Half]


Display Description
SB Eject motor (EM) in half speed -5000 to 5000 106 82 66
Fixing Fuser motor (FUM) in half -5000 to 5000 0 0 0
speed
(BRCM1) in half speed
(BRCM2) in half speed
Feed Paper feed motor (PFM) in half -5000 to 5000 132 238 194
speed
Job JS eject motor (JSEM) in half -5000 to 5000 210 164 133
Separator speed
Mid Roller* Middle motor (MM) in half -5000 to 5000 - 143 116
speed
DU1* Duplex motor 1 (DUM1) in half -5000 to 5000 - -20 -16
speed
DU2* Duplex motor 2 (DUM2) in half -5000 to 5000 - -20 -16
speed
Completion

2LL/2LJ/2LH-2

U059 Setting fan mode
Description
Specifies mode for developer fan motors.
Purpose
Handling the lowering density [to suppress thermal stresses owing to the heated toner]
Method
2. Select the mode.
Display Description
Fan Mode Sets threshold temperature at which developer fan motors oper-
ate.
Cooling Mode Sets temperature at which the developer fan motors are switched
for controlling.
Setting: [Fan Mode]

1. Select the mode.
Display Description
Mode1 Setting temperature:Normal
Mode2 Setting temperature:Temperature threshold is raised from mode1
(WUP, temperature at READY : mode1 temperature -7(C), Tempera-
ture at PRINT : mode1 temperature -3(C).)
Mode3 Setting temperature:Temperature threshold is raised from mode2
(WUP, temperature at READY : mode1 temperature -22(C), Temper-
ature at PRINT : mode1 temperature -8(C).)
Auto Starting with Mode 2 at power up or recovery from sleep mode, and
switches to Mode 3 when the termistor detects a developer tempera-
ture BK is equal to or higher than 38C. The device never reverts
from mode 2 from mode 3 while power is on.
Initial setting: Mode1

Setting: [Cooling Mode]

Setting Initial
Display Description
range setting
Cooling Mode Amount of shift from the initial standard -3 to 3 (C) 0
temperature
A larger value advances the operating timing, and a smaller value slows it.
Completion

2LL/2LJ/2LH

U061 Checking the operation of the exposure lamp
Description
Lights the exposure lamp.
Purpose
To check whether the exposure lamp are turned on.
Method
2. Select the item.
Display Description
CCD The exposure lamp lights
CIS The CIS lights (when dual scan DP is installed)
3. Press the start key. The lamp lights.
4. To turn the lamp off, press the stop key.
Completion
U063 Adjusting the shading position
Description
Changes the shading position of the scanner.
Purpose
Used when the white line continue to appear longitudinally on the image after the shading plate is
cleaned.
This is due to flaws or stains inside the shading plate. To prevent this problem, the shading posi-
tion should be changed so that shading is possible without being affected by the flaws or stains.
Setting
Display Description
Position Shading position 0 to 18 0 0.158 mm
Increasing the value moves the shading position toward the machine left, and decreasing it
moves the position toward the machine right.
Supplement
While this maintenance item is being executed, copying from an original is available in interrupt
copying mode (which is activated by pressing the system menu key).
Completion

2LL/2LJ/2LH-1

U065 Adjusting the scanner magnification
Description
Adjusts the magnification of the original scanning.
Purpose
Make the adjustment if the magnification in the main scanning direction is incorrect.
Make the adjustment if the magnification in the auxiliary scanning direction is incorrect.
Caution
The magnification adjustment along the main scanning direction could cause black streaks
depending on the content of the original document.
Adjust the magnification of the scanner in the following order.
U039 U065 U065

main scanning auxiliary scanning
(P.1-3-38) direction direction
Method
Display Description
Main Scan Scanner magnification in the -75 to 75 0 0.02 %
main scanning direction
Sub Scan Scanner magnification in the -125 to 125 0 0.02 %
auxiliary scanning direction
Adjustment: [Main Scan]

For copy example 1, increase the value. For copy example 2, decrease the value.
Increasing the setting enlarges the image and decreasing it narrows the image.
Original Copy Copy

example 1 example 2
Figure 1-3-8

2LL/2LJ/2LH-1

U065 Adjustment: [Sub Scan]
shorter.
Original Copy Copy

example 1 example 2
Figure 1-3-9
Completion

2LL/2LJ/2LH-1

U066 Adjusting the scanner leading edge registration
Description
Adjusts the scanner leading edge registration of the original scanning.
Purpose
Make the adjustment if there is a regular error between the leading edges of the copy image and
original.
Adjustment
Display Description
Front Scanner leading edge registra- -30 to 30 0 0.158 mm
tion
Rotate Scanner leading edge registra- -30 to 30 0 0.158 mm
tion (rotate copying)
Increasing the value moves the image forward and decreasing the value moves the image
backward.
Leading edge registration of the copy image (+1.0/-1.5 mm or less)
Original Copy Copy

example 1 example 2
Figure 1-3-10
Caution
If the above adjustment does not optimize the leading edge registration, proceed with the follow-
ing maintenance modes.
U039 U034 U065

(P.1-3-38) (P.1-3-33) (P.1-3-47) U066
Completion

2LL/2LJ/2LH-1

U067 Adjusting the scanner center line
Description
Adjusts the scanner center line of the original scanning.
Purpose
Make the adjustment if there is a regular error between the center lines of the copy image and
original.
Adjustment
5. Select the item to be adjusted.l
Display Description
Front Scanner center line -60 to 60 0 0.085 mm
Rotate Scanner center line (rotate -40 to 40 0 0.085 mm
copying)
For copy example 1, decrease the value. For copy example 2, increase the value.
Increasing the value moves the image leftward and decreasing it moves the image rightward.
Center line of the copy image (within 2.0 mm)
Original Copy Copy

example 1 example 2
Figure 1-3-11
Caution
If the above adjustment does not optimize the center line, proceed with the following mainte-
nance modes.
U034 U065
U067
(P.1-3-34) (P.1-3-47)
Completion

2LL/2LJ/2LH

U068 Adjusting the scanning position for originals from the DP
Description
Adjusts the position for scanning originals from the DP. Performs the test copy at the four scan-
ning positions after adjusting.
Purpose
Used when the image fogging occurs because the scanning position is not proper when the DP is
used. Run U071 to adjust the timing of DP leading edge when the scanning position is changed.
Setting
1. Press the start key.l
Display Description
DP Read Starting position adjustment for -38 to 38 0 0.158 mm
scanning originals
Black Line Scanning position for the test 0 to 3 0 -
copy originals
2. Select [DP Read].
3. Change the setting using the +/- keys or numeric keys.
When the setting value is increased, the scanning position moves to the right and it moves to
the left when the setting value is decreased.
5. Select [Black Line].
8. Set the original (the one which density is known) in the DP and press the system menu key.
9. Press the start key. Test copy is executed.
10. Perform the test copy at each scanning position with the setting value from 0 to 3 and check
that no black line appears and the image is normally scanned.
Completion

2LL/2LJ/2LH-1

U070 Adjusting the DP magnification
Description
Adjusts the DP original scanning speed.
Purpose
Make the adjustment if the magnification is incorrect in the auxiliary scanning direction when the
DP is used.
Make the adjustment if the magnification is incorrect in the main scanning direction when the CIS
is used.
Adjustment
3. Place an original on the DP and press the start key to make a test copy.
Display Description
Sub Scan(F) Magnification in the auxiliary -125 to 125 0 0.02 %
scanning direction of CCD
(first side)
Sub Scan(B)*1 Magnification in the auxiliary -125 to 125 0 0.02 %
scanning direction of CCD
(second side)
Main Magnification in the main scan- -100 to 100 0 0.02 %
Scan(CIS)*2 ning direction of CIS
Sub Magnification in the auxiliary -125 to 125 0 0.02 %
Scan(CIS)*2 scanning direction of CIS
*1: Reversed DP only. *2: Dual scan DP only.
Adjustment: [Sub Scan]

shorter.
Original Copy Copy

example 1 example 2
Figure 1-3-12

2LL/2LJ/2LH-1

U070 Adjustment: [Main Scan]
Increasing the setting enlarges the image and decreasing it narrows the image.
Original Copy Copy

example 1 example 2
Figure 1-3-13
Caution
If the above adjustment does not optimize the magnification, perform the following maintenance
modes.
U039
(P.1-3-38) U070
Completion

2LL/2LJ/2LH-1

U071 Adjusting the DP scanning timing
Description
Adjusts the DP original scanning timing.
Purpose
Make the adjustment if there is a regular error between the leading or trailing edges of the origi-
nal and the copy image when the DP is used.
Method
Reversed DP
Display Description
Front Head Leading edge registration of -32 to 32 0 0.085 mm
CCD (first side)
Front Tail Trailing edge registration of -32 to 32 0 0.085 mm
CCD (first side)
Back Head Leading edge registration of -32 to 32 0 0.085 mm
CCD (second side)
Back Tail Trailing edge registration of -32 to 32 0 0.085 mm
CCD (second side)
Dual scan DP
Display Description
Front Head Leading edge registration of -27 to 27 0 0.207 mm
CCD (first side)
Front Tail Trailing edge registration of -27 to 27 0 0.207 mm
CCD (first side)
CIS Head Leading edge registration of -27 to 27 0 0.207 mm
CIS
CIS Tail Trailing edge registration of CIS -27 to 27 0 0.207 mm

2LL/2LJ/2LH-1

U071 Adjustment: Leading edge registration
Increasing the value moves the image forward and decreasing the value moves the image
backward.
Original Copy Copy

example 1 example 2
Figure 1-3-14
Caution
If the first side is adjusted, check the second side and if adjustment is required, carry out the
adjustment.
If the above adjustment does not optimize the leading edge registration, proceed with the follow-
ing maintenance modes.
U039 U034
(P.1-3-38) (P.1-3-33) U071
Adjustment: Trailing edge registration

Original
Copy Copy
example 1 example 2
Figure 1-3-15
Caution
adjustment.
Completion

2LL/2LJ/2LH-1

U072 Adjusting the DP center line
Description
Adjusts the scanning start position for the DP original.
Purpose
Make the adjustment if there is a regular error between the centers of the original and the copy
image when the DP is used.
Adjustment
Display Description
Front DP center line (first side) -60 to 60 0 0.085 mm
Back DP center line (second side) -60 to 60 0 0.085 mm
CIS* CIS center line -39 to 39 0 0.085 mm
*: Dual scan DP only
Increasing the value moves the image rightward and decreasing it moves the image leftward.
Original Copy Copy

example 1 example 2
Figure 1-3-16
Caution
adjustment.
If the above adjustment does not optimize the center line, proceed with the following mainte-
nance modes.
U034 U065 U067

(P.1-3-34) (P.1-3-47) U072
(P.1-3-50)
Completion

2LL/2LJ/2LH

U073 Checking the scanner operation
Description
Simulates the scanner operation under the arbitrary conditions.
Purpose
To check the scanner operation. This is also done to check the accumulation of dust on the slit
glass.
Method
2. Select the item to be operated.
Display Description
Scanner Motor Scanner operation
Home Position Home position operation
Dust Check Dust adhesion check operation with lamp on
DP Reading DP scanning position operation
Setting: [Scanner Motor]

1. Select [Scanner Motor].
2. Select the item.
3. Change the setting using the +/- keys.
Display Operating conditions Setting range
Zoom Magnification 25 to 400 %
Size Original size See below.
Lamp On and off of the exposure lamp 0 (off) or 1 (on)
Original sizes for each setting in SIZE

Setting Paper size Setting Paper size
5000 A4 5000 A5R
4300 B5 7800 Folio
5100 11" x 8 1/2" 10200 11" x 17"
10000 A3 9000 11" x 15"
8600 B4 8400 8 1/2" x 14"
7100 A4R 6600 8 1/2" x 11"
6100 B5R 5100 5 1/2" x 8 1/2"
6. Press the start key. Scanning starts under the selected conditions.

2LL/2LJ/2LH

U073 Method: [Home Position]
1. Select [Home Position].
The mirror frame of the scanner moves to the home position.
Method: [Dust Check]

1. Select [Dust Check].
2. Press the start key. The exposure lamp lights.
3. To turn the exposure lamp off, press the stop key.
Method: [DP Reading]

1. Select [DP Reading].
The mirror frame of the scanner moves to the reading position.
Completion
Press the stop key when scanning stops. The screen for selecting a maintenance item No. is dis-
played.

2LL/2LJ/2LH

U074 DP input response adjustment
Description
Sets the density correction for scanning originals from the DP.
Purpose
Modify the setting only if a spotted background appears when a bluish original or a document
with a background that is slightly colored is scanned from the DP.
Perform adjustment if the page scanned using the table and the page scanned using DP do not
match.
Setting
2. Change the setting using the +/- or numeric keys.
Setting Initial
Display Description
range setting
Coefficient Compensating original document 0 to 3 1
scanning density
Settings 0: No correction / 1: Slight correction / 2: Medium correction / 3: Strong correction
Supplement
Completion

2LL/2LJ/2LH

U087 Setting DP reading position modification operation
Description
The presence or absence of dust is determined by comparing the scan data of the original trailing
edge and that taken after the original is conveyed past the DP original scanning position. If dust
is identified, the DP original scanning position is adjusted for the following originals.
Using image correction to reduce black streaks.
Purpose
When using DP, to solve the problem when black lines occurs due to the dust with respect to
original reading position.
Caution
The coordinates of position where documents are scanned are modified when [System Menu]
[Adjustment/Maintenance] [Correcting Black Line] is set to [Off].
Method
Display Description
CCD Setting of standard data when dust is detected.
Black Line Initialization of original reading position.
Setting: [CCD]
2. Change the value using the +/- or numeric keys.
Setting Initial
Display Description
range setting
R Lowest density of the R regard as the dust 0 to 255 125
G Lowest density of the G regard as the dust 0 to 255 125
B Lowest density of the B regard as the dust 0 to 255 125
Method: [Black Line]

1. Select [Clear].
2. Press the start key. The setting is cleared.
Completion

2LL/2LJ/2LH

U089 Outputting a MIP-PG pattern
Description
Selects and outputs the MIP-PG pattern created in the machine.
Purpose
To check copier status other than scanner when adjusting image printing, using MIP-PG pattern
output (with-out scanning).
Method
2. Select the MIP-PG pattern to be output and press the start key.
Display PG pattern to be output Purpose
Gray Scale To check the laser scanner unit engine
output characteristics
Mono1 To check the drum quality

(Output density: 0)
Mono4 To check the drum quality

(Output density: 70)
256-Level To check resolution reproducibility in

printing

4. Press the start key. A MIP-PG pattern is output.
Completion

2LL/2LJ/2LH-3

U091 Setting the white line correction
Description
Sets the error detection threshold value for white line correction and displays the count result of
abnormal pixels.
Purpose
To perform when replacing the CIS, DP main PWB or CIS roller.
Method
2. Select the item.
Display Description
Calculation(R) Abnormal pixel count result for color R
Calculation(G) Abnormal pixel count result for color G
Calculation(B) Abnormal pixel count result for color B
Threshold(R) Displaying of abnormal pixel detection threshold value for color R
Threshold(G) Displaying of abnormal pixel detection threshold value for color G
Threshold(B) Displaying of abnormal pixel detection threshold value for color B
Threshold Abnormal pixel threshold value setting
(Abnormal)
Mode Switching between white line correction mode ON/OFF
Execute Holding of white reference data
Method: white line correction

1. Press [Execute].
2. Press the start key. Holding of white reference data is started.
3. The count result of abnormal pixels is displayed.
5. Place a gray original on the DP with the gray side down. Load paper in the cassette.
The paper should be the same size as the original.
Two test pattern sheets will be printed.(1 st sheet: Approx. 60 mm black band, 2nd sheet:
Blank or approx. 60 mm gray band)
7. If vertical black lines appear on the blank (or gray band) page and vertical white lines appear
on the black band in the same position, clean the CIS roller and the CIS glass and then
repeat white line correction.
If vertical black lines or vertical white lines appear on both sheets, white line correction has
been completed normally. However, the cause of the vertical lines lies in the engine, and thus
the engine must be checked.
Mode is set to 1.

2LL/2LJ/2LH

U091 How to view test copies
blank sheet black band Causes Corrective measures
No lines No lines - Complete
Black lines White lines Dirty CIS roller or CIS Clean CIS roller or CIS glass
glass and then perform U091 again
Black lines No lines Engine side U091 ends, check engine
No lines White lines Engine side U091 ends, check engine
Setting: Threshold value setting

Setting Initial
Display Description
range setting
Threshold(B) Displaying of abnormal pixel detection 0 to 1023 112
threshold value for color B
Threshold Abnormal pixel threshold value setting 0 to 8191 75
(Abnormal)
Mode Switching between white line correction 0: OFF/ 0
mode ON/OFF 1: ON/
2: Test mode
* : Normally the Threshold (Com) value should not be changed from 112, the initial setting.
If white lines appear even though the CIS roller and glass are not dirty, raise the set value.
If fine lines in some originals disappear, lower the set value.
Set within the range 50 to 200. (If set outside this range, the image may be affected.)
Completion

2LL/2LJ/2LH

U099 Adjusting original size detection
Description
Checks the operation of the original size detection and sets the sensing threshold value.
Purpose
Modify the threshold of detection if documents are frequently mal-detected in size after scanning
a wholly dark document or a document enclosed with dark objects on edges.
Method
2. Select the item.
Display Description
Data1 Displaying original size detection transmission data
B/W Level1 Setting original size detection threshold value
Data2 Displaying original size detection transmission data (when DP is installed)
Method: [Data1/Data2]
1. Place the original and close the original cover or DP
2. The light source illuminates and the CCD sensor determines the width of the document. The
original size sensor determines the document is vertical or horizontal. (The document is
detected two times when the DP is installed.)
Display Description
Original Area R Detected original width size for color R
Original Area G Detected original width size for color G
Original Area B Detected original width size for color B
Original Area Detected original width size
Size SW L Displays the original size sensor (OSS) ON/OFF
Setting: [B/W Level1]

1. Select an item to be set.
2. Change the setting value using the +/- keys or numeric keys.l
Setting Initial
Display Description
range setting*
Original R1 Original threshold value for color R (near side) 0 to 255 20/50
Original R2 Original threshold value for color R (center) 0 to 255 30/50
Original R3 Original threshold value for color R (far side) 0 to 255 40/50
Original G1 Original threshold value for color G (near side) 0 to 255 20/50
Original G2 Original threshold value for color G (center) 0 to 255 30/50
Original G3 Original threshold value for color G (far side) 0 to 255 40/50
Original B1 Original threshold value for color B (near side) 0 to 255 20/50
Original B2 Original threshold value for color B (center) 0 to 255 30/50
Original B3 Original threshold value for color B (far side) 0 to 255 40/50
*:DP is not installed/DP is installed

2LL/2LJ/2LH

U099 3. Reducing the value increases the sensitivity of the sensor allowing a document with more
density to be detected, however, the document mat could be detected as an original docu-
ment.
If the values vary excessively, mal-detection could occur depending on how a document is
placed.
Original mat Original

Fig. Original width size range
R/G/B
1 1 A4R to A3 8.5" to 11"
1 2 3 2 2 B6R to A4R 5.5" to 8.5"
297 mm 3 3 to B6R to 5.5"
Figure 1-3-17
Completion
Press the stop key. The screen for maintenance item No. is displayed.

2LL/2LJ/2LH

U100 Adjusting main high voltage
Description
Controls the charger roller voltage to optimize the surface potential.
Purpose
To change the setting value to adjust the image if an image failure (background blur, etc.) occurs.
Method
2. Select an item and press the start key.
Display Description
Adj AC Bias Main charger AC bias for each color
Set AC Auto Adj Setting the AC bias auto adjustment
Set DC Bias Main charger DC bias for each color
Adj DC Bias Additional surface potential
Set Low Temp Pre-charge time at power supply ON
Set Charger Freq Setting the main charger frequency
Chk Current Rush current display
Setting: [Adj AC Bias]

Increasing the setting makes the image lighter; decreasing it makes the image darker.
The values set vary depending on environments.
Display Description Setting range
AC Bias(K) Main charger AC bias 0 to 255
Setting: [Set AC Auto Adj]

Display Description
On Turns auto adjustment ON
Off Turns auto adjustment OFF
Initial setting: On
Displaying: [Set DC Bias]

1. The current setting is displayed.
Display Description
DC1 Bias(K) Main charger DC bias (full speed)
DC1 Bias Half(K) Main charger DC bias (half speed)

2LL/2LJ/2LH-1

U100 Setting: [Adj DC Bias]
Increasing the setting makes the image lighter; decreasing it makes the image darker.l
Setting Initial
Display Description
range setting
DC2 Bias(K) Main charger DC bias (full speed) 128 to 127 0
DC2 Bias Half(K) Main charger DC bias (half speed) 128 to 127 0
Setting: [Set Low Temp]

1. Change the value using the +/- or numeric keys.l
Setting Initial
Display Description
range setting
Set Low Temp Pre-charge time at power supply ON 0 to 6 1
Setting: [Set Charger Freq]

2. Change the value using the +/- or numeric keys.lll
Setting Initial
Display Description
range setting
Generally Main charger frequency 7500 to 11280 9160
Displaying: [Chk Current]

Display Description
K Rush current
Completion
Press the stop key. The screen for maintenance item No. is displayed.

2LL/2LJ/2LH-1

U106 Setting the voltage for the secondary transfer
Description
Sets the control voltage for the secondary transfer depending on each paper type.
Purpose
To change the setting when any density problems, such as too dark or light, occur.
Method
Display Description
Light/Normal1 Control voltage for the transfer bias on paper with thickness
52 g/m2 to 64 g/m2 and 65 g/m2 to 75 g/m2
Normal2/3 Control voltage for the transfer bias on paper with thickness
76 g/m2 to 105 g/m2
Heavy1-3 Control voltage for the transfer bias on paper with thickness
106 g/m2 to 220 g/m2
Heavy4/5 Control voltage for the transfer bias on paper with thickness
221 g/m2 to 300 g/m2
OHP Control voltage for the transfer bias for transparencies
Bias Transfer bias value
Setting: [Light/Normal1]
Display Description
1st Control voltage for the transfer bias for the first side (full speed)
2nd Control voltage for the transfer bias for the second side (full speed)
2. Select the paper width to be set.
[1st]

Display Description
Width=105 105 mm wide 0 to 255 150 174 146
Width=210 210 mm wide 0 to 255 143 165 140
Width=297 297 mm wide 0 to 255 139 157 134
[2nd]

Display Description
Width=105 105 mm wide 0 to 255 146 160 133
Width=210 210 mm wide 0 to 255 139 153 130
Width=297 297 mm wide 0 to 255 124 135 120

2LL/2LJ/2LH-1

U106 Setting: [Normal2/3]
Display Description
1st Control voltage for the transfer bias for the first side (full speed)
2nd Control voltage for the transfer bias for the second side (full speed)
[1st]

Display Description
Width=105 105 mm wide 0 to 255 150 174 146
Width=210 210 mm wide 0 to 255 143 165 140
Width=297 297 mm wide 0 to 255 139 157 134
[2nd]

Display Description
Width=105 105 mm wide 0 to 255 146 160 133
Width=210 210 mm wide 0 to 255 139 153 130
Width=297 297 mm wide 0 to 255 124 135 120
Setting: [Heavy1-3]
Display Description
1st Half Control voltage for the transfer bias for the first side (half speed)
2nd Half Control voltage for the transfer bias for the second side (half speed)
[1st Half]

Display Description
Width=105 105 mm wide 0 to 255 122 130 116
Width=210 210 mm wide 0 to 255 122 130 116
Width=297 297 mm wide 0 to 255 118 126 114

2LL/2LJ/2LH-1

U106 [2nd Half]

Display Description
Width=105 105 mm wide 0 to 255 115 122 121
Width=210 210 mm wide 0 to 255 115 122 121
Width=297 297 mm wide 0 to 255 105 109 109
Setting: [Heavy4/5]
Display Description
1st Half Control voltage for the transfer bias for the first side (half speed)
2nd Half Control voltage for the transfer bias for the second side (half speed)
[1st Half]

Display Description
Width=105 105 mm wide 0 to 255 118 126 114
Width=210 210 mm wide 0 to 255 118 126 114
Width=297 297 mm wide 0 to 255 110 115 107
[2nd Half]

Display Description
Width=105 105 mm wide 0 to 255 114 120 110
Width=210 210 mm wide 0 to 255 114 120 110
Width=297 297 mm wide 0 to 255 104 108 102
Setting: [OHP]

Display Description
Width=105 105 mm wide 0 to 255 108 112 105
Width=210 210 mm wide 0 to 255 108 112 105
Width=297 297 mm wide 0 to 255 101 104 101

2LL/2LJ/2LH-1

U106 Setting: [Bias]

Display Description
Reverse Transfer reverse bias 0 to 255 163 163 164
(full speed)
Reverse Half Transfer reverse bias 0 to 255 163 163 164
(half speed)
Cleaning Cleaning control value 0 to 255 108 113 117
(full speed)
Cleaning Half Cleaning control value 0 to 255 100 102 105
(half speed)
Supplement
Completion

2LL/2LJ/2LH

U110 Checking the drum count
Description
Displays the drum counts for checking.
Purpose
To check the drum status.
Method
1. Press the start key. The current drum counts is displayed.
Display Description
K Drum count value
Completion
U111 Checking the drum drive time
Description
Displays the drum drive time for checking a figure, which is used as a reference when correcting
the high voltage based on time.
Purpose
To check the drum status.
Method
1. Press the start key. The drum drive time is displayed.
Display Description
K Drum drive time
Completion
U117 Checking the drum number
Description
Displays the drum number.
Purpose
To check the drum number.
Method
1. Press the start key. The drum number is displayed.
Display Description
K Drum number
Completion

2LL/2LJ/2LH-1

U118 Displaying the drum history
Description
Displays the past record of machine number and the drum counter.
Purpose
To check the count value of machine number and the drum counter.
Method
2. Select [K].
Display Description
K Drum past record
The history of a machine number and a drum counter for each color is displayed by three
cases.
Display Description
Machine History1 - 3 Historical records of the machine number
Cnt History1 - 3 Historical records of drum counter
Completion
U119 Setting the drum
Description
Sets drum sensitivity.
Purpose
To set the drum after replacing the drum unit or laser scanner unit.
When completed, perform maintenance mode U464, Calibration.
* : After execution, the U930 charging roller counter is cleared.
Method
3. Press the start key. Drum setup is commenced.

2LL/2LJ/2LH-1

U127 Checking/clearing the transfer count
Description
Displays and clears the counts of the transfer counter.
Purpose
To check the count or drive time after replacement of the transfer belt unit. Also to clear the
counts after replacing transfer belt unit.
Method
1. Press the start key. The current counts of the transfer counter is displayed.
Display Description
Belt(Cnt) Transfer belt unit count value
Belt(Time) Transfer belt unit drive time
Clearing
1. Select [Clear].
2. Press the start key. The counter value is cleared.
Completion
U128 Setting transfer high-voltage timing
Description
Adjusts the ON/OFF timing of transfer high-voltage output.
Purpose
Basically, the setting need not be changed. If any problem such as faulty images or dirt on the
back surface occurs, change the setting.
Method
2. Select the item to set.
3. Change the value using the +/- keys or numeric keys.

Display Description
On Timing Transfer ON timing adjustment -200 to 200 -20 -18 -15
1st value (first side)
Off Timing Transfer OFF timing adjust- -200 to 200 -13 -15 -18
ment value
Completion

2LL/2LJ/2LH-1

U130 Initial setting for the developer
Description
The toner sensor control bias is adjusted so that the sensor output is set as the target value with
the initial developer.
Purpose
Automatically executed when the developer unit loaded with the initial developer is replaced.
Method
Toner installation is started and the control value of the toner sensor is displayed.
Display Description
K Toner sensor control voltage
Completion

2LL/2LJ/2LH-1

U131 Adjusting the toner sensor control voltage
Description
Adjusts the toner sensor control voltage.
Purpose
If control values are not correctly retrievable due to the EEPROM of the developer unit failure,
etc., use manual adjustment and obtain a temporary control value.
Method
2. Select the item to be set or displayed.
Display Description
Manual Toner sensor control voltage manual adjustment
Auto Toner sensor control voltage auto adjustment
Mode Switching the manual adjustment and auto adjustment
Setting: [Manual]

Display Description
Control(K) Toner sensor control voltage 0 to 255 107 120 128
Displaying: [Auto]
Display Description
Default(K) Reference value for toner sensor control voltage
Control(K) Toner sensor control voltage after correction
Setting: [Mode]
Display Description
Manual Toner sensor control voltage manual adjustment
Auto Toner sensor control voltage auto adjustment
Initial setting: Auto
Completion

2LL/2LJ/2LH

U132 Replenishing toner forcibly
Description
Replenishes toner forcibly until the toner sensor output value reaches the toner feed start level.
Purpose
Used when the toner empty is detected frequently.
Method
Toner is replenished until the toner sensor output value reaches the toner feed start level.
Display Description
Supply(K) Toner feed start level
Sensor(K) Toner sensor output value
Completion
U135 Checking toner motor operation
Description
Drives toner motors.
Purpose
To check the operation of toner motors.
Remarks
When driving the toner motors long time or several times, developer section becomes the toner
full and is locked.
Method
2. Select item.
Display Description
Toner Toner motor (TM) is turned on
Hopper Toner hopper motor (THM) is turned on
4. To stop the operation, press the stop key.
Completion
Press the stop key after operation stops. The screen for selecting a maintenance item No. is dis-
played.

2LL/2LJ/2LH-1

U136 Setting toner near end detection
Description
Sets the level that indicates the number of sheets that can be printed from occurrence of toner
near end to toner empty.
Purpose
To change the setting to advance detection of near end if the interval from toner near end to toner
empty seems too short.
Setting
Setting Initial
Display Description
range setting
K Setting the level of toner 0 to 9 3
Increasing the setting makes the interval from toner near end to toner empty longer.
Decreasing the setting makes the interval from toner near end to toner empty shorter.
If 0 is set, toner near end will not be detected.
Completion

2LL/2LJ/2LH

U139 Displaying the temperature and humidity outside the machine
Description
Displays the detected temperature and humidity outside the machine.
Purpose
To check the temperature and humidity outside the machine.
Method
2. Select the item.
Display Description
Ext/Int Internal/External temperature (C), External humidity (%)
LSU Internal temperature around the laser scanner unit (C)
Developing Internal temperature around the developer section (C)
Method: [Ext/Int]
1. The current temperature and humidity are displayed.
Display Description
External Temp External temperature (C)
External Humidity External humidity (%)
Internal Temp Internal temperature (C)
Method: [LSU]
1. The current temperature is displayed.
Display Description
K Internal temperature around the laser scanner unit (C)
Method: [Developing]
1. The current temperature is displayed.
Display Description
K Internal temperature around the developer unit (C)
Completion

2LL/2LJ/2LH-1

U140 Displaying developer bias
Description
Displays and changes various developer bias value.
Purpose
To check or changes the developer bias value.
Method
Display Description
Sleeve DC Developer sleeve roller DC bias
Sleeve AC Developer sleeve roller AC bias
Mag DC Developer magnet roller DC bias
Mag AC Developer magnet roller AC bias
Sleeve Freq Developer sleeve roller frequency
Sleeve Duty Developer sleeve roller duty
Mag Duty Developer magnet roller duty
AC Calib Executing or setting the AC calibration
Setting: [Sleeve DC]


Display Description
K Developer sleeve roller DC bias 0 to 255 62 62 70
Setting: [Sleeve AC]


Display Description
K Developer sleeve roller AC bias 0 to 255 159 159 150

2LL/2LJ/2LH-1

U140 Setting: [Mag DC]

Display Description
K Developer magnet roller DC bias 0 to 255 148 148 180
Setting: [Mag AC]


Display Description
K Developer magnet roller AC bias 0 to 255 101 101 199
Setting: [Sleeve Freq]


Display Description
Normal Developer sleeve roller frequency 0 to 6200 4580 4580 4580
Half Developer sleeve roller frequency 0 to 6200 5345 5345 5345
(half speed)
Setting: [Sleeve Duty]


Display Description
Normal Developer sleeve roller duty 0 to 99 63 63 43
Setting: [Mag Duty]


Display Description
Normal Developer magnet roller duty 0 to 99 37 37 68

2LL/2LJ/2LH-1

U140 Method: [AC Calib] (55 ppm model)
1. Select the item.
Display Description
Calibration Executing the AC calibration
Magnification AC calibration target bias value setting
High Altitude Mode setting for AC calibration bias control
Method: [Calibration]
1. Turns the items to implement to on.
2. If the machine is installed at high altitudes, turn to On.
Changing Type to 1 sets to On.
Display Description
K When replacing the developer unit or drum unit
Type Setting the mode
4. Press the start key. AC calibration is executed.
* : When an error occurs, an error code is displayed.
Setting: [Magnification]
Setting Initial
Display Description
range setting
K When replacing the developer unit or drum unit -10 to1 5 12
Method: [High Altitude]

1. Select Mode1 or Mode2.
Display Description
Mode1 Execute AC calibration by normal bias control
Mode2 If print density is low in an installation at high altitude, execute
calibration by fixing the bias potential.
Initial setting: Mode1

2LL/2LJ/2LH-1

U140 Method: [AC Calib] (35 ppm model/45 ppm model)
1. Select the item.
Display Description
High Altitude Mode setting for AC calibration bias control
Method: [High Altitude]

1. Select mode.
Display Description Display Description
Default Initial setting 3000m Settings equivalent to
the altitude of 3000 m
1000m Settings equivalent to the 4000m Settings equivalent to
altitude of 1000 m the altitude of 4000 m
2000m Settings equivalent to the
altitude of 2000 m
Completion

2LL/2LJ/2LH-1

U147 Setting for toner applying operation
Description
Sets the mode for removing charged toner in the developing unit (T7 control: Toner applying
operation).
Purpose
The setting can be changed to reduce the toner applying quantity.
If the charged toner stays inside the developing unit, density decreases.
Method
Display Description
Timing Setting timing to transit to toner applying
Mode Settings for toner applying operation
Upper Limit Upper limit printing ratio of toner applying quantity with each mode
Minimum Toner layer width when cleaning mode is selected
Setting: [Upper Limit]


Display Description
Paper Int Setting number of pages to transit 0 to 100 35 45 55
to toner applying (between pages)
Job End Setting number of pages to transit 0 to 100 8 8 8
to toner applying (job completed)
Setting: [Mode]
1. Select the mode.
Display Description
Mode0 Less consumption of toner than a regular toner applying operation
Mode1 Executes toner applying with the regular amount of toner
Initial setting; Mode1

2LL/2LJ/2LH-1

U147 Setting: [Upper Limit]
Setting Initial
Display Description
range setting
Value Upper limit printing ratio of toner applying 0 to 2.0 2.0
quantity with each mode (%)
Setting: [Minimum]
Setting Initial
Display Description
range setting
Value Toner layer width when cleaning mode is 0 to 30 10
selected (mm)
Completion
U148 Setting drum refresh mode
Description
Selects the mode used in drum refreshing
Purpose
Change settings when drum refreshing is too frequently executed.
Setting
2. Select the mode.
Display Description Setting range Initial setting
Mode Setting drum refresh mode 0 to 3 2
* : 0: Off / 1: Short / 2: Standard / 3: Long
Completion

2LL/2LJ/2LH

U155 Checking sensors for toner
Description
Displays the toner sensor output value.
Purpose
To check the output value when any image problems occur.
Method
2. Select the item to be display.
Display Description
Waste Toner Control voltage value of the waste toner sensor
Toner Control voltage value and replenishment level of toner sensor
Method: [Waste Toner]

1. Check the status of sensor. The current value is displayed.
Display Description
Full Waste toner sensor 1 (WTS1)
Near Full Waste toner sensor 2 (WTS2)
Method: [Toner]
1. Check the status of sensor. The current value is displayed.
Display Description
Sensor(K) Toner sensor output value
Supply(K) Toner replenishment level
Completion

2LL/2LJ/2LH-1

U156 Setting the toner replenishment level
Description
Sets the toner replenishment level for each color.
Purpose
To change settings according to the original image.
Method
Display Description
Supply Setting the toner replenishment level
Empty Setting the toner empty level
Method: [Supply]
1. Change the setting value using the +/- or numeric keys.
Increasing the setting makes the image lighter; decreasing it makes the image darker.
Setting Initial
Display Description
range setting
K Toner replenishment level 0 to 900 512
Method: [Empty]
1. Change the setting value using the +/- or numeric keys.
Increasing the setting makes toner empty appear later and decreasing it makes toner
empty appear earlier.
Setting Initial
Display Description
range setting
K Toner empty level 0 to 1023 100
Completion

2LL/2LJ/2LH

U157 Checking the developer drive time
Description
Displays the developer drive time for checking a figure, which is used as a reference when cor-
recting the toner control.
Purpose
To check the developer drive time after replacing the developer unit.
Method
1. Press the start key. The developer drive time is displayed.
Display Description
K Developer drive time
Completion
U158 Checking the developer count
Description
Displays the developer count for checking.
Purpose
To check the developer unit status.
Method
1. Press the start key. The current developer counts is displayed.
Display Description
K Developer count value
Completion

2LL/2LJ/2LH

U161 Setting the fuser control temperature
Description
Changes the fuser control temperature.
Purpose
Normally no change is necessary. However, can be used to prevent curling or creasing of paper,
or solve a fuser problem on thick paper.
Method
Display Description
Warm Up Control temperature except at printing
Print Control temperature during printing
Setting: [Warm Up]


Display Description
Ready Control temperature at display- 130 to 200 110 110 110
(Center) ing Ready (Center) (C)
Ready Control temperature at display- 100 to 200 110 110 110
(Edge) ing Ready (Edge) (C)
Drive Stable temperature during driv- 130 to 200 155 160 170
(Center) ing (Center) (C)
Drive Stable temperature during driv- 100 to 200 150 155 165
(Edge) ing (Edge) (C)
Wait Stable temperature during halt 130 to 200 155 160 170
(Center) (Center) (C)
Wait Stable temperature during halt 100 to 200 160 160 160
(Edge) (Edge) (C)

2LL/2LJ/2LH-1

U161 Setting: [Print]

Display Description
Full Speed Temperature at maximum print 130 to 200 160 165 175
Print(Center) speed (Center) (C)
Full Speed Temperature at maximum print 100 to 200 170 175 185
Print(Edge) speed (Edge) (C)
Duplex Shift Temperature at duplex printing -20 to 20 0 0 0
(Center) (Center) (C)
Completion
U163 Resetting the fuser problem data
Description
Resets the detection of a service call code indicating a problem in the fuser section.
Purpose
To prevent accidents due to an abnormally high fuser temperature.
Method
2. Press [Execute].
3. Press the start key. The fuser problem data is initialized.
U167 Checking/clearing the fuser count
Description
Displays and clears the fuser count for checking.
Purpose
To check the fuser count after replacement of the fuser unit. Also to clear the counts after replac-
ing unit.
Method
1. Press the start key. The fuser count is displayed.
Display Description
Cnt Fuser unit count value
Clearing
1. Press [Clear].
2. Press the start key. The count is cleared.
Completion

2LL/2LJ/2LH-1

U193 Setting the fuser drive control
Description
Determines to switch the control of driving fusing on and off, when printing is completed.
Purpose
Set as a countermeasure against that the fuser claws affect the print output.
Setting
Display Description
On Fuser drive control ON
Off Fuser drive control OFF
Initial setting: On
Completion
U199 Displaying fuser heater temperature
Description
Displays the detected fuser temperature.
Purpose
To check the fuser temperature.
Method
1. Press the start key. The fuser temperature is displayed.
Display Description
Heat Roller Edge1 Heat roller edge temperature (C)
Heat Roller Center Heat roller center temperature (C)
Completion
Press the stop key. The screen for selecting a maintenance mode No. is displayed.

2LL/2LJ/2LH

U200 Turning all LEDs on
Description
Turns all the LEDs on the operation panel on.
Purpose
To check if all the LEDs on the operation panel light.
Method
3. Press the start key.All the LEDs on the operation panel light.
4. Press the stop key. The LEDs turns off.
Completion
U201 Initializing the touch panel
Description
Automatically correct the positions of the X- and Y-axes of the touch panel.
Purpose
To automatically correct the display positions on the touch panel after it is replaced.
Method
2. Select the [Initialize] or [Check].
Display Description
Initialize Adjusts the display on the panel automatically
Check Checks the display on the touch panel
Method: [Initialize]
2. Press the center of the + keys. Be sure to press three + keys displayed in order.
The touch panel is adjusted automatically.
3. Press the indicated three + keys, and then check the display.
4. Press the stop key.
Method: [Check]
2. Press the indicated three + keys, and then check the display.
When adjusting the display, press [Initialize] to execute the adjustment automatically.
3. Press the stop key.
Completion

2LL/2LJ/2LH

U202 Setting the KMAS host monitoring system
Description
Initializes or operates the KMAS host monitoring system.
This is an optional device which is currently supported only by Japanese specification machines,
so no setting is necessary.
Purpose
Performed at installation, periodic maintenance, and/or repair.
Method
2. Select the item.
Display Description
Init/Set TEL No. Initialization/Phone Nbr. se
Call Service End Outgoing at the end of service activities
Method: [Init/Set TEL No.]

1. Select the item to be input.
Display Description
TEL No. 1 Sales companies
TEL No. 2 Call center
2. Input the telephone number using the numeric keys.
4. Select [Initialize].
6. Press the start key. Communication with the host initiated.
7. The result of communication will be displayed. (Refer to the result.)
Method: [Call Service End]

2. Press the start key. Communication with the host initiated.
3. The result of communication will be displayed. (Refer to the result.)
Result table
Display Description
OK Communication properly terminated.
Communication error (Nbr. of calls exceeded)
Communication error (Communication timeout)
NG Communication error (Communication trial timeout)
Communication error (Other)
KMAS unreachable
Completion

2LL/2LJ/2LH-1

U203 Checking DP operation
Description
Simulates the original conveying operation separately in the DP.
Purpose
To check the DP operation.
Method
2. Place an original in the DP if running this simulation with paper.
3. Select the speed to be operated.
Display Description
Normal Speed Normal reading (600 dpi)
High Speed High-speed reading
Display Description
CCD ADP With paper, single-sided original of CCD
CCD RADP With paper, double-sided original of CCD
CIS With paper, double-sided original of CIS
CCD ADP (Non-P) Without paper, single-sided original of CCD
(continuous operation)
CCD RADP (Non-P) Without paper, double-sided original of CCD
CIS (Non-P) Without paper, double-sided original of CIS
6. To stop continuous operation, press the stop key.
Completion

2LL/2LJ/2LH-1

U204 Setting the presence or absence of a key card or key counter
Description
Sets the presence or absence of the optional key card or key counter.
Purpose
To run this maintenance item if a key card or key counter is installed.
Method
Display Description
Device Sets the presence or absence of the key card or key counter
Message Sets the message when optional equipment is not installed
Setting: [Device]
1. Select the optional counter to be installed.
Display Description
Key-Card The key card is installed
Octopus Card The octopus card is installed
Key-Counter The key counter is installed
Off Not installed
Initial setting: Off
Setting: [MESSAGE]
1. Select the [Key Device] or [Coin Vender].

2LL/2LJ/2LH

U206 Setting the presence or absence of a coin vender
Description
Sets the presence or absence of the optional coin vender.
This is an optional device which is currently supported only by Japanese specification machines.
Purpose
To run this maintenance item if a coin vender is installed.
Method
Display Description
On/Off Config Sets the presence or absence of the coin vender
No Coin Action Behavior when change runs out during copying
Price Charge per copy by size and color
Setting: [On/Off Config]

Display Description
On The coin vender is installed
Off The coin vender is not installed
Setting: [No Coin Action]

1. Select the item.
Display Description
All Clear All clear is performed
Auto Clear Auto clear is performed
Off Clear is not performed

2LL/2LJ/2LH

U206 Setting: [Price]
Display Description
B/W Black & White

2. Select the paper size to be set.
Setting Initial
Display Description
range setting
A3-Ledger A3/Ledger size 0 to 300 10
B4 B4 size 0 to 300 10
Card Post card 0 to 300 10
Other Other 0 to 300 10
In 10-yen increments
Value of 0 allows non-restricted copying. (At a periodic maintenance, etc.)
U207 Checking the operation panel keys
Description
Checks operation of the operation panel keys.
Purpose
To check operation of all the keys and LEDs on the operation panel.
Method
1. Press the start key. The screen for executing is displayed.
2. [Count0] is displayed and the left most LED on the operation panel lights.
3. As the keys lined up in the same line as the lit indicator are pressed in the order from the top
to the bottom, the figure shown on the touch panel increases in increments of 1. When all the
keys in that line are pressed and if there are any LEDs corresponding to the keys in the line
on the immediate right, the top LED in that line will light.
4. When all the keys on the operation panel have been pressed, all the LEDs light for up to 10
seconds.
Completion

2LL/2LJ/2LH

U208 Setting the paper size for the side deck
Description
Sets the size of paper used in side deck.
Purpose
To change the setting when installing the side deck or the size of paper used in the side deck is
changed.
Setting
2. Select the paper size (A4, B5 or Letter).
Initial setting: Letter (Inch specifications)
A4 (Metric specifications)
U211 Setting the presence or absence of the job separator
Description
Sets the presence or absence of the inner job separator.
Purpose
To run this maintenance item if the inner job separator is installed.
Method
2. Select [Inner Job Separator].
Display Description
On The inner job separator is installed
Off The inner job separator is not installed

2LL/2LJ/2LH

U221 Setting the USB host lock function
Description
Specifies ON/OFF the USB host lock function. Setting this to ON causes the machine to be
unable to recognize the device connected to the USB host.
Purpose
Set according to the preference of the user.
Method
2. Select [Host Lock].
Display Description
On USB host lock function ON
Off USB host lock function OFF
U222 Setting the IC card type
Description
Sets the type of IC card.
Purpose
To change the type of IC card.
Setting
2. Select the item.
Display Description
Other The type of IC card is SSFC.
SSFC The type of IC card is not SSFC.
Initial setting: Other
Completion

2LL/2LJ/2LH

U223 Operation panel lock
Description
Sets the operation panel lock function.
Purpose
This is performed to inhibit operating and canceling the system menu on the operation panel
which may be done by others then an administrator.
Setting
2. Select the item.
Display Description
Unlock Release the lock of the operation from the system menu
Partial Lock Lock the operation from the system menu
Lock Lock the operation from the system menu and job cancel
Initial setting: Unlock
Item Partial Lock Lock

Entering maintenance mode Prohibited Prohibited
Entering system menu Prohibited Prohibited
Transmission/transmission from Prohibited Prohibited
document boxes
Entering Addressbook Add/Edit Prohibited Prohibited
Entering Document box Add/Edit Prohibited Prohibited
Pressing Stop key Permitted Prohibited
Pressing Status/Job Cancel Permitted Prohibited
Disconnecting FAX lines Permitted Prohibited
Completion

2LL/2LJ/2LH-1

U224 Panel sheet extension
Description
Changes the image data and the message of the opening screen at the machine startup and the
image data and the message of the service call screen to user specified data.
Purpose
Set according to the preference of the user.
Setting
1. Write the image data or the message data to the USB memory.
2. Insert USB memory in USB memory slot of the machine.
4. Enter the maintenance item.
6. Select the [Install] or [UnInstall].
Display Description
Install Installs the image data or the message data
UnInstall Restores the original image data or message data
7. Select the item.
Display Description Display area
Opening Img Startup screen Entire start display
Call Img Service call screen Graphic display area
Call Msg Top Service call message 1 Message display area (top)
Call Msg Detail Service call message 2 Message display area (descriptive area)
8. Press the start key. Installation or uninstallation is started.
9. When normally completed, [OK] is displayed.
Supplement 1
File information
Description File name Image size (in pixels) File format
Startup screen opening_ext_image.png Length: 480 PNG
Width : 800
Service call callwin_ext_image.png Length: 200 PNG
screen Width : 180
Service call callwin_ext_mes_top.txt - TEXT
message 1 (Unicode)
Service call callwin_ext_mes_detail.txt - TEXT
message 2 (Unicode)

2LL/2LJ/2LH-1

U224 Supplement 2
Displaying start display
The pre-installed graphics file is displayed at power on or recovering from sleeping.
Graphics display on service call display
The pre-installed graphics file is displayed at a service call.
How to change the message
Entering #562 (4 letters) using the numeric keypad during a service call display will let service
call messages 1 and 2.
How to reset the message display
Reverting the maintenance mode will automatically reset the message to the previous.
Caution
The graphics file for start display must be opaque. (To avoid the background from overlapping at
recovering from sleeping.)
The total size of the files installable is approximately 1.8 MB.
Completion
U234 Setting punch destination
Description
Sets the destination of punch unit of 1000-sheet finisher or 4000-sheet finisher.
Purpose
To be set when installing a different punch unit from the destination of the machine.
Setting
2. Select the destination.
Display Description
Auto Conforms to destination settings.
Japan Metric Metric (Japan) specifications
Inch Inch (North America) specifications
Europe Metric Metric (Europe) specifications
Initial setting: Inch (Inch specifications)/Europe Metric (Metric specifications)

2LL/2LJ/2LH-1

U237 Setting finisher stack quantity
Description
Sets the number of sheets of each stack on the main tray and on the middle tray in 4000-sheet
finisher.
Purpose
To change the setting when a stack malfunction has occurred.
Method
Display Description
Main Tray Number of sheets of stack on the main tray
Middle Tray Number of sheets of stack on the middle tray for staple mode
Setting: [Main Tray]

Display Description
0 Number of sheets of stack on the main tray: 4000 sheets
1 Number of sheets of stack on the main tray: 1500 sheets
Initial setting: 0
Setting: [Middle Tray]

Display Description
0 Number of sheets of stack on the middle tray for staple mode:
65 sheets
1 Number of sheets of stack on the middle tray for staple mode:
30 sheets
Initial setting: 0
Number of sheets of stack on the internal tray for non-staple copying: 10 sheets

2LL/2LJ/2LH

U240 Checking the operation of the finisher
Description
Turns each motor and solenoid of 1000-sheet finisher or 4000-sheet finisher ON.
Purpose
To check the operation of each motor and solenoid of the 1000-sheet finisher or 4000-sheet fin-
isher.
Method
2. Select the item to be checked.
Display Description
Motor Checking the motor of the document finisher
Solenoid Checking the solenoid of the document finisher
Mail Box Checking the motor of the mailbox
Booklet Checking the motor of the center-folding unit
Method: [Motor]
Display Description
Feed In(H) DF paper entry motor (DFPEM) is turned on at high speed
Feed In(L) DF paper entry motor (DFPEM) is turned on at low speed
Middle(H) DF middle motor (DFMM) is turned on at high speed
Middle(L) DF middle motor (DFMM) is turned on at low speed
Eject(H) DF eject motor (DFEM) is turned on at high speed
Eject(L) DF eject motor (DFEM) is turned on at low speed
Save(H) DF drum motor (DFDRM) is turned on at high speed
Save(L) DF drum motor (DFDRM) is turned on at low speed
Tray DF tray motor (DFTM) is turned on
Staple Move DF slide motor (DFSLM) is turned on
Staple DF staple motor (DFSTM) is turned on
Width Test(A3) DF side registration motor 1, 2 (DFSRM1, 2) is turned on
Width Test(LD) DF side registration motor 1, 2 (DFSRM1, 2) is turned on
Beat DF paddle motor (DFPDM) is turned on
Eject Unlock(HP) DF eject release motor (DFERM) is turned on to home position
Sort Test DF shift motor 1, 2 (DFSFM1, 2) is turned on
Eject Unlock(30) DF eject release motor (DFERM) drive position 30-sheet stack
Eject Unlock(50) DF eject release motor (DFERM) drive position 50-sheet stack
Eject Unlock(Fix) DF eject release motor (DFERM) fixed drive position

2LL/2LJ/2LH-1

U240
Display Description
Eject Unlock(Full) DF eject release motor (DFERM) full-open drive position
Punch Punch motor (PUM) is turned on
Punch Move Punch slide motor (PUSLM) is turned on
Method: [Solenoid]
Display Description
Sub Tray DF feedshift solenoid (DFFSSOL) is turned on
Save Drum DF drum solenoid (DFDRSOL) is turned on
Booklet DF center fold solenoid (DFCFSOL) is turned on
Punch Punch solenoid (PUSOL) is turned on
Three Fold CF feedshift solenoid (CFFSSOL) is turned on
Method: [Mail Box]

Display Description
Conv MB drive motor (MBDM) is turned on at paper conveying
Branch MB drive motor (MBDM) is turned on at feedshift operation
Method: [Booklet]
Display Description
Folding CF main motor (CFMM) is turned on
Blade CF blade motor (CFBM) is turned on
Bundle Up CF adjustment motor 2 (CFADM2) is turned on
Bundle Down CF adjustment motor 1 (CFADM1) is turned on
Staple CF staple motor (CFSTM) is turned on
Width Test(A3) CF side registration motor 1, 2 (CFSRM1, 2) is turned on
Width Test(LD) CF side registration motor 1, 2 (CFSRM1, 2) is turned on
Feed In CF paper entry motor (CFPEM) is turned on
Completion

2LL/2LJ/2LH

U241 Checking the operation of the switches of the finisher
Description
Displays the status of each switches and sensors of 1000-sheet finisher or 4000-sheet finisher.
Purpose
To check the operation of each switches and sensors of the 1000-sheet finisher or 4000-sheet
finisher.
Method
2. Select the item to be checked.
Display Description
Finisher Checking the switch and sensor of the document finisher
Mail Box Checking the switch and sensor of the mailbox
Booklet Checking the switch and sensor of the center-folding unit
Punch Checking the switch and sensor of the punch unit
Method: [Finisher]
reverse.
Display Description
Front Cover DF front cover switch (DFFCSW)
MPT DF eject cover switch (DFECSW)
Top Cover DF top cover switch (DFTCSW)
Tray U-Limit DF tray sensor 1 (DFTS1)
Tray HP2 DF tray sensor 2 (DFTS2)
Tray Middle DF tray sensor 3 (DFTS3)
Tray L-Limit DF tray sensor 4 (DFTS4)
Tray L-Limit(BL) DF tray sensor 5 (DFTS5)
Tray Top DF tray upper surface sensor (DFTUSS)
HP DF paper entry sensor (DFPES)
Sub Tray Eject DF sub eject sensor (DFSES)
Middle Tray Eject DF middle eject sensor (DFMES)
Drum DF drum sensor (DFDRS)
Staple HP DF slide sensor (DFSLS)
Middle Tray DF middle tray sensor (DFMTS)
Width Front HP DF side registration sensor 1 (DFSRS1)
Width Tail HP DF side registration sensor 2 (DFSRS2)
Bundle Eject HP DF bundle discharge sensor (DFBDS)

2LL/2LJ/2LH

U241
Display Description
Match Paddle DF adjustment sensor (DFADS)
Lead Paddle DF paddle sensor (DFPDS)
Shift Front HP DF shift sensor 1 (DFSFS1)
Shift Tail HP DF shift sensor 2 (DFSFS2)
Shift Unlock HP DF shift release sensor (DFSFRS)
Sub Tray Full DF sub tray full sensor (DFSTFS)
Shift Set DF shift set sensor (DFSFSS)
Method: [Mail Box]

reverse.
Display Description
Eject MB eject sensor (MBES)
Cover MB cover open/close switch (MBCOCSW)
Over Flow1 MB overflow sensor 1 (MBOFS1)
Motor HP MB paper entry sensor (MBPES)

2LL/2LJ/2LH

U241 Method: [Booklet]
reverse.
Display Description
HP CF paper entry sensor (CFPES)
Eject CF eject sensor (CFES)
Paper CF paper sensor (CFPS)
Tray Full CF tray full sensor (CFTFS)
Bundle Up HP CF adjustment sensor 1 (CFADS1)
Bundle Down HP CF adjustment sensor 2 (CFADS2)
Width Up HP CF side registration sensor 1 (CFSRS1)
Width Down HP CF side registration sensor 2 (CFSRS2)
Blade HP CF blade sensor (CFBLS)
Tray CF tray switch (CFTSW)
Set CF set switch (CFSSW)
Left Guide CF left guide switch (CFLGSW)
Vertical Feed CF paper conveying sensor (CFPCS)
Method: [Punch]
reverse.
Display Description
Punch HP Punch home position sensor (PUHPS)
Edge Face1 Punch paper edge sensor (PUPES)
Tank Punch tank set switch (PUTSSW)
Tank Full Punch tank full sensor (PUTFS)
Completion

2LL/2LJ/2LH

U243 Checking the operation of the DP motors
Description
Turns the motors or solenoids in the DP on.
Purpose
To check the operation of the DP motors and solenoids.
Method
Display Description
Feed Motor DP original feed motor (DPOFM) is turned on
Conv Motor DP original conveying motor (DPOCM) is turned on
Rev Motor *1 DP switchback motor (DPSBM) is turned on
Lift Motor DP lift motor (DPLM) is turned on
Rev Press Sol *1 DP pressure solenoid (DPPSOL) is turned on
Rev Branch Sol*1 DP feedshift solenoid (DPFSSOL) is turned on
Eject Motor *2 DP eject motor (DPEM) is turned on
Regist Motor*2 DP registration motor (DPRM) is turned on
DP Fan *2 DP fan motor 1 (DPFM1) is turned on
CIS Fan*2 DP fan motor 2 (DPFM2) is turned on
4. To turn each motor off, press the stop key.
Completion
Press the stop key when operation stops. The screen for selecting a maintenance item No. is dis-
played.

2LL/2LJ/2LH

U244 Checking the DP switches
Description
Displays the status of the respective switches and sensors in the DP.
Purpose
To check if respective switches and sensors in the DP operate correctly.
Method
reverse.
Display Description
Feed DP feed sensor (DPFS)
Regist*1 DP registration sensor (DPRS)
Timing DP timing sensor (DPTS)
CIS Head*2 DP CIS sensor (DPCS)
Tray*1 DP switchback sensor (DPSBS)
Set DP original sensor (DPOS)
Longitudinal DP original length switch (DPOLSW)
Lift U-Limit DP lift sensor 1 (DPLS1)
Lift L-Limit DP lift sensor 2 (DPLS2)
Cover Open DP interlock switch (DPILSW)
Open DP open/close switch (DPOCSW)
Eject DP eject sensor (DPES)
Slant*2 DP slant sensor (DPSS)
Completion

2LL/2LJ/2LH

U245 Checking messages
Description
Displays a list of messages on the touch panel of the operation panel.
Purpose
To check the messages to be displayed.
Method
2. Change the message using the cursor up/down keys.
When a message number is entered with the numeric keys and then the start key is pressed,
the message corresponding the specified number is displayed.
3. Change the language using the +/- keys.
Completion

2LL/2LJ/2LH

U246 Setting the finisher
Description
Provides various settings for the 1000-sheet finisher or 4000-sheet finisher, if furnished.
Purpose
Adjustment of registration stop timing in punch mode
Adjust if skewed paper conveying occurs or if the copy paper is Z-folded in punch mode.
Adjustment of paper stop timing in the punch mode
To adjust this item when the position of a punch hole is different from the specified one.
Adjustment of center position timing in the punch mode
Adjusts the center position of a punch hole in punch mode if the position is not proper.
Adjustment of front/rear side registration home position
Provides optimization when paper jam occurs due to an inferior fitting of the side registration
guides to paper.
Adjustment of front/rear shift home position
Performed when adjustment is lost with the ejected paper
Adjusting of front/back stapling home position
Adjusts the stapling position in the staple mode if the position is not proper.
Adjustment of upper/lower side registration home position
Provides optimization when paper jam occurs due to an inferior fitting of the side registration
guides to paper.
Adjustment of booklet stapling position
Adjusts the booklet stapling position in the stitching mode if the position is not proper.
Adjustment of center folding position
Adjusts the center folding position in the stitching mode if the position is not proper.
Adjustment of tri- folding position
Adjusts the tri-folding position in the stitching mode if the position is not proper.
Method
Display Description
Finisher Adjustment of 1000-sheet finisher and 4000-sheet finisher
Booklet Adjustment of center-folding unit
Method: [Finisher]
Display Description
Punch Regist Adjustment of registration stop timing in punch mode
Punch Feed Adjustment of the paper stop timing in punch mode
Punch Width Adjustment of the center position timing in punch mode
Width Front HP Adjustment of front side registration home position
Width Tail HP Adjustment of rear side registration home position
Shift Front HP Adjustment of front shift home position
Shift Tail HP Adjustment of rear shift home position
Staple HP Adjustment of front and back stapling home position

2LL/2LJ/2LH

U246 Setting: [Punch Regist]
1. Select [Punch Regist].
Description Setting Initial Change in
Adjustment of registration stop timing -20 to 20 0 0.25 mm
If skewed paper conveying occurs (sample 1), increase the setting value. If the copy paper is
Z-folded (sample 2), decrease the setting value.
Sample 1 Sample 2
Figure 1-3-18
Setting: [Punch Feed]

1. Select [Punch Feed].
Adjustment of the paper stop timing -10 to 10 0 0.52 mm
If the distance of the position of a punch hole is smaller than the specified value A, increase
the setting value. If the distance is larger than the value A, decrease the setting value.
A
Preset value A: 13 mm (metric)
9.5 mm (inch)
Figure 1-3-19

2LL/2LJ/2LH

U246 Setting: [Punch Width]
1. Select [Punch Width].
Adjustment of the punch center position timing -4 to 4 0 0.52 mm
If the punch hole is too close to the front of the machine, increase the setting value. If the
punch hole is too close to the rear of the machine, decrease the setting value.
Center line
(within 0.5 mm)
Sample 1 Sample 2
Figure 1-3-20
Setting: [Width Front HP/Width Tail HP]

1. Select [Width Front HP] or [Width Tail HP].
Adjustment of front side registration home position -15 to 15 0 0.19 mm
Adjustment of rear side registration home position -15 to 15 0 0.19 mm
4. Press the stop key. The screen for selecting a maintenance item No. is displayed.
5. Enter maintenance mode U240 and select [Motor], then [Width Test(A3)].
The width guides of the middle tray will move to A3-size position.
6. Pull the middle tray, insert paper between the guides and check that paper is abut the guides.
7. Repeat the above adjustment until paper is properly in position.
Setting: [Shift Front HP/Shift Tail HP]

1. Select [Shift Front HP] or [Shift Tail HP].
Adjustment of front shift home position -15 to 15 0 0.19 mm
Adjustment of rear shift home position -15 to 15 0 0.19 mm
5. Enter maintenance mode U240 and select [Motor], then [Sort Test].
6. Repeat the above adjustment until eject paper is properly in position.

2LL/2LJ/2LH

U246 Setting: [Staple HP]
1. Select [Staple HP].
Adjustment of front and back stapling home position -15 to 15 0 0.19 mm
When staple positions are off toward the front side of the machine (sample 1), increase the
setting value. When staple positions are off toward the rear side of the machine (sample 2),
decrease the setting value.
Sample 1 Sample 2
Figure 1-3-21
Method: [Booklet]
Display Description
Width Up HP Adjustment of upper side registration home position
Width Down HP Adjustment of lower side registration home position
Staple Pos1 Adjustment of booklet stapling position for A4/Letter size
Staple Pos2 Adjustment of booklet stapling position for B4/Legal size
Staple Pos3 Adjustment of booklet stapling position for A3/Ledger/8K size
Booklet Pos1 Adjustment of center folding position for A4/Letter size
Booklet Pos2 Adjustment of center folding position for B4/Legal size
Booklet Pos3 Adjustment of center folding position for A3/Ledger/8K size
Three Fold Adjustment of tri-folding position

2LL/2LJ/2LH

U246 Setting: [Width Up HP/Width Down HP]
1. Select [Width Up HP] or [Width Down HP].
Adjustment of upper side registration home position -15 to 15 0 0.34 mm
Adjustment of lower side registration home position -15 to 15 0 0.34 mm
5. Enter maintenance mode U240 and select [Booklet], then [Width Test(A3)].
The width guides of the center-folding unit will move to A3-size position.
6. Pull the center-folding unit, insert paper between the guides and check that paper is abut the
guides.
7. Repeat the above adjustment until paper is properly in position.
Setting: [Staple Pos]

1. Select [Staple Pos1], [Staple Pos2] or [Staple Pos3].
Adjustment of booklet stapling position for -15 to 15 0 0.32 mm
A4/Letter size
B4/Legal size
A3/Ledger/8K size
When staples are placed too far right (sample 1), decrease the preset value. When staples
are placed too far left (sample 2), increase the preset value.
Reference value: within 2 mm
2 mm 2 mm
Sample 1 Sample 2
Figure 1-3-22

2LL/2LJ/2LH

U246 Setting: [Booklet Pos]
1. Select [Booklet Pos1], [Booklet Pos2] or [Booklet Pos3].
Adjustment of center folding position for A4/Letter size -15 to 15 0 0.32 mm
Adjustment of center folding position for B4/Legal size -15 to 15 0 0.32 mm
Adjustment of center folding position for A3/Ledger/ -15 to 15 0 0.32 mm
8K size
When the centerfold position too far right (sample 1), increase the preset value. When the
centerfold position too far left (sample 2), decrease the setting value.
Reference value A: A4, Letter: Length of paper 1/2 2 mm
A3, Ledger, B4: Length of paper 1/2 3 mm
A
Center line Sample 1 Sample 2
Figure 1-3-23
Setting: [Three Fold]

1. Select [Three Fold].
Adjustment of tri-folding position -15 to 15 0 0.32 mm
When the tri-fold position too far right (sample 1), increase the preset value. When the tri-fold
position too far left (sample 2), decrease the setting value.
Reference value A: 7.0 2 mm
A
Sample 1 Sample 2
Figure 1-3-24
Completion

2LL/2LJ/2LH

U247 Setting the paper feed device
Description
Turns on motor and clutches of paper feeder device.
Purpose
To check the operation of motor and clutches of paper feed device.
Method
2. Select the paper feed device.
Display Description
2PF Paper feeder
LCF Large capacity feeder
Side Deck Side deck
Method: [2PF]
1. Press [Motor] or [Device] and select the item.
Display Description
Motor Off PF paper feed motor (PFPFM) is turned off
On PF paper feed motor (PFPFM) is turned on
Device C1 Clutch PF paper conveying clutch 1 (PFPCCL1) is turned on
C2 Clutch PF paper conveying clutch 2 (PFPCCL2) is turned on
V Feed(H) Clutch PF paper feed clutch 1 (PFPFCL1) is turned on
V Feed(L) Clutch PF paper feed clutch 2 (PFPFCL2) is turned on
Cassette1 Solenoid PF pickup solenoid 1 (PFPUSOL1) is turned on

2LL/2LJ/2LH

U247 Method: [LCF]
Display Description
Motor Off PF paper feed motor (PFPFM) is turned off
On PF paper feed motor (PFPFM) is turned on
Device C1 Clutch PF paper conveying clutch 1 (PFPCCL1) is turned on
C2 Clutch PF paper conveying clutch 2 (PFPCCL2) is turned on
V Feed Clutch PF paper conveying clutch 3 (PFPCCL3) is turned on
H Feed1 Clutch PF paper feed clutch 1 (PFPFCL1) is turned on
H Feed2 Clutch PF paper feed clutch 2 (PFPFCL2) is turned on
Method: [Side Deck]

Display Description
Motor Off SF paper feed motor (SFPFM) is turned off
On SF paper feed motor (SFPFM) is turned on
Device C1 Clutch SF paper conveying clutch (SFPCCL) is turned on
Cassette1 Solenoid SF pickup solenoid (PFPUSOL) is turned on
Completion

2LL/2LJ/2LH

U249 Finisher operation test
Description
Performs operating tests on the 4000-sheet finisher.
Purpose
To check the operation of the 4000-sheet finisher.
Method
2. Select the item.
Display Description
Punch Position Check the stop position of punching
Booklet Pass Check the paper paths to the center-folding unit
4. Press the system menu key to make a test copy.
Completion
U250 Checking/clearing the maintenance cycle
Description
Changes preset values for maintenance cycle and automatic grayscale adjustment.
Purpose
Provides changing the time when the message to acknowledge to conduct maintenance and
automatic grayscale adjustment is periodically displayed.
Setting
3. Change the setting using the +- keys or numeric keys.
M.Cnt A Preset values for maintenance cycle (kit A) 0 to 9999999
M.Cnt HT Preset values for automatic grayscale adjustment 0 to 9999999
Completion

2LL/2LJ/2LH

U251 Checking/clearing the maintenance counter
Description
Displays and clears or changes the maintenance count and automatic grayscale adjustment
count.
Purpose
To verify the maintenance counter count and automatic grayscale count. Also to clear the count
during maintenance service.
Setting
2. Select the item to be changed.
M.Cnt A Count value for maintenance cycle (kit A) 0 to 9999999
M.Cnt HT Automatic grayscale adjustment count 0 to 9999999
Clearing
1. Select [Clear].
2. Press the start key. The setting value is cleared.
Completion

2LL/2LJ/2LH

U252 Setting the destination
Description
Switches the operations and screens of the machine according to the destination.
Purpose
To be executed after initializing the backup RAM, in order to return the setting to the value before
replacement or initialization.
Method
2. Select the destination.
Display Description
Japan Metric Metric (Japan) specifications
Inch Inch (North America) specifications
Europe Metric Metric (Europe) specifications
Asia Pacific Metric (Asia Pacific) specifications
Australia Australia specifications
China China specifications
Korea Korea specifications
Error codes
Codes Description
0001 Entity error
0020 Engine error
0040 Scanner error

2LL/2LJ/2LH

U253 Switching between double and single counts
Description
Switches the count system for the total counter and other counters for every color mode.
Purpose
Used to select, according to the preference of the user (copy service provider), if A3/Ledger
paper is to be counted as one sheet (single count) or two sheets (double count).
Setting
Display Description
B/W Count system of black/white mode
Displayed only if the setting of U276 (Setting the copy count mode) is Mode1.
3. Select the count system.
Display Description
SGL(All) Single count for all size paper
DBL(A3/Ledger) Double count for A3/Ledger size or larger
DBL(B4) Double count for B4 size or larger
DBL(Folio) Double count for Folio size or larger
Initial setting: DBL(A3/Ledger)
Completion

2LL/2LJ/2LH

U260 Selecting the timing for copy counting
Description
Changes the copy count timing for the total counter and other counters.
Purpose
To be set according to user request.
Setting
2. Select the copy count timing.
Display Description
Feed When secondary paper feed starts
Eject When the paper is ejected
Initial setting: Eject
Completion
U265 Setting OEM purchaser code
Description
Sets the OEM purchaser code.
Purpose
Sets the code when replacing the main PWB and the like.
Setting
2. Change the setting value using the numeric keys.

2LL/2LJ/2LH

U271 Setting the page count
Description
Banner counting
Purpose
To change when modifying counting Banner
Setting
2. Select the item.
Display Description Setting Initial
range setting
Banner A Counting for Banner A (470.1mm to 2 to 30 2
915mm/18.51 to 36)
Banner B Counting for Banner B (915.1mm to 2 to 30 3
1,220mm/36.01 to 48)
Completion
U278 Setting the delivery date
Description
Enter delivery date in month, day, and year.
Purpose
To operate when installing the machine. Perform this to confirm the delivery date.
Method
2. Select [Today].
3. Press the start key. The delivery date is set.
Clearing
1. Select [Clear].
2. Press the start key. The delivery date is cleared.
Completion

2LL/2LJ/2LH

U285 Setting service status page
Description
Determines displaying the print coverage report on reporting.
Purpose
According to user request, changes the setting.
Setting
Display Description
On Displays the print coverage
Off Not to display the print coverage
Initial setting: On
Completion
U323 Setting abnormal temperature and humidity warning
Description
Specify whether or not a notice is displayed on the operation panel when abnormal temperature
and humidity is detected.
Purpose
According to user request, changes the setting.
Setting
Display Description
On Displays the abnormal temperature and humidity warning
Off Not to display the abnormal temperature and humidity warning
Initial setting: On
Completion

2LL/2LJ/2LH-1

U325 Setting the paper interval
Description
Determines the interval between pages and the toner replenishment amount when printing pages
with high print coverage.
Purpose
Modify the settings only if a spotted background or uneven density appears when printing pages
with high print coverage.
Method
Display Description
Interval Paper interval control ON/OFF setting
Mode Setting mode of the paper interval control
Setting: [Interval]
Display Description
On Paper interval control is performed
Off Paper interval control is not performed
Setting: [Mode]
Setting Initial
Display Description
range setting
Mode Paper interval control mode 1 to 10 1
Completion

2LL/2LJ/2LH

U326 Setting the black line cleaning indication
Description
Sets whether to display the cleaning guidance when detecting the black line.
Purpose
Displays the cleaning guidance in order to make the call for service with the black line decrease
by the rubbish on the contact glass when scanning from the DP.
Method
Display Description
Black Line Mode Black line cleaning guidance ON/OFF setting
Black Line Cnt Setting counts of the cleaning guidance indication
Setting: [Black Line Mode]

Display Description
On Displays the cleaning guidance
Off Not to display the cleaning guidance
Initial setting: On
Setting: [Black Line Cnt]

Setting Initial
Display Description
range setting
Cnt Setting counts of the cleaning guidance indi- 0 to 255 8
cation ( x 1000 sheets)
When setting is 0, the black line cleaning indication is displayed only if the black line is
detected.
Completion

2LL/2LJ/2LH-1

U327 Setting the cassette heater control
Description
Sets the cassette heater control.
Purpose
To change the setting according to the machine installation environment.
Setting
Display Description
On Cassette heater ON
Off Cassette heater OFF
Completion
U332 Setting the size conversion factor
Description
Sets the coefficient of nonstandard sizes in relation to the A4/Letter size. The coefficient set here
is used to convert the black ratio in relation to the A4/Letter size and to display the result in user
simulation.
Purpose
To set the coefficient for converting the black ratio for nonstandard sizes in relation to the A4/Let-
ter size.
Setting
2. Change the setting using the +/-keys or numeric keys.
Setting Initial
Display Description
range setting
Rate Size coefficient 0.1 to 3.0 1.0
Completion

2LL/2LJ/2LH-3

U340 Setting the applied mode
Description
Allocates memory to ensure that there is sufficient memory available for the printer to use as a
working area.
Purpose
Modify the memory allocation if insufficient memory for transparency support or XPS direct print-
ing occurs.
Method
Display Description
Adj Memory Setting the memory allocation
Adj Max Job Setting the maximum of multiple jobs
Setting: [Adj Memory]

Setting Initial
Display Description
range setting
Image Area temporarily used to create output 0 to 50 (MB) 50
image.
Image(Detail) Area temporarily used to hold down- 0 to 50 (MB) 1
loaded font and other data.
Set the values below in case print failure occurs with the memory shortage.
(recommended value)
Image : +50
Image(Detaile) : +1
Supplement
The work area for copy is small and it may cause output failure if the values are large.
Setting: [Adj Max Job]

1. Change the setting using the +/-keys or numeric keys.
Setting Initial
Display Description
range setting
Copy Maximum copy (Scan To Print) Jobs 10 to 50 10
Printer Maximum printer (Host To Print) Jobs 10 to 50 -
The maximum Printer jobs should be (maximum jobs) (maximum copy jobs).
Completion

2LL/2LJ/2LH

U341 Specific paper feed location setting for printing function
Description
Sets a paper feed location specified for printer output (only if a printer kit is installed).
Purpose
To use a paper feed location only for printer output.
A paper feed location specified for printer output cannot be used for copy output.
Method
2. Select the paper feed location for the printer.
Two or more cassette can be selected.
Display Description
Cassette1 Cassette 1
Cassette3 Cassette 3 (paper feeder/large capacity feeder)
Cassette5 Cassette 5 (side deck)
When an optional paper feed device is not installed, the corresponding count is not dis-
played.
Completion
U343 Switching between duplex/simplex copy mode
Description
Switches the initial setting between duplex and simplex copy.
Purpose
To be set according to frequency of use: set to the more frequently used mode.
Setting
Display Description
On Duplex copy
Off Simplex copy
Completion

2LL/2LJ/2LH

U345 Setting the value for maintenance due indication
Description
Sets when to display a message notifying that the time for maintenance is about to be reached,
by setting the number of copies that can be made before the current maintenance cycle ends.
When the difference between the number of copies of the maintenance cycle and that of the
maintenance count reaches the set value, the message is displayed.
Purpose
To change the time for maintenance due indication.
Setting
Setting Initial
Display Description
range setting
Cnt Time for maintenance due indication 0 to 9999 0
(Remaining number of copies that can be made
before the current maintenance cycle ends)
Completion

2LL/2LJ/2LH-1

U402 Adjusting margins of image printing
Description
Adjusts margins for image printing.
Purpose
Make the adjustment if margins are incorrect.
Adjustment
Display Description
Lead Printer leading edge margin 0.0 to 10.0 4.0 0.1 mm
A Margin Printer left margin 0.0 to 10.0 3.0 0.1 mm
C Margin Printer right margin 0.0 to 10.0 3.0 0.1 mm
Trail Printer trailing edge margin 0.0 to 10.0 3.9 0.1 mm
Increasing the value makes the margin wider, and decreasing it makes the margin narrower.
Printer leading edge margin

(4.0 +1.5/-1.0 mm)
Printer Printer
left margin right margin
(2.5 +1.5/-2.0 mm) (2.5 +1.5/-2.0 mm)
Printer trailing edge margin

(4.0 mm or less)
Figure 1-3-25
Caution
If the above adjustment does not optimize the margins, perform the following maintenance
modes.
U039 U034
U402
(P.1-3-38) (P.1-3-34)
Completion

2LL/2LJ/2LH

U403 Adjusting margins for scanning an original on the contact glass
Description
Adjusts margins for scanning the original on the contact glass.
Purpose
Adjustment
Display Description
A Margin Scanner left margin 0.0 to 10.0 2.0 0.5 mm
B Margin Scanner leading edge margin 0.0 to 10.0 2.0 0.5 mm
C Margin Scanner right margin 0.0 to 10.0 2.0 0.5 mm
D Margin Scanner trailing edge margin 0.0 to 10.0 2.0 0.5 mm
Leading edge margin of the copy image

(4.0 +1.5/-1.0 mm)
Left margin of Right margin of

the copy image the copy image
(2.5 +1.5/-2.0 mm) (2.5 +1.5/-2.0 mm)
Trailing edge margin of the copy image

(4.0 mm or less)
Figure 1-3-26
Caution
modes.
U039 U034 U402

U403
(P.1-3-38) (P.1-3-34) (P.1-3-133)
Completion

2LL/2LJ/2LH-1

U404 Adjusting margins for scanning an original from the DP
Description
Adjusts margins for scanning the original from the DP.
Purpose
Adjustment
Display Description
A Margin DP left margin 0.0 to 10.0 3.0 0.5 mm
B Margin DP leading edge margin 0.0 to 10.0 2.5 0.5 mm
C Margin DP right margin 0.0 to 10.0 3.0 0.5 mm
D Margin DP trailing edge margin 0.0 to 10.0 4.0 0.5 mm
A Margin DP left margin (second side) 0.0 to 10.0 3.0 0.5 mm
(Back)*
B Margin DP leading edge margin 0.0 to 10.0 2.5 0.5 mm
(Back)* (second side)
C Margin DP right margin (second side) 0.0 to 10.0 3.0 0.5 mm
(Back)*
D Margin DP trailing edge margin 0.0 to 10.0 4.0 0.5 mm
(Back)* (second side)
* : Dual scan DP only
6. Change the setting value using the cursor left/right keys or numeric keys.
DP leading edge margin

(4.0 +1.5/-1.0 mm)
DP left margin DP right margin

(2.5 +1.5/-2.0 mm) (2.5 +1.5/-2.0 mm)
DP trailing edge margin

(4.0 mm or less)
Figure 1-3-27

2LL/2LJ/2LH

U404 Caution
modes.
U039 U034 U402 U403

(P.1-3-38) (P.1-3-34) (P.1-3-133) (P.1-3-134) U404
Completion

2LL/2LJ/2LH

U407 Adjusting the leading edge registration for memory image printing
Description
Adjusts the leading edge registration during memory copying.
Purpose
Make the following adjustment if there is a regular error between the leading edge of the copy
image on the front face and that on the reverse face during duplex switchback copying.
Caution
Before making this adjustment, ensure that the following adjustments have been made in mainte-
nance mode
U034 U402 U066 U403 U071

(P.1-3-33) (P.1-3-133) (P.1-3-49) (P.1-3-134) (P.1-3-54)
U404
U407
(P.1-3-135)
Adjustment
Display Description
Adj Data Leading edge registration for -47 to 47 0 0.1 mm
memory image printing
For copy example 1, decrease the value. For copy example 2, increase the value.
Original Copy Copy

example 1 example 2
Figure 1-3-28
Completion

2LL/2LJ/2LH

U410 Adjusting the halftone automatically
Description
Carries out processing for the data acquisition that is required in order to perform either auto-
matic adjustment of the halftone or the ID correction operation.
Purpose
Performed when the quality of reproduced halftones has dropped.
Method
2. Select [Normal Mode].
3. Press the start key. A test patterns 1 and 2 are outputted.
4. Place the output test pattern 1 as the original.
Adjustment is made (first time).
6. Place the output test pattern 2 as the original.
Adjustment is made (second time).
8. When normally completed, [Finish] is displayed.
If a problem occurs during auto adjustment, error code is displayed.
Error codes
Codes Description Codes Description
S001 Patch not detected E001 Engine status error
S002 Original deviation in the main E002 Engine sensor error
scanning direction
EFFF Engine other error
S003 Original deviation in the auxil- C001 Controller error
iary scanning direction
C100 Adjustment value error
S004 Original inclination error C200 Adjustment value error
S005 Original type error CFFF Controller other error
SFFF Scanner other error
Completion

2LL/2LJ/2LH-1

U411 Adjusting the scanner automatically
Description
Uses a specified original and automatically adjusts the following items in the scanner and the DP
scanning sections.
Purpose
To perform automatic adjustment of various items in the scanner and the DP scanning sections.
Perform adjustments using a new test chart (chart 1) when replacing ISC PWB, LED lamp PWB,
ISU, CIS and/or DP main PWB.
Method
2. Select the item.
Original to be used
Display Description
for adjustment (P/N)
Table (Chart1) Automatic adjustment in the scanner sec- $9*5%
tion (chart 1)
DP FaceUp Do not use. $9*5%
(Chart1) Automatic adjustment in the DP scanning
section (first side) (chart 1)
DP FaceDown Automatic adjustment in the DP scanning $9*5%
(Chart1) section (second side) (chart 1)
Table (Chart2) Automatic adjustment in the scanner sec- $9*5.
tion (chart 2)
DP FaceUp Automatic adjustment in the DP scanning $9*5)
(Chart2) section (first side) (chart 2)
DP FaceDown Automatic adjustment in the DP scanning $9*5)/
(Chart2) section (second side) (chart 2) AVGR05133T/
AVGR05134Q
Target Set-up for obtaining the target value -
DP Auto Adj Automatic adjustment of automatic docu- -
ment processor using the chart printed
from the machine
Method: [Table (Chart1)]

To manually enter the target value
1. Enter the target values which are shown at the bottom of the specified original
(P/N: $9*5%) executing maintenance item U425.
2. Set a specified original on the platen.
3. Enter maintenance item U411.
4. Select [Target].
5. Select [U425] and press the start key.
6. Select [Table (Chart1)].
7. Select the item.

2LL/2LJ/2LH-1

U411 To automatically enter the target value
1. Enter the value for [Adjust Original] using maintenance item U425.
2. Set a specified original (P/N: $9*5%) on the platen.
4. Select [Target].
5. Select [Auto] and press the start key.
7. Select the item.
Display Description
All Executing the all scanner adjustment
LED/AGC Executing the adjustment for LED light quantity/AGC
White Executing the white reference compensation coefficient
Input Executing the adjustment for magnification, leading edge tim-
ing and center line
C.A. Executing the adjustment for chromatic aberration filter
MTF Executing the adjustment for MTF filter
Gamma Executing the adjustment for input gamma
Matrix Executing the adjustment for matrix
8. Press the start key. Auto adjustment starts.
* : When automatic adjustment has normally completed, [OK] is displayed. If a problem
occurs during auto adjustment, error code is displayed and operation stops. Should this
happen, determine the details of the problem and repeat the procedure from the begin-
ning.
Method: [DP FaceUp (Chart1)]

2. Set a specified original on the DP face up.
4. Select [Target].
6. Select [DP FaceUp (Chart1)].
7. Select [Input].
To automatically enter the target value

2. Set a specified original (P/N: $9*5%) on the DP face up.
4. Select [Target].
7. Select [Input].

2LL/2LJ/2LH-1

U411
Display Description
Input Executing the adjustment for input gamma and matrix
ning.
Method: [DP FaceDown (Chart1)]

2. Set a specified original on the DP face down.
4. Select [Target].
6. Select [DP FaceDown (Chart1)].
7. Select [All].
To automatically enter the target value

2. Set a specified original (P/N: $9*5%) on the DP face down.
4. Select [Target].
6. Select [DP FaceDown (Chart1)].
7. Select [All].
Display Description
All Executing the adjustment in the DP scanning section (second
side) for magnification, leading edge timing, center line, MTF
filter, input gamma and matrix
ning.

2LL/2LJ/2LH-1

U411 Method: [Table (Chart2)]
1. Enter the target values which are shown on the back of the specified original
(P/N: $9*5.) executing maintenance item U425.
2. Set a specified original on the platen.
4. Select [Target].
7. Select the item.
Display Description
All Executing the all scanner adjustment
Input Executing the adjustment for magnification, leading edge tim-
ing and center line
C.A. Executing the adjustment for chromatic aberration filter
MTF Executing the adjustment for MTF filter
Gamma Executing the adjustment for input gamma
Matrix Executing the adjustment for matrix
ning.
Method: [DP FaceUp (Chart2)]

1. Measure the leading edge, main scanning, and auxiliary scanning of the specified original
3N: $9*5)) and enter the values by executing maintenance item U425.
2. Set a specified original (P/N: $9*5)) on the DP.
Cut the trailing edge of the original.
5 mm
149 1 mm
74 1 mm
Figure 1-3-29
4. Select [Target].
7. Select [INPUT].
Display Description
Input Executing the adjustment in the DP scanning section (first
side) for magnification, leading edge timing and center line

2LL/2LJ/2LH

U411 8. Press the start key. Auto adjustment starts.
ning.
Method: [DP FaceDown (Chart2)]

1. Place the specified original for acquiring gamma target data (P/N: AVGR05133T) on the
platen, and press the start key.
2. Place the specified original for acquiring matrix target data (P/N: AVGR05134Q) on the platen,
and press the start key.
When normally completed, [OK] is displayed.
3. Select the item.
Original to be used
Display Description
for adjustment (P/N)
All Executing the adjustment in the DP scan- $9*5)/
ning section (second side) for magnifica- AVGR05133T/
tion, leading edge timing, center line, MTF AVGR05134Q
filter, input gamma and matrix
Input Executing the adjustment in the DP scan- $9*5)
ning section (second side) for magnifica-
tion, leading edge timing and center line
MTF/Gamma Executing the adjustment in the DP scan- AVGR05133T
ning section (second side) for MTF filter
and input gamma
Matrix Executing the adjustment in the DP scan- AVGR05134Q
ning section (second side) for matrix
[Input]
1. Select [Input].
2. Set a specified original (P/N: $9*5)) on the DP face down.
[MTF/Gamma]
1. Select [MTF/Gamma].
2. Set a specified original (P/N: AVGR05133T) on the DP face down.
[Matrix]
1. Select [Matrix].
2. Set a specified original (P/N: AVGR05134Q) on the DP face down.
When [ALL] is selected, the adjustment of [Input], [MTF/Gamma] and [Matrix] can be executed at
once. When adjusting, place the three specified originals on the DP face down, and then press
the start key.
Set the original AVGR05134Q, and then place AVGR05133T and $9*5) in order on the
top of the original.

2LL/2LJ/2LH

U411 * : When automatic adjustment has normally completed, [OK] is displayed. If a problem
ning.
Method: [DP Auto Adj]

1. Load A4/letter paper.
2. Press the start key to output the original for adjustment.
3. Set the output the original for adjustment and press the start key.
4. Set the output the original for adjustment on the DP face up.
5. Press the start key to scan documents.
6. Press the start key. Auto adjustment of first side starts.
7. Set the output the original for adjustment on the DP face down.
8. Press the start key to scan documents.
9. Press the start key. Auto adjustment of second side starts.
ning.
Error Codes
Codes Description
01 Black band detection error (scanner auxiliary scanning direction leading edge
skew )
02 Black band detection error (scanner main scanning direction far end skew)
03 Black band detection error (scanner main scanning direction near end skew)
03 Black band detection error (scanner auxiliary scanning direction trailing edge
skew)
04 Black band is not detected (scanner auxiliary scanning direction leading edge)
05 Black band is not detected (scanner main scanning direction far end)
06 Black band is not detected (scanner main scanning direction near end)
07 Black band is not detected (scanner auxiliary scanning direction trailing edge)
08 Black band is not detected (DP main scanning direction far end)
09 Black band is not detected (DP main scanning direction near end)
0a Black band is not detected (DP auxiliary scanning direction leading edge)
0b Black band is not detected (DP auxiliary scanning direction leading edge origi-
nal check)
0c Black band is not detected (DP auxiliary scanning direction trailing edge)
0d White band is not detected (DP auxiliary scanning direction trailing edge)
0e DMA time out
0f Auxiliary scanning direction magnification error
10 Auxiliary scanning direction leading edge error
11 Auxiliary scanning direction trailing edge error

2LL/2LJ/2LH

U411 Error Codes
Codes Description
12 DP uxiliary scanning direction skew error
13 Maintenance request error
14 Main scanning direction center line error
15 DP main scanning direction skew error
16 Main scanning direction magnification error
17 Service call error
18 DP paper misfeed error
19 PWB replacement error
1a Original error
1b Input gamma adjustment original error
1c Matrix adjustment original error
1d Original for the white reference compensation coefficient error
1e Lab value searching error
1f Lab value comparing error
63 Completed to obtain a test RAW
Completion

2LL/2LJ/2LH-1

U412 Adjusting the uneven density
Description
Adjusts the uneven developer/transfer density in the drum axis direction by scanning directly the
density distribution of test pattern with the scanner and adjusting LSU light quantity.
Purpose
To perform when replacing the drum unit or laser scanner unit.
When completed, perform maintenance mode U464, Calibration.
Method
2. Select the item.
Display Description
Normal Mode Executing the uneven density correction
On/Off Config Uneven density correction ON/OFF setting
Method: [Normal Mode]

1. Select [Default Value].
A test pattern is outputted with the initial light quantity setting. (1st sheet)
2. Place approximately 20 sheets of white paper on the output test pattern and place as the
original.
3. Press the start key. the correction starts.
4. After the correction is completed, and press the start key.
A test pattern is outputted. (2nd sheet)
A test pattern is outputted with light quantity setting lower than the 1st test pattern by 20%.
original.
6. Press the start key. the correction starts.
7. After the correction is completed, and press the start key.
A test pattern is outputted. (3rd sheet)
original.
The correction result is checked. When normally completed, [OK] is displayed.
Retry (1st time)

10. If the correction is not completed normally, [Retry] is displayed.
11. Repeat steps 4 and 9.
Retry (2nd time)

12. If the correction is not completed normally, [Retry] is displayed.
13. Repeat steps 4 and 9.
If a problem occurs during auto correction, error code is displayed.

2LL/2LJ/2LH

U412 Error codes
S001 Patch not detected E001 Engine status error
S002 Original deviation in the main E002 Spotted background error
scanning direction E003 Density error
S003 Original deviation in the auxil- E004 Uneven density error
iary scanning direction
EFFF Engine other error
S004 Original inclination error C001 Controller error
S005 Original type error CFFF Controller other error
Setting: [On/Off Config]

Display Description
On Uneven density correction is enabled
Off Uneven density correction is disabled
ON is automatically set after the correction is complete.
Completion

2LL/2LJ/2LH-1

U415 Adjusting the print position automatically
Description
Automatically adjusts timings at the print engine.
Adjustment for leading edge timing, center line and margin.
Purpose
Used to make respective auto adjustments for the print engine.
Method
1. Load A3/ledger paper.
Load A4/Letter when the large capacity feeder is used.
4. Press the start key. A test pattern is outputted
5. Set the output test pattern as the original.
Automatically performs adjustment from the top to bottom cassettes.
7. When normally completed, [OK] is displayed.
If a problem occurs during auto adjustment, error code is displayed.
Error Codes
Codes Description
S001 Black band is not detected (main scanning direction far end)
S002 Black band is not detected (main scanning direction near end)
S003 Black band is not detected (auxiliary scanning direction leading edge)
S004 Black band is not detected (auxiliary scanning direction trailing edge)
S005 Auxiliary scanning direction skew error (1.5 mm or more)
S006 Main scanning direction skew error (1.5 mm or more)
S007 Original error (detection of reverse original paper)
S008 Original error (page mismatch)
C101 Adjustment value error (main scanning direction magnification)
C102 Adjustment value error (auxiliary scanning direction magnification)
C103 Adjustment value error (leading edge timing)
C104 Adjustment value error (center line)
C105 Adjustment value error (B margin)
C106 Adjustment value error (A margin)
C107 Adjustment value error (C margin)
C108 Adjustment value error (D margin)
CFFF Controller other error
Completion

2LL/2LJ/2LH-2

U425 Setting the target
Description
Enters the lab values that is indicated of the chart 1 (P/N: $9*5%) or chart 2
(P/N: $9*5.) used for adjustment.
Purpose
Performs data input in order to correct for differences in originals during automatic adjustment.
Method
Select the chart to be used.
Display Description
Chart1 Chart 1 (P/N: $9*5%)
Chart2 Chart 2 (P/N: $9*5.)
Method: [Chart1]
Display Description
White Setting the white patch for the original for adjustment
Black Setting the black patch for the original for adjustment
Gray1 Setting the Gray1 patch for the original for adjustment
C Setting the cyan patch for the original for adjustment
M Setting the magenta patch for the original for adjustment
Y Setting the yellow patch for the original for adjustment
R Setting the red patch for the original for adjustment
G Setting the green patch for the original for adjustment
B Setting the blue patch for the original for adjustment
Adjust Original Setting the main and auxiliary scanning directions
L Setting the L value 0.0 to 100.0
a Setting the a value -200.0 to 200.0
b Setting the b value -200.0 to 200.0
4. Enters the value that is indicated on the face of the chart using the +/- keys or numeric keys.

2LL/2LJ/2LH

U425 Setting: [Adjust Original]
1. Measure the distance from the leading edge to the top of black belt 1 of the original at A, B
and C.
Measurement procedure
1) Measure the distance from the leading edge to the top of black belt 1 of the original at A
(30 mm from the left edge), B (148.5 mm from the left edge) and C (267 mm from the left
edge), respectively.
2) Apply the following formula for the values obtained: ((A + B + C) / 3)
2. Enter the values solved using the cursor left/right keys or numeric keys in [Dist1].
4. Measure the distance from the left edge to the right edge black belt 2 of the original at F.
1) Measure the distance from the left edge to the right edge black belt 2 of the original at F
(15 mm from the top edge of black belt 1).
5. Enter the values using the cursor left/right keys or numeric keys in [Dist2].
7. Measure the distance from the top edge of black belt 1 to the bottom of black belt 3 of the
original at D and E.
1) Measure the distance from the top edge of black belt 1 to the bottom of black belt 3 of the
original at D (30 mm from the left edge) and E (267 mm from the left edge), respectively.
2) Apply the following formula for the values obtained: (D/2 + E/2)
8. Enter the measured value using the cursor left/right keys or numeric keys in [Dist3].
30mm 148.5mm 267mm
A Black belt 1 B C Leading edge

15mm
Black
belt 2
D E
Left edge
[Dist1] = (A+B+C)/3
[Dist2] = F
[Dist3] = D/2+E/2
COLOR SCANNER
CHART A4
No.302K357010
Black belt 3
Original for adjustment (P/N: $9*5%)
Figure 1-3-30

2LL/2LJ/2LH

U425 Method: [Chart2]
2. Select the item.
Display Description
CCD Entering the target values of the chart (P/N: $9*5.)
used for adjustment
DP Entering the measurement value of the chart (P/N:
AVGR11211F) used for adjustment
CIS Execution is not required
Method: [CCD]
Display Description
N875 Setting the N875 patch for the original for adjustment
C Setting the cyan patch for the original for adjustment
M Setting the magenta patch for the original for adjustment
Y Setting the yellow patch for the original for adjustment
R Setting the red patch for the original for adjustment
G Setting the green patch for the original for adjustment
B Setting the blue patch for the original for adjustment
Adjust Original Setting the main and auxiliary scanning directions
L Setting the L value 0.0 to 100.0
a Setting the a value -200.0 to 200.0
b Setting the b value -200.0 to 200.0
3. Enters the value that is indicated on the back of the chart using the +/- keys or numeric keys.

2LL/2LJ/2LH

U425 Setting: [Adjust Original]
1. Measure the distance from the left edge to the black belt (a) of the original at A, B and C.
1) Measure the distance from the edge to the black belt (a) of the original at A (30 mm from
the leading edge), B (148.5 mm from the leading edge) and C (267 mm from the leading
edge), respectively.
2) Apply the following formula for the values obtained: ((A + C) / 2 + B) / 2
2. Enter the values solved using the cursor left/right keys or numeric keys in [Lead].
4. Measure the distance from the leading edge to the black belt (b) of the original at D, E and F.
1) Measure the distance from the edge to the black belt (b) of the original at D (35 mm from
the left edge), E (110 mm from the left edge) and F (185 mm from the left edge), respec-
tively.
2) Apply the following formula for the values obtained: ((D + F) / 2 + E) / 2
5. Enter the values solved using the cursor left/right keys or numeric keys in [Main Scan].
7. Measure the length (G) from the edge of the black belt (a) to edge of N475 of the original.
8. Enter the measured value using the cursor left/right keys or numeric keys in [Sub Scan].
Leading edge
30 mm 148.5 mm 267 mm
Left edge
A B C
Black
35 mm belt (a)
D
Black Black
belt (b) belt (c)
110 mm G [Lead] =
E
((A + C) / 2 + B) / 2
[Main Scan] =
((D + F) / 2 + E) / 2
[Sub Scan] = G
185 mm
F
Original for adjustment (P/N: $9*5.)
Figure 1-3-31

2LL/2LJ/2LH

U425 Setting: [DP]
1. Measure the distance from the leading edge to the black belt (inside) of the original at A.
2. Enter the measured value using the +/- keys in [Lead].
3. Measure the distance from the left edge to the black belt (inside) of the original at B.
4. Enter the measured value using the +/- keys in [Main Scan].
5. Measure the distance from the black belt of leading edge (inside) to the black belt of trailing
edge (inside) of the original at C.
6. Enter the measured value using the +/- keys in [Sub Scan].
Original for adjustment (P/N: AVGR11211F)
Figure 1-3-32
Completion

2LL/2LJ/2LH-3

U464 Setting the ID correction operation
Description
Turns ID correction (calibration) on or off. Also, this allows individual settings for calibration oper-
ation.
Purpose
Implements various settings of calibration when poor image quality is caused or to allow various
settings of calibration depending on the user preference.
To perform the calibration when replacing the maintenance kit.
Method
Display Description
Permission Setting to turn calibration on/off
Time Interval Setting the interval time of calibration after printing
Mode Setting the calibration execution mode
On/Sleep Out* Setting execution parameters for calibration when powered up
or reverted from auto-sleep
AP/NE* Paper interval calibration ON/OFF setting at the time of cali-
bration/near end after toner feed
Leaving Time* Setting the standard time for judging whether or not to carry
out calibration based on the sleep time when the machine
recovers from the sleep mode
Driving Time* Setting the standard time for judging whether or not to carry
out paper interval calibration based on the driving time during
printing
Timing* Setting the standard time for judging whether or not to carry
out calibration based on the continuous print driving time dur-
ing printing
Target Value Setting the sensor target values for toner thick layer calibration
and light amount calibration
Calib Executing the calibration
*: Enabled when Mode is set to Custom.
Setting: [Permission]
Display Description
On Turns calibration ON
Off Turns calibration OFF
Initial setting: On

2LL/2LJ/2LH-1

U464 Setting: [Time Interval]
Setting Initial
Display Description
range setting
Time(sec) Setting the interval time of calibration 0 to 9999 (s) 480
Setting: [Mode]
1. Select the item.
Display Description
Short Setting the calibration execution mode: short
Normal Setting the calibration execution mode: normal
Long Setting the calibration execution mode: long
Custom Setting the calibration execution mode: custom
Initial setting: Normal

Setting: [On/Sleep Out]

Display Description
On Executes calibration if fuser temperature is less than 50C/
122F at power-up or recovery from auto sleep mode
Off Not to execute calibration regardless of fuser temperature at
power-up or recovery from auto sleep mode
Initial setting: On
Setting: [AP/NE]
Display Description
On Paper interval calibration at the time of calibration/near end
after toner feed is carried out
Off Paper interval calibration at the time of calibration/near end
after toner feed is not carried out
Initial setting: On

2LL/2LJ/2LH-2

U464 Setting: [Leaving Time]
Initial
setting
Time(min) Setting the standard time of sleep mode 0 to 480 (min) 480
Setting: [Driving Time]

Initial
setting
Time(sec) Setting the drive standard time 300 to 3000 (s) 300
Setting: [Timing]
Initial
setting
Time(sec) Setting the drive standard time of con- 0 to 3600 (s) 3600
tinuous print
Setting: [Target Value]

1. Select the item.
Initial
setting
Thickness(K) Toner thick layer calibration 0 to 1000 750
Gamma(K) Light amount calibration 0 to 500 330
Method: [Calib]
2. Press the start key. Calibration is executed.
* : Duplicates selecting [System Menu] - [Adjustment/Maintenance] - [Calibration].
The same operation as System menu.
Completion

2LL/2LJ/2LH

U465 Data reference for ID correction
Description
References the data related to ID correction.
Purpose
To check the corresponding data.
Method
2. Select the item to be reference.
Display Description
TCONT Developer bias control value after ID correction
Laser Power Scaling factor to the value determined in light amount calibration
Bias Calib Sensor value for toner thick layer calibration
T7 CTD T7 control value
Displaying: [TCOUNT]
1. Select [TCOUNT]. The current value is displayed.
Display Description
Before(K) Developer bias control value for black before ID correction
After(K) Developer bias control value for black after ID correction
Displaying: [Laser Power]

1. Select [Laser Power]. The current value is displayed.
Display Description
K Scaling factor to the value determined in light amount calibration
Displaying: [Bias Calib]

1. Select [Bias Calib]. The current value is displayed.
Display Description
K Sensor value for toner thick layer calibration
Displaying: [T7 CTD]

1. Select [T7 CTD]. The current value is displayed.
Display Description
K T7 control value
Completion

2LL/2LJ/2LH-1

U470 Setting the JPEG compression ratio
Description
Sets the compression ratio for JPEG images in each image quality mode.
Purpose
To change the setting in accordance with the image that the user is copying. For example, in
order to soften the coarseness of the image when making copies at over 200% magnification,
change the level of compression by raising the value. Lowering the value will increase the com-
pression and thereby lower the image quality; Raising the value will increase image quality but
lower the image processing speed.
Method
Display Description
Copy Compression ratio for copying
Send Compression ratio for sending
System Compression ratio for temporary storage in system
Setting: [Copy]
Display Description
Photo Compression ratio in the photo mode
Text Compression ratio in the text mode
Setting Initial
Display Description
range setting
Y Compression ratio of brightness 1 to 100 90
CbCr Compression ratio of color differential 1 to 100 90

2LL/2LJ/2LH-1

U470 Setting: [Send]
Display Description
Photo Compression ratio in the photo mode
Text Compression ratio in the text mode
HC-PDF Compression ratio of high compression PDF

[Photo] or [Text]
Setting Initial
Display Description
range setting
Y1 to Y5 Compression ratio of brightness 1 to 100 30/40/51/70/90
CbCr1 to CbCr5 Compression ratio of color differential 1 to 100 30/40/51/70/90
[HC-PDF]
Setting Initial
Display Description
range setting
Y3 to Y3 Compression ratio of brightness 1 to 100 15/25/90
CbCr3 to CbCr3 Compression ratio of color differential 1 to 100 15/25/90
Setting: [System]
Setting Initial
Display Description
range setting
Y Compression ratio of brightness 1 to 100 90
CbCr Compression ratio of color differential 1 to 100 90
Supplement
Completion

2LL/2LJ/2LH

U485 Setting the image processing mode
Description
Sets the detection level for scanning printed matter outputted with the confidential document
guard function. Also, sets the process PDF images are rotated.
Purpose
To change the detection level when the confidential document guard is not printed well for detec-
tion in scanning. Also, changes the process of how PDF images are rotated.
Method
2. Select the item.
Display Description
Conf. Doc. Detection Confidential document guard detection level
PDF Rotation Processing the rotation of PDF images
Setting: [Conf. Doc. Detection]

1. Change the setting value using +/- keys or numeric keys.
Setting Initial
Display Description
range setting
Conf. Doc. Confidential document guard detection 1 to 5 1
Detection level
A smaller value raises the detection sensitivity but increases the possibility of false detection.
A larger value lowers the detection sensitivity but decreases the possibility of false detection.
Setting: [PDF Rotation]

1. Change the setting value using +/- keys or numeric keys.
Display Description
0 Assigns the image rotation with the internal parameter
1 Assigns the image rotation with the actual image
2 Assigns the image rotation with the internal parameter
(CTM rotation)
Initial setting: 0
Completion

2LL/2LJ/2LH-1

U901 Checking copy counts by paper feed locations
Description
Displays or clears paper feed counts by paper feed locations.
Performs backup when the counters on the engine PWB and PF main PWB do not match.
Purpose
To check the time to replace consumable parts. Also to clear the counts after replacing the con-
sumable parts.
Backup the counter values after completing changing the PF main PWB and the paper feed unit.
Method
1. Press the start key. The counts by paper feed locations are displayed.
Display Description
MPT MP tray
Cassette5 Cassette 5 (side deck)
Duplex Duplex unit
* : When an optional paper feed unit is not installed, the corresponding count is not dis-
played.
Clearing
1. Select the counts to be cleared.
[Cassette3], [Cassette4] and [Cassette5] cannot be cleared.
2. Select the counts for all and press [Clear].
3. Press the start key. The counts is cleared.
Back up
1. Select the paper feed location.
2. Select [Engine] when changing the PF main PWB.
Backup the [Engine] counter values to [Enhancement].
Select [Enhancement] when changing the paper feed unit.
Backup the [Enhancement] counter values to [Engine].
4. Press the start key. Back up the counter values.
* : The values of cassette 4 counter vary in accordance with the cassette 3 counter.
Select [None] if the counter values are not backed up.
Completion

2LL/2LJ/2LH-3

U903 Checking/clearing the paper jam counts
Description
Displays or clears the jam counts by jam locations.
Purpose
To check the paper jam status. Also to clear the jam counts after replacing consumable parts.
Method
2. Select the item.
Display Description
Cnt Displays/clears the jam counts
Total Cnt Displays the total jam counts
Method: [Cnt]
1. Select [Cnt]. The count of jam code by type is displayed.
Codes for which the count value is 0 are not displayed.
3. Select the count value for jam code and press [Clear].
The individual counter cannot be cleared.
Method: [Total Cnt]

1. Select [Total Cnt]. The total number of jam code by type is displayed.
The total number of jam count cannot be cleared.
How to display the history of paper jams

[Function]
To check the variation in the occurrences of paper jams as a consequence of firmware upgrade.
[Procedure]
1. Retrives versions of system and engine software at the timing of clearing.
2. Displays comparison of the occurrences of paper jams before and after firmware upgrades.
3. Displays the date of clearing.
[Method]
At firmware upgrade
1. Perform clearance of the counter following the above before performing firmware upgrade.
2. Clearing the counter records the date of clearing.
3. Perform firmware upgrade.
At performing service
Print a maintenance report using mode U000 and check the variance of occurrence of paper
jams after firmware upgrade was done.

2LL/2LJ/2LH-3

U903 Detail of history of paper jams
Maintenance Report
MFP 17/Apr/2011 08:40
Machine No.: SPXXX00001 Life Count : 001234
(a) Paper Jam Log (b) 2011.12.12

JAM0000 1 10
JAM0100 0 2
JAM0101 0 2
JAM0110 (c) 0 2 (d)
JAM0111 1 2
JAM0112 0 1
JAM0131 5 89
JAM0210 2 7
Figure 1-3-33
No. Description
a Paper jam numbers
b Date of clearing counter records
c Occurrences of paper jams after clearing the paper jam counts
d Total number of paper jams
Method: [Total Cnt]

1. Select [Total Cnt]. The total number of jam code by type is displayed.
The total number of jam count cannot be cleared.
Completion

2LL/2LJ/2LH-3

U904 Checking/clearing the call for service counts
Description
Displays or clears the service call code counts by types.
Purpose
To check the service call code status by types.
Also to clear the service call code counts after replacing consumable parts.
Method
2. Select the item.
Display Description
Cnt Displays/clears the call for service counts
Total Cnt Displays the total call for service counts
Method: [Cnt]
1. Select [Cnt]. The count for service call detection by type is displayed.
Codes for which the count value is 0 are not displayed.
3. Select the count value for service call code and press [Clear].
The individual counter cannot be cleared.
Method: [Total Cnt]

1. Select [Total Cnt]. The total number of service call counts by type is displayed.
The total number of service call count cannot be cleared.
How to display the history of service counts

[Function]
To check the variation in the occurrences of service calls as a consequence of firmware upgrade.
[Procedure]
1. Retrives versions of system and engine software at the timing of clearing.
2. Displays comparison of the occurrences of service calls before and after firmware upgrades.
3. Displays the date of clearing.
[Method]
At firmware upgrade
1. Perform clearance of the counter following the above before performing firmware upgrade.
2. Clearing the counter records the date of clearing.
3. Perform firmware upgrade.
At performing service
1. Print a maintenance report using mode U000 and check the variance of occurrence of ser-
vice calls after firmware upgrade was done.

2LL/2LJ/2LH-3

U904 Detail of history of service counts
Maintenance Report
MFP 17/Apr/2011 08:40
Machine No.: SPXXX00001 Life Count : 001234
Paper Jam Log 2011.12.12

JAM0000 10 1
(a) Service Call Log (b) 2011.12.12

C0630 1 1
C1000 0 50
C1950 0 1
C2840 (c) 3 17 (d)
C4300 1 2
C9000 0 1
C9060 5 20
C9080 2 1
Figure 1-3-34
No Description
a Service call numbers
b Date of clearing counter records
c Occurrences of paper jams after clearing the service calls
Total number of service calls
Method: [Total Cnt]

1. Select [Total Cnt]. The total number of service call counts by type is displayed.
The total number of service call count cannot be cleared.
Completion

2LL/2LJ/2LH

U905 Checking counts by optional devices
Description
Displays the counts of DP, 1000-sheet or 4000-sheet finisher.
Purpose
To check the use of DP, 1000-sheet or 4000-sheet finisher.
Method
2. Select the device, the count of which is to be checked.
The count of the selected device is displayed.
Display Description
DP Counts of DP
DF Counts of 1000-sheet or 4000-sheet finisher
Method: [DP]
Display Description
ADP No. of single-sided originals that has passed through the DP
RADP No. of double-sided originals that has passed through the DP
CIS No. of dual scan originals that has passed through the DP
Method: [DF]
Display Description
Sorter No. of copies that has passed
Staple Frequency the stapler has been activated
Punch Frequency the punch has been activated
Stack* Frequency the main tray eject has been activated
Saddle* Frequency the saddle eject has been activated
Fold* Frequency the center folding has been activated
Three Fold* Frequency the tri-folding has been activated
* : 4000-sheet finisher only
Completion

2LL/2LJ/2LH

U906 Resetting partial operation control
Description
Resets the service call code for partial operation control.
Purpose
To be reset after partial operation is performed due to problems in the cassettes or other sec-
tions, and the related parts are serviced.
Method
2. Press [Execute].
3. Press the start key to reset partial operation control.
U908 Checking the total counter value
Description
Displays the total counter value.
Purpose
To check the total counter value.
Method
1. Press the start key. The total count value is displayed.
Completion
U910 Clearing the print coverage data
Description
Clears the accumulated data for the print coverage per A4 size paper and its period of time (as
shown on the service status report).
Purpose
To clear data as required at times such as during maintenance service.
Method
3. Press the start key. The print coverage data is cleared.
Completion

2LL/2LJ/2LH

U911 Checking copy counts by paper sizes
Description
Displays the paper feed counts by paper sizes.
Purpose
To check the counts after replacing consumable parts.
Method
1. Press the start key. The screen for the paper feed counts by paper size is displayed.
Display Display
Description Description
(metric) (inch)
A3 Paper feed counts for A3 Ledger Paper feed counts for Ledger
B4 Paper feed counts for B4 Legal Paper feed counts for Legal
A4 Paper feed counts for A4 Letter Paper feed counts for Letter
B5 Paper feed counts for B5 Statement Paper feed counts for State-
ment
A5 Paper feed counts for A5
Folio Paper feed counts for Folio ETC Paper feed counts for other
size
ETC Paper feed counts for other
size
Clearing
1. Select the paper size of counts to be cleared.
Completion

2LL/2LJ/2LH

U917 Setting backup data reading/writing
Description
Retrieves the backup data to a USB memory from the machine; or writes the data from the USB
memory to the machine.
Purpose
To store and write data when replacing the HDD.
Method
1. Press the power key on the operation panel, and after verifying the power indicator has gone
off, switch off the main power switch.
Wait for 10 seconds to allow the machine to recognize the USB memory.
5. Select [Import] or [Export].
Display Description
Import Writing data from the USB memory to the machine
Export Retrieving from the machine to a USB memory
6. Select the item.
Display Description Depending data
Address Book Address book -
Job Account Job accounting -
One Touch Information on one-touch key Address book
User User managements Job accounting
Program Program information Job accountings and user manage-
ments
Shortcut Shortcut information Job accountings, user managements
and document box information
Fax Forward FAX transfer information Job accountings, user managements
and document box information
Document Box Document box information Job accountings and user manage-
ments
IC Card IC card information -
* : Since data are dependent with each other, data other than those assigned are also
retrieved or written in.
7. Press the start key. Starts reading or writing.
The progress of selected item is displayed in %.
When an error occurs, the operation is canceled and an error code is displayed.
8. When normally completed, [Finish] is displayed.
9. Turn the main power switch off and on after completing writing when selecting [Import].

2LL/2LJ/2LH

U917 Error Codes
e002 Parameter error e31e User managements error
e003 File write error e31f User managements open error
e004 File initialization error e320 User managements error
e005 File error e321 User managements open error
e006 Processing error e322 User managements list error
e010 Address book clear error (contact) e324 Shortcut open error
e011 Address book open error (contact) e325 Shortcut list error
e012 Address book list error (contact) e410 Box file open error
e013 Address book list error (contact) e411 Box error in writing
e014 Address book clear error (group) e412 Box error in reading
e015 Address book open error (group) e413 Box list error
e016 Address book list error (group) e414 Box list error
e017 Address book list error (group) e415 Box error
e110 Job accounting clear error e416 Box error
e111 Job accounting open error e417 Box open error
e112 Job accounting open error e418 Box close error
e113 Job accounting error in writing e419 Box creation error
e114 Job accounting list error e41a Box creation error
e115 Job accounting list error e41b Box deletion error
e210 One-touch open error e41c Box movement error
e211 One-touch list error e510 Program error in writing
e212 One-touch list error e511 Program error in reading
e310 User managements backup error e610 Shortcut error in writing
e311 User managements clear error e611 Shortcut error in reading
e312 User managements open error e710 Fax memory open error
e313 User managements open error e711 Fax memory initialization error
e314 User managements open error e712 Fax memory list error
e315 User managements error in writing e713 Fax memory error
e316 User managements list error e714 Fax memory error
e317 User managements list error e715 Fax memory mode error
e31a User managements open error e718 Fax memory mode error
e31b User managements error e910 File reading error
e31c User managements error e911 File writing error
e31d User managements open error e912 Data mismatch

2LL/2LJ/2LH

U917 Error Codes
e913 Log file open error d008 File rename error
e914 Log file error in writing d009 File open error
e915 Directory open error d00a File close error
e916 Directory error in reading d00b File reading error
e917 Synchronization error d00c File writing error
e918 Synchronization error d00d File copy error
d000 Unspecified error d00e File compressed error
d001 HDD unavailable d00f File decompressed error
d002 USB memory is not inserted d010 Directory open error
d003 File for writing is not found in the USB d011 Directory creation error
d004 File for reading is not found in the HDD d012 File writing error
d005 USB error in writing d013 File reading error
d006 USB error in reading d014 File deletion error
d007 USB unmount error d015 File copy error to the USB
Completion

2LL/2LJ/2LH

U920 Checking the copy counts
Description
Checks the copy counts.
Purpose
To check the copy counts.
Method
1. Press the start key. The current counts are displayed.
Display Description
B/W Copy Count value of black/white copy
B/W Prn Count value of black/white print
B/W Fax Count value of black/white FAX
Completion
U927 Clearing the all copy counts and machine life counts (one time only)
Description
Resets all of the counts back to zero.
Supplement
The total account counter and the machine life counter can be cleared only once if all count val-
ues are 1000 or less.
Method
3. Press the start key. All copy counts and machine life counts are cleared.
Completion

2LL/2LJ/2LH-1

U928 Checking machine life counts
Description
Displays the machine life counts.
Purpose
To check the machine life counts.
Method
1. Press the start key. The current machine life counts is displayed.
Display Description
Cnt Machine life counts
Completion
U930 Checking/clearing the charger roller count
Description
Displays the counts of the charger roller counter for checking, setting or clearing.
Purpose
To check the count after replacement of the charger roller unit. To clear the counter value when
replacing the charger roller unit.
Method
1. Press the start key. The current counts of the charger roller count for each color is displayed.
Display Description
K Count value of charger roller
Setting
Clearing
1. Select [Clear].
Completion

2LL/2LJ/2LH

U935 Relay board maintenance
Description
Sets the mode when call for service (C0060) occurs.
Purpose
Sets the machine status temporarily when call for service (C0060) occurs. However, after the set-
ting, call for service (C0060) occurs again when progress of period.
Setting
2. Select Mode using the +/- keys.
Display Description
Mode0 Setting mode: OFF
Mode1 Setting mode: ON (Usable up to three times of use)
* : Initial setting: Mode0
Supplement
After removing the cause of the problem, be sure to change the setting in OFF.

2LL/2LJ/2LH-1

U942 Setting of deflection for feeding from DP
Description
Adjusts the deflection generated when the document processor is used.
Purpose
Use this mode if an original non-feed jam, oblique feed or wrinkling of original occurs when the
document processor is used.
Setting
6. Change the setting value using the +/- keys or numeric keys.l
Display Description
Front Deflection of single-sided original -31 to 31 0 0.17 mm
Back* Deflection of double-sided original -31 to 31 0 0.17 mm
Mix Deflection of mixed original -31 to 31 0 0.17 mm
*1: Reversed DP only.
* : The greater the value, the larger the deflection; the smaller the value, the smaller the
deflection.
If an original non-feed jam or oblique feed occurs, increase the setting value. If wrinkling
of original occurs, decrease the value.
Completion

2LL/2LJ/2LH

U952 Maintenance mode workflow
Description
The maintenance modes configured in the machine or a USB flash device as a workflow must be
executed in succession.
Purpose
This allows maintenance mode to be preset as a template.
Setting
2. Select the item.
Display Description
Continue Restarting an abandoned workflow
Execute(USB) Executes a workflow housed in a USB flash device
Execute Executes a worlflow stored in the machine
Entry(USB) Exports a workflow housed in a USB flash device to the machine
Entry Assigns a workflow in the machine manually
Log Displays a list of workflows recently executed
Method: [Execute]
2. Select the workflow.
Display Description
Data1 - 6 The area to store workflows in the machine
Executes maintenance modes defined in a workflow in succession.
Method: [Entry]
1. Select [Entry].
2. Select the area to store workflow.
Display Description
3. Press the +/- keys or numeric keys to assign a maintenance Nbr. into a workflow.
Display Description
Flow1 - 14 Assign a maintenance Nbr.

2LL/2LJ/2LH-1

U952 Method: [Execute(USB)]
5. Select [Execute(USB)].
Display Description
WorkFlowData01 - 07 Workflow data in the USB flash device
Method: [Entry(USB)]
5. Select [Entry(USB)].
Display Description
WorkFlowData01 - 07 Workflow data in the USB flash device
7. Select the work flow save area.
Display Description
Exports a workflow housed in a USB flash device to the machine.
Example
Registration is feasible when a USB flash device that stores the commands and text/mainte-
nance ID (editable) is inserted.
File Format: xxx.mwf
!R! MNFC WFPS;

1.SET UP, 464, 410, 000, 927, 278
2.WARRANTY, 089, 000
3.MK-A, 119, 140, 127, 167, 464, 412, 464, 410, 251
WRED;EXIT;
Completion

2LL/2LJ/2LH-1

U964 Checking of log
Description
Sends a log file saved on the HDD to a USB memory.
Purpose
To transfer a log file saved on the HDD to a USB memory as a means of investigating malfunc-
tions.
Method
Starts sending the log file saved on the HDD to the USB memory.
Processing is displayed for approximately 3 to 5 minutes.
7. When normally completed, [Completed] is displayed.
If a problem occurs during auto correction, error code is displayed.
Supplement
Instructions on how to obtain a log when the operation panel has frozen
Simultaneously press and hold the *, 8, 6, and Clear keys for 3 to 6 seconds to start logging.
The memory indicator keeps lighting during a log is generated and goes off when completed.
Error codes
Display Description
No Usb Storage USB memory is not inserted
No File File is not found
Mount Error USB memory mount error
File Delete Error File deletion error
Copy Error File copy error
Unmount Error USB memory unmount error
Other Error Other error
U969 Checking of toner area code
Description
Displays the toner area code.
Purpose
To check the toner area code.
Method
1. Press the start key. The toner area code is displayed.
Completion
Press the stop/clear key. The screen for selecting a maintenance item No. is displayed.

2LL/2LJ/2LH

U977 Data capture mode
Description
Store the print data sent to the machine into USB memory.
Purpose
In case to occur the error at printing, check the print data sent to the machine.
Method
7. Send the print data to the machine.
Once the print data is stored into USB memory, [Finish] will be displayed.
Completion
U984 Checking the developer unit number
Description
Displays the developer unit number.
Purpose
To check the developer unit number.
Method
1. Press the start key. The developer unit number for each color is displayed.
Display Description
K Developer unit number
Completion

2LL/2LJ/2LH-1

U985 Displaying the developer unit history
Description
Displays the past record of machine number and the developer counter.
Purpose
To check the count value of machine number and the developer counter.
Method
2. Select [K].
Display Description
K Developer unit past record
The history of a machine number and a developer counter for each color is displayed by
three cases.
Display Description
Machine History1 - 3 Historical records of the machine number
Cnt History1 - 3 Historical records of developer counter
Completion
U989 HDD Scan disk
Description
Restores data in the hard disk by scanning the disk.
Purpose
If power is turned off while accessing to the hard disk is performed, the control information in the
hard disk drive may be damaged. Use this mode to restore the data.
Method
3. Press the start key. When scanning of the disk is complete, the execution result is displayed.

2LL/2LJ/2LH

U990 Checking the time for the exposure lamp to light
Description
Displays the accumulated time for the CIS to light.
Purpose
To check duration of use of the CIS.
Method
The accumulated time for the CIS to light is displayed in minutes.
Display Description
CIS The accumulated time for the CIS to light
Completion
U991 Checking the scanner operation count
Description
Displays the scanner operation count.
Purpose
To check the status of use of the scanner.
Method
1. Press the start key. The current operation counts is displayed.
Display Description
Copy Scan Scanner operation counts for copying
Fax Scan Scanner operation counts for fax
Other Scan Scanner operation counts except for copying
Completion
Press the stop key. The screen for selecting a maintenance No. item is displayed.

2LL/2LJ/2LH

2LL/2LJ/2LH
1-4-1 Paper misfeed detection

1-4 Troubleshooting
(1) Paper misfeed indication

When a paper misfeed occurs, the machine immediately stops printing and displays the paper misfeed mes-
sage on the operation panel. To remove paper misfed in the machine, pull out the cassette, open the paper
conveying unit or paper conveying cover.
H
K K I
K J I G G
K
K E
F
D
A
E L
B
C C
E
K C
K
Figure 1-4-1 Paper misfeed indication
A. Misfeed in cassette 1
B. Misfeed in cassette 2
C. Misfeed in cassette 3 or 4 (option)
D. Misfeed in the MP tray
E. Misfeed in paper conveying unit, paper conveying
cover or PF paper conveying cover
F. Misfeed in the duplex section
G. Misfeed in the fuser section
H. Misfeed in document processor (option)
I. Misfeed in job separator (option)
J. Misfeed in bridge unit (option)
K. Misfeed in document finisher (option)
L. Misfeed in cassette 5 (option)

Mailbox
MBES
TOFSW2
Service Manual
TOFSW3
TOFSW4
TOFSW5 J 93xx J 9020 J 9000 Document processor

TOFSW6
J 9008
DPSS DPFS (dual scan DP) Machine + Option1
J 94xx
J 9110
TOFSW7
DPCS
J 78x0 DPTS DPES
MBES J 62x0
J 96xx
DFSES J 61xx J 47xx
JSES
J 6710 DFPES SBS
J 66x0 BRES
EFS
DFDRS
J 51xx DUS1
BRCS1
(2) Paper misfeed detection condition
BRCS2
J 46xx FUES J 43xx
DFMTS J 49xx
J 50xx J 42xx
DFMES
J 65xx
1-4-2
J 63xx J 41xx
LPS J 44xx
J 40xx DUS2
RS
4000-sheet
CFPCS J 13xx
finisher MS MPFS
J 05x1
Figure 1-4-2 Paper jam location 1

FS1 J 05x9
PCS2
PCS
J 15xx
J 05x2 FS2
J 71x0
J 73x0
J 72x0 J 17xx
CFPES PFPCS1
J 05x3
CFES
PFFS1
PFPS1
J 05x4 PFPCS2 J 19xx

PFFS2
PFPS2
Paper feeder
2LL/2LJ/2LH-3
Y113351-4
J 92x0
J 9004 J 9000 Document processor
DPRS DPFS
(reversed DP)
Y113351-4
J 94xx DPSBS
J 9110
J 9500
DPTS DPES
J 96xx
Machine + Option2
J 61xx J 47xx
JSES
DFPES SBS
BRES
BRES
EFS
DFMTS J 51xx DUS1
DFMES BRCS2 BRCS1
BRCS2
J 46xx FUES J 43xx
J 65xx
J 63xx J 49xx
J 50xx J 42xx
J 41xx
LPS J 44xx
J 40xx DUS2 Side deck
1-4-3
RS
J 13xx
MS MPFS
J 05x1 FS1 J 05x9
PCS2 SDFS
PCS SDPS
1000-sheet finisher J 15xx
Figure 1-4-3 Paper jam location 2

J 05x2 FS2 J 05x5
J 26xx
PFPCS1
J 27x4
Large capacity feeder PFFS2

PFPS2 PFPCS2
PFFS1
J 05x4 PFPS1
J 05x6
J 05x3
2LL/2LJ/2LH-3
Service Manual
2LL/2LJ/2LH-3
* : This model does not support the following codes:

0132 /0211 /0212 /0214 /0215 /0505 /0506 /0507 /0515 /0516 /0517 /0525 /0526 /0527 /0535 /0536 /
0537 /1306 /1307 /1316 /1317 /2106 /2107 /2116 /2117 /2307 /2317 /2606 /2607 /2616 /2617 /2707 /
2717 /3106 /3107 /3116 /3117 /3307 /3317 /3405 /3406 /3407 /3415 /3416 /3417 /3505 /3506 /3507 /
3515 /3516 /3517 /3605 /3606 /3607 /3615 /3616 /3617 /3705 /3706 /3707 /3715 /3716 /3717 /4006 /
4007 /4016 /4017 /4106 /4107 /4116 /4117 /4206 /4207 /4216 /4217 /4306 /4307 /4316 /4317 /4406 /
4407 /4416 /4417 /4606 /4607 /4616 /4617 /4706 /4707 /4716 /4717 /4906 /4907 /4916 /4917 /5006 /
5007 /5016 /5017 /5106 /5107 /5116 /5117 /9030
Jam
Code Contents Conditions
location*
0000 Initial jam The power is turned on when a sensor in the con- -
veying system is on.
0100 Secondary paper feed request Secondary paper feed request given by the con- -
time out troller is unreachable.
0101 Waiting for process package Process package wont become ready. -
to become ready
0102 Waiting for toner package to Toner package wont become ready. -
become ready
0103 Waiting for the image-sustain- The image-sustaining package wont become -
ing package to become ready ready.
0104 Waiting for conveying pack- Conveying package wont become ready. -
age to become ready
0106 Paper feeding request for Paper feeding request for duplex printing given by -
duplex printing time out the controller is unreachable.
0107 Waiting for fuser package to Fuser package wont become ready. -
become ready
0108 Waiting for option package to Option package wont become ready. -
become ready
0110 Paper conveying unit open The paper conveying unit is opened during print- E
ing.
0111 Front cover open The front cover is opened during printing. -
0112 Duplex cover open The duplex cover is opened during printing. F
0113 Paper conveying cover open The paper conveying cover is opened during E
printing.
0114 BR conveying unit open The BR conveying unit is opened during printing. J
0115 BR eject cover open The BR eject cover is opened during printing. J
0131 MP lift sensor upper limit MP lift sensor 1 (MPLS1) does not turn on within D
detection specified time of the MP lift plate rising.
0200 Machine sequence error A sequence error has occurred. -
0210 PF paper conveying cover The PF paper conveying cover is opened during E
open printing.
0213 SD cover open The SD cover is opened during printing. L
0300 Ejection uncompleted An ejection-completed error has occurred. -
*: Refer to figure 1-4-1 for paper misfeed indication (see page 1-4-1).

2LL/2LJ/2LH-3
Jam
location*
0501 No paper feed from cassette 1 Feed sensor 1 (FS1) does not turn on during A
paper feed from cassette 1.
0502 No paper feed from cassette 2 Feed sensor 2 (FS2) does not turn on during B
0503 No paper feed from cassette 3 PF feed sensor 1 (PFFS1) does not turn on dur- C
ing paper feed from cassette 3 (paper feeder).
0508 No paper feed from duplex Registration sensor (RS) does not turn on during F
section paper feed from duplex section.
0509 No paper feed from MP tray MP feed sensor (MPFS) does not turn on during D
paper feed from MP tray.
0511 Multiple sheets in cassette 1 Feed sensor 1 (FS1) does not turn off during A
0512 Multiple sheets in cassette 2 Feed sensor 2 (FS2) does not turn off during B
0513 Multiple sheets in cassette 3 PF feed sensor 1 (PFFS1) does not turn off dur- C
0518 Multiple sheets in duplex sec- Registration sensor (RS) does not turn off during F
tion paper feed from duplex section.
0519 Multiple sheets in MP tray MP feed sensor (MPFS) does not turn off during D
ing paper feed from cassette 3 (large capacity
feeder).
feeder).
feeder).
feeder).
0545 No paper feed from side deck SD feed sensor (SDFS) does not turn on during L
paper feed from side deck.
0555 Multiple sheets in side deck SD feed sensor (SDFS) does not turn off during L
paper feed from side deck.

2LL/2LJ/2LH-1
Jam
location*
1301 Middle sensor non arrival jam Middle sensor (MS) does not turn on during paper A
feed from cassette 1.
1302 Middle sensor (MS) does not turn on during paper B
1303 Middle sensor (MS) does not turn on during paper C
feed from cassette 3 (paper feeder/large capacity
feeder).
1304 Middle sensor (MS) does not turn on during paper C
feeder).
1305 Middle sensor (MS) does not turn on during paper L
feed from cassette 5 (side deck).
1311 Middle sensor stay jam Middle sensor (MS) does not turn off during paper E
1312 Middle sensor (MS) does not turn off during paper E
feeder).
feeder).
1502 Paper conveying sensor non Paper conveying sensor (PCS) does not turn on B
arrival jam during paper feed from cassette 2.
1503 Paper conveying sensor (PCS) does not turn on C
during paper feed from cassette 3 (paper feeder/
large capacity feeder).
1504 Paper conveying sensor (PCS) does not turn on C
1512 Paper conveying sensor stay Paper conveying sensor (PCS) does not turn off E
jam during paper feed from cassette 2.
1513 Paper conveying sensor (PCS) does not turn off E
1514 Paper conveying sensor (PCS) does not turn off E

2LL/2LJ/2LH
Jam
location*
1703 PF paper conveying sensor 1 PF paper conveying sensor 1 (PFPCS1) does not C
non arrival jam turn on during paper feed from cassette 3 (paper
feeder).
1704 PF paper conveying sensor 1 (PFPCS1) does not C
turn on during paper feed from cassette 4 (paper
feeder).
1713 PF paper conveying sensor 1 PF paper conveying sensor 1 (PFPCS1) does not E
stay jam turn off during paper feed from cassette 3 (paper
feeder).
1714 PF paper conveying sensor 1 (PFPCS1) does not E
turn off during paper feed from cassette 4 (paper
feeder).
non arrival jam turn on during paper feed from cassette 4 (paper
feeder).
stay jam turn off during paper feed from cassette 4 (paper
feeder).
non arrival jam turn on during paper feed from cassette 3 (large
capacity feeder).
2604 PF paper conveying sensor 1 (PFPCS1) does not C
turn on during paper feed from cassette 4 (large
capacity feeder).
stay jam turn off during paper feed from cassette 3 (large
capacity feeder).
2614 PF paper conveying sensor 1 (PFPCS1) does not E
turn off during paper feed from cassette 4 (large
capacity feeder).
non arrival jam turn on during paper feed from cassette 4 (large
capacity feeder).
stay jam turn off during paper feed from cassette 4 (large
capacity feeder).

2LL/2LJ/2LH-1
Jam
location*
4001 Registration sensor non Registration sensor (RS) does not turn on during E
arrival jam paper feed from cassette 1.
4002 Registration sensor (RS) does not turn on during E
paper feed from cassette 3 (paper feeder/large
capacity feeder).
capacity feeder).
paper feed from cassette 5 (side deck).
4011 Registration sensor stay jam Registration sensor (RS) does not turn off during E
4012 Registration sensor (RS) does not turn off during E
capacity feeder).
capacity feeder).

2LL/2LJ/2LH-1
Jam
location*
4101 Loop sensor non arrival jam Loop sensor (LPS) does not turn on during paper E
4102 Loop sensor (LPS) does not turn on during paper E
feeder).
feeder).
feed from duplex section.
feed from MP tray.
4111 Loop sensor stay jam Loop sensor (LPS) does not turn off during paper E
4112 Loop sensor (LPS) does not turn off during paper E
feeder).
feeder).
feed from duplex section.
feed from MP tray.

2LL/2LJ/2LH-1
Jam
location*
4201 Fuser eject sensor non arrival Fuser eject sensor (FUES) does not turn on dur- E
jam ing paper feed from cassette 1.
4202 Fuser eject sensor (FUES) does not turn on dur- E
ing paper feed from cassette 2.
ing paper feed from cassette 3 (paper feeder/
ing paper feed from cassette 5 (side deck).
ing paper feed from duplex section.
ing paper feed from MP tray.
4211 Fuser eject sensor stay jam Fuser eject sensor (FUES) does not turn off dur- G
4212 Fuser eject sensor (FUES) does not turn off dur- G
ing paper feed from cassette 5 (side deck).
ing paper feed from duplex section.
ing paper feed from MP tray.

2LL/2LJ/2LH-1
Jam
location*
4301 Duplex sensor 1 non arrival Duplex sensor 1 (DUS1) does not turn on during G
jam paper feed from cassette 1.
4302 Duplex sensor 1 (DUS1) does not turn on during G
capacity feeder).
capacity feeder).
4311 Duplex sensor 1 stay jam Duplex sensor 1 (DUS1) does not turn off during F
4312 Duplex sensor 1 (DUS1) does not turn off during F
capacity feeder).
capacity feeder).
4401 Duplex sensor 2 non arrival Duplex sensor 2 (DUS2) does not turn on during F
4402 Duplex sensor 2 (DUS2) does not turn on during F
capacity feeder).
capacity feeder).

2LL/2LJ/2LH-1
Jam
location*
4411 Duplex sensor 2 stay jam Duplex sensor 2 (DUS2) does not turn off during F
capacity feeder).
capacity feeder).
paper feed from duplex section.
4601 Eject full sensor non arrival Eject full sensor (EFS) does not turn on during G
4602 Eject full sensor (EFS) does not turn on during G
capacity feeder).
capacity feeder).

2LL/2LJ/2LH-1
Jam
location*
4611 Eject full sensor stay jam Eject full sensor (EFS) does not turn off during G
4612 Eject full sensor (EFS) does not turn off during G
capacity feeder).
capacity feeder).
4701 Switchback sensor non arrival Switchback sensor (SBS) does not turn on during G
4702 Switchback sensor (SBS) does not turn on during G
capacity feeder).
capacity feeder).

2LL/2LJ/2LH-1
Jam
location*
4711 Switchback sensor stay jam Switchback sensor (SBS) does not turn off during I
4712 Switchback sensor (SBS) does not turn off during I
capacity feeder).
capacity feeder).
4901 BR conveying sensor 1 non BR conveying sensor 1 (BRCS1) does not turn on G
4902 BR conveying sensor 1 (BRCS1) does not turn on G
during paper feed from cassette 2.
during paper feed from cassette 5 (side deck).
during paper feed from duplex section.
during paper feed from MP tray.

2LL/2LJ/2LH-1
Jam
location*
4911 BR conveying sensor 1 stay BR conveying sensor 1 (BRCS1) does not turn off J
4912 BR conveying sensor 1 (BRCS1) does not turn off J
5001 BR conveying sensor 2 non BR conveying sensor 2 (BRCS2) does not turn on J
5002 BR conveying sensor 2 (BRCS2) does not turn on J

2LL/2LJ/2LH-1
Jam
location*
5011 BR conveying sensor 2 stay BR conveying sensor 2 (BRCS2) does not turn off J
5101 BR eject sensor non arrival BR eject sensor (BRES) does not turn on during J
5102 BR eject sensor (BRES) does not turn on during J
capacity feeder).
capacity feeder).
paper feed from cassette 5 (side deck/large
capacity feeder).

2LL/2LJ/2LH-1
Jam
location*
5111 BR eject sensor stay jam BR eject sensor (BRES) does not turn off during J
5112 BR eject sensor (BRES) does not turn off during J
capacity feeder).
capacity feeder).
6000 DF paper entry error DF paper entry sensor (DFPES) turns on before K
the eject signal is output from the machine (4000-
sheet finisher).
6001 DF paper entry sensor (DFPES) turns on before K
the eject signal is output from the machine (1000-
sheet finisher).
6020 DF front cover open DF front upper cover is opened during operation K
(4000-sheet finisher).
6021 DF front cover is opened during operation (1000- K
sheet finisher).
6041 DF top cover open DF top cover is opened during operation (1000- K
sheet finisher).
6050 CF eject cover open CF eject cover is opened during operation (4000- K
sheet finisher).
6060 MB cover open MB cover is opened during operation (4000-sheet K
finisher).
6070 Center folding unit open Center folding unit is opened during operation K
6080 CF left guide open CF left guide is opened during operation (4000- K
sheet finisher).

2LL/2LJ/2LH
Jam
location*
6100 DF paper entry sensor non DF paper entry sensor (DFPES) does not turned K
arrival jam on even if a specified time has elapsed after the
machine eject signal was received (4000-sheet
finisher).
6101 DF paper entry sensor (DFPES) does not turned K
on even if a specified time has elapsed after the
machine eject signal was received (1000-sheet
finisher).
6110 DF paper entry sensor stay DF paper entry sensor (DFPES) does not turned K
jam off within specified time of its turning on (4000-
sheet finisher).
6111 DF paper entry sensor (DFPES) does not turned K
off within specified time of its turning on (1000-
sheet finisher).
6200 DF sub eject sensor non DF sub eject sensor (DFSES) does not turn on K
arrival jam within specified time of DF paper entry sensor
(DFPES) turning on.
6210 DF sub eject sensor stay jam DF sub eject sensor (DFSES) does not turned off K
within specified time of its turning on.
6300 DF middle eject sensor non DF middle eject sensor (DFMES) does not turn K
arrival jam on within specified time of DF paper entry sensor
(DFPES) turning on (4000-sheet finisher).
6301 DF middle eject sensor (DFMES) does not turn K
on within specified time of DF paper entry sensor
(DFPES) turning on (1000-sheet finisher).
6310 DF middle eject sensor stay DF middle eject sensor (DFMES) is not turned off K
jam within specified time of its turning on (4000-sheet
finisher).
6311 DF middle eject sensor (DFMES) is not turned off K
within specified time of its turning on (1000-sheet
finisher).
6400 DF tray upper surface sensor DF tray upper surface sensor (DFTUSS) does not K
non arrival jam turn on within specified time of DF middle eject
sensor (DFMES) turning on (4000-sheet finisher).
6401 DF tray upper surface sensor (DFTUSS) does not K
turn on within specified time of DF middle eject
sensor (DFMES) turning on (1000-sheet finisher).

2LL/2LJ/2LH
Jam
location*
6410 DF tray upper surface sensor DF tray upper surface sensor (DFTUSS) is not K
stay jam turned off within specified time of its turning on
6411 DF tray upper surface sensor (DFTUSS) is not K
turned off within specified time of its turning on
6500 DF eject paper sensor non DF bundle discharge sensor (DFBDS) does not K
arrival jam turn on within specified time of DF middle eject
sensor (DFMES) turning on.
6510 DF eject paper sensor stay DF bundle discharge sensor (DFBDS) is not K
jam turned off since the bundle discharge starts
6511 DF bundle discharge sensor (DFBDS) is not K
turned off since the bundle discharge starts
6600 DF drum sensor non arrival DF drum sensor (DFDRS) does not turn on within K
jam specified time of DF paper entry sensor (DFPES)
turning on.
6610 DF drum sensor stay jam DF drum sensor (DFDRS) is not turned off within K
specified time of its turning on.
6710 Center folding unit stay jam During paper conveying to center folding unit, DF K
drum sensor (DFDRS) is not turned off within
6810 DF side registration sensor 1 DF side registration sensor 1 (DFSRS1) is not K
stay jam turned off within specified time after driving the
DF side registration motor 1 (DFSRM1) (4000-
sheet finisher).
6811 DF side registration sensor 1 (DFSRS1) is not K
turned off within specified time after driving the
sheet finisher).
6910 DF side registration sensor 2 DF side registration sensor 2 (DFSRS2) is not K
stay jam turned off within specified time after driving the
sheet finisher).
6911 DF side registration sensor 2 (DFSRS2) is not K
turned off within specified time after driving the
sheet finisher).

2LL/2LJ/2LH-1
Jam
location*
7000 DF staple operation error DF staple sensor (DFSTS) is not turned on within K
specified time after driving the DF staple motor
(DFSTM) (4000-sheet finisher).
7001 DF staple sensor (DFSTS) is not turned on within K
specified time after driving the DF staple motor
(DFSTM) (1000-sheet finisher).
7100 CF paper entry sensor non CF paper entry sensor (CFPES) is not turned on K
arrival jam even if a specified time has elapsed after the
machine eject signal was received.
7110 CF paper entry sensor stay CF paper entry sensor (CFPES) is not turned off K
jam within specified time of its turning on.
7200 CF eject sensor non arrival CF eject sensor (CFES) is not turned on within K
jam specified time since centerfold operation starts.
7210 CF eject sensor stay jam During centerfold operation, CF eject sensor K
(CFES) is not turned off within specified time of its
turning on.
7300 CF eject sensor non arrival CF eject sensor (CFES) is not turned on within K
jam specified time since three fold operation starts.
7310 CF eject sensor stay jam During three fold operation, CF eject sensor K
(CFES) is not turned off within specified time of its
turning on.
7400 CF side registration sensor 2 CF side registration sensor 2 (CFSRS2) is not K
non arrival jam turned on within specified time after driving the
CF side registration motor 2 (CFSRM2).
7500 CF side registration sensor 1 CF side registration sensor 1 (CFSRS1) is not K
non arrival jam turned on within specified time after driving the
CF side registration motor 1 (CFSRM1).
7600 CF staple operation error CF staple sensor (CFSTS) is not turned on within K
specified time after driving the CF staple motor
(CFSTM).
7700 CF paper conveying sensor CF paper conveying sensor (CFPCS) is not K
non arrival jam turned on even if a specified time has elapsed
after the machine eject signal was received.
7710 CF paper conveying sensor CF paper conveying sensor (CFPCS) is not K
stay jam turned off within specified time of its turning on.

2LL/2LJ/2LH-1
Jam
location*
7800 MB eject sensor non arrival MB eject sensor (MBES) is not turned on even if K
jam a specified time has elapsed after the machine
eject signal was received.
7810 MB eject sensor stay jam MB eject sensor (MBES) is not turned off within K
7950 Paper interval error jam An illegal inter-page or inter-copy interval has K
occurred (4000-sheet finisher).
7951 An illegal inter-page or inter-copy interval has K
occurred (1000-sheet finisher).
9000 No original feed jam DP feed sensor (DPFS) does not turn on within H
specified time during the first sheet feeding (Retry
5 times).
9001 DP original conveying jam DP timing sensor (DPTS) turns off within the H
specified time since the sensor turns on.
9002 DP sensor stay jam Sensor in the conveying system is on since origi- H
nal feeding starts.
9004 DP switchback jam 2 DP registration sensor (DPRS) is not turned on H
within specified time since original switchback
operation starts.
9005 No original feed 2 DP lift sensor 1 (DPLS1) does not turn on within H
specified time of the lift plate rising.
9006 DP switchback jam 3 DP eject sensor (DPES) is not turned on within H
specified time since original switchback operation
starts.
9007 DP switchback jam 4 DP eject sensor (DPES) is not turned off within H
specified time since original switchback operation
starts.
9008 No original feed jam 3 DP CIS sensor (DPCS) does not turn on within H
specified time of the paper feed starting
9009 DP original conveying jam 2 Next feed original became the stand-by states of H
paper feed while reading the image.
9010 Document processor open Document processor is opened during original H
feeding.
9011 DP top cover open The DP top cover is opened during original feed- H
ing.
9020 Original skew feed jam DP skew sensor (DPSS) does not turn on within H
specified time of DP registration sensor (DPRS)
turning on.
9110 DP feed sensor stay jam DP feed sensor (DPFS) does not turn off within H
specified time of DP timing sensor (DPTS) turning
on.

2LL/2LJ/2LH-1
Jam
location*
9200 DP registration sensor non DP registration sensor (DPRS) does not turn on H
arrival jam within specified time of DP feed sensor (DPFS)
turning on.
9210 DP registration sensor stay DP registration sensor (DPRS) does not turn off H
jam within specified time of DP timing sensor (DPTS)
turning on.
9300 DP CIS sensor non arrival jam DP CIS sensor (DPCS) does not turn on within H
specified time of DP registration sensor (DPFS)
turning on.
9310 DP CIS sensor stay jam DP CIS sensor (DPCS) does not turn off within H
specified time of DP registration sensor (DPFS)
turning off.
9400 DP timing sensor non arrival DP timing sensor (DPTS) does not turn on within H
jam specified time of DP feed sensor (DPFS) turning
on.
9410 DP timing sensor stay jam DP timing sensor (DPTS) does not turn off within H
specified time of DP feed sensor (DPFS) turning
off.
9500 DP switchback sensor non DP switchback sensor (DPSBS) does not turn on H
arrival jam within specified time of DP timing sensor (DPTS)
turning on.
9600 DP eject sensor non arrival DP eject sensor (DPES) does not turn on within H
jam specified time of DP timing sensor (DPTS) turning
on.
9610 DP eject sensor stay jam DP eject sensor (DPES) does not turn off within H
specified time of DP timing sensor (DPTS) turning
off.

2LL/2LJ/2LH-3
1-4-2 Troubleshooting
(1) First check items
If the paper is fed askew, jammed, curled, or leading-edge dog-eared, first perform to check the following
items.
Check items Check description Corrective measures

Paper 1. Check the paper delivered is If a dog-ear has happened, check there are no objects
dog-eared, skewed, rumpled, existing in the conveying paths and, if any, fix.
loosely fused, or curled. If the paper is fed askew or crumpled, perform the fol-
lowing No.2.If an inferior fusing or curling is observed
and the fuser temperature is set to a abnormal value,
when measured by performing maintenance mode
U161, reset to the default. (see page 1-3-89)
2. Check how paper is loaded in Adjust the cursors to the size of the paper.
the cassette (deck). (If paper is fed askew, perform a skew cancellation
Check that the paper has adjustment of the width adjuster cursor.) (see page 1-5-
been properly aligned with 87)
width adjuster cursor and the
rear guide; it has been loaded
without skewing; or it is not
damaged. (Crumpled paper,
main unit/DF jam)
3. Check how paper is loaded. If the cutting edge of the paper bundle is crumpled, fan
Check if the cutting edge of the paper before loading.
the paper bundle inside is If the paper is folded, stretch before loading in the
cumpled or bent. cassette
4. If a large-capacity deck is Reloard the paper so that its edges won't be situated
being used, check how paper above the platform.
is loaded in the deck.
Check if the paper inside the
deck is placed above the
guide.
5. Check the paper is damp, 1. Load the paper bundle in the cassette upside down.
wavy, or curled. 2. Load the paper bundle after rotating it 180and
reload.
3. Change the paper.
6. Check if the paper loaded Instruct the user to store paper in a dry, less humid
was stored in a continuously place.
humid place. Install a cassette heater and configure using U327. (see
page 1-3-129)
7. Check if the paper conforms Isolate the cause of the problem by replacing the paper
to the requirements. with the recommended paper.
(see page 1-1-1)

2LL/2LJ/2LH-3

Paper 8. Check the paper ejected is If the maintenance mode U161 shows that the fuser
dog-eared, skewed, rumpled, temperature is set to an abnormal value, reset it to the
loosely fused, or curled. default. (see page 1-3-89)
Settings/ 1. Perform U034 to check the If the check line is not situated at 20mm1mm from the
Detection reference mark is situated at leading edge, adjust the leading margin by U402. (see
20mm1mm from the edge. page 1-3-133)
(Fuser jam)
(see page 1-3-33)
2. Check the panel if the paper If the paper size is incorrectly displayed, adjust the
size is correctly detected and positions of the paper set guide cursors in accordance
the cassette size is not with the paper size, making sure that the paper is not
fixed.(Paper jam caused by askew to activate the size detector switch.
continously fed paper, DF
Jam J611X) Perform U000 to
obtain a Event Log to check if
the paper size and the size of
the paper loaded are met
when jam has occurred and if
the size of the original
document and the paper size
are met. see page 1-3-9)
3. Check that paper settings are Select Original/Paper settings under common settings
made in accordance with the in the system menu to set media type and weight of
paper being used. (Jam paper.
caused by faulty separation)
Coveying unit Check the main unit vertical To open, first open the right-side conveying unit and
conveying unit or the front and close firmly. (Check the position of the safery switch)
back parts and right and left parts
of the deck's horizontal
conveying unit are slightly
strained and closed.

2LL/2LJ/2LH-3

Conveying 1. Check that the foreign If foreign objects such as scrips, etc., remain in the
guide, objects including scrips, paper conveying path, remove.
approaching paper clips, etc., do not exist
guide, feed- in the paper conveying paths.
shift guide 2. Check that the paper If dirty, clean the guide, ribs (by a cloth), and the
conveying guide and the separation needles (by a cleaning brush).If the ribs of
separation needles are not the conveying guides were broken or deposited with
contaminated with toner, toner, replace.
paper dusts, etc.
3. Check that the paper Clean the conveying guide or the paper approaching
conveying guide has no guide.Remove any protrusions including barrs.If floated,
barrs, deformations, or fix it properly.If deformation or abrasion is observed,
abrasions; and it is properly replace.
mounted without being
floated.
4. Check that the guide. If the guide is inoperative or won't operate smoothly,
Check that the guide is replace the guide or the unit.
smoothly operative when
manipulated.
5. Check that the guide. If the guide is inoperative or won't operate smoothly, re-
Perform U033 to check the assemble the guide or replace the solenoid or the unit.
operation of the solenoid to
sight-check or audio-check its
action. (see page 1-3-32)

2LL/2LJ/2LH-3

Conveying 1. Check the conveying rollers Clean the conveying rollers or the pollyes.
roller, feed have no paper dusts, toner, If variation in the external diameter or abrasion is
roller or foreign objects observed, replace.
stucked.Check a variation of
the external diameter of the
roller or abrasion is not
observed with the coveying
roller.
2. Turn the cover safety switch If the conveying motor or the clutch is inoperative,
on and perform U030 - Motor, replace.
U032 - Clutch, and U240 - If stained, replace the clutch.
Finished, check they operate If the clutch is kept turned on due to a tensioned wire,
normally. reroute wires.
* : At checking the clutch by
U032, confirm that the
roller won't turn when the
motor is turned on. (see
page 1-3-29,1-3-31,1-3-
104)
3. Check the conveying roller Clean the roller axle or the axle holder.Re-assemble it
rotates without overloading. while checking the pressure of the spring.
Check the axle holder or the
roller shaft are not
contaminated.
Check that the spring has not
fallen off and is mounted so
that it is properly applying
pressure against the rollers
or pulleys.
Sensor 1. Check if it does not operate Re-assemble the actuator or the return spring.
with smoothness due to an
abnormal move or dropping
off of the actuator of the
coveying switch.
2. Check that the surface of the If dirty, clean the sensor or the black felt piece.
sensor and the recveptor
black felt pieces are not
contaminated with toner,
paper dusts, etc.
3. Perform U031 - Conveying If U031has revealed that the sensor is inoperative,
switch and U241 - Finisher replace the switch.
switch to check the sensors
are normal without flickering,
etc. (see page1-3-30, 1-3-
106)

2LL/2LJ/2LH-3

Static Check if the location is Re-assemble and re-wire the static discharge sheet at
susceptible to build static the ejection unit or the metal guide at the tranfer unit so
discharge at the conveying guide that they are properly grounded.
during printing.
(2) Items and corrective actions relating to the device that will cause paper jam
Jam types Check description Corrective measures

No-paper-feed jam or 1. Check if the jammed Replace the primary feed roller.(Service life of rubber
the leading edge of paper or the printed roller is 150k.)
paper is curled back at paper has a tear Increase the spring pressure to pinch the separation
the position of the caused by the roller at rollers if the component is undue to its expected
roller its leading edge. life.Replace the spring.
(J0501,J0502, 2. Check abrasion and Clean the feed roller and the forward roller.Or, if not
J0503,J0504, J0505, paper dusts on the feed amended, replace.
J0506, J0507, J0509, roller and forward
J0523, J0524, J0525, rollers.
J0526, J0527, J0545)
3. Perform U032 to check If disconnected or or stained, replace the primary
the forward roller and feed clutch.
feed roller are rotating.
4. Check if a primary feed Distinguished by color: White x 2, black x 1
roller of a wrong Check that the feed rollers are installed at (1) Feed
material of rubber is Roller (Collar is white.), (2) Retard roller (black), and
installed. (3) Pickup Roller (white). 45-ppm/55-ppm devices
* : If not, install then at the correct positions.
5. Check that the Increase the conveying force during paper pickup by
conveying force of the increasing the spring load of the pickup roller.
pickup roller is
sufficient.
6. Check the film is Amount of protrusion of film in approaching (Gap: 0.2
sufficiently protruded in - 0.5 mm) must be maintained after adjustment.
front of approching the
feed roller and the
nip.(Too wide a gap
against the feed roller.)

2LL/2LJ/2LH-3

No-paper-feed jam or 7. Check the separation If it gets in contact, replace the primary feed unit.
the leading edge of roller is not disturbed as
paper is curled back at a driving component is
the position of the in contact with the
roller frame during the
(J0501,J0502, separation roller is in
J0503,J0504, J0505, motion.
J0506, J0507, J0509, 8. Depress the release Modify mounting the retard holder fixing plate.
J0523, J0524, J0525, lever to release the
J0526, J0527, J0545) pressure of the primary
feed rollers to check
that the retard holder
falls.(The pressure by
the retard roller to the
feed roller is
decreased.)

2LL/2LJ/2LH-3

Multiple-feed Jam 1. Check if the cutting If the cutting edge of the paper bundle is crumpled or
(J0511, J0512, J0513, edge of the paper the cassette is loaded with multiple times of
J0514, J0516, J0517, bundle is crumpled or replenishing paper, load new paper.
J0519) the cassette is loaded
with multiple times of
replenishing paper.
2. Checking paper size. If the paper size does not agree.
Check that the size of 1. If the cassette cursors are open against the
the loaded paper and paper, set it properly.
the paper size chosen 2. Insert the cassette until the paper size detector
on the operator panel switch is turned on.
are met. If the size is not detectable while automatic sizing
is enabled, replace the size detection switch.
If the paper size agrees
1. If paper other than complying the requirements
such as coated paper, inkjet paper, etc., is used,
replace the paper.
2. RE-assemble the pulley retard in the primary
feed unit if it is mounted to the oppisite direction.
3. Check if the spring retard has not been fallen off
of the mounting position.
* : If the spring retard is not dropped off of the
mount position, decrease the spring pressure
that is applied to the separation rollers.
4. Replace the primary feed unit.
3. Check if paper dusts If the paper fanning roller is dirty, clean.

and abrasion are If abrasion is observed, replace.
observed on the paper
fanning roller and retard
roller.
4. Select the motor by If the clutch rotates following the other component
U032 and check the and its stain is observed, replace the clutch.
clutch rotates following
the other component
when the motor is
turned on. (see page 1-
3-31)
Duplex No-original- Perform U031 to check if If the duplex sensor 2 is not working, replace the
feed Jam (J0508)/ the duplex sensor 2 is duplex sensor 2.
Duplex Multiple-feed detected. (see page 1-3-30)
Jam (J0518)

2LL/2LJ/2LH-3

Intermediate/ 1. Check to see if the If it won't operate without hinderance, re-assemble or
conveying sensor stay actuator is operative replace the actuator's return spring.
jam without hinderance.
(J1313, J1314, J1513, 2. Perform U031 to check If the sensor is inoperative, replace.
J1514) the operation of the
sensor.
3. Select the motor by If stained, replace the clutch.Re-assmeble the clutch
U032 and check if the so that it is not continuously energized. (Change of
coveying clutch rotates wirings, etc.)
following the other
component. (see page
1-3-31)
4. Check if the conveying If the bracket is twisted to be mounted, remove the
guide is twisted to be screw fixing the conveying guide and properly mount
mounted.(If the the bracket in the right position and fix again.
mounting parts of the
guide is floated, the
actuator won't protrude
sufficiently.)
5. Check no wrinkles are Adjust the cursors to the size of the paper.
observed at the sluck of * : (If paper is fed askew, perform a skew
paper during paper cancellation adjustment of the width adjuster
feeding. cursor.) (see page 1-5-87)
Conveying sensor non 1. Check to see if the Re-assemble or replace the actuator's return spring.
arrival jam (J1503/ actuator is operative
J1504) without hinderance.
SM conveying sensor 2. Perform U030 to check If the roller won't rotate without hinderance, loosen
2 stay jam (J3415, the operation of the the screws for adjusting the position (at the gear train
J3416, J3417) motor. bracket) to mount the driving gears, and tighten so
Check the transmission that a gap between the gears and frame is
of the gear drive using eliminated.
U032.
* : Check the convey-
ing roller rotates and
is movable in the
direction of thrust
without hinderance.
(see page 1-3-29,1-
3-31)

2LL/2LJ/2LH-3

Loop sensor non 1. Check no wrinkles are Adjust the cursors to the size of the paper.
arrival jam (J4101, observed at the sluck of * : (If paper is fed askew, perform a skew
J4102, J4103, J4104, paper during paper cancellation adjustment of the width adjuster
J4105, J4106, J4107) feeding. cursor.) (see page 1-5-87)
2. Check that the paper is Reload paper.

entirely loaded inside
the cassette without
being skewed.
Fuser eject sensor 1. If paper jam occurrs at If the distance between the housing and the feedshift
stay jam (J421X) the feedshift guide in guide is too small for the guide to move without
the eject unit, check if hinderance, replace the eject unit.
Ejection-full sensor the guide is operative
non arrival jam without hinderance.
(J460X)
2. Perform U031 to check Replace the defective eject sensor or the eject unit.
Inversion sensor non if the eject sensor does
arrival jam (J470X) not show a false
detection.
(see page 1-3-30)
Duplex sensors 1 and 1. Check that the duplex Clean or replace the duplex roller in the coveying
2, stuck/ non arrival rollers cause slipage in unit.
Jam (J43XX, J44XX) feeding paper.
2. Perform U031 to check Replace the defective duplex sensors 1 and 2 or the
if the duplex sensors 1 coveying unit.
and 2 do not show false
detections.
3. Check if the second Replace the paper with new paper.Try feeding paper
side of plain paper is lengthwise.
curled at its tail and
slacked in the middle
making the switch
disguised as no
existance of paper.

2LL/2LJ/2LH-3

BR conveying sensor 1. Check the location the Re-mount.
1/2 unreachable/stay bridge relay conveying
jam (J49XX) unit is mounted.
Eject sensor non
arrival jam (J50XX)
Eject sensor stay jam
(J51XX)
DF paper entry error
JAM (J600X)
Location of mounting the
relaying conveyance unit
2. Check if the Replace the bridge drive unit if damaged.

positionings of the
bridge drive unit is
broken.
Damaged
Normal
3. Check the bridge Re-mount.

conveying unit has
been properly installed.
[Fixing Paper conveying unit]
AK conveyance unit
Sliding rails for AK conveyance unit

the AK conveyance unit Front side
of the machine
4. Check if the upper Re-mount.

conveying guide on the
bridge conveying unit
has fallen off. A view of the AK (Bridge) Conveyance Unit
Tray being opened
Affix fixing films (No. 1) at the two axles.
Upper guide
Films (No. 1)
Adhesive tape
Lower guide

2LL/2LJ/2LH-3

BR conveying sensor 5. Check contamination of Clean or replace the rollers.
1/2 unreachable/stay the rollers of the bridge
jam (J49XX) eject unit.
Eject sensor non
arrival jam (J50XX) To the DF or
Ejector
Eject sensor stay jam
Crossed bridge unit
(J51XX)
DF paper entry error To the DF or
Ejector
JAM (J600X)
6. Check if the fixed hook Replace the eject unit if damaged.

part of the bridge eject
unit is broken.
7. Check if the rail Replace the eject unit if damaged.

moutings of the bridge
eject unit is broken.
8. Check contamination or Clean the axle holder or replace with a new axle
abrasion of the axle holder.
holders of the bridge
eject unit.
Modified sintered axle holder Eject unit
Modifed
Modifed

2LL/2LJ/2LH-3

BR conveying sensor 9. Check if the pivot of the Re-mount.
1/2 unreachable/stay paper conveying guide
jam (J49XX) of the bridge eject unit
Eject sensor non has fallen off. Note that when the top cover of the eject unit becomes open,
the axle falls off because the internal paper conveyance
arrival jam (J50XX) guide falls off. Caution
Confirm that the paper conveyance
guide has not fallen off nor the
Eject sensor stay jam axle is not off.
The part that is marked with a
(J51XX) circle in the figure to the left.
DF paper entry error Caution
JAM (J600X)
Paper conveyance guide
10. Check if the ribs of the If a rig is broken, replace the coveying guide.
conveying unit of the
bridge eject unit have
fallen off.
Upper cover
Conveyance Unit

2LL/2LJ/2LH-3

DF conveying sensor 1. Check the main unit Perform the height adjustment by referring to the
unreachable jam and the DF are installation instructions.
(J610X) vertically flush with
DF conveying sensor each other.
retention jam (J611X)
2. Check if the upper Re-mount. (Fixing an anti-falling part)

conveying guide on the
BR conveying unit has
fallen off.(Fixing an A view of the AK (Bridge) Conveyance Unit
Tray being opened
anti-falling part) Upper guide
Affix fixing films (No. 1) at the two axles.
Films (No. 1)
Adhesive tape
Lower guide

2LL/2LJ/2LH-3

DF conveying sensor 3. Check if the jammed 1.If thepaper is caught at the hole of the bridge
unreachable jam paper has a dog-ear. conveying unit and dog-eared and jammed, affix a
(J610X) sheet of film over the hole.
DF conveying sensor
retention jam (J611X)
The hole on the
paper conveyance unit
Machine front
2.If a down-curled sheet is jammed at the DF

conveying guide ribs by being dog-eared, replace the
DF conveying lower guide.
4. Check if dog-ears are If the edge of paper is caught at the holes of the
caused within the punch unit, check the punch unit and the firmware
punch unit. version of the DF using U019, and upgrade the
firmware of both units altogether.3NK_9A00.003.004
or later, 3NB_9200.004.007or later,
3NC_9200.004.001 or later
5. Check if paper is If a welding protrusion on the coveying side causes

caught at its leading paper to be trapped, try replacing the punch unit.
edge to crumple.

2LL/2LJ/2LH-3

DF conveying sensor 6. If the paper is stuck in Affix sheets of PET film at the Stay Punch in two
unreachable jam front of the conveying parts.
(J610X) roller and it is not
DF conveying sensor damaged, check if it is
S TAY P U N C H
retention jam (J611X) jammed because it was
trapped at the stay
punch.
DF intermediate sen- 1. If there is not the Re-mount the actuator.

sor retention jam jammed paper which is
(J631X) causing J631, at the
DF main tray ejection paper processing aria,
retention JAM (J641X) check to see if the
DF eject sensor non actuator (DF middle
arrival jam (J6500) sensor) is operative.
DF eject sensor reten-
tion jam (J651X)

2LL/2LJ/2LH-3

DF intermediate sen- 2. Check the range of the If the gap is not correct, fix balance of the bundle
sor retention jam up and down eject unit.
(J631X) movement of the If (1): Correct the phase shifting with meshing of the
DF main tray ejection ejection guide. front and back gears.
retention JAM (J641X) Check if the operating (Turn on U240 - Motor-EjectUnlock (30) to check the
DF eject sensor non position after feeding in balance of the front and back rollers with the bundle
arrival jam (J6500) the first sheet is normal. eject unit opened. see page 1-3-104)
DF eject sensor reten- (1)If it moves askew (due to
tion jam (J651X) the forward and backward
shift of phase on the eject
guide)
(2)If the range of motion is
too small
Check if the gap between
the ejection roller and the
ejection pulleys is approxi-
mately 3.5 - 5.5 mm.
(Check gaps while making If (2): Adjust the positioning of or replace the Mount
paper still in the intermedi- PI upper guide.
ate process tray.)
3. Execute maintenance If the width adjuster cursor is wrongly positioned,

mode U240 Motor - perform U246 Finisher - Width Front HP/Width Tail
Width Test A3/LD to HP. (see page 1-3-112)
adjust the position of
the width adjuster
cursor of the process
tray. Check if the cursor
is located at 0 - +0.5
from the edge of is
abnormally shifted.
(The DF and the main
unit paper sources)
(see page 1-3-104)

2LL/2LJ/2LH-3

DF intermediate sen- 4. Check if the dog-eared Replace the cursor with a new type.
sor retention jam paper, under-curled
(J631X) paper, or the paper fed
DF main tray ejection in a wrong timing is
retention JAM (J641X) disturbed at the cursor
DF eject sensor non and causing a sluck
arrival jam (J6500) jam.
DF eject sensor reten-
tion jam (J651X)
() ()
()
(
5. Check if a slack jam If correcting dog-ears or curlings is not possible,

and stapling problem apply two seats of film onto the plastic guides to
has occurred while the support the paper ends during feeding.
paper entered the DF
process tray due to the
down-curl of the paper
at duplex printing since
the paper approaches
the process tray.
6. With stapling at one 1. If a wire from the ejection motor is pinched by

point with abour 65 other component or a connector is loosely
sheets, check for the connected, correct.
failure on the bundle If a loss of synchronism is observed with the
when it is delivered in ejection motor due to lack of torque, replace the
the shape of an arc. motor.
2. If paper slipage occurrs due to the lack of
pressure by the ejection rollers, check the
pressure rollers (3, at the center) to see if the
pressure is insufficient and replace or re-
assemble.
SPRING EXIT PULLEY
If a malfunction to encumber the ejection rollers
to generate pressure is observed, correct.
7. With stapling set at 2 If the paper is curled, change the direction of loading
points and about 50 paper or replace the paper.
sheets, run a test print
and check the print
bundle delivered for the
failure on the direction
of ejection and the front
and back side, abrupt
alignment, and overall
alignment.

2LL/2LJ/2LH-3

DF intermediate sen- 8. Check if a floated Configure each of the cassettes for the weight of the
sor retention jam staple, buckling, or paper loaded.Replace the paper.
(J631X) stapling at a wrong Adjust the stapling home position by U246 - Staple
DF main tray ejection position is occurred. HP. (see page 1-3-112)
retention JAM (J641X) 9. Check stapling has Provide instructions with the following points
DF eject sensor non been properly done if emphasized.
arrival jam (J6500) the paper bundle 1. Tap the paper to align its ends and load all the
DF eject sensor reten- cannot be ejected way into the cassette.
tion jam (J651X) causing J-6510. 2. After settings, let go off of the paper.?(Allows
* : 4000-sheets finisher automatic ehection after stapling.)
3. Do not remove paper before the paper bundle is
ejected once it is stapled.
DF drum sensor non Paper is jammed with its Check the axle of the diverting solenoid is inserted all
arrival jam (J6600) leading edge caught by the the way into the lever of the DF diverting solenoid 1,
diversion solenoid 1 in the and insert the lever firmly if it is not.
middle of coveying paths.
DF drum sensor stay 1. Check if the size and If not agreed, load the paper bundle in the size and
jam (J6610) orientation of the orientation configured for the cassette or the manual
original document and feed tray.
the paper used match.
2. Check to see if the If the return spring has been fallen off of the fixing
actuator (DF drum position, fix it properly.If the actuator won't operate
sensor) is operative smoothly, replace.
without hinderance.
Center-folding unit If paper is jammed before If the drive transmission gears are not in mesh,
conveying stay JAM reaching the center-folding replace the pivot pin of the CF lock lever and the DF
(J6710) unit, check that the drive fixing pin.
Center-folding unit train gears are in mesh.
conveying stay JAM
(J7710)

2LL/2LJ/2LH-3

Electrical parts that could cause paper jam during paper travelling at the primary
feeding (to regist roller)
Timing of detection
Jam code
J0501,J0511,J1301,J1311,J4001,J4011
Measures
Related parts
Paper feed motor(PFM) Registration sensor (RS)
Paper feed clutch 1(PFCL1) Engine PWB (EPWB)
Assist clutch 1 (ACSL1) *2 Feed PWB 2 (FPWB2)
Middle clutch (MCL)*1 Feed PWB 1 (FPWB1)
Middle motor (MM) *2
Registration clutch (RCL)*1
Registration motor (RM)*2
Feed sensor 1 (FS1)
Middle sensor (MS)
*1: 35 ppm model only. *2: 45 ppm model /55 ppm model only.
Checking
procedure at the Corrective action at the occurrence of On/Off control signal output connector
occurrence of J0501 (terminal), point of checking connection
J0501
1 Items for Initial Checks see page 1-4-23
2 Feed sensor 1 (FS1): Conduct
connectivity check, mounting location Feed PWB 2 YC8-11
check, operation check (U031)
3 Paper feed clutch (PFCL1): Operation
Feed PWB 2 YC4-1
check (U032)
4 Paper feed motor : Operation check
Feed PWB 2 YC2-3 (RDY), 5 (REM)
(U030)
5 Feed PWB 2: Replace
6 Engine PWB : Replace

2LL/2LJ/2LH-3
Checking
occurrence of J13X1 (terminal), point of checking connection
J13X
Middle sensor (MS) : Conduct
2 connectivity check, mounting location Feed PWB 2 YC8-9
Assist clutch 1 (ACSL1)*2 :Operation
3 Feed PWB 2 YC10-1
check (U032)
Middle clutch (MCL)*1 :
4 Middle motor (MM)*2:Operation check Feed PWB 2 YC7-14 / YC7-1 to 4
(U032/30)
Checking
J40X1
2 Registration sensor (RS): Conduct
connectivity check, mounting location
Feed PWB 2 YC7-12
check, operation check (U031) and U051
- Slack Margin Settings.
3 Registration clutch (RCL)*1
Registration motor (RM)*2: Operation Feed PWB 1 YC22-2 / YC25-1 to 4
check (U032/30)
4 Feed PWB 1 : Replace

2LL/2LJ/2LH-3

feeding ( to regist roller)
Timing of detection
Jam code
J0502,J0512,J1502,J1512,J1302,J1312,J4002,J4012
Corrective Action
Related parts
Paper feed motor(PFM) Engine PWB (EPWB)
Paper feed clutch 2 (PFCL2) Feed PWB 2 (FPWB2)
Assist clutch 2 (ACSL2)*2 Feed PWB 1 (FPWB1)
Middle clutch (MCL)*1
Middle motor (MM)*2
Vertical conveying clutch (PCCL)
Feed sensor 2 (FS2)
Paper conveying sensor (PCS)
Middle sensor (MS)
Registration sensor (RS)
Checking
J05X2
2 Feed sensor 2 (FS2): Conduct
3 Paper feed clutch (PFCL1): Operation
Feed PWB 2 YC4-1
check (U032)
4 Paper feed motor : Operation check
Feed PWB 2 YC2-3(RDY), 5(REM)
(U030)

2LL/2LJ/2LH-3
Checking
J13X2
Middle sensor (MS) : Conduct
2 connectivity check, mounting location, Feed PWB 2 YC8-21
check operation check (U031)
Vertical conveying clutch (PCCL):
3 Feed PWB 2 YC5-3
Operation check (U032)
Middle clutch (MCL)*1
4 Middle motor (MM)*2:Operation check Feed PWB 2 YC7-14 / YC7-1 to 4
(U032/30)
*1: 35 ppm model only. *2: 45 ppm model /55 ppm model only
.
Checking
J15X2
Conveying sensor (PCS) I/O check and
2 Feed PWB 2 YC6-3
sensor check (U031)
Vertical conveying clutch (PCCL):
3 Feed PWB 2 YC5-3
Assist clutch 2 (ACSL2) *2?Operation
4 Feed PWB 2 YC12-1
check (U032)
*2: 45 ppm model /55 ppm model only.
Checking
J40X2
2 Registration sensor (RS): Conduct
connectivity check, mounting location
Feed PWB 2 YC7-12
check, operation check U031 and U051 -
Slack Margin Settings.

2LL/2LJ/2LH-3
Checking
J40X2
check (U032/30)
(5) Paper jam during manual feeding

Timing of detection
Jam code
J0131,J0509,J0519,J4009,J4019
Corrective Action
Related parts
Manual feed clutch (MPPFCL) Feed PWB 1 (FPWB1)

Middle clutch (MCL)*1 Relay PWB (RYPWB)
Middle motor (MM)*2 * : In paper conveying unit
MP feed sensor (MPFS)
Registration sensor (RS)
Manual feed lift motor (MPLM)
MP lift sensor 1 (MPLS1)
MP lift sensor 2 (MPLS2)

2LL/2LJ/2LH-3
Checking
J05X9
2 MP feed sensor (MPFS): Conduct
3 Manual feed conveying clutch (CL):
Feed PWB 2 YC4-1
4 Middle clutch (MCL)*1
Middle motor (MM)*2 : Operation check Feed PWB 2 YC7-14 / YC7-1 to 4
(U032/30)
Checking On/Off control signal output connector

procedure at the Corrective action at the occurrence of (terminal), point of checking connection
occurrence of J40X9
J40X9
Registration sensor (RS): Conduct
2 connectivity check, mounting location Feed PWB 2 YC7-12
3 Registration motor (RM)*2: Operation Feed PWB 1 YC22-2 / YC25-1 to 4
check (U032/30)
Checking
J0131
2 Manual feed lift base elevation check:
1. Up-and-down movability of the paper
lift base of the manual feed tray.
2. Check if the lift lever is in contact with -
the lift motor cam (re-mount the
manual feed table).

2LL/2LJ/2LH-3
Checking
J0131
3 MP lift sensors 1 and 2: Check for Relay PWB (YC3-5, YC3-8) (YC12)
connection and the position of the sensor
to be mounted.
4 MP lift motor: Check if the paper lift base Relay PWB(YC3-11), (YC12)
is raised as the motor rotates.
5 Feed PWB 1 : Replace Feed PWB 1(YC17),(YC1)
6 Engine PWB : Replace Engine PWB (YC6)

2LL/2LJ/2LH-3
(6) Paper jam at the duplex re-feeding part

Timing of detection
Jam code
J0508,J0518
Corrective Action
Related parts

Duplex clutch 2 (DUCL2)*1
Feed PWB 1 (FPWB1)
Duplex motor 2 (DUM2)*2
Duplex sensor 2 (DUS2)
Checking
J05X8
2 Duplex sensor 2 (DUS2): Conduct
connectivity check, mounting location Feed PWB 1 YC 14-5
3 Duplex clutch 2 (DUCL2)*1
Duplex motor 2 (DUM2)*2: Operation Feed PWB 1 YC 14-12 / YC14-14 to 17
check (U032/30)
4 Check that the drive from the paper feed
motor is transferred to the duplex roller.
* : 35 ppm model only.

2LL/2LJ/2LH-3
(7) Electrical parts that could cause paper jam at the Secondary transfer part
Timing of detection
Jam code
J410x,J411x
Corrective Action
Related parts

Secondary transfer roller - transfers the
Feed PWB 1 (FPWB1)
drive from the transfer belt
Registration clutch (RCL)*1 Relay PWB (RYPWB)
Registration motor (RM)*2 * : In paper conveying unit
Loop sensor (LPS)
Checking
occurrence of J41XX (terminal), point of checking connection
J41XX
2 Loop sensor (LPS) : Conduct
check (U032/30)
4 Check that the drive from the transfer
belt unit is transferred to the second
transfer roller.
5 Check how the conveying unit and the
main unit drawer are connected (such as
a fallen pin) and, if they are normal,
replace the relay PWB.

2LL/2LJ/2LH-3
(8) Electrical parts that could cause paper jam at the fuser and eject parts
Timing of detection
Jam code
J420x,J421x,J460x,J461x,J470x,J471x
Corrective Action
Related parts
Fuser motor (FUM) Engine PWB (EPWB)
Eject motor (EM) Front PWB (FRPWB)
Feedshift solenoid (FSSOL)
Fuser eject sensor (FUES)
Eject full sensor (EFS)
Switchback sensor (SBS)

JS eject motor (JSEM)
* : The job separator is installed.
Checking
J42XX
2 Fuser eject sensor (FUES) : Conduct
connectivity check, mounting location Engine PWB YC26-A13
3 feedshift solenoid (FSSOL): feedshift
Front PWB YC4-15REM), 16(RET)
guide check (U033)
4 Fuser motor (FUM) : Operation check
Feed PWB 1 YC18-3(RDY), 5(REM)
(U030)

2LL/2LJ/2LH-3
Checking
J46XX
2 Eject full sensor (EFS) : Conduct
connectivity check, mounting location Front PWB YC3-4
guide check (U033)
4 Eject motor (EM) : Operation check
Front PWB YC3-6 to 10
(U030)
5 Front PWB (FRPWB): Replace
Engine PWB : Replace
Checking
J47XX
2 Switchback sensor (SBS) : Conduct
connectivity check, mounting location Front PWB YC4-9
guide check (U033)
4 Job separator eject motor (JSEM): JS main circuit PWB: YC2-4, 5, 6, 7,
Operational check (U030) YC-1 Feed PWB 1: YC20
5 Engine PWB : Replace Engine PWB : YC7 Front PWB : YC3

2LL/2LJ/2LH-3
(9) Electrical parts that could cause paper jam at the duplex part
Timing of detection
Jam code
J430x,J431x,J440x,J441x
Corrective Action
Related parts

Duplex clutch 1 (DUCL1)*1 Relay PWB (RYPWB)
Duplex motor 1 (DUM1)*2 * : In paper conveying unit
Duplex clutch 2 (DUCL2)*1
Feed PWB 1 (FPWB1) J440X
Duplex motor 2 (DUM2)*2
Checking
J43XX
2 Duplex sensor 1 (DUS1) : Conduct
Duplex motor 1 (DUM1)*2: Operation Feed PWB 1 YC23-4 /YC23-6 to 9
check (U032/30)
4 Is the drive from the paper feed motor
chaned to the upper and lower duplex
rollers.
main unit drawer are connected and, if
they are normal, replace the feed circuit
PWB1.
6 Feed PWB 1(FPWB1) : relpace

2LL/2LJ/2LH-3

occurrence of J44XX
J44XX
2 Duplex sensor 2 (DUS2) : Conduct
Duplex motor 2 (DUM2)*2: Operation Feed PWB 1 YC14-12 / YC14-14 to 17
check (U032/30)
main unit drawer are connected and, if
they are normal, replace the feed circuit
PWB1.
5 Feed PWB 1(FPWB1) : relpace
7 Relay PWB (RYPWB) : Replace

2LL/2LJ/2LH-3
(10) Electrical parts that could cause paper jam at the BR (bridge) part
Timing of detection
Jam code
J490x,J491x,J500x,J501x,J510x,J511x
Corrective Action
Related parts
BR conveying motor 1 (BRCM1) Engine PWB (EPWB)
BR conveying motor 2 (BRCM2) BR PWB (BRPWB)
BR conveying sensor 1 (BRCS1)
BR conveying sensor 2 (BRCS2)
BR eject sensor (BRES)
BR feedshift solenoid (BRSOL)
Checking
J49XX
2 BR conveying sensor 1 (BRCS1) :
Conduct connectivity check, mounting BR PWB YC6-2
location check, operation check (U031)
3 BR conveying motor 1 (BRCM1) :
BR PWB YC7-1 to 4
4 BR PWB (BRPWB) : Replace

occurrence of J50XX
J50XX
2 BR conveying sensor 2 (BRCS2) :
Conduct connectivity check, mounting BR PWB YC4-2
3 BR conveying motor 2 (BRCM2) :
BR PWB YC7-5 to 8

2LL/2LJ/2LH-3

occurrence of J50XX
J50XX
Checking
J51XX
2 BR eject sensor (BRES) : Conduct
connectivity check, mounting location Engine PWB YC20-17
3 BR feedshift solenoid (BRSOL): Check
Engine PWB YC20-12(ACT), 13(RET)
for switching feedshift guide (U033)

2LL/2LJ/2LH-3
(11) Electrical parts that could cause paper jam at the DF paper entry,feedshift and
subtray left eject part
Timing of detection
Jam code
J610x,J611x,J620x,J621x,J630x,J631x
Corrective Action
Related parts
DF paper entry motor (DFPEM) DF feedshift solenoid 3 (DFFSSOL)
DF middle motor (DFMM) DP main PWB (DFMPWB)
DF eject motor (DFEM)
BR conveying motor 1 (BRCM1)
BR conveying motor 2 (BRCM2)
DF paper entry sensor (DFPES)
DF middle sensor (DFMES)
DF sub eject sensor (DFSES)
Checking
J61XX
2 DF paper entry sensor (DFPES) :
Conduct connectivity check, mounting
DF main PWB YC21-9
location check, operation check
(U241:Finisher HP)
3 DF feedshift solenoid 3 (DFFSSOL):
Check to see the feedshift guide 3 is DF main PWB YC18-12,13
switchable (U240 Solenoied - SubTray)
4 DF paper entry motor (DFPEM) :
Operation check (U240 :Motor Feed DF main PWB YC12-13 to 16
In(H),Feed In(L))
5 BR conveying motor 1 (BRCM1) , BR
conveying motor 2 (BRCM2) : Operation
check (U030 Bridge1 , Bridge2)
6 DF main PWB(DFMPWB) : Replace

2LL/2LJ/2LH-3
Checking
J62XX
2 DF sub eject sensor (DFSES) : Conduct
connectivity check, mounting location DF main PWB YC21-3
3 DF feedshift solenoid 3 (DFFSSOL):
switchable (U240)
DF main PWB YC12-13 to 16
5 DF eject motor (DFEM) : Operation
check (U240)
Checking
J63XX
2 DF middle sensor (DFMES):Conduct
3 feedshift solenoid 3 (DFFSSOL): Check
to see the feedshift guide 3 is switchable DF main PWB YC18-12,13
(U240)
5 DF middle motor (DFMM) : Operation
check (U240)

2LL/2LJ/2LH-3
(12) Electrical parts that could cause paper jam at the DF process part
Timing of detection
Jam code
J6500,J651x,J6600,J6610
Corrective Action
Related parts
DF middle motor (DFMM) DF main PWB(DFMPWB)
DF drum motor (DFDRM)
DF bundle eject sensor (DFBDS)
DF drum sensor (DFDRS)
DF feedshift solenoid 1 (DFDRSOL)
Checking
J65XX
3 DF bundle eject sensor (DFBDS) :
Conduct connectivity check, mounting DF main PWB YC22-27
location, operation (U241)
4 DF middle motor (DFMM) : Operation
check (U240)
Checking
J66XX
2 DF drum sensor (DFDRS) : Conduct
3 DF feedshift solenoid 1 (DFDRSOL):
switchable (U240)

2LL/2LJ/2LH-3
Checking
J66XX
4 DF drum motor (DFDRM) : Operation
check (U240)
(13) Electrical parts that could cause paper jam at the DF eject tray part
Timing of detection
Jam code
J640x,J641x
Corrective Action
Related parts
DF eject motor (DFEM) DF main PWB(DFMPWB)
DF tray motor (DFTM)
DF middle sensor (DFMES)

DF tray upper sensor 1 and 2 (DFTUSS 1,2)
Checking
J64XX
3 DF tray upper sensor 1 and 2
(DFTUSS1, 2) : Conduct connectivity DF main PWB YC21-
check, mounting location, operation 19(DFTUSS1),YC13-3(DFTUSS2)
(U241)
4 DF eject motor (DFEM): Operational
check (U240)
5 DF tray motor (DFTM) : Operation check
DF main PWB YC19-4
(U240)

2LL/2LJ/2LH-3
(14) Electrical parts that could cause paper jam at the CF conveying part
Timing of detection
Jam code
J6710,J7700,J7710
Corrective Action
Related parts
DF drum motor (DFDRM) DF main PWB(DFMPWB)
CF paper entry motor (CFPEM) CF PWB (CFPWB)
DF drum sensor (DFDRS)
CF conveying sensor (CFPCS)
Checking
occurrence of J671X (terminal), point of checking connection
J671X
2 DF drum sensor (DFDRS) : Conduct
3 DF drum motor (DFDRM) : Operation
check (U240)
4 CF paper entry motor (CFPEM): Check if
CF PWB YC18-1 to 4
the gears can chain the drive.
6 CF PWB (CFPWB): Replace
Checking
J77X0
2 CF conveying sensor (CFPCS) :
Conduct connectivity check, mounting CF PWB YC20-15
3 CF paper entry motor (CFPEM): Check if
CF PWB YC18-1 to 4
the gears can chain the drive.
5 CF PWB (CFPWB): Replace

2LL/2LJ/2LH
1-4-3 Self-diagnostic function

(1) Self-diagnostic function
This machine is equipped with self-diagnostic function. When a problem is detected, the machine stops print-
ing and display an error message on the operation panel. An error message consists of a message prompting
a contact to service personnel and a four-digit error code indicating the type of the error.
Machine failure.
Call service.
C####
Error occurred.
Turn the main power
switch off and on.
C####
Figure 1-4-4

2LL/2LJ/2LH-3
(2) Self diagnostic codes

If the part causing the problem was not supplied, use the unit including the part for replacement
Caution:
Before attempting to check the power supply, fuser unit, and the IH controller PWB, be sure to turn the power
switch off and unplug the machine from power. Allow at least 5 seconds before starting to conduct service until
the capacitors on the circuit boards have been completely discharged.
To reset a service call for fuser, performing U163 Fuser Defects is required. (See page 1-3-90)
To reset a service call regarding the Maintenance T display and the DP, performing U906 Disconnection at
Defect is required. (See page 1-3-167)
Check procedures/
Code Contents Related parts
corrective measures
0030 FAX control PWB system FAX control PWB 1. Turn the main power swtch off and after
error 5 seconds, re-mount the FAX controller
Processing with the fax soft- PWB, then turn power on.
ware was disabled due to a 2. Reinstall the fax software.
software problem. 3. Replace the FAX control PWB.
0060 Engine PWB mismatch Engine PWB 1. Turn the main power swtch off and after
Unmatching engine and 5 seconds, then turn power on.
engine sub boards. 2. Replace the engine PWB (see page 1-5-
Defective engine subboard 53).
0070 FAX control PWB incompat- FAX control PWB 1. Install the FAX system designed for the
ible detection error (The FAX PWB model.
Abnormal detection of FAX installed will not be 2. Reinstall the fax software.
control PWB incompatibility In the one designed
the initial communication with for the machine.)
the FAX control PWB, any
normal communication com-
mand is not transmitted.
0100 Backup memory device EEPROM(main 1. Turn the main power swtch off and after
error PWB) 5 seconds, then turn power on.
2. Check that the EEPROM on the main
circuit PWB is peroperly installed on the
main circuit PWB and, if not, re-install it.
3. Replace the main PWB (see page 1-5-
47).
0120 MAC address data error EEPROM(main 1. Turn the main power swtch off and after
For data in which the MAC PWB) 5 seconds, then turn power on.
address is invalid. 2. Check the MAC address on the network
status page.
3. If it is blank, obtain an EEPROM with its
MAC address written from the service
support and install.
47).

2LL/2LJ/2LH-3
Check procedures/
corrective measures
0150 Backup memory read/write EEPROM 1. Turn the main power swtch off and after
error (engine PWB) (engine PWB) 5 seconds, then turn power on.
No response is issued from 2. Check that the EEPROM is peroperly
the device in reading/writing installed on the engine PWB and re-
for 5 ms or more and this install it.
problem is repeated 5 times 3. Replace the engine PWB (see page 1-5-
successively.
53).
Mismatch of reading data from
4. Check the EEPROM and if the data are
2 locations occurs 8 times
currupted, contact the service support.
successively.
Mismatch between writing
data and reading data occurs
8 times successively.
0160 Backup memory data error EEPROM 1. Turn the main power swtch off and after
(engine PWB) 5 seconds, then turn power on.
Reading data from EEPROM 2. Execute U021 - memory initializing.(see
is abnormal. page 1-3-27)
3. If the EEPROM data are currupted,
contact the service support.
0170 Billing counting error EEPROM 1. Check that the EEPROMs installed in
The values on the main circuit the main PWB and the engine PWB are
PWB and on the engine do correct and, if not, use the correct
not match for any of charging EEPROM for the model.
counter, life counter, and 2. If the EEPROM data are currupted,
scanner counter. contact the service support.
Main PWB Replace the main PWB (see page 1-5-47).
Engine PWB Replace the engine PWB (see page 1-5-53).
0180 Machine number mismatch Data damage of 1. Confirm the machine data for the main
Machine number of main and EEPROM. and engine units by using U004 (see
engine does not match. page 1-3-23).
2. If the serial number data of different
models is alternately displayed, install
the correct EEPROM in the PWB of the
wrong serial number data.
3. Contact the Service Support.
0620 FAX image DIMM error FAX image DIMM 1. Install the FAX image DIMM supplied in
1. The Fax image DIMM has the FAX system onto the main PWB.
not been installed. 2. Firmly install the FAX image DIMM again
2. Fax image DIMM access onto the main board.
error. 3. Check the FAX image DIMM terminals
and remove any foreign objects that may
be adhered to it.
4. Replace with a new FAX image DIMM.
Main PWB. Replace the main PWB (see page 1-5-47).

2LL/2LJ/2LH-3
Check procedures/
corrective measures
0630 DMA error DP CIS 1. Reconnect the CIS signal line.
DMA transmission of image 2. Confirm that the CIS connector
data does not complete within terminals are firmly connected. Insert
the specified period of time. the connector all the way in.
3. If the wiring is disconnected, shorted or
grounded, replace the wiring.
DP main PWB 1. Confirm that the wiring connector is
Main PWB firmly connected and, if necessary,
connect the connector all the way in.
Wiring that connects the CIS and the DP
controller PWB.
Wiring that connects the DP main PWB
and the main PWB.
3. Replace the DP main PWB.
47).
0640 Hard disk error HDD 1. If an abnormal noise is heard from the
The hard disk cannot be HDD, replace the HDD.
accessed. 2. Check the SATA wiring between the
HDD and the main circuit PWB for loose
connection, disconnection and
damages, and that it is connected into
the correct terminal.
Main PWB: YC1,YC27
3. Replace the SATA cable.
4. Execute U024 to initialize (FULL) the
HDD (see page 1-3-28).
5. If an error is detected after executing
U024, replace the HDD.

2LL/2LJ/2LH-3
Check procedures/
corrective measures
0650 FAX image DIMM check FAX DIMM. 1. Confirm that a used FAX image DIMM
error was used instead of the FAX image
A fax image DIMM which was DIMM contained in the FAX system.
used with another machine is 2. If a DIMM that was used with other unit
installed. has been installed, execute
maintenance mode U671 - Recovery
FAX DIMM.
3. Check whether the Fax DIMM is
properly inserted into the socket on the
main PWB.
4. Replace with a new FAX image DIMM.
0800 Image processing error Main PWB Replace the main PWB (see page 1-5-47).
JAM010X is detected twice.
0830 FAX control PWB flash pro- FAX software 1. Reinstall the fax software.
gram area checksum error 1. Execute initializing by U600.(Refer to
FAX control PWB
A checksum error occurred
the FAX service manual)
with the program of the FAX
2. Replace the FAX control PWB.
control PWB.
0840 Faults of RTC Battery ( main 1. Make sure that the back-up batteries on
(Maintenance T is displayed) PWB) the main PWB are not short-circuited.
The time is judged to go back 2. Reset Maintenance T by executing
based on the comparison of U906 (see page 1-3-167).
the RTC time and the current 3. If the same C call is displayed when
time or five years or more power is switched on and off, replace the
have passed. back up battery.
4. If communication error (due to a noise,
After C840 is detected, the
etc.) is present with the RTC on the main
machine enters in disconnec-
tion mode after the main circuit PWB, check the PWB is properly
power switch has been grounded.
switched on and off and indi- Main PWB Replace the main PWB (see page 1-5-47).
cates Maintenance T.
0870 PCFAX control PWB to main FAX control PWB 1. Turn the main power swtch off and after
PWB high capacity data 5 seconds, re-mount the FAX controller
transfer error PWB, then turn power on.
High-capacity data transfer 2. Replace the FAX control PWB.
between the FAX control PWB
HDD Execute U024 to initialize the HDD (see
and the main PWB of the
machine was not normally page 1-3-28).
performed even if the data Main PWB Replace the main PWB (see page 1-5-47).
transfer was retried the speci-
fied times.

2LL/2LJ/2LH-3
Check procedures/
corrective measures
0920 Fax file system error FAX control PWB 1. Execute initializing by U600 (Refer to
The backup data is not the FAX service manual).
retained for file system abnor- 2. Replace the FAX control PWB.
mality of flash memory of the
FAX control PWB.
0970 12 V power down detect Power source 1. Check the +12V output is given at YC14
Detection of the temporary PWB of the power source PWB.
blackout during sleeping (24V 2. Replace the power source PWB (see
is off, 23V is on, only the con- page 1-5-66).
troller software is running)
0980 24 V power down detect Power source 1. Check the +24V output is given at YC9
If a 24V power disconnection PWB (30/35 ppm) or YC12 (45/55 ppm) of the
signal is observed and a 12V power circuit PWB.
power disconnection signal is 2. Replace the power source PWB (see
observed simultaneously for page 1-5-55)
one second.

2LL/2LJ/2LH-3
Check procedures/
corrective measures
1000 MP lift motor error Manual feed lift 1. Check that the paper lift base of the
If the MP lift sensor 1 (upper base elevating manual feed tray can smoothly ascend
limit detect) or 2 (bottom mechanism and descent, if not, repair or replace.
detect) is not detectable to be 2. Check that the lift lever is located so that
turned on while the MP lift it can ascend or descend by the lift
motor is ascending or motor cam and that it not damaged and,
descending.
if necessary, re-install or replace the
manual feed table.
MP lift motor 1. Check that the paper elevator has been
ascended.
2. Check the drive gear can rotate or they
are not unusually loaded and, if
necessary, replace.
3. Confirm that the wiring connector is
firmly connected and, if necessary,
MP lift motor and Relay PWB (YC3)
Relay PWB (YC12) and Feed PWB1
(YC17)
Feed PWB1 (YC1) and Engine PWB
(YC6)
5. Replace the MP lift motor.
MP lift sensor1 1. Check that the sensor is correctly
MP lift sensor2 positioned.
MP lift sensor1,2 and Relay PWB (YC3)
Relay PWB (YC12) and Feed
PWB1(YC17)
Feed PWB1 (YC1) and Engine PWB
(YC6)
4. Replace the MP lift sensor1 or MP lift
sensor2.
Feed PWB 2 Replace the Feed PWB 2.
Engine PWB 1. Check the engine software and upgrade
to the latest, if necessary.
2. Replace the engine PWB (see page 1-5-
53).

2LL/2LJ/2LH-3
Check procedures/
corrective measures
1010 Lift motor 1 error Cassette lift base Check that the cassette base can be
After cassette 1 is inserted, lift elevating manipulated smoothly, if not, repair or
sensor 1 does not turn on mechanism replace.
within 12 s. This error is
Lift motor 1 1. Check that the cassette base has been
detected 4 times successively.
ascended.
The lock signal of the motor is
detected continuously for 1 s.
This error is detected 4 times are not unusually loaded and, if
successively. necessary, replace.
Lift motor 1 and Feed PWB 2 (YC3)
Feed PWB 2 (YC1) and Engine PWB
(YC4)
5. Replace the lift motor 1.
Lift sensor 1 1. Check that the sensor is correctly
positioned.
Lift sensor 1 and Feed PWB 2 (YC8)
(YC4)
4. Replace the lift sensor1.
53).

2LL/2LJ/2LH-3
Check procedures/
corrective measures
1020 Lift motor 2 error Cassette lift base Check that the cassette base can be
After cassette 2 is inserted, lift elevating manipulated smoothly, if not, repair or
sensor 2 does not turn on mechanism replace.
within 12 s. This error is
Lift motor 2 1. Check that the cassette base has been
ascended.
detected continuously for 1 s.
This error is detected 4 times are not unusually loaded and, if
successively. necessary, replace.
Lift motor 2 and Feed PWB 2 (YC3)
(YC4)
5. Replace the lift motor 2.
Lift sensor 2 1. Check that the sensor is correctly
positioned.
Lift sensor 2 and Feed PWB 2 (YC8)
(YC4)
4. Replace the lift sensor2.
53).

2LL/2LJ/2LH-3
Check procedures/
corrective measures
1030 PF lift motor 1 error Cassette lift base Check that the cassette base can be
(paper feeder) elevating manipulated smoothly, if not, repair or
After cassette 3 is inserted, mechanism replace.
PF lift sensor 1 does not turn
PF Lift motor 1 1. Check that the cassette base has been
on within 12 s. This error is
ascended.
During driving the motor, the
lift overcurrent protective are not unusually loaded and, if
monitor signal is detected for necessary, replace.
1 s or more 5 times succes- 3. Confirm that the wiring connector is
sively. However, the first 1 s firmly connected and, if necessary,
after motor is turned on is connect the connector all the way in.
excluded from detection. PF Lift motor 1 and main PWB (YC7)
5. PFReplace the lift motor 1.
PF Lift sensor 1 1. Check that the sensor is correctly
positioned.
PF Lift sensor 1 and PF main PWB
(YC7)
4. Replace the lift sensor 1.
PF main PWB Replace the PF main PWB (Refer to the
service manual for the paper feeder).

2LL/2LJ/2LH-3
Check procedures/
corrective measures
1040 PF lift motor 2 error Cassette lift base Check that the cassette base can be
(paper feeder) elevating manipulated smoothly, if not, repair or
ascended.
During driving the motor, the
lift overcurrent protective are not unusually loaded and, if
monitor signal is detected for necessary, replace.
1 s or more 5 times succes- 3. Confirm that the wiring connector is
sively. However, the first 1 s firmly connected and, if necessary,
after motor is turned on is connect the connector all the way in.
excluded from detection. PF Lift motor 2 and PF main PWB (YC7)
5. Replace the PF Lift motor2.
PF Lift sensor 2 1. Check that the sensor is correctly
positioned.
(YC7)
4. Replace the PF Lift sensor 2.

2LL/2LJ/2LH-3
Check procedures/
corrective measures
1100 PF lift motor 1 error Paper feeder lift Check that the cassette base can be
(large capacity feeder) base elevating manipulated smoothly, if not, repair or
PF Lift motor1 1. Check that the cassette base has been
ascended.
(Time to detect is 2 seconds
at the second time and later.) are not unusually loaded and, if
During driving the motor, the necessary, replace.
lift overcurrent protective 3. Confirm that the wiring connector is
monitor signal is detected for firmly connected and, if necessary,
200 ms or more 5 times suc- connect the connector all the way in.
cessively. However, the first 1 PF Lift motor 1 and PF main PWB (YC7)
s after PF lift motor 1 is turned 4. If the wiring is disconnected, shorted or
on is excluded from detection. grounded, replace the wiring.
5. Replace the PF lift motor1.
PF Lift sensor1 1. Check that the sensor is correctly
positioned.
(YC5)
4. Replace the PF lift sensor1.

2LL/2LJ/2LH-3
Check procedures/
corrective measures
1110 PF lift motor 2 error Paper feeder lift Check that the cassette base can be
(large capacity feeder) base elevating manipulated smoothly, if not, repair or
ascended.
(Time to detect is 2 seconds
at the second time and later.) are not unusually loaded and, if
During driving the motor, the necessary, replace.
lift overcurrent protective 3. Confirm that the wiring connector is
monitor signal is detected for firmly connected and, if necessary,
200 ms or more 5 times suc- connect the connector all the way in.
cessively. However, the first 1 PF Lift motor 2 and PF main PWB (YC7)
s after PF lift motor 2 is turned 4. If the wiring is disconnected, shorted or
on is excluded from detection. grounded, replace the wiring.
5. Replace the PF Lift motor2.
PF Lift sensor2 1. Check that the sensor is correctly
positioned.
(YC4)
4. Replace the PF Lift sensor 2.

2LL/2LJ/2LH-3
Check procedures/
corrective measures
1140 SD lift motor error Paper feeder lift Check that the cassette base can be
(side deck) base elevating manipulated smoothly, if not, repair or
SD lift sensor does not turn on
SD Lift motor 1. Check that the cassette base has been
within 30 s.
ascended.
detected continuously for 200
ms. are not unusually loaded and, if
necessary, replace.
SD Lift motor and SD main PWB (YC8)
5. Replace the SD Lift motor.
SD Lift sensor 1. Check that the sensor is correctly
positioned.
SD Lift sensor and SD main PWB (YC5)
4. Replace the SD Lift sensor.
SD main PWB Replace the SD main PWB (Refer to the
1710 Side multi tray incompatible The side multi tray Install the side multi-tray with the target
detection error is installed with a model.
The side multi tray has been device to which it is
installed with a device to incompatible.
which it is incompatible.

2LL/2LJ/2LH-3
Check procedures/
corrective measures
1800 Paper feeder communica- Paper feeder Check the wiring connection status with the
tion error main unit and, if necessary, try connecting it
A communication error from again.
paper feeder is detected 10 PF main PWB 1. Confirm that the wiring connector is
times in succession. firmly connected and, if necessary,
PF main PWB (YC13) and Engine PWB
(YC19)
3. Replace the PF main PWB (Refer to the
53).

2LL/2LJ/2LH-3
Check procedures/
corrective measures
1900 Paper feeder EEPROM error PF main PWB 1. Confirm that the wiring connector is
When writing the data, read (EEPROM) firmly connected and, if necessary,
and write data does not match connect the connector all the way in.
3 times in succession. 2. Replace the PF main PWB (Refer to the

2LL/2LJ/2LH-3
Check procedures/
corrective measures
2101 Developer motor error Developer unit 1. Check that the developer waste lock has
After developer motor is been released and, if not, release the
driven, the ready signal does lock (see page 1-2-12).
not turn to L within 5 s. 2. Check that the gears and spiral screw of
After developer motor is stabi- the developer unit are not damaged.
lized, the ready signal is at the 3. Confirm that the developer roller can
H level for 5 s continuously.
rotate.
4. If it won't rotate, replace the developer
unit (see page 1-5-35).
Developer motor 1. To check the motor operation, execute
DLP(K) by U030 (see page 1-3-29).
necessary, replace.
Developer motor and Feed PWB 1
(YC8)
(YC5)
5. Replace the Developer motor.
Motor control PWB Replace the Motor control PWB
Engine PWB. 1. Check the engine software and upgrade
53).

2LL/2LJ/2LH-3
Check procedures/
corrective measures
2201 drum motor steady-state Drum unit 1. Confirm that the drum or the drum screw
error can rotate.
After drum motor is stabilized, 2. If it wont rotate, replace the drum unit.
the ready signal is at the H (see page 1-5-36)
level for 5 s continuously.
drum motor 1. Check the drive gear can rotate or they
are not unusually loaded and, if neces-
sary, replace.
drum motor and Feed PWB 1 (YC9)
(YC5)
4. Replace the drum motor (see page 1-5-
68).
53).
2211 Drum motor startup error Drum unit 1. Check the drive gear can rotate or they
Drum motor is not stabilized are not unusually loaded and, if neces-
within 2 s since the motor is sary, replace.
activated. 2. Confirm that the drum or the drum screw
can rotate.
3. If it wont rotate, replace the drum unit
(see page 1-5-36).
drum motor 1. Confirm that the wiring connector is
firmly connected and, if necessary, con-
nect the connector all the way in.
drum motor and Feed PWB 1 (YC9)
(YC5)
3. Replace the drum motor (see page 1-5-
68).
53).

2LL/2LJ/2LH-3
Check procedures/
corrective measures
2300 Fuser motor error Fuser motor 1. To check the motor operation, execute
After fuser motor is driven, the U030 Fuser (Fuser motor) (see page 1-
ready signal does not turn to L 3-29).
within 2 s. 2. Check the drive gear can rotate or they
After fuser motor is stabilized, are not unusually loaded and, if
the ready signal is at the H necessary, replace.
level for 1 s continuously.
Fuser motor and Feed PWB 1(YC18)
Feed PWB 1(YC1) and Engine PWB
(YC6)
5. Replace the fuser motor (see page 1-5-
70).
53).
Fuser unit Replace the fuser unit (see page 1-5-45).
2500 Paper feed motor error Paper feed motor 1. To check the motor operation execute
After paper feed motor is U030 Feed (paper feed motor) (see
driven, the ready signal does page 1-3-29).
not turn to L within 2 s. 2. Check the paper feed roller and drive
After paper feed motor is sta- gear can rotate or they are not unusually
bilized, the ready signal is at loaded and, if necessary, replace.
the H level for 1 s continu-
ously.
Paper feed motor and Feed PWB
2(YC2)
Feed PWB 2(YC1) and Engine PWB
(YC4)
5. Replace the paper feed motor.
53).

2LL/2LJ/2LH-3
Check procedures/
corrective measures
2550 Transfer motor error Transfer motor 1. Check the drive gear can rotate or they
After Transfer motor is driven, are not unusually loaded and, if neces-
the ready signal does not turn sary, replace.
to L within 2 s. 2. Confirm that the wiring connector is
After Transfer motor is stabi- firmly connected and, if necessary,
lized, the ready signal is at the connect the connector all the way in.
H level for 1 s continuously. Transfer motor and Relay PWB(YC6)
Relay PWB(YC5) and Feed PWB 1
(YC13)
(YC5)
4. Replace the Transfer motor.
53).
2600 PF paper feed motor error PF paper feed 1. To check the feed unit operation, exe-
(large capacity feeder) motor cute U247 LCF- Motor ON (see page 1-
After PF paper feed motor is 3-118).
driven, the ready signal does 2. Check the paper feed roller and drive
not turn to L within 2 s. gear can rotate or they are not unusually
loaded and, if necessary, replace.
PF paper feed motor and PF main PWB
(YC16)
5. Replace the paper feed motor.

2LL/2LJ/2LH-3
Check procedures/
corrective measures
2810 Waste toner motor error Waste toner box 1. Rotate the waste toner spiral by the
Initialized when an error is hand and check that they are not
constantly observed for 2 sec- unusually loaded.
onds after the inner motor is 2. If the spiral wont rotate, replace the
activated. waste toner tank.
An error is detected twice for
Waste toner motor 1. Rotate the drive gear by the hand and
2.5 seconds after rebooting.
The lock detect signal wont check that they are not unusually
be H level three times in a row loaded.
within 200 ms at 1.25 ms 2. Clean the drive gears and the axle
cycles after the waste toner holder.
motor has been driven. 3. Confirm that the wiring connector is
Waste toner motor and Front PWB
(YC13)
Front PWB (YC3) and Engine PWB
(YC7)
5. Replace the waste toner motor.
53).

2LL/2LJ/2LH-3
Check procedures/
corrective measures
3100 Scanner carriage error The scanner mirror Check whether the scanner mirror frame has
The home position is not cor- frame is being been unlocked and unlock if necessary (see
rect when the power is turned locked after setup. page 1-2-7).
on, at the end of a reading
Scanner motor 1. To check the scanner motor, execute
process of the table and docu-
U073 (see page 1-3-58).
ment processor.
2. Move the scanner by the hand to check
whether it is unusually difficult to move.
3. Check that the optical wire rope is not
disengaged and engage the wire.
Scanner motor and ISC PWB (YC5)
ISC PWB (YC3) and Main PWB (YC11)
6. Replace the scanner motor.
Home position 1. Check that the sensor is correctly
sensor positioned.
Home position sensor and ISC PWB
(YC8)
3. Replace the home position sensor.
ISC PWB Replace the ISC PWB and execute U411
(see page 1-3-139).
3200 Exposure lamp error LED lamp PWB 1. Execute CCD of U061 lamp check (see
When input value at the time page 1-3-46).
of LED lamp PWB illumination 2. Confirm that the power connector is
does not exceed the threshold firmly connected and, if necessary,
value between 5 s. connect the connector all the way in.
LED lamp PWB and ISC PWB (YC6)
CCD PWB (YC2) and ISC PWB (YC9)
4. Replace the LED lamp PWB and
execute U411 (see page 1-3-139).
(see page 1-3-139).
CCD PWB Replace the ISU and execute U411 (see
page 1-3-139).

2LL/2LJ/2LH-3
Check procedures/
corrective measures
3200 Main PWB Replace the main PWB (see page 1-5-47).
3210 CIS lamp error CIS 1. Execute U906 Separating Operation

When input value at the time Release (see page 1-3-167).
of CIS illumination does not 2. Execute CCD of U061 lamp check (see
exceed the threshold value page 1-3-46).
between 5 s. 3. Confirm that the wiring connector is
CIS and DPSHD PWB (YC2)
DPSHD PWB (YC3) and DP relay PWB
(YC2)
5. Replace the CIS and execute U091 and
U411 (see page 1-3-62,1-3-139).
DPSHD PWB Replace the DPSHD PWB.
DP relay PWB Replace the DP relay PWB.
3220 CCD lamp activation error CIS 1. Execute U906 Separating Operation
The threshold is calculated for Release (see page 1-3-167).
colors at initialization and the 2. Confirm that the wiring connector is
pixel which does not exceed
that value is greater than
1000.
4. If the LED lamp wont light, replace the
LED PWB and execut U411 (see page
1-3-139).
(see page 1-3-139).

2LL/2LJ/2LH-3
Check procedures/
corrective measures
3300 Optical system (AGC) error LED lamp PWB 1. To check the lamp, execute U061 CCD
One of the gains is FF or 00 (see page 1-3-46).
during the CCD lamp AGC is 2. Confirm that the wiring connector is
being processed. firmly connected and, if necessary,
4. If the LED lamp wont light, replace the
LED PWB and execut U411 (see page
1-3-139).
page 1-3-139).
(see page 1-3-139).
3310 CIS AGC error CIS 1. Execute U906 Separating Operation

After AGC, correct input is not Release (see page 1-3-167).
obtained at CIS. 2. To check the lamp, execute U061 CCD
(see page 1-3-46).
DP CIS and DPSHD PWB (YC2)
DPSHD PWB (YC3) and DP relay PWB
(YC2)
5. Replace the CIS and execute U091 and
U411 (see page 1-3-62,1-3-139).
DPSHD PWB Replace the DPSHD PWB.
3500 Communication error ISC PWB 1. Confirm that the wiring connector is
between scanner and ASIC firmly connected and, if necessary,
An error code is detected. connect the connector all the way in.
3. Replace the ISC PWB and execute
U411 (see page 1-3-139).

2LL/2LJ/2LH-3
Check procedures/
corrective measures
3600 Scanner sequence error ISC PWB 1. Execute U021 memory initializing (see
page 1-3-27).
U411 (see page 1-3-139).
3700 Scanner device error CCD (ISU) Since the ISU is mounted with a CCD of
different type, install the ISU that matches
with the model.
3800 AFE error ISC PWB 1. Confirm that the FCC wiring connector is
When writing the data, read not distorted and connect the FCC
and write data does not match wiring all the way in.
3 times in succession. CCD PWB (YC2) and ISC PWB (YC9)
No response is received in 2. If the FCC wiring is disconnected,
100 ms from AEF. replace the FCC wiring.
U411 (see page 1-5-26).
page 1-3-139).
3900 Backup memory read/write Backup memory 1. Turn the main power switch off and after
error (ISC PWB) (ISC PWB) 5 seconds, turn it on.
Read and write data does not 2. Replace the ISC PWB and execute
match. U411 (see page 1-3-139).
4001 Polygon motor synchroni- Polygon motor 1. Confirm that the wiring connector is
zation error (LSU) firmly connected and, if necessary,
After polygon motor is driven, connect the connector all the way in.
the ready signal does not turn Polygon motor and Engine PWB (YC15)
to L within 30 s. 2. If the wiring is disconnected, shorted or
The polygon motor speed grounded, replace the wiring.
wont stabilize within 10 s.
3. Replace the laser scanner unit (see
page 1-5-26).
53).

2LL/2LJ/2LH-3
Check procedures/
corrective measures
4011 Polygon motor steady-state Polygon motor 1. Confirm that the wiring connector is
error (LSU) firmly connected and, if necessary,
After Polygon motor is stabi- connect the connector all the way in.
lized, the ready signal is at the Polygon motor and Engine PWB (YC15)
H level for 15 s continuously. 2. If the wiring is disconnected, shorted or
page 1-5-31).
53).
4101 BD initialization error K PD PWB K (LSU) 1. Confirm that the FCC wiring connector is
After Polygon motor is driven, not distorted and connect the FCC
the BD signal is not detected wiring all the way in.
for 1 s. Laser scanner unit and LSU relay PWB
(YC3)
LSU relay PWB (YC2) and Engine PWB
(YC11)
2. If the FCC wiring is disconnected,
replace the FCC wiring.
page 1-5-31).
53).
4201 BD steady-state error K PD PWB K (LSU) 1. Confirm that the FCC wiring connector is
The BD signal is not detected. not distorted and connect the FCC
wiring all the way in.
Laser scanner unit and LSU relay PWB
(YC3)
(YC11)
shorted or grounded, replace the FCC
wiring.
page 1-5-31).
53).

2LL/2LJ/2LH-3
Check procedures/
corrective measures
5101 Main high-voltage error K Drum unit 1. Confirm that the drum or the drum screw
Measure the inflowing current can rotate.
when Vpp is varied in 3 steps 2. If it wont rotate, replace the drum unit.
and verify if the difference of 3. Check that the discharger lamp is
the currents of 0 and step 2 is properly connected.
less than 42 (51 if lower high- Charger roller unit 1. Check that the high-voltage contacts are
voltage board).
not distorted or adhered with foreign
objects.
2. Reinstall the chrager roller unit.Or,
replace the charger roller unit (see page
1-5-45).
High voltage PWB 1. Confirm that the wiring connector is
High voltage PWB (YC2) and Engine
PWB (YC16)
3. Replace the High voltage PWB (see
page 1-5-58).
53).

2LL/2LJ/2LH-3
Check procedures/
corrective measures
6000 Broken fuser heater wire Fuser unit 1. Check that no paper jam is present.
Fuser thermistor 1 does not 2. Confirm that the wiring connector is
reach 100 C/212 F even firmly connected and, if necessary,
after 60 s during warming up. connect the connector all the way in.
The detected temperature of Fuser unit and Engine PWB (YC26)
fuser thermistor 1 does not 3. If the wiring is disconnected, shorted or
reach the specified tempera-
ture (ready indication temper-
4. Replace the Fuser unit and execute
ature) for 420 s in warming up
U167 counter clear (see page 1-3-90).
after reached to 100 C/212
F. (Deteriorated sensitivity due to the toner
adhered to the center thermistor.)
53).
Power source 1. Confirm that the wiring connector is
PWB firmly connected and, if necessary,
Power source PWB (YC3) and fuser
heater PWB (YC3)
Fuser heater PWB (YC2) and feed PWB
1 (YC27)
(YC6)
2. Replace the fuser unit (see page 1-5-
45).
Fuser heater 1.
6020 Abnormally high fuser Fuser unit 1. Confirm that the wiring connector is
thermistor 1 temperature firmly connected and, if necessary,
Fuser thermistor 1 detects a connect the connector all the way in.
temperature higher than Fuser unit and Engine PWB (YC26)
240C/464F for 1 s. 2. If the wiring is disconnected, shorted or
3. Replace the Fuser unit (see page 1-5-
45).
53).

2LL/2LJ/2LH-3
Check procedures/
corrective measures
6030 Broken fuser thermistor 1 Fuser unit 1. Check that no paper jam is present.
wire 2. Confirm that the wiring connector is
Input from fuser thermistor 1 firmly connected and, if necessary,
is 1010 or more (A/D value) connect the connector all the way in.
continuously for 1 s. Fuser unit and Engine PWB (YC26)
Verify if A/D read in the differ- 3. If the wiring is disconnected, shorted or
ential output wont change by
4 or more when it was turned
on for 10 seconds in a low-
temperature environment.
(Deteriorated sensitivity due to the toner
adhered to the center thermistor.)
53).
Fuser thermistor 1 1. Replace the Fuser unit and execute
Fuser thermostat 1. Confirm that the wiring connector is
(triggered) firmly connected and, if necessary, con-
nect the connector all the way in.
Fuser unit and fuser heater PWB (YC1)

2LL/2LJ/2LH-3
Check procedures/
corrective measures
6040 Fuser heater error Fuser unit 1. Confirm that the wiring connector is
Input from fuser center therm- firmly connected and, if necessary,
istor 1 is abnormal value con- connect the connector all the way in.
tinuously for 1 s. Fuser unit and Engine PWB (YC26)
CPU port PH1 to stay in H 2. If the wiring is disconnected, shorted or
level for one second or more grounded, replace the wiring.
in all operating modes is
judged that the connector is Engine PWB 1. Check the engine software and upgrade
disconnected. to the latest, if necessary.
2. 1-5-53Replace the engine PWB (see
page 1-5-53).
Center thermistor 1 1. Replace the Fuser unit and execute
(triggered) firmly connected and, if necessary,

2LL/2LJ/2LH-3
Check procedures/
corrective measures
6050 Abnormally low fuser Power source 1. Check that the operating voltage falls
thermistor 1 temperature within +/-10%.
Fuser thermistor 1 detects a 2. Check no voltage drop is caused. The
temperature lower than heater is deactivated at 70V or lower.
100C/212F for 1 s after 3. Relocate the AC outlet that supplies
warming up, during ready or power.
during print.
Fuser unit 1. Confirm that the wiring connector is
The temperature of thermis-
tor 1 is detected to be less
than 70C/158F for more connect the connector all the way in.
than one second during low- Fuser unit and Engine PWB (YC26)
power mode. 2. If the wiring is disconnected, shorted or
53).
Fuser thermistor 1 1. Replace the fuser unit and execute
(triggered) firmly connected and, if necessary,

2LL/2LJ/2LH-3
Check procedures/
corrective measures
6200 Broken fuser edge heater Fuser unit 1. Confirm that the wiring connector is
wire firmly connected and, if necessary,
Fuser thermistor 2 does not connect the connector all the way in.
reach 100 C/212 F even Fuser unit and Engine PWB (YC26)
after 60 s during warming up. 2. If the wiring is disconnected, shorted or
The detected temperature of grounded, replace the wiring.
fuser thermistor 2 does not
reach the specified tempera-
ture (ready indication temper-
ature) for 420 s in warming up Engine PWB 1. Check the engine software and upgrade
after reached to 100 C/212 to the latest, if necessary.
F. 2. Replace the engine PWB (see page 1-5-
53).
Fuser center 1. Replace the Fuser unit and execute
thermistor 1 U167 counter clear (see page 1-3-90).
6220 Abnormally high fuser edge Fuser unit 1. Confirm that the wiring connector is
thermistor temperature firmly connected and, if necessary,
Fuser thermistor 2 detects a connect the connector all the way in.
temperature higher than Fuser unit and Engine PWB (YC26)
220C/428F for 1 s. 2. If the wiring is disconnected, shorted or
53).
6230 Broken fuser edge thermis- Fuser unit 1. Confirm that the wiring connector is
tor wire firmly connected and, if necessary,
The Input signal from the connect the connector all the way in.
fuser thermistor 2 is 992 or Fuser unit and Engine PWB (YC26)
more (A/D value) continuously 2. If the wiring is disconnected, shorted or
for 1 s when the temperature grounded, replace the wiring.
at the fuser thermistor 1 is
higher than 100C/212F.
Fuser thermistor 2 detects a
loeer then 500C/122F for Engine PWB 1. Check the engine software and upgrade
15s during werming up. to the latest, if necessary.
53).

2LL/2LJ/2LH-3
Check procedures/
corrective measures
6250 Abnormally low fuser edge Fuser unit 1. Confirm that the wiring connector is
thermistor temperature firmly connected and, if necessary, con-
Fuser thermistor 2 detects a nect the connector all the way in.
temperature lower than 2. Fuser unit and Engine PWB (YC26)
100C/212F for 1 s during If the wiring is disconnected, shorted or
ready or print. grounded, replace the wiring.
Fuser thermistor 2 detects a 3. Replace the Fuser unit and execute
temperature lower than 50C/ U167 counter clear (see page 1-3-90).
122F for 1 s during low Engine PWB 1. Check the engine software and upgrade
power mode.
53).
6400 Zero-cross signal error Fuser unit 1. Confirm that the wiring connector is
While fuser heater ON/OFF firmly connected and, if necessary,
control is performed, the zero- connect the connector all the way in.
cross signal is not input within
Fuser heater PWB (YC29) and feed
3 s.
PWB 1 (YC27)
3. Replace the fuser heater PWB.
6610 Fuser release sensor error Fuser release 1. To check the motor operation, execute
When the fuser release motor motor U030 Fuser Release (see page 1-3-29).
is driven, the fuser release 2. Check that the drive gear can be rotated
sensor does not turn on/off for and the separation is possible.
8 s. 3. If the motor wont rotate, confirm that the
wiring connector is firmly connected
and, if necessary, connect the connector
all the way in.
Fuser unit and Engine PWB (YC26)
5. Replace the fuser unit and execute
Fuser release 1. Check that the sensor is correctly
sensor positioned.
2. Check that the sensor is not
contaminated or damaged.
53).

2LL/2LJ/2LH-3
Check procedures/
corrective measures
6910 Engine software ready error Engine PWB 1. Turn the main power switch off and after
The device wont engage in 5 seconds, turn it on.
ready state in 60 minutes after 2. Reinstall the engine software.
warming-up has began. 3. Replace the engine PWB (see page 1-5-
(A previous timeout process 53).
has not been cancelled.)
7001 Toner motor error Toner container 1. Check that the spiral screw of the toner
A state that a lock is detected container can be rotated by the hand.
5 times in a row in 200ms 2. Check for broken gears and replace if
cycle when the Toner motor is any.
driven has occurred 30 times
Toner motor 1. Draw out the toner container and
in total.
execute U135 to check the toner motor
operation (see page 1-3-77).
necessary, replace.
Toner motor and Engine PWB (YC27)
5. Replace the Toner motor.
Screw sensor 1. Check that the sensor is correctly
positioned.
Screw sensor and Front PWB (YC5)
(YC7)
3. Replace the Screw sensor.
53).

2LL/2LJ/2LH-3
Check procedures/
corrective measures
7101 Toner sensor error Failure of locking If an abnormal noise is heard, check that the
Sensor output value of 60 or the developer developer ejection outlet is released and, if
less or 944 or more continued waste slot at setup. not, release the outlet (see page 1-2-12).
for 3 s. Toner sensor 1. Check the toner sensor output by U155
(see page 1-3-86).
Toner sensor and Front PWB (YC7)
(YC8)
4. Check that the gears of the Developer
unit are not damaged and the spiral can
rotate.
5. Replace the Developer unit (see page 1-
5-35).
Toner motor 1. Draw out the toner container and
execute U135 to check the toner motor
necessary, replace.
Toner motor and Engine PWB (YC27)
5. Replace the Toner motor.
2. R1-5-53eplace the engine PWB (see
page 1-5-53).

2LL/2LJ/2LH-3
Check procedures/
corrective measures
7200 Broken outer temperature Outer temperature 1. Confirm Ext/Int is displayed by U139
sensor 2 wire sensor 2 temperature and humidity (see page 1-
The sensor input sampling is 3-79).
greater than 230. 2. Confirm that the wiring connector is
Outer temperature sensor 2 and Front
PWB (YC8)
(YC8)
4. Replace the outer temperature sensor 2.
Front PWB Replace the front PWB.
53).
7210 Short-circuited outer tem- Outer temperature 1. Confirm Ext/Int is displayed by U139
perature sensor 2 sensor 2 temperature and humidity (see page 1-
less than 69. 2. Confirm that the wiring connector is
Outer temperature sensor 2 and Front
PWB (YC8)
(YC8)
4. Replace the outer temperature sensor 2.
Front PWB Replace the front PWB
53).

2LL/2LJ/2LH-3
Check procedures/
corrective measures
7221 Broken LSU thermistor wire LSU thermistor 1. Confirm LSU is displayed by U139
The sensor input sampling is temperature and humidity (see page 1-
greater than 230. 3-79).
(YC3)
(YC11)
page 1-5-31).
LSU relay PWB REPLACE the LSU relay PWB.
53).
7231 Short-circuited LSU therm- LSU thermistor 1. Confirm LSU is displayed by U139
istor K temperature and humidity (see page 1-
(YC3)
(YC11)
page 1-5-31).
LSU relay PWB Replace the LSU relay PWB.
53).

2LL/2LJ/2LH-3
Check procedures/
corrective measures
7241 Broken Developer thermis- Developer 1. Confirm Developing is displayed by
tor wire thermistor U139 temperature and humidity (see
The sensor input sampling is page 1-3-79).
greater than 230. 2. Confirm that the wiring connector is
Developer unit and Front PWB (YC7)
(YC8)
5-35).
53).
7251 Short-circuited Developer Developer 1. Confirm Developing is displayed by
thermistor thermistor U139 temperature and humidity (see
The sensor input sampling is page 1-3-79).
(YC8)
5-35).
2. 1-5-53Replace the engine PWB (see
page 1-5-53).

2LL/2LJ/2LH-3
Check procedures/
corrective measures
7301 Toner hopper motor error Tonner hopper 1. If the motor wont rotate, confirm that the
When the toner hopper motor motor wiring connector is firmly connected
is driven, toner hopper sensor and, if necessary, connect the connector
does not turn on within 200 all the way in.
ms. This error is detected 15 Tonner hopper motor and Front PWB
times successively. (YC5)
(YC7)
3. Replace the tonner hopper motor .
Screw sensor 1. Check that the sensor is correctly
positioned.
Screw sensor and Front PWB (YC5)
(YC7)
3. Replace the Screw sensor.
53).
7401 Developer unit type mis- Different type of the Install the developer unit of the correct type.
match error developer unit is
Improper adaptation of the installed.
machine and developer unit is Developer unit 1. Confirm that the wiring connector is
detected. firmly connected and, if necessary,
(YC8)

2LL/2LJ/2LH-3
Check procedures/
corrective measures
7460 Developer shutter error The developer Release the developer shutter (see page 1-
Power is turned on while the shutter has been 2-12).
developer shutter is locked. locked.
Developer shutter 1. Confirm that the wiring connector is
sensor firmly connected and, if necessary,
Developer shutter sensor and Front
PWB (YC4)
(YC7)
7601 ID sensor 1 error [Front] ID sensor1 1. Execute U464 Calib for setting ID
Dark potential error compensation operation and check the
FrontDarkP and FrontDarkS displayed values by U465 Boas Calib for
are greater than 0.80V. ID compensation reference (see page 1-
Light potential error 3-157).
FrontBrightS is smaller than 2. Clean the ID sensor on its surface.
FrontDarkS. 3. Confirm that the wiring connector is
FrontBrightP is smaller than firmly connected and, if necessary,
[FrontDarkP + 0.5V]. connect the connector all the way in.
ID sensor 1 (front) and relay PWB
(YC10)
Relay PWB (YC1) and Feed PWB 1
(YC14)
(YC5)
53).

2LL/2LJ/2LH-3
Check procedures/
corrective measures
7602 ID sensor 2 error [Rear] ID sensor 2 1. Execute U464 Calib for setting ID
Dark potential error compensation operation and check the
RearDarkP and RearDarkS displayed values by U465 Boas Calib for
are greater than 0.80V. ID compensation reference (see page 1-
Light potential error 3-157).
RearBrightS is smaller than 2. Clean the ID sensor on its surface.
RearDarkS.
RearBrightP is smaller than
[RearDarkP + 0.5V].
ID sensor2 (rear) and relay PWB (YC10)
Relay PWB (YC1) and Feed PWB 1
(YC14)
(YC5)
53).
7800 Broken outer temperature Outer temperature 1. Confirm that the wiring connector is
sensor wire sensor firmly connected and, if necessary,
The device did not respond for connect the connector all the way in.
more than 5 ms during Outer temperature sensor and Front
reading, in 5 times. PWB (YC8)
(YC8)
3. Replace the Outer temperature sensor.
53).

2LL/2LJ/2LH-3
Check procedures/
corrective measures
7901 Drum EEPROM error DR PWB 1. Confirm that the wiring connector is
No response is issued from firmly connected and, if necessary,
the device in reading/writing connect the connector all the way in.
for 5 ms or more and this DR PWB and Front PWB (YC6)
problem is repeated five times Front PWB (YC2) and Engine PWB
successively. (YC8)
two locations occurs 8 times
successively.
3. Replace the Drum unit (see page 1-5-
Mismatch between writing
data and reading data occurs 36).
8 times successively. Front PWB Replace the front PWB
53).
7911 Developer unit EEPROM Developer unit 1. Confirm that the wiring connector is
error firmly connected and, if necessary,
No response is issued from connect the connector all the way in.
the device in reading/writing Developer unit and Front PWB (YC7)
for 5 ms or more and this Front PWB (YC2) and Engine PWB
problem is repeated five times (YC8)
successively.
two locations occurs 8 times
successively.
Mismatch between writing 5-35).
data and reading data occurs Front PWB Replace the front PWB
8 times successively. Engine PWB 1. Check the engine software and upgrade
53).

2LL/2LJ/2LH-3
Check procedures/
corrective measures
7941 Laser scanner unit APC PWB 1. Confirm that the FCC wiring connector is
EEPROM error not distorted and connect the FCC
Mismatch of reading data from wiring all the way in.
two locations occurs 8 times APC PWB and LSU relay PWB (YC3)
successively. LSU relay PWB (YC2) and Engine PWB
Mismatch between writing (YC11)
8 times successively.
shorted or grounded, replace the FCC
wiring.
page 1-5-31).
LSU relay PWB REPLACE the LSU relay PWB.
53).

2LL/2LJ/2LH-3
Check procedures/
corrective measures
8010 Punch motor error 1 Punch motor 1. Execute U240 Motor - Punch HP to
When the punch motor is check the finisher operation (see page
driven, punch home position 1-3-104).
sensor does not turn on within 2. Manipulate the punch up and down to
200 ms. check it can smoothly move up and
down.
3. Check that the drive from the motor
reaches the punch cam.
Punch motor and Punch PWB (YC4)
6. Replace the punch motor.
Punch home 1. Execute U241 Punch - Punch HP to
position sensor check the finisher switch (see page 1-3-
106).
2. Check that the sensor and its mounting
bracket are correctly positioned.
Punch home position sensor and Punch
PWB (YC8)
4. Replace the Punch home position
sensor.
Punch PWB 1. Confirm that the wiring connector is
Punch PWB (YC1) and DF main PWB
(YC7) (4000-sheet finisher)
2. Replace the punch PWB.
DF main PWB Replace the DF main PWB (Refer to the
service manual for the document finisher).

2LL/2LJ/2LH-3
Check procedures/
corrective measures
8020 Punch motor error 2 Punch motor 1. Execute U240 Motor - Punch to check
Home position is not obtained the finisher operation (see page 1-3-
in 3 s after home position is 104).
initialized or in standby. 2. Manipulate the punch up and down to
check it can smoothly move up and
down.
(YC7)(4000-sheet finisher)
(YC8)(1000-sheet finisher)

2LL/2LJ/2LH-3
Check procedures/
corrective measures
8030 Punch motor error 3 Punch motor 1. Execute U240 Motor - Punch to check
Home position does not turn the finisher operation (see page 1-3-
from On to Off in 50 ms after 104).
home position has been ini- 2. Manipulate the punch up and down to
tialized. check it can smoothly move up and
down.

2LL/2LJ/2LH-3
Check procedures/
corrective measures
8090 DF paddle motor error DF paddle motor 1. Execute U240 Motor - Beat to check the
When the DF paddle motor is finisher operation (see page 1-3-104).
driven, DF paddle sensor 2. Check that the paddle can rotate.
does not turn on within 1 s. 3. Check that the drive from the motor
reaches the paddle.
DF paddle motor and DF main PWB
DF paddle motor and DF main PWB
6. Replace the DF paddle motor.
DF paddle sensor 1. Execute U241 Finisher - Bundle Eject
HP to check the finisher switch (see
page 1-3-106).
DF paddle sensor and DF main PWB
DF paddle sensor and DF main PWB
4. Replace the DF paddle sensor.

2LL/2LJ/2LH-3
Check procedures/
corrective measures
8100 DF eject release motor error DF eject release 1. Execute U240 Motor - Eject Unlock
When the DF eject release motor (Full) to check the finisher operation
motor is driven, DF bundle DF bundle (see page 1-3-104).
discharge sensor does not discharge unit 2. Check that the eject guide of the
turn on within 1 s. sensor process tray is opened and, if not, cor-
rect the guide.
reaches the eject guide.
DF bundle discharge unit sensor and DF
main PWB (YC22)(4000-sheet finisher)
6. Replace the DF eject release motor.
DF bundle 1. Execute U241 Finisher - Bundle Eject
discharge unit HP to check the finisher switch (see
sensor page 1-3-106).
4. Replace the DF bundle eject unit sensor.

2LL/2LJ/2LH-3
Check procedures/
corrective measures
8110 DF shift motor 1 error DF shift motor 1 1. Execute U240 Motor - Sort Test to check
(4000-sheet finisher) [front] the finisher operation (see page 1-3-
DF shift sensor 1 wont turn on 104).
when it has travelled 160 mm 2. Manipulate the front shift guide back and
after DF shift motor 1 is forth to check it is smoothly operable.
driven. 3. Check that the drive from the motor
reaches the front shift guide.
DF shift motor 1[front] and DF main
PWB (YC14)
6. Replace the DF shift motor 1 [front].
DF shift sensor 1 1. Execute U241 Finisher - Shift Front HP
[front] to check the finisher switch (see page 1-
3-106).
DF shift sensor 1[front] and DF main
PWB (YC23)
4. Replace the DF shift sensor 1 [front].

2LL/2LJ/2LH-3
Check procedures/
corrective measures
8120 DF shift motor 2 error DF shift motor 2 1. Execute U240 Motor - Sort Test to check
(4000-sheet finisher) [rear] the finisher operation (see page 1-3-
DF shift sensor 2 wont turn on 104).
when it has travelled 160 mm 2. Manipulate the rear shift guide back and
after DF shift motor 2 is forth to check it is smoothly operable.
driven. 3. Check that the drive from the motor
reaches the rear shift guide.
DF shift motor 2 [rear] and DF main
PWB (YC14)
6. Replace the DF shift motor 2 [rear].
DF shift sensor 2 1. Execute U241 Finisher - Shift Tail HP to
[rear] check the finisher switch (see page 1-3-
106).
DF shift sensor 2 [rear] and DF main
PWB (YC23)
4. Replace the DF shift set sensor2 [rear].

2LL/2LJ/2LH-3
Check procedures/
corrective measures
8130 DF shift release motor error DF shift release 1. Check that cancelling the maintenance
(4000-sheet finisher) motor mode after executing U240 Motor - Sort
When the DF shift release for the finisher operation check lets the
motor is driven, DF shift rear and forth cursors returns to the
release sensor does not turn home position (see page 1-3-104).
on within 1 s. 2. Manipulate the front and rear shift guide
to check it is smoothly operable.
reaches the shift guide front and rear.
DF shift release motor and DF main
PWB (YC14)
6. Replace the DF shift release motor.
DF shift release 1. Execute U241 Finisher - Shift Unlock HP
sensor to check the finisher switch (see page 1-
3-106).
DF shift release sensor and DF main
PWB (YC23)
4. Replace the DF shift release sensor.

2LL/2LJ/2LH-3
Check procedures/
corrective measures
8140 DF tray error 1 DF tray motor 1. Execute U240 Motor - Tray to check the
When the main tray has finisher operation (see page 1-3-104).
ascended, DF tray sensor 1 or 2. Manipulate the main tray up and down to
DF tray upper surface sensor check it is smoothly operable.
does not turn on within 20 s. 3. Check that the drive from the motor
reaches the main tray.
DF tray motor and DF Main
PWB(YC16) (4000-sheet finisher)
DF tray motor and DF Main
6. Replace the DF tray motor.
DF tray sensor 1 1. Execute U241 Finisher - Tray U-Limit,
DF tray upper Tray Top to check the finisher switch
surface sensor (see page 1-3-106).
DF tray sensor 1 and DF Main
DF tray upper surface sensor and DF
Main PWB(YC21,YC13) (4000-sheet
finisher)
DF tray sensor 1 and DF main PWB
main PWB (YC18) (1000-sheet finisher)
4. Replace the DF tray sensor 1 or DF tray
upper surface sensor.

2LL/2LJ/2LH-3
Check procedures/
corrective measures
descended, DF tray sensor 1 2. Manipulate the main tray up and down to
or DF tray upper surface sen- check it is smoothly operable.
sor does not turn off within 3. Check that the drive from the motor
5 s. reaches the main tray.
DF tray motor and DF main PWB
DF tray sensor 1 1. Execute U241 Finisher - Tray U-Limit,
DF tray upper Tray Top to check the finisher switch
surface sensor (see page 1-3-106).
main PWB (YC21,YC13) (4000-sheet
finisher)
4. Replace the DF tray sensor 1 or DF tray
upper surface sensor.

2LL/2LJ/2LH-3
Check procedures/
corrective measures
descended, DF tray sensor 4 2. Manipulate the main tray up and down to
does not turn on within 20 s. check it is smoothly operable.
reaches the main tray.
DF tray sensor 4 1. Execute U241 Finisher - Tray Middle to
check the finisher switch (see page 1-3-
106).
4. Replace the DF tray sensor 4.

2LL/2LJ/2LH-3
Check procedures/
corrective measures
8170 DF side registration motor 1 DF side registration 1. Execute U240 Motor - Width Test to
error 1 motor 1 check the finisher operation (see page
When initial operation, DF 1-3-104).
side registration sensor 1 2. Manipulate the front side registration
does not turn on within 3 s. guide to check it is smoothly operable.
reaches the front side registration guide.
DF side registration motor 1 and DF
6. Replace the DF side registration motor
1.
DF side registration 1. Execute U241 Finisher - Width Front to
sensor 1 check the finisher switch (see page 1-3-
106).
DF side registration sensor 1. and DF
4. Replace the DF side registration sensor
1.

2LL/2LJ/2LH-3
Check procedures/
corrective measures
JAM6810 ( jam in front of 1-3-104).
width alignment) is detected 2. Manipulate the front side registration
twice. guide back and forth to check it is
smoothly operable.
reaches the front side registration guide.
1.
DF side registration 1. Execute U241 Finisher - Width Front to
sensor 1. check the finisher switch (see page 1-3-
106).
1.

2LL/2LJ/2LH-3
Check procedures/
corrective measures
When initial operation, DF 1-3-104).
side registration sensor 2 2. Manipulate the rear side registration
does not turn on within 3 s. guide back and forth to check it is
smoothly operable.
reaches the rear side registration guide.
2.
DF side registration 1. Execute U241 Finisher - Width tail HP
sensor 2 to check the finisher switch (see page 1-
3-106).
DF side registration sensor 2 and DF
2.

2LL/2LJ/2LH-3
Check procedures/
corrective measures
JAM6910 ( jam in rear of width 1-3-104).
alignment) is detected twice. 2. Manipulate the rear side registration
guide back and forth to check it is
smoothly operable.
reaches the rear side registration guide.
2.
DF side registration 1. Execute U241 Finisher - Width tail HP
3-106).
2.

2LL/2LJ/2LH-3
Check procedures/
corrective measures
8210 DF slide motor error DF slide motor 1. Execute U240 Motor - Staple Move to
When initial operation, DF sta- check the finisher operation (see page
ple sensor does not turn on 1-3-104).
within 3 s. 2. Manipulate the staple unit back and forth
to check it is smoothly operable.
reaches the staple unit.
DF slide motor and DF main PWB
DF slide motor and DF main PWB
6. Replace the DF slide motor.
DF staple sensor 1. Execute U241 Finisher - Width Staple
HP to check the finisher switch (see
page 1-3-106).
DF staple sensor and DF main PWB
DF staple sensor and DF main PWB
5. Replace the DF staple sensor.

2LL/2LJ/2LH-3
Check procedures/
corrective measures
8230 DF staple motor error 1 DF staple motor 1. Remove the staple unit and check that
Staple JAM (DF) has been stapling is possible without a jam.
detected twice in a row. (The 2. Confirm that the FCC wiring connector is
second JAM detection not distorted and connect the FCC
condition fullfilled with the wiring all the way in.
home position did not Staple unit and DF main PWB (YC17)
detected in 600 ms after the (4000-sheet finisher)
motor was driven.) Staple unit and DF main PWB (YC11)
(1000-sheet finisher)
4. Replace the staple unit. (Refer to the
service manual for the document
finisher).
DF staple sensor Replace the staple unit.
8240 DF staple motor error 2 DF staple motor 1. Remove the staple unit and check that
Staple JAM (DF) has been stapling is possible without a jam.
detected twice in a row. 2. Confirm that the FCC wiring connector is
(The second JAM detection not distorted and connect the FCC
condition fullfilled with a lock wiring all the way in.
detection signal maintained 1 Staple unit and DF main PWB (YC17)
V for 500 ms continuously,
while the stapler motor was
Staple unit and DF main PWB (YC11)
driven.)
4. Replace the staple unit. (Refer to the
service manual for the document
finisher).

2LL/2LJ/2LH-3
Check procedures/
corrective measures
8250 DF tray motor error 4 DF tray motor 1. Execute U240 Motor - Tray to check the
During driving the motor, the finisher operation (see page 1-3-104).
lock signal is detected for 10 s 2. Manipulate the main tray up and down to
continuously. check it is smoothly operable.
DF tray sensor 3 1. Execute U241 Finisher - Tray Middle to
106).
4. Replace the DF tray sensor 3.

2LL/2LJ/2LH-3
Check procedures/
corrective measures
8300 CF unit communication CF unit set switch 1. Execute U241 Booklet - Set to check the
error finisher switch (see page 1-3-106).
(4000-sheet finisher) 2. Check that the switch and its mounting
Communication with the cen- bracket are correctly positioned.
ter-folding unit is not possible. 3. Confirm that the wiring connector is
CF main PWB (YC7) and DF main PWB
(YC9)
5. Replace the CF unit set switch.
CF main PWB Replace the CF main PWB
8310 CF side registration motor 2 CF side registration 1. Execute U240 Booklet - Width Test to
error motor 2 check finisher operation check (see
(4000-sheet finisher) page 1-3-104).
When initial operation, CF 2. Manipulate the side registration upper
side registration sensor 2 guide back and forth to check it can
does not turn on within 1 s. smoothly move back and forth.
reaches the side registration upper
guide.
CF side registration motor 2 and CF
main PWB (YC10)
6. Replace the CF side registration motor.
CF side registration 1. Execute U241 Booklet - Width Up HP to
sensor 2 check the finisher switch (see page 1-3-
106).
CF side registration sensor 2 and CF
main PWB (YC20)
4. Replace the CF side registration sensor
2.

2LL/2LJ/2LH-3
Check procedures/
corrective measures
8320 CF adjustment motor error CF adjustment 1. Execute U240 Booklet - Bundle Up /
(4000-sheet finisher) motor1,2 Down to check the finisher operation
When initial operation, CF (see page 1-3-104).
adjustment sensor does not 2. Manipulate the fold moving belt up and
turn on within 2.5 s. down to check it is smoothly operable.
reaches the fold moving belt. (Check if
the belt is bent.)
CF adjustment motor 1,2 and CF main
PWB (YC10)
6. Replace the CF adjustment motor1,2.
CF adjustment 1. Execute U241 Booklet - bundle Up /
sensor1,2 Down HP to check the finisher switch
(see page 1-3-106).
CF adjustment sensor 1,2 and CF main
PWB (YC20)
4. Replace the CF adjustment sensor1,2.
CF main PWB Replace the CF main PWB.

2LL/2LJ/2LH-3
Check procedures/
corrective measures
8330 CF blade motor error CF blade motor 1. Execute U240 Booklet - Blade to check
(4000-sheet finisher) the finisher operation (see page 1-3-
When initial operation, CF 104).
blade sensor does not turn on 2. Manipulate the fold blade up and down
within 1500 ms. to check it is smoothly operable.
reaches the fold blade.
CF blade motor and CF main PWB
(YC15)
6. Replace the CF blade motor.
CF blade sensor 1. Execute U241 Booklet - Blade HP to
106).
CF blade sensor and CF main PWB
(YC20)
4. Replace the CF blade sensor.
8340 CF staple motor error 1 CF staple motor 1. Execute U240 Booklet - Staple to check
Staple JAM (center-folding 104).
unit) has been detected twice 2. Manipulate the staple up and down
in a row. (The second JAM check it is smoothly operable.
detection condition fullfilled 3. Check that the drive from the motor
with the home position did not
detected in 600 ms after the
motor was driven.)
CF staple unit and CF main PWB
(YC13)
6. Replace the CF staple motor.
CF staple sensor Replace the CF staple unit.

2LL/2LJ/2LH-3
Check procedures/
corrective measures
8350 CF side registration motor 1 CF side registration 1. Execute U240 Booklet - Width Test to
error motor 1 check the finisher operation (see page
(4000-sheet finisher) 1-3-104).
When initial operation, CF 2. Manipulate the side registration lower
side registration sensor 1 guide back and forth to check it can
does not turn on within 1 s. smoothly operable.
reaches the side registration lower
guide.
CF side registration motor 1 and CF
main PWB (YC10)
6. Replace the CF side registration motor
1.
CF side registration 1. Execute U241 Booklet - Width Down HP
3-106).
CF side registration sensor 1 and CF
main PWB (YC20)
4. Replace the CF side registration sensor
1.

2LL/2LJ/2LH-3
Check procedures/
corrective measures
8360 CF main motor error CF main motor 1. Execute U240 Booklet - Folding to check
During driving the motor, the 104).
lock signal is detected for 1 s 2. Manipulate the conveying roller to check
continuously. it can smoothly rotate.
reaches the conveying roller.
CF main motor and CF main PWB
(YC16)
6. Replace the CF main motor.
8370 CF staple motor error 2 CF staple motor 1. Execute Booklet - Staple of U240
(4000-sheet finisher) finisher operation check (see page 1-3-
Staple JAM (DF) has been 104).
detected twice in a row. 2. Manipulate the staple up and down
(The second JAM detection check it is smoothly operable.
condition fullfilled with a lock 3. Check that the drive from the motor
detection signal maintained 1
V for 1000 ms continuously,
while the stapler motor was
driven.)
CF staple unit and CF main PWB
(YC13)
6. Replace the CF staple unit.

2LL/2LJ/2LH-3
Check procedures/
corrective measures
8410 Punch slide motor error 1 Punch slide motor 1. Execute U240 Booklet - Punch Move to
The punch slide sensor wont check the finisher operation (see page
turn On when home position 1-3-104).
has been moved by 30 mm. 2. Manipulate the punch slide part of the
punch unit back and forth to check it can
smoothly move.
reaches punch part.
Punch slide motor and Punch PWB
(YC3)
6. Replace the punch slide motor.
Punch slide sensor 1. Execute U241 Punch - Punch HP to
106).
Punch slide sensor and Punch PWB
(YC6)
4. Replace the punch slide sensor.

DF main PWB Replace the DF main PWB

2LL/2LJ/2LH-3
Check procedures/
corrective measures
8420 Punch slide motor error 2 Punch slide motor 1. Execute U240 Booklet - Punch Move to
In detection of paper edges, check the finisher operation (see page
the paper edge cannot be 1-3-104).
detected in 30 mm move. 2. Manipulate the punch slide part of the
punch unit back and forth to check it can
smoothly move.
reaches punch part.
Punch slide motor and Punch PWB
(YC3)
6. Replace the punch slide motor.
Punch paper edge 1. Execute U241 Punch - Edge Face
sensor 1,2 1,2,3,4 to check the finisher switch (see
page 1-3-106).
Punch paper edge sensor 1,2 and
Punch PWB (YC5,YC7)
4. Replace the punch paper edge sensor
1,2.
2. Replace the Punch PWB.

2LL/2LJ/2LH-3
Check procedures/
corrective measures
8430 Punch unit communication Punch PWB 1. Confirm that the wiring connector is
Communication with the connect the connector all the way in.
punch unit is not possible. Punch PWB (YC1) and DF main PWB
3. Replace the Punch PWB.
8500 Mailbox communication MB main PWB 1. Turn the main power switch off and after
error 5 seconds, turn it on.
(4000-sheet finisher) 2. Confirm that the wiring connector is
Communication failed to be firmly connected and, if necessary,
established after the mailbox connect the connector all the way in.
was hooked up. MB main PWB (YC3) and DF main PWB
(YC6)
4. Replace the MB main PWB
8510 MB conveying motor error 1 MB conveying 1. If the transfer roller wont rotate
(4000-sheet finisher) motor smoothly, repair its mechanism.
When initial operation, MB 2. Confirm that the wiring connector is
home position sensor does firmly connected and, if necessary,
not turn on within 5 s. connect the connector all the way in.
MB conveying motor and MB main
PWB (YC5)
4. Replace the MB conveying motor.
MB home position 1. Execute U241 Mail Box - Motor HP to
sensor check the finisher switch (see page 1-3-
106).
MB home position sensor and MB main
PWB (YC2)
4. Replace the MB home position sensor.
MB main PWB Replace the MB main PWB

2LL/2LJ/2LH-3
Check procedures/
corrective measures
8520 MB conveying motor error 2 MB conveying 1. Execute Mail Box - Conv of U240
(4000-sheet finisher) motor finisher operation check (see page 1-3-
When standby operation, MB 104).
home position sensor does 2. Manipulate the conveying roller of the
not turn off within 1 s. mailbox to check it can smoothly rotate.
reaches the conveying roller.
MB conveying motor and MB main
PWB (YC5)
6. Replace the MB conveying motor.
MB home position 1. Execute U241 Mail Box - Motor HP to
sensor check the finisher switch (see page 1-3-
106).
MB home position sensor and MB main
PWB (YC2)
4. Replace the MB home position sensor.
MB main PWB Replace the MB main PWB

2LL/2LJ/2LH-3
Check procedures/
corrective measures
8800 Document finisher main DF main PWB 1. Confirm that the wiring connector is
program error firmly connected and, if necessary,
Document finisher main pro- connect the connector all the way in.
gram error at power up. DF main PWB (YC4) and Engine PWB
DF main PWB (YC7) and Engine PWB
3. Replace the DF main PWB
53).
8900 Document finisher backup DF main PWB 1. Confirm that the wiring connector is
Read and write data does not connect the connector all the way in.
match 3 times in succession. DF main PWB (YC4) and Engine PWB
DF main PWB (YC7) and Engine PWB
3. Replace the DF main PWB
8930 Center-folding unit backup CF main PWB 1. Confirm that the wiring connector is
(4000-sheet finisher) connect the connector all the way in.
Read and write data does not CF main PWB (YC7) and DF main PWB
match 3 times in succession. (YC9)
3. Install the EEPROM properly.
4. Replace the CF main PWB

2LL/2LJ/2LH-3
Check procedures/
corrective measures
9000 Document processor com- DP main PWB 1. Check that the versions of the main unit
munication error firmware and the DP firmware are
Communication with the docu- identical.
ment processor is not possi- 2. Confirm that the wiring connector is
ble. firmly connected and, if necessary,
DP main PWB(YC1) and ISC
PWB(YC12)
4. Replace the DP main PWB
ISC PWB Replace the ISC PWB.
9010 Coin vender communica- U206 setting Set maintenance mode U206 to off when a
tion error coin vender is not installed (see page 1-3-
A communication error from 96).
coin vender is detected 10 Coin vender control 1. Confirm that the wiring connector is
times in succession. firmly connected and, if necessary,
PWB
Coin vender control PWB and Engine
PWB (YC23)
3. Replace the Coin vender control PWB.
53).

2LL/2LJ/2LH-3
Check procedures/
corrective measures
9040 DP lift motor going up error DP lift motor 1. Execute U906 Separating Operation
When the DP lift motor is Release (see page 1-3-167).
driven, DP lift sensor 1 does 2. Execute U243 Lift Motor to check the DP
not turn on within 1500 pulse. motor operation (see page 1-3-109).
(Three recovery times.) 3. Check that the original document lift
The above has been detected guide can move upwards.
5 times.
DP lift motor and DP main PWB (YC5)
6. Replace the DP lift motor.
DP lift sensor 1 1. Execute U244 Lift L-Limit to check DP
switch (see page 1-3-110).
DP lift sensor 1 and DP main PWB
(YC4)
4. Replace the DP lift sensor 1.
DP main PWB Replace the DP main PWB

2LL/2LJ/2LH-3
Check procedures/
corrective measures
9050 DP lift motor going down DP lift motor 1. Execute U906 Separating Operation
error Release (see page 1-3-167).
When the DP lift motor is 2. Execute U243 Lift Motor to check the DP
driven, DP lift sensor 2 does motor operation (see page 1-3-109).
not turn on within 1500 pulse. 3. Check that the original document lift
(Three recovery times.) guide can move downwards.
The above has been detected
5 times.
DP lift motor and DP main PWB (YC5)
If the wiring is disconnected, shorted or
5. Replace the DP lift motor.
DP lift sensor 2 1. Execute U244 Lift L-Limit to check DP
switch (see page 1-3-110).
2. Confirm that the DP lift sensor 2 has
been firmly fitted.
DP lift sensor 2 and DP main PWB
(YC2)
4. Replace the DP lift sensor2.
DP main PWB Replace the DP main PWB
9060 DP EEPROM error DP main PWB 1. Execute U906 Separating Operation
Mismatch of reading data from Release (see page 1-3-167).
two locations occurs 3 times 2. Confirm that the EEPROM has been
successively. properly installed.
Mismatch between writing 3. Replace the DP main PWB
3 times successively. Device damage of Contact the Service Support.
EEPROM
9070 Communication error DP SHD PWB 1. Execute U906 Separating Operation
between DP and SHD Release (see page 1-3-167).
A communication error is 2. Confirm that the wiring connector is
detected. firmly connected and, if necessary,
DP SHD PWB (YC1) and DP main PWB
(YC10)
4. Replace the DP SHD PWB.

2LL/2LJ/2LH-3
Check procedures/
corrective measures
9080 LED fault detection DP CIS 1. Execute CIS automatic original
A block is existent below a document alignment by U411 (see page
peak which was obtained by 1-3-139).
activating the LEDs in the four 2. Confirm that the wiring connector is
CIS blocks at power on, which firmly connected and, if necessary,
is less than 80hex. connect the connector all the way in.
CIS and DP SHD PWB (YC1)
DP SHD PWB (YC1) and DP main PWB
(YC10)
4. Replace the CIS and execute U411.
DP SHD PWB Replace the DP SHD PWB.
9100 Coin vender control PWB Coin vender control Replace the coin mec.
error PWB
Communication error has
been detected at the coin mec
of the coin vender control
PWB.
9110 Coin vender rejector error Rejector 1. Check that the rejector is firmly installed
Communication error has and, if not, install firmly.
been detected in connection 2. Replace the rejector.
with the coin mec and the
rejector.
9120 Sensor error in coin vender Coin jam in the Check visually and remedy.
change (Yen 10) change tube
Change is empty despite Contact in the Check the connection of the empty change
change is enough. connector sensor.
Change empty Replace the coin mec.
sensor
Coin vender control Replace the coin mec.
PWB
sensor
PWB

2LL/2LJ/2LH-3
Check procedures/
corrective measures
sensor
PWB
9150 Sensor error in coin vender Change tube Check no exchange jam is observed at the
change (Yen 500) outlet and, if necessary, repair it.
sensor
PWB
9160 Coin vender pay-out error Pay-out motor Replace the coin mec.
Coin is paid out despite the
pay-out motor is determined
not active.
9170 Coin vender pay-out sensor Pay-out area Check no exchange jam is observed at the
error outlet and, if necessary, repair it.
Coin is paid out despite the Pay-out motor Replace the coin mec.
pay-out motor is determined
not active. Pay-out sensor Replace the coin mec.
9500 ISC PWB error A Main PWB 1. Reinsert the connector if its connection
ISC PWB is loose.
Main PWB (YC25) and ISC PWB (YC4)
47).
3. Replace the ISC PWB
9510 ISC PWB error B Main PWB 1. Reinsert the connector if its connection
DP SHD PWB is loose.
DP relay PWB (YC2) and DP SHD PWB
(YC3)
47).
3. Replace the DP SHD PWB.

2LL/2LJ/2LH-3
Check procedures/
corrective measures
9520 ISC PWB error C Main PWB 1. Reinsert the connector if its connection
ISC PWB is loose.
Main PWB (YC25) and ISC PWB (YC4)
47).
3. Replace the ISC main PWB
F000 Communication error Main PWB 1. Turn the main power swtch off and after
between Main PWB and 5 seconds, then turn power on.
Operation PWB 2. Check that the wirings and connetors
between the main PWB and the
operation PWB and between the main
PWB and the HDD are normal.
Main PWB (YC12,YC17,YC30) and
Operation PWB (YC1,YC2,YC3)
3. Check that the DDR memories in the
main PWB are well conducted and, if
not, replace.
4. Execute U024 to initialize (FULL) the
HDD (see page 1-3-28).
5. Execute U021initialize memory. (see
page 1-3-27)
6. Replace the Main PWB.
7. Copy the log File saved in the HDD by
U964 in USB memory and contact the
service support (see page 1-3-178).
Operation PWB Replace the operation PWB (see page 1-5-
59).
F010 Main PWB checksum error Main PWB 1. Turn the main power swtch off and after
5 seconds, then turn power on.
2. If not corrected, replace the main PWB
(see page 1-5-47).

2LL/2LJ/2LH-3
Check procedures/
corrective measures
Print engine 2. Repair or replace the wire from the
engine PWB, that may be grounded.
(Check short-circuit between 5V and
3.3V.)
3. Check that the FCC wire connecting
between the Main PWB (YC3) and the
engine PWB (YC46) is normal and, if
necessary, re-insert.Or, replace the FCC
wire.
(see page 1-5-47).
53).
HDD Replace the HDD (see page 1-5-83).
Scanner engine 2. Check that the wires between the main
PWB and the ISC PWB are normal.
(see page 1-5-47).
ISC PWB Replace the ISC PWB.
F050 Print engine ROM check- Engine software Install the latest engine software.
sum error Engine PWB 1. Turn the main power swtch off and after
2. Confirm that the EEPROM has been
properly installed.
3. If not corrected, Replace the engine
PWB (see page 1-5-53).
F051 Scanner engine ROM Scanner software Install the latest scanner software.
checksum error ISC PWB 1. Turn the main power swtch off and after
2. Confirm that the EEPROM has been
properly installed.
3. If not corrected, Replace the ISC PWB.
F278 Power supply in drive sys- The main power Turn the main power swtch off and after 5
tem error switch was turned seconds, then turn power on.
off before the (Before turning power off, verify that the
power switch is power key has been pressed and the power
pressed. Shutdown indicator has gone off, then switch the main
due to a power power switch.)
failure

2LL/2LJ/2LH-3
1-4-4 Image formation problems

Isolate the component an image defect has occurred from.
<A guide to isolate the component of the cause.>
Run U089 to print a test page and check whether an image defect happens.
YES: Main unit as the cause of defect
NO: Scanner as the cause of defect
Perform enlarged or reduced copying and verify if the defective images are enlarged or reduced, accordingly.
YES: Scanner as the cause of defect
1. Scanner as the cause of defect:

If the defect occurs with copying or sending, refer to P.1-4-141.
(Defects caused by a reading error that occurs at the original (glass) LED lamp to CCD (DP: CIS).)
Isolate the problem at the location that the originals are scanned.
a. Single side DP (read by Main CCD)
b. On the contact glass (read by Main CCD)
c. Back side DP (For DPs mounted with CIS)
2. Main unit as the cause of defect: refer to P. 1-4-188.

(A defect of image forming occurs from the rendering process that involves charging, drum, LSU,
developer, and primary transferring.)
<Flow of image data>

Copying :
LED lump CCD ISC
Main Engine
PWB LSU
PWB PWB LS
HDD relay
(DDR (DDR U
CIS DP relay PWB
memory) memory)
(DP:back) PWB
Sending :
LED lump CCD ISC Main Main

PWB PWB PWB
HDD PC
CIS DP relay (DDR (DDR
memory) memory)
(DP:back) PWB
Printing data from PC :

Printer Main PWB Main PWB Engine
LSU relay
Driver (DDR mem- HDD (DDR mem- PWB LSU
PWB
ory ory

2LL/2LJ/2LH-3
FAX (send) :
LED lump CCD ISC Main Main

PWB PWB PWB
HDD FAX PWB
CIS DP relay (DDR (DDR
memory) memory)
(DP:back) PWB
FAX receive :
Main PWB
Main PWB
FAX PWB HDD (DDR mem- FAX PWB
(FAX DIMM)
ory)

2LL/2LJ/2LH-3
1-4-5 Poor image (due to DP and scanner reading)
(1) No image (2) No image (3) Image is too (4) The back- (5) White streaks
appears appears light. ground is col- are printed ver-
(entirely white). (entirely black). ored. tically.
See page1-4-142 See page1-4-145 See page1-4-147 See page1-4-151 See page1-4-154
(6) Black streaks (7) Streaks are (8) One side of the (9) Black dots (10) Image is
appear printed horizon- print image is appear on the blurred.
longitudinally. tally. darker or image.
brighter than
the other.
(11) The leading (12) Part of image (13) Image is out of (14) Image center (15) Moires
edge of the is missing. focus. does not align
image is con- with the origi-
sistently mis- nal center.
aligned with
the original.
(16) Skewed image (17) Abnormal image
See page1-4-182 See page1-4-185

2LL/2LJ/2LH-3
(1) No image appears (entirely white).
Print example
1. Table scanning
Defective part Check description Corrective Action

Contact glass assy Check the location the contact Re-mount the contact glass if it is hanged off.
1
glass is mounted.
FFC cable CCD Check the FFC cable between Reinsert the connector if it its connection is
the CCD sensor and ISC PWB is loose. Or, if conduction is lot, replace the wire.
2 properly connected. Or, verify
conduction of the wire.
Home position sen- Check the location the home Re-mount the home position sensor if it is
3 sor position sensor is mounted. hanged off.
Scanner wire drum Check that the scanner drive If the scanner wire drum is loosely mounted,
4 gear is loosely mounted. secure the screws.
Scanner drive gear Check that the scanner drive If the scanner drive gear loosely mounted,
5 gear is loosely mounted. secure the screw.
CCD PWB The CCD PWB is defective. Replace the ISU and perform U411.
6 (see page 1-3-139)
ISC PWB The ISC PWB is defective. Replace the ISC PWB and perform U411.
7 (see page 1-3-139)
Main PWB The main PWB is defective. Replace the main PWB.(see page 1-5-47)
8

2LL/2LJ/2LH-3
2. DP-scanning first (front) page

Original document Verify the sides of the original If the sides of the original document are
1 document. reversed, place the original document properly.
2
glass is mounted.
FFC cable CCD Check the FFC cable between Reinsert the connector if its connection is
Scanner wire drum Check that the scanner wire If the scanner wire drum is loosely mounted,
5 drum is loosely mounted. secure the screws.
7 (see page 1-3-139)
8 (see page 1-3-139)
9
3. DP-scanning second (back) page (with a dual scan DP installed)

White-reference Check that the white-reference If the white-reference roller does not rotate
2 roller(Counter the roller is smoothly operative. smoothly, re-install.
CIS)
White-reference Check if the white reference If the white-reference roller is dirty, clean. Or, if
3 roller(Counter the roller is contaminated on its sur- the roller is damaged, replace.
CIS) face or damaged.
DP_CIS unit Check the location the CIS unit Re-mount the CIS unit if it is hanged off.
4 is mounted.
DP_SHD PWB Check the CIS and the SHD Reinsert the connector if the PWB was loosely
5 PWB is properly connected. inserted.If not cured, replace the PWB.
DP_CIS CIS is defective. Replace the CIS and perform U091 and U411.
6 (see page 1-3-62,1-3-139)
7

2LL/2LJ/2LH-3
4. DP-scanning second (back) page (with a reversed DP installed)

2
glass is mounted.
Scanner wire drum Check that the scanner drive If the sacanner wire drum is loosely mounted,
5 gear is loosely mounted. secure the screws.
7 (see page 1-3-139)
8 (see page 1-3-139)
9

2LL/2LJ/2LH-3
(2) No image appears (entirely black).
Print example
1. Table scanning

1
properly connected. Or, verify
SATA cable ISC Check the SATA cable between Reinsert the connector if its connection is
the ISC PWB and main PWB is loose. Or, if conduction is lot, replace the wire.
2
3 (see page 1-3-139)
4 (see page 1-3-139)
5

Scanning position Confirm the value using mainte- If a large value is observed in maintenance
1 of the DP nance mode U068, DP Read. mode U068, DP Read, perform
adjustment.(see page 1-3-51)
2
3
4 (see page 1-3-139)
ISC PWB The ISC PWB is defective. replace the ISC PWB and perform U411.
5 (see page 1-3-139)

2LL/2LJ/2LH-3

6

1 is mounted.
3 (see page 1-3-62,1-3-139)
4

Scanning position Confirm the value using mainte- If a large value is observed in maintenance
1 of the DP nance mode U068, DP Read. mode U068, DP Read, perform
adjustment.(see page 1-3-51)
2
3
4 (see page 1-3-139)
5 (see page 1-3-139)
6

2LL/2LJ/2LH-3
(3) Image is too light.
Print example
1. Table scanning

The settings of the Check the settings of the adjust- 1. Deactivate EcoPrint if it is activated. Or, if
adjustment of den- ment of density. the density is too low, chosse an image
sity quality that suits the original docuemt in
1 type.
2. Increase density.
3. Perform the background color adjustment
using the system menu.
Settings of anti-off- Check the settings of anti-offset. If anti-offset is set to on, set it to off.
2 set
Adjustment of the Check the automatic adjustment Perform maintenance mode U411,
3 scanner of the scanner. table(Chart1)_All.
(see page 1-3-139)
Contact glass Check whether the contact glass If the contact glass is dirty, clean the contact
4 is dirty. glass, and the bottom part of the shading plate.
Home position Check the location the home Re-mount the home position sensor if it is
5 sensor position sensor is mounted. hanged off.
6
FFC cable LED Check the FFC cable between Reinsert the connector if its connection is
the LED PWB and ISC PWB is loose. Or, if conduction is lot, replace the wire.
7
Lamp unit Check the location the lamp unit Re-mount the lamp unit if it is hanged off.
8 is mounted.
LED PWB Check that the LED is lit. If the LED is not lit, replace the LED PWB and
9 perform U411.
10 (see page 1-3-139)
11 (see page 1-3-139)

2LL/2LJ/2LH-3

12

1 type.
2 set
3 scanner of the scanner. DP FaceUp(Chart1)_Input(see page 1-3-139)
Scanning position Check whether the scanning If the scanning position of the DP is shifted,
6 of the DP position of the DP is wrong. perform maintenance mode U068, DP
Read.(see page 1-3-51)
7
8
9 is mounted.
10 perform U411.
11 (see page 1-3-139)
12 (see page 1-3-139)
13

2LL/2LJ/2LH-3

1 type.
2 set
3 scanner of the scanner. DP FaceDown(Chart1)_All
(see page 1-3-139)
CIS)
6 is mounted.
8 (see page 1-3-62,1-3-139)
9

1 type.
2 set
3 scanner of the scanner. DP FaceUp(Chart1)_Input. (see page 1-3-139)

2LL/2LJ/2LH-3

6 of the DP position of the DP is wrong. perform maintenance mode U068, DP
Read.(see page 1-3-51)
7
8
9 is mounted.
10 perform U411.
ISC PWB The ISC PWB is defective. RSeplace the ISC PWB and perform U411.
11 (see page 1-3-139)
12 (see page 1-3-139)
13

2LL/2LJ/2LH-3
(4) The background is colored.
Print example
1. Table scanning

Original document 1. Check if the background 1. If the background density of the original
density of the original document is too dense, perform automatic
document is too dense. background adjustment.Or, adjust density
1 2. Check if the original with background adjustment.
document is floated during 2. If the original document is floated during
scanning. scanning, press down the original
document.
(see page 1-3-139)
Contact glass assy Check the location the contact Re-mount the contact glass if is hanged off.
4
glass is mounted.
6
FFC cable LED Check the FFC cable between Reinsert the connector if it its connection is
7
8 is mounted.
9 perform U411.
10 (see page 1-3-139)
11 (see page 1-3-139)

2LL/2LJ/2LH-3

12

1
2. Check if the original with background adjustment.
document is floated during 2. Adjust the location the DP is mounted.
scanning.
Adjustment of the Check the automatic adjustment Perform maintenance mode U411, DP
2 scanner of the scanner. FaceDown(Chart1)_All.
(see page 1-3-139)
4
glass is mounted.
Home position Check the location the Home Re-mount the Home position sensor if it is
Installing DP Check whether the DP frame is Replace the DP.

6 distorted or the hinges are dam-
aged.
FFC cable CCD Check the FFC cable between Reinsert the connector if it its connection is
7
FFC cable LED Check the FFC cable between Reinsert the connector if it its connection is
8
9 is mounted.
10 perform U411.
11 (see page 1-3-139)
12 (see page 1-3-139)
13

2LL/2LJ/2LH-3

1
document is floated during 2. Adjust the location the CIS unit is mounted.
scanning.
Adjustment of the Check the automatic adjustment Perform maintenance mode U411, DP
2 scanner of the scanner. FaceUp(Chart1)_All.
(see page 1-3-139)
CIS)
5 is mounted.
7 (see page 1-3-62,1-3-139)
8

1
document is floated during 2. Adjust the location the DP is mounted.
scanning.
2 scanner of the scanner. DP FaceUp(Chart1)_Input. (see page 1-3-139)
4
glass is mounted.

2LL/2LJ/2LH-3

Installing DP Check whether the DP frame is Replace the DP.
6 distorted or the hinges are dam-
aged.
FFC cable CCD Check the FFC cable between Reinsert the connector it its connection is
7
Lamp unit Check the location the lamp unit Re-mount the lamp unit it is hanged off.
8 is mounted.
9 perform U411.
10 (see page 1-3-139)
11 (see page 1-3-139)
12
(5) White streaks are printed vertically.
Print example
1. Table scanning

Original document Check whether the original If the original document is dirty, replace.
1 document is dirty.
Mirror Check whether the mirrors are If the mirrors are dirty, clean the three mirrors.
3 dirty.
Lamp unit Check that the lamp unit is con- If dusts are observed on the lamp unit, remove
4 taminated with dusts. the dusts in the light paths.
Lamp unit Check whether the LED cover is Re-mount the LED cover if it is hanged off.
5 hanged off.

2LL/2LJ/2LH-3

ISU Check whether the lens cover is Re-mount the lens cover if it is hanged off.
6 hanged off.
Shading plate Check whether the shading plate If the shading plate is dirty, perform
is dirty. maintenance mode U063 to modify the
7 shading position. If it does not cure, replace the
contact glass assembly.
(see page 1-3-46)
8 (see page 1-3-139)
9 (see page 1-3-139)
10

3 dirty.
5 hanged off.
6 hanged off.
(see page 1-3-46)
8 (see page 1-3-139)
9 (see page 1-3-139)
10

2LL/2LJ/2LH-3

1 roller (Counter the roller is contaminated on its sur- the roller is damaged, replace.
DP_CIS glass Check whether the CIS glass is If the CIS glass is contaminated, clean the CIS
2 contaminated. glass and conveying guide. If it has a scuff,
replace.
White streaks com- Check the white streaks com- Check the white streaks compensation
3 pensation settings pensation settings. settings.
4 is mounted.
6 (see page 1-3-62,1-3-139)
7

3 dirty.
5 hanged off.
6 hanged off.
(see page 1-3-46)
8 (see page 1-3-139)

2LL/2LJ/2LH-3

9 (see page 1-3-139)
10
(6) Black streaks appear longitudinally.
Print example
1. Table scanning

Original document Check if the size of the original If the size of the original document and its
2 document and its reference size reference size do not match, set the correct
match. document size or activate border erasure.
3
glass is mounted.
Adjustment of the Check whether the outer areas 1. Perform maintenance mode U067,
scanner of the original document have Front.(see page 1-3-50)
4 streaks or lines. 2. Perform maintenance mode U411, table
(Chart1)_Input.
(see page 1-3-139)
Contact glass Check whether the outer areas If the contact glass is dirty, clean.
5 of the original document have
streaks or lines.
mirror Check whether the mirrors are If the mirrors are dirty, clean the three mirrors.
6 dirty.
CCD sensor Check that the CCD sensor If dusts are observed on the CCD sensor
8 glass is contaminated with dusts. glass,remove the dusts by an air blower.

2LL/2LJ/2LH-3

(see page 1-3-46)
10 (see page 1-3-139)
11 (see page 1-3-139)
12

3 of the DP position of the DP is wrong. perform maintenance mode U068, DP Read.
(see page 1-3-51)
Adjustment of the Check whether the outer areas 1. Perform maintenance mode U072, Front.
scanner of the original document have (see page 1-3-56)
streaks or lines. 2. Perform maintenance mode U411, DP
4 Auto Adj.
3. Perform maintenance mode U411, DP
FaceUp(Chart2)_Input.
(see page 1-3-139)
Slit glass, Contact Check whether the slit glass and If the slit glass and contact glass are dirty,
glass contact glass are dirty. clean the contact glass, the slit glass, the
5
bottom part of the shading plate, and the
conveying guide.
6 dirty.
CCD sensor Check the dust on the CCD sen- Check whether the CCD sensor glass is stuck
8 sor glass. with dusts, and if necessary, remove the dusts
by an air blower.

2LL/2LJ/2LH-3

(see page 1-3-46)
10 (see page 1-3-139)
11 (see page 1-3-139)
12

Adjustment of the Check if the outer areas of the 1. Perform maintenance mode U072, CIS.
scanner original document have streaks (see page 1-3-56)
or lines. 2. Perform maintenance mode U411, DP
1 Auto Adj.
FaceDown(Chart1)_All.
(see page 1-3-139)
DP_CIS glass Check whether the CIS glass of If the CIS glass of the DP is contaminated,
2 the DP is contaminated. clean. Or, if it has scuffs, replace.
DP guide plate Check whether the DP guide If the guide plate is dirty, clean the guide plate
3 plate is dirty. and the conveying guide.
DP regist pulley The DP regist pulley is contaimi- Clean the DP regist pulley.
4 nated.
White streaks com- Check the white streaks com- If the white streaks compensation is
6 pensation settings pensation settings. insufficient, perform maintenance mode
U091.(see page 1-3-62)
7 is mounted.
9 (see page 1-3-62,1-3-139)
10

2LL/2LJ/2LH-3

Adjustment of the Check if the outer areas of the Perform maintenance mode U072, Front.
3 scanner original document have streaks (see page 1-3-56)
or lines.
4 of the DP position of the DP is wrong. perform maintenance mode U068, DP Read.
(see page 1-3-51)
Slit glass, contact Check whether the slit glass and If the slit glass and contact glass are dirty,
glass contact glass are dirty. clean the contact glass, the slit glass, the
5
bottom part of the shading plate, and the
conveying guide.
6 dirty.
CCD sensor Check that the CCD sensor If dusts are observed on the CCD sensor
8 glass is contaminated with dusts. glass,remove the dusts by an air blower.
(see page 1-3-46)
10 (see page 1-3-139)
11 (see page 1-3-139)
12

2LL/2LJ/2LH-3
(7) Streaks are printed horizontally.
Print example
1. Table scanning

Ajusting scanner Check that the image at the back 1. If the image at the back of the size indica-
of the size indicator has been tor, has been rendered perform mainte-
rendered. nance mode U066, Front. (see page 1-3-
3
49)
2. Perform maintenance mode U411,
Table(Chart1)_Input.(see page 1-3-139)
4
5
6
7 perform U411.
8 (see page 1-3-139)
9

2LL/2LJ/2LH-3

3
4
5
6 perform U411.
7 (see page 1-3-139)
8

DP_CIS glass Check whether the CIS glass of If the CIS glass of the DP is contaminated,
2 the DP is contaminated. clean. Or, if it has scuffs, replace.
3 is mounted.
DP_SATA cable Check the FFC cable between Reinsert the connector if its connection is
the SHD PWB and ISC PWB is loose. Or, if conduction is lot, replace the wire.
5
6 (see page 1-3-62,1-3-139)

2LL/2LJ/2LH-3


3
4
5
6 perform U411.
7 (see page 1-3-139)
8

2LL/2LJ/2LH-3
(8) One side of the print image is darker or brighter than the other.
Print example
1. Table scanning

Original document Check if the original document If the original document has foldings or
2 has creases or foldings or wrin- creases, remove them.
kles.
Position of the mat Check whether the position of If the position of the mat of the DP or the platen
3 of the platen the mat of the DP or the platen is is shifted, re-mount.
wrong.
Contact glass assy Check the location the contact If the light guide panel has been fallen off of the
5 mounting position, fix it properly.
glass is mounted.
Lamp unit Check the position at which the If the contact part of the lamp unit and the rail is
6 light guide panel is mounted. distorted, replace the lamp unit.
7 dirty.
ISU Check the location the ISU unit Insert a spacer between the scanner unit and
8 is mounted. the ISU to change the height.
(see page 1-5-26)
9 perform U411.(see page 1-3-139)
LED Assy Check the mounting position of If the LED assy is hanged off of the mounting
10 the refelector board or if it is disposition of the reflector or it is deformed,
torted. replace the LED assy.
Lamp unit Check that the contact part of If the contact part of the lamp unit and the rail is
11 the lamp unit and the rail is dis- distorted, replace the lamp unit.
torted.
Mirror unit Check the location the mirror is Re-mount the mirror if it is hanged off. Or, if the
12 mounted. mirror is damaged, replace.

2LL/2LJ/2LH-3

Mirror unit Check that the contact part of If the contact part of the mirror unit and the rail
13 the mirror unit and the rail is dis- is distorted, replace the mirror unit.
torted.
14 (see page 1-3-139)
15 (see page 1-3-139)
16

kles.
DP scanning guide Check that the scanning guide is If the scanning guide does not rotate smoothly,
3 smoothly operative. re-install.
5
glass is mounted.
6 perform U411.
7 (see page 1-3-139)
CCD PWB The CCD PWB is defective. Replace the ISU PWB and perform U411.
8 (see page 1-3-139)
9

kles.

2LL/2LJ/2LH-3

CIS)
4 (see page 1-3-62,1-3-139)
5

kles.
DP scanning guide Check that the scanning guide is If the scanning guide does not move smoothly,
5
glass is mounted.
6 perform U411. (see page 1-3-139)
7 (see page 1-3-139)
8 (see page 1-3-139)
9

2LL/2LJ/2LH-3
(9) Black dots appear on the image.
Print example
1. Table scanning

3
4
5

3
4
5

2LL/2LJ/2LH-3

the SHD PWB and I/F PWB is loose. Or, if conduction is lot, replace the wire.
3
4 (see page 1-3-62,1-3-139)
5

3
4
5

2LL/2LJ/2LH-3
(10) Image is blurred.
Print example
1. Table scanning

Rail Check that the carriage is If the carriage does not travel smoothly,
1 smoothly operative. remove foreign objects on the front and back
optical rails.
Lamp unit Check that the carriage is If the carriage does not travel smoothly
2 smoothly operative. because the lamp unit contacts with the frame,
rectify.
Scanner wire drum Confirm that a foreign object If a foreign object exists, remove.
3 exists between the wire rope and
the scanner wire drum.
Mirror unit Check that a foreign object If a foreign object exists in the grooves of the
4 exists in the grooves of the pul- pulleys, remove.
ley.
Pulley Check that a foreign object If a foreign object exists in the grooves of the
5 exists in the grooves of the pul- pulleys, remove.
leys other than above.
Wire rope Confirm that the wire rope has a If a foreign object exists on the wire rope,
6 foreign object sticked or has a remove the foreign object. Or, if it is damaged,
scuff. replace.

DP conveying pul- Check that the conveying pulley If the conveying pulley does not rotate
1 ley is smoothly operative. smoothly, re-asslemble the conveying roller
and springs.
Adjustment height Check the height of the front and If the front and back side of the DP is not
2 of the hinge back portions of the DP. leveled, adjust the hinge on the left side.
portions of the DP
Install DP Check how DP is mounted on If mounting to the main unit is improper, check
3 the main unit. positioning and secure the screws.
DP hinge Check that the DP hinge is If the DP is not operative smoothly or is not
operative in both ascending and held stably open, replace the hinges.
4
descending directions and kept
open.

2LL/2LJ/2LH-3

DP document mat Check the location the document Re-mount the document mat of the DP if it is
5 mat of the DP is mounted. hanged off.
Original document Check that the leading edge of If the leading edge of the original documet is
6 the original document is dog- dog-eared, straighten.
eared.
Scanning guide Check if the scanning guide is If the scanning guide deformed, replace.
7 distorted.
Scopper guide Check that the scopper guide is If the scopper guide does not rotate smoothly,
Conveying roller Check whether the conveying If the conveying roller is dirty, clean.
9 (before and after roller is dirty.
of scanning)
Drive belt Check if the drive belt is jumping If the drive belt is jumping gear teeth, re-mount
10 gear teeth. the belt tensioner.

and springs.
3
open.
eared.
Scanning roller Check if the scanning roller is If the scanning roller is floated, re-assemble.
6 floated.
of scanning)
Scanning glass Check if the scanning glass is If the scanning glass is floated, re-assemble.
8 floated.

2LL/2LJ/2LH-3

and springs.
Adjustment height Check the height of the front and If the front and back side of the DP is not
2 of the hinge back portions of the DP. leveled, adjust the hinge on the left side.
portions of the DP
4
open.
eared.
Scanning guide Check if the scanning guide is If the scanning guide deformed, replace.
7 distorted.
Scopper guide Check that the scopper guide is If the scopper guide does not rotate smoothly,
of scanning)

2LL/2LJ/2LH-3
(11) The leading edge of the image is consistently misaligned with the original.
Print example
1. Table scanning

Original document Check if the original document is If the original document is not properly placed
1 loaded correctly on the contact on the contact glass, place it correctly.
glass.
Secures the lamp Confirm the oriention of the If the bracket that fixes the wire rope and the
2 unit bracket that secures the wire lamp unit is misaligned, align the bracket
rope and the lamp unit. properly.
Adjustment of the Check the scanning adjustment 1. Perform maintenance mode U066, Front.
scanner of the scanner. (see page 1-3-49)
3
table(Chart1)_Input. (see page 1-3-139)
Drive belt Check if the tension of the drive If the tension of the drive belt is insufficient,
5 belt is insufficient. tense the belt.
Scanner wire drum Check if the optical wire drum is If the optical wire drum is loosely fixed, secure
6 loosely fixed. the screws.

Adjustment of the Check the scanning adjustment 1. Perform maintenance mode U071, CIS
scanner of DP scanning. Head. (see page 1-3-54)
1
Auto Adj. (only a dual scan DP installed)
FaceUp(Chart2)_Input. (see page 1-3-139)
Original conveying Check if the conveyer roller is If the conveying roller is dirty, clean the con-
2 roller contaminated or worn. veying roller and its axles.If the roller is worn
out, replace.

2LL/2LJ/2LH-3

DP drive motor Check whether the DP drive If the DP motor is fluctuated in rotation, apply
3 motor is fluctuated in rotation. grease with the drive gear. If no improvement
is observed, replace the motor.

Adjustment of the Check the scanning adjustment 1. Perform maintenance mode U071, CIS
scanner of DP scanning. Head. (see page 1-3-54)
1 Auto Adj.
FaceDown(Chart1)_All. (see page 1-3-
139)

Adjustment of the Check the scanning adjustment 1. Perform maintenance mode U071, Back
1 scanner of DP scanning. Head. (see page 1-3-54)

2LL/2LJ/2LH-3
(12) Part of image is missing.
Print example
1. Table scanning

glass.
Original document 1. Check that the size of the 1. If the sizes of the original document and
original document and the the paper size do not match, manually set
paper size match on the the proper paper size for the original
panel. document.
2
2. Check that the copying 2. Check the paper size automatic detection
position has been switch and replace if faulty.
automatically rotated. 3. If the copying position is automatically
rotated, deactivate automatic image
Settings of Border Check the value of border If a large value is given to bordere erasure,
3 removal removal. change it to a smaller value.
5
glass is mounted.
6
7
8 is mounted.
9 (see page 1-3-139)
10 (see page 1-3-139)
11

2LL/2LJ/2LH-3

1 loaded correctly in the DP. in the DP, place it correctly.
Original document 1. Check that the size of the 1. If the sizes of the original document and
original document and the the paper size do not match, manually set
paper size match on the the proper paper size for the original
panel. document.
2 2. Check that the copying 2. Check the paper size automatic detection
position has been switch and replace if faulty.
automatically rotated. 3. If the copying position is automatically
rotated, deactivate automatic image
rotation by the system menu.
5
6
7 (see page 1-3-139)
8 (see page 1-3-139)
9

Original document Check the size of the original If the size of the original document and its
2 document and its reference size. reference size do not match, manually set the
document size.

2LL/2LJ/2LH-3

DP_SATA cable Check the FFC cable between Reinsert the connector if it its connection is
4
6 (see page 1-3-62,1-3-139)
7

Original document Check the size of the original If the size of the original document and its
2 document and its reference size. reference size do not match, manually set the
document size.
5
6
7 (see page 1-3-139)
8 (see page 1-3-139)
9

2LL/2LJ/2LH-3
(13) Image is out of focus.
Print example
1. Table scanning and DP-scanning first (front) page

Original document Check whether the original If the original document is wavy, straighten.Or,
1 document is wavy. replace the original document.
Contact glass Check whether the contact glass If the contact glass is dew condensed, remove
2 is dew condensed. the dew.
Mirror Check whether the mirror is dew If the mirrors are dew-condensed, remove the
3 condensed. dew.
Lens Check whether the lens is dew If the lens is dew condensed, remove the dew.
4 condensed.
CCD sensor Check whether the CCD sensor If the CCD sensor glass is dew condensed,
5 glass is dew condensed. remove the dew.
(see page 1-3-139)
ISU Confirm the position of the lens If the lenses and the CCD sensor are
7 and the CCD sensor. misaligned, replace the ISU and perform U411.
8 (see page 1-3-139)
9

DP_CIS glass Check whether the CIS glass is If the CIS glass is dew condensed, remove the
1 dew condensed. dew.
DP_CIS glass Check whether the CIS glass is If the CIS glass is contaminated, clean the CIS
2 contaminated. glass. If it has a scuff, replace.
CIS)

2LL/2LJ/2LH-3

4 scanner of the scanner. DP FaceDown(Chart1)_All.
(see page 1-3-139)
5 is mounted.
6 (see page 1-3-62,1-3-139)

Contact glass Check whether the contact glass If the contact glass is dew condensed, remove
1 is dew condensed. the dew.
Mirror Check whether the mirror is dew If the mirrors are dew-condensed, remove the
2 condensed. dew.
Lens Check whether the lens is dew If the lens is dew condensed, remove the dew.
3 condensed.
CCD sensor Check whether the CCD sensor If the CCD sensor glass is dew condensed,
4 glass is dew condensed. remove the dew.
5 scanner of the scanner. Table(Chart1)_All.
(see page 1-3-139)
ISU Confirm the position of the lens If the lenses and the CCD sensor are
6 and the CCD sensor. misaligned, replace the ISU and perform U411.
(see page 1-3-139)
7 (see page 1-3-139)
8

2LL/2LJ/2LH-3
(14) Image center does not align with the original center.
Print example
1. Table scanning

glass.
2
glass is mounted.
Adjustment of the Check the scanning adjustment 1. Perform maintenance mode U067,
scanner of the scanner. Front.(see page 1-3-50)
3 2. Perform maintenance mode U411,
Table(Chart1)_Input.
(see page 1-3-139)

Adjustment of the Check the scanning adjustment 1. Perform maintenance mode U072, Front.
scanner of DP scanning. 2. Perform maintenance mode U411, DP
Auto Adj. (If a duplex scanning DP is
2
installed.)
FaceUp(Chart2)_Input. (see page 1-3-139)


2LL/2LJ/2LH-3

Adjustment of the Check the scanning adjustment 1. Perform maintenance mode U072, CIS .
scanner of DP scanning. (see page 1-3-66)
2 Auto Adj.
FaceDown (Chart1)_All. (see page 1-3-
139)

Adjustment of the Check the scanning adjustment 1. Perform maintenance mode U072, Back.
2 scanner of DP scanning. (see page 1-3-56)
(15) Moires
Print example
1. Table scanning

Settings of print Confirm whether the moire Switch print quality mode if the moire varies
quality mode varies depending on print quality depending on print quality mode.
1
mode. 1. Execute printing in text or print mode.
2. Reduce the sharpness (to minus).
Original document Check if moire is observed along If moire is observed, place the original
2 the direction of scanning of the document after rotating it 90-degree.
original document.
Scaling factor Happens with the zoom ratio of Reduce the real-size ratio of the main scan
3 100%. direction by U065.
(see page 1-3-139)

2LL/2LJ/2LH-3

1
(see page 1-3-139)

1
2 scanner of the scanner. DP FaceDown(Chart1)_All.
(see page 1-3-139)

1
(see page 1-3-139)

2LL/2LJ/2LH-3
(16) Skewed image
Print example
1. Table scanning

Original document Check if the original document is If the original document is not placed askew on
1 fed askew. the contact glass, place it correctly.
Adjustment of Check the scanner unit is quite If the scanner unit is not quite level, perform
2 height of main unit level. the height adjustment of the entirer scanner
and scanner unit unit.
3 is mounted.

1 has creases or foldings or creases, remove them.
wrinkles.
DP paper feed Check if the original document is If the original document is fed askew, set the
2 fed askew. width guides correctly.
3 is mounted.
DP feed roller Check whether the feed roller is If the feed roller is dirty, clean.Or, if not cured,
4 dirty. replace the feed roller.
DP regist roller Check whether the DP regist If the DP regist roller is dirty, clean.
5 roller is dirty.
DP regist pulley Check that the DP regist pulley If the DP regist pulley does not rotate smoothly,
6 is smoothly operative. re-install.
Adjustment Check the amount of slack of the If the amount of the slack of the original
amount of slack of original document when it document roller improper is perform
7
the original reaches at the regist. maintenance mode U942, DP slack
documen settings.(see page 1-3-175)
Original document Check that the cursor fits with Align the cursor to fit with the original
8 setting the original document. document, if necessary.

2LL/2LJ/2LH-3

Adjustment posi- Check the front and back adjust- If the front and back adjustment positions of
9 tions of the hinge ment positions of the right hinge. the right hinge are improper, perform
adjustment.

wrinkles.
DP feed roller Check whether the DP feed If the DP feed roller is dirty, clean.
2 roller is dirty.
3 roller is dirty.
5
Install the CIS Check whether CIS is loosely Re-mount the CIS unit if it is hanged off.
7 mounted.

wrinkles.
2 is mounted.
DP feed roller Check whether the feed roller is If the feed roller is dirty, clean.Or, if not cured,
3 dirty. replace the feed roller.
4 roller is dirty.

2LL/2LJ/2LH-3

6
Adjustment posi- Check the front and back adjust- If the front and back adjustment positions of
8 tions of the hinge ment positions of the right hinge. the right hinge are improper, perform
adjustment.
9

2LL/2LJ/2LH-3
(17) Abnormal image
Print example
1. Table scanning

1
2
HDD Check the wires to the HDD in 1. Reinsert the connector if its connection is
conduction. Check the connector loose.
3 for connection. Check the con- 2. Check the wires and connetctors, and
nector pins for distortion. replace if faulty.
3. Replace the HDD or the SATA wire.
4 (see page 1-3-139)
5 (see page 1-3-139)
6

1
2

2LL/2LJ/2LH-3

4 (see page 1-3-139)
5 (see page 1-3-139)
6

2
3 (see page 1-3-62,1-3-139)
4

1
2
4 (see page 1-3-139)

2LL/2LJ/2LH-3

5 (see page 1-3-139)
6

2LL/2LJ/2LH-3
1-4-6 Poor image (Image rendering problems: printer engine
(1) No image (2) No image (3) Image is too (4) The back- (5) White streaks
appears appears light. ground is col- are printed ver-
(entirely white). (entirely black). ored. tically.
(6) Black streaks (7) Black or white streaks appear hori- (8) Uneven density longitudinally.
appear zontally.
longitudinally.
See page1-4-198 See page1-4-199 See page1-4-200

(9) Uneven density horizontally. (10) Black dots (11) Offset occurs. (12) Image is partly
appear on the missing.
image.
See page1-4-201 See page1-4-202 See page1-4-203 See page1-4-204

(13) Image is out of (14) Poor grayscale reproducibility. (15)Unevenly repeating horizontal streaks in
focus. the printed objects. Spots in the
printed objects.

2LL/2LJ/2LH-3
(16) mage is blurred (17)The leading (18) The leading (19) Paper is wrin- (20)Fusing is loose.
(Shifted edge of the edge of the kled.
transferring). image is con- image is spo-
sistently mis- radically mis-
aligned with the aligned with
original. the original.
(21) Image center (22)Dirty paper edges with toner. (23)Dirty reverse
does not align side of paper.
with the origi-
nal center.

2LL/2LJ/2LH-3
(1) No image appears (entirely white).
Print example Cause of trouble

1. No or defective developing bias output.
2. Failure of the rotation of the developing roller.
3. Defective transfer.
4. Laser is not dispersed from the laser scanner unit (LSU).
5. The drum does not rotate.

Developing unit Executing U089 to generate PGs
and check the following :
Check whether the developer If the gear is damaged, replace the developer
drive gear is damaged. unit.
1 Check the developing roller is If the developer unit is in fault, replace the
rotated by hand. developer unit. (see page 1-5-35)
Check contamination and defor- If the connecting terminals are dirty, clean.
mation on the terminals of devel- If the connecting terminals are deformed,
oper unit or the high-voltage correct for a proper conduction.
PWB1.
High-voltage PWB Check the connection of the con- Reinsert the connector if it its connection is
nector(s) and the high-voltage loose.
PWB. Or, verify conduction of Replace the cable if it has no conduction.
the wires. High voltage PWB (YC 1) and engine
PWB (YC17) :Developer
2 High voltage PWB (YC 2) and engine
PWB (YC16) :Transfer
Check if developing bias value at 1. If the value obtaines by U140 does not
its default by U140. conform to the default value, reset it to the
default. (see page 1-3-80)
2. Replace the high-voltage PWB.
Transfer belt unit Check if the right side conveying If the conveying unit has not been closed,
3 unit is closed. check how the conveying guide is locked and
open the conveying guide once, then close.
Laser scanner unit Check the connection of the con- 1. Reinsert the FFC wire if it its connection is
(LSU) nectors. loose.
4 Or, verify conduction of the Replace the cable if it has no conduction.
wires. 2. Replace the LSU
(see page 1-5-26)
Engine PWB A control signal is not derived Replace the enging PWB.
5 from the engine PWB. (see page 1-5-53)

2LL/2LJ/2LH-3
(2) No image appears (entirely black).

1. No main charging.
2. The laser from the LSU is activated simultaneously.

Charging roller Check whether the charging If the charging roller is not fixed properly, fix the
roller is properly mounted. roller properly.
Check whether the connecting If the connecting terminals are deformed,

1
terminals of the charging roller correct for a proper conduction.
and high-voltage PWB are
deformed.
High-voltage PWB Check the connection of the con- Reinsert the connector if its connection is
nectors. Or, verify conduction of loose.
the wires. Replace the cable if it has no conduction.
High voltage PWB (YC 2) and engine PWB
2 (YC16) :Charger
Main charging current supplied Replace the high-voltage PWB.
by the high-voltage PWB is (see page 1-5-58)
faulty.
Laser scanner unit Switching on and off the laser Replace the LSU. (see page 1-5-31)
3 (LSU) diode on the LSU PWB is out of
control.
Engine PWB The engine PWB is detective. Replace the engine PWB.(see page 1-5-53)
4
5

2LL/2LJ/2LH-3
(3) Image is too light.

1. Variance in environments (dew formation).
2. Toner is under supplied, or deteriorated in quality.(Under charged)
3. The volatage of the developing bias is too low.
4. The volatage of the transfer current is too low.
5. The power of LSU laser is too low.
6. The surface potential of the drum is too high.
7. The contact pressure at the trasnfer belt and the drum is too low.

Paper Check that the paper has mois- 1. If the paper is damp, replace.Choose a dry
ture absorbed. Check that the place to store paper.
1 paper has stored in a humid 2. If necessary, install a cassette heater.
place. (see page 1-2-64)
Drum unit Check that the drum has dew If a dew condensation is observed, perform
condensation. drum refreshing.
(System Menu >Adjustment / Maintenance)
2
1. Check if the discharging 1. If the discharging lamp is dirty, clean.
lamp is dirty. 2. If not cured, or it does not light, replace the
2. Check whether it is lit. drum unit. (Performs U119)(see page 1-3-73)

2LL/2LJ/2LH-3

Developer unit Executing U089 to generate PGs
(see page 1-3-61)
1. Confirm the value from If the value is less than 542, perform U132 to
U155. forcibly replenish toner.
(see page 1-3-86) (see page 1-3-77)
Replace the developer unit if the output is kept
too low.
2. Check if the device executed 1. If the device was executing a low-density

a low-density printing for a printing for a prolonged period, perform
prolonged period. developing refreshing.
(System Menu >Adjustment /
Maintenance)
2. If developer refreshing does not correct the
problem, perform the following
Execute maintenance modes U464
3 Calibration and U410 Grayscale
Adjustment.
(see page 1-3-154,1-3-138)
3. Check if the connecting ter- If the connecting terminals are deformed,
minals for developer bias are correct for a proper conduction.
deformed.
Check the value of U140 If the MagDC value is in excess of the upper
MagDC. limit by U140, perform U464 to set the
(see page 1-3-80) Thickness Target Value from 0 to +30.
Execute maintenance modes U464
Calibration.(see page 1-3-154)
Toner container Shake the toner container up If the message prompting toner replenishing is
and down approx. 10 times, and shown, the toner inlet is not open, replace the
check the following: toner container.
4 1. Check remaining toner by
the indicator.
2. Check whether the toner
supply inlet is open.
Toner supply motor Execute U135 to check the If the toner Conduct supply motor does not
5 revolution of the toner supply rotate, replace.
motor. (see page 1-3-77)

2LL/2LJ/2LH-3

High-voltage PWB Check the value of the U100. 1. If the value obtained by U100 or U140 does
Check the value of the U140. not conform to the default value, reset it to
6
the default. (see page 1-3-83)
2. Replace the high-voltage PWB.
Transfer belt unit 1. Check whether the 1. If the connecting terminals are deformed,
connecting terminals. correct for a proper conduction.
2. Check the value of the U106. 2. If the value obtained after U106 does not
(see page 1-3-68) conform to the default value, reset it to the
7 default.
3. Replace transfer belt unit.
1. Check if the contact between Re-mount the transfer belut unit.
the transfer belut and durm
is correct.
LSU 1. The laser diode on the LSU Replace the LSU. (Performs U119)
APC PWB is out of control. (see page 1-3-73)
8
2. Check whether the internal
mirrors are contaminated.
Engine PWB The engine PWB is defective. Replace the enging PWB. (see page 1-5-53)
9

2LL/2LJ/2LH-3
(4) The background is colored.
Print example
1. Toner is deteriorated in quality (under-charged).
2. Toner is over-supplied.
3. Developing bias is too high.
4. The layer of toner is too thick on the developing roller (too much toner).
5. The surface potential of the drum is too low (under low temperature
environment).

Developer unit Executing U089 to generate PGs
(see page 1-3-61)
1. Check whether the device If the device was being continuously operated
was being continuously with high density under a hot environment,
operated with high density, perform developing refreshing. (System Menu
under a hot environment. >Adjustment / Maintenance)
2. Check the value of the U140 If the density ID is too low at calibration,
developer bias. (see page 1- execute maintenance modes U464 Calibration
1
3-80) and U410 Grascale Adjustment. (see page 1-
3-154,1-3-138)
3. Check contamination and If the connecting terminals for developer bias
deformation on the are dirty, clean.If the connecting terminals are
connecting terminals for deformed, correct for a proper conduction.
developer bias.
4. Check the toner sensor If the toner sensor output obtained by U155 is
output by U155. 100 or less, replace the developer unit. (see
(see page 1-3-86) page 1-5-35)
Toner supply motor Check the toner supply motor is If the harnesses are short-circuited and the
2 continuously rotating.Check toner motor is continuously rotating,
wires for shortcircuiting. replace the toner supply motor.

2LL/2LJ/2LH-3

Drum unit 1. Conduct U139 to check the If the internal temperature is 16-degree C or
internal temperature. less, continue printing until the temperature
(see page 1-3-79) reaches 16-dgree C or higher.
2. Check the value of the U100 Fix the inner unit properly.
main high voltage. (see page 1-5-33)
(see page 1-3-66)
3 3. Check that the ground If the connecting terminals are dirty, clean.
terminal is not contaminated If the amount of the grease applied is too
or the conductive grease is small, apply conductive grease to the bearing
not applied with the on the receiver side of the drum drive axle.
connecting terminals. Replace the drum unit. (Performs U119)
4. Check if the charging roller is If the charging roller is dirty, clean.Or replace it.
dirty. (Performs U930)(see page 1-3-173)
Transfer belt unit 1. Check if the belt is bleached 1. If the connecting terminals are deformed,
on its surface. correct for a proper conduction.
2. Check the value of U140 2. If the value obtained by U106 does not
MagDC after conducting cali- conform to the default value, reset it to the
bration. default.
3. Check if the ground tab of 3. Increase the U140 MagDC value if the
the transfer belt unit is U140 MadDC value has not reached at its
4 maximum even though the belt is
deformed.
bleached on its surface.
4. If the MadDC increased to its maximum
won't cure, replace the transfer belt unit.
(see page 1-5-41)
High-voltage PWB The developing bias and charg- Replace the high-voltage PWB.
5 ing current supplied by the high- (see page 1-5-58)
voltage PWB is faulty.
Engine PWB Defective the engine PWB Replace the enging PWB. (see page 1-5-53)
6

2LL/2LJ/2LH-3
(5) White streaks are printed vertically.

1. Dirty LSU slit glass.
2. Foreign objects inside the developer unit.
3. Internal contamination
4. Dirty drum inside.

Developer unit Executing U089 to generate Replace the developer unit.
1 PGs. (see page 1-3-61) (see page 1-5-35)
Light path between Check if there are dusts, dirts, or If a foreign object exists on the frame or the
2 the LSU and the toner obstructing the light paths. sealings between the developer unit and the
drum drum unit, remove.
Drum unit Check if the charging roller is If the charging roller is dirty,clean. Or replace it.
dirty. (Performs U930) (see page 1-5-36)
3
Check if the discharging lamp is If the discharging lamp is dirty,clean.
dirty.
LSU Check if the LSU slit glass is If the LSU slit glass is dirty,
4 dirty. perform laser scanner cleaning.
Transfer belt unit Check whether a white streak Clean the transfer belt if it is dirty.
5 occurs at the same position as Replace the transfer belt unit. (see page 1-5-
the smear on the transfer belt. 41)

2LL/2LJ/2LH-3
(6) Black streaks appear longitudinally.

1. Dirty charging roller
2. Flawed or dirty drum unit
3. Damaged or paper dust bitten cleaning blade

Separation brush Check if the separation brush is If the separation brush is dirty, clean it using a
1 dirty with paper dusts and waste brush.
toner.
Drum unit Check if drum is dirty on its sur- Execute drum refreshing.
face. (System Menu >Adjustment / Maintenance)
1. Check if the drum has Replace the drum unit.

scratches. (see page 1-5-36)
2. Check whether the edge of
the cleaning blade is dam-
2 aged.
3. Check whether it is abraded
or paper dusts are accumu-
lated.
4. Check whether toner is
accumulated in the cleaning
section.
Charging roller unit Check if there is no toner streaks If the charging roller has streaks on its surface,
on the surface of the charging clean the charging roller. Replace the charging
3
roller. roller, if necessary.
(Performs U930) (see page 1-3-173)
Transfer belt unit 1. Check if the transfer belt If smears and scuff are observed on the trans-
roller is contaminated on its fer belt unit, replace the unit.
surface or damaged. (see page 1-5-41)
2. Check the cleaning bias con- If the connector or terminals are dirty, clean.
nector or the connecting ter- If the connecting terminals are deformed, cor-
4 minals of high voltage are rect for a proper conduction.
not dirty or deformed. Replace the high-voltage PWB.
(see page 1-5-58)

2LL/2LJ/2LH-3

Fuser unit Check if the paper separation If the paper separation puddle is dirty, clean the
puddle is contaminated with paper separation puddle.
toner.
5
Check the device is adjusted for If the settings for paper weight and the paper
a correct paper weight that being used do not match, make a proper con-
matches the paper in use. figuration.
Eject guide The Rib is contaminated with If it is duty,clean.
6 toner.
(7) Black or white streaks appear horizontally.

1. Dirty developer unit or terminals
2. Flawed or dirty drum unit Improper grounding
3. Dirty transfer roller terminals

Developer unit 1. Check the print image on 1. If the ends of the developing roller and the
paper has a problem at an connecting terminals for developer bias are
interval equivalent to the cir- dirty, clean.
cumference of the develop- 2. Replace the developer unit. (see page 1-5-
1
ing roller. 35)
2. Check that the developing
roller is dirty at its ends or at
the developing bias tab.
Drum unit 1. Check the print image on Execute drum refreshing.
paper has a problem at an (System Menu >Adjustment / Maintenance)
interval equivalent to the
circumference of the drum .
2. Check if the drum has Replace the drum unit. (Performs U119)
2 scratches. (see page 1-5-36)
3. Check the grounding tab of 1. Check how the inner unit is mounted, and
the drum or the drum drive correct, if necessary.
shaft. 2. Replace the drum unit. (Performs U119)
(see page 1-5-36)

2LL/2LJ/2LH-3

Transfer belt unit Check the print image that If the print image has a problem, clean the
implies dirt, deformation, or transfer belt by a soft cloth.
scratches on the transfer belt,
which will be appearing at an
interval equal to its
3 circumference .
Check contamination and 1. If the connecting terminals are deformed,
deformation on the terminals . correct for a proper conduction
2. Replace transfer belt unit.(see page 1-5-
41)
Fuser unit Check the print image on paper If the print image has a problem, clean the
has a problem at an interval fuser roller.
4
equivalent to the circumference
of the fuser roller.
High-voltage PWB The bias voltage output sup- Replace the high-voltage PWB. (see page 1-5-
5 plied by the high-voltage PWB is 58)
not even.
(8) Uneven density longitudinally.

1. Dirty LSU inside
2. The transfer belt is not pressed against the drum properly.
3. Drum condensation.

Transfer belt unit Check that the transfer belt unit 1. If it is not fixed properly, fix it properly.
is properly fit. 2. If the conveying unit has not been cloed,
check how the conveying guide is locked
1 and open the conveying guide once, then
close.
3. Replace the transfer belt unit.
(see page 1-5-41)
Drum unit 1. Check toner is evenly 1. Execute drum refreshing.
layered on its surface. 2. Selects the Dew Mode by U148 Drum
2. Check whether the device Referesh Mode. (see page 1-3-85)
2
has been operated under a 3. Install a cassette heater.
highly humid environment. 4. Replace the drum unit. (Performs U119)
(see page 1-5-36)

2LL/2LJ/2LH-3

Developer unit Check that toner is evenly lay- Replace the developer unit. (see page 1-5-35)
3 ered on the developing roller.
LSU The emission of laser dispersed Replace the LSU.(Performs U119)

4 from the LSU is not even. (Mirror
is dropped off inside.)
(9) Uneven density horizontally.

1. Defective laser scanner unit.
2. Improper charging roller rotation
3. Improper contact on the developer unit terminals

LSU Check the emission of laser is Replace the LSU. (see page 1-5-31)
1 even.
Charging roller Check if the charing roller is 1. Fix the charging roller properly.
2 improperly mounted. 2. Replace the charging roller.
(Performs U930) (see page 1-5-36)
Developer unit Check If the connecting termi- 1. If the connecting terminals is dirty.
3 nals of the developing bias is 2. Replace the developer unit.
contaminated by toner. (Performs U140) (see page 1-5-35)
Transfer belt unit. Check if the transfer belt is con- 1. Replace the transfer belt unit.
taminated on its surface or dam-
aged.
4 Check if the cleaning bias con- 1. If the connector or terminals are dirty,
nector or the connecting termi- clean.If the connecting terminals are
nals of high voltage are dirty or deformed, correct for a proper conduction.
deformed. 2. Replace the high-voltage PWB.
Fuser unit Check that the roller, its driving If the roller, its driving unit, or the fusing pres-
unit, or the fusing pressure sure release mechanism is deformed,
5 abraded, or damaged, replace the fuser unit.
release mechanism is deformed,
abraded, or damaged.

2LL/2LJ/2LH-3
(10) Black dots appear on the image.

1. Dirty charging roller
3. Damaged or paper dust bitten cleaning blade

Drum unit Check the print image on paper If the drum has scratches, replace the drum
has a problem at an interval unit. (see page 1-5-36)
1
of the drum (126mm).
Charging roller Check the print image on paper A problem is observed at a constant interval of
has a problem at an interval the charging roller (38 mm), replace the
2
equivalent to the circumference charging roller.(U930)
of the charging roller (38mm). (see page 1-3-173)
Developer unit 1. Check if that the developing Execute AC calibration by U140.
bias is leaked. (see page 1-3-83)
2. Check the print image on 1. If the print image on paper has a problem
paper has a problem at an at an interval equivalent to the
3
interval equivalent to the circumference of the developer roller, clean
circumference of the the developer unit.
developing roller (39mm). 2. Replace the developer unit.
(see page 1-5-36)
Transfer belt unit. Check if the transfer belt is con- Replace the transfer belt unit.
taminated on its surface or dam-
aged.
4 Check the cleaning bias connec- 1. If the connector or terminals are dirty,
tor or the connecting terminals of clean.If the connecting terminals are
high voltage are not dirty or deformed, correct for a proper conduction.
deformed. 2. Replace the high-voltage circuit PWB.
Fuser unit Check the print image on paper 1. If the print image has a problem, clean the
has a problem at an interval fuser roller.
5 2. If cleaning does not help improve the
of the fuser roller. symptom, replace the fuser unit.

2LL/2LJ/2LH-3
(11) Offset occurs.

2. Developing bias leakage.

Paper Check that the type of the paper 1. If the type of the paper being used falls
used falls within the range of outside the requirements, replace and use
specifications. Check the set- a suitable type of paper.
1 tings of the type and weight of 2. If the settings made for the paper being
the paper. used is inadequate, configure the settings
according to the paper being used.
Drum unit Check the print image on paper If the print image on paper has a problem at an
has a problem at an interval interval equivalent to the circumference of the
2
equivalent to the circumference drum, replace the drum unit. (see page 1-5-36
of the drum (126mm).
Developer unit Check if offsets are observed at If offsets are observed at an constant interval
an constant interval of 39 mm, of 39 mm, which is equivalent to the
which is equivalent to the cir- circumference of the developing roller, replace
3 cumference of the developing the developer unit.
roller. (Waste toner is not properly sweeped from the
developing roller.)
(see page 1-5-35)
Transfer belt unit Check the transfer cleaning 1. If the transfer cleaning volatage by U106 is
volatage by U106. not its default, reset it to the default.
(see page 1-3-68) 2. Replace the transfer belt unit.
4 (see page 1-5-41)
Check if offsets are occurred at a If an offset happens at a pitch of the outer cir-
pitch of the outer circumference cumference, clean the transfer belt.
of the transfer belt.
Fuser unit Check the print image on paper If the fuser unit roller is dirty, replace the unit.
has a problem at an interval
5
of the fuser roller.
Fusing Check the fusing temperature If the fusing temperature value by U161 is not
6 temperature set- value by U161. its default, reset it to the default.
ting (see page 1-3-90)

2LL/2LJ/2LH-3
(12) Image is partly missing.

1. Flawed or dirty drum unit.
2. Deformed or dirty transfer roller on its surface.

Paper 1. Check that the paper has 1. If the paper is damp, replace.Choose a dry
moisture absorbed. place to store paper.
1 2. Check that the paper has 2. If necessary, install a cassette heater.
stored in a humid place. (see page 1-2-64)
Drum unit Check the print image on paper If the print image on paper has a problem at an
has a problem at an interval interval equivalent to the circumference of the
2
equivalent to the circumference drum, exexcute drum refreshing
of the drum (126mm) (System Menu > Adjustment/Maintenance).
Transfer belt unit Check if the transfer belt is If the transfer belt unit is deformed or contami-
3 deformed or contaiminated on its nated, replace the intermediate transfer belt
surface. unit.
Fusing Check the value of the U161. 1. Choose a paper weight appropriate for the
temperature set- (see page 1-3-89) weight of the paper actually being used, if
ting the fusing temperature was set low using
4
U161.
2. Perform U161 for an appropriate fusing
temperature.
(13) Image is out of focus.

1. Drum condensation.
2. Dirty LSU slit glass.

Paper 1. Check that the paper has 1. If the paper is damp, replace.Choose a dry
moisture absorbed. place to store paper.
1 2. Check that the paper has 2. If necessary, install a cassette heater.
stored in a humid place. (see page 1-2-64)

2LL/2LJ/2LH-3

Drum unit Check that the surface of the Execute Drum refreshing.
2 drum has dew condensation. System Menu > Adjustment/Maintenance
LSU Check whether the LSU slit 1. If the LSU slit glass is dirty, execute Laser
glass is contaminated in its scanner cleaning.
3
entirety. 2. Replace the LSU. (Performs U119)
(see page 1-5-31)
(14) Poor grayscale reproducibility.

1. Poor image adjustment.

Image adjustmen Check if color adjustment is Execute U464 Calibration and U410 Grayscale
1 insufficient. Adjustment. (see page 1-3-154,1-3-138)

2LL/2LJ/2LH-3
(15) Unevenly repeating horizontal streaks in the printed objects. Spots in the printed
objects.

1. Installation at a high altitude.
2. Using the paper with high surface resistance.

Developer unit The device is installed in an If the device is installed in an altitude greater
altitude higher than 1500 m sea than 1500 m sea level, perform the following.
level.
1. 35 ppm / 45 ppm devices
Execute U140 and turn both AC Calib and
1 High Altitude.
2. 55 ppm devices
Execute U140 and turn both AC Calib and
High Altitude to Mode1.If changing to
Mode1 wont work, change to Mode2.
(see page 1-3-80)
Paper Check if paper is of high surface Change the paper to another.
2 resistance.

2LL/2LJ/2LH-3
(16) mage is blurred (Shifted transferring).

1. The paper used does not conform to the requirement.
2. Imbalanced fuser unit pressures.

Paper 1. Check that the type of the 1. If the type of the paper being used falls
paper used falls within the outside the requirements, replace and use
range of specifications. a suitable type of paper.
1
2. Check the settings of the 2. If the settings made for the paper being
type and weight of the paper. used is inadequate, configure the settings
Fuser unit 1. Check the fuser pressure 1. If the pressures at the front and rear are
balance. unbalanced, replace the fuser unit.
2 2. Check if the fuser paper- (see page 1-5-45)
inserting guide is deformed. 2. If the fuser unit is deformed, replace.
(see page 1-5-45)
Paper conveying Check to see if the driving mech- If the drive does not operate normally, apply
3 motor anism for paper conveying is grease.
operative without a hinderance.
Paper conveying The paper conveying guide is If the paper conveying guide is deformed,
4 guide deformed. replace the paper conveying guide.

2LL/2LJ/2LH-3
(17) The leading edge of the image is consistently misaligned with the original.

1. Improperly adjusted leading edge timing.
2. Improper amount of slack of the original document in front of the registration.

Regist roller 1. Check whether the leading- If theadjustment is not sufficient, execute U034
edge timing is adequately to adjust the leading edge timing. (see page 1-
adjusted. 3-33)
1 2. Check whether the amount If the amount of the slack in front of the regist
of slack of the original roller is insufficient, execute U051 to optimize
document when it reaches at the slack. (see page 1-3-39)
the DP regist is adequate.

2LL/2LJ/2LH-3
(18) The leading edge of the image is sporadically misaligned with the original.
Print example

Paper feed clutch, Check that the clutches are 1. If it is not fixed properly, fix it properly.
Middle clutch, Reg- properly fit.IOr, check they are 2. If it does not operate without a hinderance,
1
istration clutch, operative without a hinderance. replace the clutch.
Duplex clutch (35 ppm model)
Paper feed clutch, Check that the clutches and 1. If it is not fixed properly, fix it properly.
Middle motor, Reg- motors are properly fit.Or, check 2. If it does not operate without a hinderance,
2 istration motor, they are operative without a replace the clutch or motor.
Duplex motor hinderance. (45 ppm/ 55 ppm
model)
(19) Paper is wrinkled.
Print example

Paper-width guides Check the paper-width guides If the width adjuster cursors are not flush with
1 are flush with the paper. paper, set them correctly.
Paper 1. Check if paper is curled or 1. If the paper is curled or wavy, replace.

wavy. 2. Choose a dry place to store paper.
2
2. Check if paper is stored in a
humid place.

2LL/2LJ/2LH-3

Regist roller The pressures at the front and Replace the spring with the one having a
3 back springs are unbalanced. correct pressure.
Fuser unit The pressuring spring of the Replace the fuser unit. (see page 1-5-45)
4 fuser unit is defective.

2LL/2LJ/2LH-3
(20) Fusing is loose.
Print example

Paper 1. Check that the type of the 1. If the type of the paper being used falls
paper used falls within the outside the requirements, replace and use
range of specifications. a suitable type of paper.
1
2. Check the settings of the 2. If the settings made for the paper being
type and weight of the paper. used is inadequate, configure the settings
Paper weight set- Check If the weight of the paper If the weight of the paper is not correctly set,
2 ting is correctly set. choose the correct weight that matches the
paper being used.
Fuser unit Check the fuser pressure set- Replace the fuser unit. (see page 1-5-45)
3 ting.
Fusing Check the value of the U161. 1. Choose a paper weight appropriate for the
temperature set- (see page 1-3-90) weight of the paper actually being used, if
ting the fusing temperature was set low using
4
U161.
2. Perform U161 for an appropriate fusing
temperature.

2LL/2LJ/2LH
(21) Image center does not align with the original center.
Print example

Paper setting Check if paper is set correctly. Reload paper if the paper was not loaded
1 correctly.
Image position Perform adjustment if the value of U034 Center

adjustment Excute U034 to check the center Line Adjustment is inadequate.
2
alignment during writing images.
(see page 1-3-33)
(22) Dirty paper edges with toner.

1. Toner scattering due to an internal temperature
increase.(Developer unit)

Conveying guide Check if the conveying guide is If the conveying guide is dirty with toner, clean
1 dirty with toner. the developer unit and the cooling ducts.
Internal tempra- Check the device has been used If the device has been used for printing a large
ture increase for printing a large amount of amout of data or for printing in duplex mode
2
(Developer unit) data or for printing in duplex with a high density, clean the developer unit.
mode with a high density.

2LL/2LJ/2LH
(23) Dirty reverse side of paper.
Print example

Conveying guide Check if the conveying guide is If the conveying guide is dirty with toner, clean
1 dirty with toner. the conveying guide, the developer unit and
the cooling ducts.
Fuser pressure Check that a foreign object is 1. If a foreign object exists, clean the fuser
roller stuck on the fuser pressure pressure roller.
2 roller. 2. If the paper and the paper weight setting do
not match, choose the proper paper weight
setting.
Transfer belt unit Check if the transfer belt is dirty 1. Clean the transfer belt.
3 with toner on its surface. 2. Reset U106 Bias settings to its default.

2LL/2LJ/2LH
1-4-7 Electric problems

If the part causing the problem was not supplied, use the unit including the part for replacement.
Troubleshooting to each failure must be in the order of the numbered symptoms.
Problem Causes Check procedures/corrective measures

(1) 1. No electricity at the Measure the input voltage.
The machine does power outlet.
not operate when
2. The power cord is Check the contact between the power plug and the outlet.
the main power
not plugged in prop-
switch is turned on.
erly.
3. Broken power cord. Check for continuity. If none, replace the cord.
4. Defective main Check for continuity across the contacts. If none, replace
power switch. the main power switch.
5. Defective power Replace the power source PWB (see page 1-5-53).
source PWB.
(2) 1. Defective connector Reinsert the connector. Also check for continuity within the
MP lift motor does cable or poor con- connector cable. If none, replace the cable.
not operate. tact in the connector. MP lift motor and relay PWB (YC3)
Relay PWB (YC12) and feed PWB 1 (YC17)
Feed PWB 1 (YC1) and engine PWB (YC6)
2. Defective drive trans- Check if the rollers and gears rotate smoothly. If not,
mission system. grease the bushes and gears. Check for broken gears and
replace if any.
3. Defective motor. Replace the MP lift motor.
4. Defective PWB. Replace the relay PWB, feed PWB 1 or engine PWB and
check for correct operation (see page 1-5-53).
Scanner motor cable or poor con- connector cable. If none, replace the cable.
does not operate. tact in the connector. Scanner motor and ISC PWB (YC5)
ISC PWB (YC3) and main PWB (YC11)
replace if any.
3. Defective motor. Replace the scanner motor.
4. Defective PWB. Replace the ISC PWB or main PWB and check for correct
Registration motor cable or poor con- connector cable. If none, replace the cable.
does not operate tact in the connector. Registration motor and feed PWB 1 (YC25)
(45 ppm/55 ppm Feed PWB 1 (YC2) and engine PWB (YC5)
model only).
replace if any.
3. Defective motor. Replace the registration motor.
4. Defective PWB. Replace the feed PWB 1 or engine PWB and check for cor-
rect operation (see page 1-5-53).

2LL/2LJ/2LH

Middle motor does cable or poor con- connector cable. If none, replace the cable.
not operate tact in the connector. Middle motor and feed PWB 2 (YC7)
model only).
replace if any.
3. Defective motor. Replace the middle motor.
Inner motor does cable or poor con- connector cable. If none, replace the cable.
not operate. tact in the connector. Inner motor and front PWB (YC13)
Front PWB (YC3) and engine PWB (YC7)
replace if any.
3. Defective motor. Replace the inner motor.
4. Defective PWB. Replace the front PWB or engine PWB and check for cor-
Eject motor does cable or poor con- connector cable. If none, replace the cable.
not operate. tact in the connector. Eject motor and front PWB (YC5)
replace if any.
3. Defective motor. Replace the eject motor.
Duplex motor 1 cable or poor con- connector cable. If none, replace the cable.
does not operate tact in the connector. Duplex motor 1 and relay PWB (YC16)
(45 ppm/55 ppm Relay PWB (YC13) and feed PWB 1 (YC23)
model only). Feed PWB 1 (YC2) and engine PWB (YC5)
replace if any.
3. Defective motor. Replace the duplex motor 1.

2LL/2LJ/2LH

Duplex motor 2 cable or poor con- connector cable. If none, replace the cable.
does not operate tact in the connector. Duplex motor 2 and relay PWB (YC7)
(45 ppm/55 ppm Relay PWB (YC1) and feed PWB 1 (YC14)
replace if any.
3. Defective motor. Replace the duplex motor 2.
Toner fan motor cable or poor con- connector cable. If none, replace the cable.
does not operate. tact in the connector. Toner fan motor and engine PWB (YC19)
2. Defective motor. Replace the toner fan motor.
3. Defective PWB. Replace the engine PWB and check for correct operation
(see page 1-5-53).
Developer fan cable or poor con- connector cable. If none, replace the cable.
motor 1, 2 does not tact in the connector. Developer fan motor 1, 2 and front PWB (YC5)
operate. Front PWB (YC3) and engine PWB (YC7)
2. Defective motor. Replace the developer fan motor 1 or 2.
Exhaust fan motor cable or poor con- connector cable. If none, replace the cable.
does not operate. tact in the connector. Exhaust fan motor and engine PWB (YC19)
2. Defective motor. Replace the exhaust fan motor.
(see page 1-5-53).
LSU fan motor cable or poor con- connector cable. If none, replace the cable.
does not operate. tact in the connector. LSU fan motor and front PWB (YC8)
2. Defective motor. Replace the LSU fan motor.
Eject fan motor 1, cable or poor con- connector cable. If none, replace the cable.
2 does not operate. tact in the connector. Eject fan motor 1, 2 and relay PWB (YC11)
Relay PWB (YC13) and engine PWB (YC23)
2. Defective motor. Replace the eject fan motor 1 or 2.
3. Defective PWB. Replace the relay PWB or engine PWB and check for cor-

2LL/2LJ/2LH

Eject front fan cable or poor con- connector cable. If none, replace the cable.
motor does not tact in the connector. Eject front fan motor and front PWB (YC11)
operate. Front PWB (YC2) and engine PWB (YC8)
2. Defective motor. Replace the eject front fan motor.
Eject rear fan cable or poor con- connector cable. If none, replace the cable.
motor does not tact in the connector. Eject rear fan motor and feed PWB 1 (YC19)
operate. Feed PWB 1 (YC1) and engine PWB (YC6)
2. Defective motor. Replace the eject rear fan motor.
Power source fan cable or poor con- connector cable. If none, replace the cable.
motor does not tact in the connector. Power source fan motor and engine PWB (YC22)
operate. 2. Defective motor. Replace the power source fan motor.
(see page 1-5-53).
Controller fan cable or poor con- connector cable. If none, replace the cable.
motor does not tact in the connector. Controller fan motor and main PWB (YC23)
operate. 2. Defective motor. Replace the controller fan motor.
3. Defective PWB. Replace the main PWB and check for correct operation
(see page 1-5-47).
Heater fan motor cable or poor con- connector cable. If none, replace the cable.
does not operate. tact in the connector. Heater fan motor and feed PWB 1 (YC11)
2. Defective motor. Replace the heater fan motor.
Paper feed clutch cable or poor con- connector cable. If none, replace the cable.
1, 2 does not oper- tact in the connector. Paper feed clutch 1, 2 and feed PWB 2 (YC4)
ate. Feed PWB 2 (YC1) and engine PWB (YC4)
2. Defective clutch. Replace the paper feed clutch 1 or 2.

2LL/2LJ/2LH

Assist clutch 1, 2 cable or poor con- connector cable. If none, replace the cable.
does not operate tact in the connector. Assist clutch 1 and feed PWB 2 (YC10)
(45 ppm/55 ppm Assist clutch 2 and feed PWB 2 (YC12)
2. Defective clutch. Replace the assist clutch 1 or 2.
Paper conveying cable or poor con- connector cable. If none, replace the cable.
clutch does not tact in the connector. Paper conveying clutch and feed PWB 2 (YC5)
operate. Feed PWB 2 (YC1) and engine PWB (YC4)
2. Defective clutch. Replace the paper conveying clutch.
MP paper feed cable or poor con- connector cable. If none, replace the cable.
clutch does not tact in the connector. MP paper feed clutch and relay PWB (YC3)
operate. Relay PWB (YC12) and feed PWB 1 (YC17)
2. Defective clutch. Replace the MP paper feed clutch.
Registration clutch cable or poor con- connector cable. If none, replace the cable.
does not operate tact in the connector. Registration clutch and feed PWB 1 (YC22)
(35 ppm model Feed PWB 1 (YC2) and engine PWB (YC5)
only). 2. Defective clutch. Replace the registration clutch.
Middle clutch does cable or poor con- connector cable. If none, replace the cable.
not operate tact in the connector. Middle clutch and feed PWB 2 (YC7)
(35 ppm model Feed PWB 2 (YC1) and engine PWB (YC4)
only). 2. Defective clutch. Replace the middle clutch.

2LL/2LJ/2LH

Duplex clutch 1 cable or poor con- connector cable. If none, replace the cable.
does not operate tact in the connector. Duplex clutch 1 and relay PWB (YC11)
(35 ppm model Relay PWB (YC13) and feed PWB 1 (YC23)
only). Feed PWB 1 (YC2) and engine PWB (YC5)
2. Defective clutch. Replace the duplex clutch 1.
Duplex clutch 2 cable or poor con- connector cable. If none, replace the cable.
does not operate tact in the connector. Duplex clutch 2 and relay PWB (YC7)
(35 ppm model Relay PWB (YC1) and feed PWB 1 (YC14)
only). Feed PWB 1 (YC1) and engine PWB (YC6)
2. Defective clutch. Replace the duplex clutch 2.
Pickup solenoid 1, cable or poor con- connector cable. If none, replace the cable.
2 does not operate tact in the connector. Pickup solenoid 1, 2 and feed PWB 2 (YC8)
model only). 2. Defective solenoid. Replace the pickup solenoid 1 or 2.
Feedshift solenoid cable or poor con- connector cable. If none, replace the cable.
does not operate. tact in the connector. Feedshift and front PWB (YC4)
2. Defective solenoid. Replace the feedshift solenoid 1 or 2.
Cleaning solenoid cable or poor con- connector cable. If none, replace the cable.
does not operate. tact in the connector. Cleaning solenoid and relay PWB (YC4)
Relay PWB (YC12) and Feed PWB 1 (YC17)
2. Defective solenoid. Replace the cleaning solenoid.

2LL/2LJ/2LH

The message cable or poor con- connector cable. If none, replace the cable.
requesting paper to tact in the connector. Paper sensor 1, 2 and feed PWB 2 (YC8)
be loaded is shown Feed PWB 2 (YC1) and engine PWB (YC4)
when paper is
2. Deformed actuator. Check visually and replace if necessary.
present on the cas-
sette. 3. Defective sensor. Replace the paper sensor 1 or 2.
The message cable or poor con- connector cable. If none, replace the cable.
requesting paper to tact in the connector. MP paper sensor and relay PWB (YC3)
be loaded is shown Relay PWB (YC12) and feed PWB 1 (YC17)
when paper is Feed PWB 1 (YC1)and engine PWB (YC6)
present on the MP 2. Deformed actuator. Check visually and replace if necessary.
tray.
3. Defective sensor. Replace the MP paper sensor.
The size of paper cable or poor con- connector cable. If none, replace the cable.
on the cassette is tact in the connector. Paper length switch 1, 2 and feed PWB 2 (YC3)
not displayed cor- Paper width switch 1, 2 and feed PWB 2 (YC3)
rectly. Feed PWB 2 (YC1) and engine PWB (YC4)
2. Defective switch. Replace the paper length switch 1, 2 or paper width switch
1, 2.
The size of paper cable or poor con- connector cable. If none, replace the cable.
on the MP tray is tact in the connector. MP paper length switch and relay PWB (YC2)
not displayed cor- MP paper width switch and relay PWB (YC2)
rectly. Relay PWB (YC12) and feed PWB 1 (YC17)
Feed PWB 1 (YC1)and engine PWB (YC6)
2. Defective switch. Replace the MP paper length switch or MP paper width
switch.

2LL/2LJ/2LH

(35) 1. A piece of paper torn Check visually and remove it, if any.
A paper jam in the from paper is caught
paper feed, paper around feed sensor
conveying or eject 1, 2, MP feed sensor,
section is indi- middle sensor, paper
cated when the conveying sensor,
main power switch registration sensor,
is turned on. loop sensor, fuser
eject sensor, duplex
sensor 1, 2, eject full
sensor or switch-
back sensor.
2. Defective sensor. Replace the feed sensor 1, 2, MP feed sensor, middle sen-
sor, paper conveying sensor, registration sensor, loop sen-
sor, fuser eject sensor, duplex sensor 1, 2, eject full sensor
or switchback sensor.
A message indicat- cable or poor con- connector cable. If none, replace the cable.
ing cover open is tact in the connector. Front cover switch and front PWB (YC8)
displayed when the Front PWB (YC2) and engine PWB (YC8)
front cover is 2. Defective switch. Replace the front cover switch.
closed.
ing unit open is dis- tact in the connector. Paper conveying unit switch and feed PWB 1 (YC15)
played when the Feed PWB 1 (YC4) and power source PWB (YC12)
paper conveying 2. Defective switch. Replace the paper conveying unit switch.
unit is closed.
ing cover open is tact in the connector. Duplex cover switch and relay PWB (YC7)
displayed when the Relay PWB (YC1) and feed PWB 1 (YC14)
duplex cover is Feed PWB 1 (YC1)and engine PWB (YC6)
closed.
2. Defective switch. Replace the duplex cover switch.
ing cover open is tact in the connector. Paper conveying cover switch and feed PWB 2 (YC6)
displayed when the Feed PWB 2 (YC1) and power source PWB (YC4)
paper conveying
2. Defective switch. Replace the paper conveying cover switch.
cover is closed.

2LL/2LJ/2LH
1-4-8 Mechanical problems

If the part causing the problem was not supplied, use the unit including the part for replacement.
Problem Causes/check procedures Corrective measures

(1) Check if the surfaces of the following roll- Clean with isopropyl alcohol.
No primary paper ers are dirty with paper powder.
feed. Forwarding pulley
Paper feed pulley
MP paper feed pulley
Check if the following rollers is deformed. Check visually and replace any
Forwarding pulley deformed (see page 1-5-7, 1-5-10, 1-5-
Paper feed pulley 14).
MP paper feed pulley
Defective paper feed clutch 1, 2 or MP Check visually and remedy if necessary.
paper feed clutch installation.
(2) Check if the surfaces of the following roll- Clean with isopropyl alcohol.
No secondary paper ers are dirty with paper powder.
feed. Right registration roller
Left registration roller
Defective registration motor installation. Check visually and remedy if necessary.
(45 ppm/55 ppm model)
Defective registration clutch installation.
(35 ppm model)
(3) Paper width guide in a cassette installed Check the paper width guide visually
Skewed paper feed. incorrectly. and remedy or replace if necessary.
(4) Check if the paper is excessively curled. Change the paper.
Multiple sheets of
Paper is loaded incorrectly. Load the paper correctly.
paper are fed.
Check if the separation pulley is worn. Replace the separation pulley if it is
worn (see page 1-5-7, 1-5-10).
(5) Check if the paper is excessively curled. Change the paper.
Paper jams.
Check if the contact between the right Check visually and remedy if necessary.
and left registration rollers is correct.
Check if the heat roller or press roller is Check visually and replace the fuser
extremely dirty or deformed. unit (see page 1-5-45).
(6) Check if the drum unit or developer unit Clean the drum unit or developer unit.
Toner drops on the is extremely dirty.
paper conveying path.

2LL/2LJ/2LH
Problem Causes/check procedures Corrective measures

(7) Check if the rollers, pulleys and gears Grease the bushes and gears.
Abnormal noise is operate smoothly.
heard.
Check if the following clutches are Check visually and remedy if necessary.
installed correctly.
Paper feed clutch 1, 2
Assist clutch 1, 2*1
Paper conveying clutch
MP paper feed clutch
Registration clutch*2
Middle clutch*2
Duplex clutch 1, 2*2
*1: 45 ppm/55 ppm model only
*2: 35 ppm model only

2LL/2LJ/2LH
1-4-9 Send error code

This section describes the scanning errors and descriptions, preventive actions, as well as corrective actions.
Error codes not described here could fall within software errors.
If such an error is encountered, turn power off then on, and advise the service representative.
(1) Scan to SMB error codes

Code Contents Check procedures/corrective measures
1101 Host destined does not exist on the net- 1. Confirm destined host.
work. 2. Confirm device's network parameters.
3. Confirm the network parameters the device is con-
nected.
1102 Login to the host has failed. 1. Confirm user name and password.
nected.
3. Check the host if the folder is properly shared.
1103 Destined host, folder, and/or file names 1. Check illegal characters are not contained within
are invalid. these names.
2. Check the name of the folder and files conform with
the naming syntax.
3. Confirm destined host and folder.
1105 SMB protocol is not enabled. 1. Confirm device's SMB protocols.
2101 Login to the host has failed. 1. Confirm destined host.
2. Confirm that the LAN cable is properly connected to
the device.
3. Check the SMB port number.
4. Confirm device's network parameters.
nected.
2201 Writing scanned data has failed. 1. Check the scanning file name.
nected.
2203 No response from the host during a cer- 1. Confirm the network parameters the device is con-
tain period of time. nected.
the device.

2LL/2LJ/2LH
(2) Scan to FTP error codes

1101 FTP server does not exist on the net- 1. Check the FTP server name.
work. 2. Confirm device's network parameters.
nected.
1102 Login to the FTP server has failed. 1. Confirm user name and password.
2. Check the FTP server name.
1103 Destined folder is invalid. 1. Check illegal characters are not contained within
these names.
1105 FTP protocol is not enabled. 1. Confirm device's FTP protocols.
1131 Initializing TLS has failed. 1. Confirm device's security parameters.
1132 TLS negotiation has failed. 1. Confirm device's security parameters.
2101 Access to the FTP server has failed. 1. Check the FTP server name.
the device.
3. Check the FTP port number.
nected.
2102 Access to the FTP server has failed. 1. Check the FTP server name.
(Connection timeout) 2. Check the FTP port number.
nected.
2103 The server cannot establish communi- 1. Check the FTP server name.
cation. 2. Check the FTP port number.
nected.
2201 Connection with the FTP server has 1. Confirm device's network parameters.
failed. 2. Confirm the network parameters the device is con-
nected.
3. Confirm destined folder.
(Timeout) nected.
2203 No response from the server during a 1. Confirm device's network parameters.
certain period of time. 2. Confirm the network parameters the device is con-
nected.

2LL/2LJ/2LH

(FTPS communication) nected.
3101 FTP server responded with an error. 1. Confirm device's network parameters.
nected.
3. Check the FTP server.
(3) Scan to E-mail error codes

1101 SMTP/POP3 server does not exist on 1. Check the SMTP/POP3 server name.
the network. 2. Confirm device's network parameters.
nected.
1102 Login to the SMTP/POP3 server has 1. Confirm user name and password.
failed. 2. Check the SMTP/POP3 server.
1104 The domain the destined address 1. Confirm device's SMTP parameters.
belongs is prohibited by scanning
restriction.
1105 SMTP protocol is not enabled. 1. Confirm device's SMTP protocols.
1106 Senders address is not specified. 1. Confirm device's SMTP protocols.
2101 Connection to the SMTP/POP3 server 1. Check the SMTP/POP3 server name.
has failed. 2. Confirm that the LAN cable is properly connected to
the device.
3. Check the SMTP/POP3 port number.
nected.
6. Check the SMTP/POP3 server.
2102 Connection to the SMTP/POP3 server 1. Check the SMTP/POP3 server name.
has failed. 2. Check the SMTP/POP3 port number.
(Connection timeout) 3. Confirm device's network parameters.
nected.
2103 The server cannot establish communi- 1. Check the SMTP/POP3 server name.
cation. 2. Check the SMTP/POP3 port number.
nected.
2201 Connection to the SMTP/POP3 server 1. Confirm device's network parameters.
has failed. 2. Confirm the network parameters the device is con-
nected.

2LL/2LJ/2LH

2202 Connection to the SMTP/POP3 server 1. Confirm device's network parameters.
has failed. 2. Confirm the network parameters the device is con-
(Timeout) nected.
2204 The size of scanning exceeded its limit. 1. Confirm device's network parameters.
1.
3101 SMTP/POP3 server responded with an 1. Confirm device's network parameters.
error. 2. Confirm the network parameters the device is con-
nected.
3201 No SMTP authentication is found. 1. Check the SMTP server.
The device supports SMTP authentication services
including CRAM-MD5, DIGEST-MD5, PLAIN and
LOGIN.
4803 Failed to establish the SSL session. 1. Verify the self certificate of the device.
2. Check the server certificate of the SMTP/POP3
server.
3. Check the SMTP/POP3 configuration of the device
and the SMTP/POP3 server.

2LL/2LJ/2LH
1-4-10 Error codes

(1) Error code
Error codes are listed on the communication reports, activity report, etc. The codes consist of an error code
indication U followed by a 5-digit number. (Error codes for V34 communication errors start with an E indica-
tion, followed by five digits.)
The upper three of the five digits indicate general classification of the error and its cause, while the lower two
indicate the detailed classification. Items for which detailed classification is not necessary have 00 as the last
two digits.
Error code
UXXXXX
Detailed classification of error code

General classification of error code
Error code indication
Figure 1-4-5

2LL/2LJ/2LH
(2) Table of general classification

Error code Description
U00000 No response or busy after the set number of redials.
U00100 Transmission was interrupted by a press of the stop/clear key.
U00200 Reception was interrupted by a press of the stop/clear key.
U00300 Recording paper on the destination unit has run out during transmission.
U004XX A connection was made but interrupted during handshake with the receiver unit (refer to
P.1-4-231 U004XX error code table).
U006XX Communication was interrupted because of a machine problem (refer to P.1-4-231
U006XX error code table).
U00700 Communication was interrupted because of a problem in the destination unit.
U008XX A page transmission error occurred in G3 mode (refer to P.1-4-231 U008XX error code
table).
U009XX A page reception error occurred in G3 mode (refer to P.1-4-231 U009XX error code
table).
U010XX Transmission in G3 mode was interrupted by a signal error (refer to P.1-4-232 U010XX
error code table).
U011XX Reception in G3 mode was interrupted by a signal error (refer to P.1-4-233 U011XX error
code table).
U01400 An invalid one-touch key was specified during communication.
U01500 A communication error occurred when calling in V.8 mode.
U01600 A communication error occurred when called in V.8 mode.
U017XX A communication error occurred before starting T.30 protocol during transmission in V.34
mode (refer to P.1-4-234 U017XX error code table).
U018XX A communication error occurred before starting T.30 protocol during reception in V.34
mode (refer to P.1-4-234 U018XX error code table).
U03000 No document was present in the destination unit when polling reception started.
U03200 In interoffice subaddress-based bulletin board reception, data was not stored in the box
specified by the destination unit.
U03300 In polling reception from a unit of our make, operation was interrupted due to a mismatch
in permit ID or telephone number. Or, in interoffice subaddress-based bulletin board
reception, operation was interrupted due to a mismatch in permit ID or telephone num-
ber.
U03400 Polling reception was interrupted because of a mismatch in individual numbers (destina-
tion unit is either of our make or by another manufacturer).
U03500 In interoffice subaddress-based bulletin board reception, the specified Subaddress confi-
dential box number was not registered in the destination unit.
U03600 An interoffice subaddress-based bulletin board reception was interrupted because of a
mismatch in the specified subaddress confidential box number.
U03700 Interoffice subaddress-based bulletin board reception failed because the destination unit
had no subaddress-based bulletin board transmission capability, or data was not stored
in any subaddress confidential box in the destination unit.

2LL/2LJ/2LH

U04000 In interoffice subaddress-based transmission mode, the specified subaddress box num-
ber was not registered in the destination unit.
U04100 Subaddress-based transmission failed because the destination unit had no subaddress-
based reception capability.
U04200 In encrypted transmission, the specified encryption box was not registered in the desti-
nation unit.
U04300 Encrypted transmission failed because the destination unit had no encrypted communi-
cation capability.
U04400 Encrypted transmission was interrupted because encryption keys did not agree.
U04500 Encrypted reception was interrupted because of a mismatch in encryption keys.
U05100 Password check transmission or restricted transmission was interrupted because the
permit IDs did not agree with.
U05200 Password check reception or restricted reception was interrupted because the permit
IDs did not match, the rejected FAX numbers did match, or the destination receiver did
not return its phone number.
U05300 The password check reception or the restricted reception was interrupted because the
permitted numbers did not match, the rejected numbers did match, or the machine in
question did not acknowledge its phone number.
U14000 Memory overflowed during confidential reception. Or, in subaddress-based confidential
reception, memory overflowed.
U14100 In interoffice subaddress-based transmission, memory overflowed in the destination unit.
U19000 Memory overflowed during memory reception.
U19100 Memory overflowed in the destination unit during transmission.
U19300 Transmission failed because an error occurred during JBIG encoding.

2LL/2LJ/2LH
(2-1) U004XX error code table: Interrupted phase B

U00430 Polling request was received but interrupted because of a mismatch in permit number.
Or, subaddress-based bulletin board transmission request was received but interrupted
because of a mismatch in permit ID in the transmitting unit.
U00431 An subaddress-based bulletin board transmission was interrupted because the specified
subaddress confidential box was not registered.
U00432 An subaddress-based bulletin board transmission was interrupted because of a mis-
match in Subaddress confidential box numbers.
U00433 Subaddress-based bulletin board transmission request was received but data was not
present in the subaddress confidential box.
U00440 Subaddress-based confidential reception was interrupted because the specified subad-
dress box was not registered.
U00450 The destination transmitter disconnected because the permit IDs did not agree with
while the destination transmitter is in password-check transmission or restricted trans-
mission.
U00460 Encrypted reception was interrupted because the specified encryption box number was
not registered.
U00462 Encrypted reception was interrupted because the encryption key for the specified
encryption box was not registered.
(2-2) U006XX error code table: Problems with the unit

U00601 Document jam or the document length exceeds the maximum.
U00613 Image writing section problem
U00656 Data was not transmitted to a modem error.
U00690 System error.
(2-3) U008XX error code table: Page transmission error

U00800 A page transmission error occurred because of reception of a RTN or PIN signal.
U00811 A page transmission error reoccurred after retry of transmission in the ECM mode.
(2-4) U009XX error code table: Page reception error

U00900 An RTN or PIN signal was transmitted because of a page reception error.
U00910 A page reception error remained after retry of transmission in the ECM mode.

2LL/2LJ/2LH
(2-5) U010XX error code table: G3 transmission

U01000 An FTT signal was received for a set number of times after TCF signal transmission at
2400 bps. Or, an RTN signal was received in response to a Q signal (excluding EOP)
after transmission at 2400 bps.
U01001 Function of the unit differs from that indicated by a DIS signal.
U01016 An MCF signal was received but no DIS signal was received after transmission of an
EOM signal, and T1 timeout was detected.
U01019 No relevant signal was received after transmission of a CNC signal, and the preset num-
ber of command retransfers was exceeded (between units of our make).
U01020 No relevant signal was received after transmission of a CTC signal, and the preset num-
ber of command retransfers was exceeded (ECM).
U01021 No relevant signal was received after transmission of an EOR.Q signal, and the preset
number of command retransfers was exceeded (ECM).
U01022 No relevant signal was received after transmission of an RR signal, and the preset num-
ber of command retransfers was exceeded (ECM).
U01028 T5 time-out was detected during ECM transmission (ECM).
U01052 A DCN signal was received after transmission of an RR signal (ECM).
U01080 A PIP signal was received after transmission of a PPS.NULL signal.
U01092 During transmission in V.34 mode, communication was interrupted because of an impos-
sible combination of the symbol speed and communication speed.
U01093 A DCN or other inappropriate signal was received during phase B of transmission.
U01094 The preset number of command retransfers for DCS/NSS signals was exceeded during
phase B of transmission.
U01095 No relevant signal was received after transmission of a PPS (Q) signal during phase D of
transmission, and the preset number of command transfers was exceeded.
U01096 A DCN signal or invalid command was received during phase D of transmission.
U01097 The preset number of command retransfers was exceeded after transmission of an RR
signal or no response.

2LL/2LJ/2LH
(2-6) U011XX error code table: G3 reception

U01100 Function of the unit differs from that indicated by a DCS signal.
U01101 Function of the unit (excl. communication mode select) differs from that indicated by an
NSS signal.
U01102 A DTC (NSC) signal was received when no transmission data was in the unit.
U01110 No response after transmission of a DIS signal.
U01111 No response after transmission of a DTC (NSC) signal.
U01113 No response after transmission of an FTT signal.
U01125 No response after transmission of a CNS signal (between units of our make).
U01129 No response after transmission of an SPA signal (short protocol).
U01141 A DCN signal was received after transmission of a DTC signal.
U01143 A DCN signal was received after transmission of an FTT signal.
U01155 A DCN signal was received after transmission of an SPA signal (short protocol).
U01160 During message reception, transmission time exceeded the maximum transmission time
per line.
U01162 Reception was aborted due to a modem malfunction during message reception.
U01191 Communication was interrupted because an error occurred during an image data recep-
tion sequence in the V.34 mode.
U01193 There was no response, or a DCN signal or invalid command was received, during
phase C/D of reception.
U01194 A DCN signal was received during phase B of reception.
U01195 No message was received during phase C of reception.
U01196 Error line control was exceeded and a decoding error occurred for the message being
received.

2LL/2LJ/2LH
(2-7) U017XX error code table: V.34 transmission

U01700 A communication error occurred in phase 2 (line probing).
U01720 A communication error occurred in phase 4 (modem parameter exchange).
U01721 Operation was interrupted due to the absence of a common communication speed
between units.
U01700: A communication error that occurs at the transmitting unit in the period after transmission of INFO0
before entering phase 3 (primary channel equivalent device training). For example, INFO0/A/Abar
(B/Bbar, for polling transmission)/INFOh was not detected.
U01720: A communication error that occurs at the transmitting unit in the period after initiating the control
channel before entering the T.30 process. For example, PPh/ALT/MPh/E was not detected.
U01721: In the absence of a common communication speed between units (including when an impossible
combination of communication speed and symbol speed occurs) after MPh exchange; 1) a DCN sig-
nal was received from the destination unit, and the line was cut; or 2) a DIS (NSF, CSI) signal was
received from the destination unit and, in response to the signal, the unit transmitted a DCN signal,
and the line was cut.
(2-8) U018XX error code table: V.34 reception

U01800 A communication error occurred in phase 2 (line probing).
U01810 A communication error occurred in phase 3 (primary channel equivalent device training).
U01820 A communication error occurred in phase 4 (modem parameter exchange).
U01821 Operation was interrupted due to the absence of a common communication speed
between units.
U01800: A communication error that occurs at the receiver unit in the period after transmission of INFO0
before entering phase 3 (primary channel equivalent device training). For example, INFO0/B/Bbar
(A/Abar, for polling reception)/probing tone was not detected.
U01810: A communication error that occurs at the receiver unit in phase 3 (primary channel equivalent device
training). For example, S/Sbar/PP/TRN was not detected.
U01820: A communication error that occurs at the receiver unit in the period after initiating the control channel
before entering the T.30 process. For example, PPh/ALT/MPh/E was not detected.
U01821: In the absence of a common communication speed between units (including when an impossible
combination of communication speed and symbol speed occurs) after MPh exchange, a DCN signal
was transmitted to the destination unit and the line was cut.

2LL/2LJ/2LH
1-5-1 Precautions for assembly and disassembly

1-5 Assembly and disassembly
(1) Precautions
Before starting disassembly, press the Power key on the operation panel to off. Make sure that the Power
lamp is off before turning off the main power switch. And then unplug the power cable from the wall outlet.
When the fax kit is installed, be sure to disconnect the modular cable before starting disassembly.
When handling PWBs (printed wiring boards), do not touch parts with bare hands.
The PWBs are susceptible to static charge.
Do not touch any PWB containing ICs with bare hands or any object prone to static charge.
When removing the hook of the connector, be sure to release the hook.
Take care not to get the cables caught.
To reassemble the parts, use the original screws. If the types and the sizes of screws are not known, refer to
the PARTS LIST.
(2) Drum
Note the following when handling or storing the drum.
When removing the drum unit, never expose the drum surface to strong direct light.
Keep the drum at an ambient temperature between -20C/-4F and 40C/104F and at a relative humidity not
higher than 85% RH. Avoid abrupt changes in temperature and humidity.
Avoid exposure to any substance which is harmful to or may affect the quality of the drum.
Do not touch the drum surface with any object. Should it be touched by hands or stained with oil, clean it.
(3) Toner
Store the toner container in a cool, dark place.
Avoid direct light and high humidity.

///-/+
(4) How to tell a genuine 2OLYHWWL toner container
As a means of brand protection, the Olivetti toner container utilizes an optical security technology to
enable visual validation. A validation viewer is required to accomplish this.
Hold the validation viewer over the left side part of the brand protection seal on the toner container. Through
each window of the validation viewer, the left side part of the seal should be seen as follows:
A black-colored band when seen through the left side window ( )

A shiny or gold-colored band when seen through the right side window ( )
The above will reveal that the toner container is a genuine Olivetti branded toner container, otherwise, it
is a counterfeit.
See through the left window See through the right window
( marking) ( marking)
Validation viewer Validation viewer
Brand Brand
protection protection
seal seal
A black-colored band when A shiny or gold-colored band when

seen through the left side window seen through the right side window
Figure 1-5-1
The brand protection seal has an incision as shown below to prohibit reuse.
Incision
Cut
Figure 1-5-2

2LL/2LJ/2LH
1-5-2 Paper feed section

(1) Detaching and refitting the primary paper feed unit
Procedure
Remove the primary paper feed unit
1. Pull the cassette 1 and cassette 2 out
completely.
3. Open the right lower cover.
4. Remove the strap and then remove the
right lower cover.
Strap
Paper conveying
unit
Right lower cover
Figure 1-5-3

2LL/2LJ/2LH
5. Remove the rear upper cover and the Right middle

rear lower cover (see page 1-5-63). rear cover
6. Remove the screw A and then remove
the right middle rear cover.
7. Remove three screws B and then
remove the right lower rear cover.
Screw A
Right lower
rear cover
Screws B
Figure 1-5-4
8. Open the handle cover.

9. Remove three screws.
10. Unhook the hook and then remove the
right lower front cover.
Right lower
front cover
Hook
Screws
Right lower Handle cover

front cover
Screw
Figure 1-5-5

2LL/2LJ/2LH
11. Release the wire saddle.

12. Remove two connectors.
Connector
Wire saddle
Connector
Figure 1-5-6
13. Remove two screws each from primary [45ppm/55ppm] Primary paper
paper feed unit. feed unit
14. Remove the primary paper feed unit.
*: Use the specific primary paper feed unit
depending on model - 35 ppm or 45
ppm/55 ppm. Screws
Screws
Primary paper
feed unit [30ppm]
Primary paper
feed unit
Primary paper
feed unit
Figure 1-5-7

2LL/2LJ/2LH-1
15. Check or replace the primary paper [45ppm/55ppm] Driving

feed unit and refit all the removed parts. coupler
*: When refit the primary paper feed unit, Pin
you must confirm the inserted pin to the
driving coupler. Pin
*: For 45ppm/55ppm model, you must Driving coupler
install the primary paper feed unit while
pushing the retard release lever of the Primary paper
lower side, when the primary paper feed unit
feed unit is refitted.
[35ppm]
16. When the primary paper feed unit is Pin
replaced, perform maintenance mode
U903 (clearing the jam counter) (see
page 1-3-162). Driving coupler
Primary paper
feed unit
Primary paper
feed unit
Primary paper
feed unit
Retard release lever
Primary paper
feed unit (lower side)
[45ppm/55ppm]
Figure 1-5-8

2LL/2LJ/2LH
(2) Detaching and refitting the forwarding pulley, paper feed pulley and separation
pulley. [35 ppm model]
Procedure
1. Remove the primary paper feed unit
(see page 1-5-3).
Detaching the forwarding pulley and paper

Stop ring
feed pulley
2. Remove four stop rings.
Stop rings
Stop ring
Primary paper
feed unit
Figure 1-5-9
3. Slide the paper feed pulley shaft. Forwarding pulley Spring

4. Remove the joint and three bushes. holder assembly
5. Remove the spring and forwarding pul-
ley holder assembly.
Bush
Bush
Joint
Bush
Paper feed pulley shaft
Figure 1-5-10

2LL/2LJ/2LH
6. Pull the primary paper feed shaft out

from the forwarding pulley holder. Paper feed pulley Paper feed pulley
7. Remove the feed gear Z30H OW and
paper feed pulley. Feed gear Feed gear
Z30H OW Z30H OW
*: To refit the feed gear Z30H OW, be sure
to correctly align it with the paper feed
pulley, so that the on-way clutches meet
each other.
Oneway
clutch
Primary paper feed shaft
Forwarding
pulley holder
Figure 1-5-11
8. Pull the forwarding pulley from the axis Forwarding pulley

hole of forwarding pulley holder.
Gear
Axis hole
Axis hole
Forwarding pulley holder
Figure 1-5-12

2LL/2LJ/2LH-1
Detaching the separation pulley

9. Remove the spring.
10. Remove the retard holder from the pri-
mary lower plate.
Spring
Hole
Hole
Primary lower plate
Retard holder
Figure 1-5-13
11. Remove the separation pulley from the Separation pulley

retard holder.
12. Clean or replace the forwarding pulley,
paper feed pulley and separation pulley.
13. Refit the forwarding pulley, paper feed
pulley and separation pulley to the pri-
mary paper feed unit.
14. When the forwarding pulley, paper feed
pulley or separation pulley is replaced,
Axis hole
perform maintenance mode U903
(clearing the jam counter) (see page 1-
3-162).
Retard holder
Axis hole
Figure 1-5-14

2LL/2LJ/2LH-1
(3) Detaching and refitting the forwarding pulley, paper feed pulley and separation
pulley. [45 ppm model / 55 ppm model]
Procedure
1. Remove the primary paper feed unit Paper feed pulley
(see page 1-5-3). Feed gear
2. Remove the stop ring A and then Z30R OW Oneway clutch
remove the one way clutch and the
paper feed pulley. Stop ring A
3. Remove the stop ring B and then
remove the forwarding pulley.
Primary paper
feed unit Forwarding pulley
Stop ring B
Pickup gear
Z30R
Figure 1-5-15
4. Remove the stop ring. Torque limiter

5. Remove the separation pulley while Separation pulley
pushing the retard release lever.
6. Clean or replace the forwarding pulley, Stop ring
7. Refit the forwarding pulley, paper feed
pulley and separation pulley to the pri-
mary paper feed unit.
8. When the forwarding pulley, paper feed
pulley or separation pulley is replaced,
perform maintenance mode U903 Retard
(clearing the jam counter) (see page 1- release lever
3-162).
Figure 1-5-16

2LL/2LJ/2LH
(4) Detaching and refitting the MP tray paper feed unit
Procedure
2. Open the MP tray.
3. Remove four screws. Screw
Screw
Paper conveying
unit MP tray
Figure 1-5-17
4. Unhook eight hooks and then remove Right cover

the right cover and DU cover assembly.
Hooks
Hook
Hooks
DU cover
assembly Right cover
Figure 1-5-18

2LL/2LJ/2LH
5. Remove two connectors.

6. Release the wire saddle. Connector
7. Remove the wire saddle.
*: To refit the wire saddle, be sure to fit in
the positioning hole that was previously
used.
Wire
saddle
Connector
Installation
hole
Wire
saddle
Figure 1-5-19
8. Remove the MP tray.

*: When refitting the MP tray, insert it in
the MP tray paper feed unit side by
turning the lift arm.
MP tray
Lift arm
MP tray paper feed unit MP tray
Figure 1-5-20

2LL/2LJ/2LH

10. Remove the MP tray paper feed unit.
Screw
MP tray
paper feed unit
Screw
MP tray
paper feed unit
Figure 1-5-21

2LL/2LJ/2LH
(5) Detaching and refitting the MP forwarding pulley, MP paper feed pulley and MP
separation pulley
Procedure
DU lower guide
1. Remove the MP tray paper feed unit
(see page 1-5-11).
Detaching forwarding pulley and paper feed

pulley
2. Unhook three hooks and then remove Hooks
the Du lower guide.
*: Remove the DU lower guide easy by
bending the top base that the hook is
hooking because the hook of the DU Hook
lower guide lacks flexibility.
MP tray
paper feed unit
Top base
Figure 1-5-22
3. Remove the stop ring A and then slide

Driving joint Stop ring A
the driving joint.
4. Slide the bush A.
5. Remove the stop ring B and then Bush A
remove the bush B.
Bush B
Stop ring B
Figure 1-5-23

2LL/2LJ/2LH
6. Unhook the hook of the feed holder Spring

assembly.
7. Remove the spring and the feed holder Hook
assembly from the top base.
Feed holder assembly
Top base
Top base
Spring
Hook
Figure 1-5-24
Oneway gear MP paper feed pulley

8. Remove two stop rings.
Z30R
9. Pull the feed MPF shaft out. Oneway gear Stop ring
10. Remove two bushes, one way gear Z30R
Z30R and MP paper feed pulley.
*: To refit the one-way gear Z30R, mount
the gear in the correct direction as
shown.
Oneway
clutch Bush
Bush
Stop ring
Feed MFP shaft

2LL/2LJ/2LH
Figure 1-5-25
11. Remove the pickup MPF shaft from the Pickup MFP shaft
axis holes of feed MPF holder.
12. Pull the pickup gear Z30R and MP for- MP forwarding pulley
warding pulley out from the pickup MFP
shaft. Pickup gear Z30R
Feed gear Z26H
Axis hole
Feed MPF holder

Axis hole
Figure 1-5-26
Detaching the MP separation pulley

middle guide.
Hook
Hook
Middle guide
Figure 1-5-27

2LL/2LJ/2LH
14. Remove the spring.

15. Release the uniting of joint by sliding
the retard holder assembly.
Joint
Retard holder
assembly
Spring
Figure 1-5-28
16. Remove the retard holder assembly by

turning it as shown.
Retard holder
assembly
Figure 1-5-29

2LL/2LJ/2LH
17. Remove two stop rings. Retard MPF shaft

18. Remove two bushes.
19. Pull the retard MPF shaft out and then
remove the torque limiter and the MP Torque limiter
separation pulley. MP separation
20. Clean or replace the MP forwarding pul- pulley
ley, MP paper feed pulley and MP sepa-
ration pulley.
21. Refit the MP forwarding pulley, MP
paper feed pulley and MP separation Bush
pulley to the MP tray paper feed unit.
22. When the MP forwarding pulley, MP
paper feed pulley or MP separation pul-
ley is replaced, perform maintenance
mode U903 (clearing the jam counter)
(see page 1-3-162). Stop ring
Retard holder
Bush
Stop ring
Figure 1-5-30

2LL/2LJ/2LH
1-5-3 Optical section

(1) Detaching and refitting the exposure lamp
Notes on handling the LED mount assembly

Do not touch the diffusion seat and the light guid-
LED mount assembly Diffusion seat
ing plate.
Light guiding
Use air blow when you clean the diffusion seat,
plate
the light guiding plate, and reflector.
Do not clean it using a cleaning cloth that
Reflector
adheres the fiber easily.
LED lamp
PWB
White LED
Diffusion seat
Figure 1-5-31
Procedure
1. Remove the original cover or the docu- ISU front cover
ment processor. ISU right cover
Screws
2. Remove two screws and then remove Screws
the ISU front cover.
3. Remove two screws and then remove
the ISU right cover.
Figure 1-5-32

2LL/2LJ/2LH
4. Remove two screws and then remove Screw ISU rear cover
the ISU rear cover.
Screw
Figure 1-5-33
Platen
5. Remove the platen.
6. Peels two films off.
Film Film
Film Film
Figure 1-5-34

2LL/2LJ/2LH
7. Move the LED mount assembly to the LED mount assembly

Cutting lack part
cutting lack part.
8. Unhook the hook and remove the FFC
cover from LED mount assembly.
9. Remove the FFC from the FFC connec-
tor.
10. Unhook two hooks and remove the FFC
guide from the LED mount assembly.
Cutting lack part
FFC cover
Hook
Hook
FFC
FFC connector
LED mount assembly

FFC guide Hook
Figure 1-5-35
11. Remove two screws and then remove Screw

the LED mount assembly.
12. Check or replace the LED mount
assembly and refit all the removed
parts. LED mount assembly
*: When cleaning the reflector, the light Screw

guiding plate and the diffusion sheet of
the LED mount assembly, clean it by air
blow. Not to leave the hair dust.
13. When the LED mount assembly is

replaced, perform maintenance mode
U411 (Adjusting the scanner automati-
cally) (see page 1-3-139).
Figure 1-5-36

2LL/2LJ/2LH-3
(2) Detaching and refitting the scanner wires
NOTE
When fitting the wires, be sure to use those specified below.
Machine front: (P/N: $9*5<), black
Machine rear: (P/N: $9*5&), gray
Fitting requires the following tools

Two frame securing tools (P/N $9*5;)
Two scanner wire stoppers (P/N 1)
Procedure
1. Remove the exposure lamp Mirror 1 frame Cutting lack part

(see page 1-5-19).
2. Remove each screw and then remove
front and rear wire holder plates from
mirror 1 frame.
3. Remove the mirror 1 frame.
Cutting
lack part
Rear wire holder plate

Front wire holder plate
Screw
Screw
Mirror 1 frame
Mirror 1 frame
Figure 1-5-37

2LL/2LJ/2LH-3
4. Remove the round terminals from the

Round terminal
scanner wire springs on scanner unit Round terminal
left side.
5. Remove the scanner wire.
Red-marked
Red-marked
Scanner wire
spring
Scanner wire
spring
Figure 1-5-38
Fitting the scanner wires

6. Move the mirror 2 frame as shown in Frame securing tool
the figure and insert two frame securing
tools into the positioning holes at the
front and rear of the machine center to
fix the mirror 2 frame in position.
Frame securing tool
Mirror 2 frame
Figure 1-5-39

2LL/2LJ/2LH-3
7. Hook the round terminals (Non-red-marked) onto the catches inside of the scanner unit........ (1)
8. Loop the scanner wires around the outer grooves in the pulleys on the mirror 2 frame,
winding from below to above. ................................................................................................... (2)
9. Loop the scanner wire around the groove in the scanner wire pulley at the scanner unit right,
winding from above to below..................................................................................................... (3)
10. Wind the scanner wires around the scanner wire drum five turns from the rear toward the hole
in the drum. ............................................................................................................................... (4)
11. Insert the locating ball on the scanner wire into the hole in the scanner wire drum.................. (5)
12. Wind the scanner wires three turns from the inner toward the hole in the drum....................... (6)
13. Install the scanner wire stoppers to the scanner wire drum to fix the wires. ............................. (7)
14. Loop the scanner wire around the groove in the scanner wire pulley at the scanner unit left,
15. Loop the scanner wires around the inner grooves in the pulleys on the mirror 2 frame,
16. Hook the scanner wires around the pulleys at the machine left................................................ (10)
17. Hook the round terminal (Red-marked) onto the scanner wire spring. ..................................... (11)
Five turns from Five turns from

the rear toward the rear toward
Locating ball
Three turns from Three turns from

the inner toward the inner toward
Figure 1-5-40

2LL/2LJ/2LH-3
18. Remove the two scanner wire stoppers

and frame securing tools.
19. Focusing on the locating ball of the wire
drum, move aside the wires to inside.
20. Move the mirror 2 frame from side to
side to correctly locate the wires in posi-
tion.
21. Refit the mirror 1 frame.
22. Move the mirror 1 and 2 frames to the
machine left, and insert the two frame
securing tools into the positioning holes
at the front and rear of the scanner unit
to secure the frames in position. Front wire holder plate Rear wire holder plate
23. Hold the wires and fix each front and Frame securing tool
Frame securing tool
rear wire holder plate to mirror 1 frame Screw Screw
with the screw.
24. Remove the two frame securing tools.
25. Refit the exposure lamp.
Mirror 2 frame
Mirror 1 frame
Mirror 1 frame
Mirror 2 frame
Figure 1-5-41

2LL/2LJ/2LH-1
(3) Detaching and refitting the ISU
Procedure
Detaching the ISU
1. Worn the electrostatic prevention band Screws
Screw
for the destruction prevention of the
CCD board by static electricity. Lens cover
2. Remove the platen (see page 1-5-19).
3. Remove six screws and then remove Screw
the lens cover.
CCD PWB
Figure 1-5-42
4. Remove the connector.

tor with a lock.
*: When removing the FFC from the FFC
connector with a lock, remove it after FFC connector
FFC with a lock
release the lock by lifting the lock lever
up (see page 1-5-48).
Connector
Figure 1-5-43

2LL/2LJ/2LH-3
6. Remove four screws and then remove

the ISU.
Screw Screw
6 8
4
24
2468
13579
9
5 7
1 3
Screw
Screw
ISU
Figure 1-5-44
Refitting the ISU
1. Install the FFT.

*: The FFT should be inserted while hold-
ing the position (A) shown in the illustra-
tion (A).
1
A
Figure 1-5-45

2LL/2LJ/2LH-3
Refitting the ISU

2. Decide the fix position of ISU by the fol-
lowing.
The right and left of machine:
Verify the number prefixed by a (a)
mark.
Match the line (c) of ISU to the position- 4
6 8
ing line (b) of same number on frame c Lens
24
side. 2468
The rear and front of machine: b
13579 a
Match the edge (e) of ISU to the posi-
9
5 7
tioning line (d) on frame side.
3. Fix the ISU as before with four screws.
3
4. Refit all the removed parts.
1
5. When replacing the new ISU, performs
maintenance mode U411 (Adjusting the
scanner automatically) e
(see page 1-3-139).
d
ISU
Figure 1-5-46
Refitting the ISU

a
4. Check the image
After replacing the CCD unit, check the
copy image. According to the condition,
execute the procedures below.
1. In case of no problem on the image, go

to 9.Image Adjustment
2. In case a part of the image is whitish
from the leading edge or the back-
ground image appears like the illustra-
tion a, go to 5. The CCD unit Height
Adjustment 1 . b
3. In case white vertical lines appear on
the image like the illustration b, go to
7. The CCD unit Height Adjustment 2.
*: The CCD unit height adjustment is nec-
essary for above 2 and 3 because an
optical axis shifts and the light path is
not secured.
Figure 1-5-47

2LL/2LJ/2LH-3
5. The CCD unit Height Adjustment 1

In case a part of the image is whitish from the leading edge or the background image appears like the
illustration a .
The replacement ISU comes complete with a ISU(CCD unit)

large spacer (B) and a small spacer (C). A
B C
Spacer (large) Spacer (small)
Figure 1-5-48
1. Set the spacer (large) (B) into the out-

side screw holes at the CCD sensor
side.
2. Check the image.
B
3. In case of no problem on the image, go
to 9. Image Adjustment.
4. In case of the problem on the image, go
to 6. Re-adjustment 1.
Figure 1-5-49
6. Re-adjustment 1
c
1. In case the whitish or background
image still appears.
c: Insert the additional spacer (small) ( C)
2. In case the white vertical lines appear. C
d: Remove the spacer (large) (B) and insert the B
spacer (small) (C).
Check the image and go to 9. Image Adjust-

ment.
Figure 1-5-50

2LL/2LJ/2LH-3
7. The CCD unit Height Adjustment 2

In case of white vertical lines appear like the illustration b on page 1.
1. Set the spacer (large)(B) into the inside

screw holes at the lens side.
2. Check the image.
Figure 1-5-51
8. Re-adjustment 2
c
1. In case the white vertical lines still
appear.
c:Insert the additional spacer (small) (C)
In case the whitish or background C
B
image appears.
d:Remove the spacer (large) (B) and
insert the spacer (small) (C).
2. Check the image and go to 9. Image
Adjustment.
Figure 1-5-52
9. Image Adjustment
Execute the U411 Auto Adjustment (see page 1-3-139).
Set a new auto adjustment chart (part no. $9*5%) on the contact glass.
Execute the U411- Target Auto Table (chart1) - ALL.

2LL/2LJ/2LH-1
(4) Detaching and refitting the LSU
Procedure
1. Remove the inner unit (see page 1-5- Inner cover
33).
3. Remove the inner cover by releasing
the hook through the round access.
Round
access
Screws
Hook
Figure 1-5-53
4. Remove two fixed screws of the con-

tainer guide.
5. Pull the container guide out and remove
the guide.
Container guide
Container
guide
Screw Screw
Figure 1-5-54

2LL/2LJ/2LH

tor with a lock (YC4) of the LSU relay 5-pin relay connector
PWB.
connector with a lock, remove it after
release the lock by lifting the lock lever
up.
7. Remove 5-pin relay connector at rear
side of the LSU. FFC
LSU relay PWB

FFC connector (YC4)
Figure 1-5-55
8. Remove four screws (A to D) and then Screw B

Screw C
remove the LSU.
9. Check or replace the LSU and refit all
the removed parts. LSU
*: To re-mount the LSU, secure the
screws in the order of A B C- D.
Screw D
10. When replacing the new LSU, proceed

as follows:
1)Performs maintenance mode U930
(checking/clearing the charger roller
count) and checking the counter Screw A
value (see page 1-3-173).
(Setting the drum) (see page 1-3-73).
(checking/clearing the charger roller
count) and checking the counter
value (see page 1-3-173).
(Calibration) (see page 1-3-154).
(Adjusting the uneven density) (see
page 1-3-146).
Figure 1-5-56
(Adjusting the halftone automatically)
(see page 1-3-138).

2LL/2LJ/2LH-1
1-5-4 Image formation section

(1) Detaching and refitting the inner unit
Procedure
2. Remove toner container.
3. Remove the waste toner box tray by lift-
ing upwards and from the right side.
Waste toner
box tray
Figure 1-5-57
4. Remove the screw and then open the

connector cover. Connector
5. Release the wire saddle. cover
Screw
Connector
cover
Wire saddle
Connector
Figure 1-5-58

2LL/2LJ/2LH-1
7. Remove four fixed screws of inner unit.
Inner unit
Inner unit Screw
Screws
Screw
Figure 1-5-59
Toner
8. Remove the inner unit.
replenishment shutter
9. Release the lock by pushing the fixed
levers at the right and left of inner unit.
10. Close the toner replenishment shutter
of inner unit.
Inner unit
Fixed lever
Fixed lever
Fixed lever
Figure 1-5-60

2LL/2LJ/2LH
(2) Detaching and refitting the developer unit
Procedure
1. Remove the inner unit (see page 1-5-
33).
2. Close the toner supply shutter.
4. Turn down the DLP rail lever.
Toner supply
shutter Developer unit
Connector
DLP rail lever
Figure 1-5-61
5. Release the lock lever at lower side of

the developer unit and then pull out the
developer unit.
6. Check or replace the developer unit and
refit all the removed parts.
Developer unit
7. When replacing the new developer unit,
proceed as follows:
1) Performs maintenance mode U140
(AC calibration) for 45 ppm/55 ppm
model only (see page 1-3-80).
(Calibration) (see page 1-3-154). Developer unit
(see page 1-3-138).
Lock
lever
Figure 1-5-62

2LL/2LJ/2LH-2
(3) Detaching and refitting the drum unit
Procedure
33).
2. Remove the developer unit (see page
1-5-35).
5. Remove the screw.
Drum unit
Connector
Screw
Drum unit
Figure 1-5-63

2LL/2LJ/2LH-1
6. Pull out the drum unit.

7. Check or replace the drum unit and refit
all the removed parts.
Drum unit
Figure 1-5-64
8. When replacing the new drum unit, pro-
ceed as follows:
(drum setup) (see page 1-3-73).
(AC calibration) for 55 ppm model
only (see page 1-3-80).
(Adjusting the uneven density) (see
page 1-3-146).
(see page 1-3-138).

2LL/2LJ/2LH
(4) Detaching and refitting the charger roller unit
Procedure
33).
2. Pull out the charger roller unit by pick-
ing and releasing the MC lock lever.
3. Check or replace the charger roller unit
and refit all the removed parts.
*: When refitting the charger roller unit,

that must hook the hook certain by
operating the MC lock lever after insert-
ing the charger roller unit until bumping.
4. When replacing the new charger roller

unit, proceed as follows:
Performs maintenance mode U930
(clearing the charger roller count) (see
page 1-3-173).
MC lock lever
Hook
Charger roller unit
Charger roller unit
Figure 1-5-65

2LL/2LJ/2LH-1
1-5-5 Transfer section

(1) Detaching and refitting the paper conveying unit
Procedure
Paper conveying unit
3. Unhook three hooks and then remove Right front cover
the right front cover.
Screw
Hook
Hook
Hook
Right front Screws

cover
Figure 1-5-66

conveying inner cover from the paper
conveying unit. Paper
conveying unit
Hook
Hook
Conveying inner cover
Figure 1-5-67

2LL/2LJ/2LH
5. Remove four screws.

6. Remove the paper conveying unit by Paper conveying unit
lifting upward.
Screws Screws
Figure 1-5-68

2LL/2LJ/2LH
(2) Detaching and refitting the transfer belt unit
Procedure
2. Remove three screws and then remove Paper
the conveying rear middle cover. conveying unit
Screw
Connector
Screw
Screw
Conveying rear
middle cover
Figure 1-5-69
4. Unhook the two hooks by the tip of a

screwdriver though the hole and then
remove the front and rear transfer hold-
ers.
Hook Hook
Hole Hole
Screw Screw
Hook Hook
Hole Hole
Rear transfer holder Front transfer holder
Figure 1-5-70

2LL/2LJ/2LH
5. Remove the transfer belt unit.

6. Check or replace the transfer belt unit
Transfer belt unit
*: When refitting the transfer belt unit,
observe the precautions in the follow-
ing:
Insert the protrusion at the bottom of
the transfer belt unit into the square Protrusion
hole on the conveying base.
Tension
spring
7. When replacing the new transfer belt
unit, proceed as follows:
(clearing the transfer counter) (see
page 1-3-74).
Square
3)Performs maintenance mode U410 hole
(see page 1-3-138).
Tension
spring
Conveying base
Figure 1-5-71

2LL/2LJ/2LH-3
(3) Clean the conveying section

Procedure
Cleaning cloth
Conveying Guide
1. Pull out cassette 1 and remove the
cloth from the cleaning cloth compart-
ment.
2. Wipe off the dirt on both sides of the
conveying guide.
*: Wipe the conveying guide with the dry

accessory cloth. Do not use water,soap
or solvents for cleaning.Do not touch
the photoconductor drum.
Figure 1-5-72
Separator
Cleaning brush
1. Pull out cassette 1 and remove the
cleaning brush (blue colored).
2. As shown in the figure, clean dirt from
the separator by moving the brush from Cassette 1
side to side along the separator.
Separator
Figure 1-5-73

2LL/2LJ/2LH-1
Right regist cleaner

1. Remove the transfer belt unit.
2. Clean the regist cleaner R.
Regist cleaner R
Right registration roller
Figure 1-5-74
Left regist cleaner

1. Remove the developer unit.
(see page 1-5-35). Regist cleaner L
2. Remove the drum unit.
(see page 1-5-36).
3. Clean the cleaner unit by pulling out the
regist cleaner L.
Figure 1-5-75

2LL/2LJ/2LH-1
1-5-6 Fuser section

(1) Detaching and refitting the fuser unit
Procedure
1. Pull out the paper conveying unit.
2. Remove the screw and then the fuser
wire cover.
3. Remove two connectors
Connector Connector
Fuser wire cover
Screw
Figure 1-5-76

2LL/2LJ/2LH
4. Remove two screws (M4 12) and then

remove the fuser unit.
5. Check or replace the fuser unit and refit
Fuser unit
Screw
6. When replacing the new fuser unit, pro- (M4x12)
ceed as follows:
(clearing the fuser count) (see page
1-3-90).
(see page 1-3-138).
Screw
(M4x12)
Figure 1-5-77

2LL/2LJ/2LH
1-5-7 PWBs
(1) Detaching and refitting the main PWB
Procedure
1. Remove the rear upper cover (see page
1-5-63).
4. Unhook six hooks and then remove the
left upper cover.
Left upper
cover
Controller lid Screws
Hooks
Hook
Left upper
cover
Hooks
Figure 1-5-78
5. Release seven wire saddles on the con- Wire holder

troller box. Wire Wire saddles
6. Remove the wire holder. saddles
Controller box
Wire
saddle
Wire
saddle
Figure 1-5-79

2LL/2LJ/2LH-1
7. 1-5-48Remove the connector from the

DP relay PWB, Connector
DP relay PWB
connected to the main PWB from the
outside of the control box.
YC25
YC11
YC30
YC24
YC17 (BK)
Controller box
YC21 (WH)
Main PWB
YC12 YC12
YC25 YC17 YC21

YC30
connector with a lock, remove the FFC
lever
(see figure a and b).
*: When connecting an FFC furnished
with the protrusions at both ends, YC24
address the side with a blue-colored
tape towards the locking lever, insert YC3
the FFC into the connector until the pro-
trusions are recessed, and raise the Main PWB FFC connector with a lock
lock lever to lock the FFC a [State of lock] [Lock release/FFC detaching]
(see figure c).
FFC
Lock lever Lock lever
b [State of lock] [Lock release/FFC detaching]

Lock lever
Lock lever
FFC
c [FFC connection/Lock]
Projection
Lock lever
Projection FFC

2LL/2LJ/2LH
Figure 1-5-80
9. Remove five screws.

controller box.
Controller
box Hook
Hook
Screws
Screw Screws
Figure 1-5-81

2LL/2LJ/2LH-1
Main PWB
connected to the main PWB.
YC23
YC27
YC32
YC9
YC1 [BLACK] (with a lock)
YC2 [BLUE] (with a lock)
YC23

connector with a lock, remove the FFC YC32
lever (see page 1-5-48)
YC1
BLACK
YC9
YC2
YC8
BLUE
FFC connector with a lock
Main PWB
Controller box
Figure 1-5-82

2LL/2LJ/2LH
12. Release the wire saddle. Wire holder

13. Remove two wire holders. Wire holder
14. Remove two screws. Fan mootor holder Screws
15. Remove the fan motor holder.
Controller box
Wire saddle
Figure 1-5-83

the upper controller box cover and DP Screws Main PWB
relay PWB.
17. Remove five screws from the main Screws
PWB.
Screw
Upper
controller
box cover
Screw
DP raley PWB
Main PWB
Figure 1-5-84

2LL/2LJ/2LH
18. Remove the main PWB by releasing the

projection of ground plate in the net-
work connector.
19. Check or replace the main PWB and Network connector
*: When replacing the main PWB, remove

the following devices from the main
PWB and then reattach it to the new
main PWB.(see page 1-6-4)
Projections
for ground
EEPROM (YC14) Network connector
Code DIMM (YS4)
Memory DDR (YS1)
Main PWB
*: Exchange EEPROM (YC14) and code
DIMM (YC4) by the set.
Main PWB
BK
WH
Code DIMM Memory

(YS4) DDR
YS4 (YS1)
YS1
BLACK EEPROM
YC14
BLUE
(YC14)
Figure 1-5-85

2LL/2LJ/2LH-1
(2) Detaching and refitting the engine PWB

Procedure
1. Remove the controller box (see page 1-
5-47).
2. Remove twenty one connectors of fol-
lowing from the engine PWB.
YC1
YC2
Engine PWB
YC7
YC13
YC26
YC9 FFC connector with a lock
YC8
YC13
YC5 YC4 YC1
YC15
YC2
YC16 YC27
YC6
YC18
YC17
YC19
YC26
YC20
YC22
YC7
YC45

YC8
lever (see page 1-5-48)

YC9
*: When removing the FFC from the YC-

46 remove the FFC after released by
YC45
lifting up the lock lever.

*: When connecting an FFC furnished
YC22
with the protrusions at both ends,

address the side with a blue-colored
tape towards the locking lever, insert
YC49
the FFC into the connector until the pro-

trusions are recessed, and raise the
YC20
lock lever to lock the FFC(see page 1-5-

YC46
48).
YC19
YC17
YC11 YC15 YC16

YC18
Engine PWB
Figure 1-5-86

2LL/2LJ/2LH-1
3. Remove six screws.

4. Unhook hook and board support and
then remove the engine PWB. Board
5. Check or replace the engine PWB and Hook support
Engine Engine
PWB PWB
*: When replacing the engine PWB,
remove the EEPROM (U100) from the
engine PWB and then reattach it to the
new engine PWB.
Screws
Screws
Screws Engine PWB
Engine PWB
U100
EEPROM
(U100)
Figure 1-5-87

2LL/2LJ/2LH-1
(3) Detaching and refitting the power source PWB
Procedure
1. Remove the rear lower cover (see page Connector
1-5-63).
3. Release two wire saddles.
Wire saddles
Figure 1-5-88
Wire saddles
4. Release six wire saddles.
5. Remove the following nine connectors Power source
and three tabs from the power source assembly
PWB.
YC1 Wire saddles
YC3
TB1
TB2
TB3
YC4
YC5
22-pin relay
YC14
connector
YC11
YC9 4P-pin relay
connector
YC13
YC10
Power source PWB
6. Remove 22-pin relay connector and 4-
pin relay connector.
YC14 YC11 YC9 YC13 YC10
YC3
YC1
TB3
TB1 TB2
YC4 YC6
YC5
Power source PWB
Figure 1-5-89

2LL/2LJ/2LH-2

8. Remove the toner box.
Screw
Screw Toner box
Figure 1-5-90

10. Remove the power source assembly.
Screw
Screw
Power source
assembly
Figure 1-5-91

2LL/2LJ/2LH
11. Remove eight screws. Board support

12. Unhook the hook of the board support Screws
and then remove the power source Screws
PWB.
13. Check or replace the power source
PWB and refit all the removed parts.
Screw
Power source PWB

Screw
Figure 1-5-92

2LL/2LJ/2LH
(4) Detaching and refitting the high voltage PWB
Procedure
1. Remove the power source PWB (see
page 1-5-55).
2. Remove five connectors and four tabs
from high voltage PWB.
High voltage PWB
Tab
Tab
Tab
High voltage PWB
Connector
Tab
Connector
Connector
Connector
Connector
Figure 1-5-93

4. Unhook two hooks of PWB spacer and
then remove the high voltage PWB.
5. Check or replace the high voltage PWB
Screws
PWB spacers
Screws
High voltage PWB
Figure 1-5-94

2LL/2LJ/2LH
(5) Detaching and refitting the operation PWB
Procedure
2. Remove the screw from the right upper Right upper cover
cover.
Paper
conveying
unit
Screw
Figure 1-5-95

4. Remove the screw and then remove the
fan cover.
5. Unhook three hooks and then remove
Hooks
the front upper right cover.
Front right
upper cover
Fan cover
Screw
Figure 1-5-96

2LL/2LJ/2LH
6. Remove the screw and then remove the Screw

operation panel cover.
Operation panel cover
Operation panel cover
Figure 1-5-97

the USB wire (connector).
Screws
USB wire
(connector)
Figure 1-5-98

2LL/2LJ/2LH
Screws
Screws
Figure 1-5-99
9. Pull the operation panel unit upward. Operation panel unit

11. Remove four connectors from the oper-
ation PWB.
12. Remove the wire holder.
13. Remove the operation panel unit.
Operation PWB
Connectors
Connector
Operation
panel unit
Wire
Connector saddles
Wire holder
Figure 1-5-100

2LL/2LJ/2LH
14. Remove four connectors and two FFC

from the operation PWB.
*: When removing the FFC from the FFC FFC

connector with a lock, remove the FFC Operation PWB
after released by lifting up the lock lever FFC connector
(see page 1-5-48). with a lock
Connectors
FFC
Connectors
Figure 1-5-101

the operation PWB.
Screws Operation PWB
16. Check or replace the operation PWB
Screw
Screw
Figure 1-5-102

2LL/2LJ/2LH
(6) Detaching and refitting the fuser heater PWB
Procedure
1. Remove seven screws and then
remove the rear upper cover. Rear upper
cover
Screws
Screws
Screws
Screw
Figure 1-5-103
2. Remove nine screws.

3. Release two hanging parts and then
remove the rear lower cover.
4. Remove the fuser unit (see page 1-5-
45).
Screw
Screw
Screws
Rear lower
cover
Screws
Figure 1-5-104

2LL/2LJ/2LH

ISU right Screws
the ISU right cover. cover
6. Remove the screw and five hooks and
Right upper cover
then remove the right upper cover.
Screw
Right
upper cover
Hooks
Hook
Hook
Figure 1-5-105
7. Remove the screw.

Right middle
rear cover
right middle rear cover.
Screw
Figure 1-5-106

2LL/2LJ/2LH
9. Remove four screws and the remove

the fuser heater PWB cover.
Fuser heater
PWB cover
Screw
Screws
Screw
Figure 1-5-107

11. Remove the connector from the fuser
heater PWB.
Fuser heater PWB
Connector
Wire saddles
Figure 1-5-108

2LL/2LJ/2LH
12. Remove two wire holders.

13. Remove the connector (YC27) from
feed PWB 1.
Connector
(YC27)
Feed PWB 1
Wire holder
Wire holder
Figure 1-5-109
14. Remove three screws. Heater box

15. Unhook two hooks and then remove assembly
heater box assembly.
Screw
Hook
Screws
Hook
Heater box
assembly
Figure 1-5-110

2LL/2LJ/2LH
16. Remove two connectors. Connector Screws

Screw
fuser heater PWB. Screw
18. Check or replace the fuser heater PWB
Fuser
heater PWB
Connector
Heater box assembly
Figure 1-5-111

2LL/2LJ/2LH
1-5-8 Drive section

(1) Detaching and refitting the drum drive unit
Procedure
1. Remove the developer unit (see page
1-5-35).
2. Remove the drum unit (see page 1-5-
36).
3. Remove the rear upper cover and the
rear lower cover (see page 1-5-63).
4. Remove the feed PWB 1 assembly (see
page 1-5-70).
Wire
saddle
Connector
Figure 1-5-112
7. Remove three screws. Screw

Screw
8. Remove the drum drive unit.
*: Do not have a shaft part alone when
you carry drum drive unit. (Have the
housing.)
*: Put support on the tip of the shaft so Screw
that the shaft may become the horizon-
tal when you put drum drive unit on the
table etc.
(Shaft portion)
Drum drive unit

(housing portion)
Figure 1-5-113

2LL/2LJ/2LH
(2) Detaching and refitting the developer drive unit
Procedure
the developer drive unit.
5. Check or replace the developer drive
unit and refit all the removed parts.
Developer drive unit
Screws Wire saddle

Connector
Figure 1-5-114

2LL/2LJ/2LH-1
(3) Detaching and refitting the fuser drive unit and feed drive unit
Procedure
Detaching the fuser drive unit Feed PWB 1
assembly
2. Remove five wire holders of feed PWB
1 assembly.
Feed PWB 1
assembly
Wire holder
Wire
holder Wire
saddle Wire holder
Wire
holder
Wire holder
Wire saddle
Figure 1-5-115
YC19
4. Remove the following twenty two con- YC20

nectors from the feed PWB 1. YC3
YC18
YC18, YC19 Feed PWB 1

YC27 YC26
YC20, YC27
YC1
YC26, YC3
YC17, YC14
YC17
YC10, YC16
YC13, YC12
YC2
YC23, YC25 FFC connector

YC15, YC11 with a lock
YC5, YC4
YC14
YC16

YC4
YC8
YC9 YC23
YC12
YC13
YC25
after released by lifting down the lock YC9 YC8
YC11 YC5
lever (see page 1-5-48). YC15
Figure 1-5-116

2LL/2LJ/2LH

tor with a lock (YC4) on the engine
PWB.
Remove the FFC from the FFC connec- Engine
PWB
tor with a lock (YC1) on the feed PWB FFC connector
2. with a lock (YC4)

after released by lifting up the lock lever
FFC
(see page 1-5-48).
FFC connector
with a lock (YC1)
Feed PWB 2
Figure 1-5-117

Feed PWB 1 assembly
7. Remove the feed PWB 1 assembly.
Screw
Screw
Screw
Screw
Screw
Screw
Feed PWB 1 assembly
Figure 1-5-118

2LL/2LJ/2LH-1

10. Remove the fuser drive unit.
Fuser drive unit
Screw Fuser drive unit
Connector
Screw Screw
Figure 1-5-119
Detaching the feed drive unit

11. Remove three wire holders from the
feed 2 FFC guide.
Wire holder
Wire holders Feed 2

FFC guide
Figure 1-5-120

2LL/2LJ/2LH

the feed 2 FFC guide.
Feed 2
FFC guide
Screw
Screw
Screw
Feed 2
FFC guide
Screw
Figure 1-5-121
13. Remove the following five connectors

from the feed PWB 2.
YC7 Feed PWB 2
YC8
YC3
YC5
YC6
YC7
YC3
YC8
YC5
YC6
Feed PWB 2
Figure 1-5-122

2LL/2LJ/2LH-1

15. Remove the feed drive unit.
Feed drive unit
Screw Screw
Screw Screw
Screw Screw
Screw Screw
Screw Screw
Screw Screw
[35ppm] [45ppm/55ppm]
Figure 1-5-123

2LL/2LJ/2LH-1
16. Check or replace the feed drive unit and

*: Connect the connector (yellow) to the
Feed drive unit
connector of paper feed clutch 1 on
stamp [YELLOW] side as before, when
removing the connector of the paper
feed clutch as the check of the feed
drive unit etc.
Paper feed
clutch 1
Marking
[YELLOW]
Connector
Connector
(Yellow)
Paper feed clutch 2
Figure 1-5-124

2LL/2LJ/2LH
(4) Detaching and refitting the lift motor 1 and 2
Procedure
1. Remove the power source assembly
(see page 1-5-55).
2. Remove the connector each.
3. Remove two screws each.
4. Remove the lift motor 1 and 2.
5. Check or replace the lift motor and refit
Lift motor 1
Lift motor 2
Lift motor
Connector
Screws
Figure 1-5-125

2LL/2LJ/2LH-1
1-5-9 Others
(1) Detaching the eject filter
Procedure
1. Unhook the hook each and remove two
eject filter units. Eject filter unit Eject filter
2. Remove the eject filter from the eject
cover.
3. Clean or replace the eject filter and refit
the filter.
Hook
Hook
Eject cover
Figure 1-5-126

2LL/2LJ/2LH
(2) Detaching and refitting the toner filter
Procedure
1. Remove the toner filter unit while grip-
ping the levers. Toner
2. Clean or replace the toner filter unit and filter unit
refit the filter.
Levers
Toner
filter unit
Figure 1-5-127

2LL/2LJ/2LH-1
(3) Detaching and refitting the left filter
Procedure
1. Remove the left filter cover and left filter
by releasing the lever.
2. Clean or replace the left filter and refit
the filter. Lever
Left filter
Left filter cover
Figure 1-5-128

2LL/2LJ/2LH
(4) Detaching and refitting the belt filter
Procedure
1. Remove the belt filter by releasing the
lever. Lever
2. Clean or replace the belt filter and refit
the filter.
Belt filter
Figure 1-5-129

2LL/2LJ/2LH-1
(5) Detaching and refitting the LSU filter
Procedure
1. Remove the LSU filter by releasing the
lever.
2. Clean or replace the LSU filter and refit Lever
the filter.
LSU filter
Figure 1-5-130

2LL/2LJ/2LH-2
(6) Detaching and refitting the drum filter and developer filter
Procedure
2. Remove the drum filter and developer
filter by releasing the lever.
3. Clean the drum filter and developer fil-
ter and refit the filter.
Front cover
Lever
Drum filter
Developer filter Lever
Figure 1-5-131

2LL/2LJ/2LH-1
(7) Detaching and refitting the hard disk unit
Procedure
1. Perform maintenance mode U917
(backup data reading) (see page 1-3-
169).
2. Remove the rear upper cover (see page
1-5-63).
Screws
Wire saddle
Figure 1-5-132
5. Unhook two hooks and pull out the

HDD bracket a little. Hook
Hook
HDD bracket
Figure 1-5-133

2LL/2LJ/2LH-1
6. Remove two connectors from the hard

disk unit while pushing the lock lever.
Hard
disk unit
Lever
Lever
Connector
Connector
Figure 1-5-134
7. Remove four screws and then remove Screws HDD bracket

the hard disk unit from the HDD
bracket.
8. Replace the hard disk unit and refit all
the removed parts.
(HDD formatting) (see page 1-3-28).
Screws
Hard disk unit

10. Install the firmwares by the following
procedure.
Figure 1-5-135
1)Connects to the machine the USB
memory that preserved Software
LANGUAGE BR, JP (Opt Font,Opt
Msg), and the PDF1.7 resource.
The firmware is installed by switching
the main power switch to ON/OFF.
2)Connects to the machine the USB
memory that preserved WeeklyTimer,
FMU application.
Installs the firmware from the applica-
tion screen of the system menu.
(Refer to operation guide.)
(backup data writing) (see page 1-3-
169).

2LL/2LJ/2LH-1
(8) Detaching and refitting the eject unit
Procedure
1. Remove the right upper cover (see
page 1-5-64). Connector
2. Remove the fuser unit (see page 1-5-
45).
the eject unit.
5. Check or replace the eject unit and refit
Eject unit
Screw
Screw
Figure 1-5-136
Cautions on installing the eject unit

When inserting the eject unit into the device,
use care that the eject unit does not get in con-
tact with the eject guide, by keeping its actua- Eject guide
tor lifted while inserting.
Actuator
Figure 1-5-137

2LL/2LJ/2LH-1
(9) Direction of installing the principal fan motors

When detaching or refitting the fan motors, be careful of the airflow direction (intake or exhaust).
Eject front fan motor

(Rating label:inside)
Eject fan motor 2
Eject fan motor 1
Developer fan motor 2 (Rating label:inside)
(Rating label:outside)
Heater fan motor
Fuser front fan motor 1

Developer fan motor 1
Eject rear fan motor

Fuser rear fan motor

Controller fan motor

LSU fan motor

Toner fan motor

(Rating label:outside) Exhaust fan motor
Power source fan motor

Figure 1-5-138

2LL/2LJ/2LH-3
(10) Skewed paper feeding check/adjustment

At the paper feed source which a sheet of wrinkled paper has caused, check how the paper is fed askew.
Run U051 to reduce the curvature of paper at the regist roller and measure how the paper is fed askew.
1. Print a maintenance report and note the
U051 value.
2. Reduce the value by 10 for the paper
source in question.(See page -1-5-49.)
3. Press the system menu button to print a

test chart. A B
Check the skew value (balance of left and
right, B-A).
Less than 1mm: OK
1mm or more:
Correct the skew by using the paper angle
adjusting mechanism (in cassette) that modi-
fies the angle of the paper width guides.
Figure 1-5-139
Procedure
1. Unsecure the fixing screws (screw 1 to 4)
and adjust the angle of the paper width
guide by the skew feed adjustment
screw.
If the B-A is negative, rotate clockwise.
If the B-A is positive, rotate counter-clockwise.
2. Tighten the four screw.
*: Secure the screws in the order of
screws 1, 2, 3, then 4.
3. Run U051 and reset the curvature the regist roller.

2LL/2LJ/2LH-3
Screw 4
Screw 3
Paper width guide
Cassette
Paper width guide
Screw 2 Screw
If the B-A is positive, If the B-A is negative,

rotate counter-clockwise. rotate clockwise.
The skew feed

adjustment screw Paper width guide
Paper width guide
Figure 1-5-140

2LL/2LJ/2LH-2
1-6-1 Upgrading the firmware

1-6 Requirements on PWB Replacement
Follow the procedure below to upgrade the firmware of main PWB, operation PWB, engine PWB, ISC PWB,
optional language and optional devices.
Preparation
Extract the file that has the download firmware and put them in the USB flash device.
Procedure
1. Perform maintenance item U000 (main-
tenance report output) and check U019
ROM version.
panel, and after verifying the power
indicator has gone off, switch off the
main power switch.
3. Insert the USB flash device in which the
firmware has been written into a notch
hole of the machine.
4. Turn the main power switch on. Upgrad-
ing firmware starts (blinking the memory
LED).
Caution:
Never turn off the power switch or
remove the USB flash device during
upgrading. USB flash device
5. [ROM version] is displayed on the touch
panel when upgrading is complete.
6. Switch off the main power switch.
Figure 1-6-1
7. Wait for several seconds and then
remove the USB flash device from the
machine.
9. Perform maintenance item U000 (main-
tenance report output) and check that
U019 ROM version has been upgraded.

2LL/2LJ/2LH-3
Procedure for recovery of version upgrade using operation PWB

Perform the following if the panel will not be activated due to a power failure during upgrading the version:
Procedure
1. Turn the power switch on the machine off and unplug the power cable. Remove the USB flash device.
2. Set the slide switch from NORMAL to BOOT (This engages the panel to the update mode).
3. Plug the power cable to power and turn the power switch on.
When the memory indicator is lit up (in approx. 1 minute after the power switch is turned on - the recovery
firmware for the operation panel PWB has been updated.), turn the power switch off and unplug the power
cable.
* : Set the slide switch on the operation PWB from BOOT to NORMAL.For normal use, leave the switch in
NORMAL (not BOOT).The panel display is deactivated if this switch is set to BOOT.
* : The minimum parameters of the firmware required for recovery are restored (update mode for reboot-
ing).Perform the normal upgrade procedure.
1 6
12 1
5 1
1
YC3 15 YC15 40 YC4 1
12
YC2
YC1
YC10
12
YC9
1
1
4
1
YC8
YC6
1
20
1
YC11
5
9
2
YC12
1
YC13
<NORMAL> <BOOT>
YC14
4
YC5
1
1
4
1
SW1
Figure 1-6-2

2LL/2LJ/2LH-2
Emergency-UPDATE
If the device is accidentally switched off and upgrading was incomplete, upgrade becomes impossible from a
USB flash device.
In that case, retry upgrading after recovering the software by following the procedure below.
Preparation
The CF memory card must be formatted in FAT or FAT32 in advance.
Extract the main firmware to download from the file.
Rename the file which was extracted from the archive. [DL_CTRL.2LH] to [KM_EMRG.2LH]
Copy the all extracted files to the root of the CF memory.
Procedure
1. Turn the main power switch off. CF memory
2. Install the CF memory card which con-
tains the firmware onto the main PWB.
4. Rewriting of the PWB software will start
for restoration.
The memory and attention LEDs will be
blinking.
5. Only the Memory LED will be blinking
when rewriting is successful.
* : Only the Attention LED will be blinking
when rewriting is failed.
6. Turn the main power switch off.
7. Wait for several seconds and then
remove the CF memory from the main
PWB.
8. Extract the firmware to download from
the archive and copy to the root of the
USB flash device.
9. Insert the USB flash device in which the
firmware was copied into the slot on the
machine. Main PWB
10. Perform steps 4 to 7 on the previous
page.
Figure 1-6-3
12. Perform maintenance item U000 (Print
a maintenance report) to check that the
version of ROM U109 has been
upgraded.

2LL/2LJ/2LH-2
1-6-2 Remarks on main PWB replacement

When replacing the main PWB, remove the EEPROM (YC14) and code DIMM (YS4) from the main PWB that
has been removed and then reattach it to the new main PWB.
Main PWB
EEPROM
YC14
Figure 1-6-4
When refitting DIMM, check "CODE" and "FLS" marked on the PWB and refit them to the original positions.
Main PWB
YS4
CODE FLS
YS3
DIMM
Figure 1-6-5
If the code DIMM (YS4) was replaced with a service supplied part, perform the following.
1. Insert the USB flash device in which the latest firmware was copied, into the slot on the machine and turn
power on.(see page P.1-6-1)
2. Referring to the U000 maintenance report printed previously, enter the following values.
U252 Setting the destination
U265 Setting OEM purchaser code
U278 Setting the delivery date
U402 Adjusting margins of image printing
U952 Maintenance mode workflow
3. Reset machine settings.( Resets system menu settings modified at setup to their defaults.)
Main items for settings
[Date/Timer] - Date/Time settings

2LL/2LJ/2LH-2
[Date/Timer] - Timer settings (Sleep timer)

[Edit Destination] - One-touch presetting
[User/Job accounting] - Defaults for user authentication and job accounting only.
Resettings are not required as the data are stored in harddisk.
[FAX] - FAX transmittion settings (tel. no. of itself)
[System] - Network settings (IP address)
[Adjustment/Maintenance] - Silent Mode setting
4. Run the maintenance mode for image adjustments which follows.
1. Performs maintenance mode U464 (Calibration) (see page P.1-3-154).
2. Performs maintenance mode U410 (Adjusting the halftone automatically) (see page P.1-3-154).
When connecting the hard disk cables (YC1, YC2) to the PWB, match "BLACK" and "BLUE" marked on the
PWB with the connector colors.
Main PWB
YC1
BLACK
YC2
BLUE
Figure 1-6-6
When connecting the USB cables (YC17, YC21) to the PWB, match "BK" and "WH" marked on the PWB with
the connector colors.
Main PWB
WH
BK
YC17 YC21
Figure 1-6-7

2LL/2LJ/2LH
1-6-3 Remarks on engine PWB replacement

When replacing the engine PWB, remove the EEPROM (U100) from the engine PWB that has been removed
and then reattach it to the new engine PWB.
Engine PWB
EEPROM
U100
Figure 1-6-8

2LL/2LJ/2LH
2-1-1 Paper feed/conveying section

2-1 Mechanical Construction
Paper feed/conveying section consists of the paper feed unit that feeds paper from the cassette and the MP
tray paper feed unit that feeds paper from the MP tray, and the paper conveying section that conveys the fed
paper to the transfer/separation section.
(1) Cassette paper feed section

Cassette paper feed section consists of the paper holder with the cassette operation plate activated by lift
motor 1 and 2, and the pulleys, such as the forwarding pulley, the paper feed pulley and the separation pulley,
for extracting and conveying the paper. Paper is fed out of the cassette by the rotation of the forwarding pulley,
11 5 21 7
4
1 13
8
6 10
17 2 23
3 15 9
12
4 5 22
24
7
16
1 14
8
20 2 6
3 18
10
9
19
Figure 2-1-1 Cassette paper feed section
1. Cassette base 12. Paper sensor 2 (PS2) 19. Paper gauge sensor 2 (L)
2. Cassette operation plate 13. Lift sensor 1 (LS1) (PGS2(L))
3. Cassette 14. Lift sensor 2 (LS2) 20. Actuator
4. Forwarding pulleys 15. Paper gauge sensor 1 (U) (Paper gauge sensor 2)
5. Paper feed pulleys (PGS1(U)) 21. Feed sensor 1 (FS1)
6. Separation pulleys 16. Paper gauge sensor 1 (L) 22. Feed sensor 2 (FS2)
7. Assist rollers* (PGS1(L)) 23. Paper conveying sensor
8. Assist pulleys* 17. Actuator (PCS)
9. Paper conveying roller (Paper gauge sensor 1) 24. Actuator
10. Paper conveying pulley 18. Paper gauge sensor 2 (U) (Paper conveying sensor)
11. Paper sensor 1 (PS1) (PGS2(U)) *: 45 ppm/55 ppm model only

2LL/2LJ/2LH
FEED_MOT_DIR
YC2-2 6
FEED_MOT_RDY
YC2-3 5
FEED_MOT_CLK PFM
YC2-4 4
FEED_MOT_REM 3
YC2-5
ASIST_CL1
YC10-1
FEED_CL1_REM ASCL1*
YC4-1 PFCL1
CAS1_P0_SENS
YC8-11
PICK_SOL1_REM
YC8-2 FS1
PICK_SOL1_RET PUSOL1*
YC8-3
CAS1_EMPTY_SENS PS1
YC8-6
CAS1_LIFT_UP_SENS
YC8-9 LS1
YC3-13
LIFT_MOT1_RET PCCL
YC3-14
LIFT_MOT1_DR LM1
PCS
CAS1_QUANT1 PGS1(U)
YC3-19
CAS1_QUANT2 PGS1(L)
YC3-22 ASCL2*
PFCL2
CAS2_P0_SENS
YC8-23
PICK_SOL2_REM
YC8-14 FS2
PICK_SOL2_RET PUSOL2*
YC8-15
CAS2_EMPTY_SENS PS2
YC8-18
CAS2_LIFT_UP_SENS
YC8-21 LS2
LIFT_MOT2_RET
YC3-15
YC3-16
LIFT_MOT2_DR LM2
CAS2_QUANT1 PGS2(U)
YC3-25
CAS2_QUANT2 PGS2(L)
YC3-28
FEED_CL2_REM
YC4-3
ASIST_CL2
YC12-1
FEED2_SENS
YC6-3
V-FEED_CL_REM
YC5-3
FPWB2 *: 45 ppm/55 ppm model only
YC1 YC4 EPWB
Figure 2-1-2 Cassette paper feed section block diagram

2LL/2LJ/2LH
(2) MP tray paper feed section

Paper is fed out of the MP tray by the rotation of the MP forwarding pulley, MP paper feed pulley and MP sep-
aration pulley. The MP separation pulley prevents multiple sheets from being fed at one time by the torque lim-
iter.
2 7
1
12 14 5
3 4 11
6
15
10 13
Figure 2-1-3 MP tray paper feed section
1. MP forwarding pulley 10. MP paper length switch

2. MP paper feed pulley (MPPLSW)
3. MP separate pulley 11. Actuator
4. MP table (MP paper length switch)
5. MP support Tray 12. MP paper width switch
6. MP paper sensor (MPPS) (MPPWSW)
7. Actuator (MP paper sensor) 13. MP tray switch (MPTSW)
8. MP lift sensor 1 (MPLS1) 14. MP feed sensor (MPFS)
9. MP lift sensor 2 (MPLS2)

2LL/2LJ/2LH
RYPWB
MPF_LIFT_UP_SENS MPLS1
YC3-5
MPF_PPR_SET MPPS
YC3-3
MPF_CL_REM MP
YC3-13 PFCL
MPF_LIFT_DOWN_SENS MPPLSW MPTSW

YC3-8 MPLS2
MPPWSW
MPF_JAM_SENS MPFS
YC3-11
MPF_LIFT_DR_B
YC3-11
MPF_LIFT_DR_A MPLM
YC3-11
MPF_WID1
YC2-7
MPF_WID2
YC2-5
MPF_WID3
YC2-4
MPF_LNG
YC2-2
MPF_TABLE
YC2-9
YC12 YC17 YC1 YC6

FPWB1 EPWB
Figure 2-1-4 MP tray paper feed section block diagram

2LL/2LJ/2LH
(3) Paper conveying section

The paper conveying section conveys paper to the transfer/separation section as paper feeding from the cas-
sette or MP tray, or as paper refeeding for duplex printing. Paper by feeding is conveyed by the middle roller to
the position where the registration sensor (RS) is turned on, and then sent to the transfer/separation section
by the right registration roller and left registration roller.
3
5
9
8 2
Figure 2-1-5 Paper conveying section
1. Middle roller 6. Middle sensor (MS)

2. Middle pulley 7. Regist deflection sensor (RDS)
3. Left registration roller 8. Actuator
4. Right registration roller (regist deflection sensor)
5. Paper conveying pulley 9. Registration sensor (RS)

2LL/2LJ/2LH
FPWB2
REG_CL_REM
RCL YC22-2
REG_SENS
YC7-12 RS
BEND_SENS RDS
YC7-5
FFED1_SENS FPWB1
YC8-9 MS
MID_CL_REM MCL
YC7-14
FEED_MOT_DIR
YC2-2 6
FEED_MOT_RDY
YC2-3 5
FEED_MOT_CLK PFM
YC2-4 4
FEED_MOT_REM 3
YC2-5
YC1 YC4 YC5-42 YC2-9

EPWB
Figure 2-1-6 Paper conveying section block diagram (35 ppm model)

2LL/2LJ/2LH
REG_MOT_B/
FPWB2 YC25-1
REG_MOT_A/
YC25-2
RM REG_MOT_B
YC25-3
REG_MOT_A
YC25-4
REG_SENS
YC7-12 RS
BEND_SENS RDS
YC7-5
FFED1_SENS
YC8-9 MS FPWB1
MID_B/
YC7-1
MID_A/
YC7-2
YC7-3
MID_B MM
MID_A
YC7-4
FEED_MOT_DIR
YC2-2 6
FEED_MOT_RDY
YC2-3 5
FEED_MOT_CLK PFM
YC2-4 4
FEED_MOT_REM 3
YC2-5
YC1 YC4 YC5-42 YC2-9

EPWB
Figure 2-1-7 Paper conveying section block diagram (45 ppm/55 ppm model)

2LL/2LJ/2LH
2-1-2 Drum section

The drum section consists of the charger roller unit, drum and cleaning section. The drum is electrically
charged uniformly by means of a charger roller to form a latent image on the surface. The cleaning section
consists of the cleaning blade and the cleaning roller which remove residual toner from the drum surface after
transfer. The cleaning lamp (CL) consists of LEDs and removes residual charge on the drum before main
charging.
7
9
4 6
3
2
Figure 2-1-8 Drum section
1. Drum 6. Cleaning blade

2. Charger roller 7. Cleaning roller
3. Charger cleaning roller 8. Drum screw
4. Charger case 9. Cleaning lamp (CL)
5. Drum frame

YC7-2 EEP_SCL
Y113351-4
YC7-3 EEP_SDA
DRPWB
EEPROM
YC8 YC2
ERS_Bk_REM
YC7-8
CL
Main chager
high voltage
roller
FRPWB
Charger
2-1-9
EPWB
FPWB1
HVPWB
Drum unit
YC5 YC2
START
/STOP
Figure 2-1-9 Drum section block diagram

YC9-6 3
CLOCK
YC9-5 4
DRM
YC9-4 LD
5
YC9-3 CW/CCW
6
DC_MAIN_REM
YC16-9 YC2-1
2LL/2LJ/2LH
Service Manual
2LL/2LJ/2LH
2-1-3 Developer section

The developer unit consists of the sleeve roller that forms the magnetic brush, the magnet roller, the devel-
oper blade and the developer screws that agitate the toner. Also, the toner sensor (TS) checks whether or not
toner remains in the developer unit.
2
6
5
3
4 8
9
Figure 2-1-10 Developer section
1. Sleeve roller 6. Developer blade

2. Magnet roller 7. Developer case
3. Developer screw A 8. Developer cover
4. Developer screw B 9. Toner sensor (TS)
5. Developer paddle

ROT_HP_SENS
YC4-2
Y113351-4
DEVSS
FRPWB
ENCODE_Bk
YC5-11
SRS
YC8 YC2
YC7-1 TPD_TEMP
YC7-2 VCONT
unit
YC7-3 TPD_K
YC7-4 TN_CLK
TS-K
Developer
YC7-8 EEP_SDA
YC7-9 EEP_SCL
Magnet bias
2-1-11
EPWB
HVPWB
Sleeve bias
roller
START
Magnet
FPWB1
/STOP
YC8-5 3
roller
Sleeve
CLOCK
Figure 2-1-11 Developer section block diagram

YC8-4 4
LD
DEVM
YC5 YC2 YC8-3 5
YC8-2 CW/CCW
6
YC17 YC1
2LL/2LJ/2LH
Service Manual
2LL/2LJ/2LH
2-1-4 Optical section

The optical section consists of the image scanner section for scanning and the laser scanner section for print-
ing.
(1) Image scanner section

The original image is illuminated by the LED lamp and scanned by the CCD image sensor in the CCD PWB
(CCDPWB) via the three mirrors and ISU lens, the reflected light being converted to an electrical signal.
The mirror frame A and B travel to scan on the optical rails on the front and rear of the machine to scan from
side to side. The speed of the mirror frame B is half the speed of the mirror frame A.
6 12 13 4 3 11 9 15
6 2 14 5 1 7 8 10
Figure 2-1-12 Image scanner section
1. Mirror frame A 9. ISU cover

2. Mirror frame B 10. Scanner wire drum
3. LED mount 11. Contact glass
4. Scanner reflector 12. Slit glass
5. Mirror A 13. Original size indicator plate
6. Mirror B 14. Home position sensor (HPS)
7. ISU lens 15. Original detection switch
8. CCD PWB (CCDPWB) (ODSW)

2LL/2LJ/2LH
Original
LLPWB ODSW
CCDPWB
SM
Lens
CCD
image
sensor
OSS
Image HPS
YC2
scanner
unit
image data
SMOT_AN
SMOT_BN
SMOT_AP
SMOT_BP
Reading
ORG_SW
CO_SW
HP_SW
VSET
POW
SDA
SCL
YC8-3
YC6-3
YC6-4
YC6-5
YC6-9
YC9
YC5-1
YC5-2
YC5-3
YC5-4
YC13-2
YC14-3
ISCPWB
YC3
YC4
YC11
YC25
MPWB
Figure 2-1-13 Image scanner section block diagram

2LL/2LJ/2LH
(2) Laser scanner section

The charged surface of the drum is then scanned by the laser beam from the laser scanner unit. The laser
beam is dispersed as the polygon motor (PM) revolves to reflect the laser beam over the drum. Various lenses
are housed in the laser scanner unit, adjust the diameter of the laser beam, and focalize it at the drum sur-
face.
2 3
Figure 2-1-14 Laser scanner section
1. Polygon motor (PM)

2. f- lens A
3. f- lens B
4. LSU dust shield glass
5. LSU cover

2LL/2LJ/2LH
4
10
5
9
6
3 7
Figure 2-1-15 Image scanner unit
1. APC PWB (APCPWB) 6. f- lens B

2. Collimate lens 7. LSU dust shield glass
3. Cylindrical lens 8. Mirror lens
4. Polygon motor (PM) 9. PD lens
5. f- lens A 10. PD PWB (PDPWB)

2LL/2LJ/2LH
YC15-10
YC15-11
YC15-9
YC2 YC11 EPWB
START
/STOP
LOCK
CLK
LSURPWB
3 2 1
PDPWB
PM
YC3-2 BD_Bk YC1-29 YC3-2 TH

LSU_TH_Bk BD
YC3-3 YC1-28 YC3-3
LDD_CS_Bk
YC3-9 YC1-22 APC
YC3-25 DATA_1N_Bk YC1-6 PWB
DATA_1P_Bk
YC3-26 YC1-5
DATA_2N_Bk
YC3-28 YC1-3
DATA_2P_Bk YC1-2
YC3-29
Laser scanner unit
Figure 2-1-16 Laser scanner section block diagram

2LL/2LJ/2LH-1
2-1-5 Transfer/Separation section

(1) Transfer belt unit section
The transfer belt unit section consists of the transfer belt, transfer roller and the charge erasing brush. To the
transfer roller, DC bias is applied from the high voltage PWB (HVPWB). The toner image formed on the drum
is transferred to the paper by the potential difference and the paper is discharged with the discharging brush.
Also with the ID sensors (IDS), the toner density on the transfer belt is measured.
2
9
Figure 2-1-17 Transfer belt unit section
1. Transfer roller 6. Charge erasing brush

2. Idle roller 7. ID sensor (IDS)
3. Drive roller 8. Cleaning solenoid (CLSOL)
4. Transfer belt 9. Loop sensor (LPS)
5. Transfer rear guide

2LL/2LJ/2LH-1
Charge erasing SP_BELT_CNT

YC2-8 YC16-2
brush
T2_REM
Transfer bias YC2-6 YC16-4
LPS
HVPWB
Transfer roller
IDS
EPWB
CLSOL
REG_SENS_S
REG_SENS_P
ID_SOL_REM
LOOP_SENS
FPWB1
Transfer belt unit
YC2 YC5
TRM
YC-4-2
YC-10-8
YC-10-7
YC-10-1
3
4
5
6
LOOP_SENS
START/STOP
YC13-1 YC23-1
REG_SENS_P
CW/CCW
YC1-16 YC14-3
CLOCK
REG_SENS_S
YC1-17 YC14-2
LD
ID_SOL_REM
YC12-18 YC17-3
YC-6-5
YC-6-4
YC-6-3
YC-6-2
TR_MOT_REM
YC5-6 YC13-5
TR_MOT_CLK
RYPWB YC5-7 YC13-4
TR_MOT_RDY
YC5-8 YC13-3
TR_MOT_DIR
YC5-9 YC13-2
Figure 2-1-18 Transfer belt unit section block diagram

2LL/2LJ/2LH
2-1-6 Fuser section

The paper sent from the transfer/separation section is interleaved between the heat roller and the press roller.
The heat roller is heated by the fuser heater (FH), and the toner is fused by heat and pressure and fixed onto
the paper because the press roller is pressed by the fuser press spring. The surface temperature of heat roller
and press roller are detected by the fuser thermistor (FTH) and controlled by the engine PWB (EPWB).
14
12,13
4
9
3
8
2
1
10
11
Figure 2-1-19 Fuser section
1. Heat roller 8. Right fuser cover

2. Press roller 9. Left fuser guide
3. Fuser heater 1 (FH1) 10. Fuser thermistor 1 (FTH1)
4. Fuser heater 2 (FH2) 11. Fuser thermistor 2 (FTH2)
5. Separators 12. Fuser thermostat 1 (FTS1)
6. Fuser eject roller 13. Fuser thermostat 2 (FTS2)
7. Fuser eject pulley 14. Fuser eject sensor (FUES)

2LL/2LJ/2LH
YC18-2 CW/CCW 6
YC18-3 LD 5
CLOCK FUM
YC18-4 4
YC18-5 START/STOP 3 Fuser unit
FHPWB FUES
LIVE_OUT
YC1-1,2 FTS1 FTS2
SH_OUT
YC27-2 YC1-6 FH2
MH_OUT
YC27-1 YC1-4 FH1
FTH2
FSR_SIZE_SENS
FTH1
FPWB1
GUIDE_TH
EDGE_TH
YC26-B11
YC26-B15
YC26-A13
YC6 YC1
EPWB
Figure 2-1-20 Fuser section block diagram

2LL/2LJ/2LH-2
2-1-7 Eject/Feedshift section

The paper eject/feedshift section consists of the conveying path which sends the paper that has passed the
fuser section to the top tray, duplex conveying section or job separator.
5 13
14
10
11
9
7
12 2
1
8 6
Figure 2-1-21 Eject/Feed shift section
1. Middle pulley 8. Lower duplex roller

2. Eject roller 9. Lower change guide
3. Eject pulley 10. Upper change guide
4. Eject roller B 11. Eject full sensor (EFS)
5. Eject pulley B 12. Actuator (eject full sensor)
6. Upper duplex roller 13. Switchback sensor (SBS)
7. Duplex pulley 14. Actuator (switchback sensor)

2LL/2LJ/2LH
JUNC_SOL_REM
YC4-15
JUNC_SOL_RET FSSOL
YC4-16
EXIT_FEED_SENS SBS
YC4-9
EXIT_PAP_SENS EFS
YC4-12
FRPWB
SB_CORE_B/
YC4-4
SB_CORE_A/
YC4-5
YC4-6
SB_CORE_B EM
SB_CORE_A
YC4-7
YC3 YC7
EPWB
Figure 2-1-22 Eject/Feed shift section block diagram

2LL/2LJ/2LH
2-1-8 Duplex conveying section

The duplex conveying section consists of conveying path which sends the paper sent from the eject/feedshift
section to the paper feed/conveying section when duplex printing.
5 2
5
8
4
4 3
Figure 2-1-23 Duplex conveying section
1. Upper duplex roller 6. Duplex sensor 1 (DUS1)

2. Middle duplex roller 7. Actuator (duplex sensor 1)
3. Lower duplex roller 8. Duplex sensor 2 (DUS2)
4. Duplex pulleys A 9. Actuator (duplex sensor 2)
5. Duplex pulleys B

2LL/2LJ/2LH
DU_ENTER_SENS DUS1
YC23-1 YC13-12 YC11-2
DU_CL1_REM
YC23-4 YC13-9 YC11-9 DUCL1
FPWB1 RYPWB
DU_SENS DUS2
YC14-5 YC1-14 YC9-2
DU_CL2_REM
YC14-12 YC1-7 YC7-2 DUCL2
YC1
YC2
YC6
YC5
EPWB
Figure 2-1-24 Duplex conveying section block diagram (35 ppm model)

2LL/2LJ/2LH
DU_ENTER_SENS DUS1
YC23-1 YC13-12 YC11-2
DU1_B/
YC23-6 YC13-7 YC16-1
DU1_A/
YC23-7 YC13-6 YC16-2
YC23-8 YC13-5 YC16-3
DU1_B DUM1
DU1_A
YC23-9 YC13-4 YC16-4
FPWB1 RYPWB
DU_SENS DUS2
YC14-5 YC1-14 YC9-2
DU2_B/
YC14-14 YC1-5 YC7-5
DU2_A/
YC14-15 YC1-4 YC7-6
YC14-16 YC1-3 YC7-7
DU2_B DUM2
DU2_A
YC14-17 YC1-2 YC7-8
YC1
YC2
YC6
YC5
EPWB
Figure 2-1-25 Duplex conveying section block diagram (45 ppm/55 ppm model)

2LL/2LJ/2LH

2LL/2LJ/2LH-1
2-2-1 Electrical parts layout

2-2 Electrical Parts Layout
(1) PWBs
8
7 9
5
1 10
2 6
21 22
12
20
19
16 18
11 17
23
15 14
13
3
Machine front
Machine inside
Machine rear
Figure 2-2-1 PWBs
1. Main PWB (MPWB) .............................. Controls the software such as the print data processing and
provides the interface with computers.
2. Engine PWB (EPWB)............................ Controls printer hardware such as high voltage/bias output con-
trol, paper conveying system control, and fuser temperature con-
trol, etc.
3. Power source PWB (PSPWB) .............. After full-wave rectification of AC power source input, switching
for converting to 24 V DC and 12 V DC for output. Controls the
fuser Heater.
4. High voltage PWB (HVPWB) ................ Generates main charging, developer bias, transfer bias and sepa-
ration bias.
5. ISC PWB (ISCPWB) ............................. Controls the scanner section.
6. CCD PWB (CCDPWB).......................... Reads the image of originals.
7. LED lamp PWB (LLPWB) ..................... Exposes originals.
8. Operation PWB 1 (OPWB1).................. Controls touch panel and LCD indication.
9. Operation PWB 2 (OPWB2).................. Consists of the LED indicators and key switches.

2LL/2LJ/2LH
10. Operation PWB 3 (OPWB3).................. Consists of the LED indicators.

11. Front PWB (FRPWB) ............................ Consists of wiring relay circuit between engine PWB and drum
units, developer units, eject unit.
12. Feed PWB 1 (FPWB1).......................... Consists of wiring relay circuit between engine PWB and fuser
drive unit, relay PWB.
13. Feed PWB 2 (FPWB2).......................... Consists of wiring relay circuit between engine PWB and paper
conveying section, drive section.
14. Relay PWB (RPWB) ............................. Consists of wiring relay circuit between feed PWB 1 and paper
conveying unit.
15. LSU relay PWB (LSURPWB)................ Consists of wiring relay circuit between engine PWB and laser
scanner unit.
16. APC PWB (APCPWB) .......................... Generates and controls the laser beam.
17. PD PWB (PDPWB) ............................... Controls horizontal synchronizing timing of laser beam.
18. Drum PWB(DRPWB) ............................ Drum individual information in EEPROM storage.
19. Fuser heater PWB (FHPWB) ................ Controls the fuser heater.
20. RFID PWB (RFPWB) ............................ Reads the container information.
21. Interface PWB (IFPWB) ........................ Consists of wiring relay circuits between main PWB and Fax con-
trol PWB.
22. LED PWB 1 (LEDPWB1) ...................... Controls LED indication.
23. LED PWB 2 (LEDPWB2 ....................... Controls LED indication.

2LL/2LJ/2LH
List of correspondences of PWB names
No. Name used in service manual Name used in parts list

1 Main PWB (MPWB) PARTS PWB MAIN ASSY SP
2 Engine PWB (EPWB) PARTS PWB ENGINE ASSY SP
3 Power source PWB (PSPWB) PARTS UNIT LOW VOLTAGE SP
4 High voltage PWB (HVPWB) PARTS UNIT HIGH VOLTAGE MAIN SP
5 ISC PWB (ISCPWB) PARTS PWB ISC ASSY SP
6 CCD PWB (CCDPWB) -
7 LED lamp PWB (LLPWB) -
8 Operation PWB 1 (OPWB1) PARTS PWB PANEL MAIN ASSY J SP
9 Operation PWB 2 (OPWB2) PARTS PWB OPERATION ASSY SP
10 Operation PWB 3 (OPWB3) PARTS PWB OPERATION LED ASSY SP
11 Front PWB (FRPWB) PARTS PWB FRONT MONO ASSY SP
12 Feed PWB 1 (FPWB1) PARTS PWB FEED 1 ASSY SP
13 Feed PWB 2 (FPWB2) PARTS PWB FEED 2 ASSY SP
14 Relay PWB (RPWB) PARTS PWB JUNCTION ASSY SP
15 LSU relay PWB (LSURPWB) PARTS PWB LSU JUNC MONO ASSY SP
16 APC PWB (APCPWB) -
17 PD PWB (PDPWB) -
18 Drum PWB (DRPWB) -
19 Fuser heater PWB (FHPWB) PARTS PWB HEATER ASSY SP
20 RFID PWB (RFPWB) PARTS PWB RFID ASSY SP
21 Interface PWB (IFPWB) PARTS PWB KUIO ASSY SP
22 LED PWB 1 (LEDPWB1) PARTS MOUNT LED UNIT SP
23 LED PWB 2 (LEDPWB2) PARTS MOUNT LED UNIT SP

2LL/2LJ/2LH
(2) Switches and sensors
28 29
30
41
40 42
39
37
38
2 35
33
32 31 36 44
43
34 27 47 19
26 24 18 21 23
46 22
3 45
25
15 20 1
5
7 17 48
13
4
8
11 16 Machine front
6
Machine inside
14 9 49
10 Machine rear
12
Figure 2-2-2 Switches and sensors
1. Main power switch (MSW) .................... Turns ON/OFF the AC power source.
2. Front cover switch (FRCSW) ................ Detects the opening and closing of the front cover.
3. Paper sensor 1 (PS1) ........................... Detects the presence of paper (cassette 1).
4. Paper sensor 2 (PS2) ........................... Detects the presence of paper (cassette 2).
5. Lift sensor 1 (LS1)................................. Detects activation of upper limit of the bottom plate (cassette 1).
6. Lift sensor 2 (LS2)................................. Detects activation of upper limit of the bottom plate (cassette 2).
7. Paper gauge sensor 1 (U) (PGS1(U))... Detects the paper gauge (cassette 1).
8. Paper gauge sensor 1 (L) (PGS1(L)).... Detects the paper gauge (cassette 1).
9. Paper gauge sensor 2 (U) (PGS2(U))... Detects the paper gauge (cassette 2).
10. Paper gauge sensor 2 (L) (PGS2(L)).... Detects the paper gauge (cassette 2).
11. Paper length switch 1 (PLSW1) ............ Detects the length of paper (cassette 1).
12. Paper length switch 2 (PLSW2) ............ Detects the length of paper (cassette 2).
13. Paper width switch 1 (PWSW1) ............ Detects the width of paper (cassette 1).
14. Paper width switch 2 (PWSW2) ............ Detects the width of paper (cassette 2).
15. Feed sensor 1 (FS1) ............................. Detects a paper misfeed in the paper feed section (cassette 1).
16. Feed sensor 2 (FS2) ............................. Detects a paper misfeed in the paper feed section (cassette 2).
17. Paper conveying sensor (PCS)............. Detects a paper misfeed in the vertical conveying section.
18. MP paper sensor (MPPS) ..................... Detects the presence of paper (MP tray).

2LL/2LJ/2LH
19. MP lift sensor 1 (MPLS1) ...................... Detects activation of upper limit of the MP plate.
20. MP lift sensor 2 (MPLS2) ...................... Detects activation of lower limit of the MP plate.
21. MP paper length switch (MPPLSW)...... Detects the length of paper (MP tray).
22. MP paper width switch (MPPWSW)...... Detects the width of paper (MP tray).
23. MP tray switch (MPTSW)...................... Detects the MP tray extension is extend.
24. MP feed sensor (MPFS) ....................... Detects a paper misfeed in the MP paper feed section.
25. Middle sensor (MS)............................... Detects a paper misfeed in the paper conveying section.
26. Regist deflection sensor (RDS)............. Detects the deflection in the paper.
27. Registration sensor (RS)....................... Controls the secondary paper feed start timing.
28. Original size sensor (OSS) ................... Detects the size of the original.
29. Original detection switch (ODSW) ........ Detects the opening/closing of the document processor.
30. Home position sensor (HPS) ................ Detects the optical system in the home position.
31. Screw sensor (SRS) ............................. Controls the toner replenishing for the toner container.
32. Developer shutter sensor (DEVSS) ...... Detects the opening and closing of the developer shutter.
33. Toner hopper sensor (THS) .................. Detects the quantity of toner in a toner hopper.
34. Toner sensor (TS) ................................. Detects the toner density in the developer unit.
35. Loop sensor (LPS) ................................ Detects a paper misfeed. Controls the fuser motor by detecting
deflection in the paper.
36. ID sensor (IDS) ..................................... Measures image density for calibration.
37. Fuser thermistor 1 (FTH1) .................... Detects the heat roller temperature.
38. Fuser thermistor 2 (FTH2) .................... Detects the heat roller temperature.
39. Fuser eject sensor (FUES) ................... Detects a paper misfeed in the fuser section.
40. Eject full sensor (EFS) .......................... Detects a paper misfeed in the eject section. Detects when the
inner tray is full.
41. Switchback sensor (SBS) ..................... Detects a paper misfeed in the eject and switchback sections.
42. Duplex sensor 1 (DUS1) ....................... Detects a paper misfeed in the duplex section.
43. Duplex sensor 2 (DUS2) ....................... Detects a paper misfeed in the duplex section.
44. Duplex cover switch (DUCSW) ............. Detects the opening and closing of the duplex cover.
45. Waste toner sensor 1 (WTS1)............... Detects when the waste toner box is full.
46. Waste toner sensor 2 (WTS2)............... Detects when the waste toner box is near end.
47. Paper conveying unit switch
(PCUSW) .............................................. Detects the opening and closing of the paper conveying unit.
48. Paper conveying cover switch
(DUCSW) .............................................. Detects the opening and closing of the paper conveying cover.
49. Outer temperature sensor
(OTEMS)............................................... Detects the outside temperature and humidity.

2LL/2LJ/2LH
(3) Motors
16 17
11
15
9
13
12 14
6
7
10 18
1
8 4
2
Machine front
Machine inside
3 Machine rear
Figure 2-2-3 Motors
1. Paper feed motor (PFM) ....................... Drives the paper feed section.
2. Lift motor 1 (LM1).................................. Operates the bottom plate (cassette 1).
3. Lift motor 2 (LM2).................................. Operates the bottom plate (cassette 2).
4. MP lift motor (MPLM) ............................ Operates the MP plate.
5. Scanner motor (SM).............................. Drives the optical system.
6. Polygon motor (PM) .............................. Drives the polygon mirror.
7. Registration motor (RM)* ....................... Drives the registration section.
8. Middle motor (MM)* ............................... Drives the paper conveying section.
9. Drum motor (DRM) ............................... Drives the drum unit.
10. Developer motor (DEVM)...................... Drives the developer unit.
11. Toner motor (TM) .................................. Drives the toner container.
12. Toner hopper motor (THM) ................... Replenishes toner to the developer unit.
13. Inner motor (INM).................................. Drives the inner unit.
14. Transfer motor (TRM) ........................... Drives the transfer section.
15. Fuser motor (FUM) ............................... Drives the fuser section.
16. Eject motor (EM) ................................... Drives the eject section.
17. Duplex motor 1 (DUM1)* ....................... Drives the duplex section.
18. Duplex motor 2 (DUM2)* ....................... Drives the duplex section.

2LL/2LJ/2LH
*: 45 ppm model /55 ppm model only.

2LL/2LJ/2LH
(4) Fan motors
8 10,11
14
7
6
1
4
2
12
5
Machine front
13 Machine inside
Machine rear
Figure 2-2-4 Motors
1. Toner fan motor (TFM) .......................... Cools the toner container section.
2. Developer fan motor 1 (DEVFM1) ........ Cools the developer section.
3. Developer fan motor 2 (DEVFM2) ........ Cools the developer section.
4. Exhaust fan motor (EXFM) ................... Cools the machine inside.
5. LSU fan motor (LSUFM) ....................... Cools the laser scanner unit section.
6. Fuser front fan motor (FUFFM)............. Cools the fuser section (front side).
7. Fuser rear fan motor (FURFM) ............. Cools the fuser section (rear side).
8. Eject front fan motor (EFFM) ................ Cools the eject section (front side).
9. Eject rear fan motor (ERFM)................. Cools the eject section (rear side).
10. Eject fan motor 1 (EFM1)...................... Cools the eject section.
11. Eject fan motor 2 (EFM2)...................... Cools the eject section.
12. Heater fan motor (HFM)........................ Cools the fuser heater PWB.
13. Power source fan motor (PSFM) .......... Cools the power source section.
14. Controller fan motor (CONFM).............. Cools the controller section.

2LL/2LJ/2LH-2
(5) Others
14
21
9
16
18,19 17
15
13
8
10
7
6
1
11
3
5
2
12 Machine front
4
Machine inside
20 Machine rear
Figure 2-2-5 Others
1. Paper feed clutch 1 (PFCL1) ................ Primary paper feed from cassette 1.
2. Paper feed clutch 2 (PFCL2) ................ Primary paper feed from cassette 2.
3. Assist clutch 1 (ASCL1)*2 ...................... Controls the drive of the assist roller (cassette 1).
4. Assist clutch 2 (ASCL2)*2 ...................... Controls the drive of the assist roller (cassette 2).
5. Paper conveying clutch (PCCL)............ Controls the drive of vertical conveying section.
6. MP paper feed clutch (MPPFCL) .......... Controls primary paper feed from the MP tray.
7. Middle clutch (MCL)*1 ............................ Controls the drive of paper conveying section.
8. Registration clutch (RCL)*1 .................... Controls the secondary paper feed.
9. Duplex clutch 1 (DUCL1)*1 .................... Controls the drive of duplex section.
10. Duplex clutch 2 (DUCL2)*1 .................... Controls the drive of duplex section.
11. Pickup solenoid 1 (PUSOL1)*2 .............. Operates the forwarding pulley (cassette 1).
12. Pickup solenoid 2 (PUSOL2)*2 .............. Operates the forwarding pulley (cassette 2).
13. Cleaning solenoid (CLSOL) .................. Controls the ID sensor cleaning.
14. Feedshift solenoid (FSSOL).................. Controls the feedshift guide.
15. Cleaning lamp (CL) ............................... Eliminates the residual electrostatic charge on the drum.
16. Fuser heater 1 (FH1) ............................ Heats the heat roller.
17. Fuser heater 2 (FH2) ............................ Heats the heat roller.

2LL/2LJ/2LH
18. Fuser thermostat 1 (FTS1).................... Prevents overheating of the heat roller.

19. Fuser thermostat 2 (FTS2).................... Prevents overheating of the heat roller.
20. Cassette heater (CH) ............................ Dehumidifies the cassette section (option).
21. Hard disk (HDD).................................... Storages the image data and information of job accounting mode.
*1: 35 ppm model only.

*2: 45 ppm model /55 ppm model only.

2LL/2LJ/2LH
2-3-1 Main PWB

2-3 Operation of the PWBs
5
U45
BK
WH
1 6
YC12
YC13 YC5
1
YC25 YC17 YC21 1 13
1 7
50 YC16 1
1 8 YC11 U25
U113
1 6 YC30
80 1
YC20
1
YC7 YC10
1
12
U112
10
YC33
1 YS4 72
1
CODE FLS
1 2
YC23 YS2 YS1
1 3 1 72
YS3
YC27
U1
1 3 YC32
U6
8 1
7 1
200
200
1
YC24 YC1
YC18
BLACK
9
1 40
15
BAT1
5
7 1
YC9
YC3 YC2
1
YC8
BLUE
1 5
YC15 YC14
Figure 2-3-1 Main PWB silk-screen diagram

2LL/2LJ/2LH
Connector Pin Signal I/O Voltage Description

YC1 1 GND - - Ground
Connected to 2 TXP O - HDD data signal
hard disk
3 TXN O - HDD data signal
4 GND - - Ground
5 RXN I - HDD data signal
6 RXP I - HDD data signal
7 GND - - Ground
YC3 1 HSYNC_AN O 0/3.3 V DC (pulse) Image control signal
Connected to 2 HSYNC_AP O 0/3.3 V DC (pulse) Image control signal
engine PWB
3 HSYNC_BN O 0/3.3 V DC (pulse) Image control signal
4 HSYNC_BP O 0/3.3 V DC (pulse) Image control signal
5 HSYNC_CN O 0/3.3 V DC (pulse) Image control signal
6 HSYNC_CP O 0/3.3 V DC (pulse) Image control signal
7 HSYNC_DN O 0/3.3 V DC (pulse) Image control signal
8 HSYNC_DP O 0/3.3 V DC (pulse) Image control signal
9 VSYNC_AN O 0/3.3 V DC (pulse) Image control signal
10 VSYNC_AP O 0/3.3 V DC (pulse) Image control signal
11 VSYNC_BN O 0/3.3 V DC (pulse) Image control signal
12 VSYNC_BP O 0/3.3 V DC (pulse) Image control signal
13 VSYNC_CN O 0/3.3 V DC (pulse) Image control signal
14 VSYNC_CP O 0/3.3 V DC (pulse) Image control signal
15 VSYNC_DN O 0/3.3 V DC (pulse) Image control signal
16 VSYNC_DP O 0/3.3 V DC (pulse) Image control signal
17 SGND - - Ground
18 TCLKP O 0/3.3 V DC (pulse) Clock signal
19 TCLKN O 0/3.3 V DC (pulse) Clock signal
20 SGND - - Ground
21 TCP O 0/3.3 V DC (pulse) Image control signal
22 TCN O 0/3.3 V DC (pulse) Image control signal
23 SGND - - Ground
24 TBP O 0/3.3 V DC (pulse) Image control signal
25 TBN O 0/3.3 V DC (pulse) Image control signal
26 SGND - - Ground
27 TAP O 0/3.3 V DC (pulse) Image control signal
28 TAN O 0/3.3 V DC (pulse) Image control signal

2LL/2LJ/2LH

YC3 29 SGND - - Ground
Connected to 30 SLEEP O 0/3.3 V DC Sleep signal
engine PWB
31 HLD_ENG O 0/3.3 V DC Engine hold signal
32 NC - - Not used
33 SGND - - Ground
34 EG IRN O 0/3.3 V DC Engine interrupt signal
35 EG SO I 0/3.3 V DC (pulse) Serial communication data signal
36 EG SBSY O 0/3.3 V DC Engine busy signal
37 EG SDIR O 0/3.3 V DC Engine communication direction sig-
nal
38 EG_SI O 0/3.3 V DC (pulse) Serial communication data signal
39 EG_SCLK O 0/3.3 V DC (pulse) Engine lock signal
40 SGND - - Ground
YC5 1 TD1+ O 0/3.3 V DC (pulse) Transmission data
Connected to 2 TD1- O 0/3.3 V DC (pulse) Transmission data
ethernet 3 TD2+ O 0/3.3 V DC (pulse) Transmission data
4 TD2- O 0/3.3 V DC (pulse) Transmission data
5 CT1 O 3.3 V DC 3.3 V DC power output
6 CT2 O 3.3 V DC 3.3 V DC power output
7 TD3+ O 0/3.3 V DC (pulse) Transmission data
9 TD4+ O 0/3.3 V DC (pulse) Transmission data
11 GRLED_A1 O 0/3.3 V DC LED emitter signal
12 GRLED_K1 O 0/3.3 V DC LED emitter signal
13 YWLED_A2 O 0/3.3 V DC LED emitter signal
14 YWLED_K2 O 0/3.3 V DC LED emitter signal

2LL/2LJ/2LH

YC7 1 KMDET I 0/3.3 V DC KMAS set signal
Connected to 2 NC - - Not used
KMAS
3 KMDREQ I 0/3.3 V DC KMAS control signal
4 KMACK O 0/3.3 V DC KMAS control signal
5 KMRXD O 0/3.3 V DC (pulse) KMAS received data signal
6 SGND - - Ground
7 KMTXD I 0/3.3 V DC (pulse) KMAS transmission data signal
8 SGND - - Ground
9 SGND - - Ground
10 SGND - - Ground
11 +5V O 5 V DC 5 V DC power to KMAS
12 +5V O 5 V DC 5 V DC power to KMAS
YC8 1 RESET0 I 0/3.3 V DC Reset signal
Connected to 2 WAKEUP0 O 0/3.3 V DC Control signal
interface
3 AUDIO0 I Analog Audio signal
PWB
4 GND - - Ground
5 USB_DP0 I/O - USB data signal
6 USB_DN0 I/O - USB data signal
7 VBUS0 O 3.3 V DC 3.3 V DC power to IFPWB
8 GND - - Ground
9 RESET1 I 0/3.3 V DC Reset signal
10 WAKEUP1 O 0/3.3 V DC Control signal
11 AUDIO1 I Analog Audio signal
12 GND - - Ground
13 USB_DP1 I/O - USB data signal
14 USB_DN1 I/O - USB data signal
15 VBUS1 O 3.3 V DC 3.3 V DC power to IFPWB
Connected to 2 5V_CUT0 I 0/3.3 V DC 5 V DC cut signal
interface
3 GND - - Ground
PWB
4 5V O 5 V DC 5 V DC power to IFPWB
5 GND - - Ground
6 5V_CUT1 I 0/3.3 V DC 5 V DC cut signal

2LL/2LJ/2LH

Connected to 2 GND - - Ground
DP relay
3 3.3V O 3.3 V DC 3.3 V DC power to DPRPWB
PWB
7 VCLKB I 0/3.3 V DC (pulse) DPRPWB clock signal
8 VSYNCB I 0/3.3 V DC (pulse) DPRPWB VSYNCB signal
9 HSYNCB I 0/3.3 V DC (pulse) DPRPWB HSYNCB signal
10 MREB I 0/3.3 V DC (pulse) DPRPWB MREB signal
11 GND - - Ground
12 DRB0 I 0/3.3 V DC (pulse) Image data signal
20 GND - - Ground
21 DGB0 I 0/3.3 V DC (pulse) Image data signal
29 GND - - Ground
30 DBB0 I 0/3.3 V DC (pulse) Image data signal

2LL/2LJ/2LH

YC10 37 DBB7 I 0/3.3 V DC (pulse) Image data signal
Connected to 38 HHALF O 0/3.3 V DC DPRPWB Control signal
DP relay
39 SLEEP O 0/3.3 V DC DPRPWB Control signal
PWB
40 TWS_DET I 0/3.3 V DC DPRPWB Control signal
41 GND - - Ground
42 LA2 O 0/3.3 V DC (pulse) Address bus signal
58 GND - - Ground
59 LD0 I/O 0/3.3 V DC (pulse) Data bus signal
67 GND - - Ground
68 INT I 0/3.3 V DC DPRPWB Control signal
69 RESETZ O 0/3.3 V DC DPRPWB Control signal
70 GND - - Ground
71 CEZ O 0/3.3 V DC (pulse) DPRPWB Control signal
72 WEZ O 0/3.3 V DC (pulse) DPRPWB Control signal

2LL/2LJ/2LH

YC10 73 OEZ O 0/3.3 V DC (pulse) DPRPWB Control signal
Connected to 74 SCLKIN O 0/3.3 V DC (pulse) DPRPWB clock signal
DP relay
PWB
79 GND - - Ground
80 GND - - Ground
Connected to 2 SC_IRN O 0/3.3 V DC Scanner interrupt signal
ISC PWB
3 SC_DIR O 0/3.3 V DC Scanner communication direction sig-
nal
4 SC_HLDN O 0/3.3 V DC Scanner hold signal
5 SC_BSY O 0/3.3 V DC Scanner busy signal
6 SC_SI O 0/3.3 V DC (pulse) Serial communication data signal
7 SC_SO I 0/3.3 V DC (pulse) Serial communication data signal
8 SC_CLK O 0/3.3 V DC (pulse) Scanner clock signal
YC12 1 DEEP_POWERO O 0/3.3 V DC Sleep return signal
N
Connected to 2 ENERGY_SAVE O 0/3.3 V DC Energy save signal
operation
3 SUPND_POWER O 3.3 V DC 3.3 V DC power to OPWB1
PWB 1
4 LED_MEMORY_N O 0/3.3 V DC Memory LED control signal
5 LED_ATTENTION O 0/3.3 V DC Attention LED control signal
_N
6 LED_PROCESSI O 0/3.3 V DC Processing LED control signal
NG_N
7 SHUT_DOWN O 0/3.3 V DC 24 V down signal
8 LIGHTOFF_POW O 0/3.3 V DC Sleep return signal
ERON
9 AUDIO O Analog Audio output signal
10 PANEL RESET O 0/3.3 V DC Reset signal
11 INT_POWERKEY I 0/3.3 V DC Power key: On/Off
_N
12 PANEL_STATUS I 0/3.3 V DC Operation panel status signal
13 GND - - Ground

2LL/2LJ/2LH

Connected to 2 D3 I/O 0/3.3 V DC (pulse) Data bus signal
CF card
3 D4 I/O 0/3.3 V DC (pulse) Data bus signal
7 /CE1 O 0/3.3 V DC Control signal
8 A10 O 0/3.3 V DC (pulse) Address bus signal
9 /OE O 0/3.3 V DC Control signal
13 VCC O 0/3.3 V DC Control signal
24 WP O 0/3.3 V DC Control signal
25 /CD2 O 0/3.3 V DC Control signal
26 /CD1 O 0/3.3 V DC Control signal
32 /CE2 O 0/3.3 V DC Control signal
33 /VS1 O 0/3.3 V DC Control signal
34 /IORD O 0/3.3 V DC Control signal
35 /IOWD O 0/3.3 V DC Control signal
36 /WE O 0/3.3 V DC Control signal

2LL/2LJ/2LH

YC16 37 RDY/BSY I 0/3.3 V DC Control signal
Connected to 38 VCC O 0/3.3 V DC Control signal
CF card
39 CSEL O 0/3.3 V DC Control signal
40 VS2 O 0/3.3 V DC Control signal
41 RESET I 0/3.3 V DC Reset signal
42 /WAIT O 0/3.3 V DC Control signal
43 INPACK O 0/3.3 V DC Control signal
44 /REG I 0/3.3 V DC REG signal
45 BVD2 O 0/3.3 V DC Control signal
46 BVD1 O 0/3.3 V DC Control signal
50 GND - - Ground
YC17 1 VBUS O 5 V DC 5 V DC power output
Connected to 2 DATA - I/O - USB data signal
operation
3 DATA + I/O - USB data signal
PWB 1
4 NC - - Not used
5 GND - - Ground
Connected to 2 DATA- I/O - USB data signal
USB
3 DATA+ I/O - USB data signal
4 GND - - Ground
Connected to 2 DATA - I/O - USB data signal
USB host 3 DATA + I/O - USB data signal
4 NC - - Not used
5 GND - - Ground
YC23 1 +12V O 12 V DC CONFM: On/Off
controller fan
motor

2LL/2LJ/2LH

YC24 1 +12V O 12 V DC 12 V DC power from PSPWB
Connected to 2 +12V O 12 V DC 12 V DC power from PSPWB
power source
3 +12V O 12 V DC 12 V DC power from PSPWB
PWB
4 +12V O 12 V DC 12 V DC power from PSPWB
5 GND - - Ground
6 GND - - Ground
7 GND - - Ground
8 GND - - Ground
Connected to 2 HTPDN I 0/3.3 V DC Control signal
ISC PWB
3 LOCKN I 0/3.3 V DC Lock signal
4 GND - - Ground
5 RX0N I 0/3.3 V DC (pulse) Received data signal
6 RX0P I 0/3.3 V DC (pulse) Received data signal
7 GND - - Ground
Connected to 2 +5V_HDD O 5 V DC 5 V DC power to HDD
hard disk
3 GND - - Ground
YC30 1 +5V O 5 V DC 5 V DC power from OPWB1
Connected to 2 +5V O 5 V DC 5 V DC power from OPWB1
operation
3 +5V O 5 V DC 5 V DC power from OPWB1
PWB 1
4 GND - - Ground
5 GND - - Ground
6 GND - - Ground

2LL/2LJ/2LH
2-3-2 Engine PWB
A10 A1
A20 A1 1 12 6 1 20 1 B19 B1
4
1
YC27
YC23 YC22
YC18
1
B10 YC25 B1
YC26
8
B1 B20 A1 A19
YC20 YC19
1
YC24
6
7
3 1
1
YC1
YC49
YC17
9
YC16
1 5
10
1
1 YC2 YC45
10
U4
1
1
1 4
YC15
YC13 U1
U100
1
U13
11
1
YC6
U8
YC4
40
1
YC48
64
1 50
40
20
21
YC11
YC5
18 1 YC9
50
1 11
1
YC7 1 YC50 40 1 YC46 40
20 1
YC8
Figure 2-3-2 Engine PWB silk-screen diagram

2LL/2LJ/2LH

Connected to 2 +5V I 5 V DC 5 V DC power from FPWB1
feed PWB 1
3 GND - - Ground
4 +12V I 12 V DC 12 V DC power from FPWB1
5 GND - - Ground
6 GND - - Ground
7 +24V1 I 24 V DC 24 V DC power from FPWB1
8 +24V1 I 24 V DC 24 V DC power from FPWB1
front PWB
3 GND - - Ground
4 GND - - Ground
5 GND - - Ground
6 +24V O 24 V DC 24 V DC power to FRPWB
9 +3.3V2 O 3.3 V DC 3.3 V DC power to FRPWB
10 +3.3V1 O 3.3 V DC 3.3 V DC power to FRPWB
Connected to 2 FEED_MOT_REM O 0/3.3 V DC PFM: On/Off
feed PWB 2
3 FEED_MOT_CLK O 0/3.3 V DC (pulse) PFM clock signal
4 FEED_MOT_RDY I 0/3.3 V DC PFM ready signal
5 FEED_MOT_DIR O 0/3.3 V DC PFM drive switch signal
6 FEED_CL1_REM O 0/24 V DC PFCL1: On/Off
8 ASIST_CL2 O 0/24 V DC ASCL2: On/Off
9 LIFT_MOT2_REM O 0/24 V DC LM2: On/Off
10 GND - - Ground
11 LIFT_MOT1_REM1 O 0/24 V DC LM1: On/Off
12 CAS2_WID I 0/3.3 V DC PWSW2: On/Off
13 CAS2_LNG3 I 0/3.3 V DC PLSW2: On/Off

2LL/2LJ/2LH

YC4 18 CAS1_LNG2 I 0/3.3 V DC PLSW1: On/Off
Connected to 19 CAS1_LNG1 I 0/3.3 V DC PLSW1: On/Off
feed PWB 2
20 GND - - Ground
21 CAS2_QUANT2 I 0/3.3 V DC PGS2(L): On/Off
22 CAS2_QUANT1 I 0/3.3 V DC PGS2(U): On/Off
25 LIFT_MOT1_LOCK I 0/3.3 V DC LM1 lock signal
26 LIFT_MOT2_LOCK I 0/3.3 V DC LM2 lock signal
27 CURRENT_SIG I 0/3.3 V DC Current signal
28 V-FEED_CL O 0/24 V DC PCCL: On/Off
29 COVER_OPEN I 0/3.3 V DC PCCSW: On/Off
30 FEED2_SENS I 0/3.3 V DC PFPCS1: On/Off
31 CAS1_P0 I 0/3.3 V DC FS1: On/Off
32 CAS1_LIFT_UP I 0/3.3 V DC LS1: On/Off
33 GND - - Ground
34 CAS1_EMPTY I 0/3.3 V DC PS1: On/Off
35 PICK_SOL1_RET O 0/24 V DC PUSOL1: On/Off (RET)
36 PICK_SOL1_REM O 0/24 V DC PUSOL1: On/Off (ACT)
37 CAS2_P0 I 0/3.3 V DC FS2: On/Off
38 CAS2_LIFT_UP I 0/3.3 V DC LS2: On/Off
39 CAS2_EMPTY I 0/3.3 V DC PS2: On/Off
42 GND - - Ground
43 REG_SENS I 0/3.3 V DC RS: On/Off
44 FEED1_SENS I 0/3.3 V DC PCS: On/Off
45 BEND_SENS I 0/3.3 V DC RDS: On/Off
46 MID_MOT_PH O 0/3.3 V DC MM control signal
47 MID_MOT_REM(R O 0/3.3 V DC MM/MCL: On/Off
OL_CL)
48 MID_MOT_CLK O 0/3.3 V DC (pulse) MM clock signal
49 MID_MOT_PD O 0/3.3 V DC MM control signal
50 ASIST_CL1 O 0/24 V DC ASCL1: On/Off

2LL/2LJ/2LH

Connected to 2 DU_MOT_REM O 0/3.3 V DC DUM1/DUCL1: On/Off
feed PWB 1
3 EXIT_FAN O 0/24 V DC EFM: On/Off
4 DU_ENTER_SENS I 0/3.3 V DC DUS1: On/Off
5 TCON_SET - - Not used
6 TRANS_MOT_RE O 0/3.3 V DC TCM: On/Off
M
7 TRANS_MOT_CLK O 0/3.3 V DC (pulse) TCM clock signal
8 TRANS_MOT_RDY I 0/3.3 V DC TCM ready signal
9 TRANS_MOT_DIR O 0/3.3 V DC TCM drive switch signal
10 TRANS_MOT_BRK O 0/3.3 V DC TCM break signal
11 GND - - Ground
12 DRM_MOT_BK_R O 0/3.3 V DC DRM: On/Off
EM
13 DRM_MOT_BK_CL O 0/3.3 V DC (pulse) DRM clock signal
K
14 DRM_MOT_BK_R I 0/3.3 V DC DRM ready signal
DY
15 DRM_MOT_BK_DI O 0/3.3 V DC DRM drive switch signal
R
16 DRM_MOT_BK_B O 0/3.3 V DC DRM break signal
RK
17 DLP_MOT_BK_RE O 0/3.3 V DC DEVM: On/Off
M
18 DLP_MOT_BK_CL O 0/3.3 V DC (pulse) DEVM clock signal
K
19 DLP_MOT_BK_RD I 0/3.3 V DC DEVM ready signal
Y
20 DLP_MOT_BK_DI O 0/3.3 V DC DEVM drive switch signal
R
21 DRM_MOT_CLR_ - - Not used
REM
CLK
RDY
DIR
25 GND - - Ground
26 DLP_MOT_CLR_R - - Not used
EM

2LL/2LJ/2LH

YC5 27 DLP_MOT_CLR_C - - Not used
LK
Connected to 28 DLP_MOT_CLR_R - - Not used
feed PWB 1 DY
29 DLP_MOT_CLR_DI - - Not used
R
30 IH_PWB_FAN_L O 0/24 V DC HFM: On/Off
31 IH_PWB_FAN_H O 0/24 V DC HFM: On/Off
32 IH_PWB_FAN_AL I 0/3.3 V DC HFM alarm signal
M
33 REG_MOT_PD O 0/3.3 V DC RM control signal
34 REG_MOT_CLK O 0/3.3 V DC (pulse) RM clock signal
35 REG_MOT_REM(C O 0/3.3 V DC RM/RCL: On/Off
L)
36 GND - - Ground
37 CLN_SOL_RET O 0/24 V DC CLSOL: On/Off (RET)
38 CLN_SOL_REM O 0/24 V DC CLSOL: On/Off (ACT)
39 REG_SENS_R_S - - Not used
40 REG_SENS_R_P - - Not used
41 REG_R_LED - - Not used
42 REG_SENS_F_S - - Not used
43 GND - - Ground
44 REG_SENS_F_P - - Not used
45 REG_F_LED - - Not used
46 M_TEMP - - Not used
47 POWER_OFF O 0/3.3 V DC Power off signal
48 DRM_HEAT - - Not used
49 FSR_RELAY O 0/3.3 V DC Fuser relay signal
50 GND - - Ground

2LL/2LJ/2LH

Connected to 2 JOB_SET I 0/3.3 V DC Job separator set signal
feed PWB 1
3 JOB_MOT_REM O 0/3.3 V DC JSEM: On/Off
4 JOB_MOT_CLK O 0/3.3 V DC (pulse) JSEM clock signal
5 JOB_MOT_DIR O 0/3.3 V DC JSEM drive switch signal
6 JOB_OPEN_SENS I 0/3.3 V DC JSOCS: On/Off
7 JOB_SOL_REM O 0/24 V DC JSFSSOL: On/Off
8 GND - - Ground
9 EXIT_REAR_FAN_ O 0/24 V DC ERFM: On/Off
L
10 EXIT_REAR_FAN_ O 0/24 V DC ERFM: On/Off
H
11 ZEROC O 0/3.3 V DC (pulse) Zero-cross signal
12 SUB_HEAT O 0/3.3 V DC FH2: On/Off
13 MAIN_HEAT O 0/3.3 V DC FH1: On/Off
14 FSR_CL - - Not used
15 FSR_MOT_REM O 0/3.3 V DC FUM: On/Off
16 FSR_MOT_CLK O 0/3.3 V DC (pulse) FUM clock signal
17 FSR_MOT_RDY O 0/3.3 V DC FUM ready signal
18 GND - - Ground
19 FSR_MOT_DIR O 0/3.3 V DC FUM drive switch signal
20 FSR_MOT_BRK O 0/3.3 V DC FUM break signal
21 MPF_TABLE I 0/3.3 V DC MPTSW: On/Off
22 MPF_WID1 I 0/3.3 V DC MPPWSW: On/Off
25 MPF_LNG I 0/3.3 V DC MPPLSW: On/Off
26 3.3V3 O 3.3 V DC 3.3 V DC power to FPWB1
27 MPF_PPR_SET I 0/3.3 V DC MPPS: On/Off
28 MPF_LIFT_UP I 0/3.3 V DC MPLS1: On/Off
29 MPF_LIFT_DOWN I 0/3.3 V DC MPLS2: On/Off
30 MPF_JAM I 0/3.3 V DC MPFS: On/Off
31 MPF_CL_REM O 0/24 V DC MPPFCL: On/Off
32 MPF_LIF2 O 0/24 V DC MPLM: On/Off
33 MPF_LIFT1 O 0/24 V DC MPLM: On/Off
34 GND - - Ground

2LL/2LJ/2LH

YC6 35 TC_MOT_REM - - Not used
Connected to 36 TC_MOT_LOCK - - Not used
feed PWB 1
37 TC_TONER_LED - - Not used
38 TC_TONER_FULL - - Not used
39 TC_TONER_VCON - - Not used
T
40 INTER_LOCK - - Not used
41 DU2_PD O 0/3.3 V DC DUM2 control signal
42 DU2_CLK O 0/3.3 V DC (pulse) DUM2 clock signal
43 DU2_REM_CL_LO O 0/3.3 V DC DUM2/DUCL2: On/Off
W
44 DU_OPEN I 0/3.3 V DC DUCSW: On/Off
45 DU_FAN - - Not used
46 PRESS_MOT_RE - - Not used
M1
M2
48 PRESS_RLS_SEN - - Not used
S
49 DU_SENS I 0/3.3 V DC DUS2: On/Off
50 BELT_JAM_SENS - - Not used
51 GND - - Ground
52 REG_BK_SENS1_ I Analog IDS detection signal
S
P
54 REG_BK_LED O Analog IDS control signal
55 LOOP_SENS I 0/3.3 V DC LPS: On/Off
56 EDGE_FAN_L O 0/24 V DC EFM1,2: On/Off
57 EDGE_FAN_H O 0/24 V DC EFM1,2: On/Off
58 DU1_MOT_PD O 0/3.3 V DC DUM1 control signal
59 DU1_MOT_CLK O 0/3.3 V DC (pulse) DUM1 clock signal
60 GND - - Ground

2LL/2LJ/2LH

YC7 1 INTER_LOCK - - Not used
Connected to 2 ROT_HP_SENS I 0/3.3 V DC DEVSS: On/Off
front PWB
3 DLP_FAN_L O 0/24 V DC DEVFM: On/Off
4 DLP_FAN_H O 0/24 V DC DEVFM: On/Off
5 THOP_MOT_DIR O 0/3.3 V DC THM drive switch signal
6 THOP_MOT_REM O 0/3.3 V DC THM: On/Off
7 THOP_Bk I 0/3.3 V DC THS: On/Off
8 ENCODE_ Bk I 0/3.3 V DC SRS: On/Off
9 SB_MOT_PH O 0/3.3 V DC EM control signal
10 SB_MOT_CLK O 0/3.3 V DC (pulse) EM clock signal
11 SB_MOT_PD O 0/3.3 V DC EM control signal
12 SB_MOT_DIR O 0/3.3 V DC EM drive switch signal
13 SB_MOT_REM O 0/3.3 V DC EM: On/Off
14 EXIT_FEED_SENS I 0/3.3 V DC SBS: On/Off
15 EXIT_PAPER_SEN I 0/3.3 V DC EFS: On/Off
S
16 GND - - Ground
17 JUNC_SOL_REM O 0/24 V DC FSSOL: On/Off (ACT)
18 JUNC_SOL_RET O 0/24 V DC FSSOL: On/Off (RET)
YC8 1 WTNR_SET I Analog WTS2 detection signal
Connected to 2 WTNR_FULL_VCO O 0/3.3 V DC WTS1 control signal
front PWB NT
3 WTNR_FULL I Analog WTS1 detection signal
4 WTNR_NEAR_VC O 0/3.3 V DC WTS2 control signal
ONT
5 WTNR_NEAR I Analog WTS2 detection signal
6 WTNR_LED O 0/3.3 V DC (pulse) WTS1 LED emitter signal
7 I2C_SDA O 0/3.3 V DC (pulse) EEPROM clock signal
8 I2C_SCL I/O 0/3.3 V DC (pulse) EEPROM data signal
9 FRONT_OPEN I 0/3.3 V DC FRCSW: On/Off
10 LSU_FAN O 0/24 V DC LSUFM: On/Off
11 TPD_TEMP_Bk I Analog Developer thermistor detection sig-
nal
12 DLP_VCONT_Bk_1 O 0/3.3 V DC DEVPWB control signal
13 TPD_Bk_1 I Analog DEVPWB detection signal
14 TN_CLK O 0/3.3 V DC (pulse) Clock signal
15 GND - - Ground

2LL/2LJ/2LH

YC8 16 EEP_SCL1 O 0/3.3 V DC (pulse) EEPROM clock signal
Connected to 17 EEP_SDA1 I/O 0/3.3 V DC (pulse) EEPROM data signal
front PWB
18 ERS_Bk_REM O 0/24 V DC CL: On/Off
19 CONTAIN_FAN_R O 0/24 V DC FUFFM: On/Off
EM
20 EXIT_FAN_REM O 0/24 V DC EFFM: On/Off
YC9 1 IH_CORE_MOT_R - - Not used
EM
Connected to 2 IH_CORE_MOT_C - - Not used
front PWB LK
3 IH_CORE_SENS - - Not used
4 IH_COIL_FAN_AL - - Not used
M
5 IH_COIL_FAN_L - - Not used
6 IH_COIL_FAN_H - - Not used
7 GND - - Ground
8 ROT_MOT_PD - - Not used
9 ROT_MOT_DIR - - Not used
10 ROT_MOT_CLK - - Not used
11 ROT_MOT_REM - - Not used
Connected to 2 DATA_2PBk(LVDS) O 0/3.3 V DC (pulse) Video data signal (P)
LSU relay 3 DATA_2NBk(LVDS) O 0/3.3 V DC (pulse) Video data signal (N)
PWB
4 GND - - Ground
5 DATA_1PBk(LVDS) O 0/3.3 V DC (pulse) Video data signal (P)
6 DATA_1NBk(LVDS) O 0/3.3 V DC (pulse) Video data signal (N)
7 GND - - Ground
8 GAIN_FIX_Bk O 0/3.3 V DC APCPWB control signal
9 GND - - Ground
10 SDCLK_Bk O 0/3.3 V DC (pulse) APCPWB clock signal
11 GND - - Ground
12 PARA_SIG_P4_Bk O 0/3.3 V DC APCPWB control signal
17 INT_ST_1_Bk O 0/3.3 V DC APCPWB control signal

2LL/2LJ/2LH-1

YC11 18 INT_ST_2_Bk O 0/3.3 V DC APCPWB control signal
Connected to 19 CUALM_BK I 0/3.3 V DC APCPWB alarm signal
LSU relay
20 MSET_N O 0/3.3 V DC Control signal
PWB
21 LDD_CS 1 Bk O 0/3.3 V DC APCPWB control signal
23 PARA_SIG_P3_2B O 0/3.3 V DC APCPWB control signal
k
24 LSU_TH_Bk I Analog LSU thermistor detection signal
25 BD_Bk I 0/3.3 V DC (pulse) Horizontal synchronization signal
26 GND - - Ground
27 DATA_4P_Bk(LVD O 0/3.3 V DC (pulse) Video data signal (P)
S)
28 DATA_4N_Bk(LVD O 0/3.3 V DC (pulse) Video data signal (N)
S)
29 GND - - Ground
30 DATA_3P_Bk(LVD O 0/3.3 V DC (pulse) Video data signal (P)
S)
31 DATA_3N_Bk(LVD O 0/3.3 V DC (pulse) Video data signal (N)
S)
32 GND - - Ground
33 EEPROM_CS_1_B I/O 0/3.3 V DC (pulse) APCPWB EEPROM data signal
k
k
35 GND - - Ground
36 SCLK O 0/3.3 V DC (pulse) Clock signal
37 GND - - Ground
38 SDO O 0/3.3 V DC (pulse) Serial communication data signal
39 GND - - Ground
40 SDI O 0/3.3 V DC (pulse) Serial communication data signal
feed PWB 1
3 3.3V3 I 3.3 V DC 3.3 V DC power from FPWB1
4 3.3V2 I 3.3 V DC 3.3 V DC power from FPWB1
YC15 1 +5V_AN O 5 V DC 5 V DC power to LSURPWB
Connected to 2 +5V_AN O 5 V DC 5 V DC power to LSURPWB
LSU relay
3 GND - - Ground
PWB and
polygon 4 GND - - Ground
motor 5 +3.3V2 O 3.3 V DC 3.3 V DC power to LSURPWB

2LL/2LJ/2LH-1

Connected to 7 +24V O 24 V DC 24 V DC power to LSURPWB
LSU relay
8 GND - - Ground
PWB and
polygon 9 START/STOP O 0/24 V DC PM: On/Off
motor 10 LOCK I 0/3.3 V DC Lock signal
11 CLK O 0/3.3 V DC (pulse) Clock signal
Connected to 2 SP_BELT_CNT O Analog Separation bias control voltage
high voltage
3 T2_CNT O Analog Transfer bias control voltage
PWB
4 T2_REM O 0/3.3 V DC Transfer bias: On/Off
5 MAIN_IDC O PWM DC charger roller control signal
6 DC_MAIN_CNT O PWM DC charger roller control signal
7 AC_MAIN_CNT O PWM AC charger roller control signal
8 AC_MAIN_CLK O 0/3.3 V DC (pulse) AC charger roller clock signal
9 DC_MAIN_REM O 0/3.3 V DC DC main charger: On/Off
YC17 1 SGND - 0/3.3 V DC (pulse) PM-K clock signal
Connected to 2 DC_MAG_REM O 0/3.3 V DC DC main charger: On/Off
high voltage
3 DC_MAG_CNT O 0/3.3 V DC (pulse) DC magnet bias control voltage
PWB
4 DC_SLV_CNT O PWM DC sleeve bias control voltage
5 AC_SLV_CLK O 0/3.3 V DC (pulse) AC sleeve bias clock signal
6 AC_SLV_CNT O PWM AC sleeve bias control voltage
7 DISCHARGE I PWM Main charger control signal
8 AC_MAG_CLK O 0/3.3 V DC (pulse) ACC magnet bias clock signal
9 AC_MAG_CNT O 0/3.3 V DC (pulse) AC magnet bias control voltage
10 DC_REC_CNT O PWM DC bias control voltage
YC18 1 DF_CLK O 0/3.3 V DC (pulse) DFMPWB clock signal
Connected to 2 DF_SDO O 0/3.3 V DC (pulse) DFMPWB serial communication
1000-sheet/ data signal
4000-sheet
3 DF_SEL O 0/3.3 V DC DFMPWB select signal
finisher
4 DF_SDI O 0/3.3 V DC (pulse) DFMPWB serial communication
data signal
5 DF_RDY I 0/3.3 V DC DFMPWB ready signal
6 DF_DET O 0/3.3 V DC DFMPWB detection signal
7 GND - - Ground

2LL/2LJ/2LH-1

YC19 A1 PF_CLK O 0/3.3 V DC (pulse) PFMPWB clock signal
Connected to A2 PF_SDO O 0/3.3 V DC (pulse) PFMPWB serial communication data
paper feeder/ signal
large capac- A3 PF_SEL O 0/3.3 V DC PFMPWB select signal
ity feeder,
toner fan A4 PF_SDI I 0/3.3 V DC (pulse) PFMPWB serial communication data
motor and signal
exhaust fan A5 PF_RDY I 0/3.3 V DC PFMPWB ready signal
motor
A6 PF_PAUSE O 0/3.3 V DC PFMPWB pause signal
A7 PF_CAS1_OPEN I 0/3.3 V DC PFMPWB control signal
A8 PF_CAS2_OPEN I 0/3.3 V DC PFMPWB control signal
A9 +3.3V4 O 3.3 V DC 3.3 V DC power to PFMPWB
A10 GND - - Ground
A11 GND - - Ground
A12 TN_FAN1 O 0/24 V DC TFM: On/Off
A13 +24V1 O 24 V DC 24 V DC power to TFM
A14 TN_FAN2 - - Not used
A15 +24V1 - - Not used
A16 LVU_FAN1 - - Not used
A18 LVU_FAN2 - - Not used
B1 SIDE_CLK O 0/3.3 V DC (pulse) PFMPWB clock signal (side)
B2 SIDE_SDO O 0/3.3 V DC (pulse) PFMPWB serial communication data
signal (side)
B3 SIDE_SEL O 0/3.3 V DC PFMPWB select signal (side)
B4 SIDE_SDI I 0/3.3 V DC (pulse) PFMPWB serial communication data
signal (side)
B5 SIDE_RDY I 0/3.3 V DC PFMPWB ready signal (side)
B6 SIDE_PAUSE O 0/3.3 V DC PFMPWB pause signal (side)
B7 TANDEM_CAS1OP I 0/3.3 V DC PFMPWB control signal (side)
EN
B8 TANDEM_CAS2OP I 0/3.3 V DC PFMPWB control signal (side)
EN
B9 SIDE_MULTI_OPE O 0/3.3 V DC PFMPWB control signal (side)
N
B10 +3.3V4 O 3.3 V DC 3.3 V DC power to PFMPWB (side)
B11 GND - - Ground

2LL/2LJ/2LH

YC19 B12 +24V1 - - Not used
Connected to B13 BELT_FAN1 - - Not used
paper feeder/
B14 +24V1 - - Not used
large capac-
ity feeder, B15 BELT_FAN2 - - Not used
toner fan B16 DLP_FAN1 - - Not used
motor and
exhaust fan
motor B18 DLP_FAN2 O 0/24 V DC EXFM: On/Off
B19 +24V1 O 24 V DC 24 V DC power to EXFM
YC20 1 DECAL_HP_SENS - - Not used
Connected to 2 GUIDE_REM - - Not used
bridge unit
3 GUIDE_CLK - - Not used
4 GUIDE_PD - - Not used
5 GUIDE_DIR - - Not used
6 DECAL_REM - - Not used
7 DECAL_PH - - Not used
8 DECAL_CLK - - Not used
9 DECAL_PD - - Not used
10 DECAL_DIR - - Not used
11 +24V1 O 24 V DC 24 V DC power to BRSOL
12 EXIT_SOL_REM O 0/24 V DC BRSOL: On/Off (ACT)
13 EXIT_SOL_RET O 0/24 V DC BRSOL: On/Off (RET)
14 GND - - Ground
15 EXIT_COV_OPEN I 0/3.3 V DC BRECSW: On/Off
16 GND - - Ground
17 EXIT_SENS I 0/3.3 V DC BRES: On/Off
18 +5V O 5 V DC 5 V DC power to BRES
19 N.C - - Not used
20 BRIDGE2 REM O 0/3.3 V DC BRCM2: On/Off
21 BRIDGE2 PH O 0/3.3 V DC BRCM2 control signal
22 BRIDGE2 CLK O 0/3.3 V DC (pulse) BRCM2 clock signal
23 BRIDGE2 PD O 0/3.3 V DC BRCM2 control signal
24 BRIDGE2 DIR O 0/3.3 V DC BRCM2 drive switch signal
25 BRIDGE1 REM O 0/3.3 V DC BRCM2: On/Off
26 BRIDGE1 PH O 0/3.3 V DC BRCM1 control signal
27 BRIDGE1 CLK O 0/3.3 V DC (pulse) BRCM1 clock signal

2LL/2LJ/2LH

YC20 28 BRIDGE1 PD O 0/3.3 V DC BRCM1 control signal
Connected to 29 BRIDGE1 DIR O 0/3.3 V DC BRCM1 drive switch signal
bridge unit
30 BRIDGE_SENS 2 I 0/3.3 V DC BRCS2: On/Off
31 BRIDGE_OPEN I 0/3.3 V DC BRCSW: On/Off
32 BRIDGE_SENS 1 I 0/3.3 V DC BRCS1: On/Off
33 GND - - Ground
34 5V O 5 V DC 5 V DC power to BRPWB
35 GND - - Ground
36 GND - - Ground
37 +24V1 O 24 V DC 24 V DC power to BRPWB
38 +24V1 O 24 V DC 24 V DC power to BRPWB
YC22 1 LVU_FAN O 0/24 V DC PSFM: On/Off
Connected to 2 +24V1 O 24 V DC 24 V DC power to PSFM
power source
fan motor
YC23 1 +24V O 24 V DC 24 V DC power to coin vender
coin vender
3 GND - - Ground
4 COIN_EN I 0/3.3 V DC Coin vender enable signal
5 FGND - - Ground
6 FEED_COUNT O 0/3.3 V DC Coin vender control signal
7 EJECT_COUNT O 0/3.3 V DC Coin vender control signal
8 COPYING_SIG O 0/3.3 V DC Coin vender control signal
9 TXD_COIN O 0/3.3 V DC (pulse) Serial communication data signal
10 GND - - Serial communication data signal
11 RXD_COIN I 0/3.3 V DC (pulse) MCL: On/Off
12 GND - - Ground
Connected to 2 DC1_SET I 0/3.3 V DC Key counter set signal
key counter
3 DC1_COUNT O 0/3.3 V DC Key counter count signal
4 +24V 1 O 24 V DC 24 V DC power to key card

2LL/2LJ/2LH

YC25 A1 +5V O 5 V DC 5 V DC power to key card
Connected to A2 +5V O 5 V DC 5 V DC power to key card
key card
A3 +5V O 5 V DC 5 V DC power to key card
A9 COPY_ENABLE I 0/3.3 V DC Key card enable signal
B1 KEY7 O 0/3.3 V DC Key card control signal
B9 GND - - Ground
B10 COUNT O 0/3.3 V DC Key card count signal
YC26 A1 EDGE_FAN_ALM - - Not used
Connected to A2 EDGE_FAN - - Not used
fuser unit
A4 EDGE_FAN_ALM - - Not used
A5 EDGE_FAN - - Not used
A7 FSR_FAN_ALM I 0/3.3 V DC FURFM alarm signal
A8 FSR_FAN O 0/24 V DC FURFM: On/Off
A9 +24V1 O 24 V DC 24 V DC power to FURFM
A10 FSR_RLS_DR_CC - - Not used
W
A11 FSR_RLS_DR_CW - - Not used
A12 GND - - Ground
A13 FSR_SIZE_SENS I 0/3.3 V DC FUES: On/Off
A14 +5V O 5 V DC 5 V DC power to FUES
A15 GND - - Not used

2LL/2LJ/2LH

YC26 A16 FSR_RLS_SENS - - Not used
Connected to A17 +5V - - Not used
fuser unit
A18 GND - - Not used
A19 FSR_BLT_PLS - - Not used
A20 +5V - - Not used
B1 PRESS_HEART_R - - Not used
EM
B2 IH_RXD - - Not used
B3 IH_TXD - - Not used
B4 ROTATION - - Not used
B5 IH_HEAT_REM - - Not used
B6 +3.3V2 - - Not used
B7 GND - - Not used
B8 GND - - Not used
B9 PRESS_TH - - Not used
B10 GND - - Ground
B11 EDGE_TH I Analog FTH2 detection signal
B12 GND - - Not used
B13 GUIDE_TH1 - - Not used
B14 GND - - Ground
B15 GUIDE_TH2 I Analog FTH1 detection signal
B16 MAIN_TH2 - - Not used
B17 MAIN_TH1 - - Not used
B18 GND - - Not used
B20 BRIDGE_FAN - - Not used
Connected to 2 EEP_SDA2 I/O 0/3.3 V DC (pulse) EEPROM data signal
RFID PWB
3 EEP_SCL2 I 0/3.3 V DC (pulse) EEPROM clock signal
and toner
motor 4 3.3V2 O 3.3 V DC 3.3 V DC power to RFPWB
5 +24V1 O 24 V DC 24 V DC power to TM-Y
6 TMOT_Bk_DR O 0/24 V DC TM: On/Off

2LL/2LJ/2LH

YC46 1 HSYNC_AN I 0/3.3 V DC (pulse) Image control signal
Connected to 2 HSYNC_AP I 0/3.3 V DC (pulse) Image control signal
main PWB
3 HSYNC_BN I 0/3.3 V DC (pulse) Image control signal
4 HSYNC_BP I 0/3.3 V DC (pulse) Image control signal
5 HSYNC_CN I 0/3.3 V DC (pulse) Image control signal
6 HSYNC_CP I 0/3.3 V DC (pulse) Image control signal
7 HSYNC_DN I 0/3.3 V DC (pulse) Image control signal
8 HSYNC_DP I 0/3.3 V DC (pulse) Image control signal
9 VSYNC_AN I 0/3.3 V DC (pulse) Image control signal
10 VSYNC_AP I 0/3.3 V DC (pulse) Image control signal
11 VSYNC_BN I 0/3.3 V DC (pulse) Image control signal
12 VSYNC_BP I 0/3.3 V DC (pulse) Image control signal
13 VSYNC_CN I 0/3.3 V DC (pulse) Image control signal
14 VSYNC_CP I 0/3.3 V DC (pulse) Image control signal
15 VSYNC_DN I 0/3.3 V DC (pulse) Image control signal
16 VSYNC_DP I 0/3.3 V DC (pulse) Image control signal
17 SGND - - Ground
18 TCLKP I 0/3.3 V DC (pulse) Clock signal
19 TCLKN I 0/3.3 V DC (pulse) Clock signal
20 SGND - - Ground
21 TCP I 0/3.3 V DC (pulse) Image control signal
22 TCN I 0/3.3 V DC (pulse) Image control signal
23 SGND - - Ground
24 TBP I 0/3.3 V DC (pulse) Image control signal
25 TBN I 0/3.3 V DC (pulse) Image control signal
26 SGND - - Ground
27 TAP I 0/3.3 V DC (pulse) Image control signal
28 TAN I 0/3.3 V DC (pulse) Image control signal
29 SGND - - Ground
30 SLEEP I 0/3.3 V DC Sleep signal
31 HLD_ENG I 0/3.3 V DC Engine hold signal
32 NC - - Not used
33 SGND - - Ground
34 EG IRN I 0/3.3 V DC Engine interrupt signal
35 EG SO O 0/3.3 V DC (pulse) Serial communication data signal

2LL/2LJ/2LH

YC46 36 EG SBSY I 0/3.3 V DC Engine busy signal
Connected to 37 EG SDIR I 0/3.3 V DC Engine communication direction sig-
main PWB nal
38 EG_SI I 0/3.3 V DC (pulse) Serial communication data signal
39 EG_SCLK I 0/3.3 V DC (pulse) Engine lock signal
40 SGND - - Ground

2LL/2LJ/2LH
2-3-3 Power source PWB
1 4 3 18 1 1 6 16 1 1 4 1 6
YC3 YC14 1 8
YC12 YC11 YC13 YC7
1 3 YC9 YC10 YC8
1
YC1
2
TB3
TB1 TB2
YC4
1 4 1 3
1 6
YC5 YC6
Figure 2-3-3 Power source PWB silk-screen diagram

2LL/2LJ/2LH

TB 1 LIVE I 220-240 V AC AC power input
Connected to 2 NEUTRAL I 220-240 V AC AC power input

AC inlet and
main power
3 DH_LIVE I 220-240 V AC AC power input
switch
YC1 1 MSW_OUT O 220-240 V AC AC power output to MSW
Connected to 2 MSW_IN I 220-240 V AC AC power output from MSW

main power
switch
YC3 1 IH_NEUTRAL O 220-240 V AC AC power output to FHPWB

fuser heater
3 IH_LIVE O 220-240 V AC AC power output to FHPWB
PWB
YC5 1 DH_LIVE O 220-240 V AC AC power output to CH
Connected to 2 DH_LIVE - - Not used

cassette
3 NC - - Not used
heater
4 NC - - Not used
5 DH_NEUTRAL O 220-240 V AC AC power output to CH
6 DH_NEUTRAL - - Not used

YC6 1 DH_LIVE O 220-240 V AC AC power output to PFCH
Connected to 2 DH_NEUTRAL O 220-240 V AC AC power output to PFCH

paper feeder
/large capac-
ity feeder
YC9 1 +24V1 O 24 V DC 24 V DC power to FPWB1
Connected to 2 +24V1 O 24 V DC 24 V DC power to FPWB1
feed PWB 1
3 +24V1 O 24 V DC 24 V DC power to FPWB1
4 +12V O 12 V DC 12 V DC power to FPWB1
5 GND - - Ground
6 GND - - Ground
7 GND - - Ground
8 GND - - Ground

2LL/2LJ/2LH-4

YC10 1 +24V1 O 24 V DC 24 V DC power to paper feeder/large
capacity feeder
Connected to 2 +24V1 O 24 V DC 24 V DC power to paper feeder/large
paper feeder/ capacity feeder
large capac- 3 +24V1 O 24 V DC 24 V DC power to 1000-sheet/4000-
ity feeder,
sheet finisher
1000-sheet/
4000-sheet 4 +24V1 O 24 V DC 24 V DC power to 1000-sheet/4000-
finisher and sheet finisher
ISC PWB 5 +24V1 O 24 V DC 24 V DC power to 1000-sheet/4000-
sheet finisher
6 +24V1 O 24 V DC 24 V DC power to ISCPWB
9 GND - - Ground
10 GND - - Ground
11 GND - - Ground
12 GND - - Ground
13 GND - - Ground
14 GND - - Ground
15 GND - - Ground
16 GND - - Ground
main PWB
3 GND - - Ground
4 GND - - Ground
5 +12V1 O 12 V DC 12 V DC power to MPWB
YC13 1 +24V1 O 24 V DC 24 V DC power to HVPWB1
Connected to 2 +24V1 - - Not used
high voltage 3 +24V1 O 24 V DC 24 V DC power to HVPWB1
PWB 1
4 PGND - - Ground
5 PGND - - Not used
6 PGND - - Ground

2LL/2LJ/2LH-4

YC14 1 POWER_OFF I 0/3.3 V DC Sleep mode signal: On/Off
Connected to 2 DRUM_HEAT_RE I 0/3.3 V DC FH: On/Off
feed PWB 1 M
3 GND - - Ground
4 FSR_RELAY_RE I 0/3.3 V DC Power relay signal: On/Off
M

2LL/2LJ/2LH
2-3-4 ISC PWB
4 1
3 1
YC5
1
YC14
YC1
5
1
YC13
3
1
YC9
40
1
YC6
11
1
YC11
6
1
YC4
7
1
8
YC7
YC3
6
1
1
YC12
3
YC8
16
YC2
1
1 5
Figure 2-3-4 ISC PWB silk-screen diagram

2LL/2LJ/2LH

YC3 1 SC_CLK I 0/3.3 V DC (pulse) Scanner clock signal
Connected to 2 SC_SO O 0/3.3 V DC (pulse) Serial communication data signal
main PWB
3 SC_SI I 0/3.3 V DC (pulse) Serial communication data signal
4 SC_BSY I 0/3.3 V DC Scanner busy signal
5 SC_HLDN I 0/3.3 V DC Scanner hold signal
6 SC_DIR I 0/3.3 V DC Scanner communication direction sig-
nal
7 SC_IRN I 0/3.3 V DC Scanner interrupt signal
8 GND(SPARE) - - Ground
Connected to 2 HTPDN O 0/3.3 V DC Control signal
main PWB
3 LOCKN O 0/3.3 V DC Lock signal
4 GND - - Ground
5 TX0N O 0/3.3 V DC (pulse) Transmission data signal
6 TX0P O 0/3.3 V DC (pulse) Transmission data signal
7 GND - - Ground
YC5 1 SMOT AP O 0/24 V DC (pulse) SM drive control signal
Connected to 2 SMOT BP O 0/24 V DC (pulse) SM drive control signal
scanner 3 SMOT AN O 0/24 V DC (pulse) SM drive control signal
motor
4 SMOT BN O 0/24 V DC (pulse) SM drive control signal
YC6 1 +5V O 5 V DC 5 V DC power to LLPWB
Connected to 2 FAIL I 0/3.3 V DC Error signal
LED lamp
3 SDA I/O 0/3.3 V DC Data signal
PWB
4 SCL O 0/3.3 V DC (pulse) Clock signal
5 VSET O Analog Analog voltage
6 SGND - - Ground
7 PGND - - Ground
8 PWM O 0/3.3 V DC PWM signal
9 POW O 0/3.3 V DC LED driver: On/Off
10 +24V1 O 24 V DC 24 V DC power to LLPWB
11 +24V1 O 24 V DC 24 V DC power to LLPWB
YC7 1 +24V1 I 24 V DC 24 V DC power from PSPWB
power source
3 GND - - Ground
PWB
4 GND - - Ground
5 +24V2 I 24 V DC 24 V DC power from PSPWB

2LL/2LJ/2LH

YC8 1 +3.3V O 3.3 V DC 3.3 V DC power to HPS
home posi-
3 HP_SW I 0/3.3 V DC HPS: On/Off
tion sensor
Connected to 2 CCDCLK1 O 0/3.3 V DC (pulse) Clock signal
CCD PWB
3 GND - - Ground
4 CCDCLK2 O 0/3.3 V DC (pulse) Clock signal
5 GND - - Ground
6 CP O 0/3.3 V DC Clamp signal
7 GND - - Ground
8 RS O 0/3.3 V DC Reset signal
9 VSG O 0/3.3 V DC Control signal
10 TG O 0/3.3 V DC Control signal
11 SH O 0/3.3 V DC Shift gate signal
12 AFE_SI I 0/3.3 V DC (pulse) Serial communication data signal
13 AFE_EN O 0/3.3 V DC (pulse) Enable signal
14 AFE_SO O 0/3.3 V DC (pulse) Serial communication data signal
15 AFECLK O 0/3.3 V DC (pulse) Clock signal
16 GND - - Ground
17 DIS_CIS_1P I 0/3.3 V DC (pulse) Image data signal
18 DIS_CIS_1N I 0/3.3 V DC (pulse) Image data signal
19 GND - - Ground
22 GND - - Ground
25 GND - - Ground
28 GND - - Ground
31 GND - - Ground
32 DIS_CISCKP O 0/3.3 V DC (pulse) Clock signal
33 DIS_CISCKN O 0/3.3 V DC (pulse) Clock signal

2LL/2LJ/2LH

Connected to 35 CCDSEL O 0/3.3 V DC Select signal
CCD PWB
36 GND - - Ground
37 AFE_MCLK O 0/3.3 V DC (pulse) Clock signal
38 GND(AFE_SHD) - - Ground
39 CLPIN O 0/3.3 V DC Clamp signal
40 GND(AFE_SHP) - - Ground
YC11 1 +5.1V O 5 V DC 5 V DC power to CCDPWB
CCD PWB
3 +10V O DC10V 10 V DC power to CCDPWB
4 GND - - Ground
5 +3.3V O 3.3 V DC 3.3 V DC power to CCDPWB
6 GND - - Ground
YC12 1 GND(SPARE) - - Ground
Connected to 2 DP_TMG I 0/3.3 V DC DPTS: On/Off
DP main
3 DP_RDY I 0/3.3 V DC ready signal
PWB
4 DP_SEL O 0/3.3 V DC Select signal
5 DP_CLK O 0/3.3 V DC (pulse) Clock signal
6 DP_SO O 0/3.3 V DC (pulse) Serial communication data signal
7 DP_SI I 0/3.3 V DC (pulse) Serial communication data signal
8 DP_OPEN I 0/3.3 V DC DPOCSW: On/Off
9 Reserve - - Not used
10 GND - - Ground
11 GND - - Ground
12 GND - - Ground
13 Reserve - - Not used
14 24V2 O 24 V DC 24 V DC power to DPMPWB
Connected to 2 ORG_SW I 0/3.3 V DC OSS: On/Off
original size
3 +5.1V O 5 V DC 5 V DC power to OSS
sensor

2LL/2LJ/2LH

YC14 1 +3.3V O 3.3 V DC 3.3 V DC power to ODSW
original
3 CO_SW I 0/3.3 V DC ODSW: On/Off
detection
switch

2LL/2LJ/2LH
2-3-5 Operation PWB 1
1 6
12 1
5 1
1
YC3 15 YC15 40 YC4 1
12
YC2
YC1
YC10
12
YC9
1
1
4
1
YC8
YC6
1
20
1
YC11
5
9
2
YC12
1
YC13
YC14
4
YC5
1
1
4
1
SW1
Figure 2-3-5 Operation PWB 1 silk-screen diagram

2LL/2LJ/2LH-1

main PWB 3 GND - - Ground
4 +5V I 5 V DC 5 V DC power from MPWB
YC2 1 VBUS I 5 V DC 5 V DC power input
Connected to 2 DN I/O - USB data signal
main PWB
3 DP I/O - USB data signal
4 ID - - Not used
5 GND - - Ground
Connected to 2 PANEL_STATUS O 0/3.3 V DC Operation panel status signal
main PWB
3 INT_POWERKEY O 0/3.3 V DC Power key: On/Off
_N
4 PANEL RESET I 0/3.3 V DC Reset signal
5 AUDIO I Analog Audio output signal
6 LIGHTOFF_POW I 0/3.3 V DC Sleep return signal
ERON
7 SHUT_DOWN I 0/3.3 V DC 24 V down signal
8 LED_PROCESSI I 0/3.3 V DC Processing LED control signal
NG_N
9 LED_ATTENTION I 0/3.3 V DC Attention LED control signal
_N
10 LED_MEMORY_N I 0/3.3 V DC Memory LED control signal
11 SUPND_POWER I 3.3 V DC 3.3 V DC power from MPWB
12 ENERGY_SAVE I 0/3.3 V DC Energy save signal
13 DEEP_POWERO I 0/3.3 V DC Sleep return signal
N
14 SECOND_TRAY_ - - Not used
SW
15 GND - - Ground

2LL/2LJ/2LH

Connected to 2 SGND - - Ground
LCD
3 CK O 0/3.3 V DC (pulse) LCD clock signal
4 SGND - - Ground
5 SGND - - Ground
6 SC O 0/3.3 V DC LCD Control signal
7 R0(LSB) O 0/3.3 V DC LCD Control signal
8 R1 O 0/3.3 V DC LCD Control signal
10 SGND - - Ground
13 R5(MSB) O 0/3.3 V DC LCD Control signal
14 SGND - - Ground
15 G0(LSB) O 0/3.3 V DC LCD Control signal
16 G1 O 0/3.3 V DC LCD Control signal
18 SGND - - Ground
21 G5(MSB) O 0/3.3 V DC LCD Control signal
22 SGND - - Ground
23 B0(LSB) O 0/3.3 V DC LCD Control signal
24 B1 O 0/3.3 V DC LCD Control signal
26 SGND - - Ground
29 B5(MSB) O 0/3.3 V DC LCD Control signal
30 SGND - - Ground
31 H_SYNC O 0/3.3 V DC (pulse) LCD horizontal synchronization signal
32 SGND - - Ground
33 V_SYNC O 0/3.3 V DC (pulse) LCD vertical synchronization signal
34 SGND - - Ground
35 ENB O 0/3.3 V DC LCD enable signal
36 CM O 0/3.3 V DC LCD mode switch signal

2LL/2LJ/2LH

YC4 37 3.3V O 3.3 V DC 3.3 V DC power to LCD
Connected to 38 3.3V O 3.3 V DC 3.3 V DC power to LCD
LCD
39 3.3V O 3.3 V DC 3.3 V DC power to LCD
40 3.3V O 3.3 V DC 3.3 V DC power to LCD
YC5 1 TOP Y+ I Analog Touch panel Y+ position signal
Connected to 2 LEFT X+ I Analog Touch panel X+ position signal
touch panel
3 BOT Y- I Analog Touch panel Y- position signal
4 RIGHT X- I Analog Touch panel X- position signal
YC6 1 KEY4 I 0/3.3 V DC (pulse) Operation panel key scan return sig-
nal 4
Connected to 2 SCAN2 O 0/3.3 V DC (pulse) Scan signal 2
operation 3 INT_POWERKEY I 0/3.3 V DC Power key: On/Off
PWB 2 _N
4 SCAN1 O 0/3.3 V DC (pulse) Scan signal 1
5 LED1 O 0/3.3 V DC (pulse) Operation panel LED display drive
signal 1
6 SUPND_POWER O 3.3 V DC 3.3 V DC power to OPWB2
7 KEY3 I 0/3.3 V DC (pulse) Operation panel key scan return sig-
nal 3
nal 2
nal 1
signal 0
nal 0
15 GND - - Ground
16 GND - - Ground
17 GND - - Ground
18 GND - - Ground
19 GND - - Ground
20 GND - - Ground

2LL/2LJ/2LH

YC7 1 SCAN4 O 0/3.3 V DC (pulse) Scan signal 4
Connected to 2 KEY5 I 0/3.3 V DC (pulse) Operation panel key scan return sig-
operation nal 5
PWB 2
nal 6
nal 7
signal 2
signal 3
signal 4
12 GND - - Ground
YC8 1 PROCESSING_L O 0/3.3 V DC Processing LED control signal
ED
Connected to 2 MEMORY LED O 0/3.3 V DC Memory LED control signal
operation 3 ATTENTION_LED O 0/3.3 V DC Attention LED control signal
PWB 3
4 GND - - Ground
YC11 1 VO2 O Analog Speaker sound signal (+)
Connected to 2 VO1 O Analog Speaker sound signal (-)
speaker
YC14 1 LED_A O 0/3.3 V DC LED control signal
LCD
3 LED_C I 0/3.3 V DC LED control signal
4 NC - - Not used

2LL/2LJ/2LH
2-3-6 Front PWB
18 YC10 1 1 16
4 1
YC4
1
11 1
YC12
YC11
YC9
10
4
YC1
20 1 19 1
1
12
YC2 YC3
YC8
YC5
1 10 1 11
1
18
YC7 YC6
Figure 2-3-6 Front PWB silk-screen diagram

2LL/2LJ/2LH

YC1 1 +3.3V1 I 3.3 V DC 3.3 V DC power from EPWB
Connected to 2 +3.3V2 I 3.3 V DC 3.3 V DC power from EPWB
engine PWB
3 +5V I 5 V DC 5 V DC power from EPWB
6 GND - - Ground
7 GND - - Ground
8 GND - - Ground
9 GND - - Ground
10 GND - - Ground
YC2 1 EXIT_FAN_REM I 0/24 V DC EFFM: On/Off
Connected to 2 CONTAIN_FAN_R I 0/24 V DC FUFFM: On/Off
engine PWB EM
3 ERS_Bk_REM I 0/24 V DC CL: On/Off
4 EEP_SDA1 I/O 0/3.3 V DC (pulse) EEPROM data signal
5 EEP_SCL1 I 0/3.3 V DC (pulse) EEPROM clock signal
6 GND - - Ground
7 TN_CLK I 0/3.3 V DC (pulse) Clock signal
8 TPD_Bk_1 O Analog DEVPWB detection signal
9 DLP_VCONT_Bk_1 I 0/3.3 V DC DEVPWB control signal
10 TPD_TEMP_Bk O Analog Developer thermistor detection sig-
nal
11 LSU_FAN I 0/24 V DC LSUFM: On/Off
12 FRONT_OPEN O 0/3.3 V DC FRCSW: On/Off
13 I2C_SCL I/O 0/3.3 V DC (pulse) EEPROM data signal
14 I2C_SDA I 0/3.3 V DC (pulse) EEPROM clock signal
15 WTNR_LED I 0/3.3 V DC (pulse) WTS1 LED emitter signal
16 WTNR_NEAR O Analog WTS2 detection signal
17 WTNR_NEAR_VC I 0/3.3 V DC WTS2 control signal
ONT
18 WTNR_FULL O Analog WTS1 detection signal
19 WTNR_FULL_VCO I 0/3.3 V DC WTS1 control signal
NT
20 WTNR_SET O Analog WTS2 detection signal

2LL/2LJ/2LH

YC3 1 JUNC_SOL_RET I 0/24 V DC FSSOL: On/Off (RET)
Connected to 2 JUNC_SOL_REM I 0/24 V DC FSSOL: On/Off (ACT)
engine PWB
3 GND - - Ground
4 EXIT_PAPER_SEN O 0/3.3 V DC EFS: On/Off
S
5 EXIT_FEED_SENS O 0/3.3 V DC SBS: On/Off
6 SB_MOT_REM I 0/3.3 V DC EM: On/Off
7 SB_MOT_DIR I 0/3.3 V DC EM drive switch signal
8 SB_MOT_PD I 0/3.3 V DC EM control signal
9 SB_MOT_CLK I 0/3.3 V DC (pulse) EM clock signal
10 SB_MOT_PH I 0/3.3 V DC EM control signal
11 ENCODE_ Bk O 0/3.3 V DC SRS: On/Off
12 THOP_Bk O 0/3.3 V DC THS: On/Off
13 THOP_MOT_REM I 0/3.3 V DC THM: On/Off
14 THOP_MOT_DIR I 0/3.3 V DC THM drive switch signal
15 DLP_FAN_H I 0/24 V DC DEVFM: On/Off
16 DLP_FAN_L I 0/24 V DC DEVFM: On/Off
17 ROT_HP_SENS O 0/3.3 V DC DEVSS: On/Off
19 NC - - Not used
Connected to 2 ROT_HP_SENS I 0/3.3 V DC DEVSS: On/Off
eject unit
3 +5V O 5 V DC 5 V DC power to DEVSS
4 SB_CORE B/ O 0/24 V DC (pulse) EM drive control signal
5 SB_CORE A/ O 0/24 V DC (pulse) EM drive control signal
6 SB_CORE B O 0/24 V DC (pulse) EM drive control signal
7 SB_CORE A O 0/24 V DC (pulse) EM drive control signal
8 GND - - Ground
9 EXIT_FEED_SENS I 0/3.3 V DC SBS: On/Off
10 5V O 5 V DC 5 V DC power to SBS
11 GND - - Ground
12 EXIT_PAPER_SEN I 0/3.3 V DC EFS: On/Off
S
13 5V O 5 V DC 5 V DC power to EFS
14 +24V1 O 24 V DC 24 V DC power to FSSOL
15 JUNC_SOL_REM O 0/24 V DC FSSOL: On/Off (REM)
16 JUNC_SOL_RET O 0/24 V DC FSSOL: On/Off (RET)

2LL/2LJ/2LH

YC5 1 +24V1 O 24 V DC 24 V DC power to DEVFM1
Connected to 2 DRUM_AIR_FAN O 0/24 V DC DEVFM1: On/Off
inner unit
3 +24V1 O 24 V DC 24 V DC power to DEVFM2
4 DRUM_DLP_FAN O 0/24 V DC DEVFM2: On/Off
5 THOP_MOT_BK O 0/24 V DC THM: On/Off
6 +24V O 24 V DC 24 V DC power to THM
7 GND - - Ground
8 THOP_Bk I 0/3.3 V DC THS: On/Off
9 +5V O 5 V DC 5 V DC power to THS
10 GND - - Ground
11 ENCODE_Bk I 0/3.3 V DC SRS: On/Off
12 +5V O 5 V DC 5 V DC power to SRS
YC6 1 3.3V2 O 3.3 V DC 3.3 V DC power to DRPWB
Connected to 2 EEP_SCL1 O 0/3.3 V DC (pulse) EEPROM clock signal
drum unit
4 GND - - Ground
5 DRM_ADR0_Bk - - Not used
6 DRM_ADR1_Bk - - Not used
7 24V O 24 V DC 24 V DC power to CL
8 ERS_Bk_REM O 0/24 V DC CL: On/Off
24V - - Not used
ERS_REM_PRE - - Not used
8 NC - - Not used
YC7 1 TPD_TEMP_BK I Analog Developer thermistor detection sig-
nal
Connected to 2 DLP_VCONT_BK_ O 0/3.3 V DC DEVPWB control signal
developer 1
unit
3 TPD_BK_1 I Analog DEVPWB detection signal
4 TN_CLK_BK O 0/3.3 V DC (pulse) Clock signal
5 GND - - Ground
6 DLP_ADR1_BK - - Not used
7 DLP_ADR0_BK - - Not used
9 EEP_SCL1 O 0/3.3 V DC (pulse) EEPROM clock signal
10 3.3V2 O 3.3 V DC 3.3 V DC power to DEVPWB

2LL/2LJ/2LH-1

YC8 1 WTNR_SET I Analog WTS2 detection signal
outer temper-
3 5V O 5 V DC 5 V DC power to WTS1
ature sensor,
front cover 4 WTNR_FULL I Analog WTS1 detection signal
switch, LSU 5 WTNR_LED O 0/3.3 V DC (pulse) WTS1 LED emitter signal
fan motor
6 5V_LED O 5 V DC 5 V DC power to WTS1
and waste
toner sensor 7 5V O 5 V DC 5 V DC power to WTS2
8 WTNR_NEAR - - Not used
9 WTNR_LED - - Not used
10 5V_LED - - Not used
11 3.3V1 O 3.3 V DC 3.3 V DC power to OTEM
12 I2C_SDA I 0/3.3 V DC (pulse) EEPROM data signal
13 GND - - Ground
14 I2C_SCL O 0/3.3 V DC (pulse) EEPROM clock signal
15 FRONT_OPEN O 0/3.3 V DC FRCSW: On/Off
16 GND - - Ground
17 24V O 24 V DC 24 V DC power to LSUFM
18 LSU_FAN O 0V/24 V DC LSUFM: On/Off
YC9 1 ROT_MOT_REM - - Not used
Connected to 2 ROT_MOT_CLK - - Not used
engine PWB
3 ROT_MOT_DIR - - Not used
4 ROT_MOT_PD - - Not used
5 GND - - Ground
6 IH_COIL_FAN_H - - Not used
7 IH_COIL_FAN_L - - Not used
8 IH_COIL_FAN_AL - - Not used
M
9 IH_CORE_SENS - - Not used
10 IH_CORE_MOT_C - - Not used
LK
11 IH_CORE_MOT_R - - Not used
EM

2LL/2LJ/2LH-1

YC11 1 EXIT FAN O 0/24 V DC EFFM: On/Off
Connected to 2 24V O 24 V DC 24 V DC power to EFFM
eject front fan
3 24V O 24 V DC 24 V DC power to FUFFM
motor and
fuser front 4 CONTAINER_FAN O 0/24 V DC FUFFM: On/Off
fan motor
YC12 1 5V O 5 V DC 5 V DC power to LEDPWB1
Connected to 2 LED O 0/5 V DC LED: On/Off
LED PWB 1/ 3 5V O 5 V DC 5 V DC power to LEDPWB2
2
4 LED O 0/5 V DC LED: On/Off
YC13 1 INNER_MOT_A O 0/24 V DC INM: On/Off
Connected to 2 INNER_MOT_B O 0/24 V DC INM: On/Off
inner motor

2LL/2LJ/2LH
2-3-7 Feed PWB 1
YC20
2
11 1
YC19
8 YC3 1
64
1
7
YC18
1 YC27 9 4 YC26 1
YC4
1
20
1
YC17
50
YC4
1
18
1
YC14
2
15
YC16
YC10
1
12 1
1
1
YC23
6
YC4
YC12
YC13
YC22 YC25
1
2 1
YC9 4 1
8
10
8 1 7 YC8 1
3 1
YC11 YC5
YC15
3 1 3 1
Figure 2-3-7 Feed PWB 1 silk-screen diagram

2LL/2LJ/2LH

Connected to 2 DU1_MOT_CLK I 0/3.3 V DC (pulse) DUM1 clock signal
engine PWB
3 DU1_MOT_PD I 0/3.3 V DC DUM1 control signal
4 EDGE_FAN_H I 0/24 V DC EFM1,2: On/Off
5 EDGE_FAN_L I 0/24 V DC EFM1,2: On/Off
6 LOOP_SENS O 0/3.3 V DC LPS: On/Off
7 REG_BK_LED I Analog IDS control signal
8 REG_BK_SENS1_ O Analog IDS detection signal
P
S
10 GND - - Ground
12 DU_SENS O 0/3.3 V DC DUS2: On/Off
S
M2
M1
17 DU_OPEN O 0/3.3 V DC DUCSW: On/Off
18 DU2_REM_CL_LO I 0/3.3 V DC DUM2/DUCL2: On/Off
W
19 DU2_CLK I 0/3.3 V DC (pulse) DUM2 clock signal
20 DU2_PD I 0/3.3 V DC DUM2 control signal
22 TC_TONER_VCON - - Not used
T
23 TC_TONER_FULL - - Not used
24 TC_TONER_LED - - Not used
25 TC_MOT_LOCK - - Not used
26 TC_MOT_REM - - Not used
27 GND - - Ground
28 MPF_LIFT1 I 0/24 V DC MPLM: On/Off
29 MPF_LIF2 I 0/24 V DC MPLM: On/Off
30 MPF_CL_REM I 0/24 V DC MPPFCL: On/Off

2LL/2LJ/2LH

YC1 31 MPF_JAM O 0/3.3 V DC MPFS: On/Off
Connected to 32 MPF_LIFT_DOWN O 0/3.3 V DC MPLS2: On/Off
engine PWB
33 MPF_LIFT_UP O 0/3.3 V DC MPLS1: On/Off
34 MPF_PPR_SET O 0/3.3 V DC MPPS: On/Off
35 3.3V3 I 3.3 V DC 3.3 V DC power from EPWB
36 MPF_LNG O 0/3.3 V DC MPPLSW: On/Off
37 MPF_WID3 O 0/3.3 V DC MPPWSW: On/Off
40 MPF_TABLE O 0/3.3 V DC MPTSW: On/Off
41 FSR_MOT_BRK I 0/3.3 V DC FUM break signal
42 FSR_MOT_DIR I 0/3.3 V DC FUM drive switch signal
43 GND - - Ground
44 FSR_MOT_RDY I 0/3.3 V DC FUM ready signal
45 FSR_MOT_CLK I 0/3.3 V DC (pulse) FUM clock signal
46 FSR_MOT_REM I 0/3.3 V DC FUM: On/Off
47 FSR_CL - - Not used
48 MAIN_HEAT I 0/3.3 V DC FH1: On/Off
49 SUB_HEAT I 0/3.3 V DC FH2: On/Off
50 ZEROC I 0/3.3 V DC (pulse) Zero-cross signal
51 EXIT_REAR_FAN_ I 0/24 V DC ERFM: On/Off
H
52 EXIT_REAR_FAN_ I 0/24 V DC ERFM: On/Off
L
53 GND - - Ground
54 JOB_SOL_REM I 0/24 V DC JSFSSOL: On/Off
55 JOB_OPEN_SENS O 0/3.3 V DC JSOCS: On/Off
56 JOB_MOT_DIR I 0/3.3 V DC JSEM drive switch signal
57 JOB_MOT_CLK I 0/3.3 V DC (pulse) JSEM clock signal
58 JOB_MOT_REM I 0/3.3 V DC JSEM: On/Off
59 JOB_SET O 0/3.3 V DC Job separator set signal
60 GND - - Ground

2LL/2LJ/2LH

Connected to 2 FSR_RELAY I 0/3.3 V DC Fuser relay signal
engine PWB
3 DRM_HEAT - - Not used
4 POWER_OFF I 0/3.3 V DC Power off signal
5 M_TEMP - - Not used
6 REG_F_LED - - Not used
7 REG_SENS_F_P - - Not used
8 GND - - Ground
9 REG_SENS_F_S - - Not used
10 REG_R_LED - - Not used
11 REG_SENS_R_P - - Not used
12 REG_SENS_R_S - - Not used
13 CLN_SOL_REM I 0/24 V DC CLSOL: On/Off (ACT)
14 CLN_SOL_RET I 0/24 V DC CLSOL: On/Off (RET)
15 GND - - Ground
16 REG_MOT_REM(C I 0/3.3 V DC RM/RCL: On/Off
L)
17 REG_MOT_CLK I 0/3.3 V DC (pulse) RM clock signal
18 REG_MOT_PD I 0/3.3 V DC RM control signal
19 IH_PWB_FAN_AL O 0/3.3 V DC HFM alarm signal
M
20 IH_PWB_FAN_H I 0/24 V DC HFM: On/Off
21 IH_PWB_FAN_L I 0/24 V DC HFM: On/Off
22 DLP_MOT_CLR_DI - - Not used
R
DY
24 DLP_MOT_CLR_C - - Not used
LK
EM
26 GND - - Ground
DIR
RDY
CLK

2LL/2LJ/2LH

YC2 30 DRM_MOT_CLR_ - - Not used
REM
Connected to 31 DLP_MOT_BK_DI I 0/3.3 V DC DEVM drive switch signal
engine PWB R
32 DLP_MOT_BK_RD O 0/3.3 V DC DEVM ready signal
Y
33 DLP_MOT_BK_CL I 0/3.3 V DC (pulse) DEVM clock signal
K
34 DLP_MOT_BK_RE I 0/3.3 V DC DEVM: On/Off
M
35 DRM_MOT_BK_B I 0/3.3 V DC DRM break signal
RK
36 DRM_MOT_BK_DI I 0/3.3 V DC DRM drive switch signal
R
37 DRM_MOT_BK_R O 0/3.3 V DC DRM ready signal
DY
38 DRM_MOT_BK_CL I 0/3.3 V DC (pulse) DRM clock signal
K
39 DRM_MOT_BK_R I 0/3.3 V DC DRM: On/Off
EM
40 GND - - Ground
41 TRANS_MOT_BRK I 0/3.3 V DC TCM break signal
42 TRANS_MOT_DIR I 0/3.3 V DC TCM drive switch signal
43 TRANS_MOT_RDY O 0/3.3 V DC TCM ready signal
44 TRANS_MOT_CLK I 0/3.3 V DC (pulse) TCM clock signal
45 TRANS_MOT_RE I 0/3.3 V DC TCM: On/Off
M
46 TCON_SET - - Not used
47 DU_ENTER_SENS O 0/3.3 V DC DUS1: On/Off
48 EXIT_FAN I 0/24 V DC EFM: On/Off
49 DU_MOT_REM I 0/3.3 V DC DUM1/DUCL1: On/Off
50 GND - - Ground
YC3 1 +24V1 O 24 V DC 24 V DC power to EPWB
Connected to 2 +24V1 O 24 V DC 24 V DC power to EPWB
engine PWB 3 GND - - Ground
4 GND - - Ground
5 +12V O 12 V DC 12 V DC power to EPWB
6 GND - - Ground
7 +5V O 5 V DC 5 V DC power to EPWB
8 GND - - Ground

2LL/2LJ/2LH

YC4 1 +24V1 I 24 V DC 24 V DC power from PSPWB
Connected to 2 +24V1 I 24 V DC 24 V DC power from PSPWB
power source
PWB
4 +12V I 12 V DC 12 V DC power from PSPWB
5 GND - - Ground
6 GND - - Ground
7 GND - - Ground
8 GND - - Ground
Connected to 2 DRM_HEAT_REM O 0/3.3 V DC FH: On/Off
power source
3 POWER_OFF O 0/3.3 V DC Sleep mode signal: On/Off
PWB
YC8 1 NC - - Not used
Connected to 2 DLP_MOT_Bk_DIR O 0/3.3 V DC DEVM drive switch signal
developer
3 DLP_MOT_Bk_RD I 0/3.3 V DC DEVM ready signal
motor
Y
4 DLP_MOT_Bk_CL O 0/3.3 V DC (pulse) DEVM clock signal
K
5 DLP_MOT_Bk_RE O 0/24 V DC DEVM: On/Off
M
6 GND - - Ground
7 24V2 O 24 V DC 24 V DC power to DEVM
Connected to 2 DRM_MOT_Bk_BR O 0/3.3 V DC DRM break signal
drum motor K
3 DRM_MOT_Bk_DI O 0/3.3 V DC DRM drive switch signal
R
4 DRM_MOT_Bk_RD I 0/3.3 V DC DRM ready signal
Y
5 DRM_MOT_Bk_CL O 0/3.3 V DC (pulse) DRM clock signal
K
6 DRM_MOT_Bk_RE O 0/24 V DC DRM: On/Off
M
7 GND - - Ground
8 24V2 O 24 V DC 24 V DC power to DRM

2LL/2LJ/2LH

YC11 1 +24V1 O 24 V DC 24 V DC power to HFM
Connected to 2 IH_PWB_FAN O 0/24 V DC HFM: On/Off
heater fan
3 IH_PWB_FAN_AL I 0/3.3 V DC HFM alarm signal
motor
M
4 +12V - - Not used
5 IH_PWB_FAN2 - - Not used
6 IH_PWB_FAN2_AL - - Not used
M
YC12 1 +24V2 O 24 V DC 24 V DC power to FPWB2
Connected to 2 +24V2 O 24 V DC 24 V DC power to FPWB2
feed PWB 2 3 +5V O 5 V DC 5 V DC power to FPWB2
4 GND - - Ground
5 GND - - Ground
6 GND - - Ground
YC13 1 TRANS_MOT_BRK O 0/3.3 V DC TRM break signal
Connected to 2 TRANS_MOT_DIR O 0/3.3 V DC TRM drive switch signal
relay PWB
3 TRANS_MOT_RDY I 0/3.3 V DC TRM ready signal
4 TRANS_MOT_CLK O 0/3.3 V DC (pulse) TRM clock signal
5 TRANS_MOT_RE O 0/24 V DC TRM: On/Off
M
6 GND - - Ground
7 24V2 O 24 V DC 24 V DC power to TRM
8 GND - - Not used
9 24V2 - - Not used
10 TANK_SET - - Not used
YC14 1 REG_BK_LED O Analog IDS control signal
Connected to 2 REG_BK_SENS1_ I Analog IDS detection signal
relay PWB P
S
5 DU_SENS I 0/3.3 V DC DUS2: On/Off
S
7 5V O 5 V DC 5 V DC power to RYPWB
8 PRESS_RLSMOT2 - - Not used
1

2LL/2LJ/2LH

YC14 9 PRESS_RLSMOT2 - - Not used
Connected to 10 24V2 O 24 V DC 24 V DC power to RYPWB
relay PWB
12 DU_CL_LOWER_R O 0/24 V DC DUCL2: On/Off
EM
13 DU_OPEN_SW I 0/3.3 V DC DUCSW: On/Off
14 DU2_B/ O 0/24 V DC (pulse) DUM2 drive control signal
15 DU2_A/ O 0/24 V DC (pulse) DUM2 drive control signal
16 DU2_B O 0/24 V DC (pulse) DUM2 drive control signal
17 DU2_A O 0/24 V DC (pulse) DUM2 drive control signal
18 GND - - Ground
YC15 1 +24V1 O 24 V DC 24 V DC power to PCUSW
Connected to 2 N.C - - Not used
paper con- 3 +24V2 I 24 V DC 24 V DC power from PCUSW
veying unit
switch
YC16 1 +24V2 O 24 V DC 24 V DC power to HVPWB
high voltage
PWB
relay PWB
3 CL_SOL_REM O 0/24 V DC CLSOL: On/Off
4 24V2 O 24 V DC 24 V dc power to CLSOL
5 MPF_LIFT_MOT_B O 0/24 V DC MPLM: On/Off
6 MPF_LIFT_MOT_A O 0/24 V DC MPLM: On/Off
7 24V2 O 24 V DC 24 V dc power to RYPWB
9 MPF_JAM_SENS I 0/3.3 V DC MPFS: On/Off
_SENS
11 MPF_LIFT_UP_SE I 0/3.3 V DC MPLS1: On/Off
NS
13 LED_3.3V3 O 3.3 V DC 3.3 V DC power to RYPWB
14 MPF_LNG I 0/3.3 V DC MPPLSW: On/Off

2LL/2LJ/2LH

YC17 17 MPF_WID1 I 0/3.3 V DC MPPWSW: On/Off
Connected to 18 MPF_TABLE I 0/3.3 V DC MPTSW: On/Off
relay PWB
19 GND - - Ground
20 GND - - Ground
YC18 1 FSR_MOT_BRK O 0/3.3 V DC FUM break signal
Connected to 2 FSR_MOT_DIR O 0/3.3 V DC FUM drive switch signal
fuser motor
3 FSR_MOT_RDY I 0/3.3 V DC FUM ready signal
4 FSR_MOT_CLK O 0/3.3 V DC (pulse) FUM clock signal
5 FSR_MOT_REM O 0/24 V DC FUM: On/Off
6 GND - - Ground
7 24V2 O 24 V DC 24 V DC power to FUM
YC19 1 EXIT_REAR_FAN O 0/24 V DC ERFM: On/Off
Connected to 2 +24V1 O 24 V DC 24 V DC power to ERFM
eject rear fan
motor
YC20 1 JOB_SET I 0/3.3 V DC Job separator set signal
job separator
3 GND - - Ground
4 JOB_MOT_REM O 0/24 V DC JSEM: On/Off
5 24V1 O 24 V DC 24 V DC power to JSMPWB
6 JOB_MOT_CLK O 0/3.3 V DC (pulse) JSEM clock signal
7 5V O 5 V DC 5 V DC power to JSMPWB
8 JOB_MOT_DIR O 0/3.3 V DC JSEM drive switch signal
9 JOB_OPEN_SENS I 0/3.3 V DC JSOCS: On/Off
10 JOB_SOL_REM O 0/24 V DC JSFSSOL: On/Off
11 NC - - Not used

2LL/2LJ/2LH

YC22 1 24V2 O 24 V DC 24 V DC power to RCL
Connected to 2 REG_CL_REM O 0/24 V DC RCL: On/Off
registration
clutch
YC23 1 DU_ENTER_SENS I 0/3.3 V DC DUS1: On/Off
Connected to 2 EXIT_FAN O 0/24 V DC EFM: On/Off
relay PWB
3 24V2 O 24 V DC 24 V DC power to RYPWB
4 DU_CL_UPPER_R O 0/24 V DC DUCL1: On/Off
EM
5 GND - - Ground
6 DU1_B/ O 0/24 V DC (pulse) DUM1 drive control signal
10 EDGE_FAN_REM - - Not used
12 LOOP_SENS I 0/3.3 V DC LPS: On/Off
YC25 1 REG_MOT_B/ O 0/24 V DC (pulse) RM drive control signal
Connected to 2 REG_MOT_A/ O 0/24 V DC (pulse) RM drive control signal
registration
3 REG_MOT_B O 0/24 V DC (pulse) RM drive control signal
motor
4 REG_MOT_A O 0/24 V DC (pulse) RM drive control signal
YC26 1 3.3V2 O 3.3 V DC 3.3 V DC power to EPWB
Connected to 2 3.3V3 O 3.3 V DC 3.3 V DC power to EPWB
engine PWB 3 GND - - Ground
4 GND - - Ground
YC27 1 MAIN_HEAT_REM O 0/3.3 V DC FH1: On/Off
Connected to 2 SUB_HEAT_REM O 0/3.3 V DC FH2: On/Off
fuser heater
3 +24V2 O 24 V DC 24 V DC power to FHPWB
PWB
4 ZEROC O 0/3.3 V DC (pulse) Zero-cross signal
5 GND - - Ground
6 GND - - Ground
7 FSR_RELAY O 0/3.3 V DC Fuser relay signal
8 +24V1 O 24 V DC 24 V DC power to FHPWB
9 PRESS_REM - - Not used

2LL/2LJ/2LH
2-3-8 Feed PWB 2
1 6
50 1
YC11
YC1
1
YC10
1 7
2
YC2
1
1
YC4
YC7
4
28
1
15
24
YC3
YC8
15
14
1
1
13
12
YC12
YC13
1
1
YC5
YC6
2
3
3
Figure 2-3-8 Feed PWB 2 silk-screen diagram

2LL/2LJ/2LH

Connected to 2 FEED_MOT_REM I 0/3.3 V DC PFM: On/Off
engine PWB
3 FEED_MOT_CLK I 0/3.3 V DC (pulse) PFM clock signal
4 FEED_MOT_RDY O 0/3.3 V DC PFM ready signal
5 FEED_MOT_DIR I 0/3.3 V DC PFM drive switch signal
6 FEED_CL1_REM I 0/24 V DC PFCL1: On/Off
7 FEED_CL2_REM I 0/24 V DC PFCL2: On/Off
8 ASIST_CL2 I 0/24 V DC ASCL2: On/Off
9 LIFT_MOT2_REM I 0/24 V DC LM2: On/Off
10 GND - - Ground
11 LIFT_MOT1_REM I 0/24 V DC LM1: On/Off
1
12 CAS2_WID O 0/3.3 V DC PWSW2: On/Off
13 CAS2_LNG3 O 0/3.3 V DC PLSW2: On/Off
16 CAS1_WID O 0/3.3 V DC PWSW1: On/Off
20 GND - - Ground
21 CAS2_QUANT2 O 0/3.3 V DC PGS2(L): On/Off
22 CAS2_QUANT1 O 0/3.3 V DC PGS2(U): On/Off
23 CAS1_QUANT2 O 0/3.3 V DC PGS1(L): On/Off
24 CAS1_QUANT1 O 0/3.3 V DC PGS1(U): On/Off
25 LIFT_MOT1_LOC O 0/3.3 V DC LM1 lock signal
K
26 LIFT_MOT2_LOC O 0/3.3 V DC LM2 lock signal
K
27 CURRENT_SIG O 0/3.3 V DC Current signal
28 V-FEED_CL I 0/24 V DC PCCL: On/Off
29 COVER_OPEN O 0/3.3 V DC RLCSW: On/Off
30 FEED2_SENS O 0/3.3 V DC PFPCS1: On/Off
31 CAS1_P0 O 0/3.3 V DC FS1: On/Off
32 CAS1_LIFT_UP O 0/3.3 V DC LS1: On/Off
33 GND - - Ground
34 CAS1_EMPTY O 0/3.3 V DC PS1: On/Off

2LL/2LJ/2LH

YC1 35 PICK_SOL1_RET I 0/24 V DC PUSOL1: On/Off (RET)
Connected to 36 PICK_SOL1_REM I 0/24 V DC PUSOL1: On/Off (ACT)
engine PWB
37 CAS2_P0 O 0/3.3 V DC FS2: On/Off
38 CAS2_LIFT_UP O 0/3.3 V DC LS2: On/Off
39 CAS2_EMPTY O 0/3.3 V DC PS2: On/Off
40 PICK_SOL2_RET I 0/24 V DC PUSOL2: On/Off (RET)
41 PICK_SOL2_REM I 0/24 V DC PUSOL2: On/Off (ACT)
42 GND - - Ground
43 REG_SENS O 0/3.3 V DC RS: On/Off
44 FEED1_SENS O 0/3.3 V DC PCS: On/Off
45 BEND_SENS O 0/3.3 V DC RDS: On/Off
46 MID_MOT_PH I 0/3.3 V DC MM control signal
47 MID_MOT_REM( I 0/3.3 V DC MM/MCL: On/Off
ROL_CL)
48 MID_MOT_CLK I 0/3.3 V DC (pulse) MM clock signal
49 MID_MOT_PD I 0/3.3 V DC MM control signal
50 ASIST_CL1 I 0/24 V DC ASCL1: On/Off
YC2 1 FEED_MOT_GAI - - Not used
N
Connected to 2 FEED_MOT_DIR O 0/3.3 V DC PFM drive switch signal
paper feed
3 FEED_MOT_RDY I 0/3.3 V DC PFM ready signal
motor
4 FEED_MOT_CLK O 0/3.3 V DC (pulse) PFM clock signal
5 FEED_MOT_REM O 0/24 V DC PFM: On/Off
6 GND - - Ground
7 24V2 O 24 V DC 24 V DC power to PFM
YC3 1 CAS1_LNG1 I 0/3.3 V DC PLSW1: On/Off
Connected to 2 CAS1_LNG2 I 0/3.3 V DC PLSW1: On/Off
paper length 3 GND - - Ground
switch 1/2,
paper width 4 CAS1_LNG3 I 0/3.3 V DC PLSW1: On/Off
switch 1/2, lift 5 CAS1_WID I 0/3.3 V DC PWSW1: On/Off
motor 1/2,
6 GND - - Ground
paper gauge
sensor 1(U)/ 7 CAS2_LNG1 I 0/3.3 V DC PLSW2: On/Off
(L) and paper 8 CAS2_LNG2 I 0/3.3 V DC PLSW2: On/Off
gauge sen-
sor 2(U)/(L) 9 GND - - Ground
12 GND - - Ground

2LL/2LJ/2LH

YC3 13 LIFT_MOT1_RET O 0/24 V DC LM1: On/Off
Connected to 14 LIFT_MOT1_DR O 0/24 V DC LM1: On/Off
paper length
15 LIFT_MOT2_RET O 0/24 V DC LM2: On/Off
switch 1/2,
paper width 16 LIFT_MOT2_DR O 0/24 V DC LM2: On/Off
switch 1/2, lift 17 LED_5V O 5 V DC 5 V DC power to PGS1(U)
motor 1/2,
18 GND - - Ground
paper gauge
sensor 1(U)/ 19 CAS1_QUANT1 I 0/3.3 V DC PGS1(U): On/Off
(L) and paper 20 LED_5V O 5 V DC 5 V DC power to PGS1(L)
gauge sen-
sor 2(U)/(L) 21 GND - - Ground
23 LED_5V O 5 V DC 5 V DC power to PGS2(U)
24 GND - - Ground
26 LED_5V O 5 V DC 5 V DC power to PGS2(L)
27 GND - - Ground
YC4 1 FEED_CL1_REM O 0/24 V DC PFCL1: On/Off
Connected to 2 24V2 O 24 V DC PFCL124 V DC power to PFCL1
paper feed
clutch 1/2
4 24V2 O 24 V DC 24 V DC power to PFCL2
Connected to 2 24V2 O 24 V DC 24 V DC power to PCCL
paper con- 3 V-FEED_CL_REM O 0/24 V DC PCCL: On/Off
veying clutch
YC6 1 LED_5V O 5 V DC 5 V DC power to PCS
paper con- 3 FEED2_SENS I 0/3.3 V DC PCS: On/Off
veying sen-
sor and 4 COVER_OPEN I 0/3.3 V DC PCCSW: On/Off
paper con- 5 GND - - Ground
veying cover
switch

2LL/2LJ/2LH

YC7 1 MID_B/ O 0/24 V DC (pulse) MM drive control signal
Connected to 2 MID_A/ O 0/24 V DC (pulse) MM drive control signal
middle motor,
3 MID_B O 0/24 V DC (pulse) MM drive control signal
regist deflec-
tion sensor, 4 MID_A O 0/24 V DC (pulse) MM drive control signal
middle sen- 5 BEND_SENS I 0/3.3 V DC RDS: On/Off
sor, registra-
6 GND - - Ground
tion sensor
and middle 7 5V O 5 V DC 5 V DC power to RDS
clutch 8 GND - - Ground
9 FEED1_SENS I 0/3.3 V DC MS: On/Off
10 5V O 5 V DC 5 V DC power to MS
11 GND - - Ground
12 REG_SENS I 0/3.3 V DC RS: On/Off
13 5V O 5 V DC 5 V DC power to RS
14 MID_CL_REM O 0/24 V DC MCL: On/Off
15 24V2 O 24 V DC 24 V DC power to MCL
YC8 1 24V2 O 24 V DC 24 V DC power to PUSOL1
Connected to 2 PICK_SOL1_REM O 0/24 V DC PUSOL1: On/Off (ACT)
primary
paper feed
unit 4 LED_5V O 5 V DC 5 V DC power to PS1
5 GND - - Ground
6 CAS1_EMPTY_S I 0/3.3 V DC PS1: On/Off
ENS
7 LED_5V O 5 V DC 5 V DC power to LS1
8 GND - - Ground
9 CAS1_LIFT_UP_ I 0/3.3 V DC LS1: On/Off
SENS
10 5V O 5 V DC 5 V DC power to FS1
11 CAS1_P0_SENS I 0/3.3 V DC FS1: On/Off
12 GND - - Ground
13 24V2 O 24 V DC 24 V DC power to PUSOL2
16 LED_5V O 5 V DC 5 V DC power to PS2
17 GND - - Ground
18 CAS2_EMPTY_S I 0/3.3 V DC PS2: On/Off
ENS
19 LED_5V O 5 V DC 5 V DC power to LS2

2LL/2LJ/2LH

Connected to 21 CAS2_LIFT_UP_ I 0/3.3 V DC LS2: On/Off
primary SENS
paper feed 22 5V O 5 V DC 5 V DC power to FS2
unit
23 CAS2_P0_SENS I 0/3.3 V DC FS2: On/Off
24 GND - - Ground
YC10 1 ASIST_CL1 O 0/24 V DC ASCL1: On/Off
Connected to 2 24V2 O 24 V DC 24 V DC power to ASCL1
assist clutch
1
feed PWB 1
3 GND - - Ground
4 +5V O 5 V DC 5 V DC power to FPWB1
YC12 1 ASIST_CL2 O 0/24 V DC ASCL2: On/Off
Connected to 2 24V2 O 24 V DC 24 V DC power to ASCL2
assist clutch
2
YC13 1 CURRENT_SIG I 0/3.3 V DC Current signal
current PWB 3 5V1 I 5 V DC 5 V DC power from CRPWB

2LL/2LJ/2LH
2-3-9 Relay PWB
1 YC6 7
10 YC5 1
9
2
YC15
YC2
1
1
1
1
YC12
YC3
16
20
1
YC4
8
2
1
YC7
4
1
YC8
YC1
1 6
3
YC14
YC9
18
1
12
11
YC10
YC13
1
YC16
1
1 8
YC11
9 1
Figure 2-3-9 Relay PWB silk-screen diagram

2LL/2LJ/2LH

Connected to 2 DU2_A I 0/24 V DC (pulse) DUM2 drive control signal
feed PWB 1
3 DU2_B I 0/24 V DC (pulse) DUM2 drive control signal
4 DU2_A/ I 0/24 V DC (pulse) DUM2 drive control signal
5 DU2_B/ I 0/24 V DC (pulse) DUM2 drive control signal
6 DU_OPEN_SW O 0/3.3 V DC DUCSW: On/Off
7 DU_CL_LOWER_R I 0/24 V DC DUCL2: On/Off
EM
9 24V2 I 24 V DC 24 V DC power from FPWB1
10 PRESS_RLS_REM - - Not used
2
11 PRESS_RLS_REM - - Not used
1
12 5V I 5 V DC 5 V DC power from FPWB1
S
14 DU_SENS O 0/3.3 V DC DUS2: On/Off
S
P
18 REG_BK_LED I Analog IDS control signal
Connected to 2 MPF_LNG I 0/3.3 V DC MPPLSW: On/Off
MP tray unit
3 5V O 5 V DC 5 V DC power to MPPLSW
6 GND - - Ground
8 GND - - Ground
9 MPF_TABLE I 0/3.3 V DC MPTSW: On/Off

2LL/2LJ/2LH

YC3 1 LED_3.3V3 O 3.3 V DC 3.3 V DC power to MPPLSW
MP tray unit
4 GND - - Ground
5 MPF_LIFT_UP_SE I 0/3.3 V DC MPLS1: On/Off
NS
6 5V O 5 V DC 5 V DC power to MPLS1
7 GND - - Ground
_SENS
9 5V O 5 V DC 5 V DC power to MPLS1
10 GND - - Ground
11 MPF_JAM_SENS I 0/3.3 V DC MPFS: On/Off
12 5V O 5 V DC 5 V DC power to MPFS
14 24V2 O 24 V DC 24 V DC power to MPPFCL
15 MPF_LIFT_DR_A O 0/24 V DC MPLM: On/Off
16 MPF_LIFT_DR_B O 0/24 V DC MPLM: On/Off
YC4 1 24V2 O 24 V DC 24 V DC power to CLSOL
Connected to 2 ID_SOL_REM O 0/24 V DC CLSOL: On/Off
cleaning
solenoid
YC5 1 TANK_SET - - Not used
Connected to 2 24V2 - - Not used
feed PWB 1
3 GND - - Not used
5 GND - - Ground
6 TRANS_MOT_RE I 0/24 V DC TRM: On/Off
M
7 TRANS_MOT_CLK I 0/3.3 V DC (pulse) TRM clock signal
8 TRANS_MOT_RDY O 0/3.3 V DC TRM ready signal
9 TRANS_MOT_DIR I 0/3.3 V DC TRM drive switch signal
10 TRANS_MOT_BRK I 0/3.3 V DC TRM break signal

2LL/2LJ/2LH-1

YC6 1 24V2 O 24 V DC 24 V DC power to TRM
transfer
3 TRANS_MOT_RE O 0/24 V DC TRM: On/Off
motor
M
4 TRANS_MOT_CLK O 0/3.3 V DC (pulse) TRM clock signal
5 TRANS_MOT_RDY I 0/3.3 V DC TRM ready signal
6 TRANS_MOT_DIR O 0/3.3 V DC TRM drive switch signal
7 TRANS_MOT_BRK O 0/3.3 V DC TRM break signal
YC7 1 24V2 O 24 V DC 24 V DC power to DUCL2
Connected to 2 DU_CL2_REM O 0/24 V DC DUCL2: On/Off
duplex clutch 3 DU_OPEN I 0/3.3 V DC DUCSW: On/Off
2, duplex
cover switch 4 GND - - Ground
and duplex 5 DU2_B/ O 0/24 V DC (pulse) DUM2 drive control signal
motor 2
Connected to 2 DU_SENS I 0/3.3 V DC DUS2: On/Off
duplex sen- 3 5V O 5 V DC 5 V DC power to DUS2
sor 2
YC10 1 LOOP_SENS I 0/3.3 V DC LPS: On/Off
loop sensor
3 5V O 5 V DC 5 V DC power to LPS
ant ID sensor
4 3.3V O 3.3 V DC 3.3 V DC power to IDS
5 REG_BK_LED O Analog IDS control signal
6 GND - - Ground
P
S
9 GND - - Not used
11 5V - - Not used

2LL/2LJ/2LH

Connected to 2 DU_ENTER_SENS I 0/3.3 V DC DUS1: On/Off
duplex sen-
3 5V O 5 V DC 5 V DC power to DUS1
sor 1, eject
fan motor 4 EXIT_FAN_REM O 0/24 V DC EFM1: On/Off
and duplex 5 24V2 O 24 V DC 24 V DC power to EFM1
clutch 1
6 EXIT_FAN_REM O 0/24 V DC EFM2: On/Off
7 24V2 O 24 V DC 24 V DC power to EFM2
8 24V2 O 24 V DC 24 V DC power to DUCL1
9 DU_CL_UPPER_R O 0/24 V DC DUCL1: On/Off
EM
feed PWB 1 3 MPF_TABLE O 0/3.3 V DC MPTSW: On/Off
7 MPF_LNG O 0/3.3 V DC MPPLSW: On/Off
8 LED_3.3V3 I 3.3 V DC 3.3 V DC power from FPWB1
9 MPF_PPR_SET O 0/3.3 V DC MPPS: On/Off
10 MPF_LIFT_UP_SE O 0/3.3 V DC MPLS1: On/Off
NS
11 MPF_LIFT_DOWN O 0/3.3 V DC MPLS2: On/Off
_SENS
12 MPF_JAM_SENS O 0/3.3 V DC MPFS: On/Off
13 MPF_CL_REM I 0/24 V DC MPPFCL: On/Off
15 MPF_LIFT_MOT_A I 0/24 V DC MPLM: On/Off
16 MPF_LIFT_MOT_B I 0/24 V DC MPLM: On/Off
17 24V2 O 24 V DC 24 V DC power from FPWB1
18 CLN_SOL_REM I 0/24 V DC CLSOL: On/Off
19 GND - - Ground
20 GND - - Ground

2LL/2LJ/2LH

YC13 1 LOOP_SENS O 0/3.3 V DC LPS: On/Off
Connected to 2 EDGE_FAN_REM - - Not used
feed PWB 1
4 DU1_A I 0/24 V DC (pulse) DUM1 drive control signal
5 DU1_B I 0/24 V DC (pulse) DUM1 drive control signal
6 DU1_A/ I 0/24 V DC (pulse) DUM1 drive control signal
7 DU1_B/ I 0/24 V DC (pulse) DUM1 drive control signal
8 GND - - Ground
9 DU_CL_UPPER_R I 0/24 V DC DUCL1: On/Off
EM
11 EXIT_FAN I 0/24 V DC EFM: On/Off
12 DU_ENTER_SENS O 0/3.3 V DC DUS1: On/Off
YC16 1 DU1_B/ O 0/24 V DC (pulse) DUM1 drive control signal
Connected to 2 DU1_A/ O 0/24 V DC (pulse) DUM1 drive control signal
duplex motor 3 DU1_B O 0/24 V DC (pulse) DUM1 drive control signal
1
6 24V2 - - Not used
8 24V2 - - Not used

2LL/2LJ/2LH
2-3-10 LSU relay PWB
1 10 1 30 6 1
YC1
YC3 YC4
40
YC2
1
Figure 2-3-10 LSU relay PWB silk-screen diagram

2LL/2LJ/2LH-1

Connected to 2 +3.3V2 O 3.3 V DC 3.3 V DC power from EPWB
engine PWB
3 GND - - Ground
4 GND - - Ground
5 +5V AN O 5 V DC 5 V DC power from EPWB
6 +5V AN O 5 V DC 5 V DC power from EPWB
YC2 1 SDI O 0/3.3 V DC (pulse) Serial communication data signal
engine PWB
3 SDO I 0/3.3 V DC (pulse) Serial communication data signal
4 GND - - Ground
5 SCLK I 0/3.3 V DC (pulse) Clock signal
6 GND - - Ground
k
k
9 GND - - Ground
10 DATA_3N_Bk(LVD I 0/3.3 V DC (pulse) Video data signal (N)
S)
11 DATA_3P_Bk(LVD I 0/3.3 V DC (pulse) Video data signal (P)
S)
12 GND - - Ground
13 DATA_4N_Bk(LVD I 0/3.3 V DC (pulse) Video data signal (N)
S)
14 DATA_4P_Bk(LVD I 0/3.3 V DC (pulse) Video data signal (P)
S)
15 GND - - Ground
16 BD_Bk O 0/3.3 V DC (pulse) Horizontal synchronization signal
17 LSU_TH_Bk O Analog LSU thermistor detection signal
18 PARA_SIG_P3_2B I 0/3.3 V DC APCPWB control signal
k
19 LDD_CS 2 Bk I 0/3.3 V DC APCPWB control signal
20 LDD_CS 1 Bk I 0/3.3 V DC APCPWB control signal
21 MSET_N I 0/3.3 V DC Control signal
22 CUALM_BK O 0/3.3 V DC APCPWB alarm signal
23 INT_ST_2_Bk I 0/3.3 V DC APCPWB control signal
24 INT_ST_1_Bk I 0/3.3 V DC APCPWB control signal

2LL/2LJ/2LH-1

YC2 25 PARA_SIG_P0_Bk I 0/3.3 V DC APCPWB control signal
Connected to 26 PARA_SIG_P1_Bk I 0/3.3 V DC APCPWB control signal
engine PWB
27 PARA_SIG_P2_Bk I 0/3.3 V DC APCPWB control signal
30 GND - - Ground
31 SDCLK_Bk I 0/3.3 V DC (pulse) APCPWB clock signal
32 GND - - Ground
33 GAIN_FIX_Bk I 0/3.3 V DC APCPWB control signal
34 GND - - Ground
35 DATA_1NBk(LVDS) I 0/3.3 V DC (pulse) Video data signal (N)
36 DATA_1PBk(LVDS) I 0/3.3 V DC (pulse) Video data signal (P)
37 GND - - Ground
38 DATA_2NBk(LVDS) I 0/3.3 V DC (pulse) Video data signal (N)
39 DATA_2PBk(LVDS) I 0/3.3 V DC (pulse) Video data signal (P)
40 GND - - Ground
Connected to 2 BD Bk I 0/3.3 V DC (pulse) Horizontal synchronization signal
APC PWB 3 LSU_TH Bk I Analog LSU thermistor detection signal
4 PALA_SIG P3_2Bk - - Not used
5 LDD_CS 2 Bk - - Not used
6 5V O 5 V DC 5 V DC power to APCPWB
10 SDI1 I 0/3.3 V DC (pulse) Serial communication data signal
11 SDO1 O 0/3.3 V DC (pulse) Serial communication data signal
12 CLK1 O 0/3.3 V DC (pulse) APCPWB clock signal
13 EEPROM CS 1 Bk I/O 0/3.3 V DC (pulse) APCPWB EEPROM data signal
14 MSET_N O 0/3.3 V DC APCPWB control signal
15 CUALM Bk I 0/3.3 V DC APCPWB alarm signal
16 INT_ST 2 Bk O 0/3.3 V DC APCPWB control signal
17 INT_ST 1 Bk O 0/3.3 V DC APCPWB control signal
18 PALA_SIG P0 Bk O 0/3.3 V DC APCPWB control signal

2LL/2LJ/2LH-1

YC3 22 PALA_SIG P4 Bk O 0/3.3 V DC APCPWB control signal
Connected to 23 SDCLK Bk O 0/3.3 V DC (pulse) APCPWB clock signal
APC PWB 24 GAIN FIX Bk O 0/3.3 V DC APCPWB control signal
27 GND - - Ground
30 GND - - Ground

2LL/2LJ/2LH-2
2-4-1 Appendixes
2-4 Appendixes
(1) List of maintenance parts

Maintenance part name
Part No.
Name used in service manual Name used in parts list
Paper feed pulley
45/55 ppm model PULLEY FEED $9*5/
35 ppm model PULLEY FEED ASSY $9*5*
Separation pulley
45/55 ppm model PULLEY RETARD $9*5-
35 ppm model RETARD ROLLER ASSY $9*56
Forwarding pulley
45/55 ppm model PULLEY PICKUP $9*5.
35 ppm model PULLEY PICKUP ASSY $9*57
Left registration roller PARTS ROLLER REGIST L SP $9*5:
Regist cleaner L PARTS CLEANER REGIST ASSY $9*58

SP
Right registration roller ROLLER REGIST R $9*5-
Regist cleaner R UNDER CLEANER REGIST 4
Middle roller PARTS ROLLER MIDDLE L SP $9*54
Paper conveying roller PARTS ROLLER FEED LOW SP $9*5:
Assist roller
45/55 ppm model PARTS ROLLER ASSIST SP $9*55
Transfer belt unit PARTS BELT ASSY SP $9*5:
MP paper feed pulley PULLEY PAPER FEED /
MP forwarding pulley PULLEY SEPARATION 0

2LL/2LJ/2LH-2

Part No.
Name used in service manual Name used in parts list
Contact glass PARTS CONTACT-GLASS ASSY(C) $9*50
SP

LED mount PARTS MOUNT LED ASSY SP $9*53
Original size sensor SENSOR ORIGINAL $9*5&
ISU PARTS IMAGE SCANNER L SP -

Lower duplex roller
45/55 ppm model PARTS ROLLER DU LOW SP $9*5.
35 ppm model PARTS ROLLER DU LOW SP $9*5/
Middle duplex roller PARTS ROLLER DU MID SP $9*5<
Upper duplex roller

45/55 ppm model PARTS ROLLER DU UP SP $9*58
35 ppm model PARTS ROLLER DU UP SP $9*5;
Eject roller B PARTS ROLLER EXIT SP $9*54
Eject roller PARTS ROLLER EXIT SP $9*5:
Drum filter FILTER FAN INNER ASSY(ZG) AVGR16417H
Developer filter FILTER DUCT DLP AVGR16418W
Belt filter PARTS FILTER BELT UNIT(V) SP AVGR15369H
LSU filter PARTS FILTER FAN ASSY(Z) SP AVGR15516T
Toner filter FILTER LEFT SIDE -
Left filter FILTER LEFT SIDE -
Eject filter FILTER TOP -

2LL/2LJ/2LH-2
(2) Maintenance kits

Parts No.
Name used in service Name used in parts list
220 - 240 V specifications
MK-6305A/Maintenance kit MK-6305A/MAINTENANCE KIT B0988
(600,000 pages)
Drum unit DK-6305 -
Developer unit DV-6305 -
Fuser unit FK-6306 -
Transfer belt unit PARTS BELT ASSY SP -
Eject filter FILTER TOP -
Toner/Left filter FILTER LEFT SIDE -

2LL/2LJ/2LH-2
(3) Periodic maintenance procedures
Section Maintenance User 600K/1200K Points and cautions Page

part/location call
Test copy Perform at the maxi- Test Test
and test mum copy size copy copy
print

part/location call
Paper feed Paper feed pulley Check Check Clean with alcohol or a dry cloth. P.1-5-7
,conveying- Clean Replace CH:performing U901 and check
section feeding count: Target to replace at
150K.
Separation pulley Check Check Clean with alcohol or a dry cloth. P.1-5-7
Clean Replace CH:performing U901 and check
feeding count: Target to replace at
150K.
Forwarding pulley Check Check Clean with alcohol or a dry cloth. P.1-5-7
150K.
Left registration roller Clean Clean Clean with alcohol or a dry cloth.
Regist cleaner L Clean Clean Vacuum. P.1-5-44
Right registration Clean Clean Clean with alcohol or a dry cloth.
roller
Regist cleaner R Clean Clean Vacuum. P.1-5-44
Middle roller Clean Clean Clean with alcohol or a dry cloth.
Paper conveying Clean Clean Clean with alcohol or a dry cloth.
roller
Assist roller Clean Clean Clean with alcohol or a dry cloth.
45/55 ppm model
Transfer belt unit - Replace Every 600k Replace.(MK KIT)
MP paper feed pulley Check Check Clean with alcohol or a dry cloth. P.1-5-14
150K.
MP forwarding pulley Check Check Clean with alcohol or a dry cloth.
150K.
Guides Clean Clean Clean with alcohol or a dry cloth. P.1-5-43

2LL/2LJ/2LH-2

part/location call
Scanner Contact glass - Clean DP slit glass: CL dry cloth or alco-
Optical hol wet cloth is strictly prohibited.
section When installing DP, CL with dry
cloth.Contact glass for original:
CL alcohol or dry cloth.(Face
side)
Only when unusual image (line or
stain) appear,wipe the back side
with dry cloth after cleaning with
alcohol only. (Back side)
Mirror A Clean - Clean:airblow after dry cloth only
when unusual image(line) arises.
Mirror B Clean - Clean:airblow after dry cloth only
2pcs
ISU lens Clean - Clean:airblow after dry cloth only
LED mount Check - Replace if there are image prob-
Replace lems.
RAIL ISU R/F Lubricat - Apply grease if abnormal sound
ion and jitter image appears
Optical rail grease PG-671

Original size sensor Check - Alcohol or dry cloth if there is
Clean problem.(lighting part and light
reception part.)
ISU Check - Replace if there are image prob- P.1-5-26
Replace lems.

part/location call
Transfer Transfer belt unit - Replace Every 600k Replace. (MK KIT) P.1-5-41
section

2LL/2LJ/2LH-2

part/location call
Developer Developer unit Clean Replace Vacuum. P.1-5-35
section Every 600k Replace. (MK KIT)
Developer duct Clean Clean Vacuum. P.2-4-9

part/location call
Drum sec- Drum unit Clean Replace Vacuum. P.1-5-36
tion Every 600k Replace. (MK KIT)

part/location call
Fuser sec- Fuser unit - Replace Every 600k Replace.(MK KIT) P.1-5-45
tion

part/location call
Eject,Duple Lower duplex roller - Clean Clean with alcohol or a dry cloth.
x section
Middle duplex roller - Clean Clean with alcohol or a dry cloth.
Upper duplex roller - Clean Clean with alcohol or a dry cloth.
Eject roller B - Clean Clean with alcohol or a dry cloth.
Eject roller - Clean Clean with alcohol or a dry cloth.

part/location call
Outer, Outer Covers - Clean Clean with alcohol or a dry cloth.
Cover

2LL/2LJ/2LH-3

part/location call
Driving, Drum filter Clean Clean Vacuum. P.1-5-82
Other
Developer filter Clean Clean Vacuum. P.1-5-82
Belt filter Clean Clean Vacuum. P.1-5-80
LSU filter - Clean Vacuum. P.1-5-81
Toner filter Replace Replace Every 600k Replace. (MK KIT) P.1-5-78
Left filter 2pcs P.1-5-79
Eject filter Replace Replace Every 600k Replace. (MK KIT) P.1-5-77
2pcs
Cleaning the toner Clean Clean Vacuum. P.2-4-8
collection duct
Cleaning the inner air Clean Clean Vacuum. P.2-4-8
duct
Cleaning the duct at Clean Clean Vacuum. P.2-4-9
the back of the devel-
oper unit
Each Clutches Check Check Check the image registration and
Replace paper feed conveying condition
on paper feed conveying (regis-
tration) part.
Sensors Check Check Clean with alcohol or a dry cloth.
(lighting part and light reception
part.)
Image quality Check Check
Adjust Adjust
* : Please do not use spray containing flamable gas for air-blow or air-brush purposes.

2LL/2LJ/2LH-3
(4) Inner Cleaning

1. Cleaning the toner collection duct
Procedure
rear lower cover(see page P.1-5-63).
3. Remove the toner box.
4. Insert the vacuum cleaner inlet from the
opening at the back side of the rear
cover, vacuum toner for 1 minutes.
Screw
Screw Toner box
Figure 2-4-1
2. Cleaning the inner air duct
Procedure
1. Remove the developer unit and the

drum unit (see page P.1-5-35,P.1-5-36).
2. Pull out the paper conveying unit.
3. Remove the two screws holding the
feed guide plate. Toner exhaust port
4. Clean the back of the paper conveying
plate.
5. Check that the toner outlet, to which the
cooling duct is joined in the developer
unit, is not clogged with toner.
6. Remove toner accumulated in the duct Screw
by a vacuum cleaner via the toner out-
let.
Paper conveying plate

Screw
Figure 2-4-2

2LL/2LJ/2LH-3
3. Cleaning the duct at the back of the developer unit
Procedure Developer unit

1. Remove the developer unit
(see page P.1-5-35).
2. Remove the developer cooling ducts
from the developer unit by releasing
four hooks at the top and six hooks at
the bottom.
3. Remove toner inside the cooling ducts
using a vacuum cleaner. Hooks
4. And then refit all the removed parts.
Developer cooling duct

Hooks
Figure 2-4-3
*: When refitting the developer cooling

duct, first insert the positioning pin (at
the back, 1) and hook the hooks in posi-
tion.
Positioning pin
Figure 2-4-4
*: To be performed at 300kpm mainte-

nance:
Clean the conveying guide (see page
P.1-5-43) and clean both sides of the
developer unit.
Cleaning Developer unit
Figure 2-4-5

2LL/2LJ/2LH-1
(5) Repetitive defects gauge
First occurrence of defect
38 mm/1 1/2" Charger roller

39 mm/1 9/16" Magnet roller
Sleeve roller
44 mm/1 3/4" Transfer roller
57 mm/2 1/4" Right registration roller
63 mm/2 1/2" Left registration roller
109.9 mm/4 5/16" Press roller

Heat roller
125.7 mm/4 15/16" Drum
164 mm/6 7/16" Transfer belt

2LL/2LJ/2LH
(6) Firmware environment commands

The printer maintains a number of printing parameters in its memory. There parameters may be changed per-
manently with the FRPO (Firmware RePrOgram) commands.
This section provides information on how to use the FRPO command and its parameters using examples.
Using FRPO commands for reprogramming firmware

The current settings of the FRPO parameters are listed as optional values on the service status page.
Note: Before changing any FRPO parameter, print out a service status page, so you will know the parameter
values before the changes are made. To return FRPO parameters to their factory default values, send the
FRPO INIT (FRPO-INITialize) command.(!R! FRPO INIT; EXIT;)
The FRPO command is sent to the printer in the following sequence:

!R! FRPO parameter, value; EXIT;
Example: Changing emulation mode to PCL6
!R! FRPO P1, 6; EXIT;
FRPO parameters
Factory
Item FRPO Setting values
setting
Top margin A1 Integer value in inches 0
A2 Fraction value in 1/100 inches 0
Left margin A3 Integer value in inches 0
Page length A5 Integer value in inches 17
Page width A7 Integer value in inches 17
Default pattern resolution B8 0: 300 dpi 0
1: 600 dpi
Page orientation C1 0: Portrait 0
1: Landscape
Default font No. * C2 Middle two digits of power-up font 0
C3 Last two digits of power-up font 0
C5 First two digits of power-up font 0
PCL font switch C8 0: HP compatibility mode 0
32: Conventional compatibility mode
Total host buffer size H8 0 to 99 in units of the size defined by FRPO S5 5
Form feed time-out value H9 Value in units of 5 seconds (1 to 99) 6 (30 s)
Top margin L1 Top margin (integer value) 0
L2 Top margin (decimal value) 50
Left margin L3 Left margin (integer value) 0
L4 Left margin (decimal value) 50

2LL/2LJ/2LH
Factory
setting
Page length L5 Page length (integer value) 10
L6 Page length (decimal value) 61
Page width L7 Page width (integer value) 8
L8 Page width (decimal value) 11
Duplex mode N4 0: Off 0
1: Long edge binding
2: Short edge binding
Sleep timer time-out time N5 Value in units of 1 minute (1 to 240) 35 ppm: 45
45/55 ppm: 60
Ecoprint level N6 0: Off 0
2: On
Default emulation mode P1 6: PCL 6 220-240V: 6
9: KPDL
Carriage-return action P2 0: Ignores 1
1: Carriage-return
2: Carriage-return + linefeed
Linefeed action P3 0: Ignores 1
1: Linefeed
2: Linefeed + carriage-return
Automatic emulation switching P4 0: AES disabled 220-240V: 0
1: AES enabled
Alternative emulation P5 Same as the P1 values except that 9 is 6
ignored.
Automatic emulation switching P7 0: Page eject commands 220-240V: 10
trigger 1: None
2: Page eject and prescribe EXIT commands
3: Prescribe EXIT commands
4: Formfeed (^L) commands
6: Pescribe EXIT and formfeed commands
10: Page eject commands; if AES fails,
resolves to KPDL
Command recognition character P9 ASCII code of 33 to 126 82 (R)
Default stacker R0 1 (inner tray) 1

2LL/2LJ/2LH
Factory
setting
Default paper size R2 0: Size of the default paper cassette (See R4.) 0
1: Monarch (3-7/8 7-1/2 inches)
2: Business (4-1/8 9-1/2 inches)
3: International DL (11 22 cm)
4: International C5 (16.2 22.9 cm)
5: Executive (7-1/4 10-1/2 inches)
6: US Letter (8-1/2 11 inches)
7: US Legal (8-1/2 14 inches)
8: A4 (21.0 29.7 cm)
9: JIS B5 (18.2 25.7 cm)
10: A3 (29.7 42 cm)
11: B4 (25.7 36.4 cm)
12: US Ledger (11 17 inches)
13: ISO A5
14: A6 (10.5 14.8 cm)
15: JIS B6 (12.8 18.2 cm)
16: Commercial #9 (3-7/8 8-7/8 inches)
17: Commercial #6 (3-5/8 6-1/2 inches)
18: ISO B5 (17.6 25 cm)
19: Custom (11.7 17.7 inches)
20:B4toA4
21:A3toA4
22:A4toA4[98%]
23:STKtoA4
24:STKtoB4
30: C4 (22.9 32.4 cm)
31: Hagaki (10 14.8 cm)
32: Ofuku-hagaki (14.8 20 cm)
33: Officio II
38:12 18
39: 8K
40: 16K
42: 8.5 13.5 inches
50: Statement
51: Folio
52: Youkei 2
53: Youkei 4
Default cassette R4 0: MP tray 1
1: Cassette 1
2: Cassette 2
3: Cassette 3
4: Cassette 4
5: Cassette 5
A4/letter equation S4 0: Off 1
1: On
Host buffer size S5 0: 10 KB 1
1: 100 KB
2: 1024 KB

2LL/2LJ/2LH
Factory
setting
Wide A4 T6 0: Off 0
1: On
Line spacing * U0 Lines per inch (integer value) 6
U1 Lines per inch (decimal value) 0
Character spacing * U2 Characters per inch (integer value) 10
U3 Characters per inch (decimal value) 0
Country code U6 0: US-ASCII 41
1: France
2: Germany
3: UK
4: Denmark
5: Sweden
6: Italy
7: Spain
8: Japan
9: US Legal
10: IBM PC-850 (Multilingual)
11: IBM PC-860 (Portuguese)
12: IBM PC-863 (Canadian French)
13: IBM PC-865 (Norwegian)
14: Norway
15: Denmark 2
16: Spain 2
17: Latin America
50 - 99: HP PCL symbol set coding
Code set at power up in U7 0: Same as the default emulation mode (P1) 53
daisywheel emulation 1: IBM
6: PCL
Font pitch for fixedpitch scalable U8 Default font pitch (integer value) 10
font *
U9 Default font pitch (decimal value) 0
Font height for the default scal- V0 Integer value in 100 points: 0 to 9 0
able font *
V1 Integer value in points: 0 to 99 12
V2 decimal value in 1/100 points: 0, 25, 50, 75 0
Default scalable font * V3 Name of typeface of up to 32 characters, Courier
enclosed with single or double quotation marks

2LL/2LJ/2LH-3
Factory
setting
Default weight V9 0: Courier = darkness 5
(courier and letter Gothic) Letter Gothic = darkness
1: Courier = regular
Letter Gothic = darkness
4: Courier = darkness
Letter Gothic = regular
5: Courier = regular
Letter Gothic = regular
Paper type for the MP tray X0 1: Plain 1

2: Transparency
3: Preprinted
4: Label
5: Bond
6: Recycle
7: Vellum
9: Letterhead
10: Color
11: Prepunched
12: Envelope
13: Cardstock
14: Coated
16: Thick
17: High quality
21 to 28: Custom1 to 8
Paper type for cassettes 1 and 2 X1 1: Plain 1
X2 3: Preprinted
5: Bond
6: Recycled
7: Vellum
9: Letterhead
10: Color
11: Prepunched
16: Thick
17: High quality
Paper type for optional cas- X3 1: Plain 1
settes 3 to 7 X4 3: Preprinted
X5 5: Bond
6: Recycled
9: Letterhead
10: Color
11: Prepunched
17: High quality
PCL paper source X9 0: Paper selection depending on an escape 0
sequence compatible with HP-LJ5Si.
2: Paper selection depending on an escape
sequence compatible with HP-LJ8000.

2LL/2LJ/2LH
Factory
setting
Automatic continue for Press Y0 0: Off 0
GO 1: On
Automatic continue timer Y1 Value in units of 5 seconds (1 to 99) 6 (30 s)
Error message for device error Y3 0: Not detect 127
127: Detect
Duplex operation for specified Y4 0: Off 0

paper type 1: On
(Prepunched, Preprintedand
Letterhead)
Default operation for PDF direct Y5 0: Enlarges or reduces the image to fit in the 0
printing current paper size. Loads paper from the
current paper cassette.
1: Through the image. Loads paper which is
the same size as the image.
2: Enlarges or reduces the image to fit in the
current paper size. Loads Letter, A4 size
paper depending on the image size.
3: Through the image. Loads Letter, A4 size
8: Through the image. Loads paper from the
current paper cassette.
9: Through the image. Loads Letter, A4 size
10: Enlarges or reduces the image to fit in the
current paper size. Loads Letter, A4 size
e-MPS error Y6 0: Does not print the error report and display 3
the error message.
1: Prints the error report.
2: Displays the error message.
3: Prints the error report and displays the error
message.
*: Ignored in some emulation modes.

2LL/2LJ/2LH-3
(7) System Error (Fxxxx) Outline
The document is subscribed to describe the outline of the factors of the Fxxx errors that are not described in
the
service manual. Please utilize it to refer to checking the factors.
Please utilize it as the measures when the system is not recovered after power off/on
or it frequently occurs.
It may be from the hardware factor while the error (Fxxx) is indicated.
Please initially check the following.
Check the DDR2 memory and neighboring parts:

Check the contact of YS1 or YS2 with the memory. Replace the memory if the error repeats.
Check the HDD if the error repeats after replacing the main board.
Take care, however, of handling the data when formatting or replacing the HDD.
Check the HDD : Replace the HDD if the error repeats after formatting the HDD.

2LL/2LJ/2LH-3
No. Content Check procedure & check point Remark 1 Remark 2

1) Check connection of the harness (Panel to Main board), (Main board to HDD)
and connectors and check function.
2) Check contact of the DDR memory by detaching and reattaching. and check [Main - Panel Interface]
function. replace it if available and check function. *User data and installed Main bord:YC12, YC1,YC30
Lock-up at Welcome display
3) Format the HDD and check function. (U024 FULL formatting) software is deleted if Panel board:YC1,YC2,YC3
- (The display unchages after 3
4) Execute the U021Memory initializing to initialize the controller backup memory executing the U024.
minutes 30 seconds or more)
and check function. Reinstallation is required. [Main - HDD]
5) Replace the panel board and check function. Main board:YC1,YC2
6) Replace the main board and check function.
7) Retrieve the USBLOG and contact the Service Administrative Division.
[Main-Panel Interface]
1) Check connection of the harness (Panel to Main board), (Main board to HDD)
Mainboard: YC12,YC17,YC30
and connectors and check function.
Panel borad: YC1,YC2,YC3
CF000 appears in 3minutes 2) Check contact of the DDR memory by detaching and reattaching. and check
30 seconds after the function. replace it if available and check function.
If the LEDs are in the state
Welcome display continues 3) Format the HDD and check function. (U024 FULL formatting)
F000 belwo when the F000 appears,
4) Execute the U021 Memory initializing to initialize the controller backup memory
the DDR2 memory failure may
PanelMain board and check function.
be the cause. Check contact of
communication error 5) Replace the main board and check function.
theYS1 or YS2 with the
6) Replace the Panel board and check function.
memory.
Memory LED turned on
1) Format the HDD and check function. (U024 FULL formatting)
F10X 2) Execute the U021 Memory initializing to initialize the controller backup memory
An error is detected at OS or and check function.
some of device drivers. 3) Replace the main board and check function.
F11X 4) Replace the HDD and check function.
[Main-Scan Interface]
Main board:YC11,YC25
1) Check connection of the harness (Scan/DP - Main board) and connectors and
ISC board:
check function.
[Main-DP relay Interface]
An error is detected at the 3) Execute the U021 Memory initializing to initialize the controller backup memory
F12X (Check if the boards are firmly
Scan control section and check function.
connected via the board-to-
4) Replace the Scan/DP board and check function.
board connector.)
Main board:YC10
DP relay board:YC4
1) Check connection of the harness (Panel - Main board) and connectors and
check function.
[Main-Panel Interface]
F13X Main board:YC12,YC17,YC30
Panel control section and check function.
Panel board:YC1,YC2,YC3
4) Replace the panel board and check function.
1) Check connection of the harness (FAX - Main board) and connectors and check
function.
F14A,F14F: KUIO error
Main board (USB hub)
and check function.
An error is detected at the
F14X 4) Execute the U671 Clear FAX back up data (FAX DIMM clear) and check
FAX control section [Main-KUIO Interface]
function. (Take cae of the received data since it is cleared)
Main board:YC8,YC9
5) Replace the FAX_DIMM and check function.
KUIO board:YC3,YC4
6) Replace the FAX board and check function.
1) Check connection of the harness (Authentication device - Main board) and
connectors and check function.
3) Execute the U021 Memory initializing to initialize the controller backup memory Authentication device: Card
F15X authentication device control
and check function. Reader, etc.
section
5) Replace the HDD and check function.
An error is detected at the and check function.
F17X
print data control section 3) Replace the main board and check function.
1) Check connection of the harness (Engine - Main board) and connectors and
check function.
[MainENGINE Interface]
F18X Main board:YC3
Video control secion and check function.
Engine board:YC46orYC50
4) Replace the engine board and check function.
OS or some of device drivers 3) Replace the main board and check function.
F1AX 4) Replace the HDD and check function.
F1BX
Security management section 3) Replace the main board and check function.

2LL/2LJ/2LH-3

An error is detected at the *The F1C4 error appears
and check function.
F1CX File System management with the HDD security kit at
section work.
*The F1D4 error is RAM
An error is detected at the allocation error.
and check function.
F1DX Image memory management 1Check it with the U340
section 2Initialize the setting
valued with the U021
F1EX
F1FX
OS or some of device drivers 3) Replace the main board and check function.
F20X 5) Retrieve the USBLOG and contact the Service Administrative Division.
F21X [DDR2 memory contact check]
1) Check contact of the DDR memory and check function.
Main board:YS1 or YS2
A certain part of the memory be
An error is detected at the faulty. The frequency of faiure
and check function.
Image processing section occurrence is dependent on the
frequency of access to the
faulty bit. The ASIC may be
faulty if the memory is not
[DDR2 memory contact check]
1) Check contact of the DDR memory and check function. Main board:YS1 or YS2
2) Format the HDD and check function. (U024 FULL formatting) *The F248 eror is printer A certain part of the memory be
3) Execute the U021 Memory initializing to initialize the controller backup memory process error. if it repeats faulty. The frequency of failure
F24X and check function. with a certain print data, occurrence is dependent on the
System management section
4) Replace the main board and check function. retrieve the capture data and frequency of access to the
5) Replace the HDD and check function. USBLOG. faulty bit. The ASIC may be
6) Retrieve the USBLOG and contact the Service Administrative Division. faulty if the memory is not
sensitive.
and check function. *This may be owing to the
F25X Network management
3) Replace the main board and check function. users network environment.
section
4) Retrieve the USBLOG and contact the Service Administratuve Division.
(or retrieve the packet capture data depending on the reult of analysis)
F26X 1) Format the HDD and check function. (U024 FULL formatting)
F28X
System management section 3) Replace the main board and check function.
F2AX 5) Retrieve the USBLOG and contact the Service Administrative Division.
F2BX
F2CX 1) Format the HDD and check function. (U024 FULL formatting)
F2DX 2) Execute the U021 Memory initializing to initialize the controller backup memory
F2EX An error is detected at the and check function.
F2FX Network control section 3) Replace the main board and check function.
F30X 4) Retrieve the USBLOG and contact the Service Administratuve Division.
F31X (or retrieve the packet capture data depending on the reult of analysis)
F32X
1) Check connection of the harness (Scan/DP board - main board) and connectors
and check function.
F33X
Scan management section and check function.
4) Replace the Scan/DP board and check function.
1) Check connection of the harness (Panel board - main board) and connectors
and check function.
F34X
Panel management section and check function.
4) Replace the panel board and check function
F35X
Print control section 3) Replace the main board and check function.
F36X
Print management section 3) Replace the main board and check function.
and check function. F14A,F14F:KUIO error
3) Execute the U671 Clear FAX back up data (FAX DIMM clear) and check Main board (USB hub)
An error is detected at the function.
F37X
FAX management section (Take cae of the received data since it is cleared) [Main-KUIO Interface]
4) Replace the FAX_DIMM and check function. Main board: YC8,YC9
5) Replace the main board and check function. KUIO board: YC3,YC4

2LL/2LJ/2LH-3

and check function.
F38X Authentication/permit
management section
F3AX
F3BX
F3CX
F3DX 1) Format the HDD and check function. (U024 FULL formatting)
F3EX 2) Execute the U021 Memory initializing to initialize the controller backup memory
F3FX An error is detected at the and check function.
F40X Entity management section 3) Replace the main board and check function.
F43X
F44X
F45X
*The F46F is printer process
1) Replace the main board and check function. error. if it repeats with a
F46X 2) Retrieve the USBLOG certain print data, retrieve
Print image process section
(or retrieve the print capture data by case) the capture data and
USBLOG.
and check function.
F48X Image edit process control
section
F4AX 2) Execute the U021 Memory initializing to initialize the controller backup memory
Print image process section 3) Replace the main board and check function.
F4CX 4) Replace the HDD and check function.
F4DX 2) Execute the U021 Memory initializing to initialize the controller backup memory
Entity control section 3) Replace the main board and check function.
F4EX 4) Replace the HDD and check function.
F4FX
Job control section 3) Replace the main board and check function.
F50X
FAX control section 3) Replace the main board and check function.
F53X An error is detected at the and check function.
F55X Job execution section 3) Replace the main board and check function.
F59X
F5AX
F5BX
Service management section 3) Replace the main board and check function.
F5CX
F5DX
F5EX
F5FX
Service execution section 3) Replace the main board and check function.
and check function.
F60X Maintenance mode
management section
F61X
Report compiling section 3) Replace the main board and check function.
F62X
Service execution section 3) Replace the main board and check function.

2LL/2LJ/2LH-3

F63X
Device control section 3) Replace the main board and check function.
F65X An error is detected at the and check function.
F66X Print image process section 3) Replace the main board and check function.
and check function. *F684 is Overwrite error with
F68X Storage device control
3) Replace the main board and check function. the HDD security kit
section
F6AX An error is detected at the and check function.
F6BX HyPAS control section 3) Replace the main board and check function.
F6CX 5) Retrieve the USBLOG and contact the Service Administrative Division.
F6DX
F6EX 1) Check the external server and check function.
F6FX 2) Chekc the connection to the external server and check function.
F70X An error is detected at the
3) Check the network settings and check function.
F71X External Server management *FieryOption related
4) Replace the bridge board and check function.
F72X section
F73X
F74X
F75X

2LL/2LJ/2LH-3
(8) Timing chart

1. Cassette1 paper feeding, Paper size A4, Simplex, Preset 1
35 ppm model
BRFSSOL
BRCM2 BRCM1
EFS
BRCS2 BRCS1
EM
FUES
FUM
LPS
RCL
RS
MCL
MS
FS1
ASCL1
PFCL1

2LL/2LJ/2LH-3
45/55 ppm model
BRFSSOL
BRCM2 BRCM1
EFS
BRCS2 BRCS1
EM
FUES
FUM
LPS
RM
RS
MM MS
FS1
ASCL1
PFCL1

(1) Simplex_Preset 1_cassette1_A4
Service Manual

2-4-24

*1 Middle clutch (MCL): 35 ppm model, Middle motor (MM): 45 / 55 ppm model
*2 Registration clutch (RCL): 35 ppm model, Registration motor (RM): 45 / 55 ppm model
2LL/2LJ/2LH-3
Y113351-4
Y113351-4

2-4-25

2LL/2LJ/2LH-3
Service Manual
2LL/2LJ/2LH-3
35 ppm model
BRFSSOL
BRCM2 BRCM1
EFS
BRCS2 BRCS1
EM
FUES
FUM
LPS
RCL
RS
MCL
MS
PCS
PCCL
FS2
ASCL2
PFCL2

2LL/2LJ/2LH-3
45/55 ppm model
BRFSSOL
BRCM2 BRCM1
EFS
BRCS2 BRCS1
EM
FUES
FUM
LPS
RM
RS
MM MS
PCS
PCCL
FS2
ASCL2
PFCL2

Service Manual

2-4-28
4. MPF paper feeding, Paper size A4, Simplex, Preset 3

2LL/2LJ/2LH-3
Y113351-4
2LL/2LJ/2LH-3
35 ppm model
BRFSSOL
BRCM2 BRCM1
EFS
BRCS2 BRCS1
EM
FUES
FUM
LPS
RCL
RS
MCL MPPFCL
MPFS

2LL/2LJ/2LH-3
45/55 ppm model
BRFSSOL
BRCM2 BRCM1
EFS
BRCS2 BRCS1
EM
FUES
FUM
LPS
RM
RS
MPPFCL
MM
MPFS

Y113351-4
(4) Simplex_Preset 3_MPF_A4

2-4-31

2LL/2LJ/2LH-3
Service Manual
2LL/2LJ/2LH-3
5. Cassette1 paper feeding, Paper size A4, Duplex, Preset 1

6. Cassette1 paper feeding, Paper size A4, Duplex, Preset 3
35 ppm model
BRFSSOL
BRCM2 BRCM1 SBS

EFS FSSOL
DUS1
BRCS2 BRCS1 DUCL1
EM
FUES
FUM
LPS
DUS2
RCL
RS DUCL2
MCL
MS
FS1
ASCL1
PFCL1

2LL/2LJ/2LH-3
45/55 ppm model
BRFSSOL
BRCM2 BRCM1 SBS

EFS FSSOL
DUS1
BRCS2 BRCS1 DUM1
EM
FUES
FUM
LPS
RM DUS2
DUM2
RS
MM MS
FS1
ASCL1
PFCL1

(5) Duplex_Preset 1_cassette1_A4

Service Manual

2-4-34

*3 Duplex clutch 1 (DUCL1): 35 ppm model, Duplex motor 1 (DUM1): 45 / 55 ppm model
2LL/2LJ/2LH-3
Y113351-4
(6) Duplex_Preset 3_cassette1_A4

Y113351-4

2-4-35

*2 Registration clutch (RCL):35 ppm model, Registration motor (RM): 45 / 55 ppm model
2LL/2LJ/2LH-3
Service Manual
2LL/2LJ/2LH-1
(9) Chart of image adjustment procedures

Adjusting Maintenance mode
Item Image Description Original Page Remarks
order Item No. Mode
Adjusting the magnification in the Data processing U039 Sub Scan U039 test pattern P.1-3-38
auxiliary scanning direction
1 (printing adjustment)
Adjusting the center line of the MP Adjusting the LSU print start timing U034 LSU Out Left U034 test pattern P.1-3-33 To make an adjustment for duplex copying, select
tray Duplex.
Adjusting the center line of the cas- Adjusting the LSU print start timing U034 LSU Out Left U034 test pattern P.1-3-33
settes
Adjusting the leading edge registra- Registration motor turning on timing U034 LSU Out Top U034 test pattern P.1-3-34 To make an adjustment for duplex copying, select
tion of the MP tray (secondary paper feed start timing) Duplex.
Adjusting the leading edge registra- Registration motor turning on timing U034 LSU Out Top U034 test pattern P.1-3-34
tion of the cassette (secondary paper feed start timing)
Adjusting the leading edge margin LSU illumination start timing U402 Lead U402 test pattern P.1-3-133
(printing adjustment)
6
Adjusting the trailing edge margin LSU illumination end timing U402 Trail U402 test pattern P.1-3-133
(printing adjustment)
7
Adjusting the left and right margins LSU illumination start/end timing U402 A Margin U402 test pattern P.1-3-133
(printing adjustment) C Margin
8
Adjusting magnification of the Data processing U065 Main Scan Test chart P.1-3-47 U065: For copying an original placed on
scanner in the main scanning direc- the platen.
9 tion U070 Main Scan P.1-3-52 U070: For copying originals from the DP.
(scanning adjustment)
Adjusting magnification of the Original scanning speed U065 Sub Scan Test chart P.1-3-47 U065: For copying an original placed on
scanner in the auxiliary scanning the platen.
10 direction U070 Sub Scan P.1-3-52 U070: For copying originals from the DP.
(scanning adjustment)
2-4-36
2LL/2LJ/2LH
Adjusting Maintenance mode

Item Image Description Original Page Remarks
order Item No. Mode
Adjusting the center line Adjusting the original scan data U067 Front Test chart P.1-3-50 U067: For copying an original placed on
(scanning adjustment) (image adjustment) Rotate the platen.
To make an adjustment for rotate copying, select
11 Rotate.
U072 Front P.1-3-56 U072: For copying originals from the DP.
Back To make an adjustment for duplex copying, select
Back.
Adjusting the leading edge registra- Original scan start timing U066 Front Test chart P.1-3-49 U066: For copying an original placed on
tion Rotate the platen.
(scanning adjustment) To make an adjustment for trailing edge registra-
12 tion, select Rotate.
U071 Front Head P.1-3-54 U071: For copying originals from the DP.
Back Head To make an adjustment for duplex copying, select
Back Head.
Adjusting the leading edge margin Adjusting the original scan data U403 B Margin Test chart P.1-3-134 U403: For copying an original placed on
(scanning adjustment) (image adjustment) the contact glass
13 U404 B Margin P.1-3-135 U404: For copying originals from the DP.
Adjusting the trailing edge margin Adjusting the original scan data U403 D Margin Test chart P.1-3-134 U403: For copying an original placed on
(scanning adjustment) (image adjustment) the contact glass
14 U404 D Margin P.1-3-135 U404: For copying originals from the DP.
Adjusting the left and right margins Adjusting the original scan data U403 A Margin Test chart P.1-3-134 U403: For copying an original placed on
(scanning adjustment) (image adjustment) C Margin the contact glass
15 U404 A Margin P.1-3-135 U404: For copying originals from the DP.
C Margin
Image quality
When maintenance item U411 (Automatic adjustment in the scanner) is run using the specified original (P/N $9*5%),
the following adjustments are automatically made: Item Specifications Item Specifications
Adjusting the scanner auxiliary scanning direction magnification (U065) Adjusting the DP magnification (U070)
Adjusting the scanner leading edge registration (U066) Adjusting the DP leading edge registration (U071) 100% magnifica- Machine: 0.8 % Leading edge Cassette: +1.0/-1.5 mm
Adjusting the scanner center line (U067) Adjusting the DP center line (U072) tion registration
Using DP: 1.5 % MP tray: +1.0/-1.5 mm
When maintenance item U411 (Automatic adjustment in the scanner) is run using the specified original (P/N AVGR11211F), Enlargement/ Machine: 1.0 % Duplex: +1.0/-1.5 mm
the following adjustments are automatically made: reduction
Using DP: 1.5 % Skewed paper Cassette: 1.5 mm or less
Adjusting the DP magnification (U070) feed
Adjusting the DP leading edge registration (U071) Lateral square- Machine: 1.5 mm/375 mm MP tray: 1.5 mm or less
ness (left-right differ-
Adjusting the DP center line (U072) Using DP: 3.0 mm/375 mm Duplex: 2.0 mm or less
ence)
When maintenance item U411 (Automatic adjustment in the scanner) is run using the chart printed from the machine, Lateral image Cassette: 2.0 mm
the following adjustments are automatically made: shifting
MP tray: 2.0 mm
Adjusting the DP magnification (U070) Adjusting the DP magnification (U070)
Adjusting the DP leading edge registration (U071) Adjusting the DP leading edge registration (U071) Duplex: 3.0 mm
Adjusting the DP center line (U072) Adjusting the DP center line (U072)
When maintenance item U415 (Adjusting the print position automatically) is run, the following adjustments are automatically made:
Adjusting the printer leading edge registration (U034)
Adjusting the printer center line (U034)
Adjusting the printer margin (U402)
2-4-37
2LL/2LJ/2LH
(10) Wiring diagram

No.1
YC18
DF_CLK 1 1 A1 A1
DF_SDO 2 2 A2 A2
DF_SEL 3 3 A3 A3
DF_SDI 4 4 A4 A4
5V 1 1 5 1 DF_RDY 5 5 A5 A5
BRES Vout
GND
2
3
2
3
4
3
2
3
DF_DET
GND
6
7
6
7
A6
A7
A6
A7
Relay A8 A8
YC20 A9 A9
BRECSW 1
2
1
2
2
1
4
5
19
18
1
2
19
18
19
18
N.C
+5V
A10
B1
A10
B1 DFMPWB
17 3 17 17 EXIT_SENS 1 1 1 B2 B2
16 4 16 16 GND 2 2 2 B3 B3
15 5 15 15 EXIT_COV_OPEN From PSPWB (3) 3 3 3 B4 B4
14 6 14 14 GND 4 4 4 B5 B5
RET 3 1 13 7 13 13 EXIT_SOL_RET B6 B6
BRSOL ACT
COM
2
1
Relay 2
3
12
11
8
9
12
11
12
11
EXIT_SOL_REM
+24V1
B7
B8
B7
B8
B9 B9
B10 B10
YC4 YC2
GND 3 3 1 1 GND DECAL DIR 1 10 10 10 10 DECAL_DIR
BRCS2 Vout
5V
2
1
2
1
2
3
2
3
BRIDGE_SENS2
+5V
DECAL PD
DECAL CLK
2
3
9
8
11
12 8
9 9
8
DECAL_PD
DECAL_CLK
DECAL MODE 4 7 13 7 7 DECAL_PH
DECAL REM 5 6 14 6 6 DECAL_REM
YC6 GUIDE DIR 6 5 15 5 5 GUIDE_DIR Document finisher (option)
GND 3 3 1 1 GND GUIDE PD 7 4 16 4 4 GUIDE_PD
BRCS1 Vout
5V
2
1
2
1
2
3
2
3
BRIDGE_SENS 1
+5V
GUIDE CLK
GUIDE REM
8
9
3
2
17
18
3
2
3
2
GUIDE_CLK
GUIDE_REM
Connector holder
Connector holder
Connector holder
DECAL_HP_SENS 10 1 19 1 1 DECAL_HP_SENS
BRCSW 1 1 4 4 GND
Relay
2 2 5 5 BRIDGE_OPEN
6 6 +5V YC1 Paper feeder (option)
7 7 NC +24V 1 1 19 1 19 38 +24V1
+24V 2 2 18 2 18 37 +24V1
YC7 GND 3 3 17 3 17 36 GND
/B 4 4 1 1 BRIDGE1_B/ GND 4 4 16 4 16 35 GND
BRIDGE1_A/
BRCM1 /A 3 3 2 2
BRIDGE1_B
+5V 5 5 15 5 15 34 5V
B
A
2
1
2
1
3
4
3
4 BRIDGE1_A
GND 6 6 14 6 14 33 GND From PSPWB (2) 1
2
1
2
1
2 PFCH
YC3
/B 4 4 5 5 BRIDGE2_B/ BRIDGE_SENS 1 1 1 13 7 13 32 BRIDGE_SENS 1
BRIDGE2_A/ BRIDGE_OPEN
BRCM2 /A
B
3
2
3
2
6
7
6
7 BRIDGE2_B
BRIDGE OPEN
BRIDGE_SENS 2
2
3
2
3
12
11
8
9
12
11
31
30 BRIDGE_SENS 2
A 1 1 8 8 BRIDGE2_A BRIDGE1 DIR 4 4 10 10 10 29 BRIDGE1 DIR
BRIDGE1 PD 5 5 9 11 9 28 BRIDGE1 PD
BRIDGE1 CLK 6 6 8 12 8 27 BRIDGE1 CLK YC49 1 1 1
YC8 BRIDGE1 MODE 7 7 7 13 7 26 BRIDGE1 PH 24VC 1 From PSPWB (1) 2 2 2
1 NC BRIDGE1 REM 8 8 6 14 6 25 BRIDGE1 REM GND 2 3 3 3
2 GND BRIDGE2 DIR 9 9 5 15 5 24 BRIDGE2 DIR SIG 3 4 4 4
3 DECAL_HP_SENS BRIDGE2 PD 10 10 4 16 4 23 BRIDGE2 PD
4 +5V BRIDGE2 CLK 11 11 3 17 3 22 BRIDGE2 CLK
BRIDGE2 MODE 12 12 2 18 2 21 BRIDGE2 PH YC19
BRIDGE2 REM 13 13 1 19 1 20 BRIDGE2 REM PF_CLK A1 A1 A11 A1 A1 A1
YC5 PF_SDO A2 A2 A10 A2 A2 A2
1 DECAL_B/ PF_SEL A3 A3 A9 A3 A3 A3
2 DECAL_A/ PF_SDI A4 A4 A8 A4 A4 A4
3 DECAL_B PF_RDY A5 A5 A7 A5 A5 A5
4 DECAL_A PF_PAUSE A6 A6 A6 A6 A6 A6
BRPWB
PF_CAS1_OPEN
PF_CAS2_OPEN
A7
A8
A7
A8
A5
A4
A7
A8
A7
A8
A7
A8 PFMPWB
+3.3V4 A9 A9 A3 A9 A9 A9
5 GUIDE_B/ GND A10 A10 A2 A10 A10 A10
Connector holder
Connector holder
6 GUIDE_A/ GND A11 A11 A1 A11 A11 A11
7 GUIDE_B A12 A12
BRIDGE UNIT GUIDE_A
Relay
8 A13 A13
A14 A14
TN_FAN1 A12 A12 B11 B1 B1 B1
+24V1 A13 A13 B10 B2 B2 B2
B9 B3 B3 B3
TN_FAN2 A14 A14 B8 B4 B4 B4
+24V1 A15 A15 B7 B5 B5 B5
B6 B6 B6 B6
LVU_FAN1 A16 A16 B5 B7 B7 B7
+24V1 A17 A17 B4 B8 B8 B8
KEY COUNTER YC24 LVU_FAN2 A18 A18
B3
B2
B9
B10
B9
B10
B9
B10
(option) 1 4 4 +24V1 +24V1 A19 A19 B1 B11 B11 B11
Connector holder
DC1_COUNT
KEY COUNTER
2 3 3 B12 B12
3 2 2 DC1_SET B13 B13
4 1 1 GND B14 B14
TFM
2 1 -
Relay
SIDE_CLK B1 B1 1 2 +
SIDE_SDO B2 B2
SIDE_SEL B3 B3
KEY CARD (option for JAPAN only) YC25 EPWB
SIDE_SDI
SIDE_RDY
B4
B5
B4
B5
A1 A1 +5V SIDE_PAUSE B6 B6
A2 A2 +5V TANDEM_CAS1_OPEN B7 B7
A3 A3 +5V TANDEM_CAS2_OPEN B8 B8
A4 A4 +5V SIDE_MULTI_OPEN B9 B9
A5 A5 +5V +3.3V4 B10 B10
A6 A6 +5V GND B11 B11
A7 A7 +5V
Connector holder
A8 A8 +5V +24V1 B12 B12

KEY CARD A9
A10
A9
A10
COPY_ENABLE
+24V
BELT_FAN1 B13 B13
MK-2 B1
B2
B1
B2
KEY7
KEY6 +24V1 B14 B14
B3 B3 KEY5 BELT_FAN2 B15 B15
B4 B4 KEY4
B5 B5 KEY3
B6 B6 KEY2 DLP_FAN1 B16 B16
B7 B7 KEY1 +24V1 B17 B17
B8 B8 KEY0
B9 B9 GND
FG B10 B10 COUNT DLP_FAN2 B18 B18 2 1 +
+24V1 B19 B19 1
Relay
2 - EXFM
COIN VENDER (option) YC23

1 1 1 1 +24V
2 2 2 2 GND
3 3 3 3 GND
4 4 4 4 COIN_EN
5 5 5 5 FGND
Relay
6 6 6 6 FEED_COUNT
COIN VENDER 7 7 7 7 EJECT_COUNT
8 8 8 8 COPYING_SIG
9 9 9 9 TXD_COIN
10 10 10 10 GND
11 11 11 11 RXD_COIN
12 12 12 12 GND
2-4-38
2LL/2LJ/2LH
No.2
YC11 YC2 YC3 YC1 YC5

YC3
DEVFM1
SDI 40 40 1 1 SDI GND 1 1 30 30 GND +24V1 1 1 A12 A1 2 1 +
Relay
GND 39 39 2 2 GND BD Bk 2 2 29 29 BD Bk GND 1 1 4 4 GND DRUM_AIR_FAN 2 2 A11 A2 1 2 -
SDO 38 38 3 3 SDO LSU_TH Bk 3 3 28 28 LSU_TH Bk TH 2 2 3 3 TH
PALA_SIG P3_2Bk PALA_SIG P3_2Bk PDPWB 3
DEVFM2
GND 37 37 4 4 GND 4 4 27 27 BD 3 3 2 2 PD +24V1 3 A10 A3 2 1 +
Relay
SCK 36 36 5 5 SCK LDD_CS 2 Bk 5 5 26 26 LDD_CS 2 Bk +5V 4 4 1 1 +5V DRUM_DLP_FAN 4 4 A9 A4 1 2 -
GND 35 35 6 6 GND 5V 6 6 25 25 5V
EEPROM CS 2 Bk 34 34 7 7 EEPROM CS 2 Bk 5V 7 7 24 24 5V
33 33 THOP_MOT_BK
THM
EEPROM CS 1 Bk 8 8 EEPROM CS 1 Bk 5V 8 8 23 23 5V 5 5 A8 A5 2 Relay 1
GND 32 32 9 9 GND _
LDD CS 1 Bk 9 9 22 22 _
LDD CS 1 Bk +24V 6 6 A7 A6 1 2
DATA_3N_Bk(LVDS) 31 31 10 10 DATA_3N_Bk(LVDS) SDI1 10 10 21 21 SDI1
DATA_3P_Bk(LVDS) 30 30 11 11 DATA_3P_Bk(LVDS) SDO1 11 11 20 20 SDO1 GND 7 7 A6 A7 3 3 GND
GND
DATA_4N_Bk(LVDS)
29
28
29
28
12
13
12
13
GND
DATA_4N_Bk(LVDS)
CLK1
EEPROM CS 1 Bk
12
13
12
13
19
18
19
18
CLK1
EEPROM CS 1 Bk
THOP_Bk
+5V
8
9
8
9
A5
A4
A8
A9
2
1
2
1
SIG
+5V
THS
DATA_4P_Bk(LVDS) 27 27 14 14 DATA_4P_Bk(LVDS) MSET_N 14 14 17 17 MSET_N
GND 26 26 15 15 GND CUALM Bk 15 15 16 16 CUALM Bk GND 10 10 A3 A10 3 3 GND
BD_Bk 25 25 16 16 BD_Bk INT_ST 2 Bk 16 16 15 15 INT_ST 2 Bk APCPWB ENCODE_Bk 11 11 A2 A11 2 2 SIG SRS
LSU_TH_Bk 24 24 17 17 LSU_TH_Bk INT_ST 1 Bk 17 17 14 14 INT_ST 1 Bk +5V 12 12 A1 A12 1 1 +5V
PALA SIG P3_2Bk
_ 23 23 18 18 PALA SIG P3_2Bk
_ PALA_SIG P0 Bk 18 18 13 13 PALA_SIG P0 Bk
LDD_CS 2 Bk 22 22 19 19 LDD_CS 2 Bk PALA_SIG P1 Bk 19 19 12 12 PALA_SIG P1 Bk B12 B1 4 1 C TR
LDD_CS 1 Bk 21 21 20 20 LDD_CS 1 Bk PALA_SIG P2 Bk 20 20 11 11 PALA_SIG P2 Bk B11 B2 3 2 E
Relay Relay
MSET_N 20 20 21 21 MSET_N PALA_SIG P3 Bk 21 21 10 10 PALA_SIG P3 Bk B10 B3 2 3 K
CUALM_Bk CUALM_Bk LED
19 19 22 22 PALA_SIG P4 Bk 22 22 9 9 PALA_SIG P4 Bk B9 B4 1 4 A
INT_ST 2 Bk 18 18 23 23 INT_ST 2 Bk SDCLK Bk 23 23 8 8 SDCLK Bk
INT_ST 1 Bk
PALA_SIG P0 Bk
17 17 24 24 INT_ST 1 Bk
PALA_SIG P0 Bk
GAIN FIX Bk 24 24 7 7 GAIN FIX Bk WTS1
16 16 25 25 DATA_1N_Bk(LVDS) 25 25 6 6 DATA_1N_Bk(LVDS)
PALA_SIG P1 Bk 15 15 26 26 PALA_SIG P1 Bk DATA_1P_Bk(LVDS) 26 26 5 5 DATA_1P_Bk(LVDS)
PALA_SIG P2 Bk 14 14 27 27 PALA_SIG P2 Bk GND 27 27 4 4 GND
YC13
PALA_SIG P3 Bk PALA_SIG P3 Bk DATA_2N_Bk(LVDS) DATA_2N_Bk(LVDS) 24V 1 1 B8 B5 2 1 2 1
INM
13 13 28 28 28 28 3 3
Relay Relay
PALA_SIG P4 Bk 12 12 29 29 PALA_SIG P4 Bk DATA_2P_Bk(LVDS) 29 29 2 2 DATA_2P_Bk(LVDS) LSU_FAN 2 2 B7 B6 1 2 1 2
GND 11 11 30 30 GND GND 30 30 1 1 GND
SDCLK_Bk 10 10 31 31 SDCLK_Bk
GND 9 9 32 32 GND
GAIN FIX Bk 8 8 33 33 GAIN FIX Bk YC4 YC2 1 3 1 B6 B7 3 3 GND
GND
DATA_1N_Bk(LVDS)
7
6
7
6
34
35
34
35
GND
DATA_1N_Bk(LVDS)
SDI_2
SDO_2
1
2
1
2
10
9
10
9
SDI_2
SDO_2
2 2
1
Relay 2
3
B5
B4
B8
B9
2
1
2
1
SIG
+5V
DEVSS
3
DATA_1P_Bk(LVDS) 5 5 36 36 DATA_1P_Bk(LVDS) CLK_2 3 3 8 8 CLK_2
From FRPWB
GND 4 4 37 37 GND EEPROM_CS_2_O 4 4 7 7 EEPROM_CS_2_O
DATA_2N_Bk(LVDS) 3 3 38 38 DATA_2N_Bk(LVDS) GND 5 5 6 6 GND
DATA_2P_Bk(LVDS) 2 2 39 39 DATA_2P_Bk(LVDS) _ _
DATA 3N Bk(LVDS) 6 6 5 5 DATA_3N_Bk(LVDS) B3 B10
GND 1 1 40 40 GND DATA_3P_Bk(LVDS) 7 7 4 4 DATA_3P_Bk(LVDS) B2 B11
GND 8 8 3 3 GND YC8 B1 B12
DATA_4N_Bk(LVDS) 9 9 2 2 DATA_4N_Bk(LVDS) WTNR_SET 1 1
DATA_4P_Bk(LVDS) 10 10 1 1 DATA_4P_Bk(LVDS) GND 2 2
5V 3 3 4 1
WTNR_FULL 4 4 3 2
YC15 YC1 WTNR_LED 5 5 2
Relay
3
+5V_AN
+5V_AN
1
2
1
2
11
10
1
2
1
2
1
2
+5V_AN
+5 AN
LSURPWB 5V_LED 6 6 1 4
GND 3 3 9 3 3 3 GND
GND 4 4 8 4 4 4 GND 5V 7 7 7 1 3 3 GND
+3.3V2
GND
5 5 7 5 5
6
5
6
+3.3V2
GND
WTNR_NEAR
WTNR_LED
8 8 6
5
2
3
2
1
2
1
SIG
+5V
WTS2
6 6 6 6 9 9
_
5V LED 10 10
Relay Relay
3.3V1 11 11 4 4 4 1 4 1 +3.3V
I2C_SDA 3 5 3 2 3 2 SDA
OTEMS
12 12 Relay
+24V 7 7 5 7 5 1 5 5 +24V
PM
GND 13 13 2 6 2 3 2 3 GND
GND 8 8 4 8 4 2 4 4 GND I2C_SCL 14 14 1 7 1 4 1 4 SCL
START/STOP 9 9 3 9 3 Relay 3 3 3 STARTING
LOCK 10 10 2 10 2 4 2 2 LOCKED
FRONT_OPEN
FRCSW
CLK 11 11 1 11 1 5 1 1 CLK 15 15 2 2
GND 16 16 1 1
24V
LSU_FAN
17
18
17
18
4
3 Relay
1
2
1
2
Relay 2
1
+
- LSUFM
EPWB 2
1
3
4
FRPWB
RFPWB
YC1 YC27
GND
SDA
4
3
4
3
4
3
4
3
1
2
1
2
GND
EEP_SDA2 YC2 YC1 YC7 YC1 Developer
SCL
+3.3V
2
1
2
1
2
1
2
1
3
4
3
4
EEP_SCL2
3.3V2
+3.3V1
+3.3V2
10
9
10
9
1
2
1
2
+3.3V1
+3.3V2
TPD_TEMP_BK
DLP_VCONT_BK_1
1
2
1
2
10
9
1
2
1
2
1
2
TPD_TEMP
DLP_VCONT
unit
Relay 5 5 +5V 8 8 3 3 +5V TPD_BK_1 3 3 8 3 3 3 TPD_1
6 6 +24V 7 7 4 4 +24V TN_CLK_BK 4 4 7 4 4 4 TN_CLK
4 4 +24V 6 6 5 5 +24V GND 5 5 6
Relay
5 5 5 GND TS
DLP_ADR1_BK DLP_ADR1
TM
2 2 2 5 5 +24V1 GND 5 5 6 6 GND 6 6 5 6 6 6
1 1 1 6 6 TMOT_Bk_DR GND 4 4 7 7 GND DLP_ADR0_BK 7 7 4 7 7 7 DLP_ADR0
GND 3 3 8 8 GND EEP_SDA1 8 8 3 8 8 8 EEP_SDA1
GND 2 2 9 9 GND EEP_SCL1 9 9 2 9 9 9 EEP_SCL1
GND 1 1 10 10 GND 3.3V2 10 10 1 10 10 10 3.3V2
YC6 Drum unit

3.3V2 1 1 10 1 6 6 +3.3V
EEP_SCL1 2 2 9 2 5 5 EEP SCL
EEP_SDA1
GND
3
4
3
4
8
7
3
4
4
3
4
3
EEP SDA
GND DRPWB
YC22 DRM_ADR0_Bk 5 5 6 5 2 2 A0
- 1 2 1 6 1 1 LSU_FAN DRM_ADR1_Bk A1
PSFM + 2 Relay 1 2 Relay 5 2 2 +24V1
6 6 5 6 1 1
Relay
24V
ERS_Bk_REM
7
8
7
8
4
3
7
8
2
1
2
1
DRM1 ERASER (+)
ERS1 DR (-) CL
3 4 3 3
4 3 4 4 24V 9 9 2 9 2 2 DRM1 ERASER (+)
5 2 5 5 ERS_REM_PRE 10 10 1 10 1 1 ERS1 DR (-)
6 1 6 6 NC 11 11
2-4-39
2LL/2LJ/2LH
No.3
YC11
EFFM
EXIT FAN 1 4 2 1 -
1 Relay 2 +
24V 2 3
24V 3 2 1 3 +
YC8 YC2 CONTAINER_FAN 4 1 2 Relay 2 - FUFFM
EXIT_FAN_REM 20 20 1 1 EXIT_FAN_REM 3 1 S
CONTAIN_FAN_REM 19 19 2 2 CONTAIN_FAN_REM
ERS_Bk_REM 18 18 3 3 ERS_Bk_REM
EEP_SDA1 17 17 4 4 EEP_SDA1
EEP_SCL1 16 16 5 5 EEP_SCL1
GND 15 15 6 6 GND
TN_CLK 14 14 7 7 TN_CLK
TPD_Bk_1 13 13 8 8 TPD_Bk_1
DLP_VCONT_Bk_1 12 12 9 9 DLP_VCONT_Bk_1
TPD_TEMP_Bk 11 11 10 10 TPD_TEMP_Bk YC12
LSU_FAN LSU_FAN
LEDPWB1
10 10 11 11 5V 1 1 3 1 2 2 +
FRONT_OPEN 9 9 12 12 FRONT_OPEN LED 2 2 2 Relay 2 1 1 -
I2C_SCL 8 8 13 13 I2C_SCL 1 3
I2C_SDA 7 7 14 14 I2C_SDA
WTNR_LED 6 6 15 15 WTNR_LED
WTNR_NEAR WTNR_NEAR 5V 3 3 3 1 2 2 +
LEDPWB2
5 5 16 16
WTNR_NEAR_VCON 4 4 17 17 WTNR_NEAR_VCON LED 4 4 2 Relay 2 1 1 -
WTNR_FULL 3 3 18 18 WTNR_FULL 1 3
WTNR_FULL_VCONT 2 2 19 19 WTNR_FULL_VCONT
WTNR_SET 1 1 20 20 WTNR_SET
YC10
5V 1
LED 2
5V 3
YC9 YC9 LED 4
ROT_MOT_REM 11 11 1 1 ROT_MOT_REM ROT_MOT_REM 5
ROT_MOT_CLK 10 10 2 2 ROT_MOT_CLK ROT_MOT_CLK 6
ROT_MOT_DIR 9 9 3 3 ROT_MOT_DIR ROT_MOT_DIR 7
ROT_MOT_PD 8 8 4 4 ROT_MOT_PD ROT_MOT_PD 8
GND 7 7 5 5 GND GND 9
IH_COIL_FAN_H 6 6 6 6 IH_COIL_FAN_H 24V 10
IH_COIL_FAN_L 5 5 7 7 IH_COIL_FAN_L 24V 11
_
IH COIL_FAN_ALM 4 4 8 8 IH COIL_FAN_ALM
_ IH COIL_FAN
_ 12
IH_CORE_SENS 3 3 9 9 IH_CORE_SENS GND 13
IH_CORE_MOT_CLK 2 2 10 10 IH_CORE_MOT_CLK GND 14
IH_CORE_MOT_REM 1 1 11 11 IH_CORE_MOT_REM IH_COIL_FAN_ALM 15
IH CORE_SENS
_ 16
IH_CORE MOT_CLK 17
IH_CORE MOT_REM 18
YC7 YC3 YC4

JUNC_SOL_RET 18 18 1 1 JUNC_SOL_RET GND 1 1 1
JUNC_SOL_REM 17 17 2 2 JUNC_SOL_REM ROT_HP_SENS 2 2 2 To FRPWB Eject unit
GND 16 16 3 3 GND +5V 3 3 3
EXIT_PAPER_SENS 15 15 4 4 EXIT_PAPER_SENS SB_CORE B/ 4 4 13 1 4 4 B/
EXIT_FEED_SENS 14 14 5 5 EXIT_FEED_SENS SB_CORE A/ 5 5 12 2 3 3 A/
SB_MOT_REM 13 13 6 6 SB_MOT_REM SB_CORE B 6 6 11 3 2 2 B EM
SB_MOT_DIR 12 12 7 7 SB_MOT_DIR SB_CORE A 7 7 10 4 1 1 A
SB_MOT_PD 11 11 8 8 SB_MOT_PD
SB_MOT_CLK 10 10 9 9 SB_MOT_CLK GND 8 8 9 5 3 3 GND
SB_MOT_PH
ENCODE_Bk
9
8
9
8
10
11
10
11
SB_MOT_PH
ENCODE_Bk
EXIT_FEED_SENS
5V
9
10
9
10
8
7
6
7
2
1
2
1
Vout
5V
SBS
THOP_Bk 7 7 12 12 THOP_Bk Relay
THOP_MOT_REM 6 6 13 13 THOP_MOT_REM GND 11 11 6 8 3 3 GND
THOP_MOT_DIR
DLP_FAN_H
5
4
5
4
14
15
14
15
THOP_MOT_DIR
DLP_FAN_H
EXIT_PAPER_SENS
5V
12
13
12
13
5
4
9
10
2
1
2
1
Vout
5V
EFS
DLP_FAN_L 3 3 16 16 DLP_FAN_L
ROT_HP_SENS 2 2 17 17 ROT_HP_SENS +24V1 14 14 3 11 3 1 COM
INTER_LOCK 1 1 18
19
18
19
INTER_LOCK
NC
JUNC_SOL_REM
JUNC_SOL_RET
15
16
15
16
2
1
12
13
2
1
Relay 2
3
ACT
KEEP
FSSOL
EPWB FRPWB
2-4-40
2LL/2LJ/2LH
No.4
YC26
+5V A20 A20
FSR_BLT_PLS
GND
A19
A18
A19
A18
Fuser unit
+5V A17 A17
FSR_RLS_SENS A16 A16
GND A15 A15
+5V A14 A14 1 8 1 1 5V

FSR_SIZE_SENS
GND
A13
A12
A13
A12
2
3
7
6
2
3
2
3
Vout
GND
FUES
FSR_RLS_DR_CW A11 A11
FSR_RLS_DR_CCW A10 A10
+24V1 A9 A9
FSR_FAN A8 A8
FSR_FAN_ALM A7 A7
+24V1 A6 A6
EDGE_FAN A5 A5
EDGE_FAN_ALM A4 A4
Relay
+24V1 A3 A3
EDGE_FAN A2 A2
Connector holder
EDGE_FAN_ALM A1 A1
BRIDGE_FAN B20 B20

+24V1 B19 B19
GND B18 B18 4 5

MAIN_TH1
MAIN_TH2
B17
B16
B17
B16
5
6
4
3
1
2 Relay
2
1 FTH1
GUIDE_TH2 B15 B15
GND B14 B14
GUIDE_TH1 B13 B13

GND B12 B12
EDGE_TH
GND
B11
B10
B11
B10
7
8
2
1
1
2 Relay
2
1 FTH2
PRESS_TH B9 B9
GND B8 B8
1 3 +
GND
+3.3V2
B7
B6
2
3
Relay 2
1
-
S
FURFM
IH_HEAT_REM B5
ROTATION B4
IH_TXD B3
IH_RXD B2
PRESS_HEART_REM B1
EPWB
FHPWB
YC1 FTS1 FTS2

+15V1 1 1 1 1
+15V2 2 2 2 2
+15V1 3 3 3 3
+15V2 4 4
+15V1 5 5 4 4
+15V2 6 6
FPWB1
FH1
YC27 YC2
MAIN_HEAT_REM 1 1 8 8 MAIN_HEAT_REM FH2
SUB_HEAT_REM 2 2 7 7 SUB_HEAT_REM
+24V2 3 3 6 6 +24V2
ZEROC 4 4 5 5 ZEROC
GND 5 5 4 4 GND
GND 6 6 3 3 GND
FSR_RELAY 7 7 2 2 FSR_RELAY YC3
+24V1 8 8 1 1 +24V1 IH_NEUTRAL 1 1 1
From PSPWB
PRESS_REM 9 9 IH_LIVE 2 2 2
YC11
+24V1 1 6 1 3 +
IH_PWB_FAN
IH_PWB_FAN_ALM
2
3
5
4
2
3
Relay 2
1
-
S
HFM
+12V 4 3
IH_PWB_FAN2 5 2
IH_PWB_FAN2_ALM 6 1
YC19
EXIT_REAR_FAN 1 2 1 2 -
+24V1 2 1 2
Relay
1 + ERFM
2-4-41
2LL/2LJ/2LH
No.5 (35 ppm model)
YC6 YC1
GND 1 1 60 60 GND
JOB_SET
JOB_MOT_REM
2
3
2
3
59
58
59
58
JOB_SET
JOB_MOT_REM
Fuser drive unit YC10
JOB MOT_CLK
_ 4 4 57 57 JOB MOT_CLK
_ GND 1
JOB_MOT_DIR 5 5 56 56 JOB_MOT_DIR M_TEMP 2
JOB_OPEN_SENS 6 6 55 55 JOB_OPEN_SENS
JOB_SOL_REM 7 7 54 54 JOB_SOL_REM YC18
GND 8 8 53 53 GND FSR_MOT_BRK 1 1 3.3V 3
EXIT_REAR_FAN_L 9 9 52 52 EXIT_REAR_FAN_L FSR_MOT_DIR 2 2 6 6 CW/CCW REG_F_LED 4
EXIT_REAR_FAN_H 10 10 51 51 EXIT_REAR_FAN_H FSR_MOT_RDY 3 3 5 5 LD GND 5
FSR_MOT_CLK REG SENS_F_P
_
ZEROC
SUB_HEAT
11
12
11
12
50
49
50
49
ZEROC
SUB_HEAT FSR_MOT_REM
4
5
4
5
4
3
4
3
CLOCK
START/STOP FUM REG_SENS_F_S
6
7
MAIN_HEAT 13 13 48 48 MAIN_HEAT GND 6 6 2 2 GND
FSR_CL_REM 14 14 47 47 FSR_CL_REM 24V2 7 7 1 1 +24V
FSR_MOT_REM 15 15 46 46 FSR_MOT_REM 3.3V 8
FSR_MOT_CLK 16 16 45 45 FSR_MOT_CLK REG_R_LED 9
FSR_MOT_RDY 17 17 44 44 FSR_MOT_RDY GND 10
GND 18 18 43 43 GND REG_SENS_R_P 11
FSR_MOT_DIR 19 19 42 42 FSR_MOT_DIR REG_SENS_R_S 12
FSR_MOT_BRK 20 20 41 41 FSR_MOT_BRK
MPF_TABLE 21 21 40 40 MPF_TABLE
MPF_WID1 22 22 39 39 MPF_WID1 24V 13
MPF_WID2 23 23 38 38 MPF_WID2 CLN_SOL_REM 14
MPF_WID3 24 24 37 37 MPF_WID3 CLN_SOL_RET 15
MPF_LNG 25 25 36 36 MPF_LNG
3.3V3 26 26 35 35 3.3V3
MPF_PPR_SET 27 27 34 34 MPF_PPR_SET
MPF_LIFT_UP 28 28 33 33 MPF_LIFT_UP
MPF_LIFT_DOWN 29 29 32 32 MPF_LIFT_DOWN
MPF_JAM 30 30 31 31 MPF_JAM
MPF_CL_REM 31 31 30 30 MPF_CL_REM
MPF_LIF2 32 32 29 29 MPF_LIF2 Job separator
MPF_LIFT1 33 33 28 28 MPF_LIFT1
GND 34 34 27 27 GND JSMPWB
TC_MOT_REM 35 35 26 26 TC_MOT_REM
TC_MOT_LOCK 36 36 25 25 TC_MOT_LOCK YC8
TC TONER_LED
_ 37 37 24 24 TC TONER_LED
_ NC 1 1
TC_TONER_FULL 38 38 23 23 TC_TONER_FULL DLP_MOT_BK_DIR 2 2 6 6 CW/CCW YC2
TC_TONER_VCONT 39 39 22 22 TC_TONER_VCONT DLP_MOT_BK_RDY 3 3 5 5 LD GND 1 1 3 3 GND
INTER_LOCK 40 40 21 21 INTER_LOCK DLP MOT_BK_CLK
_ 4 4 4 4 CLOCK
DEVM
YC20 YC1 JOB_OPEN_SENS 2 2 2 2 Vout JSOCS
DU2_PD 41 41 20 20 DU2_PD DLP_MOT_BK_REM 5 5 3 3 START/STOP JOB_SET 1 1 10 1 10 10 JOB_SET +5V1 3 3 1 1 5V
DU2_CLK 42 42 19 19 DU2_CLK GND 6 6 2 2 GND GND 2 2 9 2 9 9 GND
DU2_REM_(CL_LOW) 43 43 18 18 DU2_REM_(CL_LOW) +24V1 7 7 1 1 +24V GND 3 3 8 3 8 8 GND JOB_B/ 4 4 4 B/
DU_OPEN 44 44 17 17 DU_OPEN JOB_MOT_REM 4 4 7 4 7 7 JOB_MOT_REM JOB_A/ 5 5 3 3 A/
DU_FAN 45 45 16 16 DU_FAN 24V1 5 5 6
Relay
5 6 6 24V1 JOB_B 6 6 2 2 B JSEM
PRESS_MOT_REM1 46 46 15 15 PRESS_MOT_REM1 JOB_MOT_CLK 6 6 5 6 5 5 JOB_MOT_CLK JOB_A 7 7 1 1 A
PRESS_MOT_REM2 47 47 14 14 PRESS_MOT_REM2 5V 7 7 4 7 4 4 5V
PRESS_RLS_SENS 48 48 PRESS_RLS_SENS JOB_MOT_DIR 8 8 3 8 3 3 JOB_MOT_DIR
DU_SENS DU_SENS JOB_OPEN_SENS JOB_OPEN_SENS
JSFSSOL
49 49 12 12 9 9 2 9 2 2 +24V1 8 8 2 1 COM
YC6 Relay
BELT_JAM_SENS 50 50 11 11 BELT_JAM_SENS JOB_SOL_REM 10 10 1 10 1 1 JOB_SOL_REM JOB_SOL_OUT 9 9 1 2 ACT
GND 51 51 10 10 GND DLP_MOT_CLR_DIR 1 NC 11 11
REG_BK_SENS1_S 52 52 9 9 REG_BK_SENS1_S DLP_MOT_CLR_RDY 2
REG_BK_SENS1_P 53 53 8 8 REG_BK_SENS1_P DLP_MOT_CLR_CLK 3
54 54 7 7 REG_BK_LED DLP_MOT_CLR_REM 4
LOOP_SENS 55 55 6 6 LOOP_SENS GND 5
EDGE_FAN_L 56 56 5 5 EDGE_FAN_L +24V1 6
EDGE_FAN_H 57 57 4 4 EDGE_FAN_H
DU1_MOT_PD 58 58 3 3 DU1_MOT_PD
DU1_MOT_CLK 59 59 2 2 DU1_MOT_CLK
GND 60 60 1 1 GND
YC22
YC9 REG_CL_REM 2 1 3 3
NC 1 1 2 2 RCL
DRM_MOT_BK_BRK 2 2 24V2 1 2 1 1
DRM_MOT_BK_DIR 3 3 6 6 CW/CCW
DRM MOT_BK_RDY
_ 4 4 5 5 LD
YC5 YC2 DRM_MOT_BK_CLK
GND 1 1 50 50 GND DRM_MOT_BK_REM
5
6
5
6
4
3
4
3
CLOCK
START/STOP DRM YC25
M_TEMP 2 2 49 49 DU1_MOT_REM(CL_H) GND 7 7 2 2 GND
LOOP_SENS 3 3 48 48 EXIT_FAN +24V2 8 8 1 1 +24V REG_MOT_B/ 1
GND 4 4 47 47 DU_ENTER_SENS REG_MOT_A/ 2
EDGE_FAN_H 5 5 46 46 TCON_SET REG_MOT_B 3
DU1_MOT_PD 6 6 45 45 TRANS_MOT_REM REG_MOT_A 4
DU1_MOT_CLK 7 7 44 44 TRANS_MOT_CLK
DU1_MOT_REM(CL_H) 8 8 43 43 TRANS_MOT_RDY
GND 9 9 42 42 TRANS_MOT_DIR
EXIT_FAN 10 10 41 41 TRANS_MOT_BRK YC7
DU_ENTER_SENS 11 11 40 40 GND DRM_MOT_CLR_BRK 1
TCON_SET 12 12 39 39 DRM_MOT_BK_REM DRM_MOT_CLR_DIR 2
GND 13 13 38 38 DRM_MOT_BK_CLK DRM_MOT_CLR_RDY 3
TRANS_MOT_REM 14 14 37 37 DRM_MOT_BK_RDY DRM_MOT_CLR_CLK 4
TRANS_MOT_CLK 15 15 36 36 DRM_MOT_BK_DIR DRM_MOT_CLR_REM 5
TRANS_MOT_RDY 16 16 35 35 DRM_MOT_BK_BRK GND 6
TRANS_MOT_DIR 17 17 34 34 DLP_MOT_BK_REM +24V1 7
TRANS_MOT_BRK 18 18 33 33 DLP_MOT_BK_CLK
GND 19 19 32 32 DLP_MOT_BK_RDY
DRM_MOT_BK_REM 20 20 31 31 DLP_MOT_BK_DIR
DRM_MOT_BK_RDY 21 21 30 30 DRM_MOT_CLR_REM
DRM_MOT_BK_DIR 22 22 29 29 DRM_MOT_CLR_CLK
DRM_MOT_BK_BRK 23 23 28 28 DRM_MOT_CLR_RDY
GND 24 24 27 27 DRM_MOT_CLR_DIR
DLP_MOT_BK_REM 25 25 26 26 GND
DLP_MOT_BK_CLK 26 26 25 25 DLP_MOT_CLR_REM
DLP_MOT_BK_RDY 27 27 24 24 DLP_MOT_CLR_CLK
DLP_MOT_BK_DIR 28 28 23 23 DLP_MOT_CLR_RDY
GND 29 29 22 22 DLP_MOT_CLR_DIR
DRM_MOT_CLR_REM 30 30 21 21 IH_PWB_FAN_L YC21
DRM_MOT_BK_CLR_CLK 31 31 20 20 IH_PWB_FAN_H 24V2 1
DRM_MOT_CLR_RDY 32 32 19 19 IH_PWB_FAN_ALM FSR_CL_REM 2
DRM_MOT_CLR_DIR 33 33 18 18 REG_MOT_PD N.C 3
GND 34 34 17 17 REG_MOT_CLK
DLP_MOT_CLR_REM 35 35 16 16 REG_MOT_REM(CL)
DLP_MOT_CLR_CLK 36 36 15 15 GND
DLP_MOT_CLR_RDY 37 37 14 14 CLN_SOL_RET
DLP_MOT_CLR_DIR 38 38 13 13 CLN_SOL_REM
GND 39 39 12 12 REG SENS_R_S
_
REG_MOT_PD 40 40 11 11 REG_SENS_R_P
REG_MOT_CLK 41 41 10 10 REG_R_LED
REG_MOT_REM(CL) 42 42 9 9 REG_SENS_F_S
GND 43 43 8 8 GND
IH_PWB_FAN_L 44 44 7 7 REG_SENS_F_P
IH_PWB_FAN_H 45 45 6 6 REG_F_LED
IH PWB_FAN_ALM
_ 46 46 5 5 M_ALM
POWER_OFF
DRM_HEAT_REM
47
48
47
48
4
3
4
3
POWER_OFF
DRM_HEAT_REM
FPWB1
IH_PWB_FAN(U)_AL 49 49 2 2 IH_PWB_FAN(U)_AL
GND 50 50 1 1 GND
EPWB
2-4-42
2LL/2LJ/2LH
No.5 (45 ppm model/55 ppm model)
YC6 YC1
GND 1 1 60 60 GND
JOB_SET
JOB_MOT_REM
2
3
2
3
59
58
59
58
JOB_SET
JOB_MOT_REM
Fuser drive unit YC10
JOB MOT_CLK
_ 4 4 57 57 JOB MOT_CLK
_ GND 1
JOB_MOT_DIR 5 5 56 56 JOB_MOT_DIR M_TEMP 2
JOB_OPEN_SENS 6 6 55 55 JOB_OPEN_SENS
JOB_SOL_REM 7 7 54 54 JOB_SOL_REM YC18
GND 8 8 53 53 GND FSR_MOT_BRK 1 1 3.3V 3
EXIT_REAR_FAN_L 9 9 52 52 EXIT_REAR_FAN_L FSR_MOT_DIR 2 2 6 6 CW/CCW REG_F_LED 4
EXIT_REAR_FAN_H 10 10 51 51 EXIT_REAR_FAN_H FSR_MOT_RDY 3 3 5 5 LD GND 5
FSR_MOT_CLK REG SENS_F_P
_
ZEROC
SUB_HEAT
11
12
11
12
50
49
50
49
ZEROC
SUB_HEAT FSR_MOT_REM
4
5
4
5
4
3
4
3
CLOCK
START/STOP FUM REG_SENS_F_S
6
7
MAIN_HEAT 13 13 48 48 MAIN_HEAT GND 6 6 2 2 GND
FSR_CL_REM 14 14 47 47 FSR_CL_REM 24V2 7 7 1 1 +24V
FSR_MOT_REM 15 15 46 46 FSR_MOT_REM 3.3V 8
FSR_MOT_CLK 16 16 45 45 FSR_MOT_CLK REG_R_LED 9
FSR_MOT_RDY 17 17 44 44 FSR_MOT_RDY GND 10
GND 18 18 43 43 GND REG_SENS_R_P 11
FSR_MOT_DIR 19 19 42 42 FSR_MOT_DIR REG_SENS_R_S 12
FSR_MOT_BRK 20 20 41 41 FSR_MOT_BRK
MPF_TABLE 21 21 40 40 MPF_TABLE
MPF_WID1 22 22 39 39 MPF_WID1 24V 13
MPF_WID2 23 23 38 38 MPF_WID2 CLN_SOL_REM 14
MPF_WID3 24 24 37 37 MPF_WID3 CLN_SOL_RET 15
MPF_LNG 25 25 36 36 MPF_LNG
3.3V3 26 26 35 35 3.3V3
MPF_PPR_SET 27 27 34 34 MPF_PPR_SET
MPF_LIFT_UP 28 28 33 33 MPF_LIFT_UP
MPF_LIFT_DOWN 29 29 32 32 MPF_LIFT_DOWN
MPF_JAM 30 30 31 31 MPF_JAM
MPF_CL_REM 31 31 30 30 MPF_CL_REM
MPF_LIF2 32 32 29 29 MPF_LIF2 Job separator
MPF_LIFT1 33 33 28 28 MPF_LIFT1
GND 34 34 27 27 GND JSMPWB
TC_MOT_REM 35 35 26 26 TC_MOT_REM
TC_MOT_LOCK 36 36 25 25 TC_MOT_LOCK YC8
TC TONER_LED
_ 37 37 24 24 TC TONER_LED
_ NC 1 1
TC_TONER_FULL 38 38 23 23 TC_TONER_FULL DLP_MOT_BK_DIR 2 2 6 6 CW/CCW YC2
TC_TONER_VCONT 39 39 22 22 TC_TONER_VCONT DLP_MOT_BK_RDY 3 3 5 5 LD GND 1 1 3 3 GND
INTER_LOCK 40 40 21 21 INTER_LOCK DLP MOT_BK_CLK
_ 4 4 4 4 CLOCK
DEVM
YC20 YC1 JOB_OPEN_SENS 2 2 2 2 Vout JSOCS
DU2_PD 41 41 20 20 DU2_PD DLP_MOT_BK_REM 5 5 3 3 START/STOP JOB_SET 1 1 10 1 10 10 JOB_SET +5V1 3 3 1 1 5V
DU2_CLK 42 42 19 19 DU2_CLK GND 6 6 2 2 GND GND 2 2 9 2 9 9 GND
DU2_REM_(CL_LOW) 43 43 18 18 DU2_REM_(CL_LOW) +24V1 7 7 1 1 +24V GND 3 3 8 3 8 8 GND JOB_B/ 4 4 4 B/
DU_OPEN 44 44 17 17 DU_OPEN JOB_MOT_REM 4 4 7 4 7 7 JOB_MOT_REM JOB_A/ 5 5 3 3 A/
DU_FAN 45 45 16 16 DU_FAN 24V1 5 5 6
Relay
5 6 6 24V1 JOB_B 6 6 2 2 B JSEM
PRESS_MOT_REM1 46 46 15 15 PRESS_MOT_REM1 JOB_MOT_CLK 6 6 5 6 5 5 JOB_MOT_CLK JOB_A 7 7 1 1 A
PRESS_MOT_REM2 47 47 14 14 PRESS_MOT_REM2 5V 7 7 4 7 4 4 5V
PRESS_RLS_SENS 48 48 PRESS_RLS_SENS JOB_MOT_DIR 8 8 3 8 3 3 JOB_MOT_DIR
DU_SENS DU_SENS JOB_OPEN_SENS JOB_OPEN_SENS
JSFSSOL
49 49 12 12 9 9 2 9 2 2 +24V1 8 8 2 1 COM
YC6 Relay
BELT_JAM_SENS 50 50 11 11 BELT_JAM_SENS JOB_SOL_REM 10 10 1 10 1 1 JOB_SOL_REM JOB_SOL_OUT 9 9 1 2 ACT
GND 51 51 10 10 GND DLP_MOT_CLR_DIR 1 NC 11 11
REG_BK_SENS1_S 52 52 9 9 REG_BK_SENS1_S DLP_MOT_CLR_RDY 2
REG_BK_SENS1_P 53 53 8 8 REG_BK_SENS1_P DLP_MOT_CLR_CLK 3
54 54 7 7 REG_BK_LED DLP_MOT_CLR_REM 4
LOOP_SENS 55 55 6 6 LOOP_SENS GND 5
EDGE_FAN_L 56 56 5 5 EDGE_FAN_L +24V1 6
EDGE_FAN_H 57 57 4 4 EDGE_FAN_H
DU1_MOT_PD 58 58 3 3 DU1_MOT_PD
DU1_MOT_CLK 59 59 2 2 DU1_MOT_CLK
GND 60 60 1 1 GND
YC22
YC9 REG_CL_REM 2
NC 1 1
DRM_MOT_BK_BRK 2 2 24V2 1
DRM_MOT_BK_DIR 3 3 6 6 CW/CCW
DRM MOT_BK_RDY
_ 4 4 5 5 LD
YC5 YC2 DRM_MOT_BK_CLK
GND 1 1 50 50 GND DRM_MOT_BK_REM
5
6
5
6
4
3
4
3
CLOCK
START/STOP DRM YC25
M_TEMP 2 2 49 49 DU1_MOT_REM(CL_H) GND 7 7 2 2 GND
LOOP_SENS 3 3 48 48 EXIT_FAN +24V2 8 8 1 1 +24V REG_MOT_B/ 1 1 4 4 B/
4 4 47 47 DU_ENTER_SENS REG_MOT_A/ 2 2 3 3
RM
GND A/
EDGE_FAN_H 5 5 46 46 TCON_SET REG_MOT_B 3 3 2 2 B
DU1_MOT_PD 6 6 45 45 TRANS_MOT_REM REG_MOT_A 4 4 1 1 A
DU1_MOT_CLK 7 7 44 44 TRANS_MOT_CLK
DU1_MOT_REM(CL_H) 8 8 43 43 TRANS_MOT_RDY
GND 9 9 42 42 TRANS_MOT_DIR
EXIT_FAN 10 10 41 41 TRANS_MOT_BRK YC7
DU_ENTER_SENS 11 11 40 40 GND DRM_MOT_CLR_BRK 1
TCON_SET 12 12 39 39 DRM_MOT_BK_REM DRM_MOT_CLR_DIR 2
GND 13 13 38 38 DRM_MOT_BK_CLK DRM_MOT_CLR_RDY 3
TRANS_MOT_REM 14 14 37 37 DRM_MOT_BK_RDY DRM_MOT_CLR_CLK 4
TRANS_MOT_CLK 15 15 36 36 DRM_MOT_BK_DIR DRM_MOT_CLR_REM 5
TRANS_MOT_RDY 16 16 35 35 DRM_MOT_BK_BRK GND 6
TRANS_MOT_DIR 17 17 34 34 DLP_MOT_BK_REM +24V1 7
TRANS_MOT_BRK 18 18 33 33 DLP_MOT_BK_CLK
GND 19 19 32 32 DLP_MOT_BK_RDY
DRM_MOT_BK_REM 20 20 31 31 DLP_MOT_BK_DIR
DRM_MOT_BK_RDY 21 21 30 30 DRM_MOT_CLR_REM
DRM_MOT_BK_DIR 22 22 29 29 DRM_MOT_CLR_CLK
DRM_MOT_BK_BRK 23 23 28 28 DRM_MOT_CLR_RDY
GND 24 24 27 27 DRM_MOT_CLR_DIR
DLP_MOT_BK_REM 25 25 26 26 GND
DLP_MOT_BK_CLK 26 26 25 25 DLP_MOT_CLR_REM
DLP_MOT_BK_RDY 27 27 24 24 DLP_MOT_CLR_CLK
DLP_MOT_BK_DIR 28 28 23 23 DLP_MOT_CLR_RDY
GND 29 29 22 22 DLP_MOT_CLR_DIR
DRM_MOT_CLR_REM 30 30 21 21 IH_PWB_FAN_L YC21
DRM_MOT_BK_CLR_CLK 31 31 20 20 IH_PWB_FAN_H 24V2 1
DRM_MOT_CLR_RDY 32 32 19 19 IH_PWB_FAN_ALM FSR_CL_REM 2
DRM_MOT_CLR_DIR 33 33 18 18 REG_MOT_PD N.C 3
GND 34 34 17 17 REG_MOT_CLK
DLP_MOT_CLR_REM 35 35 16 16 REG_MOT_REM(CL)
DLP_MOT_CLR_CLK 36 36 15 15 GND
DLP_MOT_CLR_RDY 37 37 14 14 CLN_SOL_RET
DLP_MOT_CLR_DIR 38 38 13 13 CLN_SOL_REM
GND 39 39 12 12 REG SENS_R_S
_
REG_MOT_PD 40 40 11 11 REG_SENS_R_P
REG_MOT_CLK 41 41 10 10 REG_R_LED
REG_MOT_REM(CL) 42 42 9 9 REG_SENS_F_S
GND 43 43 8 8 GND
IH_PWB_FAN_L 44 44 7 7 REG_SENS_F_P
IH_PWB_FAN_H 45 45 6 6 REG_F_LED
IH PWB_FAN_ALM
_ 46 46 5 5 M_ALM
POWER_OFF
DRM_HEAT_REM
47
48
47
48
4
3
4
3
POWER_OFF
DRM_HEAT_REM
FPWB1
IH_PWB_FAN(U)_AL 49 49 2 2 IH_PWB_FAN(U)_AL
GND 50 50 1 1 GND
EPWB
2-4-43
2LL/2LJ/2LH
No.6 (35 ppm model)
YC16
DU1_B/ 1 1
DU1_A/ 2 2
DU1_B 3 3
FPWB1 DU1_A 4 4
EDGE_FAN_REM 5 5
24V2 6 6
EDGE_FAN_REM 7 7
24V2 8 8
YC23 YC13
LOOP_SENS 12 12 1 C31 C31 12 1 1 LOOP_SENS
EDGE_FAN_REM 11 11 2 C32 C32 11 2 2 EDGE_FAN_REM
DU1_A 9 9 4 C34 C34 9 4 4 DU1_A YC11
DU1_B 8 8 5 C35 C35 8 5 5 DU1_B GND 1 1 3 3 GND
DU1_A/
DU1_B/
7
6
7
6
6
7
C36
C37
C36
C37
7
6
6
7
6
7
DU1_A/
DU1_B/
DU_ENTER_SENS
5V
2
3
2
3
2
1
2
1
Vout
5V
DUS1
GND 5 5 8 C38 C38 5 8 8 GND
DU_CL_UPPER_REM DU_CL_UPPER_REM EXIT_FAN_REM -
EFM1
4 4 9 C39 C39 4 9 9 4 4 2 1
Relay +
24V2 3 3 10 C40 C40 3 10 10 24V2 24V2 5 5 1 2
EXIT_FAN 2 2 11 C41 C41 2 11 11 EXIT_FAN
DU_ENTER_SENS DU_ENTER_SENS EXIT_FAN_REM -
1 1 12 C42 C42 1 12 12
24V2
6
7
6
7
2
1
Relay
1
2 + EFM2
24V2 8 8 3 3
YC17 YC12 2 2 DUCL1
GND
GND
20
19
20
19
1
2
B11
B12
B11
B12
20
19 2
1
2
1 GND
GND
MP tray DU_CL_UPPER_REM 9 9 1 1
MPF_TABLE 18 18 3 B13 B13 18 3 3 MPF_TABLE

MPF_WID1 17 17 4 B14 B14 17 4 4 MPF_WID1 YC3 YC10
MPF_WID2 MPF_WID2 MPF_LIFT_DR_B LOOP_SENS
MPF_WID3
16
15
16
15
5
6
B15
B16
B15
B16
16
15
5
6
5
6 MPF_WID3 MPF_LIFT_DR_A
16
15
16
15
1
2
16
15
1
2
Relay
2
1 MPLM GND
1
2
1
2
1
2
1
2
OUT
GND LPS
MPF_LNG 14 14 7 B17 B17 14 7 7 MPF_LNG 5V 3 3 3 3 5V
LED_3.3V3 13 13 8 B18 B18 13 8 8 LED_3.3V3 24V2 14 14 3 14 1 1
MPF_PPR_SET
MPF_LIFT_UP_SENS
12
11
12
11
9
10
B19
B20
B19
B20
12
11
9
10
9
10
MPF_PPR_SET
MPF_LIFT_UP_SENS MPF_CL_REM 13 13 4 13
2
3
2
3
MPPFCL 3.3V
REG_BK_LED
4
5
4
5
5
4
5
4
+3.3V
LED_REF
MPF_LIFT_DOWN_SENS 10 10 11 B21 B21 10 11 11 MPF_LIFT_DOWN_SENS GND 6 6 3 3 GND IDS
MPF_JAM_SENS 9 9 12 B22 B22 9 12 12 MPF_JAM_SENS 5V 12 12 5 12 1 1 5V REG_BK_SENS1_P 7 7 2 2 VO_P
MPF_CL_REM
24V2
8
7
8
7
13
14
B23
B24
B23
B24
8
7
13
14
13
14
MPF_CL_REM
24V2
MPF_JAM_SENS
GND
11
10
11
10
6
7
11
10
2
3
2
3
Vout
GND
MPFS REG_BK_SENS1_S 8 8 1 1 VO_S
MPF_LIFT_MOT_A 6 6 15 B25 B25 6 15 15 MPF_LIFT_MOT_A Relay GND 9 9

MPF_LIFT_MOT_B 5 5 16 B26 B26 5 16 16 MPF_LIFT_MOT_B 5V 9 9 8 9 1 1 5V BELT_JAM_SENS 10 10
24V2
CLN_SOL_REM
4
3
4
3
17
18
B27
B28
B27
B28
4
3
17
18
17
18
24V2
CLN_SOL_REM
MPF_LIFT_DOWN_SENS
GND
8
7
8
7
9
10
8
7
2
3
2
3
Vout
GND
MPLS2 5V 11 11
GND 2 2 19 B29 B29 2 19 19 GND

GND 1 1 20 B30 B30 1 20 20 GND 5V 6 6 11 6 1 1 5V YC14
MPF_LIFT_UP_SENS
GND
5
4
5
4
12
13
5
4
2
3
2
3
Vout
GND
MPLS1 GND
PRESS_RLS_SENS
1
2
Drawer
Drawer
5V 3
MPF_PPR_SET 3 3 14 3 1 1 Vout
GND
LED_3.3V3
2
1
2
1
15
16
2
1
2
3
2
3
GND
3.3V
MPPS PRESS_RLS_REM1
PRESS_RLS_REM2
4
5
YC14 YC1 NC 6
GND 18 18 1 D43 D43 18 1 1 GND
DU2_A 17 17 2 D44 D44 17 2 2 DU2_A
DU2_B 16 16 3 D45 D45 16 3 3 DU2_B YC4
YC2
DU2_A/
DU2_B/
15 15 4 D46 D46 15 4 4 DU2_A/
DU2_B/ MPF_TABLE
24V2
ID_SOL_REM
1 1 2
Relay
1 COM
CLSOL
MPTSW
14 14 5 D47 D47 14 5 5 9 9 1 9 1 1 Vout 2 2 1 2 ACT
DU_OPEN_SW 13 13 6 D48 D48 13 6 6 DU_OPEN_SW GND 8 8 2 8 2 2 GND
DU_CL_LOWER_REM 12 12 7 D49 D49 12 7 7 DU_CL_LOWER_REM
DU_FAN 11 11 8 D50 D50 11 8 8 DU_FAN MPF_WID1 7 7 3 7 1 1 WID1
9 9 6 6 4 6 2 2 YC8
MPPWSW
24V2 10 10 9 D51 D51 10 24V2 GND GND
PRESS_RLSMOT2 9 9 10 D52 D52 9 10 10 PRESS_RLSMOT2 MPF_WID2 5 5 5 Relay 5 3 3 WID2 24V2 1
PRESS_RLSMOT21 8 8 11 D53 D53 8 11 11 PRESS_RLSMOT21 MPF_WID3 4 4 6 4 4 WID3 DU_FAN_REM 2
5V 7 7 12 D54 D54 7 12 12 5V
PRESS_RLS_SENS 6 6 13 D55 D55 6 13 13 PRESS_RLS_SENS 5V 3 3 7 3 1 3 1 1 5V 24V2 3
DU_SENS 5 5 14 D56 D56 5 14 14 DU_SENS MPF_LNG 2 2 8 2 2 Relay 2 2 2 Vout MPPLSW DU_FAN_REM 4
BELT_JAM_SENS 4 4 15 D57 D57 4 15 15 BELT_JAM_SENS GND 1 1 9 1 3 1 3 3 GND
REG_BK_SENS1_S 3 3 16 D58 D58 3 16 16 REG_BK_SENS1_S
REG_BK_SENS1_P 2 2 17 D59 D59 2 17 17 REG_BK_SENS1_P
REG_BK_LED 1 1 18 D60 D60 1 18 18 REG_BK_LED YC9
GND 1 1 3 3 GND
YC5 DU_SENS
5V
2
3
2
3
2
1
2
1
Vout
5V
DUS2
TANK_SET 10 10 1 A1 A1 10 1 1 TANK_SET
YC6
+24V2 9 9 2 A2 A2 9 2 2 +24V2 24V2 7 7
GND 8 8 3 A3 A3 8 3 3 GND GND 6 6 1 1 +24V YC7
+24V2 7 7 4 A4 A4 7 4 4 +24V2 TRANS_MOT_REM 5 5 2 2 GND TRM 24V2 1 1 3 3
GND
TRANS_MOT_REM
6
5
6
5
5
6
A5
A6
A5
A6
6
5
5
6
5
6
GND
TRANS_MOT_REM
TRANS_MOT_CLK
TRANS_MOT_RDY
4
3
4
3
3
4
3
4
START/STOP
CLOCK DU_CL2_REM 2 2
2
1
2
1
DUCL2
TRANS_MOT_CLK 4 4 7 A7 A7 4 7 7 TRANS_MOT_CLK TRANS_MOT_DIR 2 2 5 5 LD
TRANS_MOT_RDY TRANS_MOT_RDY TRANS_MOT_BRK DU_OPEN 3 3
DUCSW
3 3 8 A8 A8 3 8 8 1 1 6 6 CW/CCW 2 2
TRANS_MOT_DIR 2 2 9 A9 A9 2 9 9 TRANS_MOT_DIR GND 4 4 1 1
TRANS_MOT_BRK 1 1 10 A10 A10 1 10 10 TRANS_MOT_BRK
DU2_B/ 5 5
DU2_A/ 6 6
DU2_B 7 7
DU2_A 8 8
RYPWB
2-4-44
2LL/2LJ/2LH
YC16
DU1_B/ 1 1 4 4 B/
DU1_A/ 3 3 A/
DUM1
2 2
DU1_B 3 3 2 2 B
FPWB1 DU1_A 4 4 1 1 A
EDGE_FAN_REM 5 5
24V2 6 6
EDGE_FAN_REM 7 7
24V2 8 8
YC23 YC13
LOOP_SENS 12 12 1 C31 C31 12 1 1 LOOP_SENS
DU1_A 9 9 4 C34 C34 9 4 4 DU1_A YC11
DU1_B 8 8 5 C35 C35 8 5 5 DU1_B GND 1 1 3 3 GND
DU1_A/
DU1_B/
7
6
7
6
6
7
C36
C37
C36
C37
7
6
6
7
6
7
DU1_A/
DU1_B/
DU_ENTER_SENS
5V
2
3
2
3
2
1
2
1
Vout
5V
DUS1
GND 5 5 8 C38 C38 5 8 8 GND
DU_CL_UPPER_REM DU_CL_UPPER_REM EXIT_FAN_REM -
EFM1
4 4 9 C39 C39 4 9 9 4 4 2 1
Relay +
24V2 3 3 10 C40 C40 3 10 10 24V2 24V2 5 5 1 2
EXIT_FAN 2 2 11 C41 C41 2 11 11 EXIT_FAN
DU_ENTER_SENS DU_ENTER_SENS EXIT_FAN_REM -
1 1 12 C42 C42 1 12 12
24V2
6
7
6
7
2
1
Relay
1
2 + EFM2
24V2 8 8
YC17 YC12
GND
GND
20
19
20
19
1
2
B11
B12
B11
B12
20
19 2
1
2
1 GND
GND
MP tray DU_CL_UPPER_REM 9 9
MPF_TABLE 18 18 3 B13 B13 18 3 3 MPF_TABLE

MPF_WID1 17 17 4 B14 B14 17 4 4 MPF_WID1 YC3 YC10
MPF_WID2 MPF_WID2 MPF_LIFT_DR_B LOOP_SENS
MPF_WID3
16
15
16
15
5
6
B15
B16
B15
B16
16
15
5
6
5
6 MPF_WID3 MPF_LIFT_DR_A
16
15
16
15
1
2
16
15
1
2
Relay
2
1 MPLM GND
1
2
1
2
1
2
1
2
OUT
GND LPS
MPF_LNG 14 14 7 B17 B17 14 7 7 MPF_LNG 5V 3 3 3 3 5V
LED_3.3V3 13 13 8 B18 B18 13 8 8 LED_3.3V3 24V2 14 14 3 14 1 1
MPF_PPR_SET
MPF_LIFT_UP_SENS
12
11
12
11
9
10
B19
B20
B19
B20
12
11
9
10
9
10
MPF_PPR_SET
MPF_LIFT_UP_SENS MPF_CL_REM 13 13 4 13
2
3
2
3
MPPFCL 3.3V
REG_BK_LED
4
5
4
5
5
4
5
4
+3.3V
LED_REF
MPF_LIFT_DOWN_SENS 10 10 11 B21 B21 10 11 11 MPF_LIFT_DOWN_SENS GND 6 6 3 3 GND IDS
MPF_JAM_SENS 9 9 12 B22 B22 9 12 12 MPF_JAM_SENS 5V 12 12 5 12 1 1 5V REG_BK_SENS1_P 7 7 2 2 VO_P
MPF_CL_REM
24V2
8
7
8
7
13
14
B23
B24
B23
B24
8
7
13
14
13
14
MPF_CL_REM
24V2
MPF_JAM_SENS
GND
11
10
11
10
6
7
11
10
2
3
2
3
Vout
GND
MPFS REG_BK_SENS1_S 8 8 1 1 VO_S
MPF_LIFT_MOT_A 6 6 15 B25 B25 6 15 15 MPF_LIFT_MOT_A Relay GND 9 9

MPF_LIFT_MOT_B 5 5 16 B26 B26 5 16 16 MPF_LIFT_MOT_B 5V 9 9 8 9 1 1 5V BELT_JAM_SENS 10 10
24V2
CLN_SOL_REM
4
3
4
3
17
18
B27
B28
B27
B28
4
3
17
18
17
18
24V2
CLN_SOL_REM
MPF_LIFT_DOWN_SENS
GND
8
7
8
7
9
10
8
7
2
3
2
3
Vout
GND
MPLS2 5V 11 11
GND 2 2 19 B29 B29 2 19 19 GND

GND 1 1 20 B30 B30 1 20 20 GND 5V 6 6 11 6 1 1 5V YC14
MPF_LIFT_UP_SENS
GND
5
4
5
4
12
13
5
4
2
3
2
3
Vout
GND
MPLS1 GND
PRESS_RLS_SENS
1
2
Drawer
Drawer
5V 3
MPF_PPR_SET 3 3 14 3 1 1 Vout
GND
LED_3.3V3
2
1
2
1
15
16
2
1
2
3
2
3
GND
3.3V
MPPS PRESS_RLS_REM1
PRESS_RLS_REM2
4
5
YC14 YC1 NC 6
GND 18 18 1 D43 D43 18 1 1 GND
DU2_A 17 17 2 D44 D44 17 2 2 DU2_A
DU2_B 16 16 3 D45 D45 16 3 3 DU2_B YC4
YC2
DU2_A/
DU2_B/
15 15 4 D46 D46 15 4 4 DU2_A/
DU2_B/ MPF_TABLE
24V2
ID_SOL_REM
1 1 2
Relay
1 COM
CLSOL
MPTSW
14 14 5 D47 D47 14 5 5 9 9 1 9 1 1 Vout 2 2 1 2 ACT
DU_OPEN_SW 13 13 6 D48 D48 13 6 6 DU_OPEN_SW GND 8 8 2 8 2 2 GND
DU_CL_LOWER_REM 12 12 7 D49 D49 12 7 7 DU_CL_LOWER_REM
DU_FAN 11 11 8 D50 D50 11 8 8 DU_FAN MPF_WID1 7 7 3 7 1 1 WID1
9 9 6 6 4 6 2 2 YC8
MPPWSW
24V2 10 10 9 D51 D51 10 24V2 GND GND
PRESS_RLSMOT2 9 9 10 D52 D52 9 10 10 PRESS_RLSMOT2 MPF_WID2 5 5 5 Relay 5 3 3 WID2 24V2 1
PRESS_RLSMOT21 8 8 11 D53 D53 8 11 11 PRESS_RLSMOT21 MPF_WID3 4 4 6 4 4 WID3 DU_FAN_REM 2
5V 7 7 12 D54 D54 7 12 12 5V
PRESS_RLS_SENS 6 6 13 D55 D55 6 13 13 PRESS_RLS_SENS 5V 3 3 7 3 1 3 1 1 5V 24V2 3
DU_SENS 5 5 14 D56 D56 5 14 14 DU_SENS MPF_LNG 2 2 8 2 2 Relay 2 2 2 Vout MPPLSW DU_FAN_REM 4
BELT_JAM_SENS 4 4 15 D57 D57 4 15 15 BELT_JAM_SENS GND 1 1 9 1 3 1 3 3 GND
REG_BK_SENS1_S 3 3 16 D58 D58 3 16 16 REG_BK_SENS1_S
REG_BK_SENS1_P 2 2 17 D59 D59 2 17 17 REG_BK_SENS1_P
REG_BK_LED 1 1 18 D60 D60 1 18 18 REG_BK_LED YC9
GND 1 1 3 3 GND
YC5 DU_SENS
5V
2
3
2
3
2
1
2
1
Vout
5V
DUS2
TANK_SET 10 10 1 A1 A1 10 1 1 TANK_SET
YC6
+24V2 9 9 2 A2 A2 9 2 2 +24V2 24V2 7 7
GND 8 8 3 A3 A3 8 3 3 GND GND 6 6 1 1 +24V YC7
+24V2
GND
7
6
7
6
4
5
A4
A5
A4
A5
7
6
4
5
4
5
+24V2
GND
TRANS_MOT_REM
TRANS_MOT_CLK
5
4
5
4
2
3
2
3
GND
START/STOP
TRM 24V2 1 1
TRANS_MOT_REM 5 5 6 A6 A6 5 6 6 TRANS_MOT_REM TRANS_MOT_RDY 3 3 4 4 CLOCK DU_CL2_REM 2 2

TRANS_MOT_CLK 4 4 7 A7 A7 4 7 7 TRANS_MOT_CLK TRANS_MOT_DIR 2 2 5 5 LD
TRANS_MOT_RDY TRANS_MOT_RDY TRANS_MOT_BRK DU_OPEN 3 3
DUCSW
3 3 8 A8 A8 3 8 8 1 1 6 6 CW/CCW 2 2
TRANS_MOT_DIR 2 2 9 A9 A9 2 9 9 TRANS_MOT_DIR GND 4 4 1 1
TRANS_MOT_BRK 1 1 10 A10 A10 1 10 10 TRANS_MOT_BRK
DU2_B/ 5 5 4 4 B/
DU2_A/
DUM2
6 6 3 3 A/
DU2_B 7 7 2 2 B
DU2_A 8 8 1 1 A
RYPWB
2-4-45
2LL/2LJ/2LH
No.7 (35 ppm model)
YC7 Middle guide unit

YC12 YC11 MID_B/ 1 1
+24V2 1 1 6 6 +24V2 MID_A/ 2 2
+24V2 2 2 5 5 +24V2 MID_B 3 3
+5V 3 3 4 4 +5V MID_A 4 4
GND 4 4 3 3 GND 13 1
GND 5 5 2 2 GND 12 2 4 4 TH
BEND_SENS 11 YC13
RDS
GND 6 6 1 1 GND 5 5 3 3 3 OUT
GND 6 6 10 4 2 2 GND 5V1 3 3 1
5V 7 7 9 5 1 1 5V GND 2 2 2 From CRPWB
CURRENT_SIG 1 1 3
GND 8 8 8 6 3 3 GND
FEED1_SENS 9 9 7 7 2 2 Vout MS
Relay
5V 10 10 6 8 1 1 5V
GND 11 11 5 9 3 3 GND
REG_SENS 12 12 4 10 2 2 Vout RS Paper feed drive unit
5V 13 13 3 11 1 1 5V
FPWB1 MID_CL_REM 14 14 2 12 3 3
24V2 15 15 2 2 MCL YC2
1 13 1 1 FEED_MOT_GAIN 1 1
FEED_MOT_DIR 2 2 6 6 CW/CCW
FEED_MOT_RDY
FEED_MOT_CLK
3
4
3
4
5
4
5
4
LD
CLOCK PFM
YC5 FEED_MOT_REM 5 5 3 3 START/STOP
V-FEED_CL_REM 3 1 3 3 GND 6 6 2 2 GND
24V2 2 2
2
1
2
1
PCCL 24V2 7 7 1 1 +24V
NC 1 3
YC10
ASIST_CL1 1
Primary paper feed unit 24V2 2

YC8
24V2 1 1 12 1
YC4 YC1 PICK_SOL1_REM 2 2 11 2 YC12
GND 1 1 1 1 GND PICK_SOL1_RET 3 3 10 3 ASIST_CL2 1
FEED_MOT_REM 2 2 2 2 FEED_MOT_REM
FEED_MOT_CLK 3 3 3 3 FEED_MOT_CLK 24V2 2
FEED MOT_RDY
_ 4 4 4 4 FEED MOT_RDY
_ LED_5V 4 4 9 4 3 3 5V
FEED_MOT_DIR 5 5 5 5 FEED_MOT_DIR GND 5 5 8 5 2 2 GND PS1
FEED_CL1_REM 6 6 6 6 FEED_CL1_REM CAS1_EMPTY_SENS 6 6 7 6 1 1 Vout
YC4
Relay
FEED_CL2_REM 7 7 7 7 FEED_CL2_REM
ASIST_CL2 8 8 8 8 ASIST_CL2 FEED_CL1_REM 1 1 3 3
LIFT_MOT2_REM 9 9 9 9 LIFT_MOT2_REM LED_5V 7 7 6 7 3 3 5V 2 2 PFCL1
GND 10 10 10 10 GND GND
CAS1_LIFT_UP_SENS
8 8 5 8 2 2 GND LS1 24V2 2 2 1 1
LIFT_MOT1_REM1 11 11 11 11 LIFT_MOT1_REM1 9 9 4 9 1 1 Vout
CAS2_WID 12 12 12 12 CAS2_WID FEED_CL2_REM 3 3 3 3
CAS2_LNG3
CAS2_LNG2
13
14
13
14
13
14
13
14
CAS2_LNG3
CAS2_LNG2 5V 10 10 3 10 3 3 5V 24V2 4 4
2
1
2
1
PFCL2
CAS2_LNG1 15 15 15 15 CAS2_LNG1 CAS1_P0_SENS 11 11 2 11 2 2 Vout FS1
CAS1_WID CAS1_WID
Connector holder
16 16 16 16 GND 12 12 1 12 1 1 GND
CAS1_LNG3 17 17 17 17 CAS1_LNG3
CAS1_LNG2 18 18 18 18 CAS1_LNG2
CAS1_LNG1 19 19 19 19 CAS1_LNG1 24V2 13 1 12 1
GND 20 20 20 20 GND PICK_SOL2_REM 14 2 11 2
CAS2_QUANT2 21 21 21 21 CAS2_QUANT2 PICK_SOL2_RET 15 3 10 3
CAS2_QUANT1 22 22 22 22 CAS2_QUANT1
CAS1_QUANT1 24 24 24 24 CAS1_QUANT1 LED_5V 16 4 9 4 3 3 5V
YC3
LIFT_MOT1_LOCK
LIFT_MOT2_LOCK
25
26
25
26
25
26
25
26
LIFT_MOT1_LOCK
LIFT_MOT2_LOCK
GND
CAS2_EMPTY_SENS
17
18
5
6
8
7
Relay 5
6
2
1
2
1
GND
Vout
PS2 CAS1_LNG1 1 1 6 1 4 4 SW1
CURRENT_SIG 27 27 27 27 CURRENT_SIG CAS1_LNG2 2 2 5 2 3 3 SW2
V-FEED_CL 28 28 28 28 V-FEED_CL GND 3 3 4 3 2 2 COM PLSW1
COVER_OPEN 29 29 29 29 COVER_OPEN LED_5V 19 7 6 7 3 3 5V CAS1_LNG3 4 4 3 Relay 4 1 1 SW3
FEED2_SENS
CAS1_P0
30 30 30 30 FEED2_SENS
CAS1_P0
GND
CAS2_LIFT_UP_SENS
20 8 5 8 2 2 GND LS2 CAS1_WID
CAS1_LIFT_UP
31
32
31
32
31
32
31
32 CAS1_LIFT_UP
21 9 4 9 1 1 Vout
GND
5
6
5
6
2
1
5
6
2
1
2
1 PWSW1
GND 33 33 33 33 GND
CAS1_EMPTY 34 34 34 34 CAS1_EMPTY 5V 22 10 3 10 3 3 5V
PICK_SOL1_RET
PICK_SOL1_REM
35
36
35
36
35
36
35
36
PICK_SOL1_RET
PICK_SOL1_REM
CAS2_P0_SENS
GND
23
24
11
12
2
1
11
12
2
1
2
1
Vout
GND
FS2 CAS2_LNG1
CAS2_LNG2
7
8
7
8
6
5
1
2
4
3
4
3
SW1
SW2
CAS2_P0 37 37 37 37 CAS2_P0 GND 9 9 4 3 2 2 COM PLSW2
CAS2_LIFT_UP 38 38 38 38 CAS2_LIFT_UP CAS2_LNG3 10 10 3 Relay 4 1 1 SW3
CAS2_EMPTY 39 39 39 39 CAS2_EMPTY
PICK_SOL2_RET PICK_SOL2_RET CAS2_WID
PICK_SOL2_REM
40
41
40
41
40
41
40
41 PICK_SOL2_REM GND
11
12
11
12
2
1
5
6
2
1
2
1 PWSW2
GND 42 42 42 42 GND
REG_SENS 43 43 43 43 REG_SENS
FEED1_SENS FEED1_SENS LIFT_MOT1_RET
LM1
44 44 44 44 13 13 2 2
BEND_SENS 45 45 45 45 BEND_SENS Lower guide unit LIFT_MOT1_DR 14 14 1 1
Connector holder
MID_MOT_PH 46 46 46 46 MID_MOT_PH
MID_MOT_REM(ROL) 47 47 47 47 MID_MOT_REM(ROL)
YC6
MID_MOT_CLK 48 48 48 48 MID_MOT_CLK LED_5V 1 1 5 1 3 3 5V
MID_MOT_PD
ASIST_CL1
49
50
49
50
49
50
49
50
MID_MOT_PD
ASIST_CL1
GND
FEED2_SENS
2 2 4 2 2 2 GND PCS LIFT_MOT2_RET
LIFT_MOT2_DR
15 1 2 2
LM2
Relay
3 3 3 3 1 1 Vout 16 2 1 1
COVER_OPEN
GND
4
5
4
5
2
1
4
5
2
1
2
1 PCCSW LED_5V 17 3 6 1 3 3 5V
GND
CAS1_QUANT1
18
19
4
5
5
4
2
3
2
1
2
1
GND
Vout
PGS1(U)
Relay
LED_5V 20 6 3 4 3 3 5V
GND
CAS1_QUANT2
21
22
7
8
2
1
5
6
2
1
2
1
GND
Vout
PGS1(L)
LED_ 5V 23 9 6 1 3 3 5V
GND
CAS2_QUANT1
24
25
10
11
5
4
2
3
2
1
2
1
GND
Vout
PGS2(U)
EPWB LED_5V 26 12 3
Relay
4 3 3 5V
GND 27 13 2 5 2 2 GND PGS2(L)
FPWB2 CAS2_QUANT2 28 14 1 6 1 1 Vout
2-4-46
2LL/2LJ/2LH
Middle guide unit

YC7
YC12 YC11 MID_B/ 1 1 13 1 4 1 B/
MID_A/
+24V2
+24V2
1
2
1
2
6
5
6
5
+24V2
+24V2 MID_B
2
3
2
3
12
11
2
3
3
2
2
3
A/
B MM
+5V 3 3 4 4 +5V MID_A 4 4 10 4 1 4 A
GND 4 4 3 3 GND
GND 5 5 2 2 GND 4 4 TH
BEND_SENS YC13
RDS
GND 6 6 1 1 GND 5 5 9 5 3 3 OUT
GND 6 6 8 6 2 2 GND 5V1 3 3 1
5V 7 7 7 7 1 1 5V GND 2 2 2 From CRPWB
Relay
CURRENT_SIG 1 1 3
GND 8 8 6 8 3 3 GND
FEED1_SENS
5V
9
10
9
10
5
4
9
10
2
1
2
1
Vout
5V
MS
GND 11 11 3 11 3 3 GND
REG_SENS 12 12 2 12 2 2 Vout RS Paper feed drive unit
5V 13 13 1 13 1 1 5V
FPWB1 MID_CL_REM 14 14
24V2 15 15 YC2
FEED_MOT_GAIN 1 1
FEED_MOT_DIR 2 2 6 6 CW/CCW
FEED_MOT_RDY
FEED_MOT_CLK
3
4
3
4
5
4
5
4
LD
CLOCK PFM
YC5 FEED_MOT_REM 5 5 3 3 START/STOP
V-FEED_CL_REM 3 1 3 3 GND 6 6 2 2 GND
24V2 2 2
2
1
2
1
PCCL 24V2 7 7 1 1 +24V
NC 1 3
YC10
ASIST_CL1 1 1 3 3
Primary paper feed unit 24V2 2 2
2
1
2
1
ASCL1
YC8
24V2 1 1 12 1 3 1 COM
YC4 YC1 PICK_SOL1_REM 2 2 11 2 2 Relay 2 ACT PUSOL1 YC12
GND 1 1 1 1 GND PICK_SOL1_RET 3 3 10 3 1 3 RET ASIST_CL2 1 1 3 3
FEED_MOT_REM
FEED_MOT_CLK
2
3
2
3
2
3
2
3
FEED_MOT_REM
FEED_MOT_CLK 24V2 2 2
2
1
2
1
ASCL2
FEED MOT_RDY
_ 4 4 4 4 FEED MOT_RDY
_ LED_5V 4 4 9 4 3 3 5V
FEED_MOT_DIR 5 5 5 5 FEED_MOT_DIR GND 5 5 8 5 2 2 GND PS1
FEED_CL1_REM 6 6 6 6 FEED_CL1_REM CAS1_EMPTY_SENS 6 6 7 6 1 1 Vout
YC4
Relay
FEED_CL2_REM 7 7 7 7 FEED_CL2_REM
ASIST_CL2 8 8 8 8 ASIST_CL2 FEED_CL1_REM 1 1 3 3
LIFT_MOT2_REM 9 9 9 9 LIFT_MOT2_REM LED_5V 7 7 6 7 3 3 5V 2 2 PFCL1
GND 10 10 10 10 GND GND
CAS1_LIFT_UP_SENS
8 8 5 8 2 2 GND LS1 24V2 2 2 1 1
LIFT_MOT1_REM1 11 11 11 11 LIFT_MOT1_REM1 9 9 4 9 1 1 Vout
CAS2_WID 12 12 12 12 CAS2_WID FEED_CL2_REM 3 3 3 3
CAS2_LNG3
CAS2_LNG2
13
14
13
14
13
14
13
14
CAS2_LNG3
CAS2_LNG2 5V 10 10 3 10 3 3 5V 24V2 4 4
2
1
2
1
PFCL2
CAS2_LNG1 15 15 15 15 CAS2_LNG1 CAS1_P0_SENS 11 11 2 11 2 2 Vout FS1
CAS1_WID CAS1_WID
Connector holder
16 16 16 16 GND 12 12 1 12 1 1 GND
CAS1_LNG3 17 17 17 17 CAS1_LNG3
CAS1_LNG2 18 18 18 18 CAS1_LNG2
CAS1_LNG1 19 19 19 19 CAS1_LNG1 24V2 13 1 12 1 3 1 COM
GND
CAS2_QUANT2
20
21
20
21
20
21
20
21
GND
CAS2_QUANT2
PICK_SOL2_REM
PICK_SOL2_RET
14
15
2
3
11
10
2
3
2
1
Relay 2
3
ACT
RET
PUSOL2
CAS1_QUANT1 24 24 24 24 CAS1_QUANT1 LED_5V 16 4 9 4 3 3 5V
YC3
LIFT_MOT1_LOCK
LIFT_MOT2_LOCK
25
26
25
26
25
26
25
26
LIFT_MOT1_LOCK
LIFT_MOT2_LOCK
GND
CAS2_EMPTY_SENS
17
18
5
6
8
7
Relay 5
6
2
1
2
1
GND
Vout
PS2 CAS1_LNG1 1 1 6 1 4 4 SW1
CURRENT_SIG 27 27 27 27 CURRENT_SIG CAS1_LNG2 2 2 5 2 3 3 SW2
V-FEED_CL 28 28 28 28 V-FEED_CL GND 3 3 4 3 2 2 COM PLSW1
COVER_OPEN 29 29 29 29 COVER_OPEN LED_5V 19 7 6 7 3 3 5V CAS1_LNG3 4 4 3 Relay 4 1 1 SW3
FEED2_SENS
CAS1_P0
30 30 30 30 FEED2_SENS
CAS1_P0
GND
CAS2_LIFT_UP_SENS
20 8 5 8 2 2 GND LS2 CAS1_WID
CAS1_LIFT_UP
31
32
31
32
31
32
31
32 CAS1_LIFT_UP
21 9 4 9 1 1 Vout
GND
5
6
5
6
2
1
5
6
2
1
2
1 PWSW1
GND 33 33 33 33 GND
CAS1_EMPTY 34 34 34 34 CAS1_EMPTY 5V 22 10 3 10 3 3 5V
PICK_SOL1_RET
PICK_SOL1_REM
35
36
35
36
35
36
35
36
PICK_SOL1_RET
PICK_SOL1_REM
CAS2_P0_SENS
GND
23
24
11
12
2
1
11
12
2
1
2
1
Vout
GND
FS2 CAS2_LNG1
CAS2_LNG2
7
8
7
8
6
5
1
2
4
3
4
3
SW1
SW2
CAS2_P0 37 37 37 37 CAS2_P0 GND 9 9 4 3 2 2 COM PLSW2
CAS2_LIFT_UP 38 38 38 38 CAS2_LIFT_UP CAS2_LNG3 10 10 3 Relay 4 1 1 SW3
CAS2_EMPTY 39 39 39 39 CAS2_EMPTY
PICK_SOL2_RET PICK_SOL2_RET CAS2_WID
PICK_SOL2_REM
40
41
40
41
40
41
40
41 PICK_SOL2_REM GND
11
12
11
12
2
1
5
6
2
1
2
1 PWSW2
GND 42 42 42 42 GND
REG_SENS 43 43 43 43 REG_SENS
FEED1_SENS FEED1_SENS LIFT_MOT1_RET
LM1
44 44 44 44 13 13 2 2
BEND_SENS 45 45 45 45 BEND_SENS Lower guide unit LIFT_MOT1_DR 14 14 1 1
Connector holder
MID_MOT_PH 46 46 46 46 MID_MOT_PH
MID_MOT_REM(ROL) 47 47 47 47 MID_MOT_REM(ROL)
YC6
MID_MOT_CLK 48 48 48 48 MID_MOT_CLK LED_5V 1 1 5 1 3 3 5V
MID_MOT_PD
ASIST_CL1
49
50
49
50
49
50
49
50
MID_MOT_PD
ASIST_CL1
GND
FEED2_SENS
2 2 4 2 2 2 GND PCS LIFT_MOT2_RET
LIFT_MOT2_DR
15 1 2 2
LM2
Relay
3 3 3 3 1 1 Vout 16 2 1 1
COVER_OPEN
GND
4
5
4
5
2
1
4
5
2
1
2
1 PCCSW LED_5V 17 3 6 1 3 3 5V
GND
CAS1_QUANT1
18
19
4
5
5
4
2
3
2
1
2
1
GND
Vout
PGS1(U)
Relay
LED_5V 20 6 3 4 3 3 5V
GND
CAS1_QUANT2
21
22
7
8
2
1
5
6
2
1
2
1
GND
Vout
PGS1(L)
LED_ 5V 23 9 6 1 3 3 5V
GND
CAS2_QUANT1
24
25
10
11
5
4
2
3
2
1
2
1
GND
Vout
PGS2(U)
EPWB LED_5V 26 12 3
Relay
4 3 3 5V
GND 27 13 2 5 2 2 GND PGS2(L)
FPWB2 CAS2_QUANT2 28 14 1 6 1 1 Vout
2-4-47
2LL/2LJ/2LH-4
No.8
YC15
+24V1 1 1
N.C
+24V2
2
3
2
3
PCUSW
YC5 YC16
+24V2 1 1 1 1 +24V2
TR
GND 2 2 2 2 GND
NC 3 3
YC5 YC14
POWER_OFF 3 3 1 1 POWER_OFF
DRM_HEAT_REM 2 2 2 2 DRM_HEAT_REM
GND 1 1 3 3 GND YC10
4 4 FSR_RELAY_REM +24V1 1 1 1
+24V1 2 2 2 To Paper feeder
FB_OUTPUT 1 1 +24V1 3 3 1
NC 2 2 +24V1 4 4 2 To Document finisher
NC 3 3 YC1 YC3 YC4 YC9 +24V1 5 5 3
PB_OUTPUT 4 4 GND 1 1 8 8 GND +24V1 1 1 1 1 +24V1 +24V1 6 6 1
+5V 2 2 7 7 +5V +24V1 2 2 2 2 +24V1 +24V1 7 7 5
GND 3 3 6 6 GND +24V1 3 3 3 3 +24V1 +24V1 8 8 6
+12V 4 4 5 5 +12V +12V 4 4 4 4 +12V GND 9 9 3
GND 5 5 4 4 GND GND 5 5 5 5 GND GND 10 10 4
GND 6 6 3 3 GND GND 6 6 6 6 GND GND 11 11 4 To ISCPWB
+24V1 7 7 2 2 +24V1 GND 7 7 7 7 GND GND 12 12 5
+24V1 8 8 1 1 +24V1 GND 8 8 8 8 GND GND 13 13 6
GND 14 14 2
GND 15 15 3
YC13 YC26 GND 16 16 4
GND 1 1 4 4 GND
GND 2 2 3 3 GND
3.3V3 3 3 2 2 3.3V3
3.3V2 4 4 1 1 3.3V2
YC3
IH_NEUTRAL 1 1 1
NC 2 2 To FHPWB
IH_LIVE 3 3 2
FPWB1
YC2 YC16
DC_MAIN_REM 1 1 9 9 DC_MAIN_REM
AC_MAIN_CLK 2 2 8 8 AC_MAIN_CLK
AC_MAIN_CNT 3 3 7 7 AC_MAIN_CNT
DC_MAIN_CNT 4 4 6 6 DC_MAIN_CNT 4 DH_LIVE
MAIN_IDC 5 5 5 5 MAIN_IDC TB3 #110 2 MSW_IN MSW
T2_REM 6 6 4 4 T2_REM DH_LIVE 1 1 1 MSW_OUT
T2_CNT 7 7 3 3 T2_CNT
SP_BELT_CNT 8 8 2 2 SP_BELT_CNT
SGND 9 9 1 1 SGND YC1 2
MSW_OUT 1 1
MSW_IN 2 2
TB1 #250
LIVE 1 1 AC_LIVE
TB2 #250 Inlet
NEUTRAL 1 1 AC_NEUTRAL
PSPWB YC4
DH_LIVE_OUT 1 1
2 2
3 3 1 1
HVPWB EPWB DH_LIVE_IN 4 4 2 2
YC5
YC8 DH_LIVE 1 1
1 +24V1 DH_LIVE 2 2 1 1
2 +24V1 NC 3 3 2 2 CH
3 +24V1 NC 4 4
4 GND DH_NEUTRAL 5 5
5 GND DH_NEUTRAL 6 6
YC1 6 GND
DC_REC_CNT 1 1 10 10 DC_REC_CNT
AC_MAG_CNT 2 2 9 9 AC_MAG_CNT
AC_MAG_CLK 3 3 8 8 AC_MAG_CLK
DISCHARGE 4 4 7 7 DISCHARGE
AC_SLV_CNT 5 5 6 6 AC_SLV_CNT
AC_SLV_CLK 6 6 5 5 AC_SLV_CLK
DC_SLV_CNT 7 7 4 4 DC_SLV_CNT
DC_MAG_CNT 8 8 3 3 DC_MAG_CNT
DC_MAG_REM 9 9 2 2 DC_MAG_REM
SGND 10 10 1 1 SGND
YC6
YC13 DH_LIVE 1 1 1
1 1 +24V1 2 To Paper feeder
2 2 +24V1 DH_NEUTRAL 2 3 2
3 3 +24V1
4 4 PGND
5 5 PGND
6 6 PGND
YC3
+24V1 1 1
DV
PGND 2 2
YC4
+24V1 1 1
MC
PGND 2 2
2-4-48
2LL/2LJ/2LH-4
No.9
YC2 YC9
GND(AFE_SHP) 1 1 40 40 GND(AFE_SHP) MPWB
CLPIN 2 2 39 39 CLPIN
GND(AFE_SHD) 3 3 38 38 GND(AFE_SHD) YC4 YC25
MCLK 4 4 37 37 AFE_MCLK GND 1 1 1 1 GND
GND 5 5 36 36 GND HTPDN 2 2 2 2 HTPDN
CCDSEL 6 6 35 35 CCDSEL LOCKN 3 3 3 3 LOCKN YC2
GND 7 7 34 34 GND GND 4 4 4 4 GND GND 1 1 1 1 GND
TXCLK1P 8 8 33 33 DIS_CISCKN TX0N 5 5 5 5 RX0N A+ 2 2 2 2 TXP
TXCLK1N 9 9 32 32 DIS_CISCKP TX0P 6 6 6 6 RX0P
YC10 YC4 A- 3 3 3 3 TXN
GND 10 10 31 31 GND GND 7 7 7 7 GND GND 1 1 GND GND 4 4 4 4 GND
TXOUTC1P 11 11 30 30 DIS_CIS_5N GND 2 2 GND B- 5 5 5 5 RXN
TXOUTC1N 12 12 29 29 DIS_CIS_5P 3.3V 3 3 3.3V B+ 6 6 6 6 RXP
GND 13 13 28 28 GND 3.3V 4 4 3.3V GND 7 7 7 7 GND
TXOUTB1P 14 14 27 27 DIS_CIS_4N 3.3V 5 5 3.3V
TXOUTB1N 15 15 26 26 DIS_CIS_4P 3.3V 6 6 3.3V
GND 16 16 25 25 GND VCLKB 7 7 VCLKB
TXOUTC2P 17 17 24 24 DIS_CIS_3N VSYNCB 8 8 VSYNCB
TXOUTC2N 18 18 23 23 DIS_CIS_3P HSYNCB 9 9 HSYNCB 3.3V 1 1
GND 19 19 22 22 GND MREB 10 10 MREB 3.3V 2 2
TXOUTB2P 20 20 21 21 DIS_CIS_2N GND 11 11 GND 3.3V 3 3
TXOUTB2N 21 21 20 20 DIS_CIS_2P YC3 YC11 DRB0 12 12 DRB0 GND 4 4
GND 22 22 19 19 GND SC_CLK 1 1 8 8 SC_CLK DRB1 13 13 DRB1 GND 5 5
CCDPWB TXOUTA2P 23 23 18 18 DIS_CIS_1N SC_SO 2 2 7 7 SC_SO DRB2 14 14 DRB2 GND 6 6 YC32
TXOUTA2N 24 24 17 17 DIS_CIS_1P SC_SI 3 3 6 6 SC_SI DRB3 15 15 DRB3 5V 7 7 3 3 GND
GND 25 25 16 16 GND SC_BSY 4 4 5 5 SC_BSY DRB4 16 16 DRB4 5V 8 8 2 2 +5V_HDD
SCLK 26 26 15 15 AFECLK SC_HLDN 5 5 4 4 SC_HLDN DRB5 17 17 DRB5 5V 9 9 1 1 GND
SDI 27 27 14 14 AFE_SO SC_DIR 6 6 3 3 SC_DIR DRB6 18 18 DRB6 GND 10 10
SENB 28 28 13 13 AFE_EN SC_IRN 7 7 2 2 SC_IRN DRB7 19 19 DRB7 ACT 11 11
SDO 29 29 12 12 AFE_SI GND(SPARE) 8 8 1 1 GND GND 20 20 GND GND 12 12
SH 30 30 11 11 SH DGB0 21 21 DGB0 12V 13 13
TG 31 31 10 10 TG DGB1 22 22 DGB1 12V 14 14
GND 32 32 9 9 GND(Mono/Color) DGB2 23 23 DGB2 12V 15 15
RS 33 33 8 8 RS DGB3 24 24 DGB3
GND 34 34 7 7 GND DGB4 25 25 DGB4
CP 35 35 6 6 CP DGB5 26 26 DGB5 HDD2
GND 36 36 5 5 GND DGB6 27 27 DGB6
CCDCLK2 37 37 4 4 CCDCLK2 DGB7 28 28 DGB7
GND 38 38 3 3 GND GND 29 29 GND
CCDCLK1 39 39 2 2 CCDCLK1 DBB0 30 30 DBB0
GND 40 40 1 1 GND DBB1 31 31 DBB1
DBB2 32 32 DBB2
DBB3 33 33 DBB3
YC1 YC11 DBB4 34 34 DBB4
+5.1V 6 6 1 1 +5.1V DBB5 35 35 DBB5
GND 5 5 2 2 GND DBB6 36 36 DBB6 DPRPWB
+10V 4 4 3 3 +10V DBB7 37 37 DBB7
GND 3 3 4 4 GND HHALF 38 38 HHALF 3.3V 1 1
+3.3V 2 2 5 5 +3.3V SLEEP 39 39 SLEEP 3.3V 2 2
GND 1 1 6 6 GND TWS_DET 40 40 TWS_DET 3.3V 3 3
GND 41 41 GND GND 4 4
LA2 42 42 LA2 GND 5 5
LA3 43 43 LA3 GND 6 6 YC27
LA4 44 44 LA4 5V 7 7 3 3 GND
LA5 45 45 LA5 5V 8 8 2 2 +5V_HDD
LA6 46 46 LA6 5V 9 9 1 1 GND
LA7 47 47 LA7 GND 10 10
YC13 LA8 48 48 LA8 ACT 11 11
GND 3 3 1 1 +5.1V LA9 49 49 LA9 GND 12 12
OSS ORGSW
5V
2
1
2
1
2
3
2
3
ORG_SW
GND
LA10
LA11
50
51
50
51
LA10
LA11
12V
12V
13
14
13
14
LA12 52 52 LA12 12V 15 15
LA13 53 53 LA13
LA14 54 54 LA14
LA15 55 55 LA15
LA16 56 56 LA16 YC1
YC6 LA17 57 57 LA17 GND 1 1 1 1 GND
11 11 11 11 +24V1 GND 58 58 GND A+ 2 2 2 2 TXP
10 10 10 10 +24V1 LD0 59 59 LD0 A- 3 3 3 3 TXN
9 9 9 9 POW LD1 60 60 LD1 GND 4 4 4 4 GND
8 8 8 8 PWM LD2 61 61 LD2 B- 5 5 5 5 RXN
7 7 7 7 PGND LD3 62 62 LD3 B+ 6 6 6 6 RXP
LLPWB 6 6 6 6 SGND LD4 63 63 LD4 GND 7 7 7 7 GND
5
4
5
4
5
4
5
4
VSET
SCL
ISCPWB LD5
LD6
64
65
64
65
LD5
LD6
3 3 3 3 SDA LD7 66 66 LD7 HDD1
2 2 2 2 FAIL GND 67 67 GND
1 1 1 1 +5V INT 68 68 INT
RESETZ 69 69 RESETZ
GND 70 70 GND
YC14 CEZ 71 71 CEZ YC2
3.3V 3 3 1 1 +3.3V WEZ 72 72 WEZ GND 1 1
ODSW GND
COSW
2
1
2
1
2
3
2
3
GND
CO_SW
OEZ
SCLKIN
73
74
73
74
OEZ
SCLKIN
HTPDN
LOCKN
2
3
2
3
3.3V 75 75 3.3V GND 4 4 To DPDPWB
3.3V 76 76 3.3V RX0N 5 5
YC8 3.3V 77 77 3.3V RX0P 6 6
3.3V 3 3 4 4 +3.3V 3.3V 78 78 3.3V GND 7 7
HPS GND 2 2 5 5 GND GND 79 79 GND
HPSW 1 1 6 6 HP_SW GND 80 80 GND
YC5
A 4 1 SMOT AP
B 3 2 SMOT BP
SM A/ 2 3 SMOT AN
B/ 1 4 SMOT BN
YC7
+24V1
GND
1
2
1
2
1
2
PSPWB
YC12 GND 3 3 From PSPWB YC11 YC24
16 16 24V2 GND 4 4 4 12V1 8 8 1 1 +12V
15 15 24V2 +24V1_2 5 5 5 12V1 7 7 2 2 +12V
14 14 24V2 +24V1_2 6 6 12V1 6 6 3 3 +12V
13 13 Reserve 12V1 5 5 4 4 +12V
12 12 GND GND 4 4 5 5 GND
11 11 GND GND 3 3 6 6 GND
10 10 GND GND 2 2 7 7 GND
9 9 Reserve GND 1 1 8 8 GND
8 8 DP_OPEN
7 7 DP_SI
6 6 DP_SO
DPMPWB 5
4
5
4
DP_CLK
DP_SEL
(option) 3 3 DP_RDY
2 2 DP_TMG
1 1 GND(SPARE)
1
2
3
4 From DPRPWB
5
6
7
2-4-49
2LL/2LJ/2LH
No.10
CN1 YC4
SGND 1 1 1 1 SGND YC7 CN1 CN2
SGND 2 2 2 2 SGND KMDET 1 1 1 1 12 KMDET FG 1 1 1 1 FG
CK 3 3 3 3 CK NC 2 2 2 2 11 NC PHS TXD 2 2 3 3 TXD
SGND 4 4 4 4 SGND KMDREQ 3 3 3 3 10 KMDREQ SGND 3 3 13 13 SGND
SGND 5 5 5 5 SGND KMACK 4 4 4 4 9 KMACK PHS DTR 4 4 16 16 DTR
SC 6 6 6 6 SC KMRXD 5 5 5 5 8 KMRXD 5V OUT 5 5 18 18 5V
R0(LSB) 7 7 7 7 R0(LSB) SGND 6 6 6 6 7 SGND PHS RTS 6 6 7 7 RTS
R1 8 8 8 8 R1 KMTXD 7 7 7 7 6 KMTXD N.C. 7 7
R2 9 9 9 9 R2 SGND 8 8 8 8 5 SGND PHS DCD 8 8 15 15 DCD
SGND 10 10 10 10 SGND SGND 9 9 9 9 4 SGND N.C. 9 9
R3 11 11 11 11 R3 SGND 10 10 10 10 3 SGND PHS RXD 10 10 5 5 RXD
R4 12 12 12 12 R4 +5V 11 11 11 11 2 +5V SGND 11 11 19 19 SGND
R5(MSB) 13 13 13 13 R5(MSB) +5V 12 12 12 12 1 +5V PHS DSR 12 12 11 11 DSR KMAS
SGND 14 14 14 14 SGND PHS RI 13 13 14 14 RI
G0(LSB) 15 15 15 15 G0(LSB) PHS CTS 14 14 9 9 CTS
G1 16 16 16 16 G1 2 2 NC
G2 17 17 17 17 G2 4 4 NC
CN3
KMASPWB
SGND 18 18 18 18 SGND 1 1 6 6 NC
G3 19 19 19 19 G3 YC23 2 Relay 2 CONFM GND 1 8 8 NC
G4 20 20 20 20 G4 +12V 1 2 3 3 TXD 2 10 10 NC
G5(MSB) 21 21 21 21 G5(MSB) GND 2 1 DTR 3 12 12 NC
SGND 22 22 22 22 SGND RTS 4 17 17 NC
B0(LSB) 23 23 23 23 B0(LSB) DCD 5 20 20 NC
B1 24 24 24 24 B1 RXD 6
B2 25 25 25 25 B2 DSR 7
SGND 26 26 26 26 SGND CTS 8
B3 27 27 27 27 B3 YC11 RI 9 KMAS
YC5
B4
B5(MSB)
28
29
28
29
28
29
28
29
B4
B5(MSB)
VO2
VO1
1
2
1
2
2
1
Relay
1
2
+
- Speaker TD1+ 1
NC 10
(option for JAPAN only)
SGND 30 30 30 30 SGND TD1- 2
H_SYNC 31 31 31 31 H_SYNC TD2+ 3
SGND 32 32 32 32 SGND TD2- 4
V_SYNC 33 33 33 33 V_SYNC CT1 5
SGND 34 34 34 34 SGND CT2 6
ENB 35 35 35 35 ENB TD3+ 7
YC1 YC30
CM
3.3V
36
37
36
37
36
37
36
37
CM
3.3V +5V 1 6 6 1 6 1 +5V
TD3-
TD4+
8
9 Ethernet
3.3V 38 38 38 38 3.3V +5V 2 5 5 2 5 2 +5V TD4- 10
3.3V 39 39 39 39 3.3V +5V 3 4 4 3 4 3 +5V GRLED_A1 11
Relay
3.3V 40 40 40 40 3.3V GND 4 3 3 4 3 4 GND GRLED_K1 12
GND 5 2 2 5 2 5 GND YWLED_A2 13
GND 6 1 1 6 1 6 GND YWLED_K2 14
LCD YC3 YC12

YC16
GND 1
SGND 1 1 13 1 13 13 SGND D3 2
PANEL_STATUS 2 2 12 2 12 12 PANEL_STATUS D4 3
INT_POWERKEY_N 3 3 11 3 11 11 INT_POWERKEY_N D5 4
PANEL RESET 4 4 10 4 10 10 PANEL RESET D6 5
AUDIO 5 5 9 5 9 9 AUDIO D7 6
LIGHTOFF_POWERON 6 6 8 6 8 8 LIGHTOFF_POWERON /CE1 7
SHUT_DOWN 7 7 7 Relay 7 7 7 SHUT_DOWN A10 8
LED_PROCESSING_N 8 8 6 8 6 6 LED_PROCESSING_N /OE 9
YC14 LED_ATTENTION_N 9 9 5 9 5 5 LED_ATTENTION_N A9 10
1 1 LED_A LED_MEMORY_N 10 10 4 10 4 4 LED_MEMORY_N A8 11
2 2 NC SUPND_POWER 11 11 3 11 3 3 SUPND_POWER A7 12
3 3 LED_C ENERGY_SAVE 12 12 2 12 2 2 ENERGY_SAVE VCC 13
4 4 NC DEEP_POWERON 13 13 1 13 1 1 DEEP_POWERON A6 14
SECOND_TRAY_SW 14 14 YC20 A5 15
GND 15 15 VBUS 1 A4 16
YC5 DATA- 2 A3 17
TOP 1 1 BOT Y- DATA+ 3 A2 18
Touch panel LEFT 2 2 LEFT X+ GND 4 Type A+B A1 19
BOTTOM 3 3 TOP Y+ LockPin1 LP1 A0 20
RIGHT 4 4 RIGHT X- LockPin2 LP2 D0 21
LockPin3 LP3 D1 22
LockPin4 LP4 D2 23
WP 24
/CD2 25
/CD1 26
YC23 D11 27 CF card
D12 28
YC1 YC7 YC2 YC17
CONFM
+12V 1 2 D13 29
SCAN4 12 12 1 1 SCAN4 VBUS 1 1 1 1 VBUS GND 2 1 D14 30
KEY5 11 11 2 2 KEY5 DN 2 2 2 2 DATA - D15 31
KEY6 10 10 3 3 KEY6 DP 3 3 3 3 DATA + /CE2 32
KEY7 9 9 4 4 KEY7 ID 4 4 4 4 NC /VS1 33
SCAN0 8 8 5 5 SCAN0 GND 5 5 5 5 GND /IORD 34
SCAN1 7 7 6 6 SCAN1 LockPin(1) LP-1 LP_1 LockPin(1) YC31 /IOWD 35
SCAN2 6 6 7 7 SCAN2 LockPin(2) LP-2 LP_2 LockPin(2) CD/DAT3 1 /WE 36
SCAN3 5 5 8 8 SCAN3 LockPin(3) LP-3 LP_3 LockPin(3) CMD 2 RDY/BSY 37
LED2 4 4 9 9 LED2 LockPin(4) LP-4 VSS 3 VCC 38
LED3 3 3 10 10 LED3 VDD 4 CSEL 39
LED4 2 2 11 11 LED4 CLK 5 VS2 40
GND 1 1 12 12 GND VSS 6 RESET 41
YC21 DAT0 7 /WAIT 42
VBUS 1 1 1 VBUS DAT1 8 INPACK 43
USB host
DATA -
DATA +
2
3
2
3
2
3
DATA-
DATA+
DAT2
CD
9
10
SD card /REG
BVD2
44
45
YC1 YC6 4 4 NC COMMON 11 BVD1 46
KEY4 1 1 1 1 KEY4 GND 4 5 5 GND WP 12 D8 47
SCAN2 2 2 2 2 SCAN2 LP1 LockPin1 LockPin(1) 13 D9 48
INT_POWERKEY_N 3 3 3 3 INT_POWERKEY_N LP2 LockPin2 LockPin(2) 14 D10 49
SCAN1 4 4 4 4 SCAN1 LP3 LockPin3 LockPin(3) 15 GND 50
LED1 5 5 5 5 LED1 LockPin(4) 16 Lock Pin(1) 51
SUPND_POWER 6 6 6 6 SUPND_POWER Lock Pin(2) 52
KEY3 7 7 7 7 KEY3
KEY2 8 8 8 8 KEY2 OPWB3
KEY1 9 9 9 9 KEY1
LED0 10 10 10 10 LED0
KEY0 11 11 11 11 KEY0 YC8 YC1 MPWB
SCAN4 12 12 12 12 SCAN4 PROCESSING_LED 1 1 4 4 PROCESSING_LED
SCAN3 13 13 13 13 SCAN3 MEMORY LED 2 2 3 3 MEMORY LED
SCAN0 14 14 14 14 SCAN0 ATTENTION_LED 3 3 2 2 ATTENTION_LED
GND 15 15 15 15 GND GND 4 4 1 1 GND
16 16 GND
17 17 GND
18 18 GND
OPWB2 19 19 GND
20 20 GND
OPWB1
2-4-50
2LL/2LJ/2LH
No.11
YC2 FCPWB
VBUS1 20 20 VBUS
YC8 YC3 USB_DN1 19 19 USB_DN
VBUS1 15 15 1 1 VBUS1 USB_DP1 18 18 USB_DP
USB_DN1 14 14 2 2 USB_DN1 GND 17 17 GND
USB_DP1 13 13 3 3 USB_DP1 NC 16 16 NC
GND 12 12 4 4 GND NC 15 15 NC
AUDIO1 11 11 5 5 AUDIO1 GND 14 14 GND
WAKEUP1 10 10 6 6 WAKEUP1 NC 13 13 NC
RESET1 9 9 7 7 RESET1 NC 12 12 NC
GND 8 8 8 8 GND GND 11 11 GND
VBUS0 7 7 9 9 VBUS0 NC 10 10 NC
USB_DN0 6 6 10 10 USB_DN0 NC 9 9 NC
USB_DP0 5 5 11 11 USB_DP0 NC 8 8 NC
GND 4 4 12 12 GND AUDIO1 7 7 AUDIO
AUDIO0 3 3 13 13 AUDIO0 WAKEUP 6 6 WAKEUP
WAKEUP0 2 2 14 14 WAKEUP0 GND 5 5 GND
RESET0 1 1 15 15 RESET0 VDD5_CUT1 4 4 VDD5_CUT
RESETN1 3 3 RESETN
GND 2 2 GND
VDD5 1 1 VDD5
YC9 YC4
5V_CUT1 6 1 6 1 5V_CUT1
GND 5 2 5 2 GND
5V
GND
4
3
3
4
4
3
3
4
5V
GND YC1 FCPWB
5V_CUT0 2 5 2 5 5V_CUT0 VBUS0 20 20 VBUS
GND 1 6 1 6 GND USB_DN0 19 19 USB_DN
USB_DP0 18 18 USB_DP
GND 17 17 GND
NC 16 16 NC
NC 15 15 NC
GND 14 14 GND
NC 13 13 NC
NC 12 12 NC
GND 11 11 GND
NC 10 10 NC
NC 9 9 NC
IFPWB NC 8 8 NC
AUDIO0 7 7 AUDIO
WAKEUP0 6 6 WAKEUP
MPWB GND
VDD5_CUT0
5
4
5
4
GND
VDD5_CUT
RESETN0 3 3 RESETN
GND 2 2 GND
VDD5 1 1 VDD5
YC3 YC46
HSYNC_AN 1 1 1 1 HSYNC_AN
HSYNC_AP 2 2 2 2 HSYNC_AP
HSYNC_BN 3 3 3 3 HSYNC_BN
HSYNC_BP 4 4 4 4 HSYNC_BP
HSYNC_CN 5 5 5 5 HSYNC_CN
HSYNC_CP 6 6 6 6 HSYNC_CP
HSYNC_DN 7 7 7 7 HSYNC_DN
HSYNC_DP 8 8 8 8 HSYNC_DP
VSYNC_AN 9 9 9 9 VSYNC_AN
VSYNC_AP 10 10 10 10 VSYNC_AP
VSYNC_BN 11 11 11 11 VSYNC_BN
VSYNC_BP 12 12 12 12 VSYNC_BP
VSYNC_CN 13 13 13 13 VSYNC_CN
VSYNC_CP 14 14 14 14 VSYNC_CP
VSYNC_DN 15 15 15 15 VSYNC_DN
VSYNC_DP 16 16 16 16 VSYNC_DP
SGND 17 17 17 17 SGND
TCLKP 18 18 18 18 TCLKP
TCLKN 19 19 19 19 TCLKN
SGND 20 20 20 20 SGND
TCP 21 21 21 21 TCP
TCN 22 22 22 22 TCN
SGND 23 23 23 23 SGND
TBP 24 24 24 24 TBP
TBN 25 25 25 25 TBN
SGND 26 26 26 26 SGND
TAP 27 27 27 27 TAP
TAN 28 28 28 28 TAN
SGND 29 29 29 29 SGND
SLEEP 30 30 30 30 SLEEP
HLD_ENG 31 31 31 31 HLD_ENG
NC 32 32 32 32 NC
SGND 33 33 33 33 SGND
EG IRN 34 34 34 34 EG IRN
EG SO 35 35 35 35 EG SO
EG SBSY 36 36 36 36 EG SBSY
EG SDIR 37 37 37 37 EG SDIR
EG_SI 38 38 38 38 EG_SI
EG_SCLK 39 39 39 39 EG_SCLK
SGND 40 40 40 40 SGND
EPWB
2-4-51
1-1 INSTALLATION GUIDE
INSTALLATION GUIDE FOR

DOCUMENT PROCESSOR
DP-771/772
B F
K*
G(M4x14)(8)
C*
J(M3x8)
K**
E-1
D E-2
M N(M3x8) L
H I
A C
D. Angle control fitting............................................... 1 J. M3 8 screw BLACK*1 ......................................... 1

English
E-1.DP cable cover1 ................................................. 1 K. Label Operation procedure ................................1
Supplied parts E-2.DP cable cover2 ................................................. 1 *: for metric specification
A. DP ........................................................................ 1 F. Pin ........................................................................ 1 **: for inch specification
B. Original mat.......................................................... 1 G. M4 14TP screw ................................................. 8 L. Caution label Original face up!...........................1
C. Fixing fitting (width: 38.5 mm) ...2 (DP-770/770(B)) H. Left hinge cover*1 .................................................. 1 M. DP relay PWB*1 .................................................... 1
1 (DP-771/772) I. Right hinge cover*1 ............................................... 1 N. M3 8 screw*2 ...................................................... 2
C*. Fixing fitting (width: 45 mm)*1 .............................. 1 *1: DP-771/772 only , *2: DP-772 only
D. Fixation dangle .................................................... 1 K. tiquette relative la procdure dutilisation........ 1

Franais
E-1.Couvercle du cble du DP1................................ 1 * : pour des spcifications mtriques
Pices fournies E-2.Couvercle du cble du DP2................................ 1 ** : pour des spcifications anglo-saxonnes
A. DP ........................................................................ 1 F. Goupille ................................................................ 1 L. tiquette davertissement relative lorientation
B. Plaque doriginal .................................................. 1 G. Vis TP M4 14..................................................... 8 vers le haut de la face de loriginal ......................1
C. Fixation (largeur: 38,5 mm)........... 2 (DP-770/770(B)) H. Couvercle de charnire gauche*1 ......................... 1 M. Carte de circuit imprim relais du DP*1 .................1
1 (DP-771/772) I. Couvercle de charnire droite*1 ............................ 1 N. Vis M3 8*2 ......................................................... 2
C.*Fixation (largeur: 45 mm)*1 ................................... 1 J. Vis M3 8 NOIRE*1 .............................................. 1 *1: DP-771/772 uniquement , *2: DP-772 uniquement
C*.Herraje de fijacin (anchura: 45 mm)*1 ................. 1 J. Tornillo M3 8 NEGRO*1 ......................................1

Espaol
D. Herraje de control de ngulo................................ 1 K. Etiqueta Procedimiento operativo ..................... 1
Partes suministradas E-1.Cubierta del cable del DP1................................. 1 *: para especificaciones en el sistema mtrico
A. DP ........................................................................ 1 E-2.Cubierta del cable del DP2................................. 1 **: para especificaciones en el sistema de pulgadas
B. Alfombrilla para originales.................................... 1 F. Pasador................................................................ 1 L. Etiqueta de precaucin Original cara arriba ......1
C. Herraje de fijacin (anchura: 38,5 mm) G. Tornillo TP M4 14 .............................................. 8 M. PWB del rel del DP*1...........................................1
..................................................2 (DP-770/770(B)) H. Cubierta de la bisagra izquierda*1 ........................ 1 N. Tornillo M3 8*2 .................................................... 2
1(DP-771/772) I. Cubierta de la bisagra derecha*1 .......................... 1 *1: DP-771/772 solamente , *2: DP-772 solamente
C*.Befestigungshalterung (Breite: 45 mm)*1.............. 1 J. M3 8 Schraube SCHWARZ*1 ............................. 1

Deutsch
D. Winkeleinstellbefestigung..................................... 1 K. Schild Funktionsanweisung ..............................1
Gelieferte Teile E-1.DP-Kabelabdeckung1......................................... 1 *: fr metrische Angaben
A. DP ........................................................................ 1 E-2.DP-Kabelabdeckung2......................................... 1 **: fr Angaben in Zoll
B. Originalmatte........................................................ 1 F. Stift ....................................................................... 1 L. Warnschild Originalschriftseite nach oben ........ 1
C. Befestigungshalterung (Breite: 38,5 mm) G. M4 14TP Schraube ........................................... 8 M. DP-Relaisleiterplatte *1.......................................... 1
............................................................ 2(DP-770/770(B)) H. Linke Scharnierabdeckung*1................................. 1 N. M3 8 Schraube*2 ................................................2
1 (DP-771/772) I. Rechte Scharnierabdeckung*1 .............................. 1 *1: nur DP-771/772 , *2: nur DP-772
C*. Accessorio di fissaggio (larghezza: 45 mm)*1 ...... 1 J. Vite M3 8 NERA*1 .............................................. 1

Italiano
D. Accessorio di regolazione angolare ..................... 1 K. Etichetta Procedura di funzionamento ..............1
Parti di fornitura E-1.Coperchio del cavo DP1..................................... 1 *: per specifiche in unit del sistema metrico
A. DP ........................................................................ 1 E-2.Coperchio del cavo DP2..................................... 1 **: per specifiche in pollici
B. Tappetino originale ............................................... 1 F. Perno.................................................................... 1 L. Etichetta di avvertimento Originale rivolto verso lalto! ... 1
C. Accessorio di fissaggio (larghezza: 38,5 mm) G. Vite M4 14TP .................................................... 8 M. Scheda a circuiti stampati di comunicazione DP*1 ...1
.............................................................2(DP-770/770(B)) H. Coperchio cerniera sinistra*1 ................................ 1 N. Vite M3 8*2 ......................................................... 2
1 (DP-771/772) I. Coperchio cerniera destra*1 .................................. 1 *1: Solo DP-771/772 , *2: Solo DP-772
C*. ( 45mm) *1 ..................1 I. *1 ........................1

D. .........................1 J. M38 BLACK*1 .....................1
E-1.DP 1 ....................... 1 M. DP *1 ...........................1
A. DP................................... 1 E-2.DP 2 ....................... 1 N. M38 *2 ..........................2
B. ............................... 1 F. ...................................1 *1: DP-771/772
C. ( 38.5mm) .. 2(DP-770/770(B)) G. M414TP .........................8 *2: DP-772
1(DP-771/772) H. *1 ........................1 (K) (L)
C*. (45mm ) *1 ................................1 I. *1 ......................................... 1

D. ............................................ 1 J. M38BLACK*1 ................................ 1
E-1.DP 1................................... 1 M. DP *1 ....................................... 1
A. DP ................................................. 1 E-2.DP 2................................... 1 N. M38*2 .......................................... 2
B. ................................................ 1 F. ........................................................ 1 *1: DP-771/772
C. (38.5mm ) ........ 2(DP-770/770(B)) G. M414TP ...................................... 8 *2: DP-772
1(DP-771/772) H. *1 ..........................................1 KL .
C*. (45mm )*1 ...................1 I. *1 ......................1

D. ........................ 1 J. M38BLACK*1 ......................1
E-1.DP 1 .................. 1 M. DP *1 ........................ 1
A. DP ............................. 1 E-2.DP 2 .................. 1 N. M38*2 .......................... 2
B. ........................... 1 F. ................................ 1 *1:DP-771/772
C. (38.5mm ) .. 2(DP-770/770(B)) G. M414TP ........................ 8 *2:DP-772
1(DP-771/772) H. *1 ......................1 (K)(L)
1
N
O. Memory DIMM (1GB)

(except 120V specification) ....................... 1
The memory DIMM must be expanded separately before using the Dual scan function on the
DP-771.
Order a memory DIMM in the service parts.
For details, see the instructions on page 12.
O. Mmoire DIMM (1GB)

(sauf specifications 120V) .......................... 1
La mmoire DIMM doit tre expanse sparment avant utilisation de la "Fonction double balay-
age" du DP-771.
Commander une mmoire DIMM auprs du service des pices de rechange.
Pour plus de prcisions, se reporter aux instructions de la page 12.
O. Memoria DIMM (1GB)

(excepto especificaciones para 120V)....... 1
La memoria DIMM debe ampliarse de forma separada antes de utilizar la Funcin de escaneado
doble del DP-771.
Realice un pedido de una memoria DIMM de repuesto.
Consulte las instrucciones de la pgina 12 para obtener informacin ms detallada.
O. Speicher-DIMM (1GB)
(auser 120-V-Spezifikation) ....................... 1
Die DIMM-Speichermodule mssen separat aufgerstet werden, bevor man die Dual Scan Funk-
tion des DP-771 benutzt.
Bestellen Sie ein DIMM-Speichermodul zusammen mit den Serviceteilen.
Einzelheiten hierzu finden Sie in den Anleitungen auf Seite 12.
O. Memoria DIMM (1GB)

(eccetto per i modellicon specifica 120V) .. 1
La memoria DIMM deve essere espansa separatamente prima di usare la Funzione di scansione
dual sull'unit DP-771.
Ordinare una memoria DIMM dalle parti di servizio.
per maggiori informazioni in merito si prega di leggere le istruzioni riportate a pagina 12.
O. DIMM (1GB)
(120V ) ..................... 1
DP-771
DIMM
12
O. DIMM1GB
(120V ) ............................... 1
DP-771 DIMM
.
DIMM .
12 .
O. DIMM1GB
(120V ...................... 1
DP-771 DIMM
DIMM
12
2
G(M4x14)
C
G(M4x14)
Precautions Procedure Attach the fixing fitting. (DP-770/770(B))

Be sure to remove any tape and/or cushioning When installing the DP, be sure to turn the MFP 1.Align projections (1) of each fixing fitting (C)
materials from the parts supplied. power off and disconnect the power plug from with holes (2) on the MFP and insert the fix-
The illustrations of the DP in the Installation the wall outlet. ing fittings (C) into the MFP.
Guide are for DP-771/772. 2.Secure each fixing fitting (C) with two M4 x
14TP screws (G).
Prcautions Procdure Mettre en place la fixation. (DP-770/770(B))

Veillez retirer les morceaux de bande adh- Lors de linstallation du DP, veiller mettre 1.Aligner les saillies (1) de chacune des
sive et/ou les matriaux de rembourrage des linterrupteur du MFP hors tension et pices de fixation (C) avec les trous (2) sur
pices fournies. dbrancher la fiche dalimentation de la prise le MFP et insrer ces pices (C) dans le
Les schmas du DP dans le Guide d''installation murale. MFP.
concernent le DP-771/772. 2.Fixer chacune des pices de fixation (C)
avec deux vis M4 x 14TP (G).
Precauciones Procedimiento Monte el herraje de fijacin. (DP-770/770(B))

Asegrese de despegar todas las cintas y/o Cuando instale el DP, asegrese de apagar el 1.Alinee las salientes (1) de cada herraje de
material amortiguador de las partes suministra- interruptor principal del MFP y desenchfelo del fijacin (C) con los orificios (2) del MFP e
das. tomacorriente de la pared. inserte los herrajes de fijacin (C) en el MFP.
Las ilustraciones del DP en la Gua de insta- 2.Asegure cada uno de los herrajes de fijacin
lacin corresponden al DP-771/772. (C) con dos tornillos M4 x 14TP (G).
Vorsichtsmanahmen Verfahren Anbringen der Befestigungshalterung. (DP-770/

770(B))
Stellen Sie sicher, dass smtliche Klebebnder Schalten Sie vor Installation des DP unbedingt
1.Die Zapfen (1) jeder Befestigungshalterung
und/oder Polstermaterial von den gelieferten den MFP-Hauptschalter aus, und ziehen Sie
(C) mit den ffnungen (2) am MFP ausrich-
Teilen entfernt wurden. den Netzstecker aus der Steckdose.
ten und die Befestigungshalterungen (C) in
Die Abbildungen des DP in der den MFP einsetzen.
Installationsanleitung gelten fr Modell DP-771/ 2.Jede Befestigungshalterung (C) mit zwei M4
772. x 14TP Schrauben (G) befestigen.
Precauzioni Procedura Applicazione dellaccessorio di fissaggio. (DP-770/
770(B))
Rimuovere tutti i nastri adesivi e/o i materiali di Spegnere linterruttore principale e sfilare la
1.Allineare le sporgenze (1) di ogni accessorio
protezione dalle parti fornite. spina dellMFP dalla presa prima di installare il
di fissaggio (C) con i fori (2) sullMFP, ed
Le illustrazioni del DP nella Guida DP.
inserire gli accessori di fissaggio (C)
allinstallazione sono per il modello DP-771/772. nellMFP.
2.Bloccare ogni accessorio di fissaggio (C)
con le due viti M4 x 14TP (G).
DP-770/770(B)
DP MFP 1.C1 MFP
2C
DP DP-771/772 MFP
2. M414TP G
C
DP-770/770(B)
, DP MFP 1. (C) (1) MFP
. OFF (2) MFP (C)
DP . .
DP-771/772 . 2. M414TP(G) 2 2
(C) .
DP-770/770(B)
DP MFP 1. (C) (1) MFP
OFF (2) MFP (C)
DP
DP-771/772 2. M414TP(G) 2 2
(C)
3
G(M4x14)
C* G(M4x14)
G(M4x14) F
C G(M4x14)
C (C*)
A
2
C A
4
2
C (C*)
1 3
1 5
Attach the fixing fitting. (DP-771/772) Install the DP. 5.Install DP (A) onto the MFP securely with pin
1.Align the projections (1) on the right fixing fit- 3.Align hinge hole (3) of DP (A) with pin (4) of (F) and two M4 14TP screws (G).
ting (C) and on the wider left fixing fitting (C*) fixing fitting (C), place DP (A) on the MFP.
with the respective holes (2) in the MFP and 4.Slide the DP (A) toward the front side and
then insert the fixing fittings into the MFP. engage hinges into hooks (5) on fixing fit-
2.Secure each of the fixing fittings (C) (C*) tings (C).
with 2 M4 14TP screws (G).
Mettre en place la fixation. (DP-771/772) Installer le DP. 5.Installer le DP (A) sur le MFP en le fixant
1.Aligner les saillies (1) de la fixation droite (C) 3.Aligner le trou de la charnire (3) du DP (A) laide de la goupille (F) et des deux vis TP
et de la fixation gauche plus large (C*) avec sur la goupille (4) de la fixation (C) et placer M4 14 (G).
les trous correspondants (2) du MFP et le DP (A) sur le MFP.
insrer les fixations dans le MFP. 4.Faire glisser le DP (A) vers l'avant et
2.Fixer chaque des fixations (C) (C*) avec 2 engager les charnires dans les crochets (5)
vis TP M4 14 (G). sur les pices de fixation (C).
Monte el herraje de fijacin. (DP-771/772) Instale el DP. 5.Instale el DP (A) firmemente en el MFP con
1. Alinee los salientes (1) del herraje de fijacin dere- 3.Alinee el orificio de bisagra (3) del DP (A) el pasador (F) y dos tornillos TP M4 14 (G
cho (C) y del herraje de fijacin izquierdo ms con el pasador (4) del herraje de fijacin (C)
ancho (C*) con los orificios correspondientes (2)
y coloque el DP (A) en el MFP.
del MFP y, despus, inserte los herrajes de fijacin
en el MFP. 4.Deslice el DP (A) hacia el frente y enganche
2. Asegure cada uno de los herrajes de fijacin (C) las bisagras en los ganchos (5) de los her-
(C*) con 2 tornillos TP M4 14 (G). rajes de fijacin (C).
Anbringen der Befestigungshalterung. (DP-771/772) Installieren des DP. 5.DP (A) sicher mit einem Stift (F) und zwei M4
1. Die Zapfen (1) an der rechten Befestigungshalter- 3.Scharnierloch (3) des DP (A) mit Stift (4) der 14TP Schrauben (G) am MFP befestigen.
ung (C) und an der breiteren Befestigungshalter-
Befestigungshalterung (C) ausrichten, und
ung (C*) mit den entsprechenden ffnungen (2)
am MFP ausrichten und die Befestigungshalterun- DP (A) auf den MFP stellen.
gen in den MFP einsetzen. 4.Den DP (A) nach vorne hin verschieben und
2. Die Befestigungshalterungen (C) (C*) mit den 2 M4 die Scharniere in die Haken (5) an den Bef-
14TP Schrauben (G) befestigen. estigungshalterungen (C) einsetzen.
Applicazione dellaccessorio di fissaggio. (DP-771/ Montaggio del DP. 5.Montare il DP (A) sullMFP assicurandolo
772) 3.Allineare il foro della cerniera (3) del DP (A) con il perno (F) e due viti M4 14TP (G).
1. Allineare le sporgenze (1) sull'accessorio di fissag- con il perno (4) dellaccessorio di fissaggio
gio destro (C) e sull'accessorio di fissaggio sinistro (C), quindi posizionare il DP (A) sullMFP.
pi largo (C*) con i rispettivi fori (2) nell'MFP, e 4.Far scorrere il DP (A) verso il lato anteriore
quindi inserire gli accessori di fissaggio nell'MFP.
ed inserire le cerniere nei ganci (5) sugli
2. Fissare ciascuno degli accessori di fissaggio (C)
(C*) con 2 viti M4 14TP (G).
accessori di fissaggio (C).
(DP-771/772) DP 5.F M414TP G DP

1. (C) (C*) 3. DPA3C A MFP
(1) MFP 4 DPA MFP
(2) MFP 4. DPA
2. 2 M414 TP(G) C5
(C) (C*)
DP-771/772 DP 5. (F) 1 M414TP(G) 2 DP

1. (C), (C*) 3.DP (A) (3) (A) MFP .
(1) MFP (2) (C) (4) MFP DP
MFP . (A) .
2. M414TP(G) 2 (C) 4.DP (A)
(C*) . (C) (5) .
DP-771/772 DP 5. (F)1 M414TP(G)2 DP

1. (C) 3.DP (A) (3) (A) MFP
(C*) (1) MFP (C) (4) MFP DP
(2) MFP (A)
2. M414TP(G) 2 (C) 4.DP (A)
(C*) (C) (5)

4
6
8
A
12
9
11
G(M4x14)
D
10
7
Install the angle control fitting. To adjust DP open-close angle 30 degrees 9.Remove stop ring (11) of angle control fitting
To adjust DP open-close angle 60 degrees 7.Open the upper cover (6) of the DP (A). (D) that has been installed in step 6 to
6.Install angle control fitting (D) at the rear side 8.Remove the four screws (7) and (8) . remove shaft (12).
of the right hinge with two M4 14TP screws Remove the strap (9) from the rear cover
(G). (10). Remove the rear cover (10) of the DP
(A)
Installer la fixation dangle. Pour rgler langle douverture/de fermeture 9.Retirer lanneau de bute (11) de la fixation
Pour rgler langle douverture/de fermeture du DP de 30 degrs dangle (D) installe ltape 6 pour enlever
du DP de 60 degrs 7.Ouvrir le couvercle suprieur (6) du DP (A). la tige (12).
6.Placer la fixation dangle (D) larrire de la 8.Retirer les quatre vis (7) et (8).Retirer la
charnire droite laide des deux vis TP M4 courroie (9) du couvercle arrire (10).Retirer
14 (G). la couvercle arrire (10) du DP (A).
Instale el herraje de control de ngulo. Para ajustar el DP, abra o cierre el ngulo 30 9.Retire el anillo de retencin (11) del herraje
Para ajustar el DP, abra o cierre el ngulo 60 grados de control de ngulo (D) que se instal en el
grados 7.Abra la cubierta superior (6) del DP (A). paso 6 para retirar el eje (12).
6.Instale el herraje de control de ngulo (D) en 8.Quite los cuatro tornillos (7) y (8).Retire la
el lado trasero de la bisagra derecha con correa (9) de la cubierta posterior (10).Quite
dos tornillos TP M4 14 (G). la cubierta posterior (10) del DP (A).
Installieren der Winkeleinstellbefestigung. Einstellen des ffnungs-/Schlieungswin- 9.Anschlagring (11) von der Winkeleinstellbef-
Einstellen des ffnungs-/Schlieungswin- kels des DP um 30 Grad estigung (D) abnehmen, die in Schritt 6 mon-
kels des DP um 60 Grad 7. Die obere Abdeckung (6) des DP (A) ffnen. tiert wurde, um die Welle (12) zu entfernen.
6.Winkeleinstellbefestigung (D) an der Rck- 8.Entfernen Sie die vier Schrauben (7) und
seite des rechten Scharniers mit zwei M4 (8).Entfernen Sie den Riemen (9) der hin-
14TP Schrauben (G) befestigen. teren Abdeckung (10).Entfernen Sie die hin-
tere Abdeckung (10) des DP (A).
Montaggio dellaccessorio di regolazione Per regolare langolo di chiusura / apertura 9.Rimuovere lanello di bloccaggio (11)
angolare. del DP a 30 gradi dellaccessorio di regolazione angolare (D)
Per regolare langolo di chiusura / apertura 7.Aprire il pannello superiore (6) del DP (A). che era stato installato al Punto 6 per
del DP a 60 gradi 8.Togliere le quattro viti (7) e (8).Rimuovere la rimuovere lalbero (12).
6.Montare laccessorio di regolazione ango- cinghietta (9) dal coperchio posteriore
lare (D) sul lato posteriore della cerniera (10).Rimuovere il coperchio posteriore (10)
destra con due viti M4 14TP (G). del DP (A).
DP 30 9. 6 D
DP 60 7. DPA6 1112
6. M414TP 8. 4 (7)(8) (10)
GD (9) DP(A) (10)
DP 30 9. 6 (D)
DP 60 7.DP (A) DP (6) . (11) 1 (12)
6. M414TP(G) 2 8. (7), (8) 4 . (9) .
(D) . (10) .DP
(A) (10) .
DP 30 9. 6 (D)
DP 60 7.DP (A) DP (6) (11)1
6. M414TP(G)2 8. (7)(8) 4 (9) (12)
(D) (10) DP (A)
(10)
5
11 14
12
12
14
15
13
10. Insert shaft (12) into the rear side of the right Connect the DP signal line (DP-770/770(B) 14.Remove the DP cable connection cap (15)
hinge. only) from the DP cable connection cover (14).
11. Attach stop ring (11) to the notch of shaft (12) For the DP-771/772, proceed to step 13 on
and secure shaft (12).
page 8.
12. Reinstall the rear cover (10) using the four
screws (7) and (8) removed in step 8.Attach the 13.Remove the screw (13) and remove the DP
strap (9) in the rear cover (10).Close the upper cable connection cover (14).
cover (6) of the DP (A).
10. Insrer la tige (12) larrire de la charnire Raccorder le circuit de transmission (DP- 14.Dposer le chapeau de la connexion du
droite. 770/770(B) uniquement) cble du DP (15) du couvercle de la connex-
11. Fixer lanneau de bute (11) sur lencoche de la
tige (12) et mettre en place la tige (12). Pour le DP-771/772, passer l'tape 13 en ion du cble du DP (14).
12. Remonter la couvercle arrire (10) l'aide des page 8.
quatre vis (7) et (8) retires l'tape 8.Fixer la 13.Dposer la vis (13) et dposer le couvercle
courroie (9) dans le couvercle arrire
(10).Refermer le couvercle suprieur (6) du DP de la connexion du cble du DP (14).
(A).
10. Inserte el eje (12) en el lado trasero de la bis- Conecte la lnea de seales del DP (DP-770/ 14.Quite la tapa de conexin del cable del DP
agra derecha. 770(B) solamente) (15) de la cubierta de conexin del cable del
11. Fije el anillo de retencin (11) a la muesca del Para el DP-771/772, vaya al paso 13 de la DP (14)
eje (12) y asegure el eje (12).
pgina 8.
12. Vuelva a colocar la cubierta posterior (10) con
los cuatro tornillos (7) y (8) que quit en el paso 13.Quite el tornillo (13) y quite la cubierta de
8.Coloque la correa (9) de la cubierta posterior conexin del cable del DP (14).
(10).Cierre la cubierta superior (6) del DP (A).
10. Welle (12) in die Rckseite des rechten Scharniers Anschlieen der DP-Signalleitungen (nur 14.Die Kappe (15) des DP-Kabelanschlusses
einsetzen.
11. Anschlagring (11) an der Wellenkerbe (12) anbrin- DP-770/770(B)) von der Abdeckung (14) des DP-Kabelan-
gen und Welle befestigen (12). Beim DP-771/772 weitergehen zu Schritt 13 auf schlusses abnehmen.
12. Bringen Sie die hintere Abdeckung (10) wieder an. Seite 8.
Benutzen Sie die vier Schrauben (7) und (8) aus 13.Die Schraube (13) entfernen und die
Schritt 8.Befestigen Sie den Riemen (9) der hin- Abdeckung (14) des DP-Kabelanschlusses
teren Abdeckung (10).Schlieen Sie die obere
Abdeckung (6) des DP (A). abnehmen.
10. Inserire lalbero (12) nella parte posteriore della
Collegare la linea del segnale DP (solo DP- 14.Rimuovere il cappuccio (15) per la connes-
cerniera destra.
11. Applicare lanello di bloccaggio (11) nellincavo 770/770(B)) sione del cavo DP dal coperchio di connes-
dellalbero (12) e assicurare lalbero (12). Per il DP-771/772, procedere al passo 13 a sione del cavo DP (14).
12. Rimontare il coperchio posteriore (10) utilizzando pagina 8.
le quattro viti (7) e (8) rimosse al punto 8.Rimon- 13.Rimuovere la vite (13) e quindi rimuovere il
tare la cinghietta (9) sul coperchio posteriore coperchio di la connessione del cavo DP
(10).Chiudere il pannello superiore (6) del DP
(A). (14).
10.12 DP DP-770/770(B) 14. DP (14) DP

11.1112 DP-771/772 P8 13 (15)
12 13. 1 (13) DP
12. 8 4 (7)(8) (14)
(10) (9)
(10) DP(A) DP (6)
10. (12) . DP DP-770/770(B) 14.DP (14) DP

11. (11) (12) DP-771/772 P8 13 . (15) .
(12) . 13. (13) 1 DP
12. 8 (7),(8) 4 (14) .
(10) .
(9) (10) .DP
(A) DP (6) .
10. (12) DP DP-770/770(B) 14.DP (14) DP

11. (11) (12) DP-771/772 P8 13 (15)
(12) 13. (13)1 DP
12. 8 (7)(8) 4 (14)
(10)
(9) (10) DP
(A) DP (6)
6
E-2
16 14
E
14
E-1
18
16
13
17
14
15.Pass the DP signal line cable (16) through 16.Pass the DP signal line cable (16) along the 17.Attach the DP cable cover (E) to the DP
the hole in DP cable connection cover (14). groove in the DP cable cover 1 (E-1). Install cable connection cover (14) and install the
Connect the DP signal line connector (17) to the DP cable cover 2 (E-2). DP cable connection cover (14) using the
the connector (18) of the ISC PWB. screw (13) removed in step 13.
Proceed to step 27 on page 13
15.Passez le cble de la ligne du signal DP (16) 16.Passez le cble de la ligne du signal DP (16) 17.Fixer le couvercle du cble du DP (E) sur le
dans le trou du capot de connexion du cble dans la rainure du capot 1 du cble DP (E- couvercle de la connexion du cble du DP
DP (14).Raccordez le connecteur de ligne 1). Installez le capot 2 du cble DP (E-2). (14) et installer le couvercle de la connexion
de signal DP (17) sur le connecteur (18) de du cble du DP (14) l'aide de la vis (13)
l'ISC PWB. dpose l'tape 13.
Passer l'tape 27 de la page 13.
15.Pase el cable de lnea de seales del DP 16.Pase el cable de lnea de seales del DP 17. Fije la cubierta del cable del DP (E) a la
(16) por el orificio de la cubierta de conexin (16) a lo largo de la ranura de la cubierta de cubierta de conexin del cable del DP (14) e
de cables del DP (14).Conecte el conector cables 1 del DP (E-1).Instale la cubierta de instale la cubierta de conexin del cable del
de lnea de seales del DP (17) al conector cables 2 del DP (E-2). DP (14) usando el tornillo (13) quitado en el
(18) de ISC PWB. paso 13.
Vaya al paso 27 de la pgina 13.
15.Fhren Sie die Signalleitung (16) des DP 16.Fhren Sie die Signalleitung (16) des DP 17.Die DP-Kabelabdeckung (E) an der Abdeck-
durch die ffnung der Steckerabdeckung durch die Nut der Steckerabdeckung 1 (E-1) ung (14) des DP-Kabelanschlusses anbrin-
(14) des DP.Verbinden Sie den Stecker der des DP.Befestigen Sie die Steckerabdeck- gen und die Abdeckung (14) des DP-
Signalleitung (17) des DP mit dem Steck- ung 2 (E-2) des DP. Kabelanschlusses mittels der in Schritt 13
verbinder (18) der ISC-Platine. entfernten Schraube (13) befestigen.
Weitergehen zu Schritt 27 auf Seite 13.
15.Far passare il cavo di linea del segnale DP 16.Far passare il cavo di linea del segnale DP 17..Fissare il coperchio del cavo DP (E) al
(16) nel foro presente sul coperchio del con- (16) lungo la scanalatura sul coperchio del coperchio di connessione del cavo DP (14),
nettore cavo DP (14). Collegare il connettore cavo DP 1 (E-1).Installare il coperchio del e quindi installare il coperchio di connes-
di linea del segnale DP (17) al connettore cavo DP 2 (E-2). sione del cavo DP (14) utilizzando la vite
(18) della scheda ISC PWB. (13) rimossa nel passo 13.
Procedere al passo 27 a pagina 13.
15. DP (16) DP 16. DP (16) DP 1E-1 17. DP (E) DP

14 DP 17 DP 2E-2) (14) 13 1
ISC 18 (13) DP (14)
P13 27
15.DP (16) DP 16.DP 1(E-1) DP 17.DP (E) DP

(14) .DP (16) . DP (14) 13
(17) ISC PWB 2(E-2) . (13) 1 DP (14)
(18) . .
P13 27 .
15.DP (14) DP 16.DP 1(E-1) DP 17.DP (E) DP

(16)
DP (17) (16) DP 2(E-2) (14) 13
ISC (18) (13)1 DP (14)

P13 27
7
22
20
22
23
19
21
Connect the DP signal line (DP-771/772 only) 14.Remove the screw (21) and remove the DP 15.Remove the DP cable connection cap (23)
13.Remove the 4 screws (19).Remove the DP cable connection cover (22). from the DP cable connection cover (22).
relay PWB cover (20).
Raccorder le circuit de transmission (DP- 14.Dposer la vis (21) et dposer le couvercle 15.Dposer le chapeau de la connexion du
771/772 uniquement) de la connexion du cble du DP (22). cble du DP (23) du couvercle de la connex-
13.Retirez les 4 vis (19).Retirer le couvercle du ion du cble du DP (22).
circuit imprim du relais du DP (20).
Conecte la lnea de seales del DP (DP-771/ 14.Quite el tornillo (21) y quite la cubierta de 15.Quite la tapa de conexin del cable del DP
772 solamente) conexin del cable del DP (22). (23) de la cubierta de conexin del cable del
13.Quite los 4 tornillos (19).Retire la cubierta de DP (22).
PWB del rel del DP (20).
Anschlieen der DP-Signalleitungen (nur 14.Die Schraube (21) entfernen und die 15.Die Kappe (23) des DP-Kabelanschlusses
DP-771/772) Abdeckung (22) des DP-Kabelanschlusses von der Abdeckung (22) des DP-Kabelan-
13.Entfernen Sie die 4 Schrauben (19).Ent- abnehmen. schlusses abnehmen.
fernen Sie die Abdeckung (20) der DP-
Verbindungsplatine zum Vorlageneinzug.
Collegare la linea del segnale DP (solo DP- 14.Rimuovere la vite (21) e quindi rimuovere il 15.Rimuovere il cappuccio (23) per la connes-
771/772) coperchio di la connessione del cavo DP sione del cavo DP dal coperchio di connes-
13.Togliere le 4 viti (19).Rimuovere la scheda a (22). sione del cavo DP (22).
circuiti stampati di comunicazione DP (20).
DP DP-771/772 14. 1 (21) DP 15. DP (22) DP

13. 4 (19) DP (22) (23)
(20)
DP DP-771/772 14. (21) 1 DP 15.DP (22) DP

13. (19) 4 . (22) . (23) .
DP (20) .
DP DP-771/772 14. (21)1 DP 15.DP (22) DP

13. (19)4 DP (22) (23)
(20)
8
22 27
M
26
30
23
24 28
25
29
16.Pass the DP signal line cable (23) and the DP-771 only Installing the DP relay PWB
CIS data line cable (24) through the hole in 17.Remove the two screws (27).Remove the 18.Connect connector (29) on the DP relay
DP cable connection cover (22).Connect the bracket (28). PWB (M) to connector (30) on the MFP.
DP signal line connector (25) to the connec-
tor (26) of the ISC PWB.
16.Passez le cble de ligne de signal DP (23) et DP-771 uniquement Installation de la carte de circuit imprim
le cble de ligne de donnes CIS (24) dans 17.Retirez les deux vis (27).Retirez le support relais du DP
le trou du capot de connexion du cble DP (28). 18.Raccorder le connecteur (29) sur la carte de
(22). Raccordez le connecteur de ligne de circuit imprim relais du DP (M) au
signal DP (25) sur le connecteur (26) de connecteur (30) sur le MFP.
l'ISC PWB.
16.Pase el cable de lnea de seales del DP DP-771 solamente Instalacin del PWB del rel del DP
(23) y el cable de lnea de datos de CIS (24) 17.Quite los dos tornillos (27).Quite la abraza- 18.Conecte el conector (29) del PWB del rel
por el orificio de la cubierta de conexin de dera (28). del DP (M) al conector (30) del MFP.
cables del DP (22). Conecte el conector de
lnea de seales del DP (25) al conector (26)
de ISC PWB.
16.Fhren Sie die Signalleitung (23) des DP nur DP-771 Installieren der DP-Relaisleiterplatte
und die Datenleitung der CIS (24) durch die 17.Entfernen Sie die beiden Schrauben 18.Den Stecker (29) an der DP-
ffnung der Steckerabdeckung (22) des DP. (27).Entfernen Sie die Klammer (28). Relaisleiterplatte (M) mit dem Stecker (30)
Verbinden Sie den Stecker der Signalleitung am MFP verbinden
(25) des DP mit dem Steckverbinder (26) der
ISC-Platine.
16.Far passare il cavo di linea del segnale DP Solo DP-771 Installazione della scheda a circuiti stampati
(23) e il cavo di linea dei dati CIS (24) nel 17.Togliere le due viti (27).Rimuovere la staffa di comunicazione DP
foro presente sul coperchio del connettore (28). 18.Collegare il connettore (29) sulla scheda a
del cavo DP (22). Collegare il connettore di circuiti stampati di comunicazione DP (M) al
linea del segnale DP (25) al connettore (26) connettore (30) sullMFP.
della scheda ISC PWB.
16. DP 23 CIS 24 DP-771 DP

DP 22 DP 17. 2 2728 18. DP M29
25 ISC 26 MFP 30

16.DP (23) CIS DP-771 DP

(24) DP (22) 17. (27) 2 . (28) 18.DP (M) (29) MFP
.DP . (30) .
(25) ISC PWB (26)
.
16.DP (22) DP DP-771 DP

(23) CIS
24

DP 17. (27)2 (28) 18.DP (M) (29)
MFP
(25) ISC (30)
(26)
9
27 N(M3x8)
24
31
M
28
M
M
DP-771 only DP-772 only 20.Plug the CIS data line (24) into the connetor
19.Secure the DP relay PWB (M). Secure it with 19.Secure the DP relay PWB (M). Secure it with (31) on the DP relay PWB (M).
the bracket (28) and the two screws (27) the two M3 8 screws (N) supplied with the
removed in step 17. DP-772.
DP-771 uniquement DP-772 uniquement 20.Enficher le cble de la ligne des donnes du

19.Fixez la DP relay PWB (M). Fixez-la avec le 19.Fixez la DP relay PWB (M). Fixez-la avec les CIS (24) dans le connecteur (31) de la carte
support (28) et les deux vis (27) retirs deux vis M3 8 (N) fournies avec le DP- de circuit imprim relais du DP (M).
l'tape 17. 772.
DP-771 solamente DP-772 solamente 20.Enchufe la lnea de datos CIS (24) al conec-
19.Fije el DP relay PWB (M). Fjelo con la 19.Fije el DP relay PWB (M). Fjelo con los dos tor (31) PWB del rel del DP (M).
abrazadera (28) y los dos tornillos (27) que tornillos M3 8 (N) suministrados con DP-
quit en el paso 17. 772.
nur DP-771 nur DP-772 20.Die CIS-Datenleitung (24) an den

19.Befestigen Sie die DP Verbindungsplatine 19.Befestigen Sie die DP Verbindungsplatine Stecker(31) auf der DP-Relaisleiterplatte (M)
(M). Befestigen Sie die Klammer (28) und (M). Befestigen Sie es mit den beiden M3 anschlieen.
die beiden Schrauben (27), die in Schritt 17 8 Schrauben (N), die sich im Lieferumfang
entfernt wurden. des DP-772 befinden.
Solo DP-771 Solo DP-772 20.Inserire la linea dati CIS (24) nel connet-
19.Fissare la scheda DP Relay PWB (M). Fis- 19.Fissare la scheda DP Relay PWB (M). Fis- tore(31) sulla scheda a circuiti stampati di
sarla con la staffa (28) e le due viti (27) sarla con le due viti M3 8 (N) fornite con comunicazione DP (M).
rimosse al punto 17. l'alimentatore DP-772.
DP-771 DP-772 20. CIS (24) DP

19. DP M 17 19. DP M DP-772 2 (M) (31)
28 2 27 M3X8(N)
DP-771 DP-772 20.DP (M) (31) CIS

19.DP PWB (M) . 17 19.DP PWB (M) . DP-772 (24) .
(28) (27) 2 2 .
.
DP-771 DP-772 20.DP (M) (31) CIS

19.DP (M) 17 19.DP (M) DP-772 (24)
(28) (27)2 M38(N)2
10
E-2
22
E-1
23
24
21
22
21.Pass the DP signal line cable (23) along the groove in the DP cable cover 1 (E-1).Pass the CIS 22.Attach the DP cable cover (E) to the DP
data line cable (24) along the other groove.Install the DP cable cover 2 (E-2). cable connection cover (22) and install the
DP cable connection cover (22) using the
NOTICE screw (21) removed in step 14.
To avoid image problems that may be caused when the both of the DP signal line cable (23) and 23.Install the DP relay PWB cover (20) usingthe
CIS data line cable (24) were passed through in a same groove, be sure to slip the individual line four screws(19) removed in step 13.
in a separate groove as shown in the figure.
21.Passez le cble de la ligne du signal DP (23) dans la rainure du capot 1 du cble DP (E-1).Pas- 22.Fixer le couvercle du cble du DP (E) sur le
sez le cble de ligne de donnes CIS (24) dans l'autre rainure.Installez le capot 2 du cble DP (E- couvercle de la connexion du cble du DP
2). (22) et installer le couvercle de la connexion
REMARQUE du cble du DP (22) l'aide de la vis (21)
dpose l'tape 14.
Pour viter les problmes d'image pouvant tre causs lorsque le cble de ligne de signal DP
23.Installez le couvercle du circuit imprim du
(23) et le cble de ligne de donnes CIS (24) ont t pass dans une mme rainure, assurez- relais du DP (20) l'aide des quatre vis (19)
vous de glisser chaque ligne dans une rainure part comme indiqu sur la figure. retires l'tape 13.
21.Pase el cable de lnea de seales del DP (23) a lo largo de la ranura de la cubierta de cables 1 22. Fije la cubierta del cable del DP (E) a la
del DP (E-1).Pase el cable de lnea de datos de CIS (24) a lo largo de la otra ranura.Instale la cubierta de conexin del cable del DP (22) e
cubierta de cables 2 del DP (E-2). instale la cubierta de conexin del cable del
AVISO DP (22) usando el tornillo (21) quitado en el
Para evitar posibles problemas de imagen como consecuencia de pasar tanto el cable de lnea paso 14.
de seales del DP (23) como el cable de lnea de datos de CIS (24) a lo largo de la misma 23.Instale la cubierta de PWB del rel del DP
ranura, asegrese de pasar cada una de las lneas por una ranura distinta como se muestra en la (20) con los cuatro tornillos (19) que quit en
imagen. el paso 13.
21.Fhren Sie die Signalleitung (23) des DP durch die Nut der Steckerabdeckung 1 (E-1) des DP. 22.Die DP-Kabelabdeckung (E) an der Abdeck-
Verlegen Sie die Datenleitung der CIS (24) durch die andere Nut.Befestigen Sie die Steckerab- ung (22) des DP-Kabelanschlusses anbrin-
deckung 2 (E-2) des DP. gen und die Abdeckung (22) des DP-
ANMERKUNG Kabelanschlusses mittels der in Schritt 14
Um Probleme mit der Bildqualitt zu vermeiden, die entstehen knnen, wenn die Signalleitung entfernten Schraube (21) befestigen.
(23) des DP und die Datenleitung der CIS (24) durch die gleiche Nut gefhrt werden, stellen Sie 23.Bringen Sie die Abdeckung (20) der DP-
sicher, dass jede Leitung in einer getrennten Nut gefhrt wird, wie in dem Bild gezeigt. Verbindungsplatine wieder an. Benutzen Sie
die Schraube (19) aus Schritt 13.
21. Far passare il cavo di linea del segnale DP (23) lungo la scanalatura sul coperchio del cavo DP 1 (E- 22. .Fissare il coperchio del cavo DP (E) al coper-
1).Far passare il cavo di linea dei dati CIS (24) lungo l'altra scanalatura.Installare il coperchio del cavo chio di connessione del cavo DP (22), e quindi
DP 2 (E-2). installare il coperchio di connessione del cavo
AVVISO DP (22) utilizzando la vite (21) rimossa nel
Per evitare i problemi di immagine che si verificano quando il cavo di linea del segnale DP (23) e il passo 14.
cavo di linea dei dati CIS (24) vengono fatti passare nella stessa scanalatura, ricordarsi di far pas- 23. IInstallare il coperchio della scheda a circuiti
stampati di comunicazione DP (20) utilizzando
sare questi due cavi in scanalature separate come indicato in figura.
le quattro viti (19) rimosse al punto 13.
21. DP 23 DP 1E-1) CIS 24 DP 22. DP (E) DP
2E-2) (22) 14 1
(21) DP (22)
23. 13 4 (19)
DP 23 CIS 24
DP (20)

21.DP 1(E-1) DP (23) .

CIS (24) .DP 2(E-2) . .

DP (23) CIS (24)
21.DP 1(E-1) DP (23) CIS 24DP 22.DP (E) DP

2(E-2) (22) 14
(21)1 DP (22)
DP 23
CIS 24

23. 13 (19)4 DP
(20)
11
33
YS2
32
N
Steps for expanding the memory DIMM 25.Insert the memory DIMM (N) into the memory slot (YS2) of the main PWB.
(1GB)(35, 45 and 55 ppm monochrome (Insert all the way until it clicks)
machines only) (DP-771 only) 26.Replace the upper rear cover (33) of the MFP using the 8 screws (32).
24.Remove the 8 screws (32) and remove the
upper rear cover (33) of the MFP.
Oprations pour l'expansion de la mmoire 25.Insrer la mmoire DIMM (N) dans la fente mmoire (YS2) de la carte de CI principale.
DIMM (1GB) (machines monochromes 35, 45 (Insrer fond jusqu'au clic)
et 55 ppm uniquement)(DP-771 uniquement) 26.Reposer le couvercle arrire suprieur (33) sur le MFP l'aide des 8 vis (32).
24.Dposer les 8 vis (32) et dposer le couver-
cle arrire suprieur (33) du MFP.
Pasos para ampliar la memoria DIMM (1GB) 25.Inserte la memoria DIMM (N) en la ranura para memoria (YS2) en el PWB principal.
(mquinas monocromticas de 35, 45 y 55 (Insrtela hasta escuchar un clic)
ppm solamente) (DP-771 solamente) 26.Vuelva a colocar la cubierta trasera superior (33) del MFP usando los 8 tornillos (32).
24.Quite los 8 tornillos (32) y quite la cubierta
trasera superior (33) del MFP.
Schritte zur Aufrstung der DIMM-Speicher- 25.Setzen Sie das DIMM-Speichermodul (N) in die Speicherbank (YS2) der Hauptleiterplatte ein.
module (1GB) (nur 35, 45 und 55 ppm Mono- (Drcken Sie sie bis zum Einrasten ein.)
chrommaschinen) (nur DP-771) 26.Die obere hintere Abdeckung (33) des MFP wieder mit den 8 Schrauben (32) anbringen.
24.Die 8 Schrauben (32) entfernen und die
obere hintere Abdeckung (33) des MFP
abnehmen.
Passi per l'espansione della memoria DIMM 25.Inserire la memoria DIMM (N) nello slot della memoria (YS2) sulla scheda principale PWB.
(1GB) (solo per le macchine monocro- (Inserire completamente finch non scatta in posizione con un clic)
matiche 35, 45 e 55 ppm) (solo DP-771) 26.Ricollocare il coperchio superiore posteriore (33) dell'MFP utilizzando le 8 viti (32).
24.Rimuovere le 8 viti (32) e quindi rimuovere il
coperchio superiore posteriore (33)
dell'MFP.
(1GB) 35 45 25.NYS2
55 DP-771
24. 8 (32) MFP 26. 8 (32) MFP (33)
(33)
22.DP (E) DP DIMM (1GB) 35 , 45 , 55 DP-771

(22) 14 24. (32) 8 MFP (33) .
(21) 1 DP (22)
.
23.13 (19) 4
DP (20) .
DIMM(1GB) 25. (YS2) DIMM(N)

35 45 55 DP-771
24. (32)8 MFP 26. (32)8 MFP (33)
(33)
12
A
34
Fasten the original mat.

27.Place original mat (B) with its Velcro (34) upward over the contact glass.
Align original mat (B) corner that has 90 degrees of angle with the inner left corner of the original instruction panel.
28.Close DP (A) and attach original mat (B) onto it with Velcro.
Fixer la plaque doriginal.

27.Placer la plaque doriginal (B) sur la vitre dexposition, en orientant les bandes Velcro (34) vers le haut.
Aligner le coin du plateau d'original (B) faisant un angle de 90 degrs avec le coin gauche interne du panneau d'instructions d'original.
28.Abaisser le DP (A) et y fixer la plaque doriginal (B) laide des bandes Velcro.
Fije la alfombrilla para originales.

27.Coloque la alfombrilla para originales (B) con el velcro (34) hacia arriba sobre el cristal de contacto.
Alinee la esquina que tiene un ngulo de 90 grados de la alfombrilla para originales (B) con la esquina interior izquierda del panel de
instrucciones para el original.
28.Cierre el DP (A) y fije la alfombrilla para originales (B) con el velcro.
Befestigen der Originalmatte.

27.Die Originalmatte (B) mit dem Klettband (34) nach oben ber das Kontaktglas legen.
Die Ecke der Originalmatte (B), die einen 90-Grad-Winkel aufweist, mit der linken, inneren Kante des Originalbedienfeldes ausrichten.
28.Den DP (A) schlieen und die Originalmatte (B) mit dem Klettband auf ihm befestigen.
Fissaggio del tappetino originale.

27.Posizionare il tappetino originale (B) con il velcro (34) rivolto verso lalto sul vetro di appoggio.
Allineare langolo di 90 gradi del coprioriginale (B) con langolo interno sinistro del pannello di controllo originale.
28.Chiudere il DP (A) e applicarvi il tappetino originale (B) con il velcro.
27.B34
B 90
28. DPAB DP
25. (YS2) DIMM(N) .

.
26. (32) 8 MFP (33) .
27. (34) (B)

(B) 90
28.DP (A) (B) DP (A)
13
I
H
J(M3x8)
Installing the hinge cover (DP-771/772 only) 30.Install the right hinge cover (I) using the M3
For the DP-770/770(B), proceed to step 31 on 8 screw BLACK (J).
page 15.
29.Install the left hinge cover (H).
Installation des couvercles de charnire 30.Installer le couvercle de la charnire droite

(DP-771/772 uniquement) (l) l'aide de la vis M3 8 NOIRE (J).
Pour le DP-770/770(B), passer l'tape 31 de
la page 15.
29.Installer le couvercle de la charnire gauche
(H).
Instalacin de la cubierta de las bisagras 30.Instale la cubierta de la bisagra derecha (I)

(DP-771/772 solamente) usando el tornillo M3 8 NEGRO (J).
Para el DP-770/770(B), vaya al paso 31 de la
pgina 15.
29.Instale la cubierta de la bisagra izquierda
(H).
Installieren der Scharnierabdeckung 30.Die rechte Scharnierabdeckung (I) mit der

(nur DP-771/772) M3 8 Schraube SCHWARZ (J) anbringen.
Beim DP-770/770(B) gehen Sie zum Schritt 31
auf Seite 15 weiter.
29.Die linke Scharnierabdeckung (H) anbrin-
gen.
Installazione del coperchio cerniera 30.Installare il coperchio cerniera destra (I) uti-
(solo DP-771/772) lizzando la vite M3 8 NERA (J).
Per DP-770/770(B), procedere con il punto 31 a
pagina 15.
29.Installare il coperchio cerniera sinistra (H).
DP-771/772 30. 1 M38 BLACK(J)

DP-770/770(B) P15 31 (I)
29. (H)
28.DP (A) (B) DP DP-771/772

27. (34) (A) . DP-770/770(B) P15 31 .
(B) . 29. (H) .
(B) 90
.
DP-771/772 30. M38BLACK(J)1

DP-770/770(B) P15 31 (I)
29.(H)
14
(a)
(b) K
L
Adhere the label 32.Adhere Label Operation procedure (K) of 33.Adhere Caution label Original face up! (L)
31.Clean the label on the original table with which the language corresponding to the of which the language corresponding to the
alcohol. destination of the MFP onto the existing destination of the MFP onto the label on the
label on the original table. Figure (a) original table. Figure (b)
Coller ltiquette relative 32.Coller l'tiquette Processus opratoire (K) 33.Coller l'tiquette de mise en garde Original
31.Avec de l'alcool, nettoyer ltiquette se trou- dans la langue correspondant au destina- en haut! (L) dans la langue correspondant
vant sur le plateau d'original. taire du MFP sur l'tiquette existante sur le au destinataire du MFP sur l'tiquette du
plateau d'original du DP. Figure (a) plateau d'original. Figure (b)
Pegue la etiqueta 32.Adhiera la etiqueta Procedimiento opera- 33.Pegue la etiqueta de precaucin La cara
31.Limpie con alcohol la etiqueta de la cubierta tivo (K) del idioma correspondiente al des- del original hacia arriba! (L), del idioma que
de originales. tino del MFP sobre la etiqueta que se corresponde al destino del MFP, sobre la eti-
encuentra sobre la cubierta de originales. queta en la cubierta de originales. Figura (b)
Figura (a)
Anbringen des Schildes 32.Das Schild Funktionsanweisung (K) in der 33.Das Warnschild Originalschriftseite nach
31.Das Schild auf dem Originalbedienfeld mit Sprache des jeweiligen Einsatzlandes des oben! (L) in der Sprache des jeweiligen
Alkohol reinigen. MFP auf das vorhandene Schild auf dem Einsatzlandes des MFP auf das vorhandene
Originalbedienfeld aufkleben. Abbildung (a) Schild auf dem Originalbedienfeld aufkle-
ben. Abbildung (b)
Applicazione delletichetta 32.Far aderire letichetta Procedure di funzion- 33.Far aderire letichetta di avvertenza Origi-
31.Pulire con alcool letichetta sul piano origi- amento (K) corrispondente alla lingua di nale rivolto verso lalto! (L) corrispondente
nale. destinazione dellMFP, sulletichetta esis- alla lingua di destinazione dellMFP,
tente sul piano originale. Figura (a) sulletichetta del piano originale. Figura (b)
220V 32. K 33.L

31. MFP MFP
a b
30. M38BLACK(J) 1 (220V )

(I) . 31. .
(100V ) 32.MFP 33.MFP

31. (K) (L)
(a) (b)
15
20mm 20mm
c
20mm
20mm
[Operation check]
1.To check the machine operation, prepare original (a) where 4 lines (b) are drawn 20 mm from the edges of the A3 sheet and 1 line (c) is drawn at its
center.
2.Connect the power plug of the MFP into the wall outlet and turn the main power switch on.
3.Set the original (a) on the DP and perform a test copy to check the operation and the copy example.
[Vrification du fonctionnement]
1.Pour vrifier le bon fonctionnement de lappareil, prparer un original (a) sur lequel sont traces 4 lignes (b) 20 mm des bords de la feuille A3 et 1
ligne (c) en son axe.
2.Brancher la fiche dalimentation du MFP sur la prise murale et mettre lappareil sous tension.
3.Placer loriginal (a) sur le DP et effectuer une copie de test pour vrifier le fonctionnement et lexemple de copie.
[Verifique el funcionamiento]
1.Para comprobar el funcionamiento del aparato, prepare un original (a) que contenga 4 lneas (b) dibujadas a 20 mm de los bordes de la hoja A3 y 1
lnea (c) dibujada en el centro.
2.Conecte el enchufe elctrico del MFP en el tomacorriente de la pared y encienda el interruptor principal.
3.Coloque el original (a) en el DP y haga una copia de prueba para verificar el funcionamiento y el ejemplo de copia.
[Funktionsprfung]
1.Zum Prfen der Gertefunktion das Original (a) vorbereiten, auf das 4 Linien (b) 20 mm von den Kanten des A3-Blattes und 1 Linie (c) in der Mitte
gezeichnet sind.
2.Den Netzstecker am MFP in die Steckdose stecken und den Strom einschalten.
3.Das Original (a) auf den DP legen und eine Testkopie erstellen, um die Funktion und das Kopierbeispiel zu prfen.
[Verifica del funzionamento]

1.Per verificare il funzionamento della macchina, preparare loriginale (a) tirando 4 linee (b) a 20 mm dai bordi del foglio A3 e una linea (c) al centro.
2.Inserire la spina dellalimentazione dellMFP nella presa a muro, quindi posizionare linterruttore principale su On.
3.Posizionare loriginale(a) sul DP ed eseguire una copia di prova per verificare il funzionamento e lesempio di copia.
[ ]
1. A3 a 20mm 4 b 1 c
2. MFP
3. DP a
32.MFP (K) . (a)
[ ]
1.A3 20mm (b)4 (c)1 (a)
2.MFP ON
3. (a) DP
16
20mm 20mm
c
20mm
20mm
4.Compare original (a) with the copy example. If the gap exceeds the reference value, perform the following adjustments according to the type of the
gap.
Check images of the DP after checking and adjusting images of the MFP. For details, see the service manual.
NOTICE: If there is any image fogging, adjust the U068 DP scanning position. If you change the scanning position with U068, adjust the U071 DP
leading edge timing.
4.Comparer loriginal (a) avec lexemple de copie. Si lcart excde la valeur de rfrence, effectuer les rglages suivants en fonction du type dcart.
Vrifier les images du DP aprs avoir contrl et rgl les images du MFP. Pour plus de dtails, se reporter au manuel dentretien.
REMARQUE:Si limage est floue, rgler la position de balayage de U068 du DP. Si la position de balayage de U068 est modifie, rgler la synchroni-
sation du bord dattaque de U071.
4.Compare el original (a) con el ejemplo de copia. Si la separacin supera el valor de referencia, realice los siguientes ajustes segn el tipo de separa-
cin.
Compruebe las imgenes del DP despus de comprobar y ajustar las imgenes del MFP. Para ms detalles, lea el manual de servicio.
AVISO: Si la imagen estuviera borrosa, ajuste la posicin de escaneo U068 del DP. Si cambia la posicin de escaneo con U068, ajuste la sincroni-
zacin de borde superior U071 del DP
4.Das Original (a) mit dem Kopierbeispiel vergleichen. Wenn der Abstand grer als der Bezugswert ist, die folgenden Einstellungen gem dem
Abstandstyp durchfhren.
Die Bilder des DP nach dem Prfen und Einstellen der Bilder des MFP prfen. Weitere Einzelheiten siehe Wartungsanleitung.
ANMERKUNG:Falls das Bild verschwommen wirkt, ist die U068 DP Scan-Position zu verstellen. Wenn Sie die Scan-Position mit U068 verstellen,
mssen Sie das U071 DP-Vorderkanten-Timing entsprechend verstellen.
4.Confrontare loriginale (a) con lesempio di copia. Se lo scostamento supera il valore di riferimento, eseguire le seguenti regolazioni in funzione del tipo di scostamento.
Controllare le immagini del DP dopo avere effettuato i controlli e le regolazioni delle immagini sullMFP. Per ulteriori dettagli leggere il man-
uale distruzioni.
AVVISO: Se presente una qualsiasi sfocatura dellimmagine, regolare la posizione di scansione DP U068. Se si cambia la posizione di scansione
con U068, regolare la sincronizzazione del bordo principale DP U071.
4.a
MFP DP
U068 DP U068 U071 DP
33.MFP (L) . (b)
4. (a)
MFP DP
U068 DP
U068 U071 DP
17
Be sure to adjust in the following order. If not, the adjustment cannot be performed correctly.
For checking the angle of leading edge, see page 20. <Reference value> Simplex copying: within 3.0 mm; Duplex copying: within 4.0 mm
For checking the angle of trailing edge, see page 23. <Reference value> Simplex copying: within 3.0 mm; Duplex copying: within 4.0 mm
When using the original for adjustment, automatic adjustment of magnification, leading edge timing and center line can be performed at a
time.
For the automatic adjustment using the original for adjustment, see page 26.
Veillez effectuer le rglage en procdant dans lordre suivant. Sinon, il sera impossible dobtenir un rglage correct.
Pour vrifier langle du bord avant, reportez-vous la page 20. <Valeur de rfrence>Copie recto seul: 3,0 mm max.; copie recto verso: 4,0 mm max.
Pour vrifier langle du bord arrire, reportez-vous la page 23. <Valeur de rfrence>Copie recto seul: 3,0 mm max.; copie recto verso: 4,0 mm max.
Lorsque vous utilisez loriginal pour effectuer le rglage, vous pouvez effectuer automatiquement le rglage de lagrandissement, de la syn-
chronisation du bord avant et de la ligne mdiane en une seule fois.
Pour le rglage automatique en utilisant loriginal pour effectuer le rglage, reportez-vous la page 26.
Asegrese de ajustar en el siguiente orden. De lo contrario, el ajuste no puede hacerse correctamente.

Para verificar el ngulo del borde superior, vea la pgina 20. <Valor de referencia>Copia simple: dentro de 3,0 mm; Copia duplex: dentro de 4,0 mm
Para verificar el ngulo del borde inferior, vea la pgina 23. <Valor de referencia>Copia simple: dentro de 3,0 mm; Copia duplex: dentro de 4,0 mm
Cuando utilice el original para el ajuste, puede hacerse un ajuste automtico del cambio de tamao, sincronizacin del borde superior y lnea
central al mismo tiempo.
Para el ajuste automtico utilizando el original para el ajuste, vea la pgina 26.
Die Einstellung in der folgenden Reihenfolge durchfhren. Anderenfalls kann die Einstellung nicht korrekt durchgefhrt werden.
Angaben zur Prfung des Winkels der Vorderkante auf Seite 20. <Bezugswert>Simplexkopie: innerhalb 3,0 mm; Duplexkopie: innerhalb 4,0 mm
Angaben zur Prfung des Winkels der Hinterkante auf Seite 23. <Bezugswert>Simplexkopie: innerhalb 3,0 mm; Duplexkopie: innerhalb 4,0 mm
Bei Verwendung des Originals fr die Einstellung knnen die automatischen Einstellungen fr Vergrerung, Vorderkanten-Timing und Mittel-
linie gleichzeitig durchgefhrt werden.
Angaben zur automatischen Einstellung mithilfe des Originals auf Seite 26.
Accertarsi di eseguire le regolazioni in questa sequenza: in caso contrario, la regolazione non pu essere effettuata correttamente.
Per controllare langolo del bordo principale, vedere pagina 20. <Valore di riferimento>Copia simplex: entro 3,0 mm; Copia duplex: entro 4,0 mm
Per controllare langolo del bordo di uscita, vedere pagina 23. <Valore di riferimento>Copia simplex: entro 3,0 mm; Copia duplex: entro 4,0 mm
Quando si utilizza loriginale per la regolazione, la regolazione automatica dellingrandimento, della sincronizzazione del bordo principale e
della linea centrale possono essere eseguiti contemporaneamente.
Per la regolazione automatica eseguita con loriginale, vedere pagina 26.
20 < > 3.0mm 4.0mm

23 < > 3.0mm 4.0mm
26
[ ]
1.A3 20mm (b) 4 (c) 1 (a) .
2.MFP ON .
3. (a) DP . .

20 3.0mm
4.0mm
23 3.0mm
4.0mm
26
18
For checking the magnification, see page29. <Reference value> Within 1.5%
For checking the leading edge timing, see page 31. <Reference value> Within 2.5 mm
For checking the center line, see page 33. <Reference value> Simplex copying: within 2.0 mm; Duplex copying: within 3.0 mm
Pour vrifier lagrandissement, reportez-vous la page 29. <Valeur de rfrence> 1,5% max.
Pour vrifier la synchronisation du bord avant, reportez-vous la page 31. <Valeur de rfrence> 2,5 mm max.
Pour vrifier la ligne mdiane, reportez-vous la page 33. <Valeur de rfrence> Copie recto seul: 2,0 mm max.;
copie recto verso: 3,0 mm max.
Para verificar el cambio de tamao, vea la pgina 29. <Valor de referencia> Dentro de 1,5 %
Para verificar la sincronizacin del borde inferior, vea la pgina 31. <Valor de referencia> Dentro de 2,5 mm
Para verificar la lnea central, vea la pgina 33. <Valor de referencia> Copia simple: dentro de 2,0 mm;
Copia duplex: dentro de 3,0 mm
Angaben zur Prfung der Vergrerung auf Seite 29. <Bezugswert> Innerhalb 1,5 %
Angaben zur Prfung des Vorderkanten-Timings auf Seite 31. <Bezugswert> Innerhalb 2,5 mm
Angaben zur Prfung der Mittellinie auf Seite 33. <Bezugswert> Simplexkopie: innerhalb 2,0 mm; Duplexkopie: innerhalb 3,0 mm
Per controllare lingrandimento, vedere pagina 29. <Valore di riferimento> Entro 1,5%
Per controllare la sincronizzazione del bordo principale, vedere pagina 31. <Valore di riferimento> Entro 2,5 mm
Per controllare la linea centrale, vedere pagina 33. <Valore di riferimento> Copia simplex: entro 2,0 mm;
Copia duplex: entro 3,0 mm
29 < > 1.5%

31 < > 2.5mm
33 < > 2.0mm 3.0mm
4. (a) .
MFP DP . .
, U068DP . U068 U071DP .
29 1.5%
31 2.5mm
33 2.0mm 3.0mm
19
[Checking the angle of leading edge]
1.Check the horizontal gap between line (1) of original (a) and line (2) of copy example positions. If the gap exceeds the reference value, adjust the gap
according to the following procedure.
<Reference value> For single copying: The horizontal gap of line (2) should be within 3.0 mm.
For duplex copying: The horizontal gap of line (2) should be within 4.0 mm.
[Vrification de langle du bord avant]

1.Vrifier lcart horizontal entre la position de la ligne (1) de loriginal (a) et celle de la ligne (2) de lexemple de copie. Si lcart excde la valeur de
rfrence, le rgler selon la procdure suivante.
<Valeur de rfrence> Pour la copie recto : lcart horizontal de la ligne (2) doit tre de 3.0 mm.
Pour la copie recto-verso : lcart horizontal de la ligne (2) doit tre de 4.0 mm.
[Verificacin del ngulo del borde superior]

1.Compruebe la separacin horizontal entre la lnea (1) del original (a) y la lnea (2) de las posiciones del ejemplo de copia. Si la separacin supera el
valor de referencia, ajstela siguiendo este procedimiento.
<Valor de referencia> Para el copiado por una cara: la separacin horizontal de la lnea (2) debe estar dentro de 3.0 mm.
Para el copiado dplex: la separacin horizontal de la lnea (2) debe estar dentro de 4.0 mm.
[berprfen des Winkels der Vorderkante]

1.Den horizontalen Abstand zwischen der Linie (1) des Originals (a) und der Linie (2) der Kopierbeispielspositionen prfen. Wenn der Abstand grer
als der Bezugswert ist, den Abstand mit dem folgenden Verfahren einstellen.
<Bezugswert> Einzelkopie: Der horizontale Abstand der Linie (2) sollte innerhalb von 3.0 mm liegen.
Duplexkopie: Der horizontale Abstand der Linie (2) sollte innerhalb von 4.0 mm liegen.
[Controllo dellangolo del bordo principale]

1.Verificare lo scostamento orizzontale fra la linea (1) delloriginale (a) e la linea (2) delle posizioni dellesempio di copia. Se lo scostamento supera il
valore di riferimento, regolare lo scostamento stesso seguendo questa procedura.
<Valore di riferimento>Per la copia singola: lo scostamento orizzontale della linea (2) deve limitarsi a 3.0 mm.
Per la copia duplex: lo scostamento orizzontale della linea (2) deve limitarsi a 4.0 mm.
[ ]
1.a12
< > 23.0mm
24.0mm
. .
20 3.0mm , 4.0mm
23 3.0mm , 4.0mm
, , .
26
[ ]
1. (a) (1) (2)
(2) 3.0mm
(2) 4.0mm
20
C (C*)
G
G
C (C*)
C
2. DP-770/770(B): Remove the angle control fitting (D). Loosen the 2 M4 14TP screws (G) on the left and right fixing fittings (C).
DP-771/772: Remove the left hinge cover (H) and the angle control fitting (D). Loosen the 2 M4 14TP screws (G) on the left and right fixing fittings (C*) (C)
3.Turn adjusting screw (3) at the rear side of the right hinge to adjust the DP position.
For copy example (d): Turn the adjusting screw counterclockwise and move the DP to the inner side.
For copy example (e): Turn the adjusting screw clockwise and move the DP to the front side.
Amount of change per scale: Approx. 1.0 mm
4.Perform a test copy.
2. DP-770/770(B): Dposer la fixation d'angle (assurant le contrle de l'ouverture) (D). Desserrer les 2 vis TP M4 14 (G) sur les fixations gauche et droite (C).
DP-771/772: Dposer le couvercle de la charnire gauche (H) et la fixation d'angle (assurant le contrle de l'ouverture) (D). Desserrer les 2 vis TP M4 14 (G) sur les fixa-
tions gauche et droite (C*) (C).
3. ourner la vis de rglage (3) larrire de la charnire droite pour rgler la position du DP.
Pour lexemple de copie (d) : tourner la vis de rglage dans le sens inverse des aiguilles dune montre et dplacer le DP vers lintrieur.
Pour lexemple de copie (e) : tourner la vis de rglage dans le sens des aiguilles dune montre et dplacer le DP vers lavant.
Changement par graduation dchelle : environ 1.0 mm
4. Effectuer une copie de test.
2. DP-770/770(B): quite el herraje de control de ngulo (D). Afloje los 2 tornillos TP M4 14 (G) de los herrajes de fijacin izquierdo y derecho (C).
DP-771/772: quite la cubierta de la bisagra izquierda (H) y el herraje de control de ngulo (D). Afloje los 2 tornillos TP M4 14 (G) de los herrajes de fijacin izquierdo y
derecho (C*) (C).
3. Gire el tornillo de ajuste (3) en el lado trasero de la bisagra derecha para ajustar la posicin del DP.
Para el ejemplo de copia (d): gire el tornillo de ajuste en sentido antihorario y mueva el DP al lado interno.
Para el ejemplo de copia (e): gire el tornillo de ajuste en sentido horario y mueva el DP al lado frontal.
Magnitud del cambio por escala: aprox. 1.0 mm
4. Haga una copia de prueba.
2. DP-770/770(B): Die Winkeleinstellbefestigung (D) entfernen. Die 2 M4 14TP Schrauben (G) an den linken und rechten Befestigungshalterung (C) lsen.
DP-771/772: Die linke Scharnierabdeckung (H) und die Winkeleinstellbefestigung (D) entfernen. Die 2 M4 14TP Schrauben (G) an den linken und rechten Befestigung-
shalterungen (C*) (C) lsen.
3. Die Einstellschraube (3) an der Rckseite des rechten Scharniers einstellen, um die DP-Position einzustellen.
Kopierbeispiel (d): Die Einstellschraube nach links drehen und den DP nach innen schieben.
Kopierbeispiel (e): Die Einstellschraube nach rechts drehen und den DP nach vorne schieben.
nderung pro Mastab: Ungefhr 1.0 mm
4. Eine Testkopie erstellen.
2. DP-770/770(B): Rimuovere l'accessorio di regolazione angolare (D). Allentare le 2 viti M4 14TP (G) sugli accessori di fissaggio (C) destro e sinistro.
DP-771/772: Rimuovere il coperchio cerniera sinistra (H) e l'accessorio di regolazione angolare (D). Allentare le 2 viti M4 14TP (G) sui lati destro e sinistro degli accessori
di fissaggio (C*) (C) destro e sinistro.
3. Ruotare la vite di regolazione (3) sul lato posteriore della cerniera destra per regolare la posizione del DP.
Per lesempio di copia (d): ruotare la vite di regolazione in senso antiorario e spostare il DP verso linterno.
Per lesempio di copia (e): ruotare la vite di regolazione in senso orario e spostare il DP in avanti.
Entit modifica per scala: circa 1.0 mm
4. Eseguire una copia di prova.
2.DP-770/770(B) (D) (C) 2 M4x14TP(G)

DP-771/772 (H) (D) (C*)(C) 2 M4x14TP(G)
3.3 DP
(d) DP (e) DP
1.0mm
4.
29 1.5%
31 2.5mm
33 2.0mm , 3.0mm
2.DP-770/770(B) (D) (C) M4x14TP(G)2

DP-771/772 (H) (D) (C*)(C) M4x14TP(G)2
3. (3) DP
(d) DP
(e) DP
1 1.0mm
4.
21
5.Repeat the steps above until the gap of line (2) of copy example shows the following reference values.
<Reference value> For single copying: The horizontal gap of line (2) should be within 3.0 mm.
For duplex copying: The horizontal gap of line (2) should be within 4.0 mm.
6.After adjustment is completed, retighten two M4 14TP screws (G) that have been loosened in step 2.
7.Remove the original mat (B) and refit it (see steps 27 and 28 on page 13).
5.Rpter les tapes ci-dessus jusqu ce que lcart de la ligne (2) de lexemple de copie indique les valeurs de rfrence suivantes.
<Valeur de rfrence> Pour la copie recto : lcart horizontal de la ligne (2) doit tre de 3.0 mm.
Pour la copie recto-verso : lcart horizontal de la ligne (2) doit tre de 4.0 mm.
6.Une fois le rglage effectu, resserrer les deux vis TP M4 14 (G) desserres ltape 2.
7.Retirez le tapis doriginal (B) et remettez-le en place. (Reportez-vous aux tapes 27 et 28 la page 13.)
5.Repita los pasos anteriores hasta que la separacin de la lnea (2) del ejemplo de copia presente los siguientes valores de referencia.
<Valor de referencia> Para el copiado por una cara: la separacin horizontal de la lnea (2) debe estar dentro de 3.0 mm.
Para el copiado dplex: la separacin horizontal de la lnea (2) debe estar dentro de 4.0 mm.
6.Una vez hecho el ajuste, vuelva a apretar los dos tornillos TP M4 14 (G) que ha aflojado en el paso 2.
7.Desmonte la plancha de original (B) y vuelva a colocar (vea los pasos 27 y 28 en la pgina 13).
5.Die obigen Schritte wiederholen, bis der Abstand der Linie (2) des Kopierbeispiels die folgenden Bezugswerte aufweist.
<Bezugswert> Einzelkopie: Der horizontale Abstand der Linie (2) sollte innerhalb von 3.0 mm liegen.
Duplexkopie: Der horizontale Abstand der Linie (2) sollte innerhalb von 4.0 mm liegen.
6.Nach der Einstellung die zwei M4 14TP Schrauben (G), die in Schritt 2 gelst wurden, wieder festziehen.
7.Die Originalmatte (B) abnehmen und wieder anbringen (siehe Schritte 27 und 28 auf Seite 13).
5.Ripetere le operazioni sopra descritte fino a quando lo scostamento della linea (2) dellesempio di copia riporter i valori di riferimento seguenti.
<Valore di riferimento>Per la copia singola: lo scostamento orizzontale della linea (2) deve limitarsi a 3.0 mm.
Per la copia duplex: lo scostamento orizzontale della linea (2) deve limitarsi a 4.0 mm.
6.Una volta conclusa la regolazione, serrare nuovamente le viti M4 14TP (G) che erano state allentate al Punto 2.
7.Rimuovere il coprioriginale (B) e reinserirlo (vedere i passi 27 e 28 a pagina 13).
5.2
< > 23.0mm
24.0mm
6. 2 M414TP G
7.B 13 27 28
[ ]
1. (a) (1) (2) . .
(2) 3.0mm
(2) 4.0mm
5. (2)
(2) 3.0mm
(2) 4.0mm
6. 2 M414TP(G)2
7. (B)
13 2728
22
2
1
3mm/4mm
3mm/4mm
a f 2 g
[Checking the angle of trailing edge]

1.Check the gap between line (1) of original (a) and line (2) of copy example. If the gap exceeds the reference value, perform the following adjustment.
<Reference value> For simplex copying: Within 3.0 mm
For duplex copying: Within 4.0 mm
[Vrification de langle du bord arrire]

1.Vrifiez lcart entre la ligne (1) de loriginal (a) et la ligne (2) de lexemple de copie. Si lcart est suprieur la valeur de rfrence, effectuez le
rglage suivant.
<Valeur de rfrence> Copie recto seul: 3,0 mm max.
Copie recto verso: 4,0 mm max.
[Verificacin del ngulo del borde inferior]

1.Verifique la separacin entre la lnea (1) del original (a) y la lnea (2) de la copia de muestra. Si la superacin supera el valor de referencia, haga el
siguiente ajuste.
<Valor de referencia> Para copia simple: Dentro de 3,0 mm
Para copia duplex: Dentro de 4,0 mm
[berprfen des Winkels der Hinterkante]

1.Die Abweichung der Linie (1) des Originals (a) und der Linie (2) des Kopienmusters prfen. berschreitet die Abweichung den Bezugswert, ist die fol-
gende Einstellung durchzufhren.
<Bezugswert> Fr Simplexkopie: Innerhalb 3,0 mm
Fr Duplexkopie: Innerhalb 4,0 mm
[Controllo dellangolo del bordo di uscita]

1.Controllare la differenza tra la linea (1) delloriginale (a) e la linea (2) della copia di esempio. Se la differenza supera il valore di riferimento, effettuare
la seguente regolazione.
<Valore di riferimento> Per copia simplex: Entro 3,0 mm
Per copia duplex: Entro 4,0 mm
[ ]
1.a12
< > 3.0mm
4.0mm
2.DP-770/770(B) (D) . (C) M4x14TP(G) 2 .

DP-771/772 (H) (D) . (C*)(C) M4x14TP(G) 2 .
3. (3) DP .
(d) DP . (e) DP .
1 1.0mm
4. .
[ ]
1. (a) (1) (2)
3.0mm
4.0mm
23
3
5
A
10
7
4
2.Open the upper cover (3) of the DP (A). 4.Adjust the height of DP. Amount of change per scale: Approx. 0.5
3.Remove the 3 TP screws (4) and the screw Loosen the nut (8). mm (10)
(5), and remove the strap (6) from the rear For copy example (f): Loosen the adjusting Retighten the nut (8).
cover (7). Then remove the DP (A) rear screw (9). 5.Refit the rear cover (7) removed in step 3.
cover (7). For copy example (g): Tighten the adjusting 6.Remove the original mat (B) and refit it (see
screw (9). steps 27 and 28 on page 13).
2.Ouvrir le couvercle suprieur (3) du DP (A) 4.Rglez la hauteur du DP. Quantit de changement par pas: environ
3.Dposer les 3 vis TP (4) et la vis (5) puis Desserrez lcrou (8). 0,5 mm (10)
dposer la courroie (6) du couvercle arrire Pour lexemple de copie (f): Desserrez la vis Resserrez lcrou (8).
(7). Dposer ensuite le couvercle arrire (7) de rglage (9). 5.Reposer le capot arrire (7) dpos l'tape 3.
du DP (A). Pour lexemple de copie (g): Serrez la vis de 6.Retirez le tapis doriginal (B) et remettez-le
rglage (9). en place. (Reportez-vous aux tapes 27 et
28 la page 13.)
2.Abra la cubierta superior (3) del DP (A). 4.Ajuste la altura del DP. Cantidad de cambio de escala: Aprox. 0,5 mm (10)
3.Quite los 3 tornillos TP (4) y el tornillo (5) y Afloje la tuerca (8). Vuelva a apretar la tuerca (8).
quite la correa (6) de la cubierta trasera (7). Para la copia de muestra (f): Afloje el tornillo 5.Vuelva a colocar la cubierta (7) desmontada
Despus, quite la cubierta trasera (7) del DP de ajuste (9). en el paso 3.
(A). Para la copia de muestra (g): Apriete el 6.Desmonte la plancha de original (B) y vuelva
tornillo de ajuste (9). a colocar (vea los pasos 27 y 28 en la
pgina 13).
2.Die obere Abdeckung (3) des DP (A) ffnen. 4.Die Hhe des DP einstellen. nderungsbetrag pro Skalenstrich: ca. 0,5
3.Die 3 TP-Schrauben (4) und die Schraube Lsen Sie die Mutter (8). mm (10)
(5) entfernen und den Riemen (6) von der Fr Kopienmuster (f): Lsen Sie die Ein- Ziehen Sie die Mutter (8) wieder fest.
hinteren Abdeckung (7) abnehmen. Dann stellschraube (9). 5.Die in Schritt 3 entfernte hintere Abdeckung
die hintere Abdeckung (7) des DP (A) Fr Kopienmuster (g): Die Einstellschraube (7) wieder anbringen.
abnehmen. (9) festziehen. 6.Die Originalmatte (B) abnehmen und wieder
anbringen (siehe Schritte 27und 28 auf Seite 13).
2.Aprire il pannello superiore (3) del DP (A). 4.egolazione dellaltezza del DP Variazione graduale: circa 0,5 mm (10)
3.Rimuovere le 3 viti TP (4) e la vite (5), e Allentare il dado (8). Stringere di nuovo il dado (8).
quindi rimuovere la cinghietta (6) dal coper- Per un esempio di copia (f): Allentare la vite 5.Reinserire il coperchio posteriore (7)
chio posteriore (7). Quindi rimuovere il di regolazione (9). rimosso nel passo 3.
coperchio posteriore (7) del DP (A). Per un esempio di copia (g): Stringere la vite 6.Rimuovere il coprioriginale (B) e reinserirlo
di regolazione (9). (vedere i passi 27 e 28 a pagina 13).
2. DPA3 4. DP 1 0.5mm10
3. 3 TP (4) 1 (5) 8 8
(6) (7) DP f9 5. 3 7
(A) (7) g9 6.B 13 27
28
5. (2) 6. 2 [ ]
. M414TP(G) 2 . 1. (a) (1) (2)
(2) 7. (B) 13 .
3.0mm 27, 28 . .
(2) 3.0m
4.0mm 4.0mm
2.DP (A) DP (3) 4.DP 1 0.5mm(10)

3.TP (4)3 (5)1 (8) (8)
(6) (7) DP (f) (9) 5. 3 (7)
(A) (7)
(g) (9) 6. (B) 13
2728
24
2
1
3mm/4mm
3mm/4mm
a f 2 g
7.Make a proof copy again.

8.Repeat steps 1 to 6 until line (2) of copy example shows the following the reference values.
<Reference value> For simplex copying: Within 3.0 mm
For duplex copying: Within 4.0 mm
7.Effectuez nouveau une copie de test.

8.Rptez les tapes 1 6 jusqu ce que la ligne (2) de lexemple de copie corresponde aux valeurs de rfrence suivantes.
<Valeur de rfrence> Copie recto seul: 3,0 mm max.
Copie recto verso: 4,0 mm max.
7.Haga otra copia de prueba.

8.Repita los pasos 1 a 6 hasta que la lnea (2) de la copia de muestra tenga los siguientes valores de referencia.
<Valor de referencia> Para copia simple: Dentro de 3,0 mm
Para copia duplex: Dentro de 4,0 mm
7.Eine erneute Probekopie anfertigen.

8.Die Schritte 1 bis 6 wiederholen, bis die Linie (2) des Kopienmusters die folgenden Bezugswerte aufweist.
<Bezugswert> Fr Simplexkopie: Innerhalb 3,0 mm
Fr Duplexkopie: Innerhalb 4,0 mm
7.Eseguire di nuovo una prova di copia.

8.Ripetere i passi da 1 a 6 fino a che la linea (2) dellesempio di copia non mostra i seguenti valori di riferimento.
<Valore di riferimento> Per copia simplex: Entro 3,0 mm
Per copia duplex: Entro 4,0 mm
7.
8. 1~62
< > 3.0mm
4.0mm
7.
8. (2) 1 6
3.0mm
4.0mm
25
[Automatic adjustment using the original for adjustment] 4.Set the original on the DP face down and press the Start key to carry
If there is no DP auto adjustment origina out rear-side adjustment.
1.Set the maintenance mode U411, select DP Auto Adj and press the 5.If OK appears on the display, the adjustment is completed.
Start key to print an original. If ERROR XX appears, the adjustment failed. Check the original set
2.Set the printed original on the contact glass and press the Start key. position and repeat steps 2 and 4 until OK appears.
3.Set the original on the DP face up and press the Start key to carry out For details, see the service manual.
surface adjustment.
[Rglage automatique en utilisant loriginal pour effectuer le rglage] 4. Placer l'original sur le DP ct imprim en bas et appuyer sur la touche Start pour
Si la machine n'est pas pourvue de la fonction rglage automatique d'original du DP procder au rglage du ct arrire.
1. Rgler le mode maintenance U411, slectionner DP Auto Adj et appuyer sur la 5. Si le message OK apparat sur l'affichage, le rglage est termin.Si le message
touche Start pour imprimer un original. ERROR XX (erreur XX) s'affiche, le rglage a chou. Vrififer la position de
2. Placer l'original qui vient d'tre imprim sur la vitre d'exposition et appuyer sur la l'original et recommencer les oprations 2 et 4 jusqu' ce que le message OK
touche Start. apparaisse.
3. Placer l'original sur le DP ct imprim en haut et appuyer sur la touche Start Pour plus de details, se reporter au manuel dentretien.
pour procder au rglage de la surface.
[Ajuste automtico utilizando el original para el ajuste] 4. Coloque el original en el DP cara abajo y pulse la tecla de Start para realizar un
Si no existe el original de ajuste automtico del DP ajuste de reverso.
1. Entre al modo de mantenimiento U441, seleccione DP Auto Adj y pulse la tecla 5. Wenn am Display OK angezeigt wird, ist die Einstellung abgeschlossen. Wenn
de Start para imprimir un original. ERROR XX (FEHLER XX) angezeigt wird, ist die Einstellung fehlgeschlagen.
2. Coloque el original impreso sobre el cristal de contacto y pulse la tecla de Start. berprfen Sie die Originalpositionierung und wiederholen Sie Schritte 2 und 4,
3. Coloque el original en el DP cara arriba y pulse la tecla de Start para realizar un bis OK angezeigt wird.
ajuste de anverso. Weitere Einzelheiten siehe Wartungsanleitung.
[Automatische Einstellung mithilfe des Originals] 4. Das Original mit der Druckseite nach unten einlegen und die Start-Taste betti-
Falls keine automatische Einstellung des Originals des DP vorhanden ist gen, um die Rckseiteneinstellung ausfhren zu lassen.
1. Den Wartungsmodus U411 einschalten. DP Auto Adj whlen und die Start-Taste 5. Wenn am Display OK angezeigt wird, ist die Einstellung abgeschlossen. Wenn
bettigen, um ein Original auszudrucken. ERROR XX (FEHLER XX) angezeigt wird, ist die Einstellung fehlgeschlagen.
2. Das ausgedruckte Original auf das Kontaktglas legen und die Start-Taste betti- berprfen Sie die Originalpositionierung und wiederholen Sie Schritte 2 und 4,
gen. bis OK angezeigt wird.
3. Das Original mit der Druckseite nach oben einlegen und die Start-Taste betti- Weitere Einzelheiten siehe Wartungsanleitung.
gen, um die Oberflcheneinstellung ausfhren zu lassen
[Regolazione automatica eseguita con loriginale] 4. Posizionare l'originale sul DP rivolto verso il basso e premere il tasto di Start per
Se non presente l'autoregolazione originale DP eseguire la regolazione del lato posteriore.
1. Impostare la modalit manutenzione U411, selezionare DP Auto Adj e premere il 5. Se OK appare sul display, la regolazione completata.Se compare ERROR XX
tasto di Start per stampare un originale. (ERRORE XX), la regolazione non riuscita. Verificare la posizione di impostazi-
2. Posizionare l'originale stampato sul vetro di appoggio e premere il tasto di Start. one dell'originale e ripetere le operazioni 2 e 4
3. Posizionare l'originale sul DP rivolto verso l'alto e premere il tasto di Start per fino a quando appare OK.
eseguire la regolazione della superficie. Per ulteriori dettagli leggere il manuale distruzioni.
[ ] 4. DP Start
DP 5. OK
1. U411 DP Auto AdjStart ERROR XX XX
2. Start 2 4 OK
3. DP Start
2.DP (A) DP (3) . 4.DP .

3.TP (4) 3 (5) 1 (6) (8) .
(7) DP (A) (7) . (f) (9) .
(g) (9) .
1 0.5mm(10)
(8) .
[ ] 4. FaceDown DP Start

DP
1. U411 DP Auto Adj Start 5. OK
ERROR XX
2.Start OK 2 4
3. FaceUp DP Start

26
5mm
F 149 1mm
A(149 5mm)
R 74 1mm
Using a DP auto adjustment original 3.If OK appears on the display, the adjustment is completed.
1.Direct F and R of the DP auto adjustment original upward, and set the If ERROR XX appears, the adjustment failed. Check the original set
original from the place where F and R are marked position and repeat steps 1 and 2 until OK appears.
2.Set the maintenance mode U411. Press the DP FaceUp (Chart2), Input For details, see the service manual.
and the Start key in that order to carry out surface adjustment.
Avec la fonction rglage automatique d'original du DP 3.Si le message OK apparat sur l'affichage, le rglage est termin.Si le
1.Diriger F (avant) et R (arrire) de la fonction de rglage automatique message ERROR XX (erreur XX) s'affiche, le rglage a chou. Vrifi-
doriginal du DP vers le haut, puis placer loriginal partir de lemplace- fer la position de l'original et recommencer les oprations 1 et 2 jusqu'
ment des repres F et R. ce que le message OK apparaisse.
2.Passer au mode maintenance U411. Appuyer sur les touches DP Pour plus de details, se reporter au manuel dentretien.
FaceUp (Chart2), Input et Start dans cet ordre pour procder au
rglage de la surface.
Uso del original de ajuste automtico del DP 3.Si aparece OK en la pantalla significa que el ajuste ha sido realizado.
1.Dirija F y R del original de ajuste automtico del DP hacia arriba, y Si aparece ERROR XX, el ajuste ha fallado. Compruebe la posicin
coloque el original a partir del sitio en que estn marcados F y R. ajustada del original y repita los pasos 1 y 2 hasta que aparezca OK en
2.Entre en el modo de mantenimiento U411. Pulse las teclas DP FaceUp la pantalla.
(Chart2), Input y la tecla de Start, en ese orden, para realizar el ajuste Para mas detalles, lea el manual de servicio.
de anverso.
Gebrauch der automatischen Einstellung des Originals des DP 3.Wenn am Display OK angezeigt wird, ist die Einstellung abgeschlos-
1.F und R der automatischen Einstellung des Originals des DP nach sen. Wenn ERROR XX (FEHLER XX) angezeigt wird, ist die Einstel-
oben zeigen und das Original an die mit F und R markierte Stelle set- lung fehlgeschlagen. berprfen Sie die Originalpositionierung und
zen. wiederholen Sie Schritte 1 und 2, bis OK angezeigt wird.
2.Den Wartungsmodus U411 einschalten. DP Faceup (Chart2), Input Weitere Einzelheiten siehe Wartungsanleitung.
und die Start-Taste in dieser Reihenfolge bettigen, um die Oberflche-
neinstellung ausfhren zu lassen.
Uso di un'autoregolazione originale DP 3.Se OK appare sul display, la regolazione completata.Se compare
1.Orientare F e R dellautoregolazione originale DP verso lalto e dis- ERROR XX (ERRORE XX), la regolazione non riuscita. Verificare la
porre loriginale rispetto ai punti in cui sono contrassegnati F e R. posizione di impostazione dell'originale e ripetere le operazioni 1 e 2
2.Impostare la modalit manutenzione U411. Premere nell'ordine DP fino a quando appare OK.
FaceUp (Chart2), Input e il tasto di Start, per eseguire la regolazione Per ulteriori dettagli leggere il manuale distruzioni.
della superficie.
DP 3. OK
1. DP F R F R DP ERROR XX XX
1 2 OK
2. U411 DP FaceUp(Chart2)InputStart

5. 3 (7) . 3.0m
6. (B) 13 27, 28 4.0mm
.
7. .
8. (2) 1 6 .
DP 3. OK
1.DP FR F
R DP ERROR XX
OK 1 2
2. U411 DP FaceUp(Chart2)Input
Start
27
5mm
F 149 1mm
A(149 5mm)
R 74 1mm
4.After completing the surface adjustment, direct F and R of the DP auto 6.If OK appears on the display, the adjustment is completed.
adjustment original downward and set the original by inserting the side If ERROR XX appears, the adjustment failed. Check the original set
where the F and R are marked into the DP first. position and repeat steps 4 and 5 until OK appears.
5. Set the maintenance mode U411. Press the DP FaceDown (Chart2), For details, see the service manual.
Normal Target, Input and the Start key in that order to carry out rear-
side adjustment.
4. Une fois le rglage de la surface effectu, diriger F (avant) et R 6.Si le message OK apparat sur l'affichage, le rglage est termin. Si le
(arrire) de la fonction de rglage automatique doriginal du DP vers le message ERROR XX (erreur XX) s'affiche, le rglage a chou. Vrifi-
bas et placer loriginal en introduisant en premier dans le DP le ct sur fer la position de l'original et recommencer les oprations 4 et 5 jusqu'
lequel F et R sont indiqus. ce que le message OK apparaisse.
5.Passer au mode maintenance U411. Appuyer sur les touches DP
Pour plus de details, se reporter au manuel dentretien.
FaceDown (Chart2), Normal Target, Input et Start dans cet ordre pour
procder au rglage du ct arrire.
4.Una vez hecho el ajuste del anverso, dirija F y R del original de ajuste 6.Si aparece OK en la pantalla significa que el ajuste ha sido realizado.
automtico del DP hacia abajo y coloque el original insertando en el Si aparece ERROR XX, el ajuste ha fallado. Compruebe la posicin
DP, en primer lugar, el lado en el que estn marcados F y R. ajustada del original y repita los pasos 4 y 5 hasta que aparezca OK en
5.Entre en el modo de mantenimiento U411. Pulse las teclas DP Face- la pantalla.
Down (Chart2), Normal Target, Input y la tecla de Start, en ese orden, Para mas detalles, lea el manual de servicio.
para realizar el ajuste de reverso.
4.Nach dem Abschluss der Oberflcheneinstellung F und R der automa- 6.Wenn am Display OK angezeigt wird, ist die Einstellung abgeschlos-
tischen Einstellung des Originals des DP nach unten zeigen und das sen.Wenn ERROR XX (FEHLER XX) angezeigt wird, ist die Einstel-
Original einstellen, indem die mit F und R markierte Seite zuerst in den lung fehlgeschlagen. berprfen Sie die Originalpositionierung und
DP eingefhrt wird. wiederholen Sie Schritte 4 und 5, bis OK angezeigt wird.
5.Den Wartungsmodus U411 einschalten. DP FaceDown (Chart2), Nor- Weitere Einzelheiten siehe Wartungsanleitung.
mal Target, Input und die Start-Taste in dieser Reihenfolge bettigen,
um die Rckseiteneinstellung ausfhren zu lassen.
4.Una volta conclusa la regolazione della superficie, orientare F e R 6.Se OK appare sul display, la regolazione completata.Se compare
dellautoregolazione originale DP verso il basso e disporre loriginale ERROR XX (ERRORE XX), la regolazione non riuscita. Verificare la
inserendo nel DP prima il lato su cui sono contrassegnati F e R. posizione di impostazione dell'originale e ripetere le operazioni 4 e 5
5.Impostare la modalit manutenzione U411. Premere nell'ordine DP fino a quando appare OK.
FaceDown (Chart2), Normal Target, Input e il tasto di Start, per Per ulteriori dettagli leggere il manuale distruzioni.
eseguire la regolazione del lato posteriore.
4. DP F R F 6. OK
R DP ERROR XX XX
5. U411 DP FaceDown(Chart2)Normal Taget 4 5 OK
InputStart
[ ] 4. FaceDown DP
DP .
1. U411 DP Auto Adj, 5. OK .
. ERROR XX .
2. . OK 2 4 .
3. FaceUp DP
.
4. DP FR
FR 6. OK
DP ERROR XX
5. U411 DP FaceDown(Chart2) Normal OK 4 5
TagetInputStart
28
X X'
X' X
3 3
X' X
X 2 X' 2
1
a h i j k
X X'
-1.5% 100 +1.5%
X
[Checking the magnification] 2. Use the maintenance mode U070 to adjust the magnification.
1.Check the gap between line (1) of original (a) and line (2) (3) of copy Main Scan: Adjusts the scanner main-scan magnification
example. If the gap exceeds the reference value, adjust the gap Sub Scan: Adjusts the scanner sub-scan magnificationSub
according to the following procedure. Scan (CIS): Adjusts the scanner CIS sub-scan magnification (DP-771/
<Reference value> 772)
For the sub-scan direction, vertical gap of line (2): within 1.5%
For the main-scan direction, horizontal gap of line (3): within 1.5%
[Vrification de lagrandissement] Pour la direction du balayage principal, lcart horizontal de la ligne (3) est
1. Vrifier lcart entre la ligne (1) de loriginal (a) et la ligne (2) (3) de lexem- de 1,5%
ple de copie. Si lcart excde la valeur de rfrence, le rgler selon la 2. Pour rgler l'agrandissement, utilisez le mode entretien U070.
procdure suivante. Main Scan: Permet de rgler l'agrandissement du balayage principal du scanner
<Valeur de rfrence> Sub Scan: Permet de rgler l'agrandissement du balayage secondaire du scanner
Pour la direction du balayage secondaire, lcart vertical de la ligne (2) est Sub Scan (CIS): Permet de rgler l'agrandissement du balayage secon-
de 1,5% daire du CIS du scanner (DP-771/772)
[Verificacin del cambio de tamao] 2.Para ajustar la ampliacin utilice el modo de mantenimiento U070.
1.Compruebe la separacin entre la lnea (1) del original (a) y la lnea (2) Main Scan: ajusta el cambio de tamao de la direccin de exploracin
(3) del ejemplo de copia. Si la separacin supera el valor de referencia, principal del escner.
ajstela siguiendo este procedimiento. Sub Scan: ajusta el cambio de tamao de la direccin de exploracin
<Valor de referencia> secundaria del escner.
Para la direccin de exploracin secundaria, separacin vertical de la lnea (2): dentro de 1,5% Sub Scan (CIS): ajusta el cambio de tamao de la direccin de explor-
Para la direccin de exploracin principal, separacin horizontal de la lnea (3): dentro de 1,5% acin secundaria CIS del escner (DP-771/772).
[berprfen der Vergrerung] 2.Zum Einstellen der Vergrerung den Wartungsmodus U070
1.Den Abstand zwischen der Linie (1) des Originals (a) und der Linie (2) verwenden.
(3) des Kopierbeispiels prfen. Wenn der Abstand grer als der Main Scan: Zur Einstellung der Hauptscan-Vergrerung
Bezugswert ist, den Abstand mit dem folgenden Verfahren einstellen. Sub Scan: Zur Einstellung der Subscan-Vergrerung
<Bezugswert> Sub Scan (CIS): Zur Einstellung der Scanner-CIS-Subscan-Vergrer-
Subscanrichtung: Vertikaler Abstand der Linie (2): Innerhalb 1,5% ung (DP-771/772)
Hauptscanrichtung: Horizontaler Abstand der Linie (3): Innerhalb 1,5%
[Controllo dellingrandimento] Per lorientamento della scansione principale, lo scostamento orizzontale

1. Verificare lo scostamento fra la linea (1) delloriginale (a) e la linea (2) (3) della linea (3) deve essere compreso fra 1,5%
dellesempio di copia. Se lo scostamento supera il valore di riferimento, 2. Usare la modalit di manutenzione U070 per regolare l'ingrandimento.
regolare lo scostamento stesso seguendo questa procedura. Main Scan: Regola l'ingrandimento della scansione principale dello scanner
<Valore di riferimento> Sub Scan: Regola l'ingrandimento della scansione ausiliare dello scanner
Per lorientamento della scansione ausiliare, lo scostamento verticale della Sub Scan (CIS): Regola l'ingrandimento della scansione ausiliare CIS dello
linea (2) deve essere compreso fra 1,5% scanner (DP-771/772)
[ ] 2. U070
1.a123 Main Scan
Sub Scan
< > Sub Scan(CIS) CIS (DP-771/772)
2 1.5%
3 1.5%
DP 3. OK .
1.DP F, R F, R ERROR XX .
DP . OK 1 2 .
2. U411 DP FaceUp(Chart2), Input,
.
[ ] 2. U070
1. (a) (1) (2)(3) Main Scan
Sub Scan
Sub Scan(CIS)CIS (DP-771/772)
(2) 1.5%
(3) 1.5%
29
X X'
X' X
3 3
X' X
X 2 X' 2
1
a h i j k
X X'
-1.5% 100 +1.5%
X
3. Adjust the values. 5. Repeat the steps 2 to 4 above until the gap of line (2) (3) of copy
For the shorter length copy example (h)(j): Increases the value. example shows the reference value.
For the longer length copy example (i)(k): Decreases the value. <Reference value>
Amount of change per step: 0.10 % For the sub-scan direction, vertical gap of line (2): within 1.5%
4.Perform a test copy. For the main-scan direction, horizontal gap of line (3): within 1.5%
3.Rgler les valeurs. 5.Rpter les tapes 2 4 jusqu ce que lcart de la ligne (2) (3) de
Pour lexemple de copie dont la longueur est plus courte (h)(j) : lexemple de copie indique la valeur de rfrence.
augmenter la valeur. <Valeur de rfrence>
Pour lexemple de copie dont la longueur est plus longue (i)(k) : Pour la direction du balayage secondaire, lcart vertical de la ligne (2)
diminuer la valeur. est de 1,5%
Changement par graduation dchelle : 0.10 % Pour la direction du balayage principal, lcart horizontal de la ligne (3)
4.Effectuer une copie de test. est de 1,5%
3.Ajuste los valores. 5.Repita los pasos 2 a 4 anteriores hasta que la separacin de la lnea
Para el ejemplo de copia ms corto (h)(j): aumenta el valor. (2) (3) del ejemplo de copia presente el valor de referencia.
Para el ejemplo de copia ms largo (i)(k): disminuye el valor. <Valor de referencia>
Magnitud del cambio por incremento: 0.10 % Para la direccin de exploracin secundaria, separacin vertical de la
4.Haga una copia de prueba. lnea (2): dentro de 1,5%
Para la direccin de exploracin principal, separacin horizontal de la
lnea (3): dentro de 1,5%
3.Die Werte einstellen. 5.Die Schritte 2 bis 4 wiederholen, bis der Abstand der Linie (2) (3) des
Fr die krzere Lnge des Kopierbeispiels (h)(j): Den Wert erhhen. Kopierbeispiels den Bezugswert aufweist.
Fr die lngere Lnge des Kopierbeispiels (i)(k): Den Wert verringern. <Bezugswert>
nderung pro Schritt: 0.10 % Subscanrichtung: Vertikaler Abstand der Linie (2): Innerhalb 1,5%
4.Eine Testkopie erstellen. Hauptscanrichtung: Horizontaler Abstand der Linie (3): Innerhalb
1,5%
3.Regolare i valori. 5.Ripetere le operazioni sopra descritte da 2 a 4 fino a quando lo scostamento

Per lesempio di copia di lunghezza inferiore (h)(j): aumenta il valore. della linea (2) (3) dellesempio di copia riporter i valori di riferimento.
Per lesempio di copia di lunghezza superiore (i)(k): riduce il valore. <Valore di riferimento>
Entit modifica per passo: 0,10 % Per lorientamento della scansione ausiliare, lo scostamento verticale
4.Eseguire una copia di prova della linea (2) deve essere compreso fra 1,5%
Per lorientamento della scansione principale, lo scostamento orizzon-
tale della linea (3) deve essere compreso fra 1,5%
3. 5. 2 423
hj
ik < >
0.10% 2 1.5%
4. 3 1.5%
4. DP F, R F, R 6. OK .
DP . ERROR XX .
5. U411 DP FaceDown(Chart2), Normal OK 4 5 .
Taget, Input, .
3. 5. (2)(3) 2 4
(h)(j)
(i)(k)
1 0.10% (2) 1.5%
4. (3) 1.5%
30
2.5mm
2.5mm
1 2
a l m
[Checking the leading edge timing] 2. Use the maintenance mode U071 to adjust the timing.
1.Check the gap between line (1) on original (a) and line (2) of copy Front Head: Adjusts the leading edge timing (surface)
example. If the gap exceeds the reference value, adjust the gap Front Tail: Adjusts the trailing edge timing (surface)
according to the following procedure. CIS Head: Adjusts the leading edge timing for CIS scanning.
<Reference value> CIS Tail: Adjusts the trailing edge timing for CIS scanning.
Vertical gap of line (2): within 2.5 mm
[Vrification de la synchronisation du bord avant] 2. Pour rgler la synchronisation, utilisez le mode entretien U071.
1.Vrifier lcart entre la ligne (1) de loriginal (a) et la ligne (2) de lexem- Front Head: Permet de rgler la synchronisation du bord de tte (surface)
ple de copie. Si lcart excde la valeur de rfrence, le rgler selon la Front Tail: Permet de rgler la synchronisation du bord arrire (surface)
procdure suivante. CIS Head: Permet de rgler la synchronisation du bord de tte pour le
<Valeur de rfrence> balayage par le CIS.
cart vertical de la ligne (2) : 2.5 mm CIS Tail: Permet de rgler la synchronisation du bord arrire pour le balay-
age par le CIS.
[Cambio de la sincronizacin de borde superior] 2.Para ajustar la sincronizacin utilice el modo de mantenimiento U071.
1.Compruebe la separacin entre la lnea (1) del original (a) y la lnea (2) Front Head: ajusta la sincronizacin del borde superior (anverso).
del ejemplo de copia. Si la separacin supera el valor de referencia, Front Tail: ajusta la sincronizacin del borde inferior (anverso).
ajstela siguiendo este procedimiento. CIS Head: ajusta la sincronizacin del borde superior para exploracin CIS.
<Valor de referencia> CIS Tail: ajusta la sincronizacin del borde inferior para exploracin CIS.
Separacin vertical de la lnea (2): dentro de 2,5 mm
[berprfen des Vorderkanten-Timings] 2.Zum Einstellen des Timing den Wartungsmodus U071 verwenden.
1.Den Abstand zwischen der Linie (1) des Originals (a) und der Linie (2) Front Head: Zur Einstellung des Vorderkanten-Timing (Oberflche)
des Kopierbeispiels prfen. Wenn der Abstand grer als der Front Tail: Zur Einstellung des Hinterkanten-Timing (Oberflche)
Bezugswert ist, den Abstand mit dem folgenden Verfahren einstellen. CIS Head: Zur Einstellung des Vorderkanten-Timing fr CIS-Scannen.
<Bezugswert> CIS Tail: Zur Einstellung des Hinterkanten-Timing fr CIS-Scannen.
Vertikaler Abstand der Linie (2): Innerhalb 2,5 mm
[Controllo della sincronizzazione del bordo principale] 2.Usare la modalit di manutenzione U071 per regolare la
1.Verificare lo scostamento fra la linea (1) sulloriginale (a) e la linea (2) sincronizzazione.
dellesempio di copia. Se lo scostamento supera il valore di riferimento, Front Head: Regola la sincronizzazione del bordo principale (superficie)
regolare lo scostamento stesso seguendo questa procedura. Front Tail: Regola la sincronizzazione del bordo di uscita (superficie)
<Valore di riferimento> CIS Head: Regola la sincronizzazione del bordo principale per scan-
Scostamento verticale della linea (2) compreso fra 2,5 mm sione CIS.
CIS Tail: Regola la sincronizzazione del bordo di uscita per scansione CIS.
[ ] 2. U071
1.a12 Front Head ( )
Front Tail ( )
< > CIS Head CIS
22.5mm CIS Tail CIS
[ ] 2. U070 .
1. (a) (1) (2)(3) . Main Scan
, . Sub Scan
Sub Scan(CIS)CIS (DP-771/772)
(2) 1.5%
(3) 1.5%
[ ] 2. U071
1. (a) (1) (2) Front Head ( )
Front Tail ( )
CIS Head CIS
(2) 2.5mm CIS Tail CIS
31
2.5mm
2.5mm
1 2
a l m
3.Adjust the values. 5.Repeat the steps 2 to 4 above until the gap of line (2) of copy example
For the faster leading edge timing, copy examples (l): Decreases the shows the reference value.
value. <Reference value>
For the slower leading edge timing, copy examples (m): Increases the Vertical gap of line (2): within 2.5 mm
value.
Amount of change per step: 0.17 mm
4. Perform a test copy.
3.Rgler les valeurs. 5.Rpter les tapes 2 4 jusqu ce que lcart de la ligne (2) de
Pour les exemples de copie dont la synchronisation du bord avant est lexemple de copie indique la valeur de rfrence.
plus rapide (l) : diminuer la valeur. <Valeur de rfrence>
Pour les exemples de copie dont la synchronisation du bord avant est cart vertical de la ligne (2) : 2.5 mm
plus lente (m) : augmenter la valeur.
Changement par graduation dchelle : 0,17 mm
4.Effectuer une copie de test.
Para una sincronizacin ms rpida de extremo gua, ejemplos de (2) del ejemplo de copia presente el valor de referencia.
copia (l): disminuye el valor. <Valor de referencia>
Para una sincronizacin ms lenta de extremo gua, ejemplos de copia Separacin vertical de la lnea (2): dentro de 2,5 mm
(m): aumenta el valor.
Magnitud del cambio por incremento: 0,17 mm
4.Haga una copia de prueba.
3.Die Werte einstellen. 5.Die Schritte 2 bis 4 wiederholen, bis der Abstand der Linie (2) des
Fr den schnelleren Vorderkantentakt, Kopierbeispiel (l): Den Wert ver- Kopierbeispiels den Bezugswert aufweist.
ringern. <Bezugswert>
Fr den langsameren Vorderkantentakt, Kopierbeispiel (m): Den Wert Vertikaler Abstand der Linie (2): Innerhalb 2,5 mm
erhhen.
nderung pro Schritt: 0,17 mm
4.Eine Testkopie erstellen.
3.Regolare i valori. 5.Ripetere le operazioni sopra descritte da 2 a 4 fino a quando lo scosta-

Per accelerare la fasatura del bordo di entrata, esempi di copia (l): mento della linea (2) dellesempio di copia riporter i valori di riferi-
riduce il valore. mento.
Per rallentare la fasatura del bordo di entrata, esempi di copia (m): <Valore di riferimento>
aumenta il valore. Scostamento verticale della linea (2) compreso fra 2,5 mm
Entit modifica per passo: 0,17 mm
4.Eseguire una copia di prova
3. 5. 2 42
l
m < >
0.17mm 22.5mm
4.
3. . 5. (2)(3) 2 4
(h)(j) . .
(i)(k) .
1 0.10% (2) 1.5%
4. . (3) 1.5%
3. 5. (2) 2 4
(l)
(m)
1 0.17mm (2) 2.5mm
4.
32
2mm/3mm 2mm/3mm
1 2 2
a n o
[Checking the center line] 2.Use the maintenance mode U072 to adjust the timing.
1.Check the gap between center line (1) on original (a) and center line Front: Adjusts the center line (surface)
(2) of copy example. If the gap exceeds the reference value, adjust the Back: Adjusts the center line (rear side)
gap according to the following procedure. CIS: Adjusts the CIS center line
<Reference value>
Horizontal difference of center line (2) for the single copying: 2.0 mm
Horizontal difference of center line (2) for the duplex copying: 3.0 mm
[Vrification de la ligne mdiane] 2.Pour rgler la ligne mdiane, utiliser le mode entretien U072.
1.Vrifier lcart entre laxe (1) de loriginal (a) et laxe (2) de lexemple de Front: Permet de rgler l'axe (surface)
copie. Si lcart excde la valeur de rfrence, le rgler selon la proc- Back: Permet de rgler l'axe (arrire)
dure suivante. CIS: Permet de rgler l'axe du CIS
<Valeur de rfrence>
Diffrence horizontale de laxe (2) pour la copie recto : 2.0 mm
Diffrence horizontale de laxe (2) pour la copie recto-verso : 3.0 mm
[Verificacin de la lnea central] Diferencia horizontal de la lnea de centro (2) para el copiado dplex:
1.Compruebe la separacin entre la lnea de centro (1) del original (a) y 3.0 mm
la lnea de centro (2) del ejemplo de copia. Si la separacin supera el 2.Para ajustar la lnea central utilice el modo de mantenimiento U072.
valor de referencia, ajstela siguiendo este procedimiento. Front: ajusta la lnea central (anverso).
<Valor de referencia> Back: ajusta la lnea central (reverso).
Diferencia horizontal de la lnea de centro (2) para el copiado por una CIS: ajusta la lnea central CIS.
cara: 2.0 mm
[berprfen der Mittellinie] 2.Zum Einstellen der Mittellinie den Wartungsmodus U072 verwenden.
1.Den Abstand zwischen der Mittellinie (1) des Originals (a) und der Mit- Front: Zur Einstellung der Mittellinie (Oberflche)
tellinie (2) des Kopierbeispiels prfen. Wenn der Abstand grer als der Back: Zur Einstellung der Mittellinie (Rckseite)
Bezugswert ist, den Abstand mit dem folgenden Verfahren einstellen. CIS: Zur Einstellung der CIS-Mittellinie
<Bezugswert>
Horizontaler Unterschied der Mittellinie (2) fr die Einzelkopie: 2.0 mm
Horizontaler Unterschied der Mittellinie (2) fr die Duplexkopie: 3.0 mm
[Controllo della linea centrale] 2.Usare la modalit di manutenzione U072 per regolare la linea centrale.
1.Verificare lo scostamento fra la linea centrale (1) sulloriginale (a) e la linea Front: Regola la linea centrale (superficie)
centrale (2) dellesempio di copia. Se lo scostamento supera il valore di Back: Regola la linea centrale (lato posteriore)
riferimento, regolare lo scostamento stesso seguendo questa procedura. CIS: Regola la linea centrale CIS
<Valore di riferimento>
Differenza orizzontale della linea centrale (2) per la copia singola: 2.0 mm
Differenza orizzontale della linea centrale (2) per la copia duplex: 3.0 mm
[ ] 2. U072
1.a12 Front
Back
< > 22.0mm CISCIS
23.0mm
[ ] 2. U071 .
1. (a) (1) (2) . Front Head ( ) .
. Front Tail ( ) .
CIS Head CIS .
(2) 2.5mm CIS Tail CIS .
[ ] 2. U072

1. (a) (1) (2) Front
Back
(2) 2.0mm CISCIS
(2) 3.0mm
33
2mm/3mm 2mm/3mm
1 2 2
a n o
3. Adjust the values. 5.Repeat the steps 2 to 4 above until the gap of line (2) of copy example
If the center moves more front, copy example (n): Increases the value. shows the reference value.
If the center moves inner, copy sample (o): Decreases the value. <Reference value>
Amount of change per step: 0.085 mm Horizontal difference of center line (2) for the single copying: 2.0 mm
4. Perform a test copy. Horizontal difference of center line (2) for the duplex copying: 3.0 mm
3.Rgler les valeurs. 5.Rpter les tapes 2 4 jusqu ce que lcart de la ligne (2) de
Pour lexemple de copie (n) dont laxe se dplace davantage vers lexemple de copie indique la valeur de rfrence.
lavant : augmenter la valeur. <Valeur de rfrence>
Pour lexemple de copie (o) dont laxe se dplace vers lintrieur : Diffrence horizontale de laxe (2) pour la copie recto : 2.0 mm
diminuer la valeur. Diffrence horizontale de laxe (2) pour la copie recto-verso : 3.0 mm
Changement par graduation dchelle : 0,085 mm
4.Effectuer une copie de test.
Si el centro se desplaza ms hacia el frente, ejemplo de copia (n): (2) del ejemplo de copia presente el valor de referencia.
aumenta el valor. <Valor de referencia>
Si el centro se desplaza hacia dentro, ejemplo de copia (0): disminuye Diferencia horizontal de la lnea de centro (2) para el copiado por una
el valor. cara: 2.0 mm
Magnitud del cambio por incremento: 0,085 mm Diferencia horizontal de la lnea de centro (2) para el copiado dplex:
4.Haga una copia de prueba. 3.0 mm
3.Die Werte einstellen. 5.Die Schritte 2 bis 4 wiederholen, bis der Abstand der Linie (2) des
Wenn die Mitte nach vorne verlagert ist, Kopierbeispiel (n): Den Wert Kopierbeispiels den Bezugswert aufweist.
erhhen. <Bezugswert>
Wenn die Mitte nach innen verlagert ist, Kopierbeispiel (o): Den Wert Horizontaler Unterschied der Mittellinie (2) fr die Einzelkopie: 2.0 mm
verringern. Horizontaler Unterschied der Mittellinie (2) fr die Duplexkopie: 3.0 mm
nderung pro Schritt: 0,085 mm
4.Eine Testkopie erstellen.
3.Regolare i valori. 5.Ripetere le operazioni sopra descritte da 2 a 4 fino a quando lo

Se il centro si sposta pi avanti, esempio di copia (n): aumenta il scostamento della linea (2) dellesempio di copia riporter i valori di
valore. riferimento.
Se il centro si sposta verso linterno, esempio di copia (o): riduce il <Valore di riferimento>
valore. Differenza orizzontale della linea centrale (2) per la copia singola: 2.0 mm
Entit modifica per passo: 0,085 mm Differenza orizzontale della linea centrale (2) per la copia duplex: 3.0 mm
4.Eseguire una copia di prova
3. 5. 2 42
n
o < >
0.085mm 22.0mm
4. 23.0mm
3. . 5. (2) 2 4 .
(l) .
(m) . (2) 2.5mm
1 0.17mm [ ]
4. . 1. (a) (1) (2) .
.
3. 5. (2) 2 4
(n)

(o) (2) 2.0mm
1 0.085mm (2) 3.0mm
4.
34
PAPER FEEDER
E
B(2)
J(2)
G(4)
*G(6)
C
F
K (M4x20)(4)
I (12)
H (M4x8)(3)
*I (6)
D **I (2)
A
E. Clamp ........................................................ 1 I. Media type plate

English
F. Wire cover.................................................. 1 (except for above models)........................12
Supplied parts G. Paper size plate ......................................... 4 J. Stopper ...................................................... 2
A. Paper feeder.............................................. 1 H. S Tite screw M4 8 ................................... 3 K. S Tite screws M4 20 .............................. 4
B. Pin ............................................................. 2 *I. Media type plate(120V model only) ........... 6
C. Retainer ..................................................... 1 **I.Media type plate(110V model only) ........... 2 Be sure to remove any tape and/or cushioning
D. Intermediate paper conveying unit............. 1 materials from the parts supplied.
E. Collier......................................................... 1 Veillez retirer les morceaux de bande adh-

Franais
F. Couvercle de cble .................................... 1 sive et/ou les matriaux de rembourrage des
Pices fournies G. Plaquette du format de papier ................... 4 pices fournies.
A. Chargeur de papier.................................... 1 H. Vis S Tite M4 8 ....................................... 3
B. Broche ....................................................... 2 I. Plaquette du type de support................... 12
C. lment de retenue ................................... 1 J. Bute ......................................................... 2
D. Unit de transport du papier intermdiaire 1 K. Vis S Tite M4 20 ..................................... 4
E. Sujetador ................................................... 1 Asegrese de despegar todas las cintas y/o

Espaol
F. Cubierta para el cable................................ 1 material amortiguador de las partes suministra-
Partes suministradas G. Placa de tamao de papel ......................... 4 das.
A. Depsito de papel...................................... 1 H. Tornillo S Tite M4 8 ................................. 3
B. Clavija........................................................ 2 I. Placa de tipo de medio ............................ 12
C. Retn ......................................................... 1 J. Tope ........................................................... 2
D. Unidad de transporte de papel intermedia. 1 K. Tornillos S Tite M4 20 ............................. 4
E. Klemme...................................................... 1 Stellen Sie sicher, dass smtliche Klebebnder

Deutsch
F. Kabelabdeckung ........................................ 1 und/oder Polstermaterial von den gelieferten
Enthaltene Teile G. Papierformatkarte ...................................... 4 Teilen entfernt wurden.
A. Papiereinzug.............................................. 1 H. S-Tite-Schraube M4 8............................. 3
B. Stift............................................................. 2 I. Medientypkarte ........................................ 12
C. Halterung ................................................... 1 J. Anschlag .................................................... 2
D. Eingesetzte Papierfrdereinheit ................ 1 K. S-Tite-Schrauben M4 20........................ 4
E. Morsetto..................................................... 1 Rimuovere tutti i nastri adesivi e/o i materiali di

Italiano
F. Coperchio cavi ........................................... 1 protezione dalle parti fornite.
Parti fornite G. Piastra formato carta ................................. 4
A. Unit di alimentazione della carta ............. 1 H. Vite S Tite M4 8 ...................................... 3
B. Perno ........................................................ 2 I. Piastra tipo carta...................................... 12
C. Fermo ....................................................... 1 J. Fermo ........................................................ 2
D. Unit intermediale di trasporto carta.......... 1 K. Vite S Tite M4 20 .................................... 4
E. ...............................1 K. S M420 .................4

F. .............................1
*G. .......................6
A. ........................... 1 H. S M48 ...................3
B. ............................. 2 **I. ......................2
C. ............................... 1 J. ...............................2
D. ......................... 1
E. ............................................... 1 K. M420 S .......................... 4

F. ............................................ 1
G. ............................... 4 ,
A. ............................................... 1 H. M48 S ........................... 3 .
B. ..................................................... 2 **I. ............................. 2
C. ............................................... 1 J. ......................................... 2
D. ................................... 1
E. .............................1
F. ...........................1
G. ...................4
A. ................... 1 H. M48 S ...................3
B. ................................. 2 **I. ....................2
C. ............................... 1 J. .........................2
D. ..................... 1 K. M420 S ..................4
1
3
2
3-1
Procedure 1. Pull each cassette out from the paper 3.Pull out the lower paper cassette (3) from
Before starting installation, be sure to turn the feeder (A). Remove the lift plate stopper (1) the machine.
main power switch of the machine off, and from each cassette and attach it to the stor- 4.Remove the paper cassette (3-1).
unplug the power plug from the wall outlet. age location (2).
2.Gently close each cassette.
Procdure 1.Sortez chaque magasin du chargeur de 3.Sortez le magasin de papier infrieur (3) de
Avant de commencer l'installation, s'assurer de papier (A). Retirez la bute de la plaque de la machine.
mettre la machine hors tension et de levage (1) de chaque magasin et fixez-la 4.Retirez le magasin de papier (3-1).
dbrancher la fiche d'alimentation de la prise dans l'emplacement de stockage (2).
murale. 2.Refermer progressivement chaque tiroir.
Procedimiento 1. Saque cada uno de los depsitos del 3.Extraiga el depsito inferior (3) de la
Antes de iniciar la instalacin, asegrese de depsito de papel (A). Quite el tope de placa mquina.
apagar el interruptor de encendido de la de elevacin (1) de cada depsito y pngalo 4.Quite el depsito de papel (3-1).
mquina y desenchufar el cable de alimentacin en el espacio reservado para guardarlo (2).
de la toma de pared. 2.Cierre suavemente cada bandeja.
Verfahren 1.Ziehen Sie jede Kassette aus dem Papie- 3.Ziehen Sie die untere Kassette (3) aus dem
Bevor Sie mit der Installation beginnen berzeu- reinzug (A) heraus. Entfernen Sie die Ver- Gert heraus.
gen Sie sich, dass der Netzschalter des Gerts riegelung des Papierlifts (1) aus jeder 4. Nehmen Sie die Papierkassette (3-1) her-
ausgeschaltet und das Stromkabel aus der Kassette und setzen Sie die Verriegelung in aus.
Steckdose gezogen ist. die Parkposition (2) ein.
2.Alle Kassetten sachte schlieen.
Procedura 1.Estrarre ciascun cassetto dall'unit di ali- 3.Estrarre il cassetto carta inferiore (3) dalla
Prima di iniziare l'installazione, spegnere la mentazione carta (A). Rimuovere il fermo macchina.
macchina e scollegare la spina dalla presa di della piastra di sollevamento (1) da ogni cas- 4.Rimuovere il cassetto carta (3-1).
corrente. setto e fissarlo sulla posizione a riposo (2).
2.Chiudere delicatamente ciascun cassetto.
1. (A) 1 3. (3)
(1) (2) 4. (3-1)

2.
1. (A) . 3. (3) .
(1) 1 (2) 4. (3-1) .
.
. 2. .
1.(A) 3. (3)
OFF
(1) 1 4. (3-1)
(2)
2.
2
B
3-1
5
3-2
4
6
8
4 A
6
A 3
5.Place the machine (6) on the paper feeder 6.Secure the machine (6) to the paper feeder 7.Align the holes (7) of the lower cassette (3-1)
(A) so that the pins (4) at the front left and (A) with the 2 pins (B). for the machine with the pins (8) in the cas-
front right of the paper feeder (A) are aligned sette slider (3-2). Put the paper cassette (3-
with the holes (5) in the base of the machine. 1).
8.Push the lower paper cassette (3) in fully.
5.Monter la machine (6) sur le chargeur de 6.Fixer la machine (6) au chargeur de papier 7.Alignez les trous (7) du magasin infrieur (3-
papier (A) de sorte que les broches (4) (A) avec les 2 broches (B). 1) pour la machine avec les ergots (8) dans
l'avant gauche et l'avant droit du chargeur le tiroir du magasin (3-2). Placez le magasin
de papier (A) soient aligns avec les trous de papier (3-1).
(5) dans la base du machine. 8.Enfoncez fond le magasin de papier infri-
eur (3).
5.Coloque la mquina (6) sobre el depsito de 6.Fije la mquina (6) al depsito de papel (A) 7. Alinee los orificios (7) del depsito inferior (3-1)
papel (A) de forma que los pasadores (4) en con los dos pasadores (B). de la mquina con los pasadores (8) del desl-
los lados frontales izquierdo y derecho del izador del depsito (3-2). Coloque el depsito
depsito de papel (A) estn alineados con de papel (3-1).
los orificios (5) de la base de la mquina. 8. Ejerza presin sobre el depsito de papel infe-
rior (3) hasta introducirlo por completo.
5.Setzen Sie das Gert (6) so auf den 6.Sichern Sie das Gert (6) mit den 2 Stiften 7. Richten Sie die Lcher (7) der Kassette (3-1)
Papiereinzug (A), dass die Stifte (4) vorne (B) am Papiereinzug (A). des Gerts mit den Stiften (8) im Kassettenan-
links und vorne rechts am Papiereinzug (A) schlag (3-2) aus. Setzen Sie die Papierkas-
auf die ffnungen (5) im Boden des Gerts sette (3-1) wieder ein.
ausgerichtet sind. 8. Schieben Sie die Papierkassette (3) bis zum
Anschlag ein.
5.Posizionare la macchina (6) sull'alimentatore 6.Fissare la macchina (6) sull'alimentatore 7.Allineare i fori (7) del cassetto inferiore (3-1)
carta (A) in modo che i perni (4) sul lato carta (A) con i 2 perni (B). per la macchina con perni (8) della guida
destro e sinistro anteriore dell'alimentatore cassetto (3-2). Inserire il cassetto carta (3-
carta (A) siano allineati con i fori (5) presenti 1).
sulla base della macchina.. 8.Spingere il cassetto carta inferiore (3) fino in
fondo.
5. (A) (4) 6. 2 (B) (6) 7. (3-1) (7)

(5) (A) (3-2) (8) (3-
(6) (A) 1)
8. (3)
5. (A) 6. (B) 2 (6) (A) 7. (3-1) (7)

(4) (5) . (3-2) (8) .
(6) (A) (3-1) .
. 8. (3)
.
5.(A) 6. (B)2 (6) 7. (3-1) (7)

(4) (5) (A) (3-2) (8)
(A) (3-1)
(6) 8. (3)
3
13
11
14
9 H(M4x8)
12
C
10
9.Remove the screw (9) in the rear of the 10.Remove the screw (11) to remove the metal 11.Fit the hook (13) on the mounting plate (C)
paper feeder and remove the cover (10). plate (12). into the opening (14) and then align the 2
positioning projections.
12.Secure the mounting plate (C) with the S Tite
screw M4 8 (H).
9.Dposer la vis (9) l'arrire du chargeur de 10.Dposer la vis (11) pour enlever la plaque 11.Insrer le crochet (13) du plateau de mon-
papier et dposer le couvercle (10). mtallique (12). tage (C) dans l'ouverture (14) et aligner les 2
saillies de positionnement.
12.Fixer le plateau de montage (C) avec la vis S
Tite M4 8 (H).
9.Quite el tornillo (9) del lado trasero del 10.Quite el tornillo (11) para desmontar la placa 11.Coloque el gancho (13) de la placa de mon-
depsito de papel y quite la cubierta (10). de metal (12). taje (C) en la abertura (14) y, despus,
alinee los 2 resaltos de posicin.
12.Asegure la placa de montaje (C) con el tor-
nillo S Tite M4 x 8 (H).
9.Die Schraube (9) an der Rckseite des 10.Die Schraube (11) herausdrehen, um die 11.Den Haken (13) auf der Montageplatte (C) in
Papiereinzugs entfernen und die Abdeckung Metallplatte (12) abzunehmen. die ffnung (14) einpassen und dann die 2
(10) abnehmen. Positionierungsnasen ausrichten.
12.Die Montageplatte (C) mit der S-Tite-
Schraube M4 x 8 verwenden (H) befestigen.
9.Rimuovere la vite (9) nel retro dell'unit di 10.Rimuovere la vite (11), per rimuovere la 11.Inserire il gancio (13) sulla piastra di mon-
alimentazione della carta e quindi rimuovere piastra di metallo (12). taggio (C) nell'apertura (14) e quindi
il coperchio (10). allineare le 2 sporgenze di posizionamento.
12.Fissare la piastra di montaggio (C) con la
vite S Tite M4 8 (H).
9. 1 (9) 10. 1 (11) (12) 11. (C) (13) (14)

(10) 2
12. 1 S M48 (H)
(C)
9. (9) 1 10. (11) 1 (12) 11. (C) (13) (14)

(10) . . 2 .
12. M48 S (H) 1 (C)
.
9. (9)1 10. (11)1 (12) 11. (C) (13) (14)

(10) 2

12. M48 S (H)1 (C)

4
22
25
21 20 24
16 18
19
15 23
17
13.Pass the power cord (15) through the edging 14.Connect the power cord (19) and the signal 16.Open the lower right cover (23) on the
(small) (16) and the signal cable (17) cable (20) to connectors (21) (22) respec- machine.
through the edging (large) (18) and then tively on the machine. Remove the strap (24) from the shaft (25)
close the edging 15.Replace the cover (10) using the screw (9) and remove lower right cover (23).
removed in step 9.
13.Faire passer le cordon d'alimentation (15) 14.Raccorder respectivement le cordon d'ali- 16.Ouvrir le capot infrieur droit (23) de la
dans le (petit) passage (16) et le cble du mentation (19) et le cble de signal (20) aux machine.
signal (17) dans le (grand) passage (18) puis connecteurs (21) (22) de la machine. Dposer la courroie (24) de l'arbre (25) et
fermer le passage. 15.Reposer le couvercle (10) l'aide de la vis dposer le couvercle infrieur droit (23).
(9) dpose l'tape 9.
13.Pase el cable de alimentacin (15) a travs 14.Conecte el cable de alimentacin (19) y el 16.Abra la cubierta derecha inferior (23) de la
de la pestaa (pequea) (16) y el cable de cable de seal (20) a los conectores (21) mquina.
seales (17) a travs de la pestaa (grande) (22) respectivamente de la mquina. Quite la correa (24) del eje (25) y quite la
(18) y, despus, cierre la pestaa. 15.Vuelva a colocar la cubierta (10) usando el cubierta frontal inferior (23).
tornillo (9) quitado en el paso 9.
13.Das Netzkabel (15) durch den Kantenschutz 14.Schlieen Sie das Netzkabel (19) und das 16.ffnen Sie die untere rechte Abdeckung (23)
(klein) (16) und das Signalkabel (17) durch Signalkabel (20) an den entsprechenden des Gerts.
den Kantenschutz (gro) (18) fhren und Steckverbindern (21) (22) des Gerts an. Den Riemen (24) von der Welle (25)
dann den Kantenschutz schlieen. 15.Die Abdeckung (10) mittels der in Schritt 9 abnehmen und dann die untere rechte
entfernten Schraube (9) wieder anbringen. Abdeckung (23) abnehmen.
13.Passare il cavo di alimentazione (15) attra- 14.Collegare il cavo di alimentazione (19) e il 16.Aprire il pannello destro inferiore (23) sulla
verso il bordo (piccolo) (16) e il cavo del seg- cavo del segnale (20) ai connettori della macchina.
nale (17) attraverso il bordo (grande) (18), e macchina (21) e (22), rispettivamente. Rimuovere la cinghietta (24) dall'asta (25) e
quindi chiudere il bordo. 15.Ricollocare il coperchio (10) utilizzando la quindi rimuovere il pannello destro inferiore
vite (9) rimossa nel passo 9. (23).
13. AC (15) (16) 14. AC (19) (20) 16. (23)

(17) (18) (21)(22) (24) (25)
15. 9 1 (9) (23)
(10)
13.AC (15) (16) , 14. (19) (20) 16. (23) .

(17) (18) (21), (22) . (24) (25)
. 15. 9 (9) 1 (23) .
(10) .
13.AC (15) (16) 14.AC (19) (20) 16.(23)

(17) (18) (21)(22) (24) (25)
15. 9 (9)1 (23)
(10)
5
27 D 27
26 28 H (M4x8)
28
H (M4x8)
17.Open the paper feeder right cover (26). 18.Fit the 3 hooks (27) on the intermediate paper conveying unit (D) into the 3 holes (28) in the
guide.
19.Secure the intermediate paper conveying unit (D) with the 2 S Tite screw M4 8 (H).
NOTICE
Be sure to use S Tite screw M4 8.
Using longer screws, such as S Tite screws M4 20, may damage wires.
17.Ouvrir le couvercle droit du chargeur de 18.Insrer les 3 crochets (27) de l'unit de transport du papier intermdiaire (D) dans les 3 trous (28)
papier (26). du guide.
19.Fixer l'unite de transport du papier intermediaire (D) a l'aide des 2 Vis S Tite M4 8 (H).
REMARQUE
S'assurer d'utiliser la vis S Tite M4 8.
L'utilisation de vis plus longues, comme les vis S Tite M4 20, peut endommager les fils.
17.Abra la cubierta derecha del depsito de 18.Coloque los 3 ganchos (27) de la unidad de transporte de papel intermedia (D) en los 3 orificios
papel (26). (28) de la gua.
19.Asegure la unidad de transporte de papel intermedia (D) con los 2 Tornillo S Tite M4 8 (H).
AVISO
Asegrese de usar tornillos S Tite M4 x 8.
El uso de tornillos ms largos, como tornillos S Tite M4 x 20, puede daar los cables.
17.Die rechte Abdeckung (26) des Papiere- 18.Die 3 Haken (27) an der eingesetzten Papierfrdereinheit (D) in die 3 ffnungen (28) in der Fh-
inzugs ffnen. rung einpassen.
19.Die eingesetzte Papierfordereinheit (D) mit den 2 S-Tite-Schraube M4 8 (H) sichern.
ANMERKUNG
Stellen Sie sicher, dass Sie die S-Tite-Schraube M4 x 8 verwenden.
Die Verwendung von lngeren Schrauben als den S-Tite-Schrauben M4 x 20 kann Kabel besch-
digen.
17.Aprire il pannello destro (26) dell'unit di ali- 18.Inserire i 3 ganci (27) sull'unit intermediale di trasporto carta (D) nei 3 fori (28) nella guida.
mentazione della carta. 19.Fissare l'unita intermediale di trasporto carta (D) con le 2 Vite S Tite M4 8 (H).
AVVISO
Utilizzare solo la vite S Tite M4 8.
Se si utilizzano viti pi lunghe, come le viti S Tite M4 20, si possono danneggiare i fili.
17. (26) 18. (D) 3 (27) 3 (28)

19. 2 S M48(H) (D)

S M48
( S M420 )
17. (26) . 18. (D) (27) 3 (28) 3 .

19. M48 S (H) 2 (D) .

M48 S .
( : M420 S ) .
17.(26) 18. (D) (27)3 (28)3

19. M48 S (H)2 (D)

M48 S
(M420 S )
6
29
F
31 30
32
20.Connect the intermediate paper conveying 22.Insert the projection (30) on the wire cover 24.Turn the adjusters on each corner (32) until
unit connector (29). (F) into the hole (31) in the paper feeder and they reach the floor and then secure the
21.Attach the clamp (E) and secure the connec- install the wire cover (F). paper feeder.
tor wire. 23.Close the paper feeder right cover (26) and
replace the lower right cover (23) on the
machine.
20.Raccorder le connecteur (29) de l'unit de 22.Insrer la saillie (30) du couvercle du cble 24.Faire tourner les dispositifs de rglage de
transport du papier intermdiaire. (F) dans le trou (31) du chargeur de papier chacun des coins (32) jusqu' ce qu'ils
21.Monter le collier (E) et fixer le cble du con- et reposer le couvercle du cble (F). touchent le sol et fixer ensuite le chargeur de
necteur. 23.Fermer le couvercle droit du chargeur de papier.
papier (26) et reposer le capot infrieur droit
(23) sur la machine.
20.Conecte el conector de la unidad de trans- 22.Inserte el resalto (30) de la cubierta para el 24.Gire los reguladores en cada esquina (32)
porte de papel intermedia (29). cable (F) en el orificio (31) del depsito de hasta que lleguen al piso y, a continuacin,
21.Fije el sujetador (E) y asegure el cable del papel e instale la cubierta para el cable (F). asegure el depsito de papel.
conector. 23.Cierre la cubierta derecha del depsito de
papel (26) y vuelva a colocar la cubierta
derecha inferior (23) en la mquina.
20.Den Steckverbinder (29) der eingesetzten 22.Die Nase (30) der Kabelabdeckung (F) in die 24.Die Einsteller an jeder Ecke (32) drehen, bis
Papierfrdereinheit anschlieen. ffnung (31) des Papiereinzugs einsetzen sie den Boden berhren, und dann den
21.Die Klemme (E) anbringen und das Kabel und die Kabelabdeckung (F) anbringen. Papiereinzug sichern.
des Steckverbinders sichern. 23.Schlieen Sie die rechte Abdeckung (26)
des Papiereinzugs und setzen Sie die untere
rechte Abdeckung (23) wieder im Gert ein.
20.Collegare il connettore (29) dell'unit inter- 22.Inserire la sporgenza (30) del coperchio cavi 24.Ruotare i regolatori (32) presenti su ciascun
mediale di trasporto carta. (F) nel foro (31) nell'unit di alimentazione angolo finch vengano a contatto con il pavi-
21.Applicare il morsetto (E) e fissare il cavo del della carta ed installare il coperchio cavi (F). mento, e quindi fissare lunit di alimentazi-
connettore. 23.Chiudere il pannello destro (26) dell'alimen- one della carta.
tatore carta e rimontare il pannello destro
inferiore (23) sulla macchina.
20. (29) 22. (F) (30) 24. (32)

21. (E) (31) (F)
23. (26)
(23)
20. (29) 22. (F) (30) 24. (32)

. (31) (F) . .
21. (E) , 23. (26)
. (23) .
20.(29) 22.(F) (30) 24.(32)

(31)

21. (E)
(F)
23.(26)
(23)

7
33
K (M4x20) 33 33
J
K (M4x20) 33
J
25.Select holes (33) and install each stopper (J) with 2 S Tite screws M4 20 (K) so that the stoppers will be grounded on the floor.
25.Slectionner les trous (33) et installer chaque bute (J) avec 2 vis S Tite M4 20 (K) de sorte que les butes reposent sur le sol.
25.Seleccione los orificios (33) e instale cada tope (J) con los 2 tornillos S Tite M4 20 (K) de manera que los topes se conecten a tierra en el suelo.
25.Whlen Sie die ffnungen (33) und befestigen Sie jeden Anschlag (J) mit den 2 S-Tite-Schrauben M4 20 (K) so an, dass die Anschlge am Boden
aufsitzen.
25.Selezionare i fori (33) ed installare ogni fermo (J) con le 2 viti S Tite M4 20 (K) in modo che i fermi siano posti a terra sul pavimento.
25.33 2 M420 S KJ
25. (J) 33 M420 S (K) 2 .
25. (J) 33 M420 S (K) 2
8
I
G
Setting the paper size plate and media type Skewed paper feed adjustment
plate 1.Connect the machine power plug to the wall outlet and turn the machine main power switch on.
Insert the paper size plate (G) and media type 2.Load paper into the cassette and make a test copy to check the image.
plate (I) into the each slots respectively. 3.If the image is skewed (skewed paper feed), make the adjustments described below.
<Reference value> Left-right difference of 1.5 mm or less
Disposition des plaquettes du format de Rglage de l'entranement du papier en biais

papier et du type de support 1.Insrer la fiche dalimentation de la machine dans la prise murale et mettre la machine sous ten-
Introduire la plaquette du format de papier (G) et sion.
la plaquette du type de support (I) dans leur 2.Mettre du papier dans le tiroir et effectuer une copie d'essai pour vrifier l'image.
logement respectif. 3.Si l'image est en biais (entranement du papier en biais), rgler en procdant comme dcrit ci-
dessous.
<Valeur de rfrence> Diffrence de droite gauche de 1,5 mm ou moins.
Ajuste de la placa de tamao de papel y la Ajuste de alimentacin de papel torcida

placa de tipo de medio 1.Conecte el enchufe de la mquina en el receptculo de pared y encienda el interruptor principal
Inserte la placa de tamao de papel (G) y la de la mquina.
placa de tipo de medio (I) en cada uno de las 2.Introduzca papel en el cajn y haga una copia de prueba para verificar la imagen.
ranuras, respectivamente. 3. Si la imagen est torcida (alimentacin del papel torcida) haga los ajustes que se describen a
continuacin.
<Valor de referencia> diferencia izquierda-derecha de 1,5 mm o menor.
Einsetzen der Papierformatkarte und der Einstellung bei verkantetem Papiereinzug

Medientypkarte 1.Stecken Sie den Netzstecker des Gerts in die Wandsteckdose und schalten Sie das Gert am
Setzen Sie die Papierformatkarte (G) und die Hauptschalter ein.
Medientypkarte (I) in die jeweiligen Fhrungen. 2.Legen Sie Papier in die Papierlade ein und machen Sie eine Testkopie, um das Bild zu prfen.
3.Nehmen Sie nachstehende Einstellungen vor, falls das Bild verkantet ist (verkanteter Papiere-
inzug).
<Bezugswert> Links-rechts-Differenz maximal 1,5 mm.
Impostazione della piastra di formato carta e Regolazione alimentazione obliqua carta

della piastra del tipo di supporto 1.Collegare la spina della macchina alla presa di corrente a muro e accendere linterruttore di ali-
Inserire la piastra del formato carta (G) e la pias- mentazione della macchina.
tra del tipo di supporto (I) nei rispettivi alloggia- 2.Caricare carta nel cassetto ed eseguire una copia di prova per controllare l'immagine.
menti. 3.Se l'immagine risulta obliqua (alimentazione obliqua della carta), eseguire le regolazioni descritte
sotto.
<Valore di riferimento> Differenza tra destra e sinistra di 1,5 mm o inferiore

G) I) 1.
2.
3.
1.5mm

(G) 1. .
(I) . 2. . .
3. .
1.5mm

(G) 1. ON
(I) 2.
3.
1.5mm
9
35
36
34
36
4.Pull out the cassette (34) in the paper feeder and loosen the 4 screws (35).
5.Turn the adjusting screw (36) to adjust the cursor skew.
6.Retighten the 4 screws (35).
7.Make another test copy to check the image.
4.Sortir le tiroir (34) du chargeur de papier et desserrer les 4 vis (35).

5.Faire tourner la vis de rglage (36) pour rgler la dviation du curseur.
6.Resserrer les 4 vis (35).
7.Faire une autre copie d'essai pour vrifier l'image.
4.Extraiga el cajn (34) del depsito de papel y afloje los 4 tornillos (35).
5.Gire el tornillo de ajuste (36) para ajustar la desviacin del cursor.
6.Vuelva a apretar los 4 tornillos (35).
7.Haga otra copia de prueba para verificar la imagen.
4.Ziehen Sie die Papierlade (34) aus dem Papiereinzug und lsen Sie die 4 Schrauben (35).
5.Drehen Sie die Einstellschraube (36), um die Cursor-Verkantung zu korrigieren.
6.Ziehen Sie die 4 Schrauben (35) wieder an
7.Erstellen Sie zur berprfung des Bilds noch einmal eine Testkopie.
4.Estrarre il cassetto (34) dell'unit di alimentazione della carta e quindi allentare le 4 viti (35).
5.Ruotare la vite di regolazione (36) per regolare l'inclinazione del cursore.
6.Ristringere le 4 viti (35).
7.Eseguire un'altra copia di prova per controllare l'immagine.
4. (34) 4 (35)
5. (36)
6. 4 (35)
7.
4. (34) (35) 4 .
5. (36) .
6. (35) 4 .
7. .
4. (34) (35)4
5. (36)
6. (35)4
7.
10
b
a c d
Adjusting the center line

The reference value for the center line is 0.5 mm or less at position (b) in the correct image (a). If the center line position is outside this range, perform
the following adjustment.
1.Set maintenance mode U034, select LSU Out Left and Cassette3 or Cassette4.
2.Adjust the values.
Test pattern (c): Increase the setting value. Test pattern (d): Decrease the setting value.
3.Press the Start key to confirm the setting value.
Rglage de l'axe
La valeur de rfrence pour l'axe est de 0,5 mm ou moins la position (b) d'une image correcte (a). Si la position de l'axe est hors de cette plage,
effectuez le rglage suivant.
1.Passer en mode maintenance U034, slectionner LSU Out Left et Cassette3 ou Cassette4.
2.Rgler les valeurs.
Mire d' essai (c): Augmentez la valeur de rglage. Mire d' essai (d): Diminuez la valeur de rglage.
3.Appuyer sur la touche de Start pour confirmer la valeur de rglage.
Ajuste de la lnea central
El valor de referencia de la lnea central es de 0,5 mm o menor, en la posicin (b) de la imagen correcta (a). Si la posicin de la lnea central estuviera
fuera de este rango, haga el siguiente ajuste.
1.Entre al modo de mantenimiento U034, seleccione LSU Out Left y Cassette3 o Cassette4.
2.Ajuste los valores.
Patrn de prueba (c): Aumente el valor de configuracin. Patrn de prueba (d): Reduzca el valor de configuracin.
3.Pulse la tecla de Start para confirmar el valor de configuracin.
Einstellen der Mittenlinie

Der Bezugswert fr die Mittenlinie ist 0,5 mm oder weniger an Position (b) des korrekten Bilds (a). Falls die Mittenlinie auerhalb dieses Bereichs liegt,
ist folgende Einstellung vorzunehmen.
1.Schalten Sie in den Wartungsmodus U034, whlen Sie LSU Out Left und Cassette3 oder Cassette4.
2.Die Werte einstellen.
Testmuster (c): Den Einstellwert erhhen. Testmuster (d): Den Einstellwert verringern.
3.Den Einstellwert durch Drcken der Start-Taste besttigen.
Regolazione della linea centrale

Il valore di riferimento per la linea centrale 0,5 mm o inferiore alla posizione (b) nell'immagine corretta (a). Se la posizione della linea centrale all'infu-
ori di questa gamma, effettuare la regolazione seguente.
1.Impostare la modalit manutenzione U034, selezionare LSU Out Left e Cassette3 o Cassette4.
2.Regolare i valori.
Modello di prova (c): Aumentare il valore dell'impostazione. Modello di prova (d): Diminuire il valore dell'impostazione.
3.Premere il tasto di Start per confermare il valore dell'impostazione.
(a) (b) 0.5mm

1. U034 LSU Out LeftCassette3 Cassette4
2.
(c) (d)
3. Start

(a) (b) 0.5mm . .
1. U034 LSU Out Left, Cassette3 Cassette4 .
2. .
(c) . (d) .
3. .
(a) (b) 0.5mm

2.
(c) (d)
3.
11
LARGE CAPACITY FEEDER
B(2) E
J(2)
C G(4)
F
K (M4x20)(4)
H (M4x8)(3)
I (12)
*I (6)
A D **I (2)
E. Clamp ........................................................ 1 K. S Tite screws M4 20 .............................. 4

English
F. Wire cover.................................................. 1
Supplied parts Be sure to remove any tape and/or cushioning
G. Paper size plate ......................................... 4
A. Paper feeder.............................................. 1 materials from the parts supplied.
H. S Tite screw M4 8 ................................... 3
B. Pin ............................................................. 2 I. Media type plate(except for 120V model) 12
C. Retainer ..................................................... 1 *I. Media type plate(120V model only) ........... 6
D. Intermediate paper conveying unit............. 1 J. Stopper ...................................................... 2
E. Collier......................................................... 1 Veillez retirer les morceaux de bande adh-

Franais
F. Couvercle de cble .................................... 1 sive et/ou les matriaux de rembourrage des
Pices fournies G. Plaquette du format de papier ................... 4 pices fournies.
A. Chargeur de papier.................................... 1 H. Vis S Tite M4 8 ....................................... 3
B. Broche ....................................................... 2 I. Plaquette du type de support................... 12
C. lment de retenue ................................... 1 J. Bute ......................................................... 2
D. Unit de transport du papier intermdiaire 1 K. Vis S Tite M4 20 ..................................... 4
E. Sujetador ................................................... 1 Asegrese de despegar todas las cintas y/o

Espaol
F. Cubierta para el cable................................ 1 material amortiguador de las partes suministra-
Partes suministradas G. Placa de tamao de papel ......................... 4 das.
A. Depsito de papel...................................... 1 H. Tornillo S Tite M4 8 ................................. 3
B. Clavija........................................................ 2 I. Placa de tipo de medio ............................ 12
C. Retn ......................................................... 1 J. Tope ........................................................... 2
D. Unidad de transporte de papel intermedia. 1 K. Tornillos S Tite M4 20 ............................. 4
E. Klemme...................................................... 1 Stellen Sie sicher, dass smtliche Klebebnder

Deutsch
F. Kabelabdeckung ........................................ 1 und/oder Polstermaterial von den gelieferten
Enthaltene Teile G. Papierformatkarte ...................................... 4 Teilen entfernt wurden.
A. Papiereinzug.............................................. 1 H. S-Tite-Schraube M4 8............................. 3
B. Stift............................................................. 2 I. Medientypkarte ........................................ 12
C. Halterung ................................................... 1 J. Anschlag .................................................... 2
D. Eingesetzte Papierfrdereinheit ................ 1 K. S-Tite-Schrauben M4 20........................ 4
E. Morsetto..................................................... 1 Rimuovere tutti i nastri adesivi e/o i materiali di

Italiano
F. Coperchio cavi ........................................... 1 protezione dalle parti fornite.
Parti fornite G. Piastra formato carta ................................. 4
A. Unit di alimentazione della carta ............. 1 H. Vite S Tite M4 8 ...................................... 3
B. Perno ........................................................ 2 I. Piastra tipo carta...................................... 12
C. Fermo ....................................................... 1 J. Fermo ........................................................ 2
D. Unit intermediale di trasporto carta.......... 1 K. Vite S Tite M4 20 .................................... 4
E. ..............................1 K. S M420 .................4

F. .............................1
G. .......................4
A. ........................... 1 H. S M48 ...................3
B. ............................. 2 **I. ......................2
C. ............................... 1 J. ...............................2
D. ......................... 1
E. ............................................... 1 K. M420 S .......................... 4

F. ............................................ 1
G. ............................... 4 ,
A. ............................................... 1 H. M48 S ............................ 3 .
B. ..................................................... 2 **I. ............................. 2
C. ............................................... 1 J. ......................................... 2
D. ................................... 1
E. .............................1
F. ...........................1
G. ...................4
A. ................... 1 H. M48 S ...................3
B. ................................. 2 **I. ....................2
C. ............................... 1 J. .........................2
D. ..................... 1 K. M420 S ..................4
1
3
4
4-1
Procedure 1.Pull out the right cassette (1) and the left 3.Pull out the lower paper cassette (4) from
Before starting installation, be sure to turn the cassette (2) from the paper feeder (A). the machine.
main power switch of the machine off, and Remove the lift plate stopper (3) from each 4.Remove the paper cassette (4-1).
unplug the power plug from the wall outlet. cassette and attach it to the storage location.
2.Gently close each cassette.
Procdure 1.Sortez le magasin droit (1) et le magasin 3.Sortez le magasin de papier infrieur (4) de
Avant de commencer l'installation, s'assurer de gauche (2) du chargeur de papier (A). la machine.
mettre la machine hors tension et de Retirez la bute de la plaque de levage (3) 4.Retirez le magasin de papier (4-1).
dbrancher la fiche d'alimentation de la prise de chaque magasin et fixez-la dans
murale. l'emplacement de stockage.
2.Refermer progressivement chaque tiroir.
Procedimiento 1.Extraiga el depsito derecho (1) y el 3.Extraiga el depsito inferior (4) de la

Antes de iniciar la instalacin, asegrese de depsito izquierdo (2) del depsito de papel mquina.
apagar el interruptor de encendido de la (A). Quite el tope de placa de elevacin (3) 4.Quite el depsito de papel (4-1).
mquina y desenchufar el cable de alimentacin de cada depsito y pngalo en el espacio
de la toma de pared. reservado para guardarlo.
2.Cierre suavemente cada bandeja.
Verfahren 1.Ziehen Sie die rechte Kassette (1) und die 3.Ziehen Sie die untere Kassette (4) aus dem
Bevor Sie mit der Installation beginnen berzeu- linke Kassette (2) aus dem Papiereinzug (A) Gert heraus.
gen Sie sich, dass der Netzschalter des Gerts heraus. Entfernen Sie die Verriegelung des 4.Nehmen Sie die Papierkassette (4-1) her-
ausgeschaltet und das Stromkabel aus der Papierlifts (3) aus jeder Kassette und setzen aus.
Steckdose gezogen ist. Sie die Verriegelung in die Parkposition ein.
2.Alle Kassetten sachte schlieen.
Procedura 1.Estrarre il cassetto destro (1) e il cassetto 3.Estrarre il cassetto carta inferiore (4) dalla
Prima di iniziare l'installazione, spegnere la sinistro (2) dall'unit di alimentazione carta macchina.
macchina e scollegare la spina dalla presa di (A). Rimuovere il fermo della piastra di solle- 4.Nehmen Sie die Papierkassette (4-1) her-
corrente. vamento (3) da ogni cassetto e fissarlo sulla aus.
posizione a riposo.
2.Chiudere delicatamente ciascun cassetto.
1. (A) (1) 3. (4)

(2) 1 4. (4-1)
(3)
2.
1. (A) (1) 3. (4) .

(2) . (3) 4. (4-1) .
1 .
. 2. .
1.(A) (1) 3. (4)

OFF
(2) 4. (4-1)
(3) 1

2.
2
4-1
B
6
7
6
4-2
5 9
5 7
4
A A
5.Place the machine (7) on the paper feeder 6.Secure the machine (7) to the paper feeder 7.Align the holes (8) of the lower cassette (4-1)
(A) so that the pins (5) at the front left and (A) with the 2 pins (B). for the machine with the pins (9) in the cas-
front right of the paper feeder (A) are aligned sette slider (4-2). Put the paper cassette (4-
with the holes (6) in the base of the machine. 1).
8.Push the lower paper cassette (4) in fully.
5.Monter la machine (7) sur le chargeur de 6.Fixer la machine (7) au chargeur de papier 7.Alignez les trous (8) du magasin infrieur (4-
papier (A) de sorte que les broches (5) (A) avec les 2 broches (B). 1) pour la machine avec les ergots (9) dans
l'avant gauche et l'avant droit du chargeur le tiroir du magasin (4-2). Placez le magasin
de papier (A) soient aligns avec les trous de papier (4-1).
(6) dans la base du machine. 8.Enfoncez fond le magasin de papier infri-
eur (4).
5.Coloque la mquina (7) sobre el depsito de 6.Fije la mquina (7) al depsito de papel (A) 7. Alinee los orificios (8) del depsito inferior (4-1)
papel (A) de forma que los pasadores (5) en con los dos pasadores (B). de la mquina con los pasadores (9) del desl-
los lados frontales izquierdo y derecho del izador del depsito (4-2). Coloque el depsito
depsito de papel (A) estn alineados con de papel (4-1).
los orificios (6) de la base de la mquina. 8. Ejerza presin sobre el depsito de papel infe-
rior (4) hasta introducirlo por completo.
5.Setzen Sie das Gert (7) so auf den 6.Sichern Sie das Gert (7) mit den 2 Stiften 7. Richten Sie die Lcher (8) der Kassette (4-1)
Papiereinzug (A), dass die Stifte (5) vorne (B) am Papiereinzug (A). des Gerts mit den Stiften (9) im Kassettenan-
links und vorne rechts am Papiereinzug (A) schlag (4-2) aus. Setzen Sie die Papierkassette
auf die ffnungen (6) im Boden des Gerts (4-1) wieder ein.
ausgerichtet sind. 8. Schieben Sie die Papierkassette (4) bis zum
Anschlag ein.
5.Posizionare la macchina (7) sull'alimentatore 6.Fissare la macchina (7) sull'alimentatore 7.Allineare i fori (8) del cassetto inferiore (4-1)
carta (A) in modo che i perni (5) sul lato carta (A) con i 2 perni (B). per la macchina con perni (9) della guida
destro e sinistro anteriore dell'alimentatore cassetto (4-2). Inserire il cassetto carta (4-
carta (A) siano allineati con i fori (6) presenti 1).
sulla base della macchina. 8.Spingere il cassetto carta inferiore (4) fino in
fondo.
5. (A) (5) 6. 2 (B) (7) 7. (4-1) (8)

(6) (A) (4-2) (9) (4-
(7) (A) 1)
8. (4)
5. (A) 6. (B) 2 (7) (A) 7. (4-1) (8)

(5) (6) . (4-2) (9) .
(7) (A) (4-1) .
. 8. (4)
.
5.(A) 6. (B)2 (7) 7. (4-1) (8)

(5) (6) (A) (4-2) (9)
(A) (4-1)
(7) 8. (4)
3
14
12
15
10
13 H(M4x8)
C
11
9.Remove the screw (10) in the rear of the 10.Remove the screw (12) to remove the metal 11.Fit the hook (14) on the mounting plate (C)
paper feeder and remove the cover (11). plate (13). into the opening (15) and then align the 2
positioning projections.
12.Secure the mounting plate (C) with the S Tite
screw M4 8 (H).
9.Dposer la vis (10) l'arrire du chargeur de 10.Dposer la vis (12) pour enlever la plaque 11.Insrer le crochet (14) du p5ateau de mon-
papier et dposer le couvercle (11). mtallique (13). tage (C) dans l'ouverture (15) et aligner les 2
saillies de positionnement.
12.Fixer le plateau de montage (C) avec la vis S
Tite M4 8 (H).
9.Quite el tornillo (10) del lado trasero del 10.Quite el tornillo (12) para desmontar la placa 11.Coloque el gancho (14) de la placa de mon-
depsito de papel y quite la cubierta (11). de metal (13). taje (C) en la abertura (15) y, despus,
alinee los 2 resaltos de posicin.
12.Asegure la placa de montaje (C) con el tor-
nillo S Tite M4 x 8 (H).
9.Die Schraube (10) an der Rckseite des 10.Die Schraube (12) herausdrehen, um die 11.Den Haken (14) auf der Montageplatte (C) in
Papiereinzugs entfernen und die Abdeckung Metallplatte (13) abzunehmen. die ffnung (15) einpassen und dann die 2
(11) abnehmen. Positionierungsnasen ausrichten.
12.Die Montageplatte (C) mit der S-Tite-
Schraube M4 x 8 verwenden (H) befestigen.
9.Rimuovere la vite (10) nel retro dell'unit di 10.Rimuovere la vite (12), per rimuovere la 11.Inserire il gancio (14) sulla piastra di mon-
alimentazione della carta e quindi rimuovere piastra di metallo (13). taggio (C) nell'apertura (15) e quindi
il coperchio (11). allineare le 2 sporgenze di posizionamento.
12.Fissare la piastra di montaggio (C) con la
vite S Tite M48 (H).
9. 1 (10) 10. 1 (12) (13) 11. (C) (14) (15)

(11) 2
12. 1 S M48 (H)
(C)
9. (10) 1 10. (12) 1 (13) 11. (C) (14) (15)

(11) . . 2 .
12. M48 S (H) 1 (C)
.
9. (10)1 10. (12)1 (13) 11. (C) (14) (15)

(11) 2

12. M48 S (H)1 (C)

4
23
26
22 21 25
17 19
20
16 24
18
13.Pass the power cord (16) through the edging 14.Connect the power cord (20) and the signal 16.Open the lower right cover (24) on the
(small) (17) and the signal cable (18) cable (21) to connectors (22) (23) respec- machine.
through the edging (large) (19) and then tively on the machine. Remove the strap (25) from the shaft (26)
close the edging 15. Replace the cover (11) using the screw (10) and remove lower right cover (24).
removed in step 9.
13.Faire passer le cordon d'alimentation (16) 14.Raccorder respectivement le cordon d'ali- 16.Ouvrir le capot infrieur droit (24) de la
dans le (petit) passage (17) et le cble du mentation (20) et le cble de signal (21) aux machine.
signal (18) dans le (grand) passage (19) puis connecteurs (22) (23) de la machine. Dposer la courroie (25) de l'arbre (26) et
fermer le passage. 15. Reposer le couvercle (11) l'aide de la vis dposer le couvercle infrieur droit (24).
(10) dpose l'tape 9.
13.Pase el cable de alimentacin (16) a travs 14.Conecte el cable de alimentacin (20) y el 16.Abra la cubierta derecha inferior (24) de la
de la pestaa (pequea) (17) y el cable de cable de seal (21) a los conectores (22) mquina.
seales (18) a travs de la pestaa (grande) (23) respectivamente de la mquina. Quite la correa (25) del eje (26) y quite la
(19) y, despus, cierre la pestaa. 15.Vuelva a colocar la cubierta (11) usando el cubierta frontal inferior (24).
tornillo (10) quitado en el paso 9.
13.Das Netzkabel (16) durch den Kantenschutz 14.Schlieen Sie das Netzkabel (20) und das 16.ffnen Sie die untere rechte Abdeckung (24)
(klein) (17) und das Signalkabel (18) durch Signalkabel (21) an den entsprechenden des Gerts.
den Kantenschutz (gro) (19) fhren und Steckverbindern (22) (23) des Gerts an. Den Riemen (25) von der Welle (26)
dann den Kantenschutz schlieen. 15.Die Abdeckung (11) mittels der in Schritt 9 abnehmen und dann die untere rechte
entfernten Schraube (10) wieder anbringen. Abdeckung (24) abnehmen.
13.Passare il cavo di alimentazione (16) attra- 14.Collegare il cavo di alimentazione (20) e il 16.Aprire il pannello destro inferiore (24) sulla
verso il bordo (piccolo) (17) e il cavo del seg- cavo del segnale (21) ai connettori della macchina.
nale (18) attraverso il bordo (grande) (19), e macchina (22) e (23), rispettivamente. Rimuovere la cinghietta (25) dall'asta (26) e
quindi chiudere il bordo. 15.Ricollocare il coperchio (11) utilizzando la quindi rimuovere il pannello destro inferiore
vite (10) rimossa nel passo 9. (24).
13. AC (16) (17) 14. AC (20) (21) 16. (24)

(18) (19) (22)(23) (25) (26)
15. 9 1 (10) (24)
(11)
13.AC (16) (17) , 14. (20) (21) 16. (24) .

(18) (19) (22), (23) . (25) (26)
. 15. 9 (10) 1 (24) .
(11) .
13.AC (16) (17) 14.AC (20) (21) 16.(24)

(18) (19) (22)(23) (25) (26)
15. 9 (10)1 (24)
(11)
5
28 D 28
H(M4x8)
27 29 29
H(M4x8)
17.Open the paper feeder right cover (27). 18.Fit the 3 hooks (28) on the intermediate paper conveying unit (D) into the 3 holes (29) in the
guide.
19.Secure the intermediate paper conveying unit (D) with the 2 S Tite screw M4 8 (H).
NOTICE
Be sure to use S Tite screw M4 8.
Using longer screws, such as S Tite screws M4 20, may damage wires.
17.Ouvrir le couvercle droit du chargeur de 18.Insrer les 3 crochets (28) de l'unit de transport du papier intermdiaire (D) dans les 3 trous (29)
papier (27). du guide.
19.Fixer l'unite de transport du papier intermediaire (D) a l'aide des 2 Vis S Tite M4 8 (H).
REMARQUE
S'assurer d'utiliser la vis S Tite M4 8.
L'utilisation de vis plus longues, comme les vis S Tite M4 20, peut endommager les fils.
17.Abra la cubierta derecha del depsito de 18.Coloque los 3 ganchos (28) de la unidad de transporte de papel intermedia (D) en los 3 orificios
papel (27). (29) de la gua.
19.Asegure la unidad de transporte de papel intermedia (D) con los 2 Tornillo S Tite M4 8 (H).
AVISO
Asegrese de usar tornillos S Tite M4 x 8.
El uso de tornillos ms largos, como tornillos S Tite M4 x 20, puede daar los cables.
17.Die rechte Abdeckung (27) des Papiere- 18.Die 3 Haken (28) an der eingesetzten Papierfrdereinheit (D) in die 3 ffnungen (29) in der Fh-
inzugs ffnen. rung einpassen.
19.Die eingesetzte Papierfordereinheit (D) mit den 2 S-Tite-Schraube M4 8 (H) sichern.
ANMERKUNG
Stellen Sie sicher, dass Sie die S-Tite-Schraube M4 x 8 verwenden.
Die Verwendung von lngeren Schrauben als den S-Tite-Schrauben M4 x 20 kann Kabel besch-
digen.
17.Aprire il pannello destro (27) dell'unit di ali- 18.Inserire i 3 ganci (28) sull'unit intermediale di trasporto carta (D) nei 3 fori (29) nella guida.
mentazione della carta. 19.Fissare l'unita intermediale di trasporto carta (D) con le 2 Vite S Tite M4 8 (H).
AVVISO
Utilizzare solo la vite S Tite M4 8.
Se si utilizzano viti pi lunghe, come le viti S Tite M4 20, si possono danneggiare i fili.
17. (27) 18. (D) 3 (28) 3 (29)

19. 2 S M48(H) (D)

S M48
( S M420 )
17. (27) . 18. (D) (28) 3 (29) 3 .

19. M48 S (H) 2 (D) .

M48 S .
( : M420 S ) .
17.(27) 18. (D) (28)3 (29)3

19. M48 S (H)2 (D)

M48 S
(M420 S )
6
30
F
31 33
32
20.Connect the intermediate paper conveying 22.Insert the projection (31) on the wire cover 24.Turn the adjusters on each corner (33) until
unit connector (30). (F) into the hole (32) in the paper feeder and they reach the floor and then secure the
21.Attach the clamp (E) and secure the connec- install the wire cover (F). paper feeder.
tor wire. 23.Close the paper feeder right cover (27) and
replace the lower right cover (24) on the
machine.
20.Raccorder le connecteur (30) de l'unit de 22.Insrer la saillie (31) du couvercle du cble 24.Faire tourner les dispositifs de rglage de
transport du papier intermdiaire. (F) dans le trou (32) du chargeur de papier chacun des coins (33) jusqu' ce qu'ils
21.Monter le collier (E) et fixer le cble du con- et reposer le couvercle du cble (F). touchent le sol et fixer ensuite le chargeur de
necteur. 23.Fermer le couvercle droit du chargeur de papier.
papier (27) et reposer le capot infrieur droit
(24) sur la machine.
20.Conecte el conector de la unidad de trans- 22.Inserte el resalto (31) de la cubierta para el 24.Gire los reguladores en cada esquina (33)
porte de papel intermedia (30). cable (F) en el orificio (32) del depsito de hasta que lleguen al piso y, a continuacin,
21.Fije el sujetador (E) y asegure el cable del papel e instale la cubierta para el cable (F). asegure el depsito de papel.
conector. 23.Cierre la cubierta derecha del depsito de
papel (27) y vuelva a colocar la cubierta
derecha inferior (24) en la mquina.
20.Den Steckverbinder (30) der eingesetzten 22.Die Nase (31) der Kabelabdeckung (F) in die 24.Die Einsteller an jeder Ecke (33) drehen, bis
Papierfrdereinheit anschlieen. ffnung (32) des Papiereinzugs einsetzen sie den Boden berhren, und dann den
21.Die Klemme (E) anbringen und das Kabel und die Kabelabdeckung (F) anbringen. Papiereinzug sichern.
des Steckverbinders sichern. 23.Schlieen Sie die rechte Abdeckung (27)
des Papiereinzugs und setzen Sie die untere
rechte Abdeckung (24) wieder im Gert ein.
20.Collegare il connettore (30) dell'unit inter- 22.Inserire la sporgenza (31) del coperchio cavi 24.Ruotare i regolatori (33) presenti su ciascun
mediale di trasporto carta. (F) nel foro (32) nell'unit di alimentazione angolo finch vengano a contatto con il pavi-
21.Applicare il morsetto (E) e fissare il cavo del della carta ed installare il coperchio cavi (F). mento, e quindi fissare lunit di alimentazi-
connettore. 23.Chiudere il pannello destro (27) dell'alimen- one della carta.
tatore carta e rimontare il pannello destro
inferiore (24) sulla macchina.
20. (30) 22. (F) (31) 24. (33)

21. (E) (32) (F)
23. (27)
(24)
20. (30) 22. (F) (31) 24. (33)

. (32) (F) . .
21. (E) , 23. (27)
. (24) .
20.(30) 22.(F) (31) 24.(33)

(32)

21. (E)
(F)
23.(27)
(24)

7
34
K (M4x20) 34 34
J
K (M4x20) 34
J
25.Select holes (34) and install each stopper (J) with 2 S Tite screws M4 20 (K) so that the stoppers will be grounded on the floor.
25.Slectionner les trous (34) et installer chaque bute (J) avec 2 vis S Tite M4 20 (K) de sorte que les butes reposent sur le sol.
25.Seleccione los orificios (34) e instale cada tope (J) con los 2 tornillos S Tite M4 20 (K) de manera que los topes se conecten a tierra en el suelo.
25.Whlen Sie die ffnungen (34) und befestigen Sie jeden Anschlag (J) mit den 2 S-Tite-Schrauben M4 20 (K) so an, dass die Anschlge am Boden
aufsitzen.
25.Selezionare i fori (34) ed installare ogni fermo (J) con le 2 viti S Tite M4 20 (K) in modo che i fermi siano posti a terra sul pavimento.
25.34 2 M420 S KJ
25. (J) 34 M420 S (K) 2 .
25. (J) 34 M420 S (K) 2
8
I 36
G
35
36
Setting the paper size plate and media type Changing paper size (metric specifications 1.Pull out the cassette of the paper feeder.
plate only) 2.Turn the front lock lever (35) 90 and remove
Insert the paper size plate (G) and media type At shipment, Letter is set for inch models and A4 the front deck cursor (36).
plate (I) into the each slots respectively. is set for metric models. Use the procedure
below to change the size to B5.
Disposition des plaquettes du format de Modification du format du papier (pour 1.Tirer le magasin du chargeur de papier vers
papier et du type de support spcifications mtriques seulement) soi.
Introduire la plaquette du format de papier (G) et expdition, les modles mesure en pouces 2.Faire tourner le levier de verrouillage avant
la plaquette du type de support (I) dans leur sont rgls sur le format Letter et les modles (35) de 90 et dposer le curseur de platine
logement respectif. mesure mtrique sur le format A4. Pour passer avant (36).
au format B5, procder de la manire suivante.
Ajuste de la placa de tamao de papel y la Cmo cambiar el tamao de papel (slo para 1.Abra el casete del depsito de papel.
placa de tipo de medio las especificaciones mtricas) 2.Gire la palanca de bloqueo frontal (35) 90 y
Inserte la placa de tamao de papel (G) y la En el momento de salida de fbrica, se config- quite el cursor frontal de la plataforma (36).
placa de tipo de medio (I) en cada uno de las ura Carta para los modelos en pulgadas y A4
ranuras, respectivamente. para los modelos en sistema mtrico. Siga este
procedimiento para cambiar el tamao a B5.
Einsetzen der Papierformatkarte und der ndern des Papierformats (nur metrische Spe- 1.Ziehen Sie die Papierlade aus dem Papiere-
Medientypkarte zifikationen) inzug.
Setzen Sie die Papierformatkarte (G) und die Beim Werksversand ist bei Modellen mit Zollma 2.Den vorderen Verriegelungshebel (35) um
Medientypkarte (I) in die jeweiligen Fhrungen. das Format Letter voreingestellt und bei Modellen 90 drehen und den vorderen Konsole-Cur-
mit metrischem Ma das Format A4. sor (36) abnehmen.
Das Format kann wie folgend auf B5 umge-
schaltet werden.
Impostazione della piastra di formato carta e Cambio del formato della carta (solo per le 1.Estrarre il cassetto dellunit di alimentatore
della piastra del tipo di supporto specifiche metriche) della carta.
Inserire la piastra del formato carta (G) e la pias- Al momento della spedizione, Letter impostato 2.Ruotare la leva frontale di blocco (35) di 90
tra del tipo di supporto (I) nei rispettivi alloggia- per le specifiche in pollici e A4 impostato per e rimuovere il cursore frontale del deck (36).
menti. le specifiche metriche. Usare la procedura
riportata sotto per cambiare il formato a B5.
1.
G) I) Letter 2. (35) 90
A4 B5 36

1. .
(G) , Letter, A4 2. (35) 90
(I) . . B5 36 .
.
1.
(G) Letter A4 2. (35) 90

(I) B5
36

9
39 40
37
41
38
36
35 40
3.Move the front deck cursor (36) so that it is aligned with the size indicators on the top (38) and 6.Release the hook (40) and remove the deck
bottom (37) of the cassette. trailing edge cursor (41).
4.Turn the front lock lever (35) 90 to lock it.
5.Move the rear deck cursor (39) in the same way.
3.Dplacer le curseur de platine avant (36) de sorte qu'il soit align avec les indicateurs de format 6.Librer le crochet (40) et dposer le curseur
en haut (38) et en bas (37) du tiroir. du bord arrire de la platine (41).
4.Faire tourner le levier de verrouillage avant (35) de 90 pour le verrouiller.
5.Dplacer le curseur de platine arrire (39) en procdant de la mme manire.
3.Mueva el cursor frontal de la plataforma (36) para que quede alineado con las indicadores de 6.Libere el gancho (40) y quite el cursor del
tamao de la parte superior (38) e inferior (37) del cajn. borde inferior de la plataforma (41).
4.Gire la palanca de bloqueo frontal (35) 90 para bloquearla.
5.Mueva el cursor trasero de la plataforma (39) de la misma forma.
3.Den vorderen Konsole-Cursor (36) so verschieben, dass er mit den Formatanzeigen oben (38) 6.Den Haken (40) lsen und den Hinterkante-
und unten (37) an der Kassette fluchtet. Cursor (41) der Konsole abnehmen.
4.Den vorderen Verriegelungshebel (35) zum Verriegeln um 90 drehen.
5.Den hinteren Konsole-Cursor (39) auf gleiche Weise verschieben.
3.Spostare il cursore frontale del deck (36) in modo che esso risulti allineato con gli indicatori di for- 6.Rilasciare il gancio (40) e rimuovere il cur-
mato sulla parte superiore (38) e inferiore (37) del cassetto. sore del bordo di uscita del deck (41).
4.Ruotare la leva frontale di blocco (35) di 90, per bloccarla.
5.Spostare il cursore posteriore del deck (39) allo stesso modo.
3. (36) (37) (38) 6. 40 (41)

4. (35) 90
5. (39)
3. (37) (38) (36) 6.40 (41)

. .
4. (35) 90 .
5. (39) .
3. (37) (38) 6. 40
(36) (41)
4. (35) 90
5. (39)
10
44 42
39
45
0.51.5mm
41
43 36
7.Lift up the sub-cursor (42). Adjusting the cursor width

8.Align with the size indicator (43), engage the 1.Load paper in the cassettes.
hook (44) and install the deck trailing edge 2.If the gap between the front deck cursor (36) and the paper (45) is outside the 0.5 to 1.5 mm
cursor (41). range when the paper (45) is touching up against the rear deck cursor (39), perform the following
adjustment.
* A cursor width that is too small can hinder paper feeding, while a cursor width that is too large
can lead to problems such as skewed paper feed.
7.Lever le curseur secondaire (42). Rglage de la largeur du curseur

8.Aligner avec l'indicateur de format (43), 1.Charger les tiroirs en papier.
engager le crochet (44) et reposer le curseur 2.Si l'cartement entre le curseur de platine avant (36) et le papier (45) est hors des limites de 0,5
du bord arrire de la platine (41). 1,5 mm quand le papier (45) touche le curseur de platine arrire (39), procder au rglage sui-
vant.
* Une largeur trop faible du curseur risque d'empcher l'entranement du papier et une largeur
trop grande risque d'entraner des problmes du type entranement du papier de biais.
7.Levante el cursor secundario (42). Cmo ajustar la anchura del cursor

8.Alinee con el indicador de tamao (43), 1.Cargue papel en los cajones.
enganche el gancho (44) e instale el cursor 2.Si la separacin entre el cursor frontal de la plataforma (36) y el papel (45) est fuera del rango de
del borde inferior de la plataforma. (41). 0,5 a 1,5 mm cuando el papel (45) toca el cursor trasero de la plataforma (39), haga el siguiente
ajuste.
* Una anchura del cursor demasiado pequea puede impedir la alimentacin de papel; una anchura
del cursor demasiado grande puede provocar problemas con la alimentacin torcida de papel.
7.Den Unter-Cursor (42) anheben. Einstellen der Cursor-Breite

8.Auf die Formatanzeige (43) ausrichten, den 1.Papier in die Papierladen einlegen.
Haken (44) einsetzen und den Hinterkante- 2.Falls der Abstand zwischen dem vorderen Konsole-Cursor (36) und dem Papier (45) auerhalb
Cursor (41) der Konsole anbringen. des Bereichs 0,5 bis 1,5 mm liegt, wenn das Papier (45) am hinteren Konsole-Cursor (39) anliegt,
* Eine zu kleine Cursor-Breite kann den Papiereinzug behindern, wogegen eine zu groe Cursor-
Breite verkanteten Papiereinzug und hnliche Probleme verursachen kann.
7.Sollevare il cursore secondario (42). Regolazione della larghezza del cursore

8.Allineare con l'indicatore formato (43), fis- 1. Caricare carta nei cassetti.
sare il gancio (44) e installare il cursore del 2. Se lo spazio tra il cursore frontale del deck (36) e la carta (45) fuori della gamma da 0,5 a 1,5 mm
bordo di uscita del deck (41). quando la carta (45) tocca il cursore postertiore del deck (39), eseguire la regolazione seguente.
* Una larghezza dei cursori troppo piccola pu ostacolare l'alimentazione della carta, mentre unalar-
ghezza dei cursori troppo grande pu essere causa di problemi, come ad esempio l'alimentazione obbli-
qua della carta.
7. (42)
8. (43) 44 1.
(41) 2. (39) (45) (36) (45)
0.5 1.5mm

7. (42) .
8. (43) 44 1. .
(41) . 2. (39) (45) (36) (45)
0.5 1.5mm .
, .
7. (42)
8. (43)
44 1.
(41) 2. (39) (45) (36) (45)
0.5 1.5mm

11
47
36
36
46
3.Insert a Philips-head screwdriver into the 2 long slots (46) in the front deck cursor (36) and loosen 4.Retighten the 2 adjusting screws (47).
the 2 adjusting screws (47). Then move the front deck cursor (36). 5.Check that the gap between the front deck
cursor (36) and the paper is between 0.5
and 1.5 mm.
3.Insrer un tournevis cruciforme dans les 2 longues fentes (46) du curseur de platine avant (36) et 4.Resserrer les 2 vis de rglage (47).
desserrer les 2 vis de rglage (47). Dplacer ensuite le curseur de platine avant (36). 5.Vrifier que l'cartement entre le curseur de
platine avant (36) et le papier est entre 0,5 et
1,5 mm.
3.Inserte un destornillador de cabeza Philips en las dos ranuras largas (46) en el cursor frontal de 4.Vuelva a apretar los 2 tornillos de ajuste
la plataforma (36) y afloje los 2 tornillos de ajuste (47). Despus, mueva el cursor frontal de la (47).
plataforma (36). 5.Verifique que la separacin entre el cursor
frontal de la plataforma (36) y el papel sea
de entre 0,5 y 1,5 mm.
3.Einen Kreuzschlitzschraubendreher in die 2 langen ffnungen (46) im vorderen Konsole-Cursor 4.Die 2 Einstellschrauben (47) wieder anzie-
(36) stecken und die 2 Einstellschrauben (47) lsen. Danach den vorderen Konsole-Cursor (36) hen.
verschieben. 5.Vergewissern Sie sich, dass der Abstand
zwischen dem vorderen Konsole-Cursor
(36) und dem Papier im Bereich 0,5 bis 1,5
mm liegt.
3.Inserire un cacciavite con testa a croce tipo Philips nelle 2 fessure lunghe (46) nel cursore fron- 4.Ristringere le 2 viti di regolazione (47).
tale del deck (36) e allentare le 2 viti di regolazione (47). Quindi spostare il cursore frontale del 5.Controllare che lo spazio tra il cursore fron-
deck (36). tale del deck (36) e la carta sia compreso
nella gamma tra 0,5 e 1,5 mm.
3. (36) 2 (46) 2 (47) 4. 2 (47)

(36) 5. (36)
0.5 1.5mm
3. (36) 2 (46) (47) 2 4. (47) 2 .

(46) . 5. (36) 0.5 1.5
mm .
3. (36) 2 (46) (47)2 4. (47)2

(36) 5. (36) 0.5
1.5mm

12
b
a c d
Adjusting the center line

The reference value for the center line is 0.5 mm or less at position (b) in the correct image (a). If the center line position is outside this range, perform
the following adjustment.
1.Set maintenance mode U034, select LSU Out Left and Cassette3 or Cassette4.
2.Adjust the values.
Test pattern (c): Increase the setting value. Test pattern (d): Decrease the setting value.
3.Press the Start key to confirm the setting value.
Rglage de l'axe
La valeur de rfrence pour l'axe est de 0,5 mm ou moins la position (b) d'une image correcte (a). Si la position de l'axe est hors de cette plage,
effectuez le rglage suivant.
1.Passer en mode maintenance U034, slectionner LSU Out Left et Cassette3 ou Cassette4.
2.Rgler les valeurs.
Mire d' essai (c): Augmentez la valeur de rglage. Mire d' essai (d): Diminuez la valeur de rglage.
3.Appuyer sur la touche de Start pour confirmer la valeur de rglage.
Ajuste de la lnea central

El valor de referencia de la lnea central es de 0,5 mm o menor, en la posicin (b) de la imagen correcta (a). Si la posicin de la lnea central estuviera
fuera de este rango, haga el siguiente ajuste.
1.Entre al modo de mantenimiento U034, seleccione LSU Out Left y Cassette3 o Cassette4.
2.Ajuste los valores.
Patrn de prueba (c): Aumente el valor de configuracin. Patrn de prueba (d): Reduzca el valor de configuracin.
3.Pulse la tecla de Start para confirmar el valor de configuracin.
Einstellen der Mittenlinie

Der Bezugswert fr die Mittenlinie ist 0,5 mm oder weniger an Position (b) des korrekten Bilds (a). Falls die Mittenlinie auerhalb dieses Bereichs liegt,
1.Schalten Sie in den Wartungsmodus U034, whlen Sie LSU Out Left und Cassette3 oder Cassette4.
2.Die Werte einstellen.
Testmuster (c): Den Einstellwert erhhen. Testmuster (d): Den Einstellwert verringern.
3.Den Einstellwert durch Drcken der Start-Taste besttigen.
Regolazione della linea centrale

Il valore di riferimento per la linea centrale 0,5 mm o inferiore alla posizione (b) nell'immagine corretta (a). Se la posizione della linea centrale all'infu-
ori di questa gamma, effettuare la regolazione seguente.
1.Impostare la modalit manutenzione U034, selezionare LSU Out Left e Cassette3 o Cassette4.
2.Regolare i valori.
Modello di prova (c): Aumentare il valore dell'impostazione. Modello di prova (d): Diminuire il valore dell'impostazione.
3.Premere il tasto di Start per confermare il valore dell'impostazione.
(a) (b) 0.5mm

2.
(c) (d)
3. Start

(a) (b) 0.5mm . .
1. U034 LSU Out Left, Cassette3 Cassette4 .
2. .
(c) . (d) .
3. .
(a) (b) 0.5mm

2.
(c) (d)
3.
13
SIDE DECK
English
References to medium-speed MFPs in this document denote 30/30, 35/35, 45/45 and 55/50 ppm color machines, and 35, 45 and 55 ppm monochrome
machines.
References to high-speed MFPs in this document denote 65/65 and 75/70 ppm color machines, and 65 and 80 ppm monochrome machines.
Franais
Dans le prsent document, les rfrences aux MFP vitesse moyenne renvoient aux machines couleurs 30/30, 35/35, 45/45 et 55/50 ppm et aux
machines monochromes 35, 45 et 55 ppm.
Dans le prsent document, les rfrences aux MFP grande vitesse renvoient aux machines couleurs 65/65 et 75/70 ppm et aux machines mono-
chromes 65 et 80 ppm.
Espaol
Las referencias a las MFP de velocidad media de este documento corresponden a las mquinas a color de 30/30, 35/35, 45/45 y 55/50 ppm y a las
mquinas monocromticas de 35, 45 y 55 ppm.
Las referencias a las MFP de alta velocidad de este documento corresponden a las mquinas a color de 65/65 y 75/70 ppm y a las mquinas mono-
cromticas de 65 y 80 ppm.
Deutsch
Angaben fr MFP der mittleren Leistungsklasse in dieser Anleitung gelten fr die 30/30, 35/35, 45/45 und 55/50 ppm Vollfarbenkopierer sowie fr die 35,
45 und 55 ppm Monochrommaschinen.
Angaben fr MFP der Hochleistungsklasse in dieser Anleitung gelten fr die 65/65 und 75/70 ppm Vollfarbenkopierer sowie fr die 65 und 80 ppm Mono-
chrommaschinen.
Italiano
I riferimenti per le MFP a velocit media riportati in questo documento indicano le macchine a colori 30/30, 35/35, 45/45 e 55/50 ppm, e le macchine
monocromatiche 35, 45 e 55 ppm.
I riferimenti per le MFP a velocit alta riportati in questo documento indicano le macchine a colori 65/65 e 75/70 ppm, e le macchine monocromatiche 65
e 80 ppm.

MFP 30/30 35/35 45/45 55/50 35 45 55
MFP 65/65 75/70 65 80

MFP 30/30 , 35/35 , 45/45 , 55/50 , 35 , 45 , 55 .
MFP 65/65 , 75/70 , 65 , 80 .

MFP 30/30 35/35 45/45 55/50 35 45 55
MFP 65/65 75/70 65 80
B E G I
A D F H J K
C
Supplied parts G. Paper size plate ......................................... 2 Be sure to remove any tape and/or cushioning
A. Side feeder ................................................ 1 H. Media type plate(except for 120V model) .. 6 material from supplied parts.
B. Large base slider ....................................... 1 H. Media type plate(120V model only) ........... 3
C. Small base slider ....................................... 1 I. Cover plate ................................................ 1
D. Lock pin ..................................................... 2 J. M4 10 tapping screw............................... 1
E. Switch press plate ..................................... 1 K. Film ............................................................ 1
F. M4 8 screw ............................................. 8
Pices fournies G. Plaquette du format de papier ................... 2 Veillez retirer les morceaux de bande adh-
A. Plateau d'alimentation latral..................... 1 H. Plaquette du type de support..................... 6 sive et/ou les matriaux de rembourrage des
B. Grande rgle de base................................ 1 I. Capot ......................................................... 1 pices fournies.
C. Petite rgle de base................................... 1 J. Vis de connexion M4 10 ......................... 1
D. Broche de verrouillage............................... 2 K. Film ..................................................................... 1
E. Plaque de pression de l'interrupteur .......... 1
F. Vis M4 8.................................................. 8
Partes suministradas G. Placa de tamao de papel ......................... 2 Asegrese de despegar todas las cintas y/o
A. Alimentador lateral..................................... 1 H. Placa de tipo de medio .............................. 6 material amortiguador de las partes suministra-
B. Deslizador de base grande........................ 1 I. Tapa ........................................................... 1 das.
C. Deslizador de base pequeo..................... 1 J. Tornillo de roscado M4 10 ...................... 1
D. Clavija de bloqueo ..................................... 2 K. Pelcula .......................................................... 1
E. Placa de presin del interruptor................. 1
F. Tornillo M4 8 ........................................... 8
Gelieferte Teile G. Papierformatkarte ...................................... 2 Entfernen Sie Klebeband und/oder Dmpfungs-

A. Seitlicher Einzug........................................ 1 H. Medientypkarte .......................................... 6 material vollstndig von den mitgelieferten
B. Groer Basis-Schieber .............................. 1 I. Abdeckplatte .............................................. 1 Teilen.
C. Kleiner Basis-Schieber .............................. 1 J. M4 10 Schneidschraube......................... 1
D. Arretierstift ................................................. 2 K. Film ..................................................................1
E. Schalterdruckplatte.................................... 1
F. M4 8 Schraube ....................................... 8
Parti di fornitura G. Piastra formato carta ................................. 2 Accertarsi di rimuovere tutti i nastri adesivi e/o il
A. Unit di alimentazione laterale................... 1 H. Piastra tipo carta........................................ 6 materiale di imbottitura dalle parti fornite.
B. Scivolo di base grande .............................. 1 I. Coperchio .................................................. 1
C. Scivolo di base piccolo .............................. 1 J. Vite autofilettante M4 10 ......................... 1
D. Perno di bloccaggio ................................... 2 K. Pellicola ..................................................... 1
E. Piastra spingi interruttore........................... 1
F. Vite M4 8 ................................................ 8
F. M48 ............................8
A. ............................. 1 G. .........................2
B. ........................ 1 H. .........................1
C. ........................ 1 I. .................................1
D. ............................. 2 J. M410 .......................1
E. ............................. 1 K. .................................1
F. M48......................................... 8 ,
A. ......................................... 1 G. ............................... 2 .
B. .............................. 1 H. ............................... 1
C. .............................. 1 I. ..................................... 1
D. .............................................. 2 J. M410 ................................ 1
E. ........................................... 1 K. .................................................. 1
G. ...................2
A. ..................... 1 H. .....................1

B. ................... 1 I. .......................1
C. ................... 1 J. M410 .................1
D. ........................... 2 K. .............................1
E. ..................... 1
F. M48 ........................... 8
1
3
2
Procedure Installation on medium-speed MFPs

Be sure to turn the MFP main power switch off If installing on a high-speed MFP, proceed to step 13.
and disconnect the MFP power plug from the 1.Open the lower right cover (1) on the MFP.
wall outlet before starting to install the side Remove the strap (2) from the shaft (3) and remove lower right cover (1).
feeder.
Procdure Montage sur des MFP vitesse moyenne

Veiller bien mettre linterrupteur principal du Si le montage est fait sur un MFP grande vitesse, passer l'tape 13.
MFP hors tension et dbrancher la fiche dali- 1.Ouvrir le couvercle infrieur droit (1) du MFP.
mentation du MFP de la prise murale avant de Dposer la courroie (2) de l'arbre (3) et dposer le couvercle infrieur droit (1).
commencer linstallation du plateau d'alimenta-
tion latral.
Procedimiento Instalacin en las MFP de velocidad media

Asegrese de apagar el interruptor principal del Si se instala en una MFP de alta velocidad, vaya al paso 13.
MFP y de desconectar el enchufe del MFP del 1.Abra la cubierta frontal inferior (1) del MFP.
receptculo de pared antes de empezar a insta- Quite la correa (2) del eje (3) y quite la cubierta frontal inferior (1).
lar el alimentador lateral.
Verfahren Installation an MFP der mittleren Leistungsklasse

Schalten Sie unbedingt den Hauptschalter des Gehen Sie zur Installation an einem MFP der Hochleistungsklasse weiter zu Schritt 13.
MFP aus, und ziehen Sie den Netzstecker des 1.Die untere rechte Abdeckung (1) am MFP ffnen.
MFP von der Netzsteckdose ab, bevor Sie mit Den Riemen (2) von der Welle (3) abnehmen und dann die untere rechte Abdeckung (1)
der Installation des seitlichen Einzugs beginnen. abnehmen.
Procedura Installazione sulle MFP a velocit media

Prima di iniziare la procedura di installazione Se si installa su una MFP a velocit alta, procedere al passo 13.
dellunit di alimentazione laterale, assicurarsi di 1.Aprire il coperchio destro inferiore (1) sull'MFP.
spegnere linterruttore principale di alimentazi- Rimuovere la cinghietta (2) dall'asta (3) e quindi rimuovere il coperchio destro inferiore (1).
one dellMFP, e di scollegare la spina del cavo di
alimentazione dalla presa elettrica a muro.
MFP
MFP MFP 13
1. MFP (1)
(2) (3) (1)
MFP
MFP MFP 13 .
OFF 1.MFP (1) .
. (2) (3) (1) .
MFP
MFP MFP 13
OFF 1.MFP (1)
(2) (3) (1)
2
7
4 8
5 7
5 6
2.Open the MFP paper conveying cover (4). 4.Remove 3 screws (7) and remove the front 5.Remove a screw (9) from the middle right
3.Open the panel (6) on the MFP front right right cover (5). rear cover (8).
cover (5).
2.Ouvrir le capot du transport du papier du 4.Dposer les 3 vis (7) et dposer le capot 5.Dposer la vis (9) du capot arrire droit
MFP (4). avant droit (5). mdian (8).
3.Ouvrir le panneau (6) sur le capot avant droit
du MFP (5).
2.Abra la cubierta de transporte del papel del 4.Quite los 3 tornillos (7) y quite la cubierta 5.Quite el tornillo (9) de la cubierta trasera
MFP (4). delantera derecha (5). central (8).
3.Abra el panel (6) en la cubierta delantera
derecha (5).
2.ffnen Sie die Papierfrderabdeckung (4) 4.Entfernen Sie 3 Schrauben (7) und nehmen 5.Entfernen Sie eine Schraube (9) von der mit-
des MFP. Sie die vordere rechte Abdeckung (5) ab. tleren rechten hinteren Abdeckung (8).
3.ffnen Sie die Platte (6) der vorderen
rechten Abdeckung (5) des MFP.
2.Aprire il coperchio (4) dell'unit di trasporto 4.Rimuovere le 3 viti (7), e quindi rimuovere il 5.Rimuovere la vite (9) dal coperchio posteri-
carta dell'MFP. coperchio destro posteriore (5). ore centrale destro (8).
3.Aprire il pannello (6) sul coperchio destro
anteriore (5) dell'MFP.
2. MFP (4) 4. 3 (7) (5) 5. (8) 1 (9)

3. MFP (5) (6)
2.MFP (4) . 4. (7) 3 (5) 5. (8) (9) 1

3.MFP (5) (6) . .
.
2.MFP (4) 4. (7)3 (5) 5.(8) (9)1

3.MFP (5) (6)

3
8
10 15
12
16
10 11 13 14
6.Remove 3 screws (10), then lift the bottom of 7.Remove the panel (13) from the lower right 8.Open the paper feeder right cover (14).
the middle right rear cover (8) and remove cover (12) on the paper feeder using a flat Remove the strap (15) from the right cover
the lower right rear cover (11). blade screwdriver. shaft (16) and remove the right cover (14).
6.Dposer les 3 vis (10) puis lever le bas du 7.Dposer le panneau (13) du capot infrieur 8.Ouvrir le couvercle droit du bureau papier
capot arrire droit mdian (8) pour dposer droit (12) du bureau papier en procdant (14).
le capot arrire droit infrieur (11). l'aide d'un tournevis lame. Dposer la courroie (15) de l'axe du capot
droit (16) et dposer le capot droit (14).
6.Quite los 3 tornillos (10), luego levante la 7.Quite el panel (13) de la cubierta derecha 8.Abra la cubierta derecha del alimentador de
parte inferior de la cubierta trasera central inferior (12) del alimentador de papel con un papel (14).
derecha (8) y quite la cubierta trasera infe- destornillador de pala plana. Quite la correa (15) del eje de la cubierta
rior derecha (11). derecha (16) y quite la cubierta derecha
(14).
6.Entfernen Sie 3 Schrauben (10), heben Sie 7.Nehmen Sie mit einem flachen Schrauben- 8.Die rechte Abdeckung (14) des Papiere-
die mittlere rechte hintere Abdeckung (8) dreher die Platte (13) von der unteren rech- inzugs ffnen.
von unten her an und nehmen Sie die untere ten Abdeckung (12) des Papiereinzugs ab. Nehmen Sie den Riemen (15) von der Welle
rechte hintere Abdeckung (11) ab. (16) der rechten Abdeckung und dann die
rechte Abdeckung (14) ab.
6.Rimuovere le 3 viti (10), quindi sollevare la 7.Rimuovere il pannello (13) dal coperchio 8.Aprire il coperchio destro (14) dell'unit di
parte in basso del coperchio posteriore cen- destro inferiore (12) sull'unit di alimentazi- alimentazione della carta.
trale destro (8) e rimuovere il coperchio pos- one carta utilizzando un cacciavite a testa Rimuovere la cinghietta (15) dall'asta (16)
teriore inferiore destro (11). piana. del coperchio destro e quindi rimuovere il
coperchio destro (14).
6. 3 (10) (8) 7. 8. (14)

(11) (12) (13) (16) (15)
(14)
6. (10) 3 7. (12) 8. (14) .

(8) (11) (13) (15) (16)
. . (14) .
6. (10)3 (8) 7.(12) 8.(14)

(11) (13)
(15) (16)
(14)
4
17 21 22
17 19 5 11
17 18 20
For PF-730 10.Remove the breakaway cover (21) from the

9.Remove 3 screws (17) and a screw (18) and remove the paper feeder lower right cover (19). front right cover (5) and the breakaway cover
For PF-740 (22) from the lower right rear cover (11).
9.Remove 3 screws (17) and a screw (20) and remove the paper feeder lower right cover (19).
Pour PF-730 10.Dposer le couvercle amovible (21) du capot

9.Dposer les 3 vis (17) et la vis (18) puis dposer le capot infrieur droit du bureau papier (19). avant droit (5) et le couvercle amovible (22)
Pour PF-740 du capot arrire infrieur droit (11).
9.Dposer les 3 vis (17) et la vis (20) puis dposer le capot infrieur droit du bureau papier (19).
Para PF-730 10.Quite la cubierta divisoria (21) de la cubierta

9.Quite los 3 tornillos (17) y el tornillo (18) y quite la cubierta derecha inferior del alimentador de delantera derecha (5) y la cubierta divisoria
papel (19). (22) de la cubierta trasera inferior derecha
Para PF-740 (11).
9.Quite los 3 tornillos (17) y el tornillo (20) y quite la cubierta derecha inferior del alimentador de
papel (19).
Fr PF-730 10.Nehmen Sie die Ablsungsabdeckung (21)

9.Entfernen Sie 3 Schrauben (17) und eine Schraube (18) und nehmen Sie die untere rechte von der vorderen rechten Abdeckung (5) ab
Abdeckung (19) des Papiereinzugs ab. und die Ablsungsabdeckung (22) von der
Fr PF-740 unteren rechten hinteren Abdeckung (11).
9.Entfernen Sie 3 Schrauben (17) und eine Schraube (20) und nehmen Sie die untere rechte
Abdeckung (19) des Papiereinzugs ab.
Per PF-730 10.Rimuovere il coperchio di distacco (21) dal

9.Rimuovere le 3 viti (17) e una vite (18), e quindi rimuovere il coperchio destro inferiore (19) coperchio destro anteriore (5), e il coperchio
dell'unit di alimentazione carta. di distacco (22) dal coperchio posteriore
Per PF-740 inferiore destro (11).
9.Rimuovere le 3 viti (17) e una vite (20), e quindi rimuovere il coperchio destro inferiore (19)
dell'unit di alimentazione carta.
PF-730 10. (5) (21)

9. 3 (17) 1 (18) (19) (11) (22)
PF-740
9. 3 (17) 1 (20) (19)
PF-730 10. (5) (21)

9. (17) 3 (18) 1 , (19) . (11) (22)
PF-740 .
9. (17) 3 (20) 1 , (19) .
PF-730 10.(5) (21)

9. (17)3 (18)1 (19) (11) (22)
PF-740
9. (17)3 (20)1 (19)
5
24
1mm
1
1mm
0mm
1mm
23
K
11.Remove the panel (23) from the MFP lower 12.After using alcohol to clean place adhering the film, adhere the film (K) in the position (24) indi-
right cover (1) with a flat blade screwdriver. cated in the illustration.
Proceed to step 25
11.Dposer le panneau (23) du capot infrieur 12.Coller le film (K) sur l'emplacement (24) indiqu dans l'illustration, aprs avoir soigneusement
droit du MFP (1) en procdant l'aide d'un nettoy cet emplacement l'alcool.
tournevis lame. Passer l'tape 25.
11.Extraiga el panel (23) de la cubierta derecha 12.Despus de utilizar alcohol para limpiar la zona donde se va a pegar la pelcula, pegue la
inferior del MFP (1) con un destornillador de pelcula (K) en el lugar (24) que se indica en la ilustracin.
pala plana. Vaya al paso 25.
11.Nehmen Sie mit einem flachen Schrauben- 12.Zum Anbringen des Films (K) die Stelle zuvor mit Alkohol reinigen und den Film (K) dann in der in
dreher die Platte (23) von der unteren rech- der Abbildung angegebenen Position (24) anbringen.
ten Abdeckung (1) des MFP ab. Gehen Sie weiter zu Schritt 25.
11.Rimuovere il pannello (23) dal coperchio 12.Dopo aver utilizzato alcol per pulire la piastra che aderisce alla pellicola, far aderire la pellicola
destro inferiore (1) dell'MFP con un caccia- (K) nella posizione (24) indicata nell'illustrazione.
vite a testa piana. Procedere al passo 25.
11. MFP 12. (24) K

(1) (23) 25
11.MFP (1) (23) 12. , (24) K .

. 25 .
11.MFP (1) (23) 12.

(24) K

25
6
30
27
29
26
25
28
Installation on high-speed MFPs 14.Open the right cover 2 (28) on the MFP.
13.Open the right cover 1 (25) on the MFP. Remove the strap (29) from the right cover shaft (30) and remove the
Remove the strap (26) from the shaft (27) and remove right cover 1 right cover 2 (28).
(25).
Montage sur des MFP grande vitesse 14.Ouvrir le capot droit 2 (28) du MFP.
13.Ouvrir le capot droit 1 (25) du MFP. Dposer la courroie (29) de l'axe du capot droit (30) et dposer le
Dposer la courroie (26) de l'arbre (27) et dposer le capot droit 1 (25). capot droit 2 (28).
Instalacin en las MFP de alta velocidad 14.Abra la cubierta derecha 2 (28) del MFP.
13.Abra la cubierta derecha 1 (25) del MFP. Quite la correa (29) del eje de la cubierta derecha (30) y quite la cubi-
Quite la correa (26) del eje (27) y quite la cubierta derecha 1 (25). erta derecha 2 (28).
Installation an MFP der Hochleistungsklasse 14.Die rechte Abdeckung 2 (28) am MFP ffnen.
13.Die rechte Abdeckung 1 (25) am MFP ffnen. Nehmen Sie den Riemen (29) von der Welle (30) der rechten Abdeck-
Den Riemen (26) von der Welle (27) abnehmen und dann die rechte ung und dann die rechte Abdeckung 2 (28) ab.
Abdeckung 1 (25) abnehmen.
Installazione sulle MFP a velocit alta 14.Aprire il coperchio destro 2 (28) sull'MFP.
13.Aprire il coperchio destro 1 (25) sull'MFP. Rimuovere la cinghietta (29) dall'asta (30) del coperchio destro e quindi
Rimuovere la cinghietta (26) dall'asta (27) e quindi rimuovere il coper- rimuovere il coperchio destro 2 (28).
chio destro 1 (25).
MFP 14. MFP 2(28)

13. MFP 1(25) (30) (29) 2(28)
(26) (27) 1(25)
MFP 14.MFP 2 (28) .

13.MFP 1 (25) . (29) (30) 2 (28)
(26) (27) 1 (25) . .
MFP 14.MFP 2(28)

13.MFP 1(25) (29) (30) 2(28)
(26) (27) 1(25)
7
32
35
33 59
34
36
59
34
31 34
32 32 59
15.Open the MFP paper conveying cover (31). 17.Remove the 4 screws (34) and release the 4 18.Remove a screw (36) from the middle right
16.Open the panel (33) on the MFP front right hooks (59). Then remove the front right rear cover (35).
cover (32). cover (32).
15.Ouvrir le capot du transport du papier du 17.Retirer les 4 vis (34) et librer les 4 crochets 18.Dposer la vis (36) du capot arrire droit
MFP (31). (59). Retirer ensuite le capot avant droit (32). mdian (35).
16.Ouvrir le panneau (33) sur le capot avant
droit du MFP (32).
15.Abra la cubierta de transporte del papel del 17.Quite los 4 tornillos (34) y libere los 4 gan- 18.Quite el tornillo (36) de la cubierta trasera
MFP (31). chos (59). Despus, quite la cubierta frontal central (35).
16.Abra el panel (33) en la cubierta delantera derecha (32).
derecha (32).
15.ffnen Sie die Papierfrderabdeckung (31) 17.Entfernen Sie die 4 Schrauben (34) und 18.Entfernen Sie eine Schraube (36) von der
des MFP. lsen Sie die 4 Haken (59). Danach nehmen mittleren rechten hinteren Abdeckung (35).
16.ffnen Sie die Platte (33) der vorderen Sie die rechte vordere Abdeckung (32) ab.
rechten Abdeckung (32) des MFP.
15.Aprire il coperchio (31) dell'unit di trasporto 17.Rimuovere le 4 viti (34) e rilasciare i 4 ganci 18.Rimuovere la vite (36) dal coperchio posteri-
carta dell'MFP. (59). Rimuovere quindi il coperchio anteriore ore centrale destro (35).
16.Aprire il pannello (33) sul coperchio destro destro (32).
anteriore (32) dell'MFP.
15. MFP (31) 17. 4 34 4 59 18. (35) 1 (36)

16. MFP (32) 32
(33)
15.MFP (31) . 17. (34) 4 (59) 4 18. (35) (36) 1

16.MFP (32) . (32) .
(33) . .
15.MFP (31) 17. (34)4 (59)4 18.(35) (36)1

16.MFP (32) (33) (32)

8
35
37
37 39
41
39
40
38 39
39 40
19.Remove the panel (38) from the lower right 20.Remove 5 screws (39), then lift the bottom of 21.Remove 2 screws (40) and remove the lower
rear cover (37) with a flat blade screwdriver. the middle right rear cover (35) and remove right cover (41).
the lower right rear cover (37).
19.Dposer le panneau (38) du capot arrire 20.Dposer les 5 vis (39) puis lever le bas du 21.Dposer les 2 vis (40) et dposer le capot
infrieur droit (37) en procdant l'aide d'un capot arrire droit mdian (35) pour dposer infrieur droit (41).
tournevis lame. le capot arrire droit infrieur (37).
19.Extraiga el panel (38) de la cubierta trasera 20.Quite los 5 tornillos (39), luego levante la 21.Quite los 2 tornillos (40) y quite la cubierta
inferior derecha (37) con un destornillador parte inferior de la cubierta trasera central derecha inferior (41).
de pala plana. derecha (35) y quite la cubierta trasera infe-
rior derecha (37).
19.Nehmen Sie mit einem flachen Schrauben- 20.Entfernen Sie 5 Schrauben (39), heben Sie 21.Entfernen Sie 2 Schrauben (40) und
dreher die Platte (38) von der unteren rech- die mittlere rechte hintere Abdeckung (35) nehmen Sie die untere rechte Abdeckung
ten hinteren Abdeckung (37) ab. von unten her an und nehmen Sie die untere (41) ab.
rechte hintere Abdeckung (37) ab.
19.Rimuovere il pannello (38) dal coperchio 20.Rimuovere le 5 viti (39), quindi sollevare la 21.Rimuovere le 2 viti (40), e quindi rimuovere il
posteriore inferiore destro (37) con un cac- parte in basso del coperchio posteriore cen- coperchio destro inferiore (41).
ciavite a testa piana. trale destro (35) e rimuovere il coperchio
posteriore inferiore destro (37).
19.37 20. 5 (39) (35) 21. 2 (40) (41)

38 (37)
19. (37) (38) 20. (39) 5 21. (40) 2

. (35) (41) .
(37) .
19.(37) (38) 20. (39)5 (35) 21. (40)2 (41)

(37)

9
42 43
25
44
32 37
22.Remove the breakaway cover (42) from the 23.Remove the panel (44) from the MFP right cover 1 (25) with a flat blade screwdriver.
front right cover (32) and the breakaway
cover (43) from the lower right rear cover
(37).
22.Dposer le couvercle amovible (42) du capot 23.Dposer le panneau (44) du capot droit 1 du MFP (25) en procdant l'aide d'un tournevis
avant droit (32) et le couvercle amovible (43) lame.
du capot arrire infrieur droit (37).
22.Quite la cubierta divisoria (42) de la cubierta 23.Extraiga el panel (44) de la cubierta derecha 1 del MFP (25) con un destornillador de pala plana.
delantera derecha (32) y la cubierta divisoria
(43) de la cubierta trasera inferior derecha
(37).
22.Nehmen Sie die Ablsungsabdeckung (42) 23.Nehmen Sie mit einem flachen Schraubendreher die Platte (44) von der rechten Abdeckung 1
von der vorderen rechten Abdeckung (32) (25) des MFP ab.
ab und die Ablsungsabdeckung (43) von
der unteren rechten hinteren Abdeckung
(37).
22.Rimuovere il coperchio di distacco (42) dal 23.Rimuovere il pannello (44) dal coperchio destro 1 (25) dell'MFP con un cacciavite a testa piana.
coperchio destro anteriore (32), e il coper-
chio di distacco (43) dal coperchio posteriore
inferiore destro (37).
22. (32) (42) 23. MFP 1(25) (44)

(37) (43)
22. (32) (42) 23.MFP 1 (25) (44) .

(37) (43)
.
22.(32) (42) 23.MFP 1(25) (44)

(37) (43)
10
51
1mm
1mm
0mm
F
1mm
D
K
24.After using alcohol to clean place adhering the film, adhere the film (K) in the position (51) indi- 25.Install a lock pin (D) on the front right of the
cated in the illustration. MFP using an M4 8 screw (F).
24.Coller le film (K) sur l'emplacement (51) indiqu dans l'illustration, aprs avoir soigneusement 25.Monter une broche de verrouillage (D)
nettoy cet emplacement l'alcool. droite et l'avant du MFP en procdant
l'aide d'une vis M4 8 (F).
24.Despus de utilizar alcohol para limpiar la zona donde se va a pegar la pelcula, pegue la 25.Instale una clavija de bloqueo (D) en la parte
pelcula (K) en el lugar (51) que se indica en la ilustracin. derecha frontal del MFP usando un tornillo
M4 8 (F).
24.Zum Anbringen des Films (K) die Stelle zuvor mit Alkohol reinigen und den Film (K) dann in der in 25.Bringen Sie mit einer M4 8 Schraube (F)
der Abbildung angegebenen Position (51) anbringen. den Arretierungsstift (D) vorne rechts am
MFP an.
24.Dopo aver utilizzato alcol per pulire la piastra che aderisce alla pellicola, far aderire la pellicola 25.Installare un perno di bloccaggio (D) sulla
(K) nella posizione (51) indicata nell'illustrazione. parte anteriore destra dell'MFP utilizzando
una vite M4 8 (F).
24. (51) K 25. 1 M48 (F) (D)

MFP
24. , (51) K . 25. M48(F) (D) MFP

.
24.
51

K 25. M48(F)1
(D) MFP

11
46 C
B
D
45
26.Install a lock pin (D) on the rear right of the 27.Place the small base slider (C) on the large base slider (B). Place so that the bend (46) on the
MFP using an M4 8 screw (F) in the same small base slider (C) abuts inside the rest (45) at the end of the large base slider (B).
way.
26.Monter une broche de verrouillage (D) 27.Placer la petite rgle de base (C) sur la grande rgle de base (B). Disposer la petite rgle de
droite et l'arrire du MFP en procdant de base (C) de sorte que son extrmit replie (46) s'encastre dans la bute (45) l'extrmit de la
la mme manire l'aide d'une vis M4 8 grande rgle de base (B).
(F).
26.Instale una clavija de bloqueo (D) en la parte 27.Coloque el deslizador de base pequeo (C) sobre el deslizador de base grande (B). Haga que la
derecha frontal del MFP usando un tornillo dobladura (46) del deslizador de base pequeo (C) quede en el interior del apoyo (45) del
M4 8 (F). extremo del deslizador de base grande (B).
26.Bringen Sie auf gleiche Weise mit einer M4 27.Setzen Sie den kleinen Basis-Schieber (C) auf den groen Basis-Schieber (B). Setzen Sie ihn so
8 Schraube (F) den Arretierungsstift (D) auf, dass die Biegung (46) am kleinen Basis-Schieber (C) innerhalb der Auflage (45) am Ende
hinten rechts am MFP an. des groen Basis-Schiebers (B) anliegt.
26.Installare un perno di bloccaggio (D) sulla 27.Posizionare lo scivolo di base piccolo (C) sullo scivolo di base grande (B). Posizionare in modo
parte posteriore destra dell'MFP utilizzando che la piegatura (46) sullo scivolo di base piccolo (C) si attesti all'interno del sostegno (45)
una vite M4 8 (F) alla stessa maniera. all'estremit dello scivolo di base grande (B).
26. 1 M48 (F) 27.(C) (B)(C) (46)

(D) MFP (B) (45)
26. M48(F) 27. (B) (C) . ,

(D) MFP . (C) (46) (B) (45)
.
26. M48(F) 27. (B) (C)

(D) MFP (C) (46) (B) (45)

12
C
6 2 mm
47 C
F
B
28.Insert the small base slider (C) under the paper feeder. Install to the base (47) using 2 M4 8 screws (F) so that the gap between the small base slider
(C) and the large base slider (B) is 6 2 mm.
* For PF-730, install to the screw holes marked R.
28.Insrer la petite rgle de base (C) sous le bureau papier. Fixer la base (47) l'aide de 2 vis M4 8 (F) de sorte que le battement entre la petite rgle
de base (C) et la grande rgle de base (B) soit de 6 2 mm.
* Pour le PF-730, fixer aux trous de vis marqus "R".
28.Inserte el deslizador de base pequeo (C) debajo del alimentador de papel. Instlelo en la base (47) usando 2 tornillos M4 8 (F) de manera tal que
el huelgo entre el deslizador de base pequeo (C) y el deslizador de base grande (B) sea de 6 2 mm.
* En el caso de PF-730, instale en los orificios para tornillo R.
28.Stecken Sie den kleinen Basis-Schieber (C) unter den Papiereinzug. Befestigen Sie ihn mit 2 M4 8 Schrauben (F) so an der Basis (47), dass der
Abstand zwischen dem kleinen Basis-Schieber (C) und dem groen Basis-Schieber (B) 6 2 mm betrgt.
* Bei Modell PF-730 an den mit "R" markierten Schraublchern befestigen.
28.Inserire lo scivolo di base piccolo (C) sotto l'unit di alimentazione carta. Installare alla base (47) utilizzando 2 viti M4 8 (F) in modo che lo spazio tra
lo scivolo di base piccolo (C) e lo scivolo di base grande (B) sia di 6 2 mm.
* Per PF-730, installare ai fori per viti segnalati con R.
28.(C) 2 M48(F) (C) (47) (C)

(B) 62mm
PF-730 R
28. (C) . (C) (B) 62mm M48(F)

2 (47) .
PF-730 R .
28. (C) (C) (B)

62mm
M48(F)2 (47)
PF-730 R
13
Installation on medium-speed MFPs 31.Reinstall the lower right rear cover (11).
If installing on a high-speed MFP, proceed to step 35. 32.Mount a screw (9) in the middle right rear cover (8).
29.Reinstall the paper feeder lower right cover (19). 33.Reinstall the front right cover (5).
30.Reinstall the paper feeder right cover (14). 34.Reinstall the lower right cover (1).
Proceed to step 41.
Montage sur des MFP vitesse moyenne 31.Reposer le capot arrire infrieur droit (11).
Si le montage est fait sur un MFP grande vitesse, passer l'tape 35. 32.Fixer la vis (9) sur le capot arrire mdian droit (8).
29.Reposer le capot infrieur droit du bureau papier (19). 33.Reposer le capot avant droit (5).
30.Reposer le capot droit du bureau papier (14). 34.Reposer le capot infrieur droit (1).
Passer l'tape 41.
Instalacin en las MFP de velocidad media 31.Reinstale la cubierta trasera inferior derecha (11).
Si se instala en una MFP de alta velocidad, vaya al paso 35. 32.Instale el tornillo (9) en la cubierta trasera central derecha (8).
29.Reinstale la cubierta derecha inferior del alimentador de papel (19). 33.Reinstale la cubierta delantera derecha (5).
30.Reinstale la cubierta derecha del alimentador de papel (14). 34.Reinstale la cubierta derecha inferior (1).
Vaya al paso 41.
Installation an MFP der mittleren Leistungsklasse 31.Bringen Sie die untere rechte hintere Abdeckung (11) wieder an.
Gehen Sie zur Installation an einem MFP der Hochleistungsklasse weiter 32.Befestigen Sie eine Schraube (9) an der mittleren rechten hinteren
zu Schritt 35. Abdeckung (8).
29.Bringen Sie die untere rechte Abdeckung (19) des Papiereinzugs wie- 33.Bringen Sie die vordere rechte Abdeckung (5) wieder an.
der an. 34.Bringen Sie die untere rechte Abdeckung (1) wieder an.
30.Bringen Sie die rechte Abdeckung (14) des Papiereinzugs wieder an. Gehen Sie weiter zu Schritt 41.
Installazione sulle MFP a velocit media 31.Reinstallare il coperchio posteriore inferiore destro (11).
Se si installa su una MFP a velocit alta, procedere al passo 35. 32.Montare la vite (9) nel coperchio posteriore centrale destro (8).
29.Reinstallare il coperchio destro inferiore dell'unit di alimentazione 33.Reinstallare il coperchio destro anteriore (5).
carta (19). 34.Reinstallare il coperchio destro inferiore (1).
30.Reinstallare il coperchio destro (14) dell'unit di alimentazione carta. Procedere al passo 41.
MFP 31. (11)

MFP 35 32. (8) 1 (9)
29. (19) 33. (5)
30. (14) 34. (1)
41
MFP 31. (11) .

MFP 35 . 32. (8) (9) 1 .
29. (19) . 33. (5) .
30. (14) . 34. (1) .
41 .
MFP 31.(11)
MFP 35 32.(8) (9)1
29.(19) 33.(5)
30.(14) 34.(1)
41
14
E
Installation on high-speed MFPs 38.Reinstall the front right cover (32). 41.Install the switch press plate (E) using the
35.Reinstall the lower right cover (41). 39.Reinstall the right cover 2 (28). M4 10 tapping screw (J).
36.Reinstall the lower right rear cover (37). 40.Reinstall the right cover 1 (25).
37.Mount a screw (36) in the middle right rear
cover (35).
Montage sur des MFP grande vitesse 38.Reposer le capot avant droit (32). 41.Fixer la plaque de pression du contacteur
35.Reposer le capot infrieur droit (41). 39.Reposer le capot droit 2 (28). (E) l'aide d'une vis de connexion M4 10
36.Reposer le capot arrire infrieur droit (37). 40.Reposer le capot droit 1 (25). (J).
37.Fixer la vis (36) sur le capot arrire mdian
droit (35).
Instalacin en las MFP de alta velocidad 38.Reinstale la cubierta delantera derecha (32). 41.Instale la placa de presin del interruptor (E)
35.Reinstale la cubierta derecha inferior (41). 39.Reinstale la cubierta derecha 2 (28). usando el tornillo de roscado M4 10 (J).
36.Reinstale la cubierta trasera inferior derecha 40.Reinstale la cubierta derecha 1 (25).
(37).
37.Instale el tornillo (36) en la cubierta trasera
central derecha (35).
Installation an MFP der Hochleistungsklasse 38.Bringen Sie die vordere rechte Abdeckung 41.Befestigen Sie mit der M4 10 Sch-
35.Bringen Sie die untere rechte Abdeckung (32) wieder an. neidschraube (J) die Schalterdruckplatte (E).
(41) wieder an. 39.Bringen Sie die rechte Abdeckung 2 (28)
36.Bringen Sie die untere rechte hintere wieder an.
Abdeckung (37) wieder an. 40.Bringen Sie die rechte Abdeckung 1 (25)
37.Befestigen Sie eine Schraube (36) an der wieder an.
mittleren rechten hinteren Abdeckung (35).
Installazione sulle MFP a velocit alta 38.Reinstallare il coperchio destro anteriore 41.Installare la piastra spingi interruttore (E) uti-
35.Reinstallare il coperchio destro inferiore (32). lizzando la vite autofilettante M4 10 (J).
(41). 39.Reinstallare il coperchio destro 2 (28).
36.Reinstallare il coperchio posteriore inferiore 40.Reinstallare il coperchio destro 1 (25).
destro (37).
37.Montare la vite (36) nel coperchio posteriore
centrale destro (35).
MFP 38. (32) 41. 1 M410 (J)

35. (41) 39. 2(28) (E)
36. (37) 40. 1(25)
37. (35) 1 (36)
MFP 38. (32) . 41. M410(J) 1 (E)

35. (41) . 39. 2 (28) . .
36. (37) 40. 1 (25) .
.
37. (35) (36) 1
.
MFP 38.(32) 41. M410(J)1

35.(41) 39.2 (28) (E)
36.(37) 40.1 (25)
37.(35) (36)1

15
F F
48
A
F
I
F B
42.Install the side feeder (A) to the large base slider (B) using 2 M4 8 screws (F). Install so that the 43.Install the cover plate (I) using 2 M4 8
center of the M4 8 screws (F) comes over the horizontal line (48) of the mounting plate on the screws (F).
large base slider (B).
42.Fixer le dispositif du plateau d'alimentation latral (A) la grande rgle de base (B) l'aide de 2 43.Fixer le capot (I) l'aide de 2 vis M4 8 (F).
vis M4 8 (F). Procder de sorte que l'axe des vis M4 8 (F) recouvre la ligne horizontale (48)
du plateau de montage sur la grande rgle de base (B).
42.Instale el alimentador lateral (A) en el deslizador de base grande (B) usando 2 tornillos M4 8 43.Instale la tapa (I) usando los 2 tornillos M4
(F). Instale de manera que el centro de los tornillos M4 8 (F) queden sobre la lnea horizontal 8 (F).
(48) de la placa de montaje del deslizador de base (B) grande.
42.Befestigen Sie den seitlichen Einzug (A) mit 2 M4 8 Schrauben (F) am groen Basis-Schieber 43.Bringen Sie die Abdeckungsplatte (I) mit 2
(B). Befestigen Sie ihn so, dass die Mitte der M4 8 Schrauben (F) ber der Waagrechtlinie (48) M4 8 Schrauben (F) an.
der Montageplatte am groen Basis-Schieber (B) liegt.
42.Installare l'unit di alimentazione laterale (A) allo scivolo di base grande (B) utilizzando 2 viti M4 43.Installare il coperchio (I) utilizzando 2 viti M4
8 (F). Installare in modo che il centro delle viti M4 8 (F) sia sulla linea orizzontale (48) della pias- 8 (F).
tra di montaggio sullo scivolo di base grande (B).
42. 2 M48 (F) (A) (B) M48 43. 2 M48 (F) (I)
(F) (B) (48)
42. M48(F) 2 (B) (A) . , 43. M48(F) 2 (I)

(B) (48) M48(F) . .
42. M48(F)2 (B) (A) 43. M48(F)2 (I)

(B) (48) M48(F)

16
H
G
50
49
44.Plug the signal cable (49) for the side feeder into the paper feeder connector (50). Setting the paper size plate and media type
45.Push the side feeder to connect it to the MFP. plate
Insert the paper size plate (G) and media type
plate (H) into the each slots respectively.
44.Enficher le cble de signal (49) du dispositif du plateau d'alimentation latral dans le connecteur Disposition des plaquettes du format de
(50) du bureau papier. papier et du type de support
45.Pousser le dispositif du plateau d'alimentation latral pour le raccorder au MFP. Introduire la plaquette du format de papier (G) et
la plaquette du type de support (H) dans leur
logement respectif.
44.Conecte el cable de seal (49) del alimentador lateral en el conector del alimentador de papel Ajuste de la placa de tamao de papel y la
(50). placa de tipo de medio
45.Empuje el alimentador lateral para conectarlo al MFP. Inserte la placa de tamao de papel (G) y la
placa de tipo de medio (H) en cada uno de las
ranuras, respectivamente.
44.Schlieen Sie das Signalkabel (49) fr den seitlichen Einzug am Papiereinzug-Steckverbinder Einsetzen der Papierformatkarte und der
(50) an. Medientypkarte
45.Drcken Sie auf den seitlichen Einzug, um ihn mit dem MFP zu verbinden. Setzen Sie die Papierformatkarte (G) und die
Medientypkarte (H) in die jeweiligen Fhrungen.
44.Collegare il cavo del segnale (49) per l'unit di alimentazione laterale nel connettore dell'unit di Impostazione della piastra di formato carta e
alimentazione carta (50). della piastra del tipo di supporto
45.Spingere l'unit di alimentazione laterale per collegarla all'MFP. Inserire la piastra del formato carta (G) e la pias-
tra del tipo di supporto (H) nei rispettivi alloggia-
menti.
44. (49) (50)

45. MFP G) (H)

44. (49) (50) .

45. MFP . (G)
(H) .
44. (49) (50)

45.
MFP (G)
(H)
17
2
1
Changing paper size (metric specifications only) 1.Pull out the side feeder cassette.
At shipment, Letter is set for inch models and A4 is set for metric models. Use the procedure below 2.Remove a screw (1) and remove the stopper
to change the size to B5. (2).
Modification du format du papier (pour spcifications mtriques seulement) 1.Sortir le tiroir du dispositif du plateau d'ali-
expdition, les modles mesure en pouces sont rgls sur le format Letter et les modles mentation latral.
mesure mtrique sur le format A4. Pour passer au format B5, procder de la manire suivante. 2.Dposer la vis (1) et la bute (2).
Cmo cambiar el tamao de papel (slo para las especificaciones mtricas) 1.Extraiga el cajn del alimentador lateral.
En el momento de salida de fbrica, se configura Carta para los modelos en pulgadas y A4 para los 2.Quite el tornillo (1) y quite el tope (2).
modelos en sistema mtrico. Siga este procedimiento para cambiar el tamao a B5.
ndern des Papierformats (nur metrische Spezifikationen) 1.Ziehen Sie die Papierlade des seitlichen
Beim Werksversand ist bei Modellen mit Zollma das Format Letter voreingestellt und bei Modellen mit Einzugs heraus.
metrischem Ma das Format A4. 2.Entfernen Sie eine Schraube (1) und
Das Format kann wie folgend auf B5 umgeschaltet werden. nehmen Sie den Anschlag (2) heraus.
Cambio del formato della carta (solo per le specifiche metriche) 1.Estrarre il cassetto dell'unit di alimentazi-
Al momento della spedizione, Letter impostato per le specifiche in pollici e A4 impostato per le one laterale.
specifiche metriche. Usare la procedura riportata sotto per cambiare il formato a B5. 2.Rimuovere la vite (1) e quindi rimuovere il
fermo (2).
1.
Letter A4 B5 2. 1 (1) (2)
1. .
, Letter, A4 . B5 2. (1) 1 (2)
. .
1.
Letter A4
B5 2. (1)1 (2)

18
3
4 6
5 3
B5
4
A4
3.Remove a screw (3) and remove the front 4.Move the front deck cursor (4) to match the size marking (5) (the outermost is A4, the innermost
deck cursor (4). is B5) at the bottom of the cassette.
5.Fix the front deck cursor (4) using the screw (3).
6.Move the rear deck cursor (6) in the same way.
3.Dposer la vis (3) et le curseur de platine 4.Dplacer le curseur de platine avant (4) en fonction du repre de format papier (5) (le repre le
avant (4). plus l'extrieur est celui du format A4, celui le plus l'intrieur, celui du format B5) se trouvant
au fond de le tiroir.
5.Fixer le curseur de platine avant (4) l'aide de la vis (3).
6.Dplacer le curseur de platine arrire (6) en procdant de la mme manire.
3.Quite el tornillo (3) y quite el cursor frontal de 4.Mueva el cursor frontal de la plataforma (4) para que corresponda con la marca de tamao (5) (la
la plataforma (4). ms externa es A4, la ms interna es B5) en la parte inferior del cajn.
5.Fije el cursor frontal de la plataforma (4) usando el tornillo (3).
6.Mueva el cursor trasero de la plataforma (6) de la misma forma.
3.Entfernen Sie eine Schraube (3) und 4.Versetzen Sie den vorderen Konsole-Cursor (4), um die Formatmarkierung (5) am Boden der
nehmen Sie den vorderen Konsole-Cursor Papierlade anzupassen (die uerste ist A4, die innerste ist B5).
(4) heraus. 5.Befestigen Sie den vorderen Konsole-Cursor (4) mit der Schraube (3).
6.Versetzen Sie den hinteren Konsole-Cursor (6) auf gleiche Weise.
3.Rimuovere la vite (3) e quindi rimuovere il 4.Spostare il cursore frontale del deck (4) per farlo corrispondere al segno del formato (5) (il pi
cursore frontale del deck (4). esterno A4, il pi interno B5) alla parte inferiore del cassetto.
5.Fissare il cursore frontale del deck (4) utilizzando la vite (3).
6.Spostare il cursore posteriore del deck (6) alla stessa maniera.
3. 1 (3) 4. (5) ( A4 B5) (4)

(4) 5. 1 (3) (4)
6. (6)
3. (3) 1 (4) 4. (5) ( A4, B5) (4)

. .
5. (3) 1 (4) .
6. (6) .
3. (3)1 (4) 4. (5) ( A4 B5) (4)

5. (3)1
(4)
6. (6)
19
7
9
8 8
2
B5 A4
1
7.Remove a screw (7) and remove the deck 8.Move the deck trailing edge cursor (8) to 10.Reinstall the stopper (2) using the screw (1).
trailing edge cursor (8). match the size marking (9) at the bottom of 11.Run maintenance mode U208 and set the
the cassette. paper size.
9.Fix the deck trailing edge cursor (8) with the
screw (7).
7.Dposer la vis (7) et dposer le curseur du 8.Dplacer le curseur du bord arrire de la 10.Reposer la bute (2) l'aide de la vis (1).
bord arrire de la platine (8). platine (8) en fonction du repre de format 11.Excuter le mode maintenance U208 et
papier (9) se trouvant au fond de le tiroir. dfinir le format du papier.
9.Fixer le curseur du bord arrire de la platine
(8) l'aide de la vis (7).
7.Quite el tornillo (7) y quite el cursor del borde 8.Mueva el cursor del borde inferior de la plat- 10.Reinstale el tope (2) usando el tornillo (1).
inferior de la plataforma (8). aforma (8) para que corresponda con la 11.Active el modo de mantenimiento U208 y
marca de tamao (9) en la parte inferior del ajuste el tamao de papel.
cajn.
9.Fije el cursor del borde inferior de la plata-
forma (8) con el tornillo (7).
7.Entfernen Sie eine Schraube (7) und 8.Versetzen Sie den Hinterkante-Cursor (8), 10.Bringen Sie den Anschlag (2) wieder mit der
nehmen Sie den Hinterkante-Cursor (8) her- um die Formatmarkierung (9) am Boden der Schraube (1) an.
aus. Papierlade anzupassen. 11.Fhren Sie den Wartungsmodus U208 aus
9.Befestigen Sie den Hinterkante-Cursor (8) und stellen Sie das Papierformat ein.
mit der Schraube (7).
7.Rimuovere la vite (7) e quindi rimuovere il 8.Spostare il cursore del bordo finale del deck 10.Reinstallare il fermo (2) utilizzando la vite
cursore del bordo finale del deck (8). (8) per farlo corrispondere al segno di for- (1).
mato (9) alla parte inferiore del cassetto. 11.Eseguire la modalita manutenzione U208 e
9.Fissare il cursore del bordo finale del deck impostare il formato carta.
(8) con la vite (7).
7. 1 (7) 8. (9) 10. 1 (1) (2)

(8) (8) 11. U208
9. 1 (7)
(8)
7. (7) 1 (8) 8. (9) 10. (1) 1 (2)

. (8) . .
9. (7) 1 (8) 11. U208
. .
7. (7)1 8. (9) 10. (1)1

(2)
(8) (8)
9. (7)1
(8) 11. U208

20
6 10
0.5~1.0mm
Adjusting the cursor width

1.Load paper in the cassettes.
2. If the gap between the front deck cursor (4) and the paper (10) is outside the 0.5 to 1.0 mm range when the paper (10) is touching up against the rear deck cur-
sor (6), perform the following adjustment.
* A cursor width that is too small can hinder paper feeding, while a cursor width that is too large can lead to problems such as skewed paper feed.
Rglage de la largeur du curseur

1.Charger les tiroirs en papier.
2.Si l'cartement entre le curseur de platine avant (4) et le papier (10) est hors des limites de 0,5 1,0 mm quand le papier (10) touche le curseur de
platine arrire (6), procder au rglage suivant.
* Une largeur trop faible du curseur risque d'empcher l'entranement du papier et une largeur trop grande risque d'entraner des problmes du type
entranement du papier de biais.
Cmo ajustar la anchura del cursor

1.Cargue papel en los cajones.
2.Si la separacin entre el cursor frontal de la plataforma (4) y el papel (10) est fuera del rango de 0,5 a 1,0 mm cuando el papel (10) toca el cursor trasero
de la plataforma (6), haga el siguiente ajuste.
* Una anchura del cursor demasiado pequea puede impedir la alimentacin de papel; una anchura del cursor demasiado grande puede provocar prob-
lemas con la alimentacin torcida de papel.
Einstellen der Cursor-Breite

1.Papier in die Papierladen einlegen.
2.Falls der Abstand zwischen dem vorderen Konsole-Cursor (4) und dem Papier (10) auerhalb des Bereichs 0,5 bis 1,0 mm liegt, wenn das Papier
(10) am hinteren Konsole-Cursor (6) anliegt, ist folgende Einstellung vorzunehmen.
* Eine zu kleine Cursor-Breite kann den Papiereinzug behindern, wogegen eine zu groe Cursor-Breite verkanteten Papiereinzug und hnliche Prob-
leme verursachen kann.
Regolazione della larghezza del cursore

1. Caricare carta nei cassetti.
2.Se lo spazio tra il cursore frontale del deck (4) e la carta (10) fuori della gamma da 0,5 a 1,0 mm quando la carta (10) tocca il cursore postertiore del
deck (6), eseguire la regolazione seguente.
* Una larghezza dei cursori troppo piccola pu ostacolare l'alimentazione della carta, mentre unalarghezza dei cursori troppo grande pu essere
causa di problemi, come ad esempio l'alimentazione obbliqua della carta.
1.
2. (6) (10) (4) (10) 0.5 1.0mm

1. .
2. (6) (10) (4) (10) 0.5 1.0mm .
, .
1.
2. (6) (10)
(4) (10) 0.5 1.0mm

21
4
11 11 12
3.Loosen 2 adjusting screws (11) on the front deck cursor (4) and move the cursor (4) while check-
ing with the scale (12).
4.Retighten the 2 adjusting screws (11).
5.Check that the gap between the front deck cursor (4) and the paper is between 0.5 and 1.0 mm.
3.Desserrer les 2 vis de rglage (11) sur le curseur de platine avant (4) et dposer le curseur (4)
tout en vrifiant l'aide de l'chelle (12).
4.Resserrer les 2 vis de rglage (11).
5.Vrifier que l'cartement entre le curseur de platine avant (4) et le papier est entre 0,5 et 1,0 mm.
3.Afloje 2 tornillos de ajuste (11) en el cursor frontal de la plataforma (4) y mueva el cursor (4)
mientras verifica con la escala (12).
4.Vuelva a apretar los 2 tornillos de ajuste (11).
5.Verifique que la separacin entre el cursor frontal de la plataforma (4) y el papel sea de entre 0,5
y 1,0 mm.
3.Lsen Sie 2 Einstellschrauben (11) am vorderen Konsole-Cursor (4) und versetzen Sie den Cur-
sor (4) unter Beobachtung der Skale (12).
4.Die 2 Einstellschrauben (11) wieder anziehen.
5.Vergewissern Sie sich, dass der Abstand zwischen dem vorderen Konsole-Cursor (4) und dem
Papier im Bereich 0,5 bis 1,0 mm liegt.
3.Allentare le 2 viti di regolazione (11) sul cursore frontale del deck (4), e quindi rimuovere il cursore
(4) controllando la scala (12).
4.Ristringere le 2 viti di regolazione (11).
5.Controllare che lo spazio tra il cursore frontale del deck (4) e la carta sia compreso nella gamma
tra 0,5 e 1,0 mm.
3. (4) 2 (11) (12)

(4)
4. 2 (11)
5. (4) 0.5 1.0mm
3. (4) (11) 2 (12) (4)

.
4. (11) 2 .
5. (4) 0.5 1.0 mm .
3. (4) (11)2 (12)

(4)
4. (11)2
5. (4) 0.5 1.0mm
22
2
1
2
a b c
Adjusting the center line 2.Adjust the values.

Check the deviation between the center (1) of a correct image (a) and the Test pattern (b): Increase the setting value.
center (2) of a test pattern. Test pattern (c): Decrease the setting value.
<Reference value> Wthin 2.0 mm 3.Press the Start key to confirm the setting value.
1.Set the maintenance mode U034. Select LSU Out Left and Cassette5.
Rglage de l'axe 2.Rgler les valeurs.

Vrifier la dviation entre l'axe (1) d'une image correcte (a) et l'axe (2) Mire d' essai (b): Augmentez la valeur de rglage.
d'une forme d'essai. Mire d' essai (c): Diminuez la valeur de rglage.
<Valeur de rfrence> 2,0 mm max. 3.Appuyer sur la touche de Start pour confirmer la valeur de rglage.
1.Passer au mode maintenance U034. Slectionner LSU Out Left et
Cassette5.
Ajuste de la lnea central 2.Ajuste los valores.

Compruebe la desviacin entre el centro (1) de una imagen correcta (a) y Patrn de prueba (b): Aumente el valor de configuracin.
el centro (2) de un patrn de prueba. Patrn de prueba (c): Reduzca el valor de configuracin.
<Valor de referencia> Dentro de 2,0 mm 3.Pulse la tecla de Start para confirmar el valor de configuracin.
1.Entre en el modo de mantenimiento U034. Seleccione LSU Out Left y
Cassette5.
Einstellen der Mittenlinie 2.Die Werte einstellen.

berprfen Sie die Abweichung zwischen der Mitte (1) eines korrekten Testmuster (b): Den Einstellwert erhhen.
Bilds (a) und der Mitte (2) eines Prfmusters. Testmuster (c): Den Einstellwert verringern.
<Bezugswert> Innerhalb 2,0 mm 3.Den Einstellwert durch Drcken der Start-Taste besttigen.
1.Stellen Sie den Wartungsmodus U034 ein. Whlen Sie LSU Out Left
und Cassette5.
Regolazione della linea centrale 2.Regolare i valori.

Controllare la deviazione tra il centro (1) di un'immagine corretta (a) e il Modello di prova (b): Aumentare il valore dell'impostazione.
centro (2) di un modello di prova. Modello di prova (c): Diminuire il valore dell'impostazione.
<Valore di riferimento> Entro 2,0 mm 3.Premere il tasto di Start per confermare il valore dell'impostazione.
1.Impostare la modalit manutenzione U034. Selezionare LSU Out Left
e Cassette5.
2.
(a) (1) (2) (b)
< >2.0mm (c)
1. U034 LSU Out LeftCassette5 3. Start
2. .
(a) (1) (2) . (b) .
2.0mm (c) .
1. U034 LSU Out Left, Cassette5 3. .
.
2.
(a) (1) (2) (b)
(c)
2.0mm 3.
1. U034 LSU Out Left
Cassette5

23
English A different procedure is required depending on the product which is installed with this unit.Each procedure is described in the following pages.
For installation with a MFP, see Page 1 to Page 6.
For installation with a Printer, see Page 7 to Page 13.
Franais Une procdure diffrente est requise selon le produit qui est install avec cette unit.Chaque procdure est dcrite dans les pages suivantes.
Pour l'installation avec une imprimante multifonction, voir Page 1 Page 6.
Pour l'installation avec une imprimante, voir Page 7 Page 13.
Espaol El procedimiento es diferente segn el producto que se instale con esta unidad.En las siguientes pginas, se describe cada procedimiento.
Para la instalacin con un MFP, consulte las pginas de la 1 a la 6.
Para la instalacin con una impresora, consulte las pginas de la 7 a la 13.
Deutsch Je nach verwendetem Modell ist eine andere Vorgehensweise zur Installation dieses Teils erforderlich.Die unterschiedlichen Vorgehensweisen werden
auf den folgenden Seiten erlutert.
Bei Installation an einem MFP siehe Seiten 1 bis 6.
Bei Installation an einem Drucker siehe Seiten 7 bis 13.
Italiano Si richiede una procedura diversa in funzione del prodotto su cui installata l'unit.Le singole procedure sono descritte nelle pagine seguenti.
Per l'installazione con un MFP, vedere le pagine da 1 a 6.
Per l'installazione con una stampante, vedere le pagine da 7 a 13.

MFP P1-P6
P7-P13
. .
MFP 1 ~6 .
7 ~13 .

MFP 1 6
7 13
A C
I(M4x20)
B
E
D
F G H(M4x8)
Supplied parts G. Staple cartridge.......................................... 1 Be sure to remove any tape and/or cushioning
A. Document finisher...................................... 1 H. M4 8 screw ............................................. 1 materials from the parts supplied.
B. Eject tray.................................................... 1 I. M4 20 screw ........................................... 2
C. Lower earth plate....................................... 1
D. Connecting plate........................................ 1
E. Connector cover ........................................ 1
F. Eject guide................................................. 1
Pices fournies G. Cartouche dagrafes .................................. 1 Veillez retirer les morceaux de bande adh-
A. Finisseur de document .............................. 1 H. Vis M4 8.................................................. 1 sive et/ou les matriaux de rembourrage des
B. Bac d'jection ............................................ 1 I. Vis M4 20................................................ 2 pices fournies.
C. Plaque de terre infrieure .......................... 1
D. Plaque de connexion ................................. 1
E. Cache de connecteur ................................ 1
F. Guide d'jection ......................................... 1
Partes suministradas G. Cartucho de grapas ................................... 1 Asegrese de despegar todas las cintas y/o
A. Finalizador de documentos ....................... 1 H. Tornillo M4 8 ........................................... 1 material amortiguador de las partes suministra-
B. Bandeja de salida ...................................... 1 I. Tornillo M4 20 ......................................... 2 das.
C. Placa de conexin a tierra inferior ............. 1
D. Placa de conexin ..................................... 1
E. Cubierta del conector................................. 1
F. Gua de salida ........................................... 1
Enthaltene Teile G. Heftklammermagazin................................. 1 Stellen Sie sicher, dass smtliche Klebebnder

A. Finisher...................................................... 1 H. M4 8 Schraube ....................................... 1 und/oder Polstermaterial von den gelieferten
B. Auswerffach ............................................... 1 I. M4 20 Schraube ..................................... 2 Teilen entfernt wurden.
C. Untere Grundplatte .................................... 1
D. Verbindungsplatte...................................... 1
E. Stecker-Abdeckung ................................... 1
F. Ausgabefhrung ........................................ 1
Parti fornite G. Contenitore punti ....................................... 1 Rimuovere tutti i nastri adesivi e/o i materiali di
A. Finisher documenti .................................... 1 H. Vite M4 8................................................. 3 protezione dalle parti fornite.
B. Vassoio di espulsione ................................ 1 I. Vite M4 20............................................... 2
C. Piastra di messa a terra inferiore............... 1
D. Piastra di connessione .............................. 1
E. Copri connettore ........................................ 1
F. Guida di espulsione ................................... 1
F. ..........................1
A. ............................... 1 G. .............................1
B. ............................. 1 H. M48 ............................1
C. ........................... 1 I. M420 ...........................2
D. ............................... 1
E. ........................... 1
F. ....................................... 1 ,
A. ........................................ 1 G. ............................... 1 .
B. ........................................ 1 H. M48......................................... 1
C. ........................................... 1 I. M420 ....................................... 2
D. .............................................. 1
E. ........................................ 1
G. ...............1
A. ........... 1 H. M48 ............................1

B. ........................... 1 I. M420 ...........................2
C. ........................... 1
D. ............................... 1
E. ..................... 1
F. .......................... 1
1
B A
1 2
NOTICE Procedure 1.Install by inserting the 2 hooks (1) on the

The Attachment Kit (AK-730 or AK-731) must be Before starting installation, be sure to turn the back of the eject tray (B) into the holes (2) in
installed before the document finisher is main power switch of the machine off, and the document finisher (A) lift.
installed. unplug the power plug from the wall outlet.
REMARQUE Procdure 1.Procder en insrant les 2 crochets (1) au

Le kit de fixation (AK-730 ou AK-731) doit tre Avant de commencer l'installation, s'assurer de dos du bac d'jection (B) dans les trous (2)
install avant d'installer le finisseur de docu- mettre la machine hors tension et de du dispositif de levage du finisseur de docu-
ment. dbrancher la fiche d'alimentation de la prise ment (A).
murale.
AVISO Procedimiento 1.Instale insertando los 2 ganchos (1) de la

El Kit de conexin (AK-730 o AK-731) se debe Antes de iniciar la instalacin, asegrese de parte posterior de la bandeja de salida (B)
instalar antes de instalarse el finalizador de doc- apagar el interruptor de encendido de la en los orificios (2) del elevador del finaliza-
umentos. mquina y desenchufar el cable de alimentacin dor de documentos (A).
de la toma de pared.
ANMERKUNG Verfahren 1.Setzen Sie die 2 Haken (1) zur Befestigung

Das Attachment Kit (AK-730 oder AK-731) muss Bevor Sie mit der Installation beginnen berzeu- an der Rckseite des Auswerffachs (B) in
installiert werden, bevor der Finisher installiert gen Sie sich, dass der Netzschalter des Gerts die ffnungen (2) an der Hebeplatte des Fin-
wird. ausgeschaltet und das Stromkabel aus der ishers (A) ein.
Steckdose gezogen ist.
AVVISO Procedura 1.Installare inserendo i 2 ganci (1) sul retro del

Installare l'unit Attachment Kit (AK-730 o AK- Prima di iniziare l'installazione, spegnere la vassoio di espulsione (B) nei fori (2) sul soll-
731) prima di collegare il finisher documenti. macchina e scollegare la spina dalla presa di evatore della finisher documenti (A).
corrente.
1. (B) 2 (1)
(AK-730 (A) (2)
AK-731)
1. (B) (1) 2
(AK- (A) (2)
730 AK-731) . .
.
1. (B) (1)2
OFF
(A)
AK-730 AK- (2)
731)
2
I(M4x20)
4 I(M4x20)
H(M4x8) 5
F 4
2.Secure the lower earth plate (C) with M4 8 3.Install the eject guide (F) by fitting the 2 eject 4.Attach the connecting plate (D) to the
screws (H). guide pins (4) into the holes in the machine. machine using 2 M4 20 screws (I). Attach
them at the point as shown above.
5.Remove the breakaway cover (5) from the
left cover.
2.Fixez la plaque de terre infrieure (C) avec 3.Installer le guide d'jection (F) en insrant 4.Fixez la plaque de connexion (D) la
des vis M4 8 (H). les 2 ergots du guide d'jection (4) dans les machine l'aide de 2 vis M4 20 (I). Rac-
trous de la machine. cordez-les au point indiqu ci-dessus.
5.Dposer le couvercle amovible (5) du cou-
vercle gauche.
2.Fije la placa de conexin a tierra inferior (C) 3.Instale la gua de salida (F) encajando los 2 4.Fije la placa de conexin (D) a la mquina
con tornillos M4 8 (H). pasadores de la gua de salida (4) en los ori- mediante 2 tornillos M4 20 (I). Concte-
ficios de la mquina. las en el punto que se muestra arriba.
5.Quite la cubierta divisoria (5) de la cubierta
izquierda.
2.Befestigen Sie die untere Grundplatte (C) 3.Installieren Sie die Ausgabefhrung (F), 4.Bringen Sie die Verbindungsplatte (D) mit 2
mit den M4 x 8 Schrauben (H). indem Sie die beiden Stifte (4) der Aus- M4 20 Schrauben (I) am Gert an. Brin-
werffhrung in die Aufnahmen des Gerts gen Sie diese an der in der Abbildung
einsetzen. gezeigten Stelle an.
5.Nehmen Sie die Ablsungsabdeckung (5)
von der linken Abdeckung ab.
2.Fissare la piastra di messa a terra inferiore 3.Installare la guida di espulsione (F) inser- 4.Applicare la piastra di connessione (D) alla
(C) con le viti M4 8 (H). endo i 2 perni (4) della guida di espulsione macchina utilizzando le 2 viti M4 20 (I).
nei fori della macchina. Fissare nella posizione sopra indicata.
5.Rimuovere il coperchio di distacco (5) dal
coperchio sinistro.
2. M48(H) (C) 3. (F) 2 (4) 4. 2 M420(I) (D)

5. (5)
2. (C) M48(H) 3. (4) 2 4. M4 20(I) 2

. (F) . (D) .
.
5. (5) .
2. (C) M48(H) 3. (F) (4)2 4. (D) M420(I)2

5. (5)
3
8 9
E E
10
D
6 7 D D
6.Connect the signal line connector (6) to the 7.Fit the connector cover (E) in the connecting 8.Attach the interface cover (10)* on the
connector (7) on the machine.Hook the sig- plate (D).Take care not to get the cable machine.
nal line wire (8) onto the hook (9). pinched by objects.Attach it at the point as * The cover which was removed while install-
shown above.Check that the signal line con- ing the AK-730 or AK-731.
nector is covered by the connector cover (E).
6.Raccorder le connecteur de ligne de signal 7.Placer le cache de connecteur (E) dans la 8.Raccordez le couvercle d'interface (10)* la
(6) sur le connecteur (7) de la machine. plaque de connexion (D). Prendre soin ne machine.
Accrocher le fil de ligne de signal (8) sur le pas pincer le cble. Raccordez-les au point * Le cache qui a t retir lors de l'installa-
crochet (9). indiqu ci-dessus. Vrifier que le connecteur tion de l'AK-730 ou AK-731.
de ligne de signal est couvert par le cache
de connecteur (E).
6.Conecte el conector de lnea de seales (6) 7.Acople la cubierta del conector (E) en la 8.Conecte la cubierta de interfaz (10)* de la
al conector (7) de la mquina. Enganche el placa de conexin (D). Tenga cuidado de mquina.
cable de la lnea de seales (8) en el que el cable no quede atrapado por objetos. * La cubierta que se quit al instalar el kit
enganche (9). Conctelas en el punto que se muestra AK-730 o AK-731.
arriba. Compruebe que el conector de la
lnea de seales quede cubierto por la cubi-
erta del conector (E).
6.Verbinden Sie den Stecker der Signalleitung 7.Setzen Sie die Stecker-Abdeckung (E) in die 8.Bringen Sie die Schnittstellenabdeckung
(6) mit dem Steckverbinder im Gert (7). Verbindungsplatte (D) ein. Stellen Sie sicher, (10)* am Gert an.
Hngen Sie das Kabel der Signalleitung (8) dass das Kabel nicht eingeklemmt wird. * Die Abdeckung, die zur Installation des AK-
in den Befestigungshaken (9) ein. Bringen Sie diese an der in der Abbildung 730 oder AK-731 entfernt wurde
gezeigten Stelle an. berprfen Sie, ob der
Stecker der Signalleitung von der Stecker-
Abdeckung (E) abgedeckt ist.
6.Collegare il connettore di linea del segnale 7.Inserire il copri connettore (E) nella piastra di 8.Fissare la copertura di interfaccia (10)* sulla
(6) al connettore (7) sulla periferica. Aggan- connessione (D). Fare attenzione a non macchina.
ciare il cavo di linea del segnale (8) al gancio impigliare il cavo. Fissare nella posizione * Il coperchio che stato rimosso per instal-
(9). sopra indicata. Controllare che il connettore lare il kit AK-730 o AK-731
della linea del segnale sia coperto dal copri
connettore (E).
6. (6) 7. (E) (D) 8. (10)*

(7) (8) (9) * AK-730 AK-731

(E)
6. (6) (7) 7. (E) (D) 8. (10)*

. (8) (9) . (E) .
. . * AK-730 AK-731
. (E) .
.
6.(6) 7.(E) (D) 8.(10)*

(7) (8)

(9) * AK-730 AK-731
(E)

4
13
14
15 D
12 16
13
14
14
9.Open the document finisher front cover 10.Insert the pin (15) on the connecting plate 11.Slowly push the lock frame (14) fully into the
(12).Remove the screw (13).Pull the lock (D) into the hole (16) on the document fin- machine so that the connectors at the far
frame (14) frontwards. isher. Connect the document finisher to the end are connected.
machine. 12.Secure the lock frame (14) using the screw
* If you cannot connect the document fin- (13) removed in step 9.
isher, adjust the height as described on
page 14.
9.Ouvrir le couvercle avant du finisseur de 10.Introduire la broche (15) sur la plaque de 11.Pousser doucement le cadre de verrouillage
document (12). Retirez la vis (13). Tirer le connexion (D) dans le trou (16) sur le finis- (14) fond dans la machine de sorte que les
cadre de verrouillage (14) vers le bas. seur de document. Connecter le finisseur de connecteurs l'extrmit soient raccords.
document sur la machine. 12.Fixez le bti de verrouillage (14) l'aide de
* S'il s'avre impossible de connecter le la vis (13) dpose l'tape 9.
finisseur de document, en rgler la hauteur
comme dcrit en page 14.
9.Abra la cubierta frontal del finalizador de 10.Inserte el pasador (15) de la placa de conex- 11.Empuje lentamente y hasta el fondo el
documentos (12). Quite el tornillo (13). in (D) en el orificio (16) del finalizador de marco del cierre (14) hacia la mquina de
Empuje el marco de cierre (14) hacia del- documentos. Conecte el finalizador de docu- modo que se conecten los conectores en el
ante. mentos a la mquina. extremo ms lejano.
* Si no puede conectar el finalizador de doc- 12.Asegure la carcasa de bloqueo (14) por
umentos, ajuste la altura como se describe medio del tornillo (13) quitado en el paso 9.
en la pgina 14.
9.ffnen Sie die vordere Abdeckung des Fin- 10.Setzen Sie den Stift (15) der Verbindung- 11.Schieben Sie die Verriegelung (14) wieder
ishers (12). Entfernen Sie die Schraube (13). splatte (D) in die ffnung (16) des Finishers. langsam ins Gert, so dass die Verbindun-
Ziehen Sie die Verriegelung (14) nach vorne. Verbinden Sie den Finisher mit dem Gert. gen am anderen Ende des Gerts geschlos-
* Falls Sie den Finisher nicht anschlieen sen werden.
knnen, sollten Sie die Hhe wie auf Seite 12.Befestigen Sie den Fixierrahmen (14) mit
14 beschrieben einstellen. der in Schritt 9 entfernten Schraube (13).
9.Aprire il coperchio frontale del finisher docu- 10.Inserire il perno (15) della piastra di connes- 11.Spingere lentamente la frame di blocco (14)
menti (12). Togliere la vite (13). Tirare in sione (D) nel foro (16) del finisher docu- nella macchina in modo che i connettori
avanti la frame di blocco (14). menti. Collegare il finisher documenti alla all'estremit risultino collegati.
macchina. 12.Fissare il telaio di bloccaggio (14) utilizzando
* Se non possibile collegare la finisher la vite (13) rimossa nel passo 9.
documenti, regolare laltezza come
descritto a pagina 14.
9.12 10. (D) 15 11.14

13 14 16
P14 12. 9 1 (13)
(14)
9. (12) . 10. (D) (15) 11.

(13) . (14) (16) . (14)
. . .
P14 12. 9 131
. 14 .
9. 10. (D) (15) 11.

(12) (13)
(16) (14)
(14) 12. 9
13
P14
14

5
G
12
13.Install the staple cartridge (G).

14.Close the front cover (12).
Proceed to adjusting the stapling position on

page 18.
13.Installer la cartouche d'agrafes (G).

14.Refermer le couvercle avant (12).
Passez l'ajustement de la position d'agraf-

age page 18.
13.Instale el cartucho de grapas (G).

14.Cierre la cubierta frontal (12).
Proceda al ajuste de la posicin de grapado

en la pgina 18.
13.Installieren Sie das Heftklammer-Magazin

(G).
14.Schlieen Sie die vordere Abdeckung (12).
Fahren Sie mit der Justage der Heftposition

auf Seite 18 fort.
13.Installare il contenitore punti (G).

14.Chiudere il pannello anteriore (12).
Proseguire con la regolazione della

posizione di pinzatura a pagina 18.
13. (G)
14. (12)
P18
13. (G) .
14. (12) .
18
.
13. (G)
14.(12)
P18
6
A
AK-735
C
B
H(M4x8)
E
Y
D I(M4x20)
F
G Z
Supplied parts G. Staple cartridge.......................................... 1

A. Document finisher...................................... 1 H. M4 8 screw ............................................. 1 C and Z are not used.
B. Eject tray.................................................... 1 I. M4 20 screw ........................................... 2
C. Lower earth plate....................................... 1 Y. Earth Plate ................................................. 1 Be sure to remove any tape and/or cushioning
D. Connecting plate........................................ 1 Z. Cover ......................................................... 1 materials from the parts supplied.
E. Connector cover ........................................ 1
F. Eject guide................................................. 1
Pices fournies G. Cartouche dagrafes .................................. 1

A. Finisseur de document .............................. 1 H. Vis M4 8.................................................. 1 C et Z ne sont pas utiliss.
B. Bac d'jection ............................................ 1 I. Vis M4 20................................................ 2
C. Plaque de terre infrieure .......................... 1 Y. Plaque de terre .......................................... 1 Veillez retirer les morceaux de bande adh-
D. Plaque de connexion ................................. 1 Z. Couvercle................................................... 1 sive et/ou les matriaux de rembourrage des
E. Cache de connecteur ................................ 1 pices fournies.
F. Guide d'jection ......................................... 1
Partes suministradas G. Cartucho de grapas ................................... 1

A. Finalizador de documentos ....................... 1 H. Tornillo M4 8 ........................................... 1 C y Z no se utilizan.
B. Bandeja de salida ...................................... 1 I. Tornillo M4 20 ......................................... 2
C. Placa de conexin a tierra inferior ............. 1 Y. Placa de conexin a tierra ......................... 1 Asegrese de despegar todas las cintas y/o
D. Placa de conexin ..................................... 1 Z. Cubierta ..................................................... 1 material amortiguador de las partes suministra-
E. Cubierta del conector................................. 1 das.
F. Gua de salida ........................................... 1
Enthaltene Teile G. Heftklammermagazin................................. 1

A. Finisher...................................................... 1 H. M4 8 Schraube ....................................... 1 C und Z werden nicht bentigt.
B. Auswerffach ............................................... 1 I. M4 20 Schraube ..................................... 2
C. Untere Grundplatte .................................... 1 Y. Grundplatte ................................................ 1 Stellen Sie sicher, dass smtliche Klebebnder
D. Verbindungsplatte...................................... 1 Z. Abdeckung................................................. 1 und/oder Polstermaterial von den gelieferten
E. Stecker-Abdeckung ................................... 1 Teilen entfernt wurden.
F. Ausgabefhrung ........................................ 1
Parti fornite G. Contenitore punti ....................................... 1

A. Finisher documenti .................................... 1 H. Vite M4 8................................................. 1 C e Z non sono utilizzati.
B. Vassoio di espulsione ................................ 1 I. Vite M4 20............................................... 2
C. Piastra di messa a terra inferiore............... 1 Y. Piastra di messa a terra............................. 1 Rimuovere tutti i nastri adesivi e/o i materiali di
D. Piastra di connessione .............................. 1 Z. Coperchio .................................................. 1 protezione dalle parti fornite.
E. Copri connettore ........................................ 1
F. Guida di espulsione ................................... 1
F. ..........................1
A. ............................... 1 G. .............................1 C Z
B. ............................. 1 H. M48 ............................1
C. ........................... 1 I. M420 ...........................2
D. ............................... 1 Y. ...............................1
E. ........................... 1 Z. .................................1
F. ....................................... 1
A. ........................................ 1 G. ............................... 1 C Z .
B. ........................................ 1 H. M48......................................... 1
C. ........................................... 1 I. M420 ....................................... 2 ,
D. .............................................. 1 Y. ............................................... 1 .
E. ........................................ 1 Z. .................................................. 1
G. ...............1
A. ........... 1 H. M48 ............................1 C, Z
B. ........................... 1 I. M420 ...........................2
C. ........................... 1 Y. .............................1
D. ............................... 1 Z. ...............................1

E. ..................... 1
F. .......................... 1
7
B A
1 2

The Attachment Kit (AK-735) must be installed Before starting installation, be sure to turn the back of the eject tray (B) into the holes (2) in
before the document finisher is installed. main power switch of the machine off, and the document finisher (A) lift.
unplug the power plug from the wall outlet.

Le kit de fixation (AK-735) doit tre install Avant de commencer l'installation, s'assurer de dos du bac d'jection (B) dans les trous (2)
avant d'installer le finisseur de document. mettre la machine hors tension et de du dispositif de levage du finisseur de docu-
dbrancher la fiche d'alimentation de la prise ment (A).
murale.

El Kit de conexin (AK-735) se debe instalar Antes de iniciar la instalacin, asegrese de parte posterior de la bandeja de salida (B)
antes de instalarse el finalizador de documen- apagar el interruptor de encendido de la en los orificios (2) del elevador del finaliza-
tos. mquina y desenchufar el cable de alimentacin dor de documentos (A).

Das Attachment Kit (AK-735) muss installiert Bevor Sie mit der Installation beginnen berzeu- an der Rckseite des Auswerffachs (B) in
werden, bevor der Finisher installiert wird. gen Sie sich, dass der Netzschalter des Gerts die ffnungen (2) an der Hebeplatte des Fin-
ausgeschaltet und das Stromkabel aus der ishers (A) ein.

Installare l'unit Attachment Kit (AK-735) prima Prima di iniziare l'installazione, spegnere la vassoio di espulsione (B) nei fori (2) sul soll-
di collegare il finisher documenti. macchina e scollegare la spina dalla presa di evatore della finisher documenti (A).
corrente.
1. (B) 2 (1)
AK- (A) (2)
735)
1. (B) (1) 2
(AK- (A) (2)
735) . .
.
1. (B) (1)2
OFF
(A)
AK-735) (2)

8
4
F
H(M4x8)
4
Y
2.Secure the earth plate (Y)* with M4 8 3.Remove the cover (3) from the machine. 4.Install the eject guide (F) by fitting the 2 eject
screws (H). guide pins (4) into the holes in the machine.
*The part was supplied with the AK-735.
2.Fixez la plaque de terre (Y)* avec des vis M4 3.Retirer le couvercle (3) de la machine. 4.Installer le guide d'jection (F) en insrant
8 (H). les 2 ergots du guide d'jection (4) dans les
*La pice a t fournie avec l'AK-735 trous de la machine.
2.Fije la placa de conexin a tierra (Y)* con 3.Retire la cubierta (3) de la mquina. 4.Instale la gua de salida (F) encajando los 2
tornillos M4 8 (H). pasadores de la gua de salida (4) en los ori-
*La pieza se proporcion con AK-735 ficios de la mquina.
2.Befestigen Sie die Grundplatte (Y)* mit den 3.Entfernen Sie die Abdeckung (3) vom Gert. 4.Installieren Sie die Ausgabefhrung (F),
M4 x 8 Schrauben (H). indem Sie die beiden Stifte (4) der Aus-
*Dieses Teil ist im AK-735 enthalten. werffhrung in die Aufnahmen des Gerts
einsetzen.
2.Fissare la piastra di messa a terra (Y)* con 3.Rimuovere il coperchio (3) dalla macchina. 4.Installare la guida di espulsione (F) inser-
le viti M4 8 (H). endo i 2 perni (4) della guida di espulsione
*Parte fornita con AK-735 nei fori della macchina.
2. M48(H) (Y)* 3.3 4. (F) 2 (4)

*AK-735
2.M4 8(H) (Y)* 3. (3) . 4. (F) (4) 2

. .
*AK-735
2. (Y)* M48(H) 3.(3) 4. (F) (4)2

*AK-735
9
8 9
I(M4x20)
I(M4x20)
E E
5
D
7 D D
6
5.Attach the connecting plate (D) to the 7.Connect the signal line connector (6) to the 8.Fit the connector cover (D) in the connecting
machine using 2 M4 20 screws (I).Attach connector (7) on the machine. Hook the sig- plate (E). Take care not to get the cable
them at the point as shown above. nal line wire (8) onto the hook (9). pinched by objects.Attach it at the point as
6.Remove the breakaway cover (5) from the shown above.Check that the signal line con-
left cover. nector is covered by the connector cover (E).
5.Fixez la plaque de connexion (D) la 7.Raccorder le connecteur de ligne de signal 8.Placer le cache de connecteur (D) dans la
machine l'aide de 2 vis M4 20 (I). Rac- (6) sur le connecteur (7) de la machine. plaque de connexion (E). Prendre soin ne
cordez-les au point indiqu ci-dessus. Accrocher le fil de ligne de signal (8) sur le pas pincer le cble. Raccordez-les au point
6.Dposer le couvercle amovible (5) du cou- crochet (9). indiqu ci-dessus. Vrifier que le connecteur
vercle gauche. de ligne de signal est couvert par le cache
de connecteur (E).
5.Fije la placa de conexin (D) a la mquina 7.Conecte el conector de lnea de seales (6) 8.Acople la cubierta del conector (D) en la
mediante 2 tornillos M4 20 (I). Conctelas al conector (7) de la mquina. Enganche el placa de conexin (E). Tenga cuidado de
en el punto que se muestra arriba. cable de la lnea de seales (8) en el que el cable no quede atrapado por objetos.
6.Quite la cubierta divisoria (5) de la cubierta enganche (9). Conctelas en el punto que se muestra
izquierda. arriba. Compruebe que el conector de la
erta del conector (E).
5.Bringen Sie die Verbindungsplatte (D) mit 2 7.Verbinden Sie den Stecker der Signalleitung 8.Setzen Sie die Stecker-Abdeckung (D) in die
M4 20 Schrauben (I) am Gert an. Brin- (6) mit dem Steckverbinder im Gert (7). Verbindungsplatte (E) ein. Stellen Sie sicher,
gen Sie diese an der in der Abbildung Hngen Sie das Kabel der Signalleitung (8) dass das Kabel nicht eingeklemmt wird.
gezeigten Stelle an. in den Befestigungshaken (9) ein. Bringen Sie diese an der in der Abbildung
6.Nehmen Sie die Ablsungsabdeckung (5) gezeigten Stelle an. berprfen Sie, ob der
von der linken Abdeckung ab. Stecker der Signalleitung von der Stecker-
Abdeckung (E) abgedeckt ist.
5.Applicare la piastra di connessione (D) alla 7.Collegare il connettore di linea del segnale 8.Inserire il copri connettore (D) nella piastra di
macchina utilizzando le 2 viti M4 20 (I). (6) al connettore (7) sulla periferica. Aggan- connessione (E). Fare attenzione a non
Fissare nella posizione sopra indicata. ciare il cavo di linea del segnale (8) al gancio impigliare il cavo. Fissare nella posizione
6.Rimuovere il coperchio di distacco (5) dal (9). sopra indicata. Controllare che il connettore
coperchio sinistro. della linea del segnale sia coperto dal copri
connettore (E).
5. 2 M420(I) (D) 7. (6) 8. (E) (D)

(7) (8) (9)
6. (5)
(E)
5. M4 20(I) 2 7. (6) (7) 8. (D) (E)

(D) . . (8) (9) . (D)
. . .
6. (5) . . (E)
.
5. (D) M420(I)2 7.(6) 8.(E) (D)

(7) (8)

(9)
6. (5) (E)

10
11
11-1
11-2
10
11-1
11
10
9.Remove the screw (10).Remove the rear 10.Separate the rear cover(11) into the two cov- 11.Install the cover (11-1) using the screw (10)
cover (11) . ers(11-1,11-2). removed in step 9.
The cover (11-2) is not used.
9.Retirez la vis (10). Retire le capot arrire 10.Sparez le couvercle arrire (11) en deux 11.Installez le couvercle (11-1) l'aide de la vis
(11). couvercles (11-1, 11-2). (10) dpose l'tape 9.
Le couvercle (11-2) n'est pas utilis.
9.Quite el tornillo (10). Quite la cubierta poste- 10.Separe la cubierta posterior (11) en las dos 11.Instale la cubierta (11-1) con un tornillo (10)
rior (11). cubiertas (11-1, 11-2). quitado en el paso 9.
La cubierta (11-2) no se utiliza.
9.Entfernen Sie die Schraube (10). Entfernen 10.Teilen Sie die hintere Abdeckung (11) in zwei 11.Installieren Sie die Abdeckung (11-1) mit der
Sie die hintere Abdeckung (11). Abdeckungen (11-1, 11-2) auf. in Schritt 9 entfernten Schrauben (10).
Die Abdeckung (11-2) wird nicht bentigt.
9.Togliere la vite (10). Rimuovere il coperchio 10.Separare il coperchio posteriore (11) in due 11.Installare il coperchio (11-1) utilizzando la
posteriore (11). coperchi (11-1,11-2). vite (10) rimossa nel passo 9.
Il coperchio (11-2) non viene utilizzato.
9.10 11 10. (11) 2 (11-1,11-2) 11. 9 (10)

(11-2) (11-1)
9. (10) . (11) 10. (11) 2 (11-1, 11-2) 11. 9 (10)

. . (11-1) .
(11-2) .
9. (10) (11) 10.(11) 2 (11-1,11-2) 11. 9 (10) 11-1

(11-2)
11
13
14
15 D
12 13 16
14
14
12.Open the document finisher front cover 13.Insert the pin (15) on the connecting plate 14.Slowly push the lock frame (14) fully into the
(12).Remove the screw (13). Pull the lock (D) into the hole (16) on the document fin- machine so that the connectors at the far
frame (14) frontwards. isher. Connect the document finisher to the end are connected.
isher, adjust the height as described on
page 14.
12.Ouvrir le couvercle avant du finisseur de 13.Introduire la broche (15) sur la plaque de 14.Pousser doucement le cadre de verrouillage
document (12). Retirez la vis (13). Tirer le connexion (D) dans le trou (16) sur le finis- (14) fond dans la machine de sorte que les
cadre de verrouillage (14) vers le bas. seur de document. Connecter le finisseur de connecteurs l'extrmit soient raccords.
document sur la machine. 15.Fixez le bti de verrouillage (14) l'aide de
12.Abra la cubierta frontal del finalizador de 13.Inserte el pasador (15) de la placa de conex- 14.Empuje lentamente y hasta el fondo el
documentos (12). Quite el tornillo (13). in (D) en el orificio (16) del finalizador de marco del cierre (14) hacia la mquina de
Empuje el marco de cierre (14) hacia del- documentos. Conecte el finalizador de docu- modo que se conecten los conectores en el
ante. mentos a la mquina. extremo ms lejano.
en la pgina 14.
12.ffnen Sie die vordere Abdeckung des Fin- 13.Setzen Sie den Stift (15) der Verbindung- 14.Schieben Sie die Verriegelung (14) wieder
ishers (12). Entfernen Sie die Schraube (13). splatte (D) in die ffnung (16) des Finishers. langsam ins Gert, so dass die Verbindun-
Ziehen Sie die Verriegelung (14) nach vorne. Verbinden Sie den Finisher mit dem Gert. gen am anderen Ende des Gerts geschlos-
* Falls Sie den Finisher nicht anschlieen sen werden.
12.Aprire il coperchio frontale del finisher docu- 13.Inserire il perno (15) della piastra di connes- 14.Spingere lentamente la frame di blocco (14)
menti (12). Togliere la vite (13). Tirare in sione (D) nel foro (16) del finisher docu- nella macchina in modo che i connettori
avanti la frame di blocco (14). menti. Collegare il finisher documenti alla all'estremit risultino collegati.
documenti, regolare laltezza come
descritto a pagina 14.
12.12 13. (D) 15 14.14

13 14 16
P14 15. 12 1 13
14
12. (12) . 13. (D) (15) 14.

(13) . (14) (16) . (14)
. . .
P14 15. 12 131
. 14 .
12. 13. (D) (15) 14.

(12) (13)
(16) (14)
(14) 15. 12 13

P14
14

12
G
12
16.Install the staple cartridge (G).


page 18.
16.Installer la cartouche d'agrafes (G).

17.Refermer le couvercle avant (12).

age page 18.
16.Instale el cartucho de grapas (G).

17.Cierre la cubierta frontal (12).

en la pgina 18.

(G).

auf Seite 18 fort.
16.Installare il contenitore punti (G).


16. (G)
17. (12)
P18
16. (G) .
17. (12) .
18
.
16. (G)
17.(12)
P18
13
15
b
b a a a
b
16 15
21
Adjusting the height Compliant: The diameter (a) of the pin (15) is within the height range (b) of the curved section (21).
1.Check that the respective heights of the pins Non-compliant: The diameter (a) of the pin (15) is extends beyond the height range (b) of the curved
(15) on the connecting plate installed on the section (21).
machine and the connecting holes (16) on If the heights are non-compliant, use the procedure below to adjust the height.
the document finisher comply with the stan-
dards below.
Rglage de la hauteur Bon : Le diamtre (a) de l'ergot (15) est dans les limites de hauteur (b) de la partie courbe (21).
1.Vrifiez que les hauteurs respectives des Mauvais : Le diamtre (a) de l'ergot (15) dpasse les limites de hauteur (b) de la partie courbe (21).
ergots (15) sur la plaque de connexion Si la hauteur n'est pas conforme, l'ajuster en procdant comme indiqu ci-dessous.
installe sur la machine et les trous de con-
nexion (16) sur le finisseur de document
sont conformes aux rfrences ci-dessous.
Ajuste de la altura Cumple: el dimetro (a) del pasador (15) est dentro del rango de altura (b) de la seccin curvada
1.Compruebe que las alturas correspondien- (21).
tes de los pasadores (15) de la placa de No cumple: el dimetro (a) del pasador (15) sobrepasa el rango de altura (b) de la seccin curvada
fijacin instalados en la mquina y los orifi- (21).
cios de conexin (16) del finalizador de doc- Si las alturas no cumplen con las especificaciones, utilice el siguiente procedimiento para ajustar la
umentos cumplen las referencias de abajo. altura.
Einstellen der Hhe Korrekt: Der Durchmesser (a) des Stifts (15) befindet sich im Hhenbereich (b) des Kurvenabschnitts
1.berprfen Sie, dass die jeweilige Ghe der (21).
Stifte (15) der am Gert installierten Verbind- Nicht korrekt: Der Durchmesser (a) des Stifts (15) ragt ber den Hhenbereich (b) des Kurvenab-
ungsplatte und Verbindungsffnungen (16) schnitts (21) hinaus.
des Finishers mit den unten angegebenen Falls die Hhen nicht korrekt sind, mssen Sie sie wie folgend einstellen.
Werten bereinstimmen.
Regolazione dell'altezza Conformit: Il diametro (a) del perno (15) compreso nella gamma di altezza (b) della sezione cur-
1.Controllare che le rispettive altezze dei perni vata (21).
(15) sulla piastra di connessione installata Non conformit: Il diametro (a) del perno (15) si estende oltre la gamma di altezza (b) della sezione
sulla macchina e i fori di connessione (16) curvata (21).
sulla finisher documenti corrispondano ai Se le altezze sono non corrispondenti, utilizzare la procedura riportata sotto per regolare l'altezza.
riferimenti mostrati sotto.
(15) a (21) b
1. (15) (15) a (21) b
(16)

(15) a (21) b .
1. (15) (15) a (21) b .
(16) .
.
(15) (a) (21) (b)

1. (15) (15) (a) (21) (b)

(16)

14
27
24
23
22 26
25
2.Remove each of the screws (22) and 3.Remove the screw (25) to remove the span-
remove the front foot cover (23) and rear ner (26).
foot cover (24). 4.Loosen the 2 screws (27) on the front right
and on the rear right of the document fin-
isher.
2.Dposer toutes les vis (22) puis le couvercle 3.Dposer la vis (25) pour librer la cl (26).
du pied avant (23) et le couvercle du pied 4.Desserrer les 2 vis (27) du ct avant droit et
arrire (24). arrire droit du finisseur de document.
2.Quite cada uno de los tornillos (22) y quite la 3.Quite el tornillo (25) para extraer la llave
cubierta de la pata frontal (23) y la cubierta inglesa (26).
de la pata posterior (24). 4.Afloje los 2 tornillos (27) en los lados dere-
cho frontal y derecho posterior del finaliza-
dor de documentos.
2.Entfernen Sie smtliche Schrauben (22) und 3.Entfernen Sie die Schraube (25), um den
nehmen Sie die Vorderfuabdeckung (23) Schlssel (26) abzunehmen
und die Hinterfuabdeckung (24). 4.Lsen Sie die 2 Schrauben (27) vorne rechts
und hinten rechts am Finisher.
2.Rimuovere ciascuna delle viti (22) e quindi 3.Rimuovere la vite (25) per rimuovere la chi-
rimuovere la copertura del piede anteriore ave (26).
(23) e la copertura del piede posteriore (24). 4.Allentare le 2 viti (27) sulla parte anteriore
destra e posteriore destra della finisher doc-
umenti.
2. 1 (22) 3. (25) (26)

(23) (24) 4. 2
(27)
2. (22) 1 (23), 3. (25) 1 , (26)

(24) . .
4. (27) 2
.
2. (22) 1 3. (25)1 (26)

(23)
(24)
4.
(27) 2
15
28
29
30
26
5.Turn the adjustment bolts (28) with the spanner (26) to adjust the height of the document finisher. 7.If the distances between the document fin-
Turning the adjustment bolt clockwise lifts the document finisher, and turning it counterclockwise isher and the machine (29, 30) are unequal,
lowers the document finisher. use the procedure below to adjust the spac-
6.Retighten each of the 2 screws (27) and replace the spanner (26). ing.
5.Faire tourner les boulons de rglage (28) avec la cl (26) pour ajuster la hauteur du finisseur de 7.Si les distances entre le finisseur de docu-
document. ment et la machine (29, 30) sont ingales,
Tourner le boulon de rglage dans le sens horloger pour lever le finisseur de document, et dans rgler l'espacement en procdant de la
le sens contraire au sens horloger pour le descendre. manire suivante.
6.Resserrer les 2 vis (27) et repositionner la cl (26) au mme endroit.
5.Gire los pernos de ajuste (28) con la llave inglesa (26) para ajustar la altura del finalizador de 7.Si las distancias entre el finalizador de docu-
documentos. mentos y la mquina (29, 30) no son
Al girar el perno de ajuste en la direccin de las manecillas del reloj se levanta el finalizador de iguales, utilice el siguiente procedimiento
documentos y al girar en sentido contrario a las manecillas del reloj baja el finalizador de docu- para ajustar la separacin.
mentos.
6.Vuelva a apretar los 2 tornillos (27) y coloque la llave inglesa en su lugar (26).
5.Drehen Sie die Einstellschrauben (28) mit dem Schlssel (26), um die Hhe des Finishers 7.Falls die Abstnde zwischen dem Finisher
einzustellen. und dem Gert (29, 30) ungleich sind, fhren
Durch Drehen der Einstellschraube im Uhrzeigersinn wird der Finisher angehoben, whrend er Sie die unten angegebenen Schritte aus, um
durch Drehen entgegen dem Uhrzeigersinn abgesenkt wird. den Abstand zu korrigieren.
6.Ziehen Sie die 2 Schrauben (27) wieder an und verstauen Sie den Schlssel (26) wieder.
5.Ruotare i bulloni di regolazione (28) con la chiave (26) per regolare l'altezza della finisher docu- 7.Se le distanze tra la finisher documenti e la
menti. macchina (29, 30) sono diverse, attenersi
Ruotando il bullone di regolazione in senso orario si solleva la finisher documenti, mentre ruotan- alla sottostante procedura per regolare la
dolo in senso antiorario si abbassa la finisher documenti. spaziatura.
6.Ristringere ciascuna delle 2 viti (27) e riporre la chiave (26).
5. (26) (28) 7. (2930)

6. 2 (27) (26)
5. (26) (28) . 7. (29, 30)

,
. .
6. (27) 2 (26) .
5.(26) (28)
7.
(2930)

6. (27) 2
(26)
16
31
32
8.Loosen the 2 screws (31) on the front left 9.Turn the adjustment bolts (32) with a Philips-head screwdriver to adjust the height of the docu-
and on the rear left of the document finisher. ment finisher.
Turning the adjustment bolt clockwise lifts the document finisher, and turning it counterclockwise
lowers the document finisher.
10.Retighten each of the 2 screws (31).
11.Replace the front foot cover (23) and rear foot cover (24).
8.Desserrer les 2 vis (31) du ct avant 9.Faire tourner les boulons de rglage (32) l'aide d'un tournevis cruciforme pour ajuster la hau-
gauche et arrire gauche du finisseur de teur du finisseur de document.
document. Tourner le boulon de rglage dans le sens horloger pour lever le finisseur de document, et dans
le sens contraire au sens horloger pour le descendre.
11.Reposer le couvercle du pied avant (23) et le couvercle du pied arrire (24).
8.Afloje los 2 tornillos (31) en los lados izqui- 9.Gire los pernos de ajuste (32) con un destornillador de cabeza Philips para ajustar la altura del
erdo frontal e izquierdo posterior del finaliza- finalizador de documentos.
dor de documentos. Al girar el perno de ajuste en la direccin de las manecillas del reloj se levanta el finalizador de
documentos y al girar en sentido contrario a las manecillas del reloj baja el finalizador de docu-
mentos.
11.Vuelva a colocar la cubierta de la pata frontal (23) y la cubierta de la pata posterior (24).
8.Lsen Sie die 2 Schrauben (31) vorne links 9.Stellen Sie die Einstellschrauben (32) mit einem Kreuzschlitzschraubendreher ein, um die Hhe
und hinten links am Finisher. des Finishers zu korrigieren.
Durch Drehen der Einstellschraube im Uhrzeigersinn wird der Finisher angehoben, whrend er
durch Drehen entgegen dem Uhrzeigersinn abgesenkt wird.
10.Ziehen Sie die 2 Schrauben (31) nach.
11.Setzen Sie die Vorderfuabdeckung (23) und die Hinterfuabdeckung (24) wieder ein.
8.Allentare le 2 viti (31) sulla parte anteriore 9.Ruotare i bulloni di regolazione (32) con un cacciavite con testa a croce tipo Philips per regolare
sinistra e posteriore sinistra della finisher l'altezza della finisher documenti.
documenti. Ruotando il bullone di regolazione in senso orario si solleva la finisher documenti, mentre ruotan-
dolo in senso antiorario si abbassa la finisher documenti.
10.Ristringere ciascuna delle 2 viti (31).
11.Ricollocare la copertura del piede anteriore (23) e la copertura del piede posteriore (24).
8. 2 9. (32)
(31)
10. 2 (31)
11. (23) (24)
8. (31) 2 9. (32) .
. ,
.
10. (31) 2 .
11. (23), (24) .
8. 9. (32)
(31) 2

10. (31) 2
11. (23) (24)
17
78.5mm2.5
158mm2.5
Adjusting the stapling position

1.Connect the machine power plug to the wall outlet and turn the machine main power switch on.
2.Make a test copy using staple mode (double stapled).
3.Check whether the stapling position is off-center.If the staple position is off-center, follow the procedure below to adjust the position.
<Reference value> 78.5 mm 2.5 mm from the center of the paper
Ajustement de la position d'agrafage

1.Insrer la fiche dalimentation de la machine dans la prise murale et mettre la machine sous tension.
2.Procder une copie d'essai en mode agrafage (double agrafage).
3.Vrifier que la position d'agrafage n'est pas en dcalage. Si la position d'agrafage est dcale, la rgler en procdant de la manire suivante.
<Valeur de rfrence> 78,5 mm 2,5 mm depuis le milieu de la feuille de papier.
Ajuste de la posicin de grapado

1.Conecte el enchufe de la mquina al receptculo de pared y encienda el interruptor principal de la mquina.
2.Haga una copia de prueba en el modo de grapado (grapado doble).
3.Compruebe si la posicin de grapado est descentrada. Si la posicin de grapado est descentrada, realice el siguiente procedimiento para ajustar la
posicin.
<Valor de referencia> 78,5 mm 2,5 mm del centro del papel
Justage der Heftposition

1.Stecken Sie den Netzstecker des Gerts in die Wandsteckdose und schalten Sie das Gert am Gauptschalter ein.
2.Erstellen Sie eine Probekopie im Heftmodus (doppelt geheftet).
3.Prfen Sie, ob die Heftposition auermittig ist. Falls die Heftposition auermittig ist, mssen Sie sie wie folgend einstellen.
<Bezugswert> 78,5 mm 2,5 mm von der Blattmitte
Regolazione della posizione di pinzatura

1.Collegare la spina alla presa di corrente a muro e accendere linterruttore di alimentazione della macchina.
2.Eseguire una copia di prova utilizzando la modalit di spillatura con punti metallici (spillatura doppia).
3.Verificare che la posizione di spillatura non sia fuori centro. Se la posizione di spillatura fuori centro, seguire la procedura riportata sotto per regolare
la posizione.
<Valore di riferimento> 78,5 mm 2,5 mm dal centro del foglio
1.
2.2
3.
78.5mm 2.5mm

1. ON .
2. 2 .
3. . .
78.5mm 2.5mm
1. ON
2.2

3.

78.5mm 2.5mm
18
(a) (b)
4.Set maintenance mode U246, select Finisher and Staple HP. 6.Perform a test copy.
5.Adjust the values. 7.Repeat steps 4 to 6 until the staple position is within the reference
If the paper is stapled too close to the front of the machine (a): Increase value.
the setting value. <Reference value> 78.5 mm 2.5 mm from the center of the paper
If the paper is stapled too close to the rear of the machine (b):
Decrease the setting value.
4.Passer en mode maintenance U246, slectionner Finisher et Staple 6.Effectuer une copie de test.
HP. 7.Recommencer les tapes 4 6 jusqu' ce que la position d'agrafe soit
5.Rgler les valeurs. conforme la valeur de rfrence
Si le papier est agraf trop prs de l'avant de la machine (a): aug- <Valeur de rfrence> 78,5 mm 2,5 mm depuis le milieu de la feuille
menter la valeur de rglage. de papier.
Si le papier est agraf trop prs de l'arrire de la machine (b): rduire
la valeur de rglage.
4.Entre en el modo de mantenimiento U246, seleccione Finisher y Staple 6.Haga una copia de prueba.
HP. 7.Repita los pasos 4 a 6 hasta que la posicin de grapado se encuentre
5.Ajuste los valores. dentro del valor de referencia.
Si el grapado del papel se encuentra demasiado cerca del frente de la <Valor de referencia> 78,5 mm 2,5 mm del centro del pape
mquina (a): aumente el valor de configuracin.
Si el grapado del papel se encuentra demasiado cerca de la parte pos-
terior de la mquina (b): disminuya el valor de configuracin.
4.Schalten Sie in den Wartungsmodus U246, whlen Sie Finisher und 6.Eine Testkopie erstellen.
Staple HP. 7.Wiederholen Sie die Schritte 4 bis 6, bis die Heftposition im Bereich
5.Die Werte einstellen. des Bezugswerts liegt.
Falls das Papier zu nahe am vorderen Rand des Gerts (a) abgesta- <Bezugswert> 78,5 mm 2,5 mm von der Blattmitte
pelt wird: Vergrern Sie den Stellwert.
Falls das Papier zu nahe am hinteren Rand des Gerts (b) abgestapelt
wird: Verkleinern Sie den Stellwert.
4.Impostare la modalit manutenzione U246, selezionare Finisher e Sta- 6.Eseguire una copia di prova.
ple HP. 7.Ripetere i passi 4 to 6 finch la posizione di spillatura risulta all'interno
5.Regolare i valori. del valore di riferimento.
Se il foglio viene spillato troppo vicino alla parte anteriore della mac- <Valore di riferimento> 78,5 mm 2,5 mm dal centro del foglio
china (a): Aumentare il valore di impostazione.
Se il foglio viene spillato troppo vicino alla parte posteriore della mac-
china (b): Diminuire il valore di impostazione.
4. U246 FinisherStaple HP 6.
5. 7. 4 6
(a) 78.5mm 2.5mm
(b)
4. U246 Finisher, Staple HP 6. .

. 7. 4 6 .
5. . 78.5mm 2.5mm
(a) .
(b) .
4. U246 Finisher
Staple HP 6.
7. 4 6
5. 78.5mm 2.5mm
(a)
(b)
19
References to medium-speed MFPs in this document denote 30/30, 35/35, 45/45 and 55/50 ppm color machines, and 35, 45 and 55 ppm
monochrome machines.
Dans le prsent document, les rfrences aux MFP vitesse moyenne renvoient aux machines couleurs 30/30, 35/35, 45/45 et 55/50 ppm et
aux machines monochromes 35, 45 et 55 ppm.
Dans le prsent document, les rfrences aux MFP grande vitesse renvoient aux machines couleurs 65/65 et 75/70 ppm et aux machines
monochromes 65 et 80 ppm.
Para la instalacin con una impresora, consulte las pginas de la 8 a la 14
.
Las referencias a las MFP de velocidad media de este documento corresponden a las mquinas a color de 30/30, 35/35, 45/45 y 55/50 ppm
y a las mquinas monocromticas de 35, 45 y 55 ppm.
Las referencias a las MFP de alta velocidad de este documento corresponden a las mquinas a color de 65/65 y 75/70 ppm y a las mquinas
Bei Installation an einem Dokumentenfinisher siehe Seiten 1 bis 7.
Angaben fr MFP der mittleren Leistungsklasse in dieser Anleitung gelten fr die 30/30, 35/35, 45/45 und 55/50 ppm Vollfarbenkopierer sowie fr die
35, 45 und 55 ppm Monochrommaschinen.
Angaben fr MFP der Hochleistungsklasse in dieser Anleitung gelten fr die 65/65 und 75/70 ppm Vollfarbenkopierer sowie fr die 65 und 80 ppm
Monochrommaschinen.
I riferimenti per le MFP a velocit media riportati in questo documento indicano le macchine a colori 30/30, 35/35, 45/45 e 55/50 ppm, e le
macchine monocromatiche 35, 45 e 55 ppm.
I riferimenti per le MFP a velocit alta riportati in questo documento indicano le macchine a colori 65/65 e 75/70 ppm, e le macchine monocro-
matiche 65 e 80 ppm.

MFP P1-P7
P8-P14
MFP 30/30 35/35 45/45 55/50 35 45 55
MFP 65/65 75/70 65 80
. .
MFP 1 ~7 .
8 ~14 .
MFP 30/30 , 35/35 , 45/45 , 55/50 , 35 , 45 , 55 .
MFP 65/65 , 75/70 , 65 , 80 .

MFP 1 7
8 14
MFP 30/30 35/35 45/45 55/50 35 45 55
MFP 65/65 75/70 65 80
A
I(M4x8)
B
D
F J(M4x20)
C
E H
G
Supplied parts G. Eject guide ................................................. 1 Be sure to remove any tape and/or cushioning
A. Document finisher...................................... 1 H. Staple cartridge.......................................... 1 materials from the parts supplied.
B. Eject tray.................................................... 1 I. M4 8 screw ............................................. 2
C. Earth connection plate............................... 1 J. M4 20 screw ........................................... 2
D. Earth spring ............................................... 1
E. Connecting plate........................................ 1
F. Connector cover ........................................ 1
Pices fournies G. Guide d'jection ......................................... 1 Veillez retirer les morceaux de bande adh-
A. Finisseur de document .............................. 1 H. Cartouche dagrafes .................................. 1 sive et/ou les matriaux de rembourrage des
B. Bac d'jection ............................................ 1 I. Vis M4 8.................................................. 2 pices fournies.
C. Plaque de raccordement de mise la terre1 J. Vis M4 20................................................ 2
D. Ressort de mise la terre ......................... 1
E. Plaque de connexion ................................. 1
F. Cache de connecteur ................................ 1
Partes suministradas G. Gua de salida............................................ 1 Asegrese de despegar todas las cintas y/o
A. Finalizador de documentos ....................... 1 H. Cartucho de grapas ................................... 1 material amortiguador de las partes suministra-
B. Bandeja de salida ...................................... 1 I. Tornillo M4 8 ........................................... 2 das.
C. Placa de conexin a tierra ......................... 1 J. Tornillo M4 20 ......................................... 2
D. Resorte de conexin a tierra ..................... 1
E. Placa de conexin ..................................... 1
F. Cubierta del conector................................. 1
Enthaltene Teile G. Ausgabefhrung ........................................ 1 Stellen Sie sicher, dass smtliche Klebebnder
A. Finisher...................................................... 1 H. Heftklammermagazin................................. 1 und/oder Polstermaterial von den gelieferten
B. Auswerffach ............................................... 1 I. M4 8 Schraube ....................................... 2 Teilen entfernt wurden.
C. Grundanschlussplatte................................ 1 J. M4 20 Schraube ..................................... 2
D. Grundfeder ................................................ 1
E. Verbindungsplatte...................................... 1
F. Stecker-Abdeckung ................................... 1
Parti fornite G. Guida di espulsione ................................... 1 Rimuovere tutti i nastri adesivi e/o i materiali di
A. Finisher documenti .................................... 1 H. Contenitore punti ...................................... 1 protezione dalle parti fornite.
B. Vassoio di espulsione ................................ 1 I. Vite M4 8................................................. 2
C. Piastra di connessione per messa a terra . 1 J. Vite M4 20............................................... 2
D. Molla di messa a terra ............................... 1
E. Piastra di connessione .............................. 1
F. Copri connettore ........................................ 1
F. ...........................1
A. ............................... 1 G. ..........................1
B. ............................. 1 H. .............................1
C. ........................... 1 I. M48 ............................2
D. ............................. 1 J. M420 ...........................2
E. ............................... 1
F. ........................................ 1 ,
A. ........................................ 1 G. ....................................... 1 .
B. ........................................ 1 H. ............................... 1
C. ........................................ 1 I. M48......................................... 2
D. ........................................ 1 J. M420 ....................................... 2
E. .............................................. 1
G. ..........................1
A. ........... 1 H. ...............1

B. ........................... 1 I. M48 ............................2
C. ......................... 1 J. M420 ...........................2
D. ........................... 1
E. ............................... 1
F. ..................... 1
1
B A

When installing on a medium-speed MFP, the Before starting installation, be sure to turn the back of the eject tray (B) into the holes (2) in
Attachment Kit (AK-730 or AK-731) must be main power switch of the machine off, and the document finisher (A) lift.
installed before the document finisher is unplug the power plug from the wall outlet.
installed.

Lors de l'installation sur une imprimante multi- Avant de commencer l'installation, s'assurer de dos du bac d'jection (B) dans les trous (2)
fonction vitesse moyenne, le kit de fixation mettre la machine hors tension et de du dispositif de levage du finisseur de docu-
(AK-730 ou AK-731) doit tre install avant dbrancher la fiche d'alimentation de la prise ment (A).
d'installer le finisseur de document. murale.

Si se instala en un MFP de velocidad media, el Antes de iniciar la instalacin, asegrese de parte posterior de la bandeja de salida (B)
Kit de conexin (AK-730 o AK-731) se debe apagar el interruptor de encendido de la en los orificios (2) del elevador del finaliza-
instalar antes de instalarse el finalizador de doc- mquina y desenchufar el cable de alimentacin dor de documentos (A).
umentos. de la toma de pared.

Bei der Installation an einem mittelschnellen Bevor Sie mit der Installation beginnen berzeu- an der Rckseite des Auswerffachs (B) in
MFP muss das Attachment-Kit (AK-730 oder gen Sie sich, dass der Netzschalter des Gerts die ffnungen (2) an der Hebeplatte des Fin-
AK-731) vor dem Finisher installiert werden. ausgeschaltet und das Stromkabel aus der ishers (A) ein.

Quando si installa un MFP di fascia media, Prima di iniziare l'installazione, spegnere la vassoio di espulsione (B) nei fori (2) sul soll-
prima di installare il finisher documenti occorre macchina e scollegare la spina dalla presa di evatore della finisher documenti (A).
installare l'unit Attachment Kit (AK-730 o AK- corrente.
731).
1. (B) 2 (1)
MFP (A) (2)
AK-730 AK-731)
1. (B) (1) 2
MFP (A) (2)
(AK-730 AK-731) .
. .
1. (B) (1)2
MFP OFF
(A)
(2)
AK-730 AK-731)
2
I(M4x8) I(M4x8)
C
C
D
I(M4x8)
I(M4x8)
Installation on medium-speed MFPs Installation on high-speed MFPs

2.Using an M4 8 screw (I), secure the earth spring (D) in the location 2.Using an M4 8 screw (I), secure the earth spring (D) in the location
indicated by the "55" marking on the earth connection plate (C). indicated by the "65" marking on the earth connection plate (C).
3.Attach the earth connection plate (C) to the center of the bottom of the 3.Attach the earth connection plate (C) to the front side of the bottom of
document finisher using an M4 8 screw (I). the document finisher using an M4 8 screw (I).
Proceed to step 6.The procedure for installing the kit on a high-speed
MFP is described on the following steps.
Montage sur des MFP vitesse moyenne Montage sur des MFP grande vitesse
2. En procdant l'aide d'une vis M4 8 (I), fixez le ressort de mise la terre (D) 2.En procdant l'aide d'une vis M4 8 (I), fixez le ressort de mise la
l'endroit indiqu par la marque "55" sur la plaque de raccordement de mise la terre (D) l'endroit indiqu par la marque "65" sur la plaque de rac-
terre (C).
cordement de mise la terre (C).
3. Fixez la plaque de raccordement de mise la terre (C) au milieu de la partie
infrieure du finisseur de document avec une vis M4 8 (I). 3.Fixez la plaque de raccordement de mise la terre (C) l'avant de la
Passer l'tape 6. La procdure d'installation du kit sur l'imprimante multifonc- partie infrieure du finisseur de document avec une vis M4 8 (I).
tion grande vitesse est dcrite dans les tapes suivantes.
Instalacin en las MFP de velocidad media Instalacin en las MFP de alta velocidad
2. Con un tornillo M4 8 (I), asegure el resorte de conexin a tierra (D) en el 2.Con un tornillo M4 8 (I), asegure el resorte de conexin a tierra (D)
lugar indicado por la marca "55" de la placa de conexin a tierra (C). en el lugar indicado por la marca "65" de la placa de conexin a tierra
3. Fije la placa de conexin a tierra (C) en el centro de la parte inferior del (C).
finalizador de documentos usando un tornillo M4 8 (I). 3.Fije la placa de conexin a tierra (C) en el lado frontal de la parte infe-
Vaya al paso 6.En los siguientes pasos se describe el procedimiento rior del finalizador de documentos usando un tornillo M4 8 (I).
de instalacin del kit en un MFP de velocidad alta.
Installation an MFP der mittleren Leistungsklasse Installation an MFP der Hochleistungsklasse

2. Befestigen Sie die Grundfeder (D) mit einer M4 8 Schraube (I) an der mit 2.Befestigen Sie die Grundfeder (D) mit einer M4 8 Schraube (I) an der
"55" bezeichneten Stelle der Grundanschlussplatte (C). mit "65" bezeichneten Stelle der Grundanschlussplatte (C).
3. Bringen Sie die Grundanschlussplatte (C) mit einer M4 8 Schraube (I) mit- 3.Bringen Sie die Grundanschlussplatte (C) mit einer M4 8 Schraube
tig an der Unterseite des Finishers an. (I) vorne an der Unterseite des Finishers an.
Gehen Sie weiter zu Schritt 6.Die Vorgehensweise zur Installation des Kits
an einem schnellen MFP wird in den folgenden Schritten beschrieben.
Installazione sulle MFP a velocit media Installazione sulle MFP a velocit alta
2. Utilizzando una vite M4 8 (I), fissare la molla di messa a terra (D) nella 2.Utilizzando una vite M4 8 (I), fissare la molla di messa a terra (D)
posizione indicata dal segno "55" sulla piastra di connessione per messa a terra nella posizione indicata dal segno "65" sulla piastra di connessione
(C).
per messa a terra (C).
3. Applicare la piastra di connessione per messa a terra (C) al centro in basso della
finisher documenti utilizzando una vite M4 8 (I). 3.Applicare la piastra di connessione per messa a terra (C) al lato ante-
Procedere al passo 6. La procedura di installazione del Kit su un MFP di fascia riore in basso della finisher documenti utilizzando una vite M4 8 (I).
alta descritta nelle pagine successive.
MFP MFP
2. (C) 55 1 M48(I) 2. (C) 65 1 M48(I)
(D) (D)
3. M48(I) (C) 3. M48(I) (C)
6 MFP
MFP MFP
2. (C) 55 M48(I) 1 2. (C) 65 M48(I) 1
(D) . (D) .
3. M48(I) (C) . 3. M48(I) (C)
6 . MFP .
.
MFP MFP
2. (C) 55 M48(I) 2. (C) 65 M48(I)
(D) (D)
3. M48(I) (C) 3. M48(I) (C)

6 MFP
3
6
G 6
5
4
Only for installation on high-speed MFPs 6.Install the eject guide (G) by fitting the 2
If installing on a medium-speed MFP, proceed to step 6. eject guide pins (6) into the holes in the
4.Remove the machine interface cover (3). machine.
5.Remove the screw (4) and remove the controller cover (5).
Pour montage sur des MFP grande vitesse uniquement 6.Installer le guide d'jection (G) en insrant
Si le montage est fait sur un MFP vitesse moyenne, passer l'tape 6. les 2 ergots du guide d'jection (6) dans les
4.Dposer le couvercle d'interface (3) de la machine. trous de la machine.
5.Dposer la vis (4) puis le couvercle du contrleur (5).
Solo para la instalacin en las MFP de alta velocidad 6.Instale la gua de salida (G) encajando los 2
Si se instala en una MFP de velocidad media, vaya al paso 6. pasadores de la gua de salida (6) en los ori-
4.Quite la cubierta de la interfaz (3) de la mquina. ficios de la mquina.
5.Quite el tornillo (4) y quite la cubierta del controlador (5).
Nur bei Installation an MFP der Hochleistungsklasse 6.Installieren Sie die Ausgabefhrung (G),
Gehen Sie zur Installation an einem MFP der mittleren Leistungsklasse weiter zu Schritt 6. indem Sie die beiden Stifte (6) der Aus-
4.Nehmen Sie die Schnittstellenabdeckung (3) des Gerts ab. werffhrung in die Aufnahmen des Gerts
5.Entfernen Sie die Schraube (4) und nehmen Sie die Controller-Abdeckung (5) ab. einsetzen.
Solo per l'installazione sulle MFP a velocit alta 6.Installare la guida di espulsione (G) inser-
Se si installa su una MFP a velocit media, procedere al passo 6. endo i 2 perni (6) della guida di espulsione
4.Rimuovere la copertura di interfaccia (3) della macchina. nei fori della macchina.
5.Rimuovere la vite (4) e quindi rimuovere il coperchio del controller (5).
MFP 6. (G) 2 (6)

MFP 6
4. (3)
5. 1 (4) (5)
MFP 6. (G) (6) 2

MFP 6 . .
4. (3) .
5. (4) 1 (5) .
MFP 6. (G) (6)2

MFP 6
4.(3)
5. (4) (5)
4
J(M4x20) 10 11
J(M4x20)
F F
7
E
E E
8 9
7.Attach the connecting plate (E) to the 9.Connect the signal line connector (8) to the 10.Fit the connector cover (F) in the connecting
machine using 2 M4 20 screws (J). Attach connector (9) on the machine. Hook the sig- plate (E). Take care not to get the cable
them at the point as shown above. nal line wire (10) onto the hook (11). pinched by objects. Attach it at the point as
Only if installing to a medium-speed MFP shown above. Check that the signal line con-
If installing on a high-speed MFP, proceed to step 9. nector is covered by the connector cover (F).
left cover.
7. Fixez la plaque de connexion (E) la machine l'aide de 9.Raccorder le connecteur de ligne de signal 10.Placer le cache de connecteur (F) dans la
2 vis M4 20 (J).Raccordez-les au point indiqu ci-des- (8) sur le connecteur (9) de la machine. plaque de connexion (E).Prendre soin ne
sus.
Uniquement en cas d'installation sur un MFP vitesse Accrocher le fil de ligne de signal (10) sur le pas pincer le cble. Raccordez-les au point
moyenne crochet (11). indiqu ci-dessus. Vrifier que le connecteur
Si le montage est fait sur un MFP grande vitesse, passer de ligne de signal est couvert par le cache
l'tape 9.
8. Dposer le couvercle amovible (7) du couvercle gauche. de connecteur (F).
7. Fije la placa de conexin (E) a la mquina medi- 9.Conecte el conector de lnea de seales (8) 10.Acople la cubierta del conector (F) en la
ante 2 tornillos M4 20 (J).Conctelas en el punto al conector (9) de la mquina. Enganche el placa de conexin (E).Tenga cuidado de que
que se muestra arriba.
cable de la lnea de seales (10) en el el cable no quede atrapado por objetos.
Solo si instala en una MFP de velocidad media
Si se instala en una MFP de alta velocidad, vaya al enganche (11). Conctelas en el punto que se muestra
paso 9. arriba. Compruebe que el conector de la
8. Quite la cubierta divisoria (7) de la cubierta izqui- lnea de seales quede cubierto por la cubi-
erda. erta del conector (F).
7. Bringen Sie die Verbindungsplatte (E) mit 2 M4 20 9.Verbinden Sie den Stecker der Signalleitung 10.Setzen Sie die Stecker-Abdeckung (F) in die
Schrauben (J) am Gert an.Bringen Sie diese an der in der (8) mit dem Steckverbinder im Gert (9). Verbindungsplatte (E) ein. Stellen Sie sicher,
Abbildung gezeigten Stelle an.
Nur bei Installation eines MFP der mittleren Leistungsk- Hngen Sie das Kabel der Signalleitung (10) dass das Kabel nicht eingeklemmt wird.
lasse in den Befestigungshaken (11) ein. Bringen Sie diese an der in der Abbildung
Gehen Sie zur Installation an einem MFP der Hochleistungsk-
lasse weiter zu Schritt 9. gezeigten Stelle an. berprfen Sie, ob der
8. Nehmen Sie die Ablsungsabdeckung (7) von der linken Stecker der Signalleitung von der Stecker-
Abdeckung ab. Abdeckung (F) abgedeckt ist.
7. Applicare la piastra di connessione (E) alla mac- 9.Collegare il connettore di linea del segnale 10.Inserire il copri connettore (F) nella piastra di
china utilizzando le 2 viti M4 20 (J).Fissare nella (8) al connettore (9) sulla periferica. Aggan- connessione (E).Fare attenzione a non impi-
posizione sopra indicata.
ciare il cavo di linea del segnale (10) al gan- gliare il cavo.Fissare nella posizione sopra
Solo se si installa ad un'MFP a velocit media
Se si installa su una MFP a velocit alta, procedere al cio (11). indicata.Controllare che il connettore della
passo 9. linea del segnale sia coperto dal copri con-
8. Rimuovere il coperchio di distacco (7) dal coper- nettore (F).
chio sinistro.
7. 2 M420(J) (E) 9.8 10. (F) (E)

9 1011

MFP 9 (F)
8.7
7. M4 20(J) 2 (E) 9. (8) (9) 10. (F) (E)

. . (10) . (F)
. .
(11) . .
MFP
MFP 9 . (F)
. .
8. (7) .
7. (E) M420(J)2 9.(8) 10.(F) (E)

(9) (10)

(11)
(F)
MFP

MFP 9
8. (7)
5
14
3 12 13
14
11.Attach the interface cover (3)* on the machine. 12.Open the document finisher upper front
* Installing with a high-speed MFP : the cover which was removed in step 4. cover (12). Remove the screw (13). Pull the
Installing with a medium-speed MFP : the cover which was removed while installing the AK-730 lock frame (14) frontwards.
or AK-731.
11.Raccordez le couvercle d'interface (3)* la machine. 12.Ouvrir le couvercle avant suprieur du finis-
* Installation avec une imprimante multifonction grande vitesse : le cache qui a t retir seur de document (12). Retirez la vis (13).
l'tape 4. Tirer le cadre de verrouillage (14) vers le
Installation avec une imprimante multifonction moyenne vitesse : le cache qui a t retir lors bas.
de l'installation de l'AK-730 ou AK-731.
11.Conecte la cubierta de interfaz (3)* de la mquina. 12.Abra la cubierta frontal superior del finaliza-
* Instalacin con un MFP de velocidad alta : la cubierta que se quit en el paso 4. dor de documentos (12). Quite el tornillo
Instalacin con un MFP de velocidad media : la cubierta que se quit al instalar el kit AK-730 o (13). Empuje el marco de cierre (14) hacia
AK-731. delante.
11.Bringen Sie die Schnittstellenabdeckung (3)* am Gert an. 12.ffnen Sie die obere vordere Abdeckung
*Installation an einem MFP der Hochleistungsklasse : die Abdeckung, die in Schritt 4 entfernt des Finishers (12). Entfernen Sie die
wurde Schraube (13). Ziehen Sie die Verriegelung
Installation an einem MFP der mittleren Leistungsklasse : die Abdeckung, die zur Installation (14) nach vorne.
des AK-730 oder AK-731 entfernt wurde
11.Fissare la copertura di interfaccia (3)* sulla macchina. 12.Aprire il coperchio frontale superiore del fin-
* Installazione su un MFP di fascia alta : il coperchio che stato rimosso al punto 4 isher documenti (12). Togliere la vite (13).
Installazione su un MFP di fascia media : il coperchio che stato rimosso per installare il kit AK- Tirare in avanti la frame di blocco (14).
730 o AK-731
11. (3)* 12.12

* MFP : 4 13 14
MFP : AK-730 AK-731
11. (3)* . 12. (12) .

* MFP : 4 (13) . (14)
MFP : AK-730 AK-731 .
11.(3)* 12.
* MFP : 4 (12) (13)

MFP : AK-730 AK-731 (14)
6
13
15 E
16 14
H
12
13.Insert the pin (15) on the connecting plate 14.Slowly push the lock frame (14) fully into the 16.Install the staple cartridge (H).
(E) into the hole (16) on the document fin- machine so that the connectors at the far 17.Close the upper front cover (12).
isher. Connect the document finisher to the end are connected.
machine. 15.Secure the lock frame (14) using the screw Proceed to adjusting the stapling position on
* If you cannot connect the document fin- (13) removed in step 12. page 20.
isher, adjust the height as described on page
15.
13.Introduire la broche (15) sur la plaque de 14.Pousser doucement le cadre de verrouillage 16.Installer la cartouche d'agrafes (H).
connexion (E) dans le trou (16) sur le finis- (14) fond dans la machine de sorte que les 17.Refermer le couvercle avant suprieur (12).
seur de document. Connecter le finisseur de connecteurs l'extrmit soient raccords.
document sur la machine. 15.Fixez le bti de verrouillage (14) l'aide de Passez l'ajustement de la position d'agraf-
* S'il s'avre impossible de connecter le la vis (13) dpose l'tape 12. age page 20.
13.Inserte el pasador (15) de la placa de conex- 14.Empuje lentamente y hasta el fondo el 16.Instale el cartucho de grapas (H).
in (E) en el orificio (16) del finalizador de marco del cierre (14) hacia la mquina de 17.Cierre la cubierta frontal superior (12).
documentos. Conecte el finalizador de docu- modo que se conecten los conectores en el
mentos a la mquina. extremo ms lejano. Proceda al ajuste de la posicin de grapado
* Si no puede conectar el finalizador de doc- 15.Asegure la carcasa de bloqueo (14) por en la pgina 20.
en la pgina 15.
13.Setzen Sie den Stift (15) der Verbindung- 14.Schieben Sie die Verriegelung (14) wieder 16.Installieren Sie das Heftklammer-Magazin
splatte (E) in die ffnung (16) des Finishers. langsam ins Gert, so dass die Verbindun- (H).
Verbinden Sie den Finisher mit dem Gert. gen am anderen Ende des Gerts geschlos- 17.Schlieen Sie die obere vordere Abdeckung
* Falls Sie den Finisher nicht anschlieen sen werden. (12).
15 beschrieben einstellen. der in Schritt 12 entfernten Schraube (13). Fahren Sie mit der Justage der Heftposition
auf Seite 20 fort.
13.Inserire il perno (15) della piastra di connes- 14.Spingere lentamente la frame di blocco (14) 16.Installare il contenitore punti (H).
sione (E) nel foro (16) del finisher docu- nella macchina in modo che i connettori 17.Chiudere il coperchio superiore anteriore
menti. Collegare il finisher documenti alla all'estremit risultino collegati. (12).
* Se non possibile collegare la finisher la vite (13) rimossa nel passo 12. Proseguire con la regolazione della
documenti, regolare laltezza come descritto posizione di pinzatura a pagina 20.
a pagina 15.
13. (E) 15 14.14 16. (H)

16 17. (12)
P15 15. 12 1 (13)
(14) P20
13. (E) (15) 14. 16. (H) .

(16) . (14) 17. (12) .
. .
P15 15. 12 131 20
. 14 . .
13. (E) (15) 14. 16. (H)

(16) (14) 17.(12)
15. 12 13

P15
14 P20

7
A
AK-735
I(M4x8)
J(M4x20)
B
D
F
C Y
G H
E
Z
Supplied parts G. Eject guide ................................................. 1 C ,D and Z are not used.

A. Document finisher...................................... 1 H. Staple cartridge.......................................... 1
B. Eject tray.................................................... 1 I. M4 8 screw ............................................. 3 Be sure to remove any tape and/or cushioning
C. Earth connection plate............................... 1 J. M4 20 screw ........................................... 2 materials from the parts supplied.
D. Earth spring ............................................... 1 K. Earth Plate ................................................. 1
E. Connecting plate........................................ 1 L. Cover ......................................................... 1
Pices fournies G. Guide d'jection ......................................... 1

A. Finisseur de document .............................. 1 H. Cartouche dagrafes .................................. 1 C, D et Z ne sont pas utiliss.
B. Bac d'jection ............................................ 1 I. Vis M4 8.................................................. 2
C. Plaque de raccordement de mise la terre1 J. Vis M4 20................................................ 2 Veillez retirer les morceaux de bande adh-
D. Ressort de mise la terre ......................... 1 Y. Plaque de terre .......................................... 1 sive et/ou les matriaux de rembourrage des
E. Plaque de connexion ................................. 1 Z. Couvercle................................................... 1 pices fournies.
Partes suministradas G. Gua de salida............................................ 1

A. Finalizador de documentos ....................... 1 H. Cartucho de grapas ................................... 1 C, D y Z no se utilizan.
B. Bandeja de salida ...................................... 1 I. Tornillo M4 8 ........................................... 2
C. Placa de conexin a tierra ......................... 1 J. Tornillo M4 20 ......................................... 2 Asegrese de despegar todas las cintas y/o
D. Resorte de conexin a tierra ..................... 1 Y. Placa de conexin a tierra ......................... 1 material amortiguador de las partes suministra-
E. Placa de conexin ..................................... 1 Z. Cubierta ..................................................... 1 das.
Enthaltene Teile G. Ausgabefhrung ........................................ 1

A. Finisher...................................................... 1 H. Heftklammermagazin................................. 1 C, D und Z werden nicht bentigt.
B. Auswerffach ............................................... 1 I. M4 8 Schraube ....................................... 2
C. Grundanschlussplatte................................ 1 J. M4 20 Schraube ..................................... 2 Stellen Sie sicher, dass smtliche Klebebnder
D. Grundfeder ................................................ 1 Y. Grundplatte ................................................ 1 und/oder Polstermaterial von den gelieferten
E. Verbindungsplatte...................................... 1 Z. Abdeckung................................................. 1 Teilen entfernt wurden.
Parti fornite G. Guida di espulsione ................................... 1

A. Finisher documenti .................................... 1 H. Contenitore punti ...................................... 1 C, D e Z non sono utilizzati.
D. Molla di messa a terra ............................... 1 Y. Piastra di messa a terra............................. 1 Rimuovere tutti i nastri adesivi e/o i materiali di
E. Piastra di connessione .............................. 1 Z. Coperchio .................................................. 1 protezione dalle parti fornite.
G. ............................... 1
A. .................................... 1 H. .................................. 1 CD Z
B. .................................. 1 I. M48 ................................. 2
C. ................................ 1 J. M420 ................................ 2
D. .................................. 1 Y. .................................... 1

E. .................................... 1 Z. ...................................... 1
F. ................................ 1
G. ................................................1
A. .................................................1 H. ........................................1 C, D Z .
B. .................................................1 I. M48 .................................................2
C. .................................................1 J. M420................................................2 ,
D. .................................................1 Y. ........................................................1 .
E. .......................................................1 Z. ...........................................................1
F. .................................................1
G. ..........................1
A. ........... 1 H. ...............1 C,D,Z
B. ........................... 1 I. M48 ............................2
C. ......................... 1 J. M420 ...........................2
D. ........................... 1 Y. .............................1

E. ............................... 1 Z. ...............................1
F. ..................... 1
8
B A


Le gabarit de fixation (AK-735) doit tre en Avant de commencer l'installation, s'assurer de dos du bac d'jection (B) dans les trous (2)
place avant de procder l'installation du finis- mettre la machine hors tension et de du dispositif de levage du finisseur docu-
seur de document. dbrancher la fiche d'alimentation de la prise ment (A).
murale.

El Kit de instalacin (AK-735) debe instalarse Antes de iniciar la instalacin, asegrese de parte posterior de la bandeja de salida (B)
antes de instalar el finalizador de documentos. apagar el interruptor de encendido de la en los orificios (2) del elevador del finaliza-
mquina y desenchufar el cable de alimentacin dor de documentos (A).

Das Gertezusatz (AK-735) muss installiert Bevor Sie mit der Installation beginnen berzeu- an der Rckseite des Auswerffachs (B) in
werden, bevor man den Finisher installiert. gen Sie sich, dass der Netzschalter des Gerts die ffnungen (2) an der Hebeplatte des Fin-

Il kit accessorio (AK-735) deve essere installato Prima di iniziare l'installazione, spegnere la vassoio di espulsione (B) nei fori (2) sul soll-
prima che sia installata la finisher documenti. macchina e scollegare la spina dalla presa di evatore della finisher documenti (A).
corrente.
1. (B) 2 (1)
AK- (A) (2)
735)
1. (B) (1) 2
AK-735) (A) (2)
. .
.
1. (B) (1)2
OFF
(A)
AK-735) (2)

9
Y
3
G
I(M4x8)
4
2.Attach the earth plate (Y)* to the center of 3.Remove the cover (3) from the machine. 4.Install the eject guide (G) by fitting the 2
the bottom of the document finisher using an eject guide pins (4) into the holes in the
M4 8 screw (I). machine.
*The part was supplied with AK-735
2.Raccordez la plaque de terre (Y)* en bas au 3.Retirer le couvercle (3) de la machine. 4.Installer le guide d'jection (G) en insrant
centre du finisseur de document en utilisant les 2 ergots du guide d'jection (4) dans les
une vis M4 8 (I). trous de la machine.
*La pice a t fournie avec l'AK-735
2.Conecte la placa de conexin a tierra (Y)* al 3.Quite la cubierta (3) de la mquina. 4.Instale la gua de salida (G) encajando los 2
centro de la parte inferior del finalizador de pasadores de la gua de salida (4) en los ori-
documentos con un tornillo M4 8 (I). ficios de la mquina.
*La pieza se proporcion con AK-735
2.Bringen Sie die Grundplatte (Y)* in der Mitte 3.Entfernen Sie die Abdeckung (3) vom Gert. 4.Installieren Sie die Ausgabefhrung (G),
des Bodens des Finishers mit den M4 x 8 indem Sie die beiden Stifte (4) der Aus-
Schrauben (I) an. werffhrung in die Aufnahmen des Gerts
*Dieses Teil ist im AK-735 enthalten. einsetzen.
2.Applicare la piastra di messa a terra (Y)* al 3.Rimuovere il coperchio (3) dalla macchina. 4.Installare la guida di espulsione (G) inser-
centro dell'area inferiore della finisher docu- endo i 2 perni (4) della guida di espulsione
menti utilizzando una vite M4 8 (I). nei fori della macchina.
*Parte fornita con AK-735
2. M48(I) (Y)* 3.3 4. (G) 2 (4)

*AK-735
2. M4 8(I) (Y)* 3. (3) . 4. (G) (4) 2

. .
*AK-735
2. M48(I) (Y)* 3.(3) 4. (G) (4)2

*AK-735
10
8 9
J(M4x20)
J(M4x20)
F F
5 E
E E
6 7
machine using 2 M4 20 screws (J).Attach connector (7) on the machine. Hook the sig- plate (E).Take care not to get the cable
left cover. nector is covered by the connector cover (F).
5.Fixez la plaque de connexion (E) la 7.Raccorder le connecteur de ligne de signal 8.Placer le cache de connecteur (F) dans la
machine l'aide de 2 vis M4 20 (J). Rac- (6) sur le connecteur (7) de la machine. plaque de connexion (E). Prendre soin ne
de connecteur (F).
5.Fije la placa de conexin (E) a la mquina 7.Conecte el conector de lnea de seales (6) 8.Acople la cubierta del conector (F) en la
mediante 2 tornillos M4 20 (J). Conctelas al conector (7) de la mquina. Enganche el placa de conexin (E). Tenga cuidado de
erta del conector (F).
5.Bringen Sie die Verbindungsplatte (E) mit 2 7.Verbinden Sie den Stecker der Signalleitung 8.Setzen Sie die Stecker-Abdeckung (F) in die
M4 20 Schrauben (J) am Gert an. Brin- (6) mit dem Steckverbinder im Gert (7). Verbindungsplatte (E) ein. Stellen Sie sicher,
Abdeckung (F) abgedeckt ist.
5.Applicare la piastra di connessione (E) alla 7.Collegare il connettore di linea del segnale 8.Inserire il copri connettore (F) nella piastra di
macchina utilizzando le 2 viti M4 20 (J). (6) al connettore (7) sulla periferica. Aggan- connessione (E). Fare attenzione a non
connettore (F).
5. 2 M420(J) (E) 7. (6) 8. (F) (E)

(7) (8) (9)
6.5
(F)
5. M4 20(J) 2 7. (6) (7) 8. (F) (E)

(E) . . (8) (9) . (F)
. . .
6. (5) . . (F)
.
5. (E) M420(J)2 7.(6) 8.(F) (E)

(7) (8)

(9)
6. (5) (F)

11
10
11
11-2 10
11-1
11-1
11
9.Remove the screw (10).Remove the rear 10.Separate the rear cover (11) into the two 11.Install the cover (11-1) using the screw (10).
cover (11) . covers(11-1,11-2).
The cover(11-2) isnot used.
(11). couvercles (11-1, 11-2). (10).
9.Quite el tornillo (10). Quite la cubierta poste- 10.Separe la cubierta posterior (11) en las dos 11.Instale la cubierta (11-1) con un tornillo (10).
rior (11). cubiertas (11-1, 11-2).
9.Entfernen Sie die Schraube (10). Entfernen 10.Teilen Sie die hintere Abdeckung (11) in zwei 11.Installieren Sie die Abdeckung (11-1) mit den
Sie die hintere Abdeckung (11). Abdeckungen (11-1, 11-2) auf. Schrauben (10).
posteriore (11). coperchi (11-1,11-2). vite (10).
9.10 11 10. (11) 2 (11-1,11-2) 11. (10) (11-1)

(11-2)
9. (10) . (11) 10. (11) 2 (11-1, 11-2) 11. (10) (11-1)

. . .
(11-2) .
9. (10) (11) 10.(11) 2 (11-1,11-2) 11. (10) 11-1

(11-2)
12
13
14
12 13 14
16
E
14 15
12.Open the document finisher upper front 13.Insert the pin (15) on the connecting plate 14.Slowly push the lock frame (14) fully into the
cover (12). Remove the screw (13).Pull the (E) into the hole (16) on the document fin- machine so that the connectors at the far
lock frame (14) frontwards. isher.Connect the document finisher to the end are connected.
15.
12.Ouvrir le couvercle avant suprieur du finis- 13.Introduire la broche (15) sur la plaque de 14.Pousser doucement le cadre de verrouillage
seur de document (12). Retirez la vis (13). connexion (E) dans le trou (16) sur le finis- (14) fond dans la machine de sorte que les
Tirer le cadre de verrouillage (14) vers le seur de document.Connecter le finisseur de connecteurs l'extrmit soient raccords.
bas. document sur la machine. 15.Fixez le bti de verrouillage (14) l'aide de
12.Abra la cubierta frontal superior del finaliza- 13.Inserte el pasador (15) de la placa de conex- 14.Empuje lentamente y hasta el fondo el
dor de documentos (12). Quite el tornillo in (E) en el orificio (16) del finalizador de marco del cierre (14) hacia la mquina de
(13). Empuje el marco de cierre (14) hacia documentos.Conecte el finalizador de docu- modo que se conecten los conectores en el
delante. mentos a la mquina. extremo ms lejano.
en la pgina 15.
12.ffnen Sie die obere vordere Abdeckung 13.Setzen Sie den Stift (15) der Verbindung- 14.Schieben Sie die Verriegelung (14) wieder
des Finishers (12). Entfernen Sie die splatte (E) in die ffnung (16) des Finishers. langsam ins Gert, so dass die Verbindun-
Schraube (13). Ziehen Sie die Verriegelung Verbinden Sie den Finisher mit dem Gert. gen am anderen Ende des Gerts geschlos-
(14) nach vorne. * Falls Sie den Finisher nicht anschlieen sen werden.
12.Aprire il coperchio frontale superiore del fin- 13.Inserire il perno (15) della piastra di connes- 14.Spingere lentamente la frame di blocco (14)
isher documenti (12). Togliere la vite (13). sione (E) nel foro (16) del finisher docu- nella macchina in modo che i connettori
Tirare in avanti la frame di blocco (14). menti. Collegare il finisher documenti alla all'estremit risultino collegati.
documenti, regolare laltezza come descritto
a pagina 15.
12.12 13. (E) 15 14.14

13 14 16
P15 15. 12 1 (13)
(14)
12. (12) . 13. (E) (15) 14.

(13) . (14) (16) . (14)
. . .
P15 15. 12 131
. 14 .
12. 13. (E) (15) 14.

(12) (13)
(16) (14)
(14) 15. 12 13

P15
14

13
H
12
16.Install the staple cartridge (H).

17.Close the upper front cover (12).

page 20.
16.Installer la cartouche d'agrafes (H).

17.Refermer le couvercle avant suprieur (12).

age page 20.
16.Instale el cartucho de grapas (H).

17.Cierre la cubierta frontal superior (12).

en la pgina 20.

(H).
17.Schlieen Sie die obere vordere Abdeckung
(12).

auf Seite 20 fort.
16.Installare il contenitore punti (H).

17.Chiudere il coperchio superiore anteriore
(12).

16. (H)
17. (12)
P20
16. (H) .
17. (12) .
20
.
16. (H)
17.(12)
P20
14
15
b
b a a a
b
16 15
21
the document finisher comply with the refer-
ences below.
1.berprfen Sie, dass die jeweilige Hhe der (21).
(15) (a) (21) (b)

1. (15) (15) (a) (21) (b)
(16)

(15) (a) (21) (b) .

1. (15) (15) (a) (21) (b) .
(16) .
.
(15) (a) (21) (b)

1. (15) (15) (a) (21) (b)

(16)

15
25
24
26
12
22
26
23 27 26
24 25
24
2.Open the upper front cover (12) of the docu- 4.Remove the 2 screws (24) and remove the 5.Remove the 3 screws (26) and remove the
ment finisher. foot cover (25). lower rear cover (27).
3.Remove the screw (22) and open the lower
front cover (23).
2.Ouvrir le couvercle avant suprieur (12) du 4.Dposer les 2 vis (24) puis le couvercle du 5.Dposer les 3 vis (26) puis le couvercle arri-
finisseur de document. pied (25). re infrieur (27).
3.Dposer la vis (22) et ouvrir le couvercle
avant infrieur (23).
2.Abra la cubierta frontal superior (12) del 4.Quite los 2 tornillos (24) y quite la cubierta 5.Quite los 3 tornillos (26) y quite la cubierta
finalizador de documentos. de la pata (25). posterior inferior (27).
3.Quite el tornillo (22) y abra la cubierta frontal
inferior (23).
2.ffnen Sie die obere vordere Abdeckung 4.Entfernen Sie die 2 Schrauben (24) und 5.Entfernen Sie die 3 Schrauben (26) und
(12) des Finishers. nehmen Sie die Fuabdeckung (25) ab. nehmen Sie die untere hintere Abdeckung
3.Entfernen Sie die Schraube (22) und ffnen (27) ab.
Sie die untere vordere Abdeckung (23).
2.Aprire il coperchio superiore anteriore (12) 4.Rimuovere le 2 viti (24) e quindi rimuovere la 5.Rimuovere le 3 viti (26) e quindi rimuovere il
della finisher documenti. copertura del piede (25). coperchio inferiore posteriore (27).
3.Rimuovere la vite (22) ed aprire il coperchio
inferiore anteriore (23).
2. (12) 4. 2 (24) (25) 5. 3 (26) (27)

3. 1 (22) (23)
2. (12) . 4. (24) 2 , (25) 5. (26) 3 , (27)

3. (22) 1 (23) . .
.
2. 4. (24)2 (25) 5. (26)3 (27)

(12)
3. (22)1 (23)

16
31
28 30
29
29
6.Remove the screw (28) to remove the span- 8.Turn the adjustment bolts (31) with the spanner (29) to adjust the height of the document finisher.
ner (29). Turning the adjustment bolt clockwise lifts the document finisher, and turning it counterclockwise
7.Loosen the 2 screws (30) on the front right lowers the document finisher.
and on the rear right of the document fin- 9.Retighten each of the 2 screws (30) and replace the spanner (29).
isher.
6.Dposer la vis (28) pour librer la cl (29). 8.Faire tourner les boulons de rglage (31) avec la cl (29) pour ajuster la hauteur du finisseur de
7.Desserrer les 2 vis (30) du ct avant droit et document.
arrire droit du finisseur de document. Tourner le boulon de rglage dans le sens horloger pour lever le finisseur de document, et dans
6.Quite el tornillo (28) para extraer la llave 8.Gire los pernos de ajuste (31) con la llave inglesa (29) para ajustar la altura del finalizador de
inglesa (29). documentos.
7.Afloje los 2 tornillos (30) en los lados dere- Al girar el perno de ajuste en la direccin de las manecillas del reloj se levanta el finalizador de
cho frontal y derecho posterior del finaliza- documentos y al girar en sentido contrario a las manecillas del reloj baja el finalizador de docu-
dor de documentos. mentos.
6.Entfernen Sie die Schraube (28), um den 8.Drehen Sie die Einstellschrauben (31) mit dem Schlssel (29), um die Hhe des Finishers
Schlssel (29) abzunehmen einzustellen.
7.Lsen Sie die 2 Schrauben (30) vorne rechts Durch Drehen der Einstellschraube im Uhrzeigersinn wird der Finisher angehoben, whrend er
und hinten rechts am Finisher. durch Drehen entgegen dem Uhrzeigersinn abgesenkt wird.
6.Rimuovere la vite (28) per rimuovere la chi- 8.Ruotare i bulloni di regolazione (31) con la chiave (29) per regolare l'altezza della finisher docu-
ave (29). menti.
7.Allentare le 2 viti (30) sulla parte anteriore Ruotando il bullone di regolazione in senso orario si solleva la finisher documenti, mentre ruotan-
destra e posteriore destra della finisher doc- dolo in senso antiorario si abbassa la finisher documenti.
umenti. 9.Ristringere ciascuna delle 2 viti (30) e riporre la chiave (29).
6. (28) (29) 8. (29) (31)

7. 2
(30) 9. 2 (30) (29)
6. (28) 1 , (29) 8. (29) (31) .

. ,
7. (30) 2 .
. 9. (30) 2 (29) .
6. (28)1 (29) 8.(29) (31)

7.
(30) 2 9. (30) 2
(29)
17
32
33 35
34
10.If the distances between the document fin- 11.Loosen the 2 screws (34) on the front left 12.Turn the adjustment bolts (35) with a Philips-
isher and the machine (32, 33) are unequal, and on the rear left of the document finisher. head screwdriver to adjust the height of the
use the procedure below to adjust the spac- document finisher.
ing. Turning the adjustment bolt clockwise lifts
the document finisher, and turning it counter-
clockwise lowers the document finisher.
10.Si les distances entre le finisseur de docu- 11.Desserrer les 2 vis (34) du ct avant 12.Faire tourner les boulons de rglage (35)
ment et la machine (32, 33) sont ingales, gauche et arrire gauche du finisseur de l'aide d'un tournevis cruciforme pour ajuster
rgler l'espacement en procdant de la document. la hauteur du finisseur de document.
manire suivante. Tourner le boulon de rglage dans le sens
horloger pour lever le finisseur de document,
et dans le sens contraire au sens horloger
pour le descendre.
10.Si las distancias entre el finalizador de docu- 11.Afloje los 2 tornillos (34) en los lados izqui- 12. Gire los pernos de ajuste (35) con un destornillador
mentos y la mquina (32, 33) no son erdo frontal e izquierdo posterior del finaliza- de cabeza Philips para ajustar la altura del finaliza-
dor de documentos.
iguales, utilice el siguiente procedimiento dor de documentos.
Al girar el perno de ajuste en la direccin de las
para ajustar la separacin. manecillas del reloj se levanta el finalizador de
documentos y al girar en sentido contrario a las
manecillas del reloj baja el finalizador de documen-
tos.
10.Falls die Abstnde zwischen dem Finisher 11.Lsen Sie die 2 Schrauben (34) vorne links 12. Stellen Sie die Einstellschrauben (35) mit einem
und dem Gert (32, 33) ungleich sind, fhren und hinten links am Finisher. Kreuzschlitzschraubendreher ein, um die Hhe
Sie die unten angegebenen Schritte aus, um des Finishers zu korrigieren.
den Abstand zu korrigieren. Durch Drehen der Einstellschraube im Uhrzei-
gersinn wird der Finisher angehoben, whrend
er durch Drehen entgegen dem Uhrzeigersinn
abgesenkt wird.
10.Se le distanze tra la finisher documenti e la 11.Allentare le 2 viti (34) sulla parte anteriore 12.Ruotare i bulloni di regolazione (35) con un
macchina (32, 33) sono diverse, attenersi sinistra e posteriore sinistra della finisher cacciavite con testa a croce tipo Philips per
alla sottostante procedura per regolare la documenti. regolare l'altezza della finisher documenti.
spaziatura. Ruotando il bullone di regolazione in senso
orario si solleva la finisher documenti, men-
tre ruotandolo in senso antiorario si abbassa
la finisher documenti.
10. (3233) 11. 2 12. (35)

(34)

10. (32, 33) 11. (34) 2 12. (35)

. .
.
,
.
10. 11. 12. (35)

3233
(34) 2

18
14.Reinstall the foot cover (25) and lower rear
cover (27).

14.Reposer le couvercle du pied (25) et le cou-
vercle arrire infrieur (27).

14.Vuelva a instalar la cubierta de la pata (25) y
la cubierta posterior inferior (27).

14.Setzen Sie die Fuabdeckung (25) und die
untere hintere Abdeckung (27) wieder ein.

14.Reinstallare la copertura del piede (25) e il
coperchio inferiore posteriore (27).
13. 2 (34)
14. (25)
(27)
13. (34) 2 .
14. (25), (27)
.
13. (34) 2
14.(25) (27)

19
78.5mm2.5
158mm2.5

3.Check whether the stapling position is off-center. If the staple position is off-center, follow the procedure below to adjust the position.

3.Vrifier que la position d'agrafage n'est pas en dcalage.Si la position d'agrafage est dcale, la rgler en procdant de la manire suivante.

3.Compruebe si la posicin de grapado est descentrada.Si la posicin de grapado est descentrada, realice el siguiente procedimiento para ajustar la
posicin.

1.Stecken Sie den Netzstecker des Gerts in die Wandsteckdose und schalten Sie das Gert am Hauptschalter ein.
3.Prfen Sie, ob die Heftposition auermittig ist.Falls die Heftposition auermittig ist, mssen Sie sie wie folgend einstellen.

3.Verificare che la posizione di spillatura non sia fuori centro.Se la posizione di spillatura fuori centro, seguire la procedura riportata sotto per regolare
la posizione.
1.
2.2
3.
78.5mm 2.5mm

1. ON .
2. 2 .
3. . .
78.5mm 2.5mm
1. ON
2.2

3.

78.5mm 2.5mm
20
(a) (b)
Si el grapado del papel se encuentra demasiado cerca del frente de la <Valor de referencia> 78,5 mm 2,5 mm del centro del papel
5. 7. 4 6
(a) 78.5mm 2.5mm
(b)

. 7. 4 6 .
5. . 78.5mm 2.5mm
(a) .
(b) .
4. U246 Finisher
Staple HP 6.
7. 4 6
5. 78.5mm 2.5mm
(a)
(b)
21
References to medium-speed MFPs in this document denote 30/30, 35/35, 45/45 and 55/50 ppm color machines, and 35, 45 and 55 ppm
monochrome machines.
Dans le prsent document, les rfrences aux MFP vitesse moyenne renvoient aux machines couleurs 30/30, 35/35, 45/45 et 55/50 ppm et
aux machines monochromes 35, 45 et 55 ppm.
Dans le prsent document, les rfrences aux MFP grande vitesse renvoient aux machines couleurs 65/65 et 75/70 ppm et aux machines
monochromes 65 et 80 ppm.
Para la instalacin con una impresora, consulte las pginas de la 8 a la 14
.
Las referencias a las MFP de velocidad media de este documento corresponden a las mquinas a color de 30/30, 35/35, 45/45 y 55/50 ppm
y a las mquinas monocromticas de 35, 45 y 55 ppm.
Las referencias a las MFP de alta velocidad de este documento corresponden a las mquinas a color de 65/65 y 75/70 ppm y a las mquinas
Angaben fr MFP der mittleren Leistungsklasse in dieser Anleitung gelten fr die 30/30, 35/35, 45/45 und 55/50 ppm Vollfarbenkopierer sowie fr die
35, 45 und 55 ppm Monochrommaschinen.
Angaben fr MFP der Hochleistungsklasse in dieser Anleitung gelten fr die 65/65 und 75/70 ppm Vollfarbenkopierer sowie fr die 65 und 80 ppm
Monochrommaschinen.
I riferimenti per le MFP a velocit media riportati in questo documento indicano le macchine a colori 30/30, 35/35, 45/45 e 55/50 ppm, e le
macchine monocromatiche 35, 45 e 55 ppm.
I riferimenti per le MFP a velocit alta riportati in questo documento indicano le macchine a colori 65/65 e 75/70 ppm, e le macchine monocro-
matiche 65 e 80 ppm.

MFP P1-P7
P8-P14
MFP 30/30 35/35 45/45 55/50 35 45 55
MFP 65/65 75/70 65 80
. .
MFP 1 ~7 .
8 ~14 .
MFP 30/30 , 35/35 , 45/45 , 55/50 , 35 , 45 , 55 .
MFP 65/65 , 75/70 , 65 , 80 .

MFP 1 7
8 14
MFP 30/30 35/35 45/45 55/50 35 45 55
MFP 65/65 75/70 65 80
A
I(M4x8)
B
D
F J(M4x20)
C
E H
G
Supplied parts G. Eject guide ................................................. 1 Be sure to remove any tape and/or cushioning
A. Document finisher...................................... 1 H. Staple cartridge.......................................... 1 materials from the parts supplied.
B. Eject tray.................................................... 1 I. M4 8 screw ............................................. 2
C. Earth connection plate............................... 1 J. M4 20 screw ........................................... 2
D. Earth spring ............................................... 1
E. Connecting plate........................................ 1
Pices fournies G. Guide d'jection ......................................... 1 Veillez retirer les morceaux de bande adh-
A. Finisseur de document .............................. 1 H. Cartouche dagrafes .................................. 1 sive et/ou les matriaux de rembourrage des
B. Bac d'jection ............................................ 1 I. Vis M4 8.................................................. 2 pices fournies.
C. Plaque de raccordement de mise la terre1 J. Vis M4 20................................................ 2
D. Ressort de mise la terre ......................... 1
E. Plaque de connexion ................................. 1
Partes suministradas G. Gua de salida............................................ 1 Asegrese de despegar todas las cintas y/o
A. Finalizador de documentos ....................... 1 H. Cartucho de grapas ................................... 1 material amortiguador de las partes suministra-
B. Bandeja de salida ...................................... 1 I. Tornillo M4 8 ........................................... 2 das.
C. Placa de conexin a tierra ......................... 1 J. Tornillo M4 20 ......................................... 2
D. Resorte de conexin a tierra ..................... 1
E. Placa de conexin ..................................... 1
Enthaltene Teile G. Ausgabefhrung ........................................ 1 Stellen Sie sicher, dass smtliche Klebebnder
A. Finisher...................................................... 1 H. Heftklammermagazin................................. 1 und/oder Polstermaterial von den gelieferten
B. Auswerffach ............................................... 1 I. M4 8 Schraube ....................................... 2 Teilen entfernt wurden.
C. Grundanschlussplatte................................ 1 J. M4 20 Schraube ..................................... 2
D. Grundfeder ................................................ 1
E. Verbindungsplatte...................................... 1
Parti fornite G. Guida di espulsione ................................... 1 Rimuovere tutti i nastri adesivi e/o i materiali di
A. Finisher documenti .................................... 1 H. Contenitore punti ...................................... 1 protezione dalle parti fornite.
D. Molla di messa a terra ............................... 1
E. Piastra di connessione .............................. 1
F. ...........................1
A. ............................... 1 G. ..........................1
B. ............................. 1 H. .............................1
C. ........................... 1 I. M48 ............................2
D. ............................. 1 J. M420 ...........................2
E. ............................... 1
F. ........................................ 1 ,
A. ........................................ 1 G. ....................................... 1 .
B. ........................................ 1 H. ............................... 1
C. ........................................ 1 I. M48......................................... 2
D. ........................................ 1 J. M420 ....................................... 2
E. .............................................. 1
G. ..........................1
A. ........... 1 H. ...............1

B. ........................... 1 I. M48 ............................2
C. ......................... 1 J. M420 ...........................2
D. ........................... 1
E. ............................... 1
F. ..................... 1
1
B A

When installing on a medium-speed MFP, the Before starting installation, be sure to turn the back of the eject tray (B) into the holes (2) in
Attachment Kit (AK-730 or AK-731) must be main power switch of the machine off, and the document finisher (A) lift.
installed before the document finisher is unplug the power plug from the wall outlet.
installed.

Lors de l'installation sur une imprimante multi- Avant de commencer l'installation, s'assurer de dos du bac d'jection (B) dans les trous (2)
fonction vitesse moyenne, le kit de fixation mettre la machine hors tension et de du dispositif de levage du finisseur de docu-
(AK-730 ou AK-731) doit tre install avant dbrancher la fiche d'alimentation de la prise ment (A).
d'installer le finisseur de document. murale.

Si se instala en un MFP de velocidad media, el Antes de iniciar la instalacin, asegrese de parte posterior de la bandeja de salida (B)
Kit de conexin (AK-730 o AK-731) se debe apagar el interruptor de encendido de la en los orificios (2) del elevador del finaliza-
instalar antes de instalarse el finalizador de doc- mquina y desenchufar el cable de alimentacin dor de documentos (A).
umentos. de la toma de pared.

Bei der Installation an einem mittelschnellen Bevor Sie mit der Installation beginnen berzeu- an der Rckseite des Auswerffachs (B) in
MFP muss das Attachment-Kit (AK-730 oder gen Sie sich, dass der Netzschalter des Gerts die ffnungen (2) an der Hebeplatte des Fin-
AK-731) vor dem Finisher installiert werden. ausgeschaltet und das Stromkabel aus der ishers (A) ein.

Quando si installa un MFP di fascia media, Prima di iniziare l'installazione, spegnere la vassoio di espulsione (B) nei fori (2) sul soll-
prima di installare il finisher documenti occorre macchina e scollegare la spina dalla presa di evatore della finisher documenti (A).
installare l'unit Attachment Kit (AK-730 o AK- corrente.
731).
1. (B) 2 (1)
MFP (A) (2)
AK-730 AK-731)
1. (B) (1) 2
MFP (A) (2)
(AK-730 AK-731) .
. .
1. (B) (1)2
MFP OFF
(A)
(2)
AK-730 AK-731)
2
I(M4x8) I(M4x8)
C
C
D
I(M4x8)
I(M4x8)
Installation on medium-speed MFPs Installation on high-speed MFPs

2.Using an M4 8 screw (I), secure the earth spring (D) in the location 2.Using an M4 8 screw (I), secure the earth spring (D) in the location
indicated by the "55" marking on the earth connection plate (C). indicated by the "65" marking on the earth connection plate (C).
3.Attach the earth connection plate (C) to the center of the bottom of the 3.Attach the earth connection plate (C) to the front side of the bottom of
document finisher using an M4 8 screw (I). the document finisher using an M4 8 screw (I).
Proceed to step 6.The procedure for installing the kit on a high-speed
MFP is described on the following steps.
Montage sur des MFP vitesse moyenne Montage sur des MFP grande vitesse
2. En procdant l'aide d'une vis M4 8 (I), fixez le ressort de mise la terre (D) 2.En procdant l'aide d'une vis M4 8 (I), fixez le ressort de mise la
l'endroit indiqu par la marque "55" sur la plaque de raccordement de mise la terre (D) l'endroit indiqu par la marque "65" sur la plaque de rac-
terre (C).
cordement de mise la terre (C).
3. Fixez la plaque de raccordement de mise la terre (C) au milieu de la partie
infrieure du finisseur de document avec une vis M4 8 (I). 3.Fixez la plaque de raccordement de mise la terre (C) l'avant de la
Passer l'tape 6. La procdure d'installation du kit sur l'imprimante multifonc- partie infrieure du finisseur de document avec une vis M4 8 (I).
tion grande vitesse est dcrite dans les tapes suivantes.
Instalacin en las MFP de velocidad media Instalacin en las MFP de alta velocidad
2. Con un tornillo M4 8 (I), asegure el resorte de conexin a tierra (D) en el 2.Con un tornillo M4 8 (I), asegure el resorte de conexin a tierra (D)
lugar indicado por la marca "55" de la placa de conexin a tierra (C). en el lugar indicado por la marca "65" de la placa de conexin a tierra
3. Fije la placa de conexin a tierra (C) en el centro de la parte inferior del (C).
finalizador de documentos usando un tornillo M4 8 (I). 3.Fije la placa de conexin a tierra (C) en el lado frontal de la parte infe-
Vaya al paso 6.En los siguientes pasos se describe el procedimiento rior del finalizador de documentos usando un tornillo M4 8 (I).
de instalacin del kit en un MFP de velocidad alta.
Installation an MFP der mittleren Leistungsklasse Installation an MFP der Hochleistungsklasse

2. Befestigen Sie die Grundfeder (D) mit einer M4 8 Schraube (I) an der mit 2.Befestigen Sie die Grundfeder (D) mit einer M4 8 Schraube (I) an der
"55" bezeichneten Stelle der Grundanschlussplatte (C). mit "65" bezeichneten Stelle der Grundanschlussplatte (C).
3. Bringen Sie die Grundanschlussplatte (C) mit einer M4 8 Schraube (I) mit- 3.Bringen Sie die Grundanschlussplatte (C) mit einer M4 8 Schraube
tig an der Unterseite des Finishers an. (I) vorne an der Unterseite des Finishers an.
Gehen Sie weiter zu Schritt 6.Die Vorgehensweise zur Installation des Kits
an einem schnellen MFP wird in den folgenden Schritten beschrieben.
Installazione sulle MFP a velocit media Installazione sulle MFP a velocit alta
2. Utilizzando una vite M4 8 (I), fissare la molla di messa a terra (D) nella 2.Utilizzando una vite M4 8 (I), fissare la molla di messa a terra (D)
posizione indicata dal segno "55" sulla piastra di connessione per messa a terra nella posizione indicata dal segno "65" sulla piastra di connessione
(C).
per messa a terra (C).
3. Applicare la piastra di connessione per messa a terra (C) al centro in basso della
finisher documenti utilizzando una vite M4 8 (I). 3.Applicare la piastra di connessione per messa a terra (C) al lato ante-
Procedere al passo 6. La procedura di installazione del Kit su un MFP di fascia riore in basso della finisher documenti utilizzando una vite M4 8 (I).
alta descritta nelle pagine successive.
MFP MFP
2. (C) 55 1 M48(I) 2. (C) 65 1 M48(I)
(D) (D)
3. M48(I) (C) 3. M48(I) (C)
6 MFP
MFP MFP
2. (C) 55 M48(I) 1 2. (C) 65 M48(I) 1
(D) . (D) .
3. M48(I) (C) . 3. M48(I) (C)
6 . MFP .
.
MFP MFP
2. (C) 55 M48(I) 2. (C) 65 M48(I)
(D) (D)
3. M48(I) (C) 3. M48(I) (C)

6 MFP
3
6
G 6
5
4
Only for installation on high-speed MFPs 6.Install the eject guide (G) by fitting the 2
If installing on a medium-speed MFP, proceed to step 6. eject guide pins (6) into the holes in the
4.Remove the machine interface cover (3). machine.
5.Remove the screw (4) and remove the controller cover (5).
Pour montage sur des MFP grande vitesse uniquement 6.Installer le guide d'jection (G) en insrant
Si le montage est fait sur un MFP vitesse moyenne, passer l'tape 6. les 2 ergots du guide d'jection (6) dans les
4.Dposer le couvercle d'interface (3) de la machine. trous de la machine.
5.Dposer la vis (4) puis le couvercle du contrleur (5).
Solo para la instalacin en las MFP de alta velocidad 6.Instale la gua de salida (G) encajando los 2
Si se instala en una MFP de velocidad media, vaya al paso 6. pasadores de la gua de salida (6) en los ori-
4.Quite la cubierta de la interfaz (3) de la mquina. ficios de la mquina.
5.Quite el tornillo (4) y quite la cubierta del controlador (5).
Nur bei Installation an MFP der Hochleistungsklasse 6.Installieren Sie die Ausgabefhrung (G),
Gehen Sie zur Installation an einem MFP der mittleren Leistungsklasse weiter zu Schritt 6. indem Sie die beiden Stifte (6) der Aus-
4.Nehmen Sie die Schnittstellenabdeckung (3) des Gerts ab. werffhrung in die Aufnahmen des Gerts
5.Entfernen Sie die Schraube (4) und nehmen Sie die Controller-Abdeckung (5) ab. einsetzen.
Solo per l'installazione sulle MFP a velocit alta 6.Installare la guida di espulsione (G) inser-
Se si installa su una MFP a velocit media, procedere al passo 6. endo i 2 perni (6) della guida di espulsione
4.Rimuovere la copertura di interfaccia (3) della macchina. nei fori della macchina.
5.Rimuovere la vite (4) e quindi rimuovere il coperchio del controller (5).
MFP 6. (G) 2 (6)

MFP 6
4. (3)
5. 1 (4) (5)
MFP 6. (G) (6) 2

MFP 6 . .
4. (3) .
5. (4) 1 (5) .
MFP 6. (G) (6)2

MFP 6
4.(3)
5. (4) (5)
4
J(M4x20) 10 11
J(M4x20)
F F
7
E
E E
8 9
machine using 2 M4 20 screws (J). Attach connector (9) on the machine. Hook the sig- plate (E). Take care not to get the cable
them at the point as shown above. nal line wire (10) onto the hook (11). pinched by objects. Attach it at the point as
Only if installing to a medium-speed MFP shown above. Check that the signal line con-
If installing on a high-speed MFP, proceed to step 9. nector is covered by the connector cover (F).
left cover.
7. Fixez la plaque de connexion (E) la machine l'aide de 9.Raccorder le connecteur de ligne de signal 10.Placer le cache de connecteur (F) dans la
2 vis M4 20 (J).Raccordez-les au point indiqu ci-des- (8) sur le connecteur (9) de la machine. plaque de connexion (E).Prendre soin ne
sus.
Uniquement en cas d'installation sur un MFP vitesse Accrocher le fil de ligne de signal (10) sur le pas pincer le cble. Raccordez-les au point
moyenne crochet (11). indiqu ci-dessus. Vrifier que le connecteur
Si le montage est fait sur un MFP grande vitesse, passer de ligne de signal est couvert par le cache
l'tape 9.
8. Dposer le couvercle amovible (7) du couvercle gauche. de connecteur (F).
7. Fije la placa de conexin (E) a la mquina medi- 9.Conecte el conector de lnea de seales (8) 10.Acople la cubierta del conector (F) en la
ante 2 tornillos M4 20 (J).Conctelas en el punto al conector (9) de la mquina. Enganche el placa de conexin (E).Tenga cuidado de que
que se muestra arriba.
cable de la lnea de seales (10) en el el cable no quede atrapado por objetos.
Solo si instala en una MFP de velocidad media
Si se instala en una MFP de alta velocidad, vaya al enganche (11). Conctelas en el punto que se muestra
paso 9. arriba. Compruebe que el conector de la
8. Quite la cubierta divisoria (7) de la cubierta izqui- lnea de seales quede cubierto por la cubi-
erda. erta del conector (F).
7. Bringen Sie die Verbindungsplatte (E) mit 2 M4 20 9.Verbinden Sie den Stecker der Signalleitung 10.Setzen Sie die Stecker-Abdeckung (F) in die
Schrauben (J) am Gert an.Bringen Sie diese an der in der (8) mit dem Steckverbinder im Gert (9). Verbindungsplatte (E) ein. Stellen Sie sicher,
Abbildung gezeigten Stelle an.
Nur bei Installation eines MFP der mittleren Leistungsk- Hngen Sie das Kabel der Signalleitung (10) dass das Kabel nicht eingeklemmt wird.
lasse in den Befestigungshaken (11) ein. Bringen Sie diese an der in der Abbildung
Gehen Sie zur Installation an einem MFP der Hochleistungsk-
lasse weiter zu Schritt 9. gezeigten Stelle an. berprfen Sie, ob der
8. Nehmen Sie die Ablsungsabdeckung (7) von der linken Stecker der Signalleitung von der Stecker-
Abdeckung ab. Abdeckung (F) abgedeckt ist.
7. Applicare la piastra di connessione (E) alla mac- 9.Collegare il connettore di linea del segnale 10.Inserire il copri connettore (F) nella piastra di
china utilizzando le 2 viti M4 20 (J).Fissare nella (8) al connettore (9) sulla periferica. Aggan- connessione (E).Fare attenzione a non impi-
posizione sopra indicata.
ciare il cavo di linea del segnale (10) al gan- gliare il cavo.Fissare nella posizione sopra
Solo se si installa ad un'MFP a velocit media
Se si installa su una MFP a velocit alta, procedere al cio (11). indicata.Controllare che il connettore della
passo 9. linea del segnale sia coperto dal copri con-
8. Rimuovere il coperchio di distacco (7) dal coper- nettore (F).
chio sinistro.
7. 2 M420(J) (E) 9.8 10. (F) (E)

9 1011

MFP 9 (F)
8.7
7. M4 20(J) 2 (E) 9. (8) (9) 10. (F) (E)

. . (10) . (F)
. .
(11) . .
MFP
MFP 9 . (F)
. .
8. (7) .
7. (E) M420(J)2 9.(8) 10.(F) (E)

(9) (10)

(11)
(F)
MFP

MFP 9
8. (7)
5
14
3 12 13
14
11.Attach the interface cover (3)* on the machine. 12.Open the document finisher upper front
* Installing with a high-speed MFP : the cover which was removed in step 4. cover (12). Remove the screw (13). Pull the
Installing with a medium-speed MFP : the cover which was removed while installing the AK-730 lock frame (14) frontwards.
or AK-731.
11.Raccordez le couvercle d'interface (3)* la machine. 12.Ouvrir le couvercle avant suprieur du finis-
* Installation avec une imprimante multifonction grande vitesse : le cache qui a t retir seur de document (12). Retirez la vis (13).
l'tape 4. Tirer le cadre de verrouillage (14) vers le
Installation avec une imprimante multifonction moyenne vitesse : le cache qui a t retir lors bas.
de l'installation de l'AK-730 ou AK-731.
11.Conecte la cubierta de interfaz (3)* de la mquina. 12.Abra la cubierta frontal superior del finaliza-
* Instalacin con un MFP de velocidad alta : la cubierta que se quit en el paso 4. dor de documentos (12). Quite el tornillo
Instalacin con un MFP de velocidad media : la cubierta que se quit al instalar el kit AK-730 o (13). Empuje el marco de cierre (14) hacia
AK-731. delante.
11.Bringen Sie die Schnittstellenabdeckung (3)* am Gert an. 12.ffnen Sie die obere vordere Abdeckung
*Installation an einem MFP der Hochleistungsklasse : die Abdeckung, die in Schritt 4 entfernt des Finishers (12). Entfernen Sie die
wurde Schraube (13). Ziehen Sie die Verriegelung
Installation an einem MFP der mittleren Leistungsklasse : die Abdeckung, die zur Installation (14) nach vorne.
des AK-730 oder AK-731 entfernt wurde
11.Fissare la copertura di interfaccia (3)* sulla macchina. 12.Aprire il coperchio frontale superiore del fin-
* Installazione su un MFP di fascia alta : il coperchio che stato rimosso al punto 4 isher documenti (12). Togliere la vite (13).
Installazione su un MFP di fascia media : il coperchio che stato rimosso per installare il kit AK- Tirare in avanti la frame di blocco (14).
730 o AK-731
11. (3)* 12.12

* MFP : 4 13 14
MFP : AK-730 AK-731
11. (3)* . 12. (12) .

* MFP : 4 (13) . (14)
MFP : AK-730 AK-731 .
11.(3)* 12.
* MFP : 4 (12) (13)

MFP : AK-730 AK-731 (14)
6
13
15 E
16 14
H
12
13.Insert the pin (15) on the connecting plate 14.Slowly push the lock frame (14) fully into the 16.Install the staple cartridge (H).
(E) into the hole (16) on the document fin- machine so that the connectors at the far 17.Close the upper front cover (12).
isher. Connect the document finisher to the end are connected.
machine. 15.Secure the lock frame (14) using the screw Proceed to adjusting the stapling position on
* If you cannot connect the document fin- (13) removed in step 12. page 20.
15.
13.Introduire la broche (15) sur la plaque de 14.Pousser doucement le cadre de verrouillage 16.Installer la cartouche d'agrafes (H).
connexion (E) dans le trou (16) sur le finis- (14) fond dans la machine de sorte que les 17.Refermer le couvercle avant suprieur (12).
seur de document. Connecter le finisseur de connecteurs l'extrmit soient raccords.
document sur la machine. 15.Fixez le bti de verrouillage (14) l'aide de Passez l'ajustement de la position d'agraf-
* S'il s'avre impossible de connecter le la vis (13) dpose l'tape 12. age page 20.
13.Inserte el pasador (15) de la placa de conex- 14.Empuje lentamente y hasta el fondo el 16.Instale el cartucho de grapas (H).
in (E) en el orificio (16) del finalizador de marco del cierre (14) hacia la mquina de 17.Cierre la cubierta frontal superior (12).
documentos. Conecte el finalizador de docu- modo que se conecten los conectores en el
mentos a la mquina. extremo ms lejano. Proceda al ajuste de la posicin de grapado
* Si no puede conectar el finalizador de doc- 15.Asegure la carcasa de bloqueo (14) por en la pgina 20.
en la pgina 15.
13.Setzen Sie den Stift (15) der Verbindung- 14.Schieben Sie die Verriegelung (14) wieder 16.Installieren Sie das Heftklammer-Magazin
splatte (E) in die ffnung (16) des Finishers. langsam ins Gert, so dass die Verbindun- (H).
Verbinden Sie den Finisher mit dem Gert. gen am anderen Ende des Gerts geschlos- 17.Schlieen Sie die obere vordere Abdeckung
* Falls Sie den Finisher nicht anschlieen sen werden. (12).
15 beschrieben einstellen. der in Schritt 12 entfernten Schraube (13). Fahren Sie mit der Justage der Heftposition
auf Seite 20 fort.
13.Inserire il perno (15) della piastra di connes- 14.Spingere lentamente la frame di blocco (14) 16.Installare il contenitore punti (H).
sione (E) nel foro (16) del finisher docu- nella macchina in modo che i connettori 17.Chiudere il coperchio superiore anteriore
menti. Collegare il finisher documenti alla all'estremit risultino collegati. (12).
* Se non possibile collegare la finisher la vite (13) rimossa nel passo 12. Proseguire con la regolazione della
documenti, regolare laltezza come descritto posizione di pinzatura a pagina 20.
a pagina 15.
13. (E) 15 14.14 16. (H)

16 17. (12)
P15 15. 12 1 (13)
(14) P20
13. (E) (15) 14. 16. (H) .

(16) . (14) 17. (12) .
. .
P15 15. 12 131 20
. 14 . .
13. (E) (15) 14. 16. (H)

(16) (14) 17.(12)
15. 12 13

P15
14 P20

7
A
AK-735
I(M4x8)
J(M4x20)
B
D
F
C Y
G H
E
Z
Supplied parts G. Eject guide ................................................. 1 C ,D and Z are not used.

A. Document finisher...................................... 1 H. Staple cartridge.......................................... 1
B. Eject tray.................................................... 1 I. M4 8 screw ............................................. 3 Be sure to remove any tape and/or cushioning
C. Earth connection plate............................... 1 J. M4 20 screw ........................................... 2 materials from the parts supplied.
D. Earth spring ............................................... 1 K. Earth Plate ................................................. 1
E. Connecting plate........................................ 1 L. Cover ......................................................... 1
Pices fournies G. Guide d'jection ......................................... 1

A. Finisseur de document .............................. 1 H. Cartouche dagrafes .................................. 1 C, D et Z ne sont pas utiliss.
B. Bac d'jection ............................................ 1 I. Vis M4 8.................................................. 2
C. Plaque de raccordement de mise la terre1 J. Vis M4 20................................................ 2 Veillez retirer les morceaux de bande adh-
D. Ressort de mise la terre ......................... 1 Y. Plaque de terre .......................................... 1 sive et/ou les matriaux de rembourrage des
E. Plaque de connexion ................................. 1 Z. Couvercle................................................... 1 pices fournies.
Partes suministradas G. Gua de salida............................................ 1

A. Finalizador de documentos ....................... 1 H. Cartucho de grapas ................................... 1 C, D y Z no se utilizan.
B. Bandeja de salida ...................................... 1 I. Tornillo M4 8 ........................................... 2
C. Placa de conexin a tierra ......................... 1 J. Tornillo M4 20 ......................................... 2 Asegrese de despegar todas las cintas y/o
D. Resorte de conexin a tierra ..................... 1 Y. Placa de conexin a tierra ......................... 1 material amortiguador de las partes suministra-
E. Placa de conexin ..................................... 1 Z. Cubierta ..................................................... 1 das.
Enthaltene Teile G. Ausgabefhrung ........................................ 1

A. Finisher...................................................... 1 H. Heftklammermagazin................................. 1 C, D und Z werden nicht bentigt.
B. Auswerffach ............................................... 1 I. M4 8 Schraube ....................................... 2
C. Grundanschlussplatte................................ 1 J. M4 20 Schraube ..................................... 2 Stellen Sie sicher, dass smtliche Klebebnder
D. Grundfeder ................................................ 1 Y. Grundplatte ................................................ 1 und/oder Polstermaterial von den gelieferten
E. Verbindungsplatte...................................... 1 Z. Abdeckung................................................. 1 Teilen entfernt wurden.
Parti fornite G. Guida di espulsione ................................... 1

A. Finisher documenti .................................... 1 H. Contenitore punti ...................................... 1 C, D e Z non sono utilizzati.
D. Molla di messa a terra ............................... 1 Y. Piastra di messa a terra............................. 1 Rimuovere tutti i nastri adesivi e/o i materiali di
E. Piastra di connessione .............................. 1 Z. Coperchio .................................................. 1 protezione dalle parti fornite.
G. ............................... 1
A. .................................... 1 H. .................................. 1 CD Z
B. .................................. 1 I. M48 ................................. 2
C. ................................ 1 J. M420 ................................ 2
D. .................................. 1 Y. .................................... 1

E. .................................... 1 Z. ...................................... 1
F. ................................ 1
G. ................................................1
A. .................................................1 H. ........................................1 C, D Z .
B. .................................................1 I. M48 .................................................2
C. .................................................1 J. M420................................................2 ,
D. .................................................1 Y. ........................................................1 .
E. .......................................................1 Z. ...........................................................1
F. .................................................1
G. ..........................1
A. ........... 1 H. ...............1 C,D,Z
B. ........................... 1 I. M48 ............................2
C. ......................... 1 J. M420 ...........................2
D. ........................... 1 Y. .............................1

E. ............................... 1 Z. ...............................1
F. ..................... 1
8
B A


Le gabarit de fixation (AK-735) doit tre en Avant de commencer l'installation, s'assurer de dos du bac d'jection (B) dans les trous (2)
place avant de procder l'installation du finis- mettre la machine hors tension et de du dispositif de levage du finisseur docu-
seur de document. dbrancher la fiche d'alimentation de la prise ment (A).
murale.

El Kit de instalacin (AK-735) debe instalarse Antes de iniciar la instalacin, asegrese de parte posterior de la bandeja de salida (B)
antes de instalar el finalizador de documentos. apagar el interruptor de encendido de la en los orificios (2) del elevador del finaliza-
mquina y desenchufar el cable de alimentacin dor de documentos (A).

Das Gertezusatz (AK-735) muss installiert Bevor Sie mit der Installation beginnen berzeu- an der Rckseite des Auswerffachs (B) in
werden, bevor man den Finisher installiert. gen Sie sich, dass der Netzschalter des Gerts die ffnungen (2) an der Hebeplatte des Fin-

Il kit accessorio (AK-735) deve essere installato Prima di iniziare l'installazione, spegnere la vassoio di espulsione (B) nei fori (2) sul soll-
prima che sia installata la finisher documenti. macchina e scollegare la spina dalla presa di evatore della finisher documenti (A).
corrente.
1. (B) 2 (1)
AK- (A) (2)
735)
1. (B) (1) 2
AK-735) (A) (2)
. .
.
1. (B) (1)2
OFF
(A)
AK-735) (2)

9
Y
3
G
I(M4x8)
4
2.Attach the earth plate (Y)* to the center of 3.Remove the cover (3) from the machine. 4.Install the eject guide (G) by fitting the 2
the bottom of the document finisher using an eject guide pins (4) into the holes in the
M4 8 screw (I). machine.
*The part was supplied with AK-735
2.Raccordez la plaque de terre (Y)* en bas au 3.Retirer le couvercle (3) de la machine. 4.Installer le guide d'jection (G) en insrant
centre du finisseur de document en utilisant les 2 ergots du guide d'jection (4) dans les
une vis M4 8 (I). trous de la machine.
*La pice a t fournie avec l'AK-735
2.Conecte la placa de conexin a tierra (Y)* al 3.Quite la cubierta (3) de la mquina. 4.Instale la gua de salida (G) encajando los 2
centro de la parte inferior del finalizador de pasadores de la gua de salida (4) en los ori-
documentos con un tornillo M4 8 (I). ficios de la mquina.
*La pieza se proporcion con AK-735
2.Bringen Sie die Grundplatte (Y)* in der Mitte 3.Entfernen Sie die Abdeckung (3) vom Gert. 4.Installieren Sie die Ausgabefhrung (G),
des Bodens des Finishers mit den M4 x 8 indem Sie die beiden Stifte (4) der Aus-
Schrauben (I) an. werffhrung in die Aufnahmen des Gerts
*Dieses Teil ist im AK-735 enthalten. einsetzen.
2.Applicare la piastra di messa a terra (Y)* al 3.Rimuovere il coperchio (3) dalla macchina. 4.Installare la guida di espulsione (G) inser-
centro dell'area inferiore della finisher docu- endo i 2 perni (4) della guida di espulsione
menti utilizzando una vite M4 8 (I). nei fori della macchina.
*Parte fornita con AK-735
2. M48(I) (Y)* 3.3 4. (G) 2 (4)

*AK-735
2. M4 8(I) (Y)* 3. (3) . 4. (G) (4) 2

. .
*AK-735
2. M48(I) (Y)* 3.(3) 4. (G) (4)2

*AK-735
10
8 9
J(M4x20)
J(M4x20)
F F
5 E
E E
6 7
machine using 2 M4 20 screws (J).Attach connector (7) on the machine. Hook the sig- plate (E).Take care not to get the cable
left cover. nector is covered by the connector cover (F).
5.Fixez la plaque de connexion (E) la 7.Raccorder le connecteur de ligne de signal 8.Placer le cache de connecteur (F) dans la
machine l'aide de 2 vis M4 20 (J). Rac- (6) sur le connecteur (7) de la machine. plaque de connexion (E). Prendre soin ne
de connecteur (F).
5.Fije la placa de conexin (E) a la mquina 7.Conecte el conector de lnea de seales (6) 8.Acople la cubierta del conector (F) en la
mediante 2 tornillos M4 20 (J). Conctelas al conector (7) de la mquina. Enganche el placa de conexin (E). Tenga cuidado de
erta del conector (F).
5.Bringen Sie die Verbindungsplatte (E) mit 2 7.Verbinden Sie den Stecker der Signalleitung 8.Setzen Sie die Stecker-Abdeckung (F) in die
M4 20 Schrauben (J) am Gert an. Brin- (6) mit dem Steckverbinder im Gert (7). Verbindungsplatte (E) ein. Stellen Sie sicher,
Abdeckung (F) abgedeckt ist.
5.Applicare la piastra di connessione (E) alla 7.Collegare il connettore di linea del segnale 8.Inserire il copri connettore (F) nella piastra di
macchina utilizzando le 2 viti M4 20 (J). (6) al connettore (7) sulla periferica. Aggan- connessione (E). Fare attenzione a non
connettore (F).
5. 2 M420(J) (E) 7. (6) 8. (F) (E)

(7) (8) (9)
6.5
(F)
5. M4 20(J) 2 7. (6) (7) 8. (F) (E)

(E) . . (8) (9) . (F)
. . .
6. (5) . . (F)
.
5. (E) M420(J)2 7.(6) 8.(F) (E)

(7) (8)

(9)
6. (5) (F)

11
10
11
11-2 10
11-1
11-1
11
9.Remove the screw (10).Remove the rear 10.Separate the rear cover (11) into the two 11.Install the cover (11-1) using the screw (10).
cover (11) . covers(11-1,11-2).
The cover(11-2) isnot used.
(11). couvercles (11-1, 11-2). (10).
9.Quite el tornillo (10). Quite la cubierta poste- 10.Separe la cubierta posterior (11) en las dos 11.Instale la cubierta (11-1) con un tornillo (10).
rior (11). cubiertas (11-1, 11-2).
9.Entfernen Sie die Schraube (10). Entfernen 10.Teilen Sie die hintere Abdeckung (11) in zwei 11.Installieren Sie die Abdeckung (11-1) mit den
Sie die hintere Abdeckung (11). Abdeckungen (11-1, 11-2) auf. Schrauben (10).
posteriore (11). coperchi (11-1,11-2). vite (10).
9.10 11 10. (11) 2 (11-1,11-2) 11. (10) (11-1)

(11-2)
9. (10) . (11) 10. (11) 2 (11-1, 11-2) 11. (10) (11-1)

. . .
(11-2) .
9. (10) (11) 10.(11) 2 (11-1,11-2) 11. (10) 11-1

(11-2)
12
13
14
12 13 14
16
E
14 15
12.Open the document finisher upper front 13.Insert the pin (15) on the connecting plate 14.Slowly push the lock frame (14) fully into the
cover (12). Remove the screw (13).Pull the (E) into the hole (16) on the document fin- machine so that the connectors at the far
lock frame (14) frontwards. isher.Connect the document finisher to the end are connected.
15.
12.Ouvrir le couvercle avant suprieur du finis- 13.Introduire la broche (15) sur la plaque de 14.Pousser doucement le cadre de verrouillage
seur de document (12). Retirez la vis (13). connexion (E) dans le trou (16) sur le finis- (14) fond dans la machine de sorte que les
Tirer le cadre de verrouillage (14) vers le seur de document.Connecter le finisseur de connecteurs l'extrmit soient raccords.
bas. document sur la machine. 15.Fixez le bti de verrouillage (14) l'aide de
12.Abra la cubierta frontal superior del finaliza- 13.Inserte el pasador (15) de la placa de conex- 14.Empuje lentamente y hasta el fondo el
dor de documentos (12). Quite el tornillo in (E) en el orificio (16) del finalizador de marco del cierre (14) hacia la mquina de
(13). Empuje el marco de cierre (14) hacia documentos.Conecte el finalizador de docu- modo que se conecten los conectores en el
delante. mentos a la mquina. extremo ms lejano.
en la pgina 15.
12.ffnen Sie die obere vordere Abdeckung 13.Setzen Sie den Stift (15) der Verbindung- 14.Schieben Sie die Verriegelung (14) wieder
des Finishers (12). Entfernen Sie die splatte (E) in die ffnung (16) des Finishers. langsam ins Gert, so dass die Verbindun-
Schraube (13). Ziehen Sie die Verriegelung Verbinden Sie den Finisher mit dem Gert. gen am anderen Ende des Gerts geschlos-
(14) nach vorne. * Falls Sie den Finisher nicht anschlieen sen werden.
12.Aprire il coperchio frontale superiore del fin- 13.Inserire il perno (15) della piastra di connes- 14.Spingere lentamente la frame di blocco (14)
isher documenti (12). Togliere la vite (13). sione (E) nel foro (16) del finisher docu- nella macchina in modo che i connettori
Tirare in avanti la frame di blocco (14). menti. Collegare il finisher documenti alla all'estremit risultino collegati.
documenti, regolare laltezza come descritto
a pagina 15.
12.12 13. (E) 15 14.14

13 14 16
P15 15. 12 1 (13)
(14)
12. (12) . 13. (E) (15) 14.

(13) . (14) (16) . (14)
. . .
P15 15. 12 131
. 14 .
12. 13. (E) (15) 14.

(12) (13)
(16) (14)
(14) 15. 12 13

P15
14

13
H
12
16.Install the staple cartridge (H).


page 20.
16.Installer la cartouche d'agrafes (H).

17.Refermer le couvercle avant suprieur (12).

age page 20.
16.Instale el cartucho de grapas (H).

17.Cierre la cubierta frontal superior (12).

en la pgina 20.

(H).
17.Schlieen Sie die obere vordere Abdeckung
(12).

auf Seite 20 fort.
16.Installare il contenitore punti (H).

17.Chiudere il coperchio superiore anteriore
(12).

16. (H)
17. (12)
P20
16. (H) .
17. (12) .
20
.
16. (H)
17.(12)
P20
14
15
b
b a a a
b
16 15
21
the document finisher comply with the refer-
ences below.
1.berprfen Sie, dass die jeweilige Hhe der (21).
(15) (a) (21) (b)

1. (15) (15) (a) (21) (b)
(16)

(15) (a) (21) (b) .

1. (15) (15) (a) (21) (b) .
(16) .
.
(15) (a) (21) (b)

1. (15) (15) (a) (21) (b)

(16)

15
25
24
26
12
22
26
23 27 26
24 25
24
2.Open the upper front cover (12) of the docu- 4.Remove the 2 screws (24) and remove the 5.Remove the 3 screws (26) and remove the
ment finisher. foot cover (25). lower rear cover (27).
3.Remove the screw (22) and open the lower
front cover (23).
2.Ouvrir le couvercle avant suprieur (12) du 4.Dposer les 2 vis (24) puis le couvercle du 5.Dposer les 3 vis (26) puis le couvercle arri-
finisseur de document. pied (25). re infrieur (27).
3.Dposer la vis (22) et ouvrir le couvercle
avant infrieur (23).
2.Abra la cubierta frontal superior (12) del 4.Quite los 2 tornillos (24) y quite la cubierta 5.Quite los 3 tornillos (26) y quite la cubierta
finalizador de documentos. de la pata (25). posterior inferior (27).
3.Quite el tornillo (22) y abra la cubierta frontal
inferior (23).
2.ffnen Sie die obere vordere Abdeckung 4.Entfernen Sie die 2 Schrauben (24) und 5.Entfernen Sie die 3 Schrauben (26) und
(12) des Finishers. nehmen Sie die Fuabdeckung (25) ab. nehmen Sie die untere hintere Abdeckung
3.Entfernen Sie die Schraube (22) und ffnen (27) ab.
Sie die untere vordere Abdeckung (23).
2.Aprire il coperchio superiore anteriore (12) 4.Rimuovere le 2 viti (24) e quindi rimuovere la 5.Rimuovere le 3 viti (26) e quindi rimuovere il
della finisher documenti. copertura del piede (25). coperchio inferiore posteriore (27).
3.Rimuovere la vite (22) ed aprire il coperchio
inferiore anteriore (23).
2. (12) 4. 2 (24) (25) 5. 3 (26) (27)

3. 1 (22) (23)
2. (12) . 4. (24) 2 , (25) 5. (26) 3 , (27)

3. (22) 1 (23) . .
.
2. 4. (24)2 (25) 5. (26)3 (27)

(12)
3. (22)1 (23)

16
31
28 30
29
29
6.Remove the screw (28) to remove the span- 8.Turn the adjustment bolts (31) with the spanner (29) to adjust the height of the document finisher.
ner (29). Turning the adjustment bolt clockwise lifts the document finisher, and turning it counterclockwise
7.Loosen the 2 screws (30) on the front right lowers the document finisher.
and on the rear right of the document fin- 9.Retighten each of the 2 screws (30) and replace the spanner (29).
isher.
6.Dposer la vis (28) pour librer la cl (29). 8.Faire tourner les boulons de rglage (31) avec la cl (29) pour ajuster la hauteur du finisseur de
7.Desserrer les 2 vis (30) du ct avant droit et document.
arrire droit du finisseur de document. Tourner le boulon de rglage dans le sens horloger pour lever le finisseur de document, et dans
6.Quite el tornillo (28) para extraer la llave 8.Gire los pernos de ajuste (31) con la llave inglesa (29) para ajustar la altura del finalizador de
inglesa (29). documentos.
7.Afloje los 2 tornillos (30) en los lados dere- Al girar el perno de ajuste en la direccin de las manecillas del reloj se levanta el finalizador de
cho frontal y derecho posterior del finaliza- documentos y al girar en sentido contrario a las manecillas del reloj baja el finalizador de docu-
dor de documentos. mentos.
6.Entfernen Sie die Schraube (28), um den 8.Drehen Sie die Einstellschrauben (31) mit dem Schlssel (29), um die Hhe des Finishers
Schlssel (29) abzunehmen einzustellen.
7.Lsen Sie die 2 Schrauben (30) vorne rechts Durch Drehen der Einstellschraube im Uhrzeigersinn wird der Finisher angehoben, whrend er
und hinten rechts am Finisher. durch Drehen entgegen dem Uhrzeigersinn abgesenkt wird.
6.Rimuovere la vite (28) per rimuovere la chi- 8.Ruotare i bulloni di regolazione (31) con la chiave (29) per regolare l'altezza della finisher docu-
ave (29). menti.
7.Allentare le 2 viti (30) sulla parte anteriore Ruotando il bullone di regolazione in senso orario si solleva la finisher documenti, mentre ruotan-
destra e posteriore destra della finisher doc- dolo in senso antiorario si abbassa la finisher documenti.
umenti. 9.Ristringere ciascuna delle 2 viti (30) e riporre la chiave (29).
6. (28) (29) 8. (29) (31)

7. 2
(30) 9. 2 (30) (29)
6. (28) 1 , (29) 8. (29) (31) .

. ,
7. (30) 2 .
. 9. (30) 2 (29) .
6. (28)1 (29) 8.(29) (31)

7.
(30) 2 9. (30) 2
(29)
17
32
33 35
34
10.If the distances between the document fin- 11.Loosen the 2 screws (34) on the front left 12.Turn the adjustment bolts (35) with a Philips-
isher and the machine (32, 33) are unequal, and on the rear left of the document finisher. head screwdriver to adjust the height of the
use the procedure below to adjust the spac- document finisher.
ing. Turning the adjustment bolt clockwise lifts
the document finisher, and turning it counter-
clockwise lowers the document finisher.
10.Si les distances entre le finisseur de docu- 11.Desserrer les 2 vis (34) du ct avant 12.Faire tourner les boulons de rglage (35)
ment et la machine (32, 33) sont ingales, gauche et arrire gauche du finisseur de l'aide d'un tournevis cruciforme pour ajuster
rgler l'espacement en procdant de la document. la hauteur du finisseur de document.
manire suivante. Tourner le boulon de rglage dans le sens
horloger pour lever le finisseur de document,
et dans le sens contraire au sens horloger
pour le descendre.
10.Si las distancias entre el finalizador de docu- 11.Afloje los 2 tornillos (34) en los lados izqui- 12. Gire los pernos de ajuste (35) con un destornillador
mentos y la mquina (32, 33) no son erdo frontal e izquierdo posterior del finaliza- de cabeza Philips para ajustar la altura del finaliza-
dor de documentos.
iguales, utilice el siguiente procedimiento dor de documentos.
Al girar el perno de ajuste en la direccin de las
para ajustar la separacin. manecillas del reloj se levanta el finalizador de
documentos y al girar en sentido contrario a las
manecillas del reloj baja el finalizador de documen-
tos.
10.Falls die Abstnde zwischen dem Finisher 11.Lsen Sie die 2 Schrauben (34) vorne links 12. Stellen Sie die Einstellschrauben (35) mit einem
und dem Gert (32, 33) ungleich sind, fhren und hinten links am Finisher. Kreuzschlitzschraubendreher ein, um die Hhe
Sie die unten angegebenen Schritte aus, um des Finishers zu korrigieren.
den Abstand zu korrigieren. Durch Drehen der Einstellschraube im Uhrzei-
gersinn wird der Finisher angehoben, whrend
er durch Drehen entgegen dem Uhrzeigersinn
abgesenkt wird.
10.Se le distanze tra la finisher documenti e la 11.Allentare le 2 viti (34) sulla parte anteriore 12.Ruotare i bulloni di regolazione (35) con un
macchina (32, 33) sono diverse, attenersi sinistra e posteriore sinistra della finisher cacciavite con testa a croce tipo Philips per
alla sottostante procedura per regolare la documenti. regolare l'altezza della finisher documenti.
spaziatura. Ruotando il bullone di regolazione in senso
orario si solleva la finisher documenti, men-
tre ruotandolo in senso antiorario si abbassa
la finisher documenti.
10. (3233) 11. 2 12. (35)

(34)

10. (32, 33) 11. (34) 2 12. (35)

. .
.
,
.
10. 11. 12. (35)

3233
(34) 2

18
14.Reinstall the foot cover (25) and lower rear
cover (27).

14.Reposer le couvercle du pied (25) et le cou-
vercle arrire infrieur (27).

14.Vuelva a instalar la cubierta de la pata (25) y
la cubierta posterior inferior (27).

14.Setzen Sie die Fuabdeckung (25) und die
untere hintere Abdeckung (27) wieder ein.

14.Reinstallare la copertura del piede (25) e il
coperchio inferiore posteriore (27).
13. 2 (34)
14. (25)
(27)
13. (34) 2 .
14. (25), (27)
.
13. (34) 2
14.(25) (27)

19
78.5mm2.5
158mm2.5

3.Check whether the stapling position is off-center. If the staple position is off-center, follow the procedure below to adjust the position.

3.Vrifier que la position d'agrafage n'est pas en dcalage.Si la position d'agrafage est dcale, la rgler en procdant de la manire suivante.

3.Compruebe si la posicin de grapado est descentrada.Si la posicin de grapado est descentrada, realice el siguiente procedimiento para ajustar la
posicin.

1.Stecken Sie den Netzstecker des Gerts in die Wandsteckdose und schalten Sie das Gert am Hauptschalter ein.
3.Prfen Sie, ob die Heftposition auermittig ist.Falls die Heftposition auermittig ist, mssen Sie sie wie folgend einstellen.

3.Verificare che la posizione di spillatura non sia fuori centro.Se la posizione di spillatura fuori centro, seguire la procedura riportata sotto per regolare
la posizione.
1.
2.2
3.
78.5mm 2.5mm

1. ON .
2. 2 .
3. . .
78.5mm 2.5mm
1. ON
2.2

3.

78.5mm 2.5mm
20
(a) (b)
Si el grapado del papel se encuentra demasiado cerca del frente de la <Valor de referencia> 78,5 mm 2,5 mm del centro del papel
5. 7. 4 6
(a) 78.5mm 2.5mm
(b)

. 7. 4 6 .
5. . 78.5mm 2.5mm
(a) .
(b) .
4. U246 Finisher
Staple HP 6.
7. 4 6
5. 78.5mm 2.5mm
(a)
(b)
21
FINISHER ATTACHMENT KIT
E
B G
D
C
I
A J
H
K
E. Rear left stay.............................................. 1

English
F. Left scanner cover ..................................... 1
Supplied parts G. Front left stay ............................................. 1
A. Drive unit ................................................... 1 H. Eject unit .................................................... 1
B. Paper entry unit ......................................... 1 I. Wire stopper .............................................. 2
C. Paper entry unit cover ............................... 1 J. Upper front cover ....................................... 1
D. Edging ....................................................... 1 K. Left connection cover................................. 1
E. Support arrire gauche .............................. 1

Franais
F. Couvercle de scanner gauche ................... 1
Pices fournies G. Support avant gauche................................ 1
A. Unit d'entranement ................................. 1 H. Unit d'jection .......................................... 1
B. Unit d'entre du papier ............................ 1 I. Bute de cable........................................... 2
C. Couvercle de l'unit d'entre du papier ..... 1 J. Couvercle avant suprieur......................... 1
D. Passage..................................................... 1 K. Couvercle de connexion gauche ............... 1
E. Soporte izquierdo trasero .......................... 1

Espaol
F. Cubierta izquierda del escner .................. 1
Partes suministradas G. Soporte frontal izquierdo............................ 1
A. Unidad de accionamiento .......................... 1 H. Unidad de salida ........................................ 1
B. Unidad de ingreso de papel....................... 1 I. Tope para cables ....................................... 2
C. Cubierta de la unidad de ingreso de papel ... 1 J. Cubierta frontal superior ............................ 1
D. Pestaa ..................................................... 1 K. Cubierta de conexiones izquierda ............. 1
E. Hintere linke Sttze.................................... 1

Deutsch
F. Linke Scanner-Abdeckung......................... 1
Gelieferte Teile G. Vordere linke Sttze................................... 1
A. Antriebseinheit........................................... 1 H. Auswerfeinheit ........................................... 1
B. Papiereinzugseinheit ................................. 1 I. Kabelhalter................................................. 2
C. Abdeckung der Papiereinzugseinheit ........ 1 J. Obere vordere Abdeckung......................... 1
D. Kantenschutz............................................. 1 K. Linke Verbindungsabdeckung.................... 1
E. Supporto posteriore sinistro....................... 1

Italiano
F. Coperchio sinistro dello scanner................ 1
Parti di fornitura G. Supporto anteriore sinistro......................... 1
A. Unit guida ................................................ 1 H. Unit di espulsione .................................... 1
B. Unit di ingresso carta ............................... 1 I. Fermacavo................................................. 2
C. Coperchio unit di ingresso carta .............. 1 J. Coperchio superiore anterior ..................... 1
D. Bordo ......................................................... 1 K. Coperchio connessione sinistro................. 1
E. ...........................1
F. .........................1
G. ...........................1
A. ............................. 1 H. .............................1
B. ............................. 1 I. ...........................2
C. ......................... 1 J. ...........................1
D. ............................. 1 K. ...........................1
E. .................................... 1
F. ................................. 1
G. .................................... 1
A. ........................................ 1 H. ........................................ 1
B. ........................................ 1 I. ..................................... 2
C. ................................. 1 J. ........................................ 1
D. .................................................. 1 K. ..................................... 1
E. ...........................1
F. ...................1
G. ...........................1
A. ......................... 1 H. .........................1
B. ......................... 1 I. ...................2
C. ................... 1 J. ...........................1
D. ........................... 1 K. .........................1
1
O P Q
L
N R
L. Left cover ................................................... 1 Be sure to remove any tape and/or cushioning Before installing the AK-730, make sure that the
M. Upper left cover ......................................... 1 material from supplied parts. MFPs main power switch is turned off and that
N. Paper conveying unit ................................. 1 its power cord is unplugged from the power out-
O. M4 8 screw ............................................. 7 let.
P. M4 20 screw ........................................... 4
Q. P Tite screw M3 8 ................................... 1
R. Lower connection cover............................. 1
L. Couvercle gauche...................................... 1 Veillez retirer les morceaux de bande adh- Avant dinstaller l'AK-730, sassurer que linter-
M. Couvercle suprieur gauche...................... 1 sive et/ou les matriaux de rembourrage des rupteur dalimentation principal du MFP est
N. Unit de transport du papier ...................... 1 pices fournies. coup et que le cordon dalimentation est
O. Vis M4 8.................................................. 7 dbranch de la prise secteur.
P. Vis M4 20................................................ 4
Q. Vis P Tite M3 8 ....................................... 1
R. Couvercle de connexion infrieur .............. 1
L. Cubierta izquierda...................................... 1 Asegrese de despegar todas las cintas y/o Antes de instalar el AK-730, asegrese de que
M. Cubierta superior izquierda........................ 1 material amortiguador de las partes suministra- el interruptor principal de la alimentacin de la
N. Unidad de transporte de papel .................. 1 das. MFP est desconectado y que su cable de ali-
O. Tornillo M4 8 ........................................... 7 mentacin est desenchufado de la toma de
P. Tornillo M4 20 ......................................... 4 corriente.
Q. Tornillo P Tite M3 8 ................................. 1
R. Cubierta de conexiones inferior ................. 1
L. Linke Abdeckung ....................................... 1 Entfernen Sie Klebeband und/oder Dmpfungs- Vor dem Einbau des AK-730 muss der MFP-
M. Obere linke Abdeckung ............................. 1 material vollstndig von den mitgelieferten Hauptschalter ausgeschaltet und das Netzkabel
N. Papierfrdereinheit .................................... 1 Teilen. von der Steckdose abgezogen sein.
O. M4 8 Schraube ....................................... 7
P. M4 20 Schraube ..................................... 4
Q. P-Tite-Schraube M3 8 ............................ 1
R. Untere Verbindungsabdeckung ................. 1
L. Coperchio sinistro...................................... 1 Accertarsi di rimuovere tutti i nastri adesivi e/o il Prima di installare l'unit AK-730, assicurarsi
M. Coperchio superiore sinistro...................... 1 materiale di imbottitura dalle parti fornite. che linterruttore principale dell'MFP sia spento
N. Unit di trasporto carta .............................. 1 e che il suo cavo di alimentazione sia scollegato
O. Vite M4 8 ................................................ 7 presa di corrente.
P. Vite M4 20 .............................................. 4
Q. Vite P Tite M3 8 ...................................... 1
R. Coperchio connessione inferior ................. 1
L. ............................... 1 AK-730 MFP

M. ........................... 1
N. ............................. 1
O. M48 ........................... 7
P. M420 .......................... 4
Q. P M38 ................... 1
R. ........................... 1
L. ........................................... 1 , AK-730 MFP

M. ........................................ 1 . OFF
N. ........................................ 1 .
O. M48......................................... 7
P. M420 ....................................... 4
Q. M38P Tight............................... 1
R. ........................................ 1
L. ............................. 1 AK-730 MFP

M. ........................... 1
OFF
N. ......................... 1
O. M48 ........................... 7
P. M420 .......................... 4
Q. M38P .................... 1
R. ......................... 1
2
3
6
2
1
3
4
5
Procedure 2.Push in the top and bottom hooks (3) and 3.Remove the 2 screws (5) inside the interface
1.Remove the 2 screws (2) in the left ISU open the interface cover (4). cover (4) and remove the left scanner cover
cover (1). (6).
Procdure 2.Appuyer sur les crochets haut et bas (3) et 3.Dposer les 2 vis (5) l'intrieur du couver-
1.Dposer les 2 vis (2) du couvercle gauche ouvrir le couvercle de l'interface (4). cle de l'interface (4) et dposer le couvercle
de l'ISU (1). de scanner gauche (6).
Procedimiento 2.Presione los ganchos superior e inferior (3) y 3.Quite los 2 tornillos (5) de interior de la cubi-
1.Quite los 2 tornillos (2) de la cubierta ISU abra la cubierta de la interfaz (4). erta de la interfaz (4) y quite la cubierta
izquierda (1). izquierda del escner (6).
Verfahren 2.Drcken Sie die Haken (3) oben und unten 3.Entfernen Sie die 2 Schrauben (5) im Innern
1.Entfernen Sie die 2 Schrauben (2) in der ein und ffnen Sie die Schnittstellenabdeck- der Schnittstellenabdeckung (4) und
linken ISU-Abdeckung (1). ung (4). nehmen Sie die linke Scanner-Abdeckung
(6) ab.
Procedura 2.Spingere i ganci (3) superiore e inferiore ed 3.Rimuovere le 2 viti (5) all'interno della coper-
1.Rimuovere le 2 viti (2) sul coperchio ISU sin- aprire la copertura di interfaccia (4). tura di interfaccia (4) e quindi rimuovere il
istro (1). coperchio sinistro dello scanner (6).
2. (3) (4) 3. (4) 2 (5)

1. ISU (1) 2 (2) (6)
2. (3) (4) 3. (4) (5) 2

1.ISU (1) (2) 2 . (6)
. .
2. (3) 3.(4)
1.ISU (1) (2)2 (4) (5)2 (6)

3
13
15
9
14
12
10
11
8
4.Open the front cover (7) on the MFP. 7.Remove the screw (11) from the fan cover 9.Remove the eject cover (15).
5.Pull out the paper conveyor cover (8). (10). * Pull the lower front side to the left before
6.If the operation panel (9) is lowered, raise it 8.Remove the screw (12) and pull the upper removing the cover.
to the top position. right cover (13) outwards slightly while
removing the front right cover (14).
4.Ouvrir le capot avant (7) sur le MFP. 7.Dposer la vis (11) du couvercle du ventila- 9.Dposer le capot djection (15).
5.Sortir le couvercle du transporteur du papier teur (10). * Tirer le ct avant infrieur sur la gauche
(8). 8.Dposer la vis (12) et tirer lgrement le avant de dposer le capot.
6.Si le panneau de commande (9) est abaiss, couvercle suprieur droit (13) vers l'extrieur
le relever dans sa position maximum. tout en dposant le couvercle avant droit
(14).
4.Abra la cubierta frontal (7) en la MFP. 7.Quite el tornillo (11) de la cubierta del venti- 9.Quite la cubierta de expulsin (15).
5.Extraiga la cubierta de la unidad de trans- lador (10). * Tire del lado frontal inferior hacia la izqui-
porte de papel (8). 8.Quite el tornillo (12) y saque la cubierta erda antes de quitar la cubierta.
6.Si el panel de trabajo (9) est bajo, levntelo superior derecha (13) ligeramente mientras
hasta la posicin superior. quita la cubierta frontal derecha (14).
4.ffnen Sie die vordere Abdeckung (7) am 7.Entfernen Sie die Schraube (11) von der 9.Entfernen Sie die Auswerfabdeckung (15).
MFP. Lfterabdeckung (10). * Ziehen Sie die untere Vorderseite nach
5.Ziehen Sie die Papierfrdererabdeckung (8) 8.Entfernen Sie die Schraube (12) und ziehen links, bevor Sie die Abdeckung abnehmen.
heraus. Sie die obere rechte Abdeckung (13) leicht
6.Heben Sie das Bedienfeld (9) in die oberste nach auen, whrend Sie gleichzeitig die
Position, falls es gesenkt ist. vordere rechte Abdeckung (14) abnehmen.
4.Aprire il pannello anteriore (7) sull'MFP. 7.Rimuovere la vite (11) dal coperchio ventola 9.Rimuovere il coperchio di espulsione carta
5.Estrarre il coperchio di trasporto carta (8). (10). (15).
6.Se il pannello operativo (9) abbassato, sol- 8.Rimuovere la vite (12) e tirare il coperchio * Tirare il lato anteriore in basso a sinistra
levarlo alla posizione in alto. superiore destro (13) leggermente verso prima di rimuovere il coperchio.
l'esterno mentre si rimuove il coperchio ante-
riore destro (14).
4. MFP (7) 7. (10) 1 (11) 9. (15)

5. (8) 8. 1 (12)
6. (9) (13) (14)

4.MFP (7) . 7. (10) (11) 1 . 9. (15) .

5. (8) . 8. (12) 1
6. (9) (13) (14) .
. .
4.MFP (7) 7.(10) (11)1 9.(15)

5.(8) 8. (12)1 (13)
6. (9) (14)

4
19
17
21 A
16
18
22 20 16
10.Remove the 2 M4 8 screws (black) (16) 11.Insert the hook (19) on the upper side of the drive unit (A) and the projection (20) on the under-
and remove the rear tray cover (17) and side into the respective positioning holes (21) (22) in the back plate and secure the drive unit
scanner bottom cover (18). using the 2 M4 8 screws (black) (16) removed in step 10.
10.Dposer les 2 vis M4 8 (noire) (16) et 11.Insrer le crochet (19) sur le ct suprieur de l'unit d'entranement (A) et la projection (20)
dposer le couvercle du support arrire (17) infrieure dans les trous de positionnement correspondant (21) (22) de la tle arrire et fixer
et le couvercle infrieur du scanner (18). l'unit d'entranement l'aide des 2 vis M4 8 (noire) (16) dposes l'tape 10.
10.Quite los 2 tornillos M4 8 (negro) (16) y 11.Inserte el gancho (19) del lado superior de la unidad de accionamiento (A) y el saliente (20) del
quite la cubierta izquierda de la bandeja (17) lado inferior en sus respectivos orificios de posicin (21) (22) en la placa posterior y asegure la
y la cubierta inferior del escner (18). unidad de accionamiento usando los 2 tornillos M4 8 (negro) (16) quitados en el paso 10.
10.Entfernen Sie die 2 M4 8 (schwarz) 11.Setzen Sie den Haken (19) an der Oberseite der Antriebseinheit (A) und den Vorsprung (20) an
Schrauben (16) und nehmen Sie die hintere der Unterseite in die entsprechenden Positionierungsffnungen (21) (22) der Rckplatte ein und
Fachabdeckung (17) und die Scanner-Bode- sichern Sie die Antriebseinheit mit den 2 in Schritt 10 entfernten M4 8 (schwarz) Schrauben
nabdeckung (18) ab. (16).
10.Rimuovere le 2 viti M4 8 (nera) (16) e 11.Inserire il gancio (19) sul lato superiore dell'unit guida (A) e la parte sporgente (20) sulla parte
quindi rimuovere il coperchio posteriore del inferiore, nei rispettivi fori di posizionamento (21) (22) nella piastra posteriore e fissare l'unit
vassoio (17) e il coperchio in basso dello guida usando le 2 viti M4 8 (nera) (16) rimosse nel punto 10.
scanner (18).
10. 2 M48( )(16) 11. (A) (19) (20) (21)(22)

(17) (18) 10 2 M48( )(16)
10. M48(16) 2 11. (A) (19) (20) (21)(22)

(17) (18) 10 M48(16) 2 .
.
10. M48(16)2
11. (A) (19) (20) (21)(22)
(17) (18)
10 M48
(16)2

5
A 27 23
25
24
B B
C 26
12.Remove the paper entry unit cover (C) from 13. Insert the projection (23) on the paper entry unit (B) into the hole (24) in the drive unit (A) and insert the
the paper entry unit (B). projection (25) into the hole (26) in the MFP frame to attach the paper entry unit (B).
Push the paper entry unit (B) to the right and fit the projection (25) into the hole (26) until it clicks into
place.
NOTICE
When installing the paper entry unit, take care not to dislodge the paper eject actuator (27).
After installing the unit, check the operation of the actuator.
12.Dposer le couvercle de l'unit d'entre du 13. Insrer la projection (23) de l'unit d'entre du papier (B) dans le trou (24) de l'unit d'entranement (A)
papier (C) de l'unit d'entre du papier (B). et insrer la projection (25) dans le trou (26) du bti du MFP pour fixer l'unit d'entre du papier (B).
Pousser l'unit d'entre du papier (B) vers la droite et insrer la projection (25) dans le trou (26)
jusqu'au clic.
AVIS
l'installation de l'unit d'entre du papier, attention ne pas dplacer l'actionneur d'jection du papier
(27). Aprs avoir install l'unit, vrifier le bon fonctionnement de l'actuateur.
12.Quite la cubierta de la unidad de ingreso de 13. Inserte el saliente (23) de la unidad de ingreso de papel (B) en el orificio (24) de la unidad de accionamiento (A)
papel (C) de la unidad de ingreso de papel e inserte el saliente (25) en el orificio (26) de la carcasa de la MFP para fijar la unidad de ingreso de papel (B).
(B). Presione la unidad de ingreso de papel (B) hacia la derecha y encaje el saliente (25) en el orificio (26) hasta
escuchar un clic.
AVISO
Cuando instale la unidad de ingreso de papel tenga cuidado de no desplazar el actuador de expulsin de papel
(27). Despus de instalar la unidad, compruebe el funcionamiento del actuador.
12.Nehmen Sie die Abdeckung der Papierein- 13. Setzen Sie den Vorsprung (23) an der Papiereinzugseinheit (B) in die ffnung (24) der Antriebseinheit (A)
zugseinheit (C) von der Papiereinzugs- ein und setzen Sie den Vorsprung (25) in die ffnung (26) im MFP-Rahmen ein, um die Papiereinzugsein-
einheit (B) ab. heit (B) anzubringen.
Drcken Sie die Papiereinzugseinheit (B) nach rechts und drcken Sie den Vorsprung (25) in die ffnung
(26), bis er einrastet.
HINWEIS
Achten Sie beim Anbringen der Papiereinzugseinheit darauf, dass der Papierauswerfaktuator (27) nicht
abspringt. berprfen Sie nach dem Montieren der Einheit die Funktionsfhigkeit des Aktuators.
12.Rimuovere il coperchio unit di ingresso 13. Inserire la parte sporgente (23) sull'unit di ingresso carta (B) nel foro (24) dell'unit guida (A), ed
carta (C) dell'unit di ingresso carta (B). inserire la parte sporgente (25) nel foro (26) del telaio dell'MFP per fissare l'unit di ingresso carta (B).
Spingere l'unit di ingresso carta (B) alla destra ed inserire la parte sporgente (25) nel foro (26) finch
non scatta in posizione con un clic.
NOTIFICA
Quando si installa l'unit di ingresso carta, fare attenzione a non rimuovere l'attuatore (27) di espulsione
carta. Dopo l'installazione dell'unit, controllare il funzionamento dell'attuatore.
12.CB 13. (B) (23) (A) (24) (25)

(26) (B)
(B) (25) (26)

(27)

12. (B) (C) 13. (B) (23) (A) (24) (25)

. (26) (B) .
(B) (25) (26) .

(27) .
.
12. (B) 13. (B) (23) (A) (24) (25)

(C) (26) (B)
(B) (25) (26)

(27)

6
A
29
28
E
A
D
29
28
31
O
30
14.Attach the edging (D) to the side plate, run 15.Insert the 2 projections (28) on the rear left 16.Insert the clamped binding band (30)
the cable from the drive unit (A) through the stay (E) into the holes (29) in the side plate attached to the cable from the drive unit (A)
edging (D) and secure it in place. and secure the rear left stay (E) with the M4 into the hole, run the cable through the 2
8 screw (O). edgings (31) and secure it in place.
14.Fixer le passage (D) la tle latrale, faire 15.Insrer les 2 projections (28) du support arri- 16.Insrer le collier de fixation (30) fix au cble
passer le cble venant de l'unit d'entrane- re gauche (E) dans les trous (29) de la tle venant de l'unit d'entranement (A) dans le
ment (A) dans le passage (D) et le fixer en latrale et fixer le support arrire gauche (E) trou, faire passer le cble dans les 2 pas-
place. l'aide d'une vis M4 8 (O). sages (31) et le fixer en place.
14.Fije la pestaa (D) a la placa lateral, tienda 15.Inserte los 2 salientes (28) del soporte tra- 16.Inserte la correa de sujecin (30) fijada al
el cable desde la unidad de accionamiento sero izquierdo (E) en los orificios (29) de la cable de la unidad de accionamiento (A) en
(A) a travs de la pestaa (D) y asegrelo en placa lateral y asegure el soporte trasero el orificio, tienda el cable a travs de las 2
posicin. izquierdo (E) con el tornillo M4 8 (O). pestaas (31) y asegrelo en posicin.
14. Bringen Sie den Kantenschutz (D) an der 15.Setzen Sie die 2 Vorsprnge (28) der hin- 16.Setzen Sie das Klemmschellenband (30) am
Seitenplatte an, fhren Sie das Kabel von teren linken Sttze (E) in die ffnungen (29) Kabel von der Antriebseinheit (A) in die ff-
der Antriebseinheit (A) durch den Kanten- der Seitenplatte ein und sichern Sie die hin- nung ein, fhren Sie das Kabel durch die 2
schutz (D) und befestigen Sie es. tere linke Sttze (E) mit der M4 8 Kantenschutze (31) und befestigen Sie es.
Schraube (O).
14.Fissare il bordo (D) alla piastra laterale, far 15.Inserire le 2 parti sporgenti (28) sul supporto 16.Inserire la fascetta di legatura con morsetto
passare il cavo dall'unit guida (A) attra- posteriore sinistro (E) nei fori (29) nella pias- (30) applicata al cavo dell'unit guida (A) nel
verso il bordo (D) e fissarlo in posizione. tra laterale, e quindi fissare il supporto pos- foro, far passare il cavo attraverso i 2 bordi
teriore sinistro (E) con la vite M4 8 (O). (31) e fissarlo in posizione.
14. (D) 15. (E) 2 (28) 16. (A)

(A) (29) 1 M48 (O) (30) 2
(E) (31)
14. (D) , (A) 15. (E) (28) 2 16. (A)

. (29) M48(O)1 (30) 2
(E) . (31) .
14. (D) 15.(E) 2 (28) 16. (A)

(A) (29) M48(O)1 (30)
(E)
2 (31)

7
2
F 2
33
O 32 G 33
17.Insert the hook (32) on the left scanner cover 18.Mount the 2 screws (2) in the left ISU cover 19.Insert the 2 projections (33) on the front left
(F) into the hole in the side plate and secure (1). stay (G) into the holes in the left cover on the
the left scanner cover (F) with the M4 8 MFP and temporarily fasten the front left
screw (O). stay (G) in place with the 2 M4 20 screws
(P).
17.Insrer le crochet (32) du couvercle de scan- 18.Dposer les 2 vis (2) du couvercle gauche 19.Insrer les 2 projections (33) du support
ner gauche (F) dans le trou de la tle latrale de l'ISU (1). avant gauche (G) dans les trous du couver-
et fixer le couvercle de scanner gauche (F) cle gauche du MFP et fixer provisoirement le
l'aide d'une vis M4 8 (O). support avant gauche (G) l'aide de 2 vis
M4 20 (P).
17.Inserte el gancho (32) de la cubierta izqui- 18.Instale los 2 tornillos (2) en la cubierta ISU 19.Inserte los 2 salientes (33) del soporte fron-
erda del escner (F) en el orificio de la placa izquierda (1). tal izquierdo (G) en los orificios de la cubi-
lateral y asegure la cubierta izquierda del erta izquierda de la MFP y ajuste
escner (F) con el tornillo M4 8 (O). temporariamente el soporte frontal izquierdo
(G) en posicin con los 2 tornillos M4 20
(P).
17.Setzen Sie den Haken (32) an der linken 18.Befestigen Sie die 2 Schrauben (2) an der 19.Setzen Sie die 2 Vorsprnge (33) der vor-
Scanner-Abdeckung (F) in die ffnung der linken ISU-Abdeckung (1). deren linken Sttze (G) in die ffnungen der
Seitenplatte und sichern Sie die linke Scan- linken Abdeckung am MFP ein und befesti-
ner-Abdeckung (F) mit der M4 8 Schraube gen Sie die vordere linke Sttze (G) provi-
(O). sorisch mit den 2 M4 20 Schrauben (P).
17.Inserire il gancio (32) sul coperchio sinistro 18.Montare le 2 viti (2) sul coperchio sinistro 19.Inserire le 2 parti sporgenti (33) sul supporto
dello scanner (F) nel foro della piastra later- dell'ISU (1). anteriore sinistro (G) nei fori nel coperchio
ale e fissare il coperchio sinistro dello scan- sinistro sull'MFP e stringere temporanea-
ner (F) con la vite M4 8 (O). mente il supporto anteriore sinistro (G) in
posizione con le 2 viti M4 20 (P).
17. (F) (32) 18. ISU (1) 2 (2) 19. (G) 2 (33)
1 M48 (O) MFP 2 M420
(F) (P) (G)
17. (F) (32) 18.ISU (1) (2) 2 19. (G) (33) 2

M48(O) 1 . MFP
(F) . M420(P) 2 (G)
.
17.(F) (32) 18.ISU (1) (2)2 19.(G) 2 (33) MFP

M48(O)1 M420(P)
(F) 2 (G)
8
H
35
H O
36 37
G
34
20.Position the eject unit (H) so that its rail section (34) is inside the MFP, insert the projection (35) on the rear into the hole in the side plate and then
place the front end onto the plate section (37) on the front left stay (G).
NOTICE
When installing the eject unit (H), take care not to pinch the drive unit cable (36).
21.Fully tighten the 2 M4 20 screws (P) that were temporarily fastened in step 19 and secure the front left stay (G).
22.Secure the eject unit (H) with the 2 M4 8 screws (O).
20.Positionner l'unit d'jection (H) de sorte que sa partie glissire (34) se trouve dans le MFP, insrer la projection arrire (35) dans le trou de la tle
latrale puis placer l'extrmit avant sur la partie plaque (37) du support avant gauche (G).
AVIS
l'installation de l'unit d'jection (H), attention ne pas coincer le cble de l'unit d'entranement (36).
21.Serrer fond les 2 vis M4 20 (P) provisoirement serres l'tape 19 et fixer le support avant gauche (G).
22.Fixer l'unit d'jection (H) avec 2 vis M4 8 (O).
20.Coloque la unidad de salida (H) de forma tal que la seccin de su carril (34) quede dentro de la MFP, inserte el saliente (35) de la parte posterior en el
orificio de la placa lateral y, a continuacin, coloque el extremo frontal sobre la seccin de la placa (37) del soporte frontal izquierdo (G).
AVISO
Cuando instale la unidad de salida (H) tenga cuidado de no pinzar el cable de la unidad de accionamiento (36).
21.Apriete totalmente los 2 tornillos M4 20 (P) que ajust temporariamente en el paso 19 y asegure el soporte frontal izquierdo (G).
22.Asegure la unidad de salida (H) con los 2 tornillos M4 8 (O).
20.Richten Sie die Auswerfeinheit (H) so aus, dass der Schienenabschnitt (34) im MFP sitzt, setzen Sie den Vorsprung (35) auf der Rckseite in die ff-
nung der Seitenplatte ein und setzen Sie dann das Vorderteil auf den Plattenabschnitt (37) an der vorderen linken Sttze (G).
HINWEIS
Achten Sie beim Montieren der Auswerfeinheit (H) darauf, dass das Kabel (36) der Antriebseinheit nicht eingeklemmt wird.
21.Ziehen Sie die in Schritt 19 provisorisch angezogenen 2 M4 20 Schrauben (P) vollstndig an und sichern Sie die vordere linke Sttze (G).
22.Befestigen Sie die Auswerfeinheit (H) mit den 2 M4 8 Schrauben (O).
20.Posizionare l'unit di espulsione (H) in modo che la sua sezione di rotaia (34) sia all'interno dell'MFP, inserire la parte sporgente (35) sul retro, nel foro
nella piastra laterale e quindi posizionare il terminale anteriore sulla sezione della piastra (37) sul supporto anteriore sinistro (G).
NOTIFICA
Quando si installa l'unit di espulsione (H), fare attenzione a non schiacciare il cavo dell'unit guida (36).
21.Stringere completamente le 2 viti M4 20 (P) che sono state strette temporaneamente nel punto 19 e fissare il supporto anteriore sinistro (G).
22.Fissare l'unit di espulsione (H) con le 2 viti M4 8 (O).
20. (H) (34) MFP (35) (G) (37)

(H) (36)
21. 19 2 M420 (P) (G)
22. 2 M48 (O) (H)
20. (H) (34) MFP (35) (G)

(37) .

(H) (36) .
21. 19 M420(P) 2 (G) .
22. M48(O) 2 (H) .
20. (H) (34) MFP (35) (G)

(37)

(H) (36)
21. 19 M420(P)2 (G)
22. M48(O)2 (H)
9
40
38
H
G
J
I 39 O J
23.Plug the 3 connectors (38) into the eject unit 25.Position the upper front cover (J) so that the screw housing (39) is not touching the front left stay
(H) and MFP. (G) and align the projections (40) with the 2 holes on the right side of the upper front cover (J)
24.Secure the cables with the 2 wire stoppers before attaching the upper front cover (J) and securing it in place with the M4 8 screw (O).
(I).
23.Enficher les 3 connecteurs (38) dans l'unit 25.Positionner le couvercle suprieur avant (J) de sorte que le logement de la vis (39) ne soit pas en
d'jection (H) et le MFP. contact avec le support avant gauche (G) et aligner les projections (40) avec les 2 trous du ct
24.Fixer les cbles l'aide des 2 butes de droit du couvercle suprieur avant (J) avant de fixer ce couvercle suprieur avant (J) l'aide
cble (I). d'une vis M4 8 (O).
23.Enchufe los 3 conectores (38) en la unidad 25.Coloque la cubierta frontal superior (J) de forma tal que el alojamiento del tornillo (39) no toque el
de salida (H) y la MFP. soporte frontal izquierdo (G) y alinee los salientes (40) con los 2 orificios del lado derecho de la
24.Asegure los cables con los 2 topes para cubierta frontal superior (J) antes de instalar la cubierta frontal superior (J) y asegurarla en
cables (I). posicin con el tornillo M4 8 (O).
23.Stecken Sie die 3 Stecker (38) in die Aus- 25.Positionieren Sie die obere vordere Abdeckung (J) so, dass das Schraubengehuse (39) nicht
werfeinheit (H) und den MFP. die vordere linke Sttze (G) berhrt und richten Sie die Vorsprnge (40) auf die 2 ffnungen an
24.Befestigen Sie die Kabel mit den 2 Kabelhal- der rechten Seite der oberen vorderen Abdeckung (J) aus, bevor Sie die obere vordere Abdeck-
tern (I). ung (J) anbringen und mit der M4 8 Schraube (O) sichern.
23.Collegare i 3 connettori (38) all'unit di 25.Posizionare il coperchio superiore anteriore (J) in modo che l'alloggiamento delle viti (39) non
espulsione (H) e all'MFP. tocchi il supporto anteriore sinistro (G), e allineare le parti sporgenti (40) con i 2 fori sul lato destro
24.Fissare i cavi con i 2 fermacavo (I). del coperchio superiore anteriore (J) prima di applicare il coperchio superiore anteriore (J) e fis-
sarlo in posizione con la vite M4 8 (O).
23. 3 (38) (H) 25. (J) (39) (G) (J)

MFP 2 (40) (J) 1 M48 (O)
24. 2 (I)
23. (38) 3 (H) MFP 25. (J) (39) (G)

. (J) (40) 2 (J) , M48(O) 1
24. (I) 2 .
.
23.(38)3 (H) 25.(J) (39) (G)

MFP (J) 2 (40) (J) M48(O)1
24.(I)2

10
B
O
14
12
C
41
O
10 G
11 K
26.Install the front right cover (14) using the 27.Fit the paper entry unit cover (C) onto the 28.Insert the 2 projections (41) on the left con-
screw (12) removed in step 8. paper entry unit (B). nection cover (K) into the holes in the front
Secure the fan cover (10) using the screw left stay (G) and secure the cover with the 2
(11) removed in step 7. M4 8 screws (O).
* Check that connector on the inside of the
fan cover (10) has not been dislodged.
26.Reposer le couvercle avant droit (14) l'aide 27.Monter le couvercle de l'unit d'entre du 28.Insrer les 2 projections (41) du couvercle
de la vis (12) dpose l'tape 8. papier (C) sur l'unit d'entre du papier (B). de connexion gauche (K) dans les trous du
Fixer le couvercle du ventilateur (10) l'aide support avant gauche (G) et fixer le couver-
de la vis (11) dpose l'tape 7. cle l'aide de 2 vis M4 8 (O).
* Vrifier que le connecteur l'intrieur du
couvercle du ventilateur (10) n'a pas boug.
26.Instale la cubierta frontal derecha (14) 27.Coloque la cubierta de la unidad de ingreso 28.Inserte los 2 salientes (41) de la cubierta de
usando el tornillo (12) quitado en el paso 8. de papel (C) en la unidad de ingreso de conexiones izquierda (K) en los orificios del
Asegure la cubierta del ventilador (10) papel (B). soporte frontal izquierdo (G) y asegure la
usando el tornillo (11) quitado en el paso 7. cubierta con los 2 tornillos M4 8 (O).
* Compruebe si no se desplaz el conector
del interior de la cubierta del ventilador (10).
26. Bringen Sie die vordere rechte Abdeckung (14) 27.Setzen Sie die Abdeckung (C) der Papiere- 28.Setzen Sie die 2 Vorsprnge (41) an der
mit der in Schritt 8 entfernten Schraube (12) an. inzugseinheit in die Papiereinzugseinheit (B) linken Verbindungsabdeckung (K) in die ff-
Befestigen Sie die Lfterabdeckung (10) mit der ein. nungen der vorderen linken Sttze (G) ein
in Schritt 7 entfernten Schraube (11). und befestigen Sie die Abdeckung mit den 2
* Vergewissern Sie sich, dass der Stecker auf M4 8 Schrauben (O).
der Innenseite der Lfterabdeckung (10) nicht
abgetrennt wurde.
26.Installare il coperchio anteriore destro (14) 27.Applicare il coperchio (C) dell'unit di 28.Inserire le 2 parti sporgenti (41) sul coper-
utilizzando la vite (12) rimossa nel punto 8. ingresso carta, sull'unit di ingresso carta chio connessione sinistro (K) nei fori del sup-
Fissare il coperchio ventola (10) utilizzando (B). porto anteriore sinistro (G) e quindi fissare il
la vite (11) rimossa nel punto 7. coperchio con le 2 viti M4 8 (O).
* Controllare che il connettore sull'interno del
coperchio della ventola (10) non sia stato
rimosso.
26. 8 1 (12) 27. (C) (B) 28. (K) 2 (41)

(14) (G) 2 M48 (O)
7 1 (11)
(10)
(10)

26. 8 (12) 1 27. (C) (B) 28. (K) (41) 2

(14) . . (G)
7 (11) 1 M48(O) 2 .
(10) .
(10)
.
26. 8 (12)1 27.(C) (B) 28.(K) (41)2

(14) (G) M48(O)2
7 (11)1
(10)
(10)

11
L
M
43
P
R
P
5
42
29.Remove the interface cover (42). 31.Open the eject cover (43). 33.Attach the lower connection cover (R) with
* After installing the document finisher, re- 32.Attach the upper left cover (M) and close the the 2 M4 20 screws (P).
attach the interface cover (42). eject cover (43).
30.Install the left cover (L) using the 2 screws
(5) removed in step 3
29.Dposer le couvercle d'interface (42). 31.Ouvrir le couvercle d'jection (43). 33.Fixer le couvercle de connexion infrieur (R)
* Aprs avoir install le retoucheur de docu- 32.Fixer le couvercle suprieur gauche (M) et l'aide de 2 vis M4 20 (P).
ment, reposer le couvercle d'interface (42). fermer le capot djection (43).
30.Reposer le couvercle gauche (L) l'aide des
2 vis (5) dposes l'tape 3.
29.Quite la cubierta de la interfaz (42). 31.Abra la cubierta de expulsin (43). 33.Fije la cubierta de conexiones inferior (R)
* Despus de instalar el finalizador de docu- 32.Fije la cubierta superior izquierda (M) y con los 2 tornillos M4 20 (P).
mentos, vuelva a colocar la cubierta de la cierre la cubierta de expulsin (43).
interfaz (42).
30.Instale la cubierta izquierda (L) usando los 2
tornillos (5) quitados en el paso 3.
29.Entfernen Sie die Schnittstellenabdeckung 31.ffnen Sie die Auswerfabdeckung (43). 33.Bringen Sie die untere Verbindungsabdeck-
(42). 32.Bringen Sie die obere linke Abdeckung (M) ung (R) mit den 2 M4 20 Schrauben (P)
* Bringen Sie nach der Installation des Doku- wieder an und schlieen Sie die Auswerfab- an.
ment-Finishers wieder die Schnittstellenab- deckung (43).
deckung (42) an.
30.Bringen Sie die linke Abdeckung (L) mit den
in Schritt 3 entfernten 2 Schrauben (5) an.
29.Rimuovere la copertura di interfaccia (42). 31.Aprire il coperchio di espulsione (43). 33.Fissare il coperchio connessione inferiore
* Dopo l'installazione della finitrice di docu- 32.Fissare il coperchio superiore sinistro (M) e (R) con le 2 viti M4 20 (P).
menti, fissare di nuovo la copertura di inter- chiudere il coperchio di espulsione (43).
faccia (42).
30.Installare il coperchio sinistro (L) utilizzando
le 2 viti (5) rimosse nel punto 3.
29. (42) 31. (43) 33. 2 M420 (P)

32. (M) (43) (R)
(42)
30. 3 2 (5)
(L)
29. (42) . 31. (43) . 33. M420(P) 2 (R)

(42) 32. (M) (43) .
. .
30. 3 (5) 2
(L) .
29.(42) 31.(43) 33. M420(P)2 (R)

(42) 32.(M) (43)

30. 3 (5)2 (L)

12
N
N Q
45
44
44 46
45
34.Pull the 2 slide rails (44) out from inside the 36.Move the slide rails (44) backwards and secure the paper conveying unit (N) to the 4 hooks (45).
MFP. Check that the hooks are securely engaged through the opening (46).
35.Align the 4 hooks (45) on the slide rails (44) 37.Lift the rear right side of the paper conveying unit (N) slightly while pushing it firmly in as far as it
with the notched sections of the paper con- will go. After pushing it all the way in, pull it out again and check that it stops mid-way.
veying unit (N) and fit the paper conveying 38.Secure the paper conveying unit (N) with the P Tite screw M3 8 (Q).
unit (N) onto the slide rails (44). 39.Close the front cover (7).
34.Sortir les 2 glissires coulissantes (44) hors 36.Remettre les glissires coulissantes (44) en place et fixer l'unit de transport du papier (N) avec
du MFP. les 4 crochets (45). Vrifier que les crochets sont soigneusement engags dans les ouvertures
35.Aligner les 4 crochets (45) des glissires (46).
coulissantes (44) avec les encoches de 37.Lever lgrement le ct arrire droit de l'unit de transport du papier (N) tout en pousant cette
l'unit de transport du papier (N) et insrer unit fond. Une fois pousse fond, tirer sur l'unit et vrifier qu'elle s'arrte mi-course.
l'unit de transport du papier (N) sur ces glis- 38.Fixer l'unit de transport du papier (N) l'aide d'une vis P Tite M3 x 8 (Q).
sires coulissantes (44). 39.Refermer le capot avant (7).
34.Tire de los 2 carriles deslizantes (44) para 36. Mueva los carriles deslizantes (44) hacia atrs y asegure la unidad de transporte de papel (N) a los 4 gan-
sacarlos de la MFP. chos (45). A travs de la abertura (46), compruebe si los ganchos estn enganchados de forma segura.
35.Alinee los 4 ganchos (45) de los carriles 37. Levante ligeramente el lado trasero derecho de la unidad de transporte de papel (N) mientras presiona
deslizantes (44) con las secciones con firmemente hasta el fondo. Despus de empujarla hasta el fondo, vuelva a sacarla y compruebe si se
muescas de la unidad de transporte de detiene en la mitad del recorrido.
papel (N) y encaje la unidad de transporte 38. Asegure la unidad de transporte de papel (N) con el tornillo P Tite M3 8 (Q).
de papel (N) en los carriles deslizantes (44). 39. Cierre la cubierta frontal (7).
34.Ziehen Sie die 2 Schlittenschienen (44) aus 36. Verschieben Sie die Schlittenschienen (44) nach hinten und befestigen Sie die Papierfrdereinheit (N) mit
dem MFP heraus. den 4 Haken (45). Vergewissern Sie sich durch die ffnung (46), dass die Haken ordnungsgem greifen.
35.Richten Sie die 4 Haken (45) der Schlitten- 37. Heben Sie die hintere rechte Seite der Papierfrdereinheit (N) leicht an und drcken Sie sie gleichzeitig bis
schienen (44) auf die Einkerbungen der zum Anschlag einwrts. Ziehen Sie sie nach dem Hineindrcken bis zum Anschlag wieder heraus und ver-
Papierfrdereinheit (N) aus und setzen Sie gewissern Sie sich, dass sie mittendrin anhlt.
die Papierfrdereinheit (N) auf die Schlitten- 38. Befestigen Sie die Papierfrdereinheit (N) mit der P-Tite-Schraube M3 8 (Q).
schienen (44). 39. Schlieen Sie die vordere Abdeckung (7).
34.Estrarre le 2 rotaie di scorrimento (44) 36.Spostare le rotaie di scorrimento (44) all'indietro e fissare l'unit di trasporto carta (N) ai 4 ganci
dall'interno dell'MFP. (45). Controllare che i ganci siano innestati in modo sicuro attraverso l'apertura (46).
35.Allineare i 4 ganci (45) sulle rotaie di scorri- 37.Sollevare leggermente il lato posteriore destro dell'unit di trasporto carta (N) mentre lo si spinge
mento (44) con le sezioni intagliate dell'unit fermamente fino in fondo. Dopo averlo spinto fino in fondo, estrarlo di nuovo e controllare che si
di trasporto carta (N), ed inserire l'unit di arresti a met corsa.
trasporto carta (N) sulle rotaie di scorrimento 38.Fissare l'unit di trasporto carta (N) con la vite P Tite M3 8 (Q)
(44). 39.Chiudere il pannello anteriore (7).
34. 2 (44) 36. (44) (N) 4 (45) 46

35. (N) (44) 4
(45) (N) 37. (N)
(44)
38. 1 P M38(Q) (N)
39. (7)
34. (44) 2 . 36. (44) 4 (45) (N)

35. (44) 4 (45) . 46 .
(N) (N) 37. (N) .
(44) . .
38. M38P Tight (Q) 1 (N) .
39. (7) .
34. (44)2 36. (44) 4 (45) (N)

35. (44) 4 46
(45) (N) 37. (N)
(N)
(44) 38. M38P (Q)1 (N)
39.(7)
13
CENTER-FOLDING UNIT
G
C I P
B H
E
R
A O
D F K L M N
J Q
E. Front side cover ......................................... 1 L. M4 10 screw (black)................................ 2

English
F. Rear side cover.......................................... 1 M. M4 12 screw ........................................... 4
Supplied parts G. Output stock tray........................................ 1 N. Lock plate .................................................. 2
A. Center-Folding unit .................................... 1 H. Output tray ................................................. 1 O. Binding band.............................................. 1
B. Front rail .................................................... 1 I. Relay paper conveying unit ....................... 1 P. Guide ......................................................... 1
C. Rear rail ..................................................... 1 J. Pin.............................................................. 1 Q. D7 label...................................................... 1
D. Output stopper........................................... 1 K. M4 8 screw ............................................11 R. Operation label .......................................... 1
E. Capot latral avant..................................... 1 L. Vis M4 10 (noire) .................................... 2

Franais
F. Capot latral arrire ................................... 1 M. Vis M4 12................................................ 4
Pices fournies G. Plateau de sortie du papier........................ 1 N. Plaque de verrouillage ............................... 2
A. Plieuse....................................................... 1 H. Plateau de sortie........................................ 1 O. Collier de fixation ....................................... 1
B. Glissire avant........................................... 1 I. Unit de transport du papier de relais........ 1 P. Guide ......................................................... 1
C. Glissire arrire ......................................... 1 J. Goupille...................................................... 1 Q. tiquette D7 ............................................... 1
D. Bute de sortie .......................................... 1 K. Vis M4 8.................................................11 R. tiquette de fonctionnement ...................... 1
E. Cubierta lateral frontal ............................... 1 L. Tornillo M4 10 (negro)............................. 2

Espaol
F. Cubierta lateral posterior ........................... 1 M. Tornillo M4 12 ......................................... 4
Partes suministradas G. Bandeja de recoleccin de papel de salida... 1 N. Placa de cierre........................................... 2
A. Unidad de plegado .................................... 1 H. Bandeja de salida ...................................... 1 O. Correa de sujecin..................................... 1
B. Carril frontal ............................................... 1 I. Unidad de transporte de papel por relevador ... 1 P. Gua ........................................................... 1
C. Carril posterior ........................................... 1 J. Pasador ..................................................... 1 Q. Etiqueta D7 ................................................ 1
D. Tope de salida ........................................... 1 K. Tornillo M4 8 ..........................................11 R. Etiqueta de funcionamiento ....................... 1
E. Vordere Seitenabdeckung ......................... 1 L. M4 10 Schraube (schwarz)..................... 2

Deutsch
F. Hintere Seitenabdeckung .......................... 1 M. M4 12 Schraube ..................................... 4
Gelieferte Teile G. Ausgabestapelfach .................................... 1 N. Sperrplatte ................................................. 2
A. Mittenfalteinheit ......................................... 1 H. Ausgabefach.............................................. 1 O. Schellenband ............................................. 1
B. Vordere Schiene ........................................ 1 I. Eingesetzte Papierfrdereinheit................. 1 P. Fhrung ..................................................... 1
C. Hintere Schiene ......................................... 1 J. Stift............................................................. 1 Q. D7 Aufkleber .............................................. 1
D. Ausgabeanschlag ...................................... 1 K. M4 8 Schraube ......................................11 R. Bedienungsaufkleber ................................. 1
E. Coperchio laterale anteriore ...................... 1 L. Vite M4 10 (nera) .................................... 2

Italiano
F. Coperchio laterale posteriore..................... 1 M. Vite M4 12............................................... 4
Parti di fornitura G. Vassoio di uscita stoccaggio ...................... 1 N. Piastra di bloccaggio.................................. 2
A. Unit di piegatura centrale......................... 1 H. Vassoio di uscita ........................................ 1 O. Fascetta di legatura ................................... 1
B. Rotaia anteriore ......................................... 1 I. Unit relay di trasporto carta...................... 1 P. Guida ......................................................... 1
C. Rotaia posteriore ....................................... 1 J. Perno ......................................................... 1 Q. Etichetta D7 ............................................... 1
D. Fermo di uscita .......................................... 1 K. Vite M4 8................................................11 R. Etichetta di operazione .............................. 1
E. ...........................1 L. M410 ......................2

F. ...........................1 M. M412 ...........................4
G. .............................1 N. ...............................2
A. ................... 1 H. .............................1 O. ...............................1
B. ............................. 1 I. .........................1 P. .................................1
C. ............................. 1 J. .................................1 Q. D7 ...............................1
D. ............................. 1 K. M48 ...........................11 R. .............................1
E. .................................... 1 L. M410............................... 2
F. .................................... 1 M. M412 ....................................... 4
G. .................................. 1 N. ..................................... 2
A. ........................................ 1 H. ........................................ 1 O. ........................................... 1
B. .............................................. 1 I. .................................. 1 P. ............................................... 1
C. .............................................. 1 J. ..................................................... 1 Q. D7 ............................................. 1
D. ........................................ 1 K. M48....................................... 11 R. ............................................ 1
E. .......................1 L. M410.......................2
F. .......................1 M. M412 ...........................4
G. ...................1 N. .......................2
A. ....................... 1 H. ...........................1 O. ...........................1
B. ............................. 1 I. .....................1 P. ...............................1
C. ............................. 1 J. .................................1 Q. D7 .............................1
D. ....................... 1 K. M48 ...........................11 R. ...........................1
1
1
Be sure to remove any tape and/or cushioning Procedure 1.Open the upper front cover (1) of the docu-
material from supplied parts. Before installing the center-folding unit, turn the ment finisher.
MFPs main power switch off and unplug the 2.Remove the screw (2) and open the lower
power cable from the power supply. front cover (3).
Install the document finisher, and then install the (NOTICE)
center-folding unit. Discard the screw (2) and do not fasten the
lower front cover (3).
Veillez retirer les morceaux de bande adh- Procdure 1.Ouvrir le couvercle avant suprieur (1) du
sive et/ou les matriaux de rembourrage des Avant dinstaller la plieuse mettre linterrupteur retoucheur de document.
pices fournies. dalimentation principal du MFP hors tension et 2.Dposer la vis (2) et ouvrir le couvercle
dbrancher le cble dalimentation de la prise avant infrieur (3).
de courant. (AVIS)
Installer le finisseur de document, puis installer Jeter la vis (2) et ne pas fixer le capot infri-
la plieuse. eur avant (3).
Asegrese de despegar todas las cintas y/o Procedimiento 1.Abra la cubierta frontal superior (1) del final-
material amortiguador de las partes suministra- Antes de instalar la unidad de plegado, desco- izador de documentos.
das. necte el interruptor de alimentacin principal de 2.Quite el tornillo (2) y abra la cubierta frontal
la MFP y desenchufe el cable de alimentacin inferior (3).
de la toma de corriente. (AVISO)
Instale primero el finalizador de documentos y Descarte el tornillo (2) y no ajuste la cubierta
luego instale la unidad de plegado. frontal inferior (3).
Entfernen Sie Klebeband und/oder Dmpfungs- Verfahren 1.ffnen Sie die obere vordere Abdeckung (1)
material vollstndig von den mitgelieferten Bevor Sie mit dem Einbau der Mittenfalteinheit des Dokument-Finishers.
Teilen. beginnen, stellen Sie sicher, dass der 2.Entfernen Sie die Schraube (2) und ffnen Sie
Hauptschalter des Kopierers ausgeschaltet und die untere vordere Abdeckung (3).
das Netzkabel aus der Steckdose gezogen ist. (HINWEIS)
Bringen Sie den Dokument-Finisher zuerst und Entsorgen Sie die Schraube (2) und befestigen
dann erst die Mittenfalteinheit an. Sie nicht die untere vordere Abdeckung (3).
Accertarsi di rimuovere tutti i nastri adesivi e/o il Procedura 1.Aprire il coperchio superiore anteriore (1)
materiale di imbottitura dalle parti fornite. Prima di installare lunit di piegatura centrale, della finitrice di documenti.
assicurarsi che linterruttore principale della 2.Rimuovere la vite (2) ed aprire il coperchio
fotocopiatrice sia spento e che il cavo di alimen- inferiore anteriore (3).
tazione non sia inserito nella presa. (NOTIFICA)
Installare prima la finitrice e poi procedere Eliminare le viti (2) e non fissare il coperchio
allinstallazione dellunit di piegatura centrale. inferiore anteriore (3).
1.1
MFP 2. 1 23
( )
23
, 1. (1) .
. MFP 2. (2) 1 (3)
OFF .
. ( )
, (2) (3)
. .
1.
MFP (1)
OFF
2. (2)1 (3)

(2) (3)

2
6
5
9
4
6
7 8
6
4 5 4 8
3.Remove the 2 screws (4) and remove the 4.Remove the 3 screws (6) and remove the 5.Remove 2 screws (8) and remove the lower
foot cover (5). lower rear cover (7). middle cover (9).
3.Dposer les 2 vis (4) puis le couvercle du 4.Dposer les 3 vis (6) puis le couvercle arri- 5.Dposer les 2 vis (8) et le couvercle interm-
pied (5). re infrieur (7). diaire infrieur (9).
3.Quite los 2 tornillos (4) y quite la cubierta de 4.Quite los 3 tornillos (6) y quite la cubierta 5.Quite los 2 tornillos (8) y quite la cubierta
la pata (5). posterior inferior (7). intermedia inferior (9).
3.Entfernen Sie die 2 Schrauben (4) und 4.Entfernen Sie die 3 Schrauben (6) und 5.Entfernen Sie die 2 Schrauben (8) und
nehmen Sie die Fuabdeckung (5) ab. nehmen Sie die untere hintere Abdeckung nehmen Sie die untere mittlere Abdeckung
(7) ab. (9) ab.
3.Rimuovere le 2 viti (4) e quindi rimuovere la 4.Rimuovere le 3 viti (6) e quindi rimuovere il 5.Rimuovere le 2 viti (8) e quindi rimuovere il
copertura del piede (5). coperchio inferiore posteriore (7). pannello centrale inferiore (9).
3. 2 45 4. 3 67 5. 2 (8) (9)
3. (4) 2 , (5) 4. (6) 3 , (7) 5. (8) 2 (9)

. . .
3. (4)2 (5) 4. (6)3 (7) 5. (8)2 (9)

3
12
M
10 M
C
13
K
N
B M
11 M
6.Install the lock plates (N) on the front and 7.Place the hook (11) of the front rail (B) on the 9.Install the rear rail (C) at the rear of the doc-
rear supports using an M4 8 screw (K) notch (10) at the front of the document fin- ument finisher using 2 M4 12 screws (M) in
each. isher, at the same time inserting the projec- the same way.
tion (13) on the front rail (B) in the hole (12)
in the document finisher.
8.Fix the front rail (B) using 2 M4 12 screws
(M).
6.Monter les plaques de verrouillage (N) sur 7.Placer le crochet (11) de la glissire avant 9.Monter la glissire arrire (C) au dos du
les supports avant et arrire en procdant (B) dans l'encoche (10) l'avant du retou- retoucheur de document en procdant de la
l'aide d'une vis M4 8 (K) dans les deux cheur de document tout en insrant la saillie mme faon et l'aide de 2 vis M4 12 (M).
cas. (13) de la glisire avant (B) dans le trou (12)
du retoucheur de document.
8.Fixer la glissire avant (B) l'aide de 2 vis
M4 12 (M).
6.Instale las placas de cierre (N) en los 7.Coloque el gancho (11) del carril frontal (B) 9.Instale el carril posterior (C) en la parte pos-
soportes frontal y posterior usando un tor- en la muesca (10) de la parte frontal del final- terior del finalizador de documentos usando
nillo M4 8 (K) en cada uno. izador de documentos al mismo tiempo que 2 tornillos M4 12 (M) de la misma forma.
inserta el resalto (13) del carril frontal (B) en
el orificio (12) del finalizador de documentos.
8.Fije el carril frontal (B) usando 2 tornillos M4
12 (M).
6.Montieren Sie die Sperrplatten (N) an den 7. Setzen Sie den Haken (11) der vorderen Schiene 9.Montieren Sie die hintere Schiene (C) auf
vorderen und hinteren Sttzen mit jeweils (B) in die Aussparung (10) vorne am Dokument- gleiche Weise mit 2 M4 12 Schrauben (M)
einer M4 8 Schraube (K). Finisher ein, und setzen Sie dabei auch den Vor- an der Rckseite des Dokument-Finishers.
sprung (13) an der vorderen Schiene (B) in die ff-
nung (12) des Dokument-Finishers ein.
8. Befestigen Sie die vordere Schiene (B) mit den 2
M4 12 Schrauben (M).
6.Installare le piastre di bloccaggio (N) sui 7.Posizionare il gancio (11) della rotaia anteriore 9.Installare la rotaia posteriore (C) alla parte
supporti anteriore e posteriore utilizzando (B) sull'incavo (10) alla parte anteriore della fini- posteriore della finitrice di documenti utiliz-
una vite M4 8 (K) ciascuna. trice di documenti, contemporaneamente zando 2 viti M4 12 (M) alla stessa maniera.
inserire la la sporgenza (13) sulla rotaia ante-
riore (B) nel foro (12) nella finitrice di documenti.
8.Fissare la rotaia anteriore (B) utilizzando 2
viti M4 12 (M).
6. 1 M48(K) (N) 7. (B) (11) 9. 2 M412(M)

(10) (B) (C)
(13) (12)
8. 2 M412(M)
(B)
6. (N) 7. (10) 9. M412(M) 2

M48(K) 1 . (B) (11) (C) .
(12) (B) (13)
.
8. M412(M) 2 (B)
.
6. (N) 7. 9. M412(M)2
M48(K) 1 (10) (B) (11) (C)

(12) (B) (13)

8. M412(M)2 (B)

4
17
14
A
18
15
16
10.Place the left rollers (14) at the front and rear of the center-folding unit (A) on the tracks (15) on the inner sides of the rails, and roll in the direction
shown. The middle rollers (16) will roll onto the rails.
11.Insert the center-folding unit (A) into the document finisher along the rails.
(NOTICE)
Insert without removing the fixing tape (18) for the wire guide (17). (The fixing tape (18) is removed at step 15)
10.Disposer les rouleaux gauche (14) l'avant et l'arrire de la plieuse (A) sur les voies (15) de ct interne des glissires et faire rouler dans la direc-
tion indique. Les rouleaux intermdiaires (16) vont se placer d'eux-mmes sur les glissires.
11.Insrer la plieuse (A) dans le retoucheur de document le long des glissires.
(AVIS)
Insrer sans enlever la bande adhsive de fixation (18) pour le guide cble (17). (La bande adhsive de fixation (18) est enleve l'tape 15).
10.Coloque los rodillos izquierdos (14) en las partes frontal y posterior de la unidad de plegado (A) en las pistas (15) de los lados internos de los carriles
y hgalos rodar en la direccin de la ilustracin. Los rodillos intermedios (16) rodarn sobre los carriles.
11.Inserte la unidad de plegado (A) en el finalizador de documentos a lo largo de los carriles.
(AVISO)
Inserte sin quitar la cinta de fijacin (18) de la gua para el cable (17). (La cinta de fijacin (18) se quita en el paso 15.)
10.Setzen Sie die linken Rollen (14) an der Vorderseite und Rckseite der Mittenfalteinheit (A) auf die Bahnen (15) an den Innenseiten der Schienen, und
rollen Sie sie in der dargestellten Richtung. Die mittleren Rollen (16) rollen nun auf die Schienen.
11.Schieben Sie die Mittenfalteinheit (A) entlang den Schienen in den Dokument-Finisher ein.
(HINWEIS)
Schieben Sie sie ein, ohne das Klebeband (18) fr die Kabelfhrung (17) zu entfernen. (Das Klebeband (18) wird bei Schritt 15 entfernt.)
10.Posizionare i rulli di sinistra (14) alla parte anteriore e posteriore dell'unit di piegatura centrale (A) sulle piste (15) sui lati interni delle rotaie, e farli
scorrere nella direzione mostrata. I rulli intermedi (16) scorreranno sulle rotaie.
11.Inserire l'unit di piegatura centrale (A) nella finitrice di documenti lungo le rotaie.
(NOTIFICA)
Inserire senza rimuovere il nastro di fissaggio (18) per la guida cavi (17). (Il nastro di fissaggio (18) viene rimosso al punto 15)
10. (A) (14) (15) (16)

11. (A)
( )
1718 15 18
10. (A) (14) (15) . (16)

.
11. (A) .
( )
(17) (18) . (18) 15 .
10. (A) (14) (15)

(16)

11. (A)

(17) (18)
(18) 15
5
20
20
22
23 K
K
21 21
19 I
A
12.Release the lock lever (19) and pull out the 13.Align the holes (21) in the relay paper conveying unit (I) with the 2 projections (20) on the docu-
center-folding unit (A) to the left of the document finisher. Install so that the lip (22) on the top frame of the relay paper conveying unit rests on
ment finisher. the document finishers frame (23).
14.Install the relay paper conveying unit (I) using 4 M4 8 screws (K).
12.Librer le levier de verrouillage (19) et sortir 13.Aligner les trous (21) de l'unit de transport de relais (I) avec les 2 saillies (20) du retoucheur de
la plieuse (A) par la gauche du retoucheur document. Procder de sorte que la lvre (22) du chssis suprieur de l'unit de transport de
de document. relais repose sur le chssis du retoucheur de document (23).
14.Installer l'unit de transport de relais (I) l'aide de 4 vis M4 8 (K).
12.Libere la palanca de bloqueo (19) y extraiga 13.Alinee los orificios (21) de la unidad de transporte de papel (I) con los dos resaltos (20) del final-
la unidad de plegado (A) hacia la izquierda izador de documentos. Instale de forma tal que el reborde (22) del marco superior de la unidad
del finalizador de documentos. de transporte de papel apoye en el marco del finalizador de documentos (23).
14.Instale la unidad de transporte de papel por relevador (I) usando 4 tornillos M4 8 (K).
12.Lsen Sie den Verriegelungshebel (19) und 13.Richten Sie die ffnungen (21) der eingesetzten Papierfrdereinheit (I) auf die 2 Vorsprnge (20)
ziehen Sie die Mittenfalteinheit (A) zur linken des Dokument-Finishers aus. Montieren Sie so, dass die Lippe (22) am oberen Rahmen der
Seite des Dokument-Finishers heraus. eingesetzten Papierfrdereinheit auf dem Rahmen des Dokument-Finishers (23) ruht.
14.Montieren Sie die eingesetzte Papierfrdereinheit (I) mit 4 M4 8 Schrauben (K).
12.Rilasciare la leva di blocco (19) e quindi 13.Allineare i fori (21) nell'unit relay di trasporto carta (I) con le 2 sporgenze (20) sulla finitrice di
estrarre l'unit di piegatura centrale (A) alla documenti. Installare in modo che il bordo (22) sulla struttura superiore dell'unit relay di tra-
sinistra della finitrice di documenti. sporto carta rimanga sulla struttura (23) della finitrice di documenti.
14.Installare l'unit relay di trasporto carta (I) utilizzando 4 viti M4 8 (K).
12.19 - 13. 2 (20) (I) (21)

A (22) (23)
14. 4 M48(K) (I)
12. (19) (A) 13. (20) 2 (I) (21) .

. (22) (23) .
14. M48(K) 4 (I) .
12.(19) 13. (20)2 (I) (21)

(A) (22)
(23)
14. M48(K)4
(I)
6
J
25
17
17
24
15.Remove the fixing tape (18) for the wire guide (17) and insert the pin (J) into the wire guide (17), with the 2 projections (24) on either side of the frame
(25).
(NOTICE)
Insert the pin (J) to keep wires in the wire guide (17).
16.Screw the pin (J) into the document finisher to anchor the wire guide (17).
15.Enlever la bande adhsive de fixation (18) du guide cble (17) et insrer la goupille (J) dans le guide cble (17) avec les 2 saillies (24) de chaque ct
du bti (25).
(AVIS)
Insrer la goupille (J) pour que les cbles demeurent dans le guide cble (17).
16.Visser la goupille (J) dans le retoucheur de document pour fixer le guide cble (17) en place.
15.Quite la cinta de fijacin (18) de la gua para el cable (17) e inserte el pasador (J) en la gua para el cable (17) con los 2 resaltos (24) a cada lado del
marco (25).
(AVISO)
Inserte el pasador (J) para mantener los cables en la gua para el cable (17).
16.Atornille el pasador (J) en el finalizador de documentos para anclar la gua para el cable (17).
15.Entfernen Sie das Klebeband (18) fr die Kabelfhrung (17) und stecken Sie die Rndelschraube (J) in die Kabelfhrung (17), wobei der Rahmen (25)
zwischen den 2 Vorsprngen (24) liegen muss.
(HINWEIS)
Stecken Sie die Rndelschraube (J) ein, um die Kabel in der Kabelfhrung (17) zu halten.
16.Schrauben Sie die Rndelschraube (J) in den Dokument-Finisher, um die Kabelfhrung (17) zu verankern.
15.Rimuovere il nastro di fissaggio (18) per la guida cavi (17) e quindi inserire il perno (J) nella guida cavi (17), con le 2 sporgenze (24) su ciascun lato
della struttura (25).
(NOTIFICA)
Inserire il perno (J) per mantenere i cavi nella guida cavi (17).
16.Avvitare il perno (J) nella finitrice di documenti per ancorare la guida cavi (17).
15.171825 2 24 1 J17
( )
(J) (17) (17)
16. (J) (17)
15. (17) (18) (24) 2 (25) (J) 1 (17)

.
( )
(J) (17) .
16. (J) (17) .
15. (17) (18)

(24)2 (25)
(J)1 (17)

(J) (17)
16. (J) (17)
7
28 31
O 30
27
29
26 32
K
31
P
K
32 K
17.Install the ground wire (26) to the frame 19.Plug the 2 connectors (27) into the connec- 21.Align holes (32) at 2 locations in the guide
using an M4 8 screw (K). tors (28) on the document finisher. (P) with projections (31) on the document
18.Install the binding band (O) to the wires and 20.Plug the connector (29) into the connector finisher.
fit the band into the frame. (30) on the relay paper conveying unit (I). 22.Install the guide (P) on the document finisher
using 4 M4 8 screws (K).
17.Fixer le cble de terre (26) au chssis en 19.Enficher les 2 connecteurs (27) dans les 21.Aligner les trous (32) en 2 endroits du guide
procdant l'aide d'une vis M4 8 (K). connecteurs (28) du retoucheur de docu- (P) avec les saillies (31) du retoucheur de
18.Monter le collier de fixation (O) sur les ment. document.
cbles et assujettir le collier au chssis. 20.Enficher le connecteur (29) dans le con- 22.Monter le guide (P) sur le retoucheur de doc-
necteur (30) de l'unit de transport de relais ument l'aide de 4 vis M4 8 (K).
(I).
17.Instale el cable de conexin a tierra (26) en 19.Enchufe los 2 conectores (27) en los conec- 21.Alinee los orificios (32) de los 2 lugares de la
el marco usando un tornillo M4 8 (K). tores (28) del finalizador de documentos. gua (P) con los resaltos (31) del finalizador
18.Instale la correa de sujecin (O) en los 20.Enchufe el conector (29) en el conector (30) de documentos.
cables y coloque la correa en el marco. de la unidad de transporte de papel por rele- 22.Instale la gua (P) en el finalizador de docu-
vador (I). mentos usando 4 tornillos M4 8 (K).
17.Montieren Sie das Massekabel (26) mit einer 19.Verbinden Sie die 2 Steckverbinder (27) mit 21.Richten Sie die ffnungen (32) an 2 Stellen
M4 8 Schraube (K) an den Rahmen. den Steckverbindern (28) des Dokument- in der Fhrung (P) auf die Vorsprnge (31)
18.Bringen Sie das Schellenband (O) an den Finishers. des Dokument-Finishers aus.
Kabeln an und setzen Sie das Band in den 20.Verbinden Sie den Steckverbinder (29) mit 22.Montieren Sie die Fhrung (P) mit 4 M4 8
Rahmen ein. dem Steckverbinder (30) der eingesetzten Schrauben (K) am Dokument-Finisher.
Papierfrdereinheit (I).
17.Installare il cavo di terra (26) alla struttura 19.Inserire i 2 connettori (27) nei connettori (28) 21.Allineare i fori (32) alle 2 posizioni nella
utilizzando una vite M4 8 (K). sulla finitrice di documenti. guida (P) con le sporgenze (31) sulla finitrice
18.Installare la fascetta di legatura (O) ai cavi e 20.Inserire il connettore (29) nel connettore (30) di documenti.
quindi fissare la fascetta nella struttura. sull'unit relay di trasporto carta (I). 22.Installare la guida (P) sulla finitrice di docu-
menti utilizzando 4 viti M4 8 (K).
17. M48(K) (26) 19. 2 (27) (28) 21. 2 (31) (P)

(32)
18. (O) (O) 20. (29) (H) 22. 4 M48(K) (P)
(30)
17. M48(K) (26) 19. (27) 2 21. (31) 2 (P)

. (28) . (32) .
18. (O) 20. (29) (I) 22. M48(K) 4
(O) . (30) . (P) .
17. M48(K) (26) 19.(27)2 21. (31)2

(28) (P) (32)
18. (O) 20.(29) (I) 22. M48(K)4
(O) (30) (P)
8
33
F
A 37
L
35
L 36
A
34
23.Open the eject cover (33). 25.Engage the projection (36) and hook (37) on the rear side cover (F)
24.Engage the projection (34) and hook (35) on the front side cover (E) with the center-folding unit (A). Complete installation of the rear side
with the center-folding unit (A). Complete installation of the front side cover (F) using an M4 10 screw (black) (L).
cover (E) using an M4 10 screw (black) (L).
23.Ouvrir le capot d'jection (33). 25.Engager la saillie (36) et le crochet (37) du capot latral arrire (F)
24.Engager la saillie (34) et le crochet (35) du capot latral avant (E) dans dans la plieuse (A). Finaliser l'installation du capot latral arrire (F)
la plieuse (A). Finaliser l'installation du capot latral avant (E) l'aide l'aide d'une vis M4 10 (noire) (L).
d'une vis M4 10 (noire) (L).
23.Abra la cubierta de expulsin (33). 25.Enganche el resalto (36) y el gancho (37) de la cubierta lateral poste-
24.Enganche el resalto (34) y el gancho (35) de la cubierta lateral frontal rior (F) con la unidad de plegado (A). Complete la instalacin de la
(E) con la unidad de plegado (A). Complete la instalacin de la cubierta cubierta lateral posterior (F) usando un tornillo M4 10 (negro) (L).
lateral frontal (E) usando un tornillo M4 10 (negro) (L).
23.ffnen Sie die Auswurfabdeckung (33). 25.Hngen Sie den Vorsprung (36) und den Haken (37) der hinteren
24.Hngen Sie den Vorsprung (34) und den Haken (35) der vorderen Seitenabdeckung (F) in die Mittenfalteinheit (A) ein. Befestigen Sie die
Seitenabdeckung (E) in die Mittenfalteinheit (A) ein. Befestigen Sie die hintere Seitenabdeckung (F) mit einer M4 10 Schraube (schwarz)
vordere Seitenabdeckung (E) mit einer M4 10 Schraube (schwarz) (L).
(L).
23.Aprire il coperchio di espulsione carta (33). 25.Innestare la sporgenza (36) e il gancio (37) sul coperchio laterale pos-
24.Innestare la sporgenza (34) e il gancio (35) sul coperchio laterale ante- teriore (F) con l'unit di piegatura centrale (A). Completare l'installazi-
riore (E) con l'unit di piegatura centrale (A). Completare l'installazione one del coperchio laterale posteriore (F) utilizzando una vite M4 10
del coperchio laterale anteriore (E) utilizzando una vite M4 10 (nera) (nera) (L).
(L).
23. (33) 25. (F) (36) (37)

24. (E) (34) (35) (A) 1 M410(L) (F)
(A) 1 M410(L) (E)
23. (33) . 25. (F) (36) (37) (A)

24. (E) (34) (35) (A) . M410(L) 1 (F)
. M410(L) 1 (E) .
.
23.(33) 25. (F) (36) (37)

24. (E) (34) (35)
(A)
(A) M410(L)1
(F)
M410(L)1 (E)
9
33
38
38
26.Insert the 2 pins (38) on the output tray (H) in the holes in the center-folding unit (A) to install the
tray.
27.Install the output stock tray (G) on the output tray (H).
28.Close the eject cover (33).
26.Insrer les 2 goupilles (38) du plateau de sortie (H) dans les trous de la plieuse (A) pour installer
le plateau.
27.Installer la bute de sortie du papier (G) sur le plateau de sortie (H).
28.Fermer le capot d'jection (33).
26.Inserte los 2 pasadores (38) de la bandeja de salida (H) en los orificios de la unidad de plegado
(A) para instalar la bandeja.
27.Instale la bandeja de recoleccin de papel de salida (G) en la bandeja de salida (H).
28.Cierre la cubierta de expulsin (33).
26.Stecken Sie die 2 Rndelschrauben (38) des Ausgabefachs (H) in die ffnungen der Mittenfal-
teinheit (A) ein, um das Fach zu installieren.
27.Bringen Sie das Ausgabestapelfach (G) am Ausgabefach (H) an.
28.Schlieen Sie die Auswurfabdeckung (33).
26.Inserire i 2 perni (38) sul vassoio di uscita (H) nei fori sull'unit di piegatura centrale (A) per instal-
lare il vassoio.
27.Installare il vassoio di uscita stoccaggio (G) sul vassoio di uscita (H).
28.Chiudere il coperchio di esplusione carta (33).
26. (H) 2 (38) (A) (H)

27. (G) (H)
28. (33)
26. (H) (38) 2 (A) (H)

.
27. (G) (H) .
28. (33) .
26. (H) (38)2 (A)

(H)

27. (G) (H)
28.(33)
10
40 41
A
40
39
39 D
Q
29.Insert the 2 projections (39) on the back of the output stopper (D) in the portions circled on the 30.Adhere the D7 label (Q) at the location
center-folding unit (A). shown in the figure.
Fit the 3 hooks (40) on the output stopper (D) in the holes (41) in the center-folding unit (A).
29.Insrer les 2 saillies (39) au dos de la bute de sortie (D) dans les parties encercles de la 30.Apposer l'tiquette D7 (Q) l'endroit repr
plieuse (A). sur la figure.
Assujettir les 3 crochets (40) de la bute de sortie (D) dans les trous (41) de la plieuse (A).
29.Inserte los 2 resaltos (39) de la parte posterior del tope de salida (D) en las porciones marcadas 30.Adhiera la etiqueta D7 (Q) en el lugar que se
con un crculo de la unidad de plegado (A). muestra en la ilustracin.
Coloque los 3 ganchos (40) del tope de salida (D) en los orificios (41) de la unidad de plegado
(A).
29.Setzen Sie die 2 Vorsprnge (39) auf der Rckseite des Ausgabeanschlags (D) in die mit Kreis 30.Kleben Sie den D7 Aufkleber (Q) an der
bezeichneten Positionen der Mittenfalteinheit (A) ein. abgebildeten Stelle an.
Setzen Sie die 3 Haken (40) des Ausgabeanschlags (D) in die ffnungen (41) der Mittenfaltein-
heit (A) ein.
29.Inserire le 2 sporgenze (39) sulla parte posteriore del fermo di uscita (D) nelle porzioni cerchiate 30.Far aderire l'etichetta D7 (Q) alla posizione
sull'unit di piegatura centrale (A). mostrata nella figura.
Fissare i 3 ganci (40) sul fermo di uscita (D) nei fori (41) nell'unit di piegatura centrale (A).
29. (D) 2 (39) (A) 30. D7 (Q)

(D) 3 (40) (A) (41)
29. (D) (39) 2 (A) . 30.D7 (Q) .

(D) (40) 3 (A) (41) .
29.(D) (39)2 (A) 30.D7 (Q)

(D) (40)3 (A) (41)
11
R
31. Adhere the Operation label (R) at the location shown in the figure.
32.Reinstall the foot cover (5) and lower rear cover (7).
33.Close the lower front cover (3) and the upper front cover (1).
31.Apposer l'tiquette de fonctionnement (R) l'endroit repr sur la figure.

32.Reposer le couvercle du pied (5) et le couvercle arrire infrieur (7).
33.Fermer le capot infrieur avant (3) et le couvercle avant suprieur (1).
31.Adhiera la etiqueta de funcionamiento (R) en el lugar que se muestra en la ilustracin.

32.Vuelva a instalar la cubierta de la pata (5) y la cubierta posterior inferior (7).
33.Cierre la cubierta frontal inferior (3) y la cubierta frontal superior (1).
31.Kleben Sie den Bedienungsaufkleber (R) an der abgebildeten Stelle an.

32.Bringen Sie die Fuabdeckung (5) und die untere hintere Abdeckung (7) wieder an.
33.Schlieen Sie die untere vordere Abdeckung (3) und die obere vordere Abdeckung (1).
31.Far aderire l'etichetta di operazione (R) alla posizione mostrata nella figura.
32.Reinstallare la copertura del piede (5) e il coperchio inferiore posteriore (7).
33.Chiudere il coperchio inferiore anteriore (3) e il coperchio superiore anteriore (1).
31. (R)
32. (5) (7)
33.31
31. (R) .
32. (5) (7) .
33. (3) (1) .
31. (R)
32.(5) (7)
33.(3) (1)
12
a a
Adjustment of centerfold-stapling position 1.Set maintenance mode U246, select Booklet and Staple Pos.
Check the distance (a) from the stapling position to the center of the paper. 2.Adjust the values.
If the distance (a) is over the reference value, follow the procedure below 3.Press the Start key to confirm the setting value.
to adjust the position.
<Reference value (a)> 2 mm
Rglage de la position d'agrafage des pages centrales dpliables 1.Passer en mode maintenance U246, slectionner Booklet et Staple
Vrifier la distance (a) entre la position d'agrafage et le milieu de la feuille Pos.
de papier. Si cette distance (a) est suprieure la valeur de rfrence, 2.Rgler les valeurs.
rgler la position en procdant de la manire suivante. 3.Appuyer sur la touche de Start pour confirmer la valeur de rglage.
<Valeur de rfrence (a)> 2 mm
Ajuste de la posicin de grapado de la unidad de plegado 1.Entre en el modo de mantenimiento U246, seleccione Booklet y Staple
Compruebe la distancia (a) desde la posicin de grapado con respecto al Pos.
centro del papel. Si dicha distancia (a) supera el valor de referencia, 2.Ajuste los valores.
realice el siguiente procedimiento para ajustar la posicin. 3.Pulse la tecla de Start para confirmar el valor de configuracin.
<Valor de referencia (a)> 2 mm
Einstellung der Mittenfalt-Heftposition 1.Schalten Sie in den Wartungsmodus U246, whlen Sie Booklet und
berprfen Sie den Abstand (a) zwischen der Heftposition und der Papier- Staple Pos.
mitte. Falls der Abstand (a) grer als der Bezugswert ist, ist die Position 2.Die Werte einstellen.
gem der nachstehenden Prozedur nachzustellen. 3.Den Einstellwert durch Drcken der Start-Taste besttigen.
<Bezugswert (a)> 2 mm
Regolazione della posizione di cucitura dellunit di piegatura cen- 1.Impostare la modalit manutenzione U246, selezionare Booklet e Sta-
trale ple Pos.
Controllare la distanza (a) dalla posizione di spillatura al centro del foglio. 2.Regolare i valori.
Se la distanza (a) superiore al valore di riferimento, seguire la procedura 3.Premere il tasto di Start per confermare il valore dell'impostazione.
riportata sotto per regolare la posizione.
<Valore di riferimento (a)> 2 mm
1. U246 BookletStaple Pos

(a) (a) 2.
3. Start
(a) 2mm
1. U246 Booklet, Staple Pos

(a) . (a) .
. 2. .
(a) 2mm 3. .
1. U246
Booklet
Staple Pos
(a) (a)
2.
(a) 2mm 3.
13
b
Adjustment of center folding position 1.Set maintenance mode U246, select Booklet and Booklet Pos.
Check the distance (b) from the edge of the paper to the center folding 2.Adjust the values.
position. If the distance (b) is over the reference value, follow the proce- 3.Press the Start key to confirm the setting value.
dure below to adjust the position.
<Reference value (b)>
A4, Letter: Length of paper 1/2 2 mm
A3, Ledger, B4: Length of paper 1/2 3 mm
Rglage de la position de pliage central 1.Passer en mode maintenance U246, slectionner Booklet et Booklet
Vrifier la distance (b) entre le bord de la feuille de papier et la position de Pos.
pliage central. Si cette distance (b) est suprieure la valeur de rfrence, 2.Rgler les valeurs.
rgler la position en procdant de la manire suivante. 3.Appuyer sur la touche de Start pour confirmer la valeur de rglage.
<Valeur de rfrence (b)>
A4, Letter : Longueur de la feuille 1/2 2 mm
A3, Ledger, B4: Longueur de la feuille 1/2 3 mm
Ajuste de la posicin de plegado 1.Entre en el modo de mantenimiento U246, seleccione Booklet y Book-
Compruebe la distancia (b) desde el borde del papel a la posicin de ple- let Pos.
gado. Si dicha distancia (b) supera el valor de referencia, realice el 2.Ajuste los valores.
siguiente procedimiento para ajustar la posicin. 3.Pulse la tecla de Start para confirmar el valor de configuracin.
<Valor de referencia (b)>
A4, Letter: Longitud del papel 1/2 2 mm
A3, Ledger, B4: Longitud del papel 1/2 3 mm
Einstellung der Mittenfaltposition 1.Schalten Sie in den Wartungsmodus U246, whlen Sie Booklet und
berprfen Sie den Abstand (b) zwischen der Papierkante und der Mit- Booklet Pos.
tenfaltposition. Falls der Abstand (b) grer als der Bezugswert ist, ist die 2.Die Werte einstellen.
Position gem der nachstehenden Prozedur nachzustellen. 3.Den Einstellwert durch Drcken der Start-Taste besttigen.
<Bezugswert (b)>
A4, Letter: Papierlnge 1/2 2 mm
A3, Ledger, B4: Papierlnge 1/2 3 mm
Regolazione della posizione centrale di piegatura 1.Impostare la modalit manutenzione U246, selezionare Booklet e
Controllare la distanza (b) dal bordo della carta alla posizione centrale di Booklet Pos.
piegatura. Se la distanza (b) superiore al valore di riferimento, seguire la 2.Regolare i valori.
procedura riportata sotto per regolare la posizione. 3.Premere il tasto di Start per confermare il valore dell'impostazione.
<Valore di riferimento (b)>
A4, Letter: Lunghezza carta 1/2 2 mm
A3, Ledger, B4: Lunghezza carta 1/2 3 mm
1. U246 BookletBooklet Pos

(b) (b) 2.
3. Start
(b)
A4,Letter: 1/2 2mm
A3,Ledger,B4: 1/2 3mm
1. U246 Booklet, Booklet Pos

(b) . (b) .
. 2. .
(b) 3. .
A4,Letter: 1/2 2mm
1. U246
BookletBooklet Pos
(b) (b)
2.
(b) 3.
A4,Letter: 1/2 2mm
14
c
Adjustment of tri-folding position 1.Set maintenance mode U246, select Booklet and Three Fold.
Check the distance (c) from the edge of the paper to the second folding 2.Adjust the values.
position. If the distance (c) is over the reference value, follow the proce- 3.Press the Start key to confirm the setting value.
dure below to adjust the position.
<Reference value (c)> 7.0 2 mm
Rglage de la position de triple pliage 1.Passer en mode maintenance U246, slectionner Booklet et Three
Vrifier la distance (c) entre le bord de la feuille de papier et la position du Fold.
deuxime pliage. Si cette distance (c) est suprieure la valeur de 2.Rgler les valeurs.
rfrence, rgler la position en procdant de la manire suivante. 3.Appuyer sur la touche de Start pour confirmer la valeur de rglage.
<Valeur de rfrence (c)> 7,0 2 mm
Ajuste de la posicin de plegado trptico 1.Entre en el modo de mantenimiento U246, seleccione Booklet y Three
Compruebe la distancia (c) desde el borde del papel a la segunda posicin Fold.
de plegado. Si dicha distancia (c) supera el valor de referencia, realice el 2.Ajuste los valores.
siguiente procedimiento para ajustar la posicin. 3.Pulse la tecla de Start para confirmar el valor de configuracin.
<Valor de referencia (c)> 7,0 2 mm
Einstellung der Dreilagenfaltposition 1.Schalten Sie in den Wartungsmodus U246, whlen Sie Booklet und
berprfen Sie den Abstand (c) zwischen der Papierkante und der Three Fold.
zweiten Faltposition. Falls der Abstand (c) grer als der Bezugswert ist, 2.Die Werte einstellen.
ist die Position gem der nachstehenden Prozedur nachzustellen. 3.Den Einstellwert durch Drcken der Start-Taste besttigen.
<Bezugswert (c)> 7,0 2 mm
Regolazione della posizione di piegatura tripla 1.Impostare la modalit manutenzione U246, selezionare Booklet e
Controllare la distanza (c) dal bordo della carta alla posizione della sec- Three Fold.
onda piegatura. Se la distanza (c) superiore al valore di riferimento, 2.Regolare i valori.
seguire la procedura riportata sotto per regolare la posizione. 3.Premere il tasto di Start per confermare il valore dell'impostazione.
<Valore di riferimento (c)> 7,0 2 mm
1. U246 BookletThree Fold

2 (c) (c) 2.
3. Start
(c) 7.02mm
1. U246 Booklet, Three Fold

(c) . (c) .
. 2. .
(c) 7.02mm 3. .
1. U246
BookletThree Fold
(c) (c)
2.
(c) 7.02mm 3.
15
NOTICE
This accessory is for use only with the following Applicant's Listed Machine.
Refer to the supplied guide to install the accessory in the field.
Machine: DF-790
AVIS
Cet accessoire est utilisable uniquement avec le copieur figurant dans la liste du demandeur suivant.
Se reporter au guide fourni pour installer l'accessoire dans le champ.
Modle: DF-790
AVISO
Este accesorio es slo para usar en las siguientes fotocopiadoras de la lista de solicitantes.
Consulte las instrucciones para la instalacin de accesorios en el lugar del cliente.
Modelo: DF-790
HINWEIS
Dieses Zubehr ist nur fr den Einsatz mit der folgenden Antragstellerlisten-Kopiermaschine vorgesehen.
Installieren Sie das Zubehr gem der mitgelieferten Anleitung im Feld.
Modell: DF-790
NOTIFICA
Questo accessorio deve essere usato solo con le seguenti fotocopiatrici nella lista dellapplicante.
Consultare la guida fornita in dotazione per il montaggio in campo dellaccessorio.
Modello: DF-790
:DF-790
.
.
DF-790
DF-790
16
MAILBOX
English
A different procedure is required depending on the product which is installed with this unit.Each procedure is described in the following pages.
When installing to a document finisher, see Page 1 to Page 6.
When installing to a Printer, see Page 7 to Page 12.
Franais
Une procdure diffrente est requise selon le produit qui est install avec cette unit.Chaque procdure est dcrite dans les pages suivantes.
Lors de l'installation sur un module finition de documents, voir Page 1 Page 6.
Lors de l'installation sur une imprimante, voir Page 7 Page 12.
Espaol
El procedimiento es diferente segn el producto que se instale con esta unidad.En las siguientes pginas, se describe cada procedimiento.
Para la instalacin con un finalizador de documentos, consulte las pginas de la 1 a la 6.
Para la instalacin con una impresora, consulte las pginas de la 7 a la 12.
Deutsch
Je nach verwendetem Modell ist eine andere Vorgehensweise zur Installation dieses Teils erforderlich.Die unterschiedlichen Vorgehensweisen werden
.
Italiano
Si richiede una procedura diversa in funzione del prodotto su cui installata l'unit.Le singole procedure sono descritte nelle pagine seguenti.
Quando si installa un finisher documenti, vedere le pagine da 1 a 6.
Quando si installa una stampante, vedere le pagine da 7 a 12.
1 6
7 12

. .
1 ~6 .
7 ~12 .

1 6
7 12
B
E (M4x12)
F
C
A D
E. M4 12 screw ........................................... 2 Be sure to remove any tape and/or cushioning

English
F. Tray name label (for users)........................ 1 materials from the parts supplied.
Supplied parts
A. Mailbox ...................................................... 1
B. Front mounting plate cover........................ 1
C. Rear mounting plate cover ........................ 1
D. Copy eject bins .......................................... 7
E. Vis M4 12................................................ 2 Veillez retirer les morceaux de bande adh-

Franais
F. tiquette de nom de plateau sive et/ou les matriaux de rembourrage des
Pices fournies (pour les utilisateurs) ................................. 1 pices fournies.
A. Bote lettres ............................................ 1
B. Couvercle de la plaque de montage avant ..... 1
C. Couvercle de la plaque de montage arrire ... 1
D. Case djection de copies.......................... 7
E. Tornillo M4 12 ......................................... 2 Asegrese de quitar todas las cintas y/o mate-

Espaol
F. Etiqueta de nombre de la bandeja rial amortiguador de las partes suministradas.
Partes suministradas (para usuarios)........................................... 1
A. Buzn de correo ........................................ 1
B. Cubierta de la placa de montaje frontal ..... 1
C. Cubierta de la placa de montaje trasera.... 1
D. Bandejas de expulsin de copias .............. 7
E. Schraube M4 12 ..................................... 2 Stellen Sie sicher, dass smtliche Klebebnder

Deutsch
F. Fachnamenaufkleber (fr Benutzer) .......... 1 und/oder Polstermaterial von den gelieferten
Enthaltene Teile Teilen entfernt wurden.
A. Mailbox ...................................................... 1
B. Vordere Abdeckung der Montageplatte ..... 1
C. Hintere Abdeckung der Montageplatte ...... 1
D. Kopienausgabefcher................................ 7
E. Vite M4 12............................................... 2 Rimuovere tutti i nastri adesivi e/o i materiali di

Italiano
F. Etichetta di nome del vassoio protezione dalle parti fornite.
Parti fornite (per utenti) ................................................. 1
A. Mailbox ...................................................... 1
B. Coperchio della piastra di montaggio anteriore .. 1
C. Coperchio della piastra di montaggio posteriore . 1
D. Scomparti di espulsione delle copie .......... 7
E. M412 .......................... 2
F. ( ) ............... 1
A. ................................ 1
B. ........................ 1
C. ........................ 1
D. .............................. 7
E. M4 12..................................... 2 ,
F. ( ) .................. 1 .
A. ............................................ 1
B. ..................................... 1
C. ..................................... 1
D. ............................................... 7
E. M412 ...........................2
F. .........1
A. ....................... 1
B. ....................... 1
C. ....................... 1
D. ............................. 7
1
3
1
Procedure 1.Remove the front top cover (2) and rear top cover (3) at the top of the finisher (1) using a flat-
Before starting installation, be sure to turn the blade screwdriver or the like.
main power switch of the machine off, and
Procdure 1.Retirer le couvercle suprieur avant (2) et le couvercle suprieur arrire (3) situs en haut du
Avant de commencer l'installation, s'assurer de retoucheur (1) laide dun tournevis tte plate ou dun outil quivalent.
mettre la machine hors tension et de
dbrancher la fiche d'alimentation de la prise
murale.
Procedimiento 1.Remueva la cubierta superior delantera (2) y la cubierta superior trasera (3) en la parte superior
Antes de iniciar la instalacin, asegrese de del finalizador (1) utilizando un destornillador de punta plana o similar.
apagar el interruptor de encendido de la
mquina y desenchufar el cable de alimentacin
Verfahren 1.Entfernen Sie die vordere obere Abdeckung (2) und die hintere obere Abdeckung (3) an der
Bevor Sie mit der Installation beginnen berzeu- Oberseite des Finishers (1) mit einem Klingenschraubendreher oder dergleichen.
gen Sie sich, dass der Netzschalter des Gerts
ausgeschaltet und das Stromkabel aus der
Procedura 1.Rimuovere il coperchio superiore anteriore (2) e il coperchio superiore posteriore (3) dalla parte
Prima di iniziare l'installazione, spegnere la superiore del finitore (1) utilizzando un cacciavite a punta piatta, o un attrezzo simile.
macchina e scollegare la spina dalla presa di
corrente.
1. (1) (2) (3)
1. (1) (2), (3)

.

.
1. (1) (2) (3)

OFF
2
A
2.Fit the hooks (4) located at the front and rear of the bottom of the mailbox (A) into the notches (5) located at the front and rear of the top of the finisher
(1) as shown in the illustration and attach the mailbox (A) to the finisher (1).
Note:
Lift the front and rear of the mailbox (A) lightly upward to make sure that no gap is made between the mailbox (A) and the machine.
2.Insrer les crochets (4) se trouvant l'avant et l'arrire au fond de la bote lettres (A) dans les encoches (5) situes l'avant et l'arrire en haut
du retoucheur (1) comme illustr ici, puis fixer la bote lettres (A) au retoucheur (1).
Remarque:
Lever lgrement l'avant et l'arrire de la bote lettres (A) de sorte qu'il n'y ait aucun interstice entre la bote lettres (A) et la machine.
2.Coloque los ganchos (4) ubicados en la parte inferior frontal y trasera del buzn de correo (A) en las muescas (5) ubicadas en la parte superior frontal
y trasera del finalizador (1), como se muestra en la ilustracin, y coloque el buzn de correo (A) en el finalizador (1).
Nota:
Levante ligeramente la parte frontal y trasera del buzn de correo (A) para asegurarse de que no queda espacio entre el buzn de correo (A) y la
mquina.
2.Setzen Sie die Haken (4) an der Vorder- und Rckseite der Mailbox (A) in die ffnungen (5) vorne und hinten an der Oberseite des Finishers (1) ein,
wie in der Abbildung dargestellt, und bringen Sie die Mailbox (A) am Finisher (1) an.
Hinweis:
Heben Sie die Vorder- und Rckseite der Mailbox (A) ein wenig an, damit sich kein Spalt zwischen der Mailbox (A) und dem Gert bildet.
2.Inserire i ganci (4) posizionati sul davanti e sul dietro della parte di fondo della mailbox (A), negli incavi (5) posizionati sul davanti e sul dietro della
parte superiore del finitore (1) come mostrato nellillustrazione, e fissare la mailbox (A) al finitore (1).
Nota:
Sollevare leggermente la parte anteriore e posteriore della mailbox (A) verso lalto per accertarsi che non vi sia dello spazio tra la mailbox (A) e la
macchina.
2. (A) (4) (1) (5) (A) (1)

(A) (A)
2. (A) (4) (1) (5) (A)

.

(A) (A) .
2. (A) (4) (1) (5)

(A) (1)

(A) (A)
3
A
A
E(M4x12)
A
6
8
3.Secure the mailbox (A) using the two screws 4.Remove the rear cover (6) of the mailbox 5.Plug the connector (7) of the mailbox (A) into
M4x12 (E). (A). the connector (8) of the machine body.
6.Reinstall the rear cover (6) of the mailbox
(A).
3.Fixer la bote lettres (A) l'aide de deux vis 4.Retirer le couvercle arrire (6) de la bote 5.Brancher le connecteur (7) de la bote
M4x12 (E). lettres (A). lettres (A) dans le connecteur (8) du corps
de la machine.
6.Remonter le couvercle arrire (6) de la bote
lettres (A).
3.Fije el buzn de correo (A) con dos tornillos 4.Quite la cubierta posterior (6) del buzn de 5.Enchufe el conector (7) del buzn de correo
M4x12 (E). correo (A). (A) al conector (8) del cuerpo de la mquina.
6.Vuelva a instalar la cubierta posterior (6) del
buzn de correo (A).
3.Sichern Sie die Mailbox (A) mit zwei 4.Entfernen Sie die hintere Abdeckung (6) der 5.Stecken Sie den Stecker (7) der Mailbox (A)
Schrauben M4x12 (E). Mailbox (A). in die Steckbuchse (8) des Gertegehuses.
6.Bringen Sie die hintere Abdeckung (6) der
Mailbox (A) wieder an.
3.Fissare la mailbox (A) utilizzando le due viti 4.Rimuovere il coperchio posteriore (6) della 5.Collegare il connettore (7) della mailbox (A)
M4x12 (E). mailbox (A). al connettore (8) del corpo macchina.
6.Reinstallare il coperchio posteriore (6) della
mailbox (A).
3. M4x12EA 4. (A) (6) 5.A7

8
6.A6
3.M4x12 (E) 4. (A) (6) . 5. (A) (7)

(A) . (8)
6. (A) (6)
.
3. M412(E)2
(A) 4. (A) (6) 5. (A) (7)
(8)
6. (A) (6)

4
B
9 C
7.Insert the 2 hooks (9) on the front mounting 8.Install the rear mounting plate cover (C) on
plate cover (B) for the mailbox into the fin- the finisher in the same way.
isher to install the cover (B).
7.Insrer les 2 crochets (9) du couvercle de la 8.Installer le couvercle de la plaque de mon-

plaque de montage avant (B) de la bote tage arrire (C) sur le retoucheur en proc-
lettres dans le retourcheur pour installer ce dant de la mme manire.
couvercle (B).
7.Para instalar la cubierta (B), inserte los 2 8.Instale de la misma manera la cubierta de la
ganchos (9) de la cubierta de la placa de placa de montaje trasera (C) en el finaliza-
montaje frontal (B) para el buzn de correo dor.
en el finalizador.
7.Setzen Sie die 2 Haken (9) an der vorderen 8.Bringen Sie auf gleiche Weise die hintere
Abdeckung der Montageplatte (B) fr die Abdeckung der Montageplatte (C) am Fin-
Mailbox in den Finisher ein, um die Abdeck- isher an.
ung (B) zu installieren.
7.Inserire nel finitore i 2 ganci (9) posizionati 8.Installare il coperchio della piastra di mon-
sul coperchio della piastra di montaggio taggio posteriore (C) sul finitore nella stessa
anteriore (B) per la mailbox, per installare il maniera.
coperchio (B).
7. (B) 2 8. (C)
(9)
(B)
7. (B) (9) 2 8. (C)

(B) .
.
7. (B) 8. (C)
(9)2
(B)
5
10 11
9.Fit the seven copy eject bins (D) to the ejection section of the mailbox (A) from the lowest bin to 10.Insert the power plug from the machine into
the highest. the outlet, turn the main power switch on,
Press both ends of each copy eject bin (D) to bend it a little, then fit the bin by inserting the front and verify the machine operates normally.
and rear pins (10) into the round holes (11) at the front and rear of the mailbox.
9.Fixer les sept cases djection de copies (D) sur la section djection de la bote lettres (A), en 10.Insrer la fiche dalimentation de la machine
procdant de la case situe tout en bas celle situe tout en haut. dans la prise et mettre la machine sous ten-
Appuyer sur les deux extrmits de chaque case d'jection des copies (D) pour cintrer lgre- sion, puis vrifier qu'elle fonctionne correcte-
ment cette pice, puis monter la case en insrant les broches avant et arrire (10) dans les trous ment.
ronds (11) l'avant et l'arrire de la bote lettres.
9.Presione ambos extremos de cada bandeja de expulsin de copias (D) para doblarlas un poco; 10.Enchufe el cable de alimentacin de la
despus, coloque la bandeja insertando los pasadores delantero y trasero (10) en los orificios mquina en la toma de corriente y encienda
redondos (11) en la parte frontal y posterior del buzn de correo. el interruptor principal para comprobar que
la mquina funciona correctamente.
9.Setzen Sie die sieben Kopienausgabefcher (D) in die Ausgabeffnungen der Mailbox (A) ein, 10.Stecken Sie den Netzstecker des Gerts in
beginnend vom untersten Fach zum hchsten. eine Steckdose und schalten Sie den
Drcken Sie beide Enden jedes Kopienausgabefachs (D) zusammen, um es etwas zu biegen. Hauptschalter des Gerts ein, um den
Setzen Sie das Fach ein, indem Sie die vorderen und hinteren Stifte (10) in die Rundlcher (11) Betrieb zu prfen.
vorne und hinten an der Mailbox einsetzen.
9.Installare i sette scomparti di espulsione delle copie (D) nella sezione di espulsione della mailbox 10.Inserire la spina nella presa di corrente,
(A), iniziando dallo scomparto pi in basso fino a quello pi in alto. accendere la macchina e controllare che
Premere le due estremit di ciascuno scomparto di espulsione delle copie (D) in modo da pie- funzioni correttamente.
garlo leggermente, quindi installare lo scomparto inserendo i perni anteriore e posteriore (10) nei
fori rotondi (11) presenti sul fronte e sul retro della mailbox.
9. (A) 7 (D) 10.

(D) (10) (11)

9. (D) 7 (A) . 10.

(D) (10) (11) ON
. .
9. (D)7 (A) 10.

(D) (10) (11)
ON

6
B
E (M4x12)
F
C
A D
E. M4 12 screw ........................................... 2 Be sure to remove any tape and/or cushioning

English
F. Tray name label (for users)........................ 1 materials from the parts supplied.
Supplied parts
A. Mailbox ...................................................... 1
B. Front mounting plate cover........................ 1 B and C are not used.
C. Rear mounting plate cover ........................ 1
D. Copy eject bins .......................................... 7
E. Vis M4 12................................................ 2 Veillez retirer les morceaux de bande adh-

Franais
F. tiquette de nom de plateau sive et/ou les matriaux de rembourrage des
Pices fournies (pour les utilisateurs) ................................. 1 pices fournies.
A. Bote lettres ............................................ 1
B. Couvercle de la plaque de montage avant ..... 1
C. Couvercle de la plaque de montage arrire ... 1 B et C ne sont pas utiliss.
D. Case djection de copies.......................... 7
E. Tornillo M4 12 ......................................... 2 Asegrese de quitar todas las cintas y/o mate-

Espaol
F. Etiqueta de nombre de la bandeja rial amortiguador de las partes suministradas.
Partes suministradas (para usuarios)........................................... 1
A. Buzn de correo ........................................ 1
B. Cubierta de la placa de montaje frontal ..... 1
C. Cubierta de la placa de montaje trasera.... 1 B y C no se utilizan.
D. Bandejas de expulsin de copias .............. 7
E. Schraube M4 12 ..................................... 2 Stellen Sie sicher, dass smtliche Klebebnder

Deutsch
F. Fachnamenaufkleber (fr Benutzer) .......... 1 und/oder Polstermaterial von den gelieferten
Enthaltene Teile Teilen entfernt wurden.
A. Mailbox ...................................................... 1
B. Vordere Abdeckung der Montageplatte..... 1 B und C werden nicht bentigt.
C. Hintere Abdeckung der Montageplatte ...... 1
D. Kopienausgabefcher................................ 7
E. Vite M4 12............................................... 2 Rimuovere tutti i nastri adesivi e/o i materiali di

Italiano
F. Etichetta di nome del vassoio protezione dalle parti fornite.
Parti fornite (per utenti) ................................................. 1
A. Mailbox ...................................................... 1
B. Coperchio della piastra di montaggio anteriore .. 1
C. Coperchio della piastra di montaggio posteriore . 1 B e C non sono utilizzati.
D. Scomparti di espulsione delle copie .......... 7
E. M412 .......................... 2
F. ( ) ............... 1
A. ................................ 1
B. ........................ 1 B C
C. ........................ 1
D. .............................. 7
E. M4 12..................................... 2 ,
F. ( ) .................. 1 .
A. ............................................ 1
B. ..................................... 1 B C .
C. ..................................... 1
D. ............................................... 7
E. M412 ...........................2
F. .........1

A. ....................... 1
B. ....................... 1 B,C
C. ....................... 1
D. ............................. 7
7
Note Procedure
The Attachment Kit(AK-736) must be installed Before starting installation, be sure to turn the main power switch of the machine off, and unplug the
before the mailbox is installed. power plug from the wall outlet.
Remarque Procdure
L'Attachment Kit (AK-736) doit tre install Avant de commencer l'installation, s'assurer de mettre la machine hors tension et de dbrancher la
avant d'installer la bote lettres. fiche d'alimentation de la prise murale.
Nota Procedimiento
El Attachment Kit (AK-736) se debe instalar Antes de iniciar la instalacin, asegrese de apagar el interruptor de encendido de la mquina y des-
antes de la instalacin del buzn de correo. enchufar el cable de alimentacin de la toma de pared.
Hinweis Vorgehensweise
Das Attachment Kit (AK-736) muss vor der Bevor Sie mit der Installation beginnen berzeugen Sie sich, dass der Netzschalter des Gerts aus-
Installation der Mailbox installiert werden. geschaltet und das Stromkabel aus der Steckdose gezogen ist.
Nota Procedura
Installare l'Attachment Kit (AK-736) prima di Prima di iniziare l'installazione, spegnere la macchina e scollegare la spina dalla presa di corrente.
installare il vassoio mailbox.

AK-736)

(AK-736)
. .

OFF

(AK-736)
8
A 1 A
E(M4x12)
1
2
E(M4x12)
1.Insert the hooks (1) located at the front and rear of the bottom of the mailbox (A) into the notches 2.Secure the mailbox (A) using the two screws
(2) of the machine and attach the mailbox (A) to the machine. M4x12 (E).
Note
Lift the front and rear of the mailbox (A) lightly upward to make sure that no gap is made between
the mailbox (A) and the machine.
1.Insrer les crochets (1) situs l'avant et l'arrire du fond de la bote lettres (A) dans les enc- 2.Fixer la bote lettres (A) l'aide de deux vis
oches (2) de la machine et fixer la bote aux lettres (A) la machine. M4x12 (E).
Remarque
Lever lgrement l'avant et l'arrire de la bote lettres (A) de sorte qu'il n'y ait aucun interstice
entre la bote lettres (A) et la machine.
1.Inserte los enganches (1) que se encuentran en la parte frontal y trasera de la parte inferior del 2.Fije el buzn de correo (A) con dos tornillos
buzn de correo (A) en las hendiduras (2) de la mquina y acople el buzn de correo (A) a la M4x12 (E).
mquina.
Nota
Levante ligeramente la parte frontal y trasera del buzn de correo (A) para asegurarse de que no
queda espacio entre el buzn de correo (A) y la mquina.
1.Fhren Sie die Haken (1), die sich hinten und vorne an der Unterseite der Mailbox (A) befinden, 2.Sichern Sie die Mailbox (A) mit zwei
in die Aufnahmen (2) des Gerts ein und befestigen Sie die Mailbox (A) am Gert. Schrauben M4x12 (E).
Hinweis
Heben Sie die Vorder- und Rckseite der Mailbox (A) ein wenig an, damit sich kein Spalt
zwischen der Mailbox (A) und dem Gert bildet.
1.Inserire i ganci (1) posti sul fronte e sul retro della sezione inferiore della mailbox (A) negli incavi 2.Fissare la mailbox(A) utilizzando le due viti
(2) presenti sulla macchina e fissare la mailbox (A) sulla macchina. M4x12 (E).
Nota
Sollevare leggermente la parte anteriore e posteriore della mailbox (A) verso lalto per accertarsi
che non vi sia dello spazio tra la mailbox (A) e la macchina.
1.A12A 2. M4x12EA

(A) (A)
1. (A) (1) (2) (A) 2.M4x12 (E)

. (A) .

(A) (A)
.
1. (A) (1) (2) 2. M412(E)2

(A)
(A)

(A) (A)

9
A
5 4
3.Remove the rear cover (3) of the mailbox 4.Remove the wire saddle (4).
(A). 5.Plug the connector (5) of the mailbox (A) into the connector (6) of the machine body.
6.Install the wire saddle (4) in the position as shown in the figure.
7.Reinstall the rear cover (3) of the mailbox (A).
3.Retirer le couvercle arrire (3) de la bote 4.Retirer le serre-cble (4).

lettres (A). 5.Brancher le connecteur (5) de la bote lettres (A) dans le connecteur (6) du corps de la
machine.
6.Installer le serre-cble (4) dans la position illustre sur la figure.
7.Remonter le couvercle arrire (3) de la bote lettres (A).
3.Quite la cubierta posterior (3) del buzn de 4.Retire la abrazadera del cable (4).
correo (A). 5.Enchufe el conector (5) del buzn de correo (A) al conector (6) del cuerpo de la mquina.
6.Instale la abrazadera del cable (4) en la posicin que se muestra en la imagen.
7.Vuelva a instalar la cubierta posterior (3) del buzn de correo (A).
3.Entfernen Sie die hintere Abdeckung (3) der 4.Entfernen Sie die Kabelbefestigung (4).
Mailbox (A). 5.Stecken Sie den Stecker (5) der Mailbox (A) in die Steckbuchse (6) des Gertegehuses.
6.Installieren Sie die Kabelbefestigung (4) an der im Bild gezeigten Position.
7.Bringen Sie die hintere Abdeckung (3) der Mailbox (A) wieder an.
3.Rimuovere il coperchio posteriore (3) della 4.Rimuovere l'unit sella (4).

mailbox (A). 5.Collegare il connettore (5) della mailbox (A) al connettore (6) del corpo macchina.
6.Installare l'unit sella (4) nella posizione indicata in figura.
7.Reinstallare il coperchio posteriore (3) della mailbox (A).
3.A (3) 4.4

5.A5 (6)
6. (4)
7.A3
3. (A) (3) . 4. (4) .

5. (A) (5) (6) .
6. (4) .
7. (A) (3) .
3. (A) (3) 4. (4)

5. (A) (5) (6)
6. (4)
7. (A) (3)
10
Z
Y
102
102
8.Install the left cover (Y) in place. 9.Using the two screws (102) removed in step 2 in the installation guide
for the AK-736, install the right cover (Z).
*While pressing the right cover(Z) downwards, fix the right cover(J).
8.Monter le couvercle gauche (Y) en position. 9. laide des deux vis (102) retires ltape 2 du guide dinstallation
pour lAK-736, installer le capot droit (Z).
*Fixer le capot droit (Z) en le maintenant enfonc vers le bas.
8.Instale la cubierta izquierda (Y) en la ubicacin prevista. 9.Con los dos tornillos (102) que quit en el paso 2 de la gua de insta-
lacin para AK-736, instale la cubierta derecha (Z).
*A la vez que ejerce presin sobre la cubierta derecha (Z), fije la cubi-
erta derecha (Z).
8.Installieren Sie die linke Abdeckung (Y). 9.Mit den zwei Schrauben (102), die Sie in Schritt 2 der Installationsan-
leitung fr das AK-736 entfernt haben, bringen Sie die rechte Abdeck-
ung (Z) wieder an.
*Drcken Sie die rechte Abdeckung (Z) leicht nach unten, whrend Sie
diese befestigen.
8.Installare il coperchio di sinistra (Y) in posizione. 9.Utilizzando le due viti (102) rimosse al punto 2 della procedura
descritta nella guida di installazione del kit AK-736, installare il coper-
chio destro (Z).
*Premere verso il basso il coperchio destro (Z) per fissarlo in
posizione.
8.Y 9. AK-736 2 2 102

Z)
* Z)
8. (Y) . 9.AK-736 2 (102)

(Z) .
* (Z) (Z)
.
8.(Y) 9.AK-736 2 (102)2 (Z)

* (Z)
11
8 7
101
10.Fit the seven copy eject bins (D) to the ejection section of the mailbox (A) from the lowest bin to 11.Close the paper conveying unit(101).
the highest. 12.Insert the power plug from the machine into
Press both ends of each copy eject bin (D) to bend it a little, then fit the bin by inserting the front the outlet, turn the main power switch on,
and rear pins (7) into the round holes (8) at the front and rear of the mailbox. and verify the machine operates normally.
10.Fixer les sept cases djection de copies (D) sur la section djection de la bote lettres (A), en 11.Fermer l'unit de transport du papier (101).
procdant de la case situe tout en bas celle situe tout en haut. 12.Insrer la fiche dalimentation de la machine
Appuyer sur les deux extrmits de chaque case d'jection des copies (D) pour cintrer lgre- dans la prise et mettre la machine sous ten-
ment cette pice, puis monter la case en insrant les broches avant et arrire (7) dans les trous sion, puis vrifier qu'elle fonctionne correcte-
ronds (8) l'avant et l'arrire de la bote lettres. ment.
10.Presione ambos extremos de cada bandeja de expulsin de copias (D) para doblarlas un poco; 11.Cierre la unidad de transporte de
despus, coloque la bandeja insertando los pasadores delantero y trasero (7) en los orificios papel(101).
redondos (8) en la parte frontal y posterior del buzn de correo. 12.Enchufe el cable de alimentacin de la
mquina en la toma de corriente y encienda
el interruptor principal para comprobar que
la mquina funciona correctamente.
10.Setzen Sie die sieben Kopienausgabefcher (D) in die Ausgabeffnungen der Mailbox (A) ein, 11.Schlieen Sie die Papierfhrung (101).
beginnend vom untersten Fach zum hchsten. 12.Stecken Sie den Netzstecker des Gerts in
Drcken Sie beide Enden jedes Kopienausgabefachs (D) zusammen, um es etwas zu biegen. eine Steckdose und schalten Sie den
Setzen Sie das Fach ein, indem Sie die vorderen und hinteren Stifte (7) in die Rundlcher (8) Hauptschalter des Gerts ein, um den
vorne und hinten an der Mailbox einsetzen. Betrieb zu prfen.
10.Installare i sette scomparti di espulsione delle copie (D) nella sezione di espulsione della mailbox 11.Chiudere l'unit trasporto carta (101).
(A), iniziando dallo scomparto pi in basso fino a quello pi in alto. 12.Inserire la spina nella presa di corrente,
Premere le due estremit di ciascuno scomparto di espulsione delle copie (D) in modo da pie- accendere la macchina e controllare che
garlo leggermente, quindi installare lo scomparto inserendo i perni anteriore e posteriore (7) nei funzioni correttamente.
fori rotondi (8) presenti sul fronte e sul retro della mailbox.
10. (A) 7 (D) 11.101

(D) (7) (8) 12.

10. (D) 7 (A) . 11. (101) .

(D) (7) (8) 12.
. ON
.
10. (D)7 (A) 11. (101)

(D) (7) (8) 12.

ON

12
PUNCH UNIT
B
C D E F
A
I J K L M
H
E. Spring......................................................... 1 L. Large clamp (for DF-790) .......................... 1

English M. Ferrite core ................................................ 1
F. Punch PWB ............................................... 1
Supplied parts G. Waste hole punch box ............................... 1
A. Punch guide............................................... 1 Be sure to remove any tape and/or cushioning
H. M3 8 tap Tight S screw ........................... 3
B. Hole punch unit.......................................... 1 I. Label sheet ................................................ 1 material from supplied parts.
C. Motor unit................................................... 1 J. Film ............................................................ 1
D. Stop ring .................................................... 1 K. Small clamp (for DF-770)........................... 1
E. Ressort ...................................................... 1 L. Grand collier (pour DF-790) ....................... 1

Franais
F. PWB de la perforatrice............................... 1 M. Noyau de ferrite ......................................... 1
Pices fournies G. Bac de rcupration de la perforatrice....... 1
A. Guide de perforatrice................................. 1 H. Vis S taraude M3 8 ............................... 3 Veillez retirer les morceaux de bande adh-
B. Perforatrice ................................................ 1 I. Feuillet dtiquettes.................................... 1 sive et/ou les matriaux de rembourrage des
C. Moteur ....................................................... 1 J. Film ............................................................ 1 pices fournies.
D. Bague d'arrt ............................................. 1 K. Petit collier (pour DF-770).......................... 1
E. Resorte ...................................................... 1 L. Sujetador grande (para DF-790)................ 1

Espaol
F. PWB de perforacin................................... 1 M. Ncleo de ferrita......................................... 1
Partes suministradas G. Caja para desechos de la perforacin ....... 1
A. Gua de perforacin................................... 1 H. Tornillo de ajuste M3 8........................... 3 Asegrese de despegar todas las cintas y/o
B. Perforadora................................................ 1 I. Hoja con etiqueta ...................................... 1 material amortiguador de las partes suministra-
C. Unidad motriz ............................................ 1 J. Pelcula ...................................................... 1 das.
D. Anillo de tope............................................. 1 K. Sujetador pequeo (para DF-770) ............. 1
E. Feder ......................................................... 1 L. Groe Klemme (fr DF-790) ...................... 1

Deutsch
F. Locher-PWB .............................................. 1 M. Ferritkern ................................................... 1
Gelieferte Teile G. Lochungsabfallbehlter.............................. 1
A. Locherfhrung ........................................... 1 H. M3 8 Passstift-Verbundschrauben.......... 3 Entfernen Sie Klebeband und/oder Dmpfungs-
B. Lochereinheit ............................................. 1 I. Aufkleberbogen.......................................... 1 material vollstndig von den mitgelieferten
C. Motoreinheit............................................... 1 J. Film ............................................................ 1 Teilen.
D. Anschlagring.............................................. 1 K. Kleine Klemme (fr DF-770) ..................... 1
E. Molla .......................................................... 1 L. Morsetto grande (per DF-790) ................... 1

Italiano
F. Scheda a circuiti stampati di perforazione .... 1 M. Nucleo di ferrite.......................................... 1
Parti di fornitura G. Scarto perforazione ................................... 1
A. Guida perforazione .................................... 1 H. Viti con testa a croce S M3 8 .................. 3 Accertarsi di rimuovere tutti i nastri adesivi e/o il
B. Unit di perforazione ................................. 1 I. Foglio di etichette....................................... 1 materiale di imbottitura dalle parti fornite.
C. Unit motore .............................................. 1 J. Pellicola ..................................................... 1
D. Anello di bloccaggio................................... 1 K. Morsetto piccolo (per DF-770) ................... 1
E. .................................1 K. DF-770 ) ................1

F. .......................1 L. DF-790 ................1
G. ...........................1 M. .................................1
A. ........................... 1 H. M3 X 8 S ..............3
B. ............................. 1 I. ...............................1
C. ............................. 1 J. .................................1
D. ............................... 1
E. ............................................... 1 K. DF-770 ....................... 1

F. ............................................ 1 L. DF-790 ....................... 1
G. ...................................... 1 M. ..................................... 1
A. ......................................... 1 H. M38 S......................... 3
B. ......................................... 1 I. ........................................... 1 ,
C. ......................................... 1 J. .................................................. 1 .
D. ............................................... 1
E. .................................1 L.
DF-790 .................1
F. ...........................1 M. .......................1
G. ...................1
A. ......................... 1 H. M38 S .............3
B. ....................... 1 I. .........................1
C. ..................... 1 J. .............................1
D. ....................... 1 K. DF-770 .................1
1
2 4
1
3
Procedure Removing the cover (DF-770) 2.Remove the 2 screws (3) and remove the
Before installing the hole punch unit, make sure If installing on the DF-790, proceed to step 1 on upper rear cover (4).
the MFP's main power switch is turned off and page 3.
that its power cord is unplugged from the power 1.Remove the screw (1) and remove the small
outlet. rear cover (2).
Install the document finisher first and then install
the hole punch unit.
Procdure Dpose du couvercle (DF-770) 2.Dposer les 2 vis (3) et dposer le couvercle
Avant dinstaller la perforatrice, sassurer que Pour l'installation sur le modle DF-790, passer suprieur arrire (4).
linterrupteur dalimentation principal du MFP est l'tape 1 de la page 3.
hors tension et que le cble dalimentation est 1.Dposer la vis (1) et dposer le petit couver-
dbranch de la prise secteur. cle arrire (2).
Installer dabord le finisseur de document, puis
installer la perforatrice.
Procedimiento Extraccin de la cubierta (DF-770) 2.Quite los 2 tornillos (3) y, despus, quite la
Antes de instalar la perforadora, asegrese de que Si realiza la instalacin en el DF-790, vaya al cubierta trasera superior (4).
el interruptor principal de la alimentacin paso 1 de la pgina 3.
del MFP est desconectado y de que el cable de ali-
1.Quite el tornillo (1) y, despus, quite la cubi-
mentacin est desenchufado de la toma de corri-
ente de la pared. erta trasera pequea (2).
Instale primero el finalizador de documentos y luego
instale la perforadora.
Verfahren Entfernen der Abdeckung (DF-770) 2.Die 2 Schrauben (3) entfernen und die obere
Bevor Sie mit dem Einbau der Lochereinheit Zur Installation des DF-790 weitergehen zu hintere Abdeckung (4) abnehmen.
beginnen, stellen Sie sicher, dass der Schritt 1 auf Seite 3.
Hauptschalter des Kopierers ausgeschaltet und 1.Die Schraube (1) entfernen und die kleine
das Netzkabel aus der Steckdose gezogen ist. hintere Abdeckung (2) abnehmen.
Bringen Sie den Dokument-Finisher zuerst und
dann erst die Lochereinheit an.
Procedura Rimozione del coperchio (DF-770) 2.Rimuovere le 2 viti (3) e quindi rimuovere il
Prima di installate l'unit di perforazione, assicu- Se si installa sull'unit DF-790, procedere al pannello superiore posteriore (4).
rarsi che l'interruttore principale dell'MFP sia passo 1 a pagina 3.
spento e che il cavo di alimentazione sia scolle- 1.Rimuovere la vite (1) e quindi rimuovere il
gato dalla presa di corrente. pannello posteriore piccolo (2).
Installare prima la finitrice e poi procedere
allinstallazione dellunit di perforazione.
DF-770 2. 2 (3) (4)

MFP DF-790 P3 1
1. 1 (1) (2)
DF-770 2. (3) 2 (4)

MFP DF-790 P3 1 .
OFF .
. 1. (1) 1 (2)
, .
.
DF-770 2. (3)2 (4)

MFP DF-790 P3 1
OFF 1. (1)1 (2)

2
6
10
7
5 7
7 9
Removing the cover (DF-790) 2.Remove the 3 screws (7) and remove the Installing the hole punch unit
1.Remove the screw (5) and remove the small upper rear cover (8). 3.Remove the screw (9) and pull the guide
rear cover (6). (10) outwards.
Dpose du couvercle (DF-790) 2.Dposer les 3 vis (7) et dposer le couvercle Installation de la perforatrice
1.Dposer la vis (5) et dposer le petit couver- suprieur arrire (8). 3.Dposer la vis (9) et tirer le guide (10) vers
cle arrire (6). l'extrieur.
Extraccin de la cubierta (DF-790) 2.Quite los 3 tornillos (7) y, despus, quite la Instalacin de la perforadora
1.Quite el tornillo (5) y, despus, quite la cubi- cubierta trasera superior (8). 3.Quite el tornillo (9) y tire de la gua (10)
erta trasera pequea (6). hacia fuera.
Entfernen der Abdeckung (DF-790) 2.Die 3 Schrauben (7) entfernen und die obere Anbringen der Lochereinheit
1.Die Schraube (5) entfernen und die kleine hintere Abdeckung (8) abnehmen. 3.Die Schraube (9) entfernen und die Fhrung
hintere Abdeckung (6) abnehmen. (10) nach auen ziehen.
Rimozione del coperchio (DF-790) 2.Rimuovere le 3 viti (7) e quindi rimuovere il Installare lunit di perforazione
1.Rimuovere la vite (5) e quindi rimuovere il pannello superiore posteriore (8). 3.Rimuovere la vite (9) ed estrarre la guida
pannello posteriore piccolo (6). (10) verso l'esterno.
DF-790 2. 3 (7) (8)

1. 1 (5) (6) 3. 1 (9) (10)

DF-790 2. (7) 3 (8)

1. (5) 1 (6) . 3. (9) 1 (10)
. .
DF-790 2. (7)3 (8)

1. (5)1 (6) 3. (9)1 (10)

3
38
J
4.After using alcohol to clean the shaded portion (38) of the motor shown for adhering the film (J), adhere the film.
4.Aprs avoir utilis de l'alcool pour nettoyer la partie du moteur hachure (38) sur laquelle le film (J) est appos, coller ce film.
4.Despus de utilizar alcohol para limpiar la parte sombreada (38) del motor mostrada en la ilustracin para pegar la pelcula (J), pegue la pelcula.
4.Den in der Abbildung grau dargestellten Teil (38) des Motors zum Anbringen des Films (J) mit Alkohol reinigen und dann den Film anbringen.
4.Dopo aver usato lalcool per pulire la parte ombreggiata (38) del motore, illustrata per ladesione della pellicola (J), far aderire la pellicola.
4.38J
4. 38 , J .
4.38J

4
12
B
11
5.Install the punch guide (A) so that the leading edge of the guide (11) is below the document fin- 6.Insert the hole punch unit (B) into the docu-
isher frame (12). ment finisher.
5.Monter le guide de la perforatrice (A) de sorte que le bord d'attaque du guide (11) se trouve sous 6.Insrer la perforatrice (B) dans le retoucheur
le bti du retoucheur de document (12). de document.
5.Instale la gua de perforacin (A) de forma tal que el borde delantero de la gua (11) quede 6.Inserte la perforadora (B) en el finalizador de
debajo de la carcasa del finalizador de documentos (12). documentos.
5.Die Locherfhrung (A) so einsetzen, dass die Vorderkante der Fhrung (11) unter dem Rahmen 6.Die Lochereinheit (B) in den Dokument-Fin-
(12) des Dokument-Finishers liegt. isher einsetzen.
5.Installare la guida perforazione (A) in modo che il bordo principale della guida (11) sia sotto il 6.Inserire l'unit di perforazione (B) nella fini-
telaio (12) della finitrice di documenti. trice di documenti.
5. (A) (11) (12) 6. (B)
5. (A) (11) (12) . 6. (B)

.
5. (A) (11) (12) 6. (B)

5
B
C
13 16
B
15
14
C
C
7.Raise the hole punch unit (B) slightly and fit the hook (13) on the motor unit (C) into the groove 8.Secure the motor unit (C) with the 2 screws
(14) in the document finisher. At the same time, insert the rod (15) on the motor unit (C) into the (H).
hole (16) in the hole punch unit (B).
7.Lever lgrement la perforatrice (B) et insrer le crochet (13) du moteur (C) dans la rainure (14) 8.Fixer le moteur (C) l'aide de 2 vis (H).
du retoucheur de document. Insrer en mme temps la tige (15) du moteur (C) dans le trou (16)
de la perforatrice (B).
7.Levante ligeramente la perforadora (B) y encaje el gancho (13) de la unidad motriz (C) en la 8.Asegure la unidad motriz (C) con los 2 tornil-
ranura (14) del finalizador de documentos. Al mismo tiempo, inserte la varilla (15) de la unidad los (H).
motriz (C) en el orificio (16) de la perforadora (B).
7.Die Lochereinheit (B) leicht anheben und den Haken (13) an der Motoreinheit (C) in die Nut (14) 8.Die Motoreinheit (C) mit den 2 Schrauben
des Dokument-Finishers einsetzen. Dabei auch die Stange (15) an der Motoreinheit (C) in die (H) sichern.
ffnung (16) der Lochereinheit (B) einstecken.
7.Sollevare leggermente l'unit di perforazione (B) ed inserire il gancio (13) sull'unit motore (C) 8.Fissare l'unit motore (C) con le 2 viti (H).
nella scanalatura (14) della finitrice di documenti. Contemporaneamente, inserire l'asta (15)
sull'unit motore (C) nel foro (16) dell'unit di perforazione (B).
7. (B) (C) (13) (14) 8. 2 (H) (C)

(C) (15) (B) (16)
7. (B) (C) (13) (14) . 8. (H) 2 (C)

(C) (15) (B) (16) . .
7. (B) (C) (13) 8. (H)2

(C)
(14) (C) (15)
(B) (16)
6
17
19
E 15 18
D
9.Fit the stop ring (D) over the motor unit rod 10.Run the hole punch unit wire (17) through
(15) and fit the spring (E) between the hole the motor unit edging (18).
punch unit and motor unit. 11.Plug the wire from the hole punch unit motor
into the connector on the motor unit (19).
9.Monter la bague d'arrt (D) sur la tige du 10.Faire passer le cble de la perforatrice (17)
moteur (15) et insrer le ressort (E) entre la dans le passage de cbles du moteur (18)
perforatrice et le moteur. 11.Raccorder le cble du moteur de la perfora-
trice au connecteur du moteur (19).
9.Coloque el anillo de tope (D) sobre la varilla 10.Tienda el cable de la perforadora (17) a
de la unidad motriz (15) y coloque el resorte travs de la pestaa de la unidad motriz
(E) entre la perforadora y la unidad motriz. (18).
11.Enchufe el cable del motor de la perforadora
al conector de la unidad motriz (19).
9.Den Anschlagring (D) auf die Stange (15) 10.Das Kabel (17) der Lochereinheit durch den
der Motoreinheit setzen und die Feder (E) Kantenschutz (18) der Motoreinheit fhren.
zwischen Lochereinheit und Motoreinheit 11.Das Kabel vom Motor der Lochereinheit an
einsetzen. den Steckverbinder der Motoreinheit (19)
anschlieen.
9.Inserire l'anello di bloccaggio (D) sull'asta 10.Far passare il cavo dell'unit di perforazione
(15) dell'unit motore ed inserire molla (E) (17) attraverso il bordo (18) dell'unit
tra l'unit di perforazione e l'unit motore. motore.
11.Collegare il cavo dal motore dell'unit di per-
forazione nel connettore sull'unit motore
(19).
9. (D) (15) 10. (17)

(E) (18)
11.
(19)
9. (15) (D) 10. (17)

(E) (18) .
. 11.
(19) .
9. (15) 10. (17)

(D) (18)
(E) 11.
(19)

7
25
23
21 25
24
F F
20
20
22 H
Installing the punch PWB and waste hole punch box (DF-770) 14.Plug the 6 hole punch unit wires into the con-
If installing on the DF-790, proceed to step 12 on page 12. nectors (25) on the punch PWB (F).
12.Fit the 2 hooks (20) in the punch PWB (F) into the cut (21) in the document finisher. At the same
time, insert the projection (23) on the document finisher into the hole (22) in the punch PWB (F).
13.Using the screw (H), tighten the hole punch unit ground wire (24) and the punch PWB (F)
together.
Installation de la PWB de la perforatrice et du bac de rcupration de la perforatrice (DF-770). 14.Raccorder les 6 cbles de la perforatrice aux
Pour une installation sur le modle DF-790, passer l'tape 12 en page 12. connecteurs (25) de la PWB de la perfora-
12.Insrer les 2 crochets (20) de la PWB de la perforatrice (F) dans la dcoupe (21) du retoucheur trice (F).
de document. Insrer en mme temps la saillie (23) du retoucheur de document dans le trou (22)
de la PWB de la perforatrice (F).
13.Fixer le cble de terre de la perforatrice (24) la PWB de la perforatrice (F) l'aide d'une vis (H).
Instalacin del PWB de perforacin y la caja para desechos de la perforacin (DF-770) 14.Enchufe los 6 cables de la perforadora a los
Si realiza la instalacin en el DF-790, vaya al paso 12 de la pgina 12. conectores (25) del PWB de perforacin (F).
12.Coloque los 2 ganchos (20) del PWB de perforacin (F) en el corte (21) del finalizador de docu-
mentos. Al mismo tiempo, inserte el resalto (23) del finalizador de documentos en el orificio (22)
del PWB de perforacin (F).
13.Usando el tornillo (H), apriete juntos el cable de conexin a tierra de la perforadora (24) y el PWB
de perforacin (F).
Installation der Locher-PWB und des Lochungsabfallbehlters (DF-770) 14.Die 6 Kabel der Lochereinheit an die Steck-
Zur Installation des DF-790 weitergehen zu Schritt 12 auf Seite 12. verbinder (25) der Locher-PWB (F)
12.Die 2 Haken (20) in der Locher-PWB (F) in die Aussparung (21) am Dokument-Finisher einset- anschlieen.
zen. Dabei auch den Vorsprung (23) am Dokument-Finisher in die ffnung (22) auf der Locher-
PWB (F) einsetzen.
13.Mit der Schraube (H) das Massekabel (24) der Lochereinheit an der Locher-PWB (F) festziehen.
Installazione della scheda a circuiti stampati di perforazione e dello scarto perforazione (DF-770) 14.Collegare i 6 cavi dell'unit di perforazione
Se si installa sull'unit DF-790, procedere al passo 12 a pagina 12. nei connettori (25) sulla scheda a circuiti
12.Inserire i 2 ganci (20) della scheda a circuiti stampati di perforazione (F) nell'intaglio (21) della stampati di perforazione (F).
finitrice di documenti. Contemporaneamente, inserire la sporgenza (23) sulla finitrice di docu-
menti nel foro (22) della scheda a circuiti stampati di perforazione (F).
13.Utilizzando la vite (H), stringere insieme il cavo di terra (24) dell'unit di perforazione e la scheda
a circuiti stampati di perforazione (F).
DF-770 14. 6 (F)

DF-790 P12 12 (25)
12. (F) 2 (20) (21) (F)
(22) (23)
13. 1 (H) (24) (F)
DF-770 14. 6 (F)

DF-790 P12 12 . (25) .
12. (F) (20) 2 (21) . (F)
(22) (23) .
13. (H) 1 (24) (F) .
DF-770 14. 6
DF-790 P12 12 (F) (25)
12. (F) (20)2 (21)
(F) (22) (23)
13. (H)1
(24) (F)
8
27
M
26
15.Plug the 2 punch PWB wires into the con- 16.Install the small clamp (K) on the finisher, then pass and fasten the wires from the motor unit and
nectors (27) on the DF main PWB (26). hole punch unit.
17.Attach the ferrite core (M) to the wire.
15.Raccorder les 2 cbles de la PWB de la per- 16.Monter le petit collier (K) sur le retoucheur puis faire passer les cbles du moteur et de la perfora-
foratrice aux connecteurs (27) de la PWB trice dans ce collier pour les fixer en place
principale du DF (26). 17.Fixer le noyau en ferrite (M) au cble.
15.Enchufe los 2 cables del PWB de per- 16.Instale el sujetador pequeo (K) en el finalizador, despus tienda y ajuste los cables de la unidad
foracin a los conectores (27) del PWB prin- motriz y la perforadora.
cipal del DF (26). 17.Fije el ncleo de ferrita (M) al cable.
15.Die 2 Kabel der Locher-PWB an die Steck- 16.Die kleine Klemme (K) am Finisher anbringen, dann die Kabel von der Motoreinheit und der
verbinder (27) der DF-Haupt-PWB (26) Lochereinheit hindurchfhren und befestigen.
anschlieen. 17.Den Ferritkern (M) am Kabel befestigen.
15.Collegare i 2 cavi della scheda a circuiti 16.Installare il morsetto piccolo (K) sul finitore, e quindi passare e fissare i cavi dallunit motore e
stampati di perforazione nei connettori (27) dallunit di perforazione.
sulla scheda principale PWB (26) della DF. 17.Applicare il nucleo in ferrite (M) al cavo.
15. 2 DF 16.K
(26) (27) 17.M
15. 2 DF 16. K ,
(26) (27) . .
17. M .
15. 2 DF 16.K
(26) (27)

17.M
9
28
18.Replace the upper rear cover (4) and small 19.Open the upper front cover (28) and insert the waste hole punch box (G).
rear cover (2).
18.Reposer le couvercle suprieur arrire (4) et 19.Ouvrir le couvercle suprieur avant (28) et insrer le bac de rcupration de la perforatrice (G).
le petit couvercle arrire (2).
18.Vuelva a colocar la cubierta trasera superior 19.Abra la cubierta delantera superior (28) e inserte la caja para desechos de la perforacin (G).
(4) y la cubierta trasera pequea (2).
18.Die obere hintere Abdeckung (4) und die kle- 19.Die obere vordere Abdeckung (28) ffnen und den Lochungsabfallbehlter (G) einsetzen.
ine hintere Abdeckung (2) wieder einsetzen.
18.Ricollocare il pannello superiore posteriore 19.Aprire il pannello superiore anteriore (28) ed inserire lo scarto perforazione (G).
(4) e il pannello posteriore piccolo (2).
18. (4) 19. (28) (G)

(2)
18. (4) (2) 19. (28) (G) .

.
18.(4) (2) 19.(28)

(G)

10
J( B )
B C J( C )
20.After cleaning each area with alcohol, adhere the following labels from the label sheet (J) at the 21.Close the upper front cover (28).
locations shown in the illustration: B, C..
20.Aprs avoir nettoy chaque zone lalcool, apposer les tiquettes suivantes du feuillet 21.Fermer le couvercle suprieur avant (28).
dtiquettes (J) aux emplacements indiqus dans lillustration : B, C.
20.Despus de limpiar todas las zonas con alcohol, despegue de la hoja de etiquetas (J) las 21.Cierre la cubierta delantera superior (28).
etiquetas siguientes, y pguelas en los sitios que se indican en la ilustracin: B, C.
20.Nachdem Sie alle Flchen mit Alkohol gereinigt haben, kleben Sie bitte die folgenden Aufkleber 21.Die obere vordere Abdeckung (28)
vom Aufkleberbogen (J) an die in der Abbildung angegebenen Stellen: B, C. schlieen.
20.Dopo aver pulito ciascuna zona con alcol, applicare le seguenti etichette del foglio di etichette (J) 21.Chiudere il pannello superiore anteriore (28).
sui punti mostrati nellillustrazione: B, C.
20.JBC 21. (28)
20. ( ) . 21. (28) .
20. (J) B
C 21.(28)
11
32
33 34
31 34
30
29
F
F
Installing the punch PWB and waste hole punch box (DF-790) 14.Plug the 6 hole punch unit wires into the con-
12.Fit the 2 hooks (29) in the punch PWB (F) into the cut (30) in the document finisher. At the same nectors (34) on the punch PWB (F).
time, insert the projection (32) on the document finisher into the hole (31) in the punch PWB (F).
13.Using the screw (H), tighten the hole punch unit ground wire (33) and the punch PWB (F)
together.
Installation de la PWB de la perforatrice et du bac de rcupration de la perforatrice (DF-790). 14.Raccorder les 6 cbles de la perforatrice aux
12.Insrer les 2 crochets (29) de la PWB de la perforatrice (F) dans la dcoupe (30) du retoucheur connecteurs (34) de la PWB de la perfora-
de document. Insrer en mme temps la saillie (32) du retoucheur de document dans le trou (31) trice (F).
de la PWB de la perforatrice (F).
13.Fixer le cble de terre de la perforatrice (33) la PWB de la perforatrice (F) l'aide d'une vis (H).
Instalacin del PWB de perforacin y la caja para desechos de la perforacin (DF-790) 14.Enchufe los 6 cables de la perforadora a los
12.Coloque los 2 ganchos (29) del PWB de perforacin (F) en el corte (30) del finalizador de docu- conectores (34) del PWB de perforacin (F).
mentos. Al mismo tiempo, inserte el resalto (32) del finalizador de documentos en el orificio (31)
del PWB de perforacin (F).
13.Usando el tornillo (H), apriete juntos el cable de conexin a tierra de la perforadora (33) y el PWB
de perforacin (F).
Installation der Locher-PWB und des Lochungsabfallbehlters (DF-790) 14.Die 6 Kabel der Lochereinheit an die Steck-
12.Die 2 Haken (29) in der Locher-PWB (F) in die Aussparung (30) am Dokument-Finisher einset- verbinder (34) der Locher-PWB (F)
zen. Dabei auch den Vorsprung (32) am Dokument-Finisher in die ffnung (31) auf der Locher- anschlieen.
PWB (F) einsetzen.
13.Mit der Schraube (H) das Massekabel (33) der Lochereinheit an der Locher-PWB (F) festziehen.
Installazione della scheda a circuiti stampati di perforazione e dello scarto perforazione (DF-790) 14.Collegare i 6 cavi dell'unit di perforazione
12.Inserire i 2 ganci (29) della scheda a circuiti stampati di perforazione (F) nell'intaglio (30) della nei connettori (34) sulla scheda a circuiti
finitrice di documenti. Contemporaneamente, inserire la sporgenza (32) sulla finitrice di docu- stampati di perforazione (F).
menti nel foro (31) della scheda a circuiti stampati di perforazione (F).
13.Utilizzando la vite (H), stringere insieme il cavo di terra (33) dell'unit di perforazione e la scheda
a circuiti stampati di perforazione (F).
DF-790 14. 6 (F)

12. (F) 2 (29) (30) (F) (34)
(31) (32)
13. 1 (H) (33) (F)
DF-790 14. 6 (F)

12. (F) (29) 2 (30) . (F) (34) .
(31) (32) .
13. (H) 1 (33) (F) .
DF-790 14. 6
12. (F) (29)2 (30) (F) (34)
(F) (31) (32)
13. (H)1
(33) (F)
12
L
36
35
15.Plug the 2 punch PWB wires into the con- 16.Install the small clamp (L) on the finisher, then pass and fasten the wires from the motor unit and
nectors (36) on the DF main PWB (35). hole punch unit.
17.Attach the ferrite core (M) to the wire.
15.Raccorder les 2 cbles de la PWB de la per- 16.Installer le grand collier (L) sur le retoucheur puis faire passer les cbles du moteur et de la perfo-
foratrice aux connecteurs (36) de la PWB ratrice dans ce collier pour les fixer en place.
principale du DF (35). 17.Fixer le noyau en ferrite (M) au cble.
15.Enchufe los 2 cables del PWB de per- 16.Instale el sujetador grande (L) en el finalizador, despus tienda y ajuste los cables de la unidad
foracin a los conectores (36) del PWB prin- motriz y la perforadora.
cipal del DF (35). 17.Fije el ncleo de ferrita (M) al cable.
15.Die 2 Kabel der Locher-PWB an die Steck- 16.Die groe Klemme (L) am Finisher anbringen, dann die Kabel von der Motoreinheit und der
verbinder (36) der DF-Haupt-PWB (35) Lochereinheit hindurchfhren und befestigen.
anschlieen. 17.Den Ferritkern (M) am Kabel befestigen.
15.Collegare i 2 cavi della scheda a circuiti 16.Installare il morsetto grante (L) sul finitore, e quindi passare e fissare i cavi dallunit motore e
stampati di perforazione nei connettori (36) dallunit di perforazione.
sulla scheda principale PWB (35) della DF. 17.Applicare il nucleo in ferrite (M) al cavo.
15. 2 DF 16.L
(35) (36) 17.M
15. 2 DF 16. L ,
(35) (36) . .
17. M .
15. 2 DF 16.L
(35) (36)

17.M
13
37
18.Replace the upper rear cover (8) and small 19.Open the upper front cover (37) and insert the waste hole punch box (G).
rear cover (6).
18.Reposer le couvercle suprieur arrire (8) et 19.Ouvrir le couvercle suprieur avant (37) et insrer le bac de rcupration de la perforatrice (G).
le petit couvercle arrire (6).
18.Vuelva a colocar la cubierta trasera superior 19.Abra la cubierta delantera superior (37) e inserte la caja para desechos de la perforacin (G).
(8) y la cubierta trasera pequea (6).
18.Die obere hintere Abdeckung (8) und die kle- 19.Die obere vordere Abdeckung (37) ffnen und den Lochungsabfallbehlter (G) einsetzen.
ine hintere Abdeckung (6) wieder einsetzen.
18.Ricollocare il pannello superiore posteriore 19.Aprire il pannello superiore anteriore (37) ed inserire lo scarto perforazione (G).
(8) e il pannello posteriore piccolo (6).
18. (8) 19. (37) (G)

(6)
18. (8) (6) 19. (37) (G) .

.
18.(8) (6) 19.(37)

(G)

14
A
C
J( A )
J( C )
20.After cleaning each area with alcohol, adhere the following labels from the label sheet (J) at the locations shown in the illustration: A, C.
20.Aprs avoir nettoy chaque zone lalcool, apposer les tiquettes suivantes du feuillet dtiquettes (J) aux emplacements indiqus dans lillustration :
A, C.
21.Fermer le couvercle suprieur avant (37).
20.Despus de limpiar todas las zonas con alcohol, despegue de la hoja de etiquetas (J) las etiquetas siguientes, y pguelas en los sitios que se indican
en la ilustracin: A, C.
21.Cierre la cubierta delantera superior (37).
20.Nachdem Sie alle Flchen mit Alkohol gereinigt haben, kleben Sie bitte die folgenden Aufkleber vom Aufkleberbogen (J) an die in der Abbildung
angegebenen Stellen: A, C.
21.Die obere vordere Abdeckung (37) schlieen.
20.Dopo aver pulito ciascuna zona con alcol, applicare le seguenti etichette del foglio di etichette (J) sui punti mostrati nellillustrazione: A, C.
21.Chiudere il pannello superiore anteriore (37).
20.JAC
21. (37)
20. ( ) A .
21. (37) .
20. (J) A
C
21.(37)
15
a b
[Adjusting the hole punch position] Adjusting the hole punch entry registration
1.Connect the MFP power plug to the wall out- 1.Enter the maintenance mode U246, select Finisher and Punch Regist.
let and turn the MFP main power switch on. 2.Adjust the values.
2.Make a test copy in punch mode. When the paper fed in skewed copy example (a): Increase the setting value.
3.If any off-centering is observed, follow the When the paper crimped copy example (b): Decrease the setting value.
procedure below to adjust the hole position. 3.Press the Start key to confirm the setting value.
[Rglage de la position des perforations] Rglage de l'enregistrement de l'entre des perforations

1. Insrer la fiche dalimentation du MFP dans la prise 1.Passer en mode maintenance U246, slectionner Finisher et Punch Regist.
murale et mettre linterrupteur principal du MFP 2.Rgler les valeurs.
sous tension.
2. Effectuer une copie d'essai en mode perforation. Si le papier est aliment de travers exemple de copie (a): Augmentez la valeur de rglage.
3. Si les perforations sont dcentres, suivre la Si le papier est froiss exemple de copie (b): Diminuez la valeur de rglage.
procdure ci-dessous pour ajuster la position de 3.Appuyer sur la touche de Start pour confirmer la valeur de rglage.
perforation.
[Ajuste de la posicin de perforacin] Ajuste del registro de entrada de perforacin

1. Conecte el enchufe del MFP en el receptculo de 1.Entre en el modo de mantenimiento U246, seleccione Finisher y Punch Regist.
pared y encienda el interruptor principal del MFP. 2.Ajuste los valores.
2. Haga una copia de prueba en el modo de per- Cuando el papel alimentado est torcido copia de muestra (a): Aumente el valor de configuracin.
foracin. Cuando el papel se dobl copia de muestra (b): Reduzca el valor de configuracin.
3. Si observa descentrado, siga el procedimiento de 3.Pulse la tecla de Start para confirmar el valor de configuracin.
abajo para ajustar la posicin del agujero.
[Einstellen der Lochungsposition] Einstellen der Lochungsregistrierung

1. Stecken Sie den Netzstecker des MFP in die 1.Schalten Sie in den Wartungsmodus U246, whlen Sie Finisher und Punch Regist.
Wandsteckdose und schalten Sie den MFP am 2.Die Werte einstellen.
Hauptschalter ein. Wenn Papier verkantet eingezogen wird Kopiebeispiel (a): Den Einstellwert erhhen.
2. Eine Testkopie im Lochungsmodus erstellen. Wenn Papier verknittert wird Kopiebeispiel (b): Den Einstellwert verringern.
3. Falls eine auermittige Lochung erfolgte, ist die 3.Den Einstellwert durch Drcken der Start-Taste besttigen.
Lochungsposition wie folgend nachzustellen.
[Regolazione di posizione dei fori di perforazione] Regolazione del registro del foro di perforazione
1. Collegare la spina del cavo di alimentazione 1.Entrare in modalit manutenzione U246, selezionare Finisher e Punch Regist.
dellMFP alla presa a muro della rete elettrica e 2.Regolare i valori.
accendere linterruttore principale di alimentazione.
Quando l'alimentazione della carta risulta obliqua esempio di copia (a): Aumentare il valore
2. Eseguire una copia di prova in modalit di perfora-
zione. dell'impostazione.
3. Nel caso in cui non lo siano, eseguire la procedura Quando la carta risulta increspata esempio di copia (b): Diminuire il valore dell'impostazione.
indicata qui di seguito per regolarne la posizione. 3.Premere il tasto di Start per confermare il valore dell'impostazione.

1. MFP 1. U246 FinisherPunch Regist
2.
2. (a)
3. Z (b)
3. Start

1.MFP 1. U246 Finisher, Punch Regist .
ON . 2. .
2. . (a) .
3. Z (b) .
. 3. .

1.MFP 1. U246 Finisher
Punch Regist
ON 2.
2. (a)
3. Z (b)
3.
16
c
Adjusting the hole punch position feed 3.Press the Start key to confirm the setting value.
1.Enter the maintenance mode U246, select Finisher and Punch Feed. <Reference value (c)>
2.Adjust the values. Metric specification: 13 mm; Inch specification: 9.5 mm
If the punch hole position is closer to the edge than the reference value
(c): Increase the setting value.
If the punch hole position is further from the edge than the reference
value (c): Decrease the setting value.
Rglage de la position du point de perforation 3.Appuyer sur la touche de Start pour confirmer la valeur de rglage.
1. Passer en mode maintenance U246, slectionner Finisher et Punch Feed. <Valeur de rfrence (c)>
2. Rgler les valeurs. Spcifications mtriques: 13 mm; Spcifications en pouces: 9,5 mm
Si la perforation est plus proche du bord de la feuille que dfini par la valeur de
rfrence (c): Augmentez la valeur de rglage.
Si la perforation est plus loin du bord de la feuille que dfini par la valeur de
rfrence (c): Diminuez la valeur de rglage.
Ajuste de la alimentacin de la posicin de perforacin 3.Pulse la tecla de Start para confirmar el valor de configuracin.
1. Entre en el modo de mantenimiento U246, seleccione Finisher y Punch Feed. <Valor de referencia (c)>
2. Ajuste los valores. Sistema mtrico: 13 mm; en pulgadas: 9,5 mm
Si la posicin de perforacin est ms cerca del borde que el valor de referencia
(c): Aumente el valor de configuracin.
Si la posicin de perforacin est ms alejada del borde que el valor de referen-
cia (c): Reduzca el valor de configuracin.
Einstellen des Transports der Lochungsposition 3.Den Einstellwert durch Drcken der Start-Taste besttigen.
1. Schalten Sie in den Wartungsmodus U246, whlen Sie Finisher und Punch Feed. <Bezugswert (c)>
2. Die Werte einstellen. Metrischer Abstand: 13 mm; Abstand in Zoll: 9,5 mm
Falls die Lochungsposition nher an der Kante liegt als der Bezugswert (c)
erlaubt: Den Einstellwert erhhen.
Falls die Lochungsposition ferner von der Kante liegt als der Bezugswert (c)
erlaubt: Den Einstellwert verringern.
Regolazione spostamento di posizione dei fori di perforazione 3.Premere il tasto di Start per confermare il valore dell'impostazione.
1. Entrare in modalit manutenzione U246, selezionare Finisher e Punch Feed. <Valore di riferimento (c)>
2. Regolare i valori. Specificazione in unit metrica: 13 mm; Specificazione in pollici: 9,5
Se la posizione dei fori di perforazione pi vicina al bordo rispetto al valore di mm
riferimento (c): Aumentare il valore dell'impostazione.
Se la posizione dei fori di perforazione pi lontana dal bordo rispetto al valore di
riferimento (c): Diminuire il valore dell'impostazione.
3. Start
1. U246 FinisherPunch Feed (c)
2. 13mm9.5mm
(c)
(c)
3. .
1. U246 Finisher, Punch Feed (c)
. 13mm, 9.5mm
2. .
(c) .
(c) .
3.
1. U246 Finisher
Punch Feed (c)
13mm9.5mm
2.
(c)
(c)
17
e f
d
f
Centering the hole punch position 3.Press the Start key to confirm the setting value.
1.Enter the maintenance mode U246, select Finisher and Punch Width. <Reference value>
2.Adjust the values. Metric specification: d = 80 mm 0.5, e = 40 mm 2
If the punch hole is too close to the front of the machine: Decrease the Inch specification: d = 2.75 inch 0.5, e = 1.375 inch 2,
setting value. f = 4.25 inch 0.5
If the punch hole is too close to the rear of the machine: Increase the
setting value.
Centrage de la position de perforation 3.Appuyer sur la touche de Start pour confirmer la valeur de rglage.
1. Passer en mode maintenance U246, slectionner Finisher et Punch Width. <Valeur de rfrence>
2. Rgler les valeurs. Spcifications mtriques: d = 80 mm 0,5, e = 40 mm 2
Si la perforation est trop proche de l'avant de la machine: Diminuez la valeur de Spcifications en pouces: d = 2,75 pouces 0,5, e = 1,375 pouces 2,
rglage. f = 4.25 pouces 0,5
Si la perforation est trop proche de l'arrire de la machine: Augmentez la valeur
de rglage.
Centrado de la posicin de perforacin 3.Pulse la tecla de Start para confirmar el valor de configuracin.
1. Entre en el modo de mantenimiento U246, seleccione Finisher y Punch Width. <Valor de referencia>
2. Ajuste los valores. Sistema mtrico: d = 80 mm 0,5, e = 40 mm 2
Si la perforacin se encuentra demasiado cerca del frente de la mquina: En pulgadas: d = 2,75 pulgada 0,5, e = 1,375 pulgada 2,
Reduzca el valor de configuracin. f = 4.25 0,5 pulgada
Si la perforacin se encuentra demasiado cerca de la parte trasera de la
mquina: Aumente el valor de configuracin.
Zentrieren der Stanzlochposition 3.Den Einstellwert durch Drcken der Start-Taste besttigen.
1. Schalten Sie in den Wartungsmodus U246, whlen Sie Finisher und Punch <Bezugswert>
Width. Metrischer Abstand: d = 80 mm 0,5; e = 40 mm 2
2. Die Werte einstellen. Abstand in Zoll: d = 2,75 Zoll 0,5, e = 1,375 Zoll 2,
Falls die Lochung zu nah an der Gertefront liegt: Den Einstellwert verringern. f = 4.25 Zoll 0,5
Falls die Lochung zu weit weg von der Gertefront liegt: Den Einstellwert
erhhen.
Centratura della posizione dei fori di perforazione 3.Premere il tasto di Start per confermare il valore dell'impostazione.
1. Entrare in modalit manutenzione U246, selezionare Finisher e Punch Width. <Valore di riferimento>
2. Regolare i valori. Specificazione in unit metrica: d = 80 mm 0,5, e = 40 mm 2
Se la posizione dei fori di perforazione troppo vicina alla parte anteriore della Specificazione in pollici: d = 2,75 pollici 0.5, e = 1,375 pollici 2,
macchina: Diminuire il valore dell'impostazione. f = 4.25 pollici 0.5
Se la posizione dei fori di perforazione troppo vicina alla parte posteriore della
macchina: Aumentare il valore dell'impostazione.
3. Start
1. U246 FinisherPunch Width
2. d=80mm0.5e=40mm2
d=2.75inch0.5e=1.375inch2f=4.25inch0.5

3. .
1. U246 Finisher, Punch Width
. d=80mm0.5, e=40mm2
2. . d=2.75inch0.5, e=1.375inch2, f=4.25inch0.5
.
.
3.
1. U246 Finisher
Punch Width
d=80mm0.5e=40mm2
2. d=2.75inch0.5e=1.375inch2f=4.25inch0.5

18
NOTICE
This accessory is for use only with the following Applicant's Listed Machine.
Refer to the supplied guide to install the accessory in the field.
Machine: DF-770, DF-790
AVIS
Cet accessoire est utilisable uniquement avec le copieur figurant dans la liste du demandeur suivant.
Se reporter au guide fourni pour installer l'accessoire dans le champ.
Modle: DF-770, DF-790
AVISO
Este accesorio es slo para usar en las siguientes fotocopiadoras de la lista de solicitantes.
Consulte las instrucciones para la instalacin de accesorios en el lugar del cliente.
Modelo: DF-770, DF-790
HINWEIS
Dieses Zubehr ist nur fr den Einsatz mit der folgenden Antragstellerlisten-Kopiermaschine vorgesehen.
Installieren Sie das Zubehr gem der mitgelieferten Anleitung im Feld.
Modell: DF-770, DF-790
NOTIFICA
Questo accessorio deve essere usato solo con le seguenti fotocopiatrici nella lista dellapplicante.
Consultare la guida fornita in dotazione per il montaggio in campo dellaccessorio.
Modello: DF-770, DF-790
:DF-770,DF-790
.
.
DF-770,DF-790
DF-770, DF-790
19
INNER JOB SEPARATOR
A B
1 2 3
4 5 6
7 8
9 10
11
12 13
3
3
1 2
14 15 16 A
17 18
19
B
20
21 22
23 24 25
26 27 28
29
30
100-SHEETS INNER JOB
SEPARATOR
A B
English A different procedure is required depending on the product which is installed with this unit.Each procedure is described in the following
pages.
A:When installing on a machine which has the 'HOME' key in the operation panel, see Page 1 to Page 10.
B:When installing on a machine which has the 'Accessibility Display' key in the operation panel, see Page 11 to Page 21.
Franais Une procdure diffrente est requise selon le produit qui est install avec cette unit.Chaque procdure est dcrite dans les pages suiv-
antes.
A:Lors de l'installation sur une machine disposant de la touche 'Accueil' sur le panneau de commande, voir Page 1 Page 10.
B:Lors de l'installation sur une machine disposant de la touche 'Affich. accessibilit' sur le panneau de commande,voir Page 11 Page 21.
A:Instalacin en una mquina que dispone de la tecla 'Inicio' en el panel de controles,consulte las pginas de la 1 a la 10.
B:Instalacin en una mquina que dispone de la tecla 'Pantalla acceso' en el panel de controles,consulte las pginas de la 11 a la 21.
Deutsch Je nach verwendetem Modell ist eine andere Vorgehensweise zur Installation dieses Teils erforderlich.Die unterschiedlichen Vorgehens-
weisen werden auf den folgenden Seiten erlutert.
A:Bei Installation an einem Gert mit der Taste 'Startseite' im Bedienfeld siehe Seiten 1 bis 10.
B:Bei Installation an einem Gert mit der Taste 'Zugriffsanzeige' im Bedienfeld siehe Seiten 11 bis 21.
Italiano Si richiede una procedura diversa in funzione del prodotto su cui installata l'unit.Le singole procedure sono descritte nelle pagine seg-
uenti.
A:Installazione su una macchina con tasto 'Home' sul pannello comandi,vedere le pagine da 1 a 10.
B:Installazione su una macchina con tasto 'Visual Accessibilit' sul pannello comandi,vedere le pagine da 11 a 21.
A: ; P1-P10
B: ; P11-P21
. .
A: ' ' 1 ~10 .
B: ' ' 11 ~21 .
A: 1 10
B: 11 21
A
G (M4 8)
H (M3 8S)
I (M3 8P)
C
E
D F
E. Eject unit .................................................... 1 Be sure to remove any tape and/or cushioning

English
F. Stopper paper ............................................ 1 materials from the parts supplied.
Supplied parts G. M4 8 screw ............................................. 1
A. Scanner bottom cover ............................... 1 H. S Tite screw M3 8 ................................... 1
B. Drive unit ................................................... 1 I. P Tite screw M3 8 ................................... 2
C. Inner tray ................................................... 1 *(G) is not used.
D. Eject unit cover .......................................... 1
E. Unit d'jection .......................................... 1 Veillez retirer les morceaux de bande adh-

Franais
F. Bute de papier ......................................... 1 sive et/ou les matriaux de rembourrage des
Pices fournies G. Vis M4 8.................................................. 1 pices fournies.
A. Capot infrieur du scanner ........................ 1 H. Vis S Tite M3 8 ....................................... 1
B. Unit d'entranement ................................. 1 I. Vis P Tite M3 8 ....................................... 2
C. Bac intrieur .............................................. 1 *(G) n'est pas utilis.
D. Capot de l'unit d'jection.......................... 1
E. Unidad de salida ........................................ 1 Asegrese de despegar todas las cintas y/o

Espaol
F. Tope de papel ............................................ 1 material amortiguador de las partes suministra-
Partes suministradas G. Tornillo M4 8 ........................................... 1 das.
A. Cubierta inferior del escner ..................... 1 H. Tornillo S Tite M3 8 ................................. 1
B. Unidad de accionamiento .......................... 1 I. Tornillo P Tite M3 8 ................................. 2
C. Bandeja interna ......................................... 1 *(G) no se utiliza.
D. Cubierta de la unidad de salida ................. 1
E. Ausgabeeinheit .......................................... 1 Stellen Sie sicher, dass smtliche Klebebnder

Deutsch
F. Papieranschlag .......................................... 1 und/oder Polstermaterial von den gelieferten
Gelieferte Teile G. Schraube M4 x 8........................................ 1 Teilen entfernt wurden.
A. Untere Abdeckung des Scanners .............. 1 H. S-Tite-Schraube M3 8............................. 1
B. Antriebseinheit........................................... 1 I. P-Tite-Schraube M3 8............................. 2
C. Innere Ablage ............................................ 1 *(G) wird nicht bentigt.
D. Abdeckung der Ausgabeeinheit................. 1
E. Unit di espulsione .................................... 1 Rimuovere tutti i nastri adesivi e/o i materiali di

Italiano
F. Fermo carta ............................................... 1 protezione dalle parti fornite.
Parti di fornitura G. Vite M4 8................................................. 1
A. Coperchio inferiore dello scanner .............. 1 H. Vite S Tite M3 8 ...................................... 1
B. Unit guida ................................................ 1 I. Vite P Tite M3 8 ...................................... 2
C. Vassoio interno .......................................... 1 *(G) non utilizzato.
D. Coperchio dell'unit di espulsione ............. 1
E. .............................1
F. .............................1
G. M48 ............................1
A. ....................... 1 H. S M38 ....................1
B. ............................. 1 I. P M38 ....................2
C. ............................. 1 G
D. ......................... 1
E. ........................................ 1 ,
F. ........................................ 1 .
G. M48......................................... 1
A. ..................................... 1 H. M38S ............................. 1
B. ........................................ 1 I. M38P ............................. 2
C. ......................................... 1
D. ................................. 1
E. .........................1
F. ...................1

G. M48 ............................1
A. ................... 1 H. M38S ....................1
B. ......................... 1 I. M38P ....................2
C. ........................... 1 (G)
D. ................... 1
1
2 6
Before installing the JS-732, make sure that the Procedure 3.Open the front cover (4) on the MFP.
MFPs main power switch is turned off and that 1.Remove the four screws (1).Remove the left 4.Pull out the paper conveyor cover (5).
its power cord is unplugged from the power out- upper cover(2) . 5.If the operation panel (6) is lowered, raise it
let. 2.Remove the breakaway cover (3) from the to the top position.
left upper cover (2).
Avant dinstaller l'JS-732, sassurer que linter- Procdure 3.Ouvrir le capot avant (4) sur le MFP.
rupteur dalimentation principal du MFP est 1.Retirez les quatre vis (1).Retirer le capot 4.Sortir le capot du transporteur du papier (5).
coup et que le cordon dalimentation est suprieur gauche (2). 5.Si le panneau de commande (6) est abaiss,
dbranch de la prise secteur. 2.Retirez le capot dtachable (3) du capot le relever dans sa position maximum.
suprieur gauche (2).
Antes de instalar el JS-732, asegrese de que Procedimiento 3.Abra la cubierta frontal (4) en la MFP.
el interruptor principal de la alimentacin de la 1.Quite los cuatro tornillos (1).Quite la cubierta 4.Extraiga la cubierta de la unidad de trans-
MFP est desconectado y que su cable de ali- superior izquierda (2). porte de papel (5).
mentacin est desenchufado de la toma de 2.Quite la cubierta de separacin (3) de la 5.Si el panel de trabajo (6) est bajo, levntelo
corriente. cubierta superior izquierda (2). hasta la posicin superior.
Vor dem Einbau des JS-732 muss der MFP- Verfahren 3.ffnen Sie die vordere Abdeckung (4) des
Hauptschalter ausgeschaltet und das Netzkabel 1.Entfernen Sie die vier Schrauben (1).Ent- MFP.
von der Steckdose abgezogen sein. fernen Sie die linke obere Abdeckung (2). 4.Entfernen Sie die Abdeckung des Papier-
2.Entfernen Sie die Abdeckung mit der Soll- transports (5).
bruchstelle (3) aus der linken oberen 5.Falls das Bedienfeld (6) abgesenkt ist, brin-
Abdeckung (2). gen Sie es in die oberste Position.
Prima di installare l'unit JS-732, assicurarsi Procedura 3.Aprire il pannello anteriore (4) sull'MFP.
che linterruttore principale dell'MFP sia spento 1.Rimuovere le quattro viti (1).Rimuovere il 4.Estrarre il coperchio di trasporto carta (5).
e che il suo cavo di alimentazione sia scollegato coperchio superiore sinistro (2). 5.Se il pannello operativo (6) abbassato, sol-
presa di corrente. 2.Rimuovere il coperchio ad aggancio rapido levarlo alla posizione in alto.
(3) dal coperchio superiore sinistro (2).
JS-732 MFP 3. MFP (4)

1. 4 12 4. (5)
2.23 5. (6)

JS-732 MFP 3.MFP (4) .

OFF 1. (1) 4 . 4. (5) .
. (2) . 5. (6)
2. (2) (3) .
.
JS-732 MFP 3.MFP (4)

OFF 1. (1)4 (2) 4.(5)
5. (6)
2.(2) (3)

2
11
13
7
8 15
12
14
9 10
6.Remove the screw (8) from the fan cover (7). 8.Remove the screw (12) and pull the upper 9.Remove the eject cover (15).
7.Remove the screw (9).Open the inner cover right cover (13) outwards slightly while *Release the operation panel lock. Lift up the
(10).Unplug the connector (11). removing the front right cover (14). operation panel.
*Take care not to get the wire saddle fallen Remove the right front cover (14) by pulling * Pull the lower front side to the left before
off. the part in the dotted circle outwards. removing the cover.
*The eject cover (15) which was removed is
not used.
6.Retirez la vis (8) du capot du ventilateur (7). 8.Retirez la vis (12) et tirer lgrement le 9.Retirez le capot djection (15).
7.Retirez la vis (9). Ouvrez le capot interne capot suprieur droit (13) vers l'extrieur tout *Librez le verrou du panneau de com-
(10). Dbranchez le connecteur (11). en dposant le capot avant droit (14).Retirez mande.Soulevez le panneau de commande.
*Prendre soin ne pas faire tomber le serre- le capot avant droit (14) en tirant la partie * Tirer le ct avant infrieur sur la gauche
cble. dans le cercle en pointills. avant de retirez le capot.
*Le capot de sortie (15) qui a t retir n'est
pas utilis.
6.Quite el tornillo (8) de la cubierta del ventila- 8.Quite el tornillo (12) y saque la cubierta 9.Quite la cubierta de expulsin (15).
dor (7). superior derecha (13) ligeramente mientras *Libere el bloqueo del panel de controles.
7.Quite el tornillo (9). Abra la cubierta interna quita la cubierta frontal derecha (14).Quite la Levante el panel de controles.
(10). Desenchufe el conector (11). cubierta frontal derecha (14) tirando hacia * Tire del lado frontal inferior hacia la izqui-
*Tenga cuidado de que no se caiga el pasa- afuera de la parte en el crculo punteado. erda antes de quitar la cubierta.
dor de cables. *No se utiliza la cubierta de expulsin (15)
que se quit.
6.Entfernen Sie die Schraube (8) der Lfterab- 8. Entfernen Sie die Schraube (12) und ziehen Sie 9. Entfernen Sie die Abdeckung der Ausgabee-
deckung (7). die obere rechte Abdeckung (13) vorsichtig nach inheit (15).
auen, whrend Sie gleichzeitig die vordere *Lsen Sie die Verriegelung des Bedienfelds.
7.Entfernen Sie die Schraube (9). ffnen Sie
rechte Abdeckung (14) entfernen. Heben Sie das Bedienfeld nach oben an.
die innere Abdeckung (10). Ziehen Sie den * Bevor Sie die Abdeckung entfernen, ziehen
Entfernen Sie die rechte vordere Abdeckung
Stecker (11) ab. (14), indem Sie das Teil, das in der Zeichnung Sie die untere Vorderseite nach links.
*Stellen Sie sicher, dass der Kabelsattel mit einem gepunkteten Kreis markiert ist, nach *Die gerade entfernte Abdeckung des Papier-
auslaufs (15) wird nicht mehr bentigt.
nicht herunterfllt. auen ziehen.
6.Rimuovere la vite (8) dal coperchio ventola 8. Rimuovere la vite (12) e tirare il coperchio supe- 9.Rimuovere il coperchio di espulsione carta
(7). riore destro (13) leggermente verso l'esterno men- (15).
tre si rimuove il coperchio anteriore destro (14). *Sbloccare il pannello comandi.Sollevare il
7.Rimuovere la vite (9). Aprire il coperchio
Rimuovere il coperchio anteriore destro (14) pannello comandi.
interno (10). Scollegare il connettore (11).
tirando verso l'esterno la parte nel cerchio tratteg- * Tirare il lato anteriore in basso a sinistra
*Attenzione a non fare cadere la sella di sup- prima di rimuovere il coperchio.
giato.
porto filo. *Il coperchio di uscita (15) rimosso non viene
utilizzato.
6. (7) 1 (8) 8. 1 (12) 9. (15)
7. 1 910 (13) (14)
11
(14)
15
6. (7) (8) 1 . 8. (12) 1 9. (15) .

7. (9) . (10) (13) .
. (11) . (14) . .

. (14) . .
(15)
.
6.(7) (8)1 8. (12)1 (13) 9.(15)
7. (9)1 (10) (14)
(11)
(14)
(15)

3
18
16
19
17
10.Remove the two screws (16).Remove the
screw (17).Remove the rear tray cover (18)
and scanner bottom cover (19).
*The scanner bottom cover(19) which was
removed is not used.
10.Retirez les deux vis (16).Retirez la vis (17).

Retirez le capot du support arrire (18)
et le capot infrieur du scanner (19).
*Le capot infrieur du scanner (19) qui a t
retir n'est pas utilis.
10.Quite los dos tornillos (16).Quite el tornillo

(17).Quite la cubierta izquierda de la
bandeja (18)y la cubierta inferior del escner
(19).
*No se utiliza la cubierta inferior del escner
(19) que se quit.
10.Entfernen Sie die beiden Schrauben (16).

Entfernen Sie die Schraube (17).Entfernen
Sie die Abdeckung des hinteren Fachs (18)
und die untere Abdeckung des Scanners
(19).
*Die gerade entfernte untere Scannerab-
deckung (19) wird nicht mehr bentigt.
10.Rimuovere le due viti (16).Rimuovere la vite

(17).
Rimuovere il coperchio posteriore del vas-
soio (18) e il coperchio inferiore dello scan-
ner (19).
*Il coperchio inferiore dello scanner (19)
rimosso non viene utilizzato.
10. 2 1617
(18)
(19)
19
10. (16) . (17)

. (18)
(19) .
(19)
.
10. (16)2 (17)1

(18)
(19)
(19)

4
B 16
22
21
22
B
20
11.Insert the hook (20) on the underside of the drive unit (B) into the respective positioning hole (21) 12. Plug the connector (22) from the drive unit (B)
in the back plate, using the location of the notch on the front as a guide. Then secure the drive into the MFP.
unit using the 2 M4 8 screws (black) (16) removed in step 10.
NOTICE
When installing the drive unit (B), take care not to rub it against the ribs on the top of the MFP
tray.
Hold the connector (22) out of the way so that it does not become trapped.
11. Insrer le crochet (20) sous l'unit d'entranement (B) dans le trou de positionnement appropri 12.Bancher le connecteur (22) de l'unit
(21) sur la plaque arrire, en prenant comme guide l'encoche l'avant. Puis fixer l'unit d'entranement (B) sur le MFP.
d'entranement avec les 2 vis M4 8 (noires) (16) retires au point 10.
REMARQUE
l'installation de l'unit d'entranement (B), veiller ne pas le frotter contre les nervures sur le
haut du bac MFP.
carter le connecteur (22) de sorte qu'il ne soit pas coinc.
11.Inserte el gancho (20) del lado inferior de la unidad de accionamiento (B) en el orificio de 12.Enchufe el conector (22) de la unidad de
posicin respectivo (21) de la placa posterior, con la ubicacin de la muesca en el frente como accionamiento (B) en la MFP.
gua. Despus, fije la unidad de accionamiento con los 2 tornillos M4 8 (negros) (16) quitados
en el paso 11.
AVISO
Durante la instalacin de la unidad de accionamiento (B), tenga cuidado de no rozar las nervadu-
ras de la parte superior de la bandeja de la MFP.Mantenga el conector (22) alejado para no atra-
parlo.
11. Setzen Sie die Haken (20) auf der Unterseite der Antriebseinheit (B) in die entsprechenden Aufnah- 12.Stecken Sie den Stecker (22) in die Antrieb-
men (21) der Rckwand. Benutzen Sie die Aussparungen auf der Vorderseite als Orientierung. seinheit (B) des MFP.
Befestigen Sie die Antriebseinheit mit den 2 M4 x 8 Schrauben (schwarz) (16), die Sie in Schritt 10
gelst haben.
ANMERKUNG
Beim Einsetzen der Antriebseinheit (B) achten Sie darauf, dass Sie diese nicht an den Nasen oben
in der Ablage des MFP scheuern.Fhren Sie den Stecker (22) so, dass dieser nicht eingeklemmt
werden kann.
11.Inserire il gancio (20) sul lato inferiore dell'unit guida (B) nel rispettivo foro di posizionamento 12.Inserire il connettore (22) dall'unit guida (B)
(21) sulla piastra posteriore, usando la posizione dell'intaglio sulla parte frontale come guida. nell'MFP.
Quindi fissare l'unit guida usando le 2 viti M4 8 (nere) (16) rimosse nel passo 10.
AVVISO
Quando si installa l'unit guida (B), fare attenzione a non sfregarla contro i rilievi sulla parte supe-
riore del vassoio MFP.
Mantenere il connettore (22) all'esterno in modo che esso non rimanga intrappolato.
11. (B) (20) (21) 12. (B) (22)

10 2 M4 8(16) MFP

(B) MFP
(22)
11. (B) (20) 12. (B) (22) MFP

(21) . 10 M4 8 ( )(16) .
2 .

(B) MFP
. (22) .
11. (B) (20) (21) 12. (B) (22)

10 M48(16)2 MFP

(B)
(22)
5
B 23 24 E
27 26
A
B
25
E
17
28
13.Insert the projection (23) on the back of the eject unit (E) into the hole (24) in the drive unit (B) 14. Insert the 2 hooks on the scanner bottom
and insert the projection on the front (25) into the hole (26) in the MFP frame to attach the eject cover (A) into the notches of the
unit (E). machine.Secure it with the screw (17)
removed in step 10.
Push the eject unit (E) to the right and fit the hook (27) in so that it clicks into place.
NOTICE
NOTICE
Take particular care to check that the hooks on
When installing the eject unit, take care not to dislodge the paper eject actuator (28). the rear are securely engaged before
After installing the unit, check the operation of the actuator. tightening the screws.
13.Insrer la projection (23) l'arrire de l'unit d'jection (E) dans le trou (24) de l'unit d'entrane- 14.Introduisez les 2 crochets du capot infrieur
ment (B) et insrer la projection l'avant (25) dans le trou (26) du chssis de MFP pour attacher du scanner (A) dans les encoches de la
lunit d'jection (E).Pousser l'unit d'jection (E) vers la droite et emboter le crochet (27) machine.Fixez-les avec la vis (17) retire
l'tape 10.
jusqu'au dclic.
REMARQUE
REMARQUE S'assurer tout particulirement que les cro-
l'installation de l'unit d'jection, veiller ne pas dplacer l'actionneur d'jection du papier (28). chets l'arrire sont bien engags avant de
Aprs avoir install l'unit, vrifier le bon fonctionnement de l'actuateur. serrer les vis.
13.Inserte el saliente (23) de la parte posterior de la unidad de salida (E) en el orificio (24) de la 14.Inserte los 2 enganches en la cubierta
unidad de accionamiento (B) e inserte el saliente del frente (25) en el orificio (26) de la carcasa inferior del escner (A) en las ranuras de la
mquina.Fjelo con el tornillo (17) que quit
de la MFP para fijar la unidad de salida (E).Presione la unidad de salida (E) hacia la derecha y
en el paso 10.
encaje el gancho (27) hasta que escuche un clic. AVISO
AVISO Antes de apretar los tornillos, tenga especial
Durante la instalacin de la unidad de salida, tenga cuidado de no desplazar el actuador de cuidado de comprobar si los ganchos en la
expulsin de papel (28).Despus de instalar la unidad, compruebe el funcionamiento del actuador. parte posterior estn enganchados de forma
segura.
13.Setzen Sie die Nase (23) an der Rckseite der Ausgabeeinheit (E) in das Loch (24) der Antrieb- 14.Setzen Sie die beiden Nasen der unteren
seinheit (B). Dann setzen Sie die Nase (25) vorne in das Loch (26) des MFP-Rahmens, um die Scannerabdeckung (A) in die Aussparungen
Ausgabeeinheit (E) anzubringen.Schieben Sie die Ausgabeeinheit (E) nach rechts und drcken im Gert.Befestigen Sie diese mit der
Sie auf die Haken (27), damit diese einrasten. Schraube (17) aus Schritt 10.
ANMERKUNG ANMERKUNG
Achten Sie beim Einsetzen der Ausgabeeinheit darauf, dass der Papierausgabesensor (28) in Prfen Sie sorgfltig, ob die Haken auf der
der korrekten Position verbleibt.Nachdem die Ausgabeeinheit installiert ist, prfen Sie die kor- Rckseite richtig eingerastet sind, bevor Sie
rekte Arbeitsweise des Sensors. die Schrauben festziehen.
13.Inserire la parte sporgente (23) sul retro dell'unit di espulsione (E) nel foro (24) dell'unit guida 14.Inserire i 2 ganci presenti sul coperchio infe-
(B), e inserire la parte sporgente sul lato anteriore (25) nel foro (26) del telaio dell'MFP per fissare riore dello scanner (A) negli incavi previsti
l'unit di espulsione (E).Spingere l'unit di espulsione (E) alla destra e inserire il gancio (27) in sulla macchina.Fissare con la vite (17)
rimossa al punto 10.
modo che esso scatti in posizione.
AVVISO
AVVISO Fare particolare attenzione per controllare
Quando si installa l'unit di espulsione, fare attenzione a non rimuovere l'attuatore (28) di espul- che i ganci sul retro siano agganciati in
sione carta.Dopo l'installazione dell'unit, controllare il funzionamento dell'attuatore. modo sicuro prima di stringere le viti.
13. (E) (23) (B) (24) 14.A 2

(25) MFP (26) (E) 10 1
(E) (27) 17

(28)

13. (E) (23) (B) (24) 14. (A) 2

(25) MFP (26) (E) . . 10
(E) (27) . (17) .

(28) .
.
.
13. (E) (23) (B) (24) (25) 14.(A) 2

(26) (E) 10
(E) (27) (17)1

(28)

6
30 E
29
30
32
12
D 14
31
15.Insert the lower portion of the eject unit cover (D) into the right side of the MFP. 18.Install the front right cover (14) using the
16.Insert the ribs (29) at the top into the right side of the MFP main unit frame (30). screw (12) removed in step 8.
17.Install the eject unit cover (D) by inserting its hook (31) into the hole (32) on the eject unit (E).
15.Insrer la portion infrieure du capot de l'unit d'jection (D) dans le ct droit de l'imprimante. 18.Installer le capot avant droit (14) l'aide de
16.Insrer les nervures (29) au-dessus dans le ct droit du chssis de l'unit principale de l'impri- la vis (12) dpose l'tape 8.
mante (30).
17.Installer le capot de l'unit djection (D) en insrant son crochet (31) dans le trou (32) sur l'unit
djection (E).
15.Inserte la parte inferior de la cubierta de la unidad de expulsin (D) en el lado derecho del MFP. 18.Instale la cubierta frontal derecha (14)
16.Inserte las nervaduras (29) en la parte superior del lado derecho de la estructura (30) de la usando el tornillo (12) quitado en el paso 8.
unidad principal del MFP.
17.Instale la cubierta (D) de la unidad de expulsin introduciendo su gancho (31) en el orificio (32)
de la unidad de expulsin (E).
15.Setzen Sie den unteren Teil der Abdeckung der Ausgabeeinheit (D) auf der rechten Seite des 18. Bringen Sie die vordere rechte Abdeckung (14)
MFP ein. wieder an. Benutzen Sie die Schraube (12) aus
16.Setzen Sie die Lamellen (29) oben in den Rahmen (30) des MFP auf der rechten Seite ein. Schritt 8.
17.Installieren Sie die Abdeckung der Ausgabeeinheit (D), indem Sie die Haken (31) in die Lcher
(32) der Ausgabeeinheit (E) einsetzen.
15.Inserire la parte inferiore del coperchio dell'unit di espulsione (D) sul lato destro dell'MFP. 18.Installare il coperchio anteriore destro (14) uti-
16.Inserire le nervature (29) presenti sulla parte superiore, nel lato destro del telaio dell'unit princi- lizzando la vite (12) rimossa nel punto 8.
pale dell'MFP (30).
17.Installare il coperchio dell'unit di espulsione (D) inserendo i relativi ganci (31) nel foro (32)
sull'unit di espulsione (E).
15.D) 18. 8 1 (12)

16.2930 (14)
17.D) 31) E) 32
15. (D) MFP . 18. 8 (12) 1

16. (29) MFP (30) . (14) .
17. (E) (32) (31) (D) .
15.(D) MFP 18. 8 (12)1

16. (29) MFP (30) (14)
17.(D) (31) (E) (32)
7
11
33
7 C
C
8
9 10 C
5
19. Plug in the connector (11) which was 21.Insert the right side portion of the inner tray (C) in the main unit.
unplugged in step 7.Secure the inner cover 22.While lowering the wall at the far end of the inner tray (C) so that it does not hit the rail (33), insert
(10) with the screw (9). the inner tray (C) in the main unit.
20.Secure the fan cover (7) using the screw (8) 23.Raise and hold the wall at the far end of the inner tray (C) above the front side of the rail (33),
removed in step 6. slide the inner tray (C) all the way in.
Close the paper conveyor cover (5).
19.Branchez le connecteur (11) qui a t 21.Insrer la portion de droite du bac intrieur (C) dans l'unit principale.
dbranch l'tape 7.Fixez le capot interne 22.Abaisser la cloison de l'extrmit la plus loigne du bac intrieur (C) afin qu'elle ne heurte pas le
(10) avec la vis (9). rail (33) et insrer le bac intrieur (C) dans l'unit principale.
20.Fixer le capot du ventilateur (7) l'aide de la 23.Soulever et maintenir la cloison de l'extrmit la plus loigne du bac intrieur (C) au-dessus de
vis (8) dpose l'tape 6. l'avant du rail (33) et faire coulisser le bac intrieur (C) jusqu'au fond.
Refermer le capot du transporteur du papier
(5).
19.Enchufe el conector (11) que desconect en 21.Inserte el lado derecho de la bandeja interna (C) en la unidad principal.
el paso 7.Fije la cubierta interna (10) con el 22.Mientras baja la pared en el extremo ms lejano de la bandeja interna (C) para que no golpee el
tornillo (9). ral (33), inserte la bandeja interna (C) en la unidad principal.
20.Asegure la cubierta del ventilador (7) 23.Levante y sujete la pared en el extremo ms lejano de la bandeja interna (C) sobre la parte
usando el tornillo (8) quitado en el paso 6. frontal del ral (33), deslice la bandeja interna (C) hasta introducirla hasta el fondo.
Cierre la unidad de transporte de papel (5).
19.Stecken Sie den Stecker (11) wieder ein, der 21.Setzen Sie den rechten Teil der inneren Ablage (C) in das Gert ein.
in Schritt 7 gelst wurde.Befestigen Sie die 22.Senken Sie die Rckwand am hinteren Ende der inneren Ablage (C) ein wenig ab, so dass diese
innere Abdeckung (10) mit der Schraube (9). nicht die Schiene (33) berhrt. Gleichzeitig setzen Sie die innere Ablage (C) in das Gert ein.
20.Bringen Sie die Lfterabdeckung (7) wieder 23.Senken Sie die Rckwand am hinteren Ende der inneren Ablage (C) ein wenig ab, halten diese
an. Benutzen Sie die Schraube (8) aus gleichzeitig ber der Vorderseite der Schiene (33) und setzen die innere Ablage (C) in das Gert
Schritt 6.Schlieen Sie die Abdeckung des ein.
Papiertransports (5).
19.Collegare il connettore (11) scollegato al 21.Inserire la parte lato destro del vassoio interno (C) nell'unit principale.
punto 7.Fissare il coperchio interno (10) con 22.Tenendo abbassata la parete sull'estremit distante del vassoio interno (C), in modo da non col-
la vite (9). pire la guida (33), inserire il vassoio interno (C) nell'unit principale.
20.Fissare il coperchio ventola (7) utilizzando la 23.Sollevare e reggere la parete sull'estremit distante del vassoio interno (C) sopra il lato frontale
vite (8) rimossa nel punto 6. della guida (33), quindi inserire a fondo il vassoio interno (C).
Chiudere il coperchio di trasporto carta (5).
19. 7 11 1 21.C)
910 22.C) 33
20. 6 1 (8) 23.33C)
(7)
(5)
19. 7 (11) 21. (C) .

. (9) (10) 22. (33) (C)
. (C) .
20. 6 (8) 1 23. (C) (33)
(7) . (C) .
(5) .
19. 7 (11) 21. (C)

(9)1 (10) 22. (C) (33)
23. (C) (33) (C)
20. 6 (8)1
(7)
(5)
8
C
34 H(M38S)
35
34
C I(M38P) F A
24.Raise the rear left corner of the inner tray (C) 25.Firmly slide the inner tray (C) all the way in. 27.IInstall the stopper paper (F) onto the scan-
and insert the hook (34) into the rail (35) on 26.Attach the inner tray (C) using the S Tite ner bottom cover (A) with the two P Tite
the scanner bottom cover (A). screw M3 x 8 (H). screw M3 8 (I).
24.Soulever le coin arrire gauche du bac intri- 25.Faire coulisser fermement le bac intrieur 27.Installer la bute de papier (F) sur le capot
eur (C) et insrer le crochet (34) dans le rail (C) jusqu'au fond. infrieur du scanner (A) avec les deux vis P
(35) sur le capot infrieur du scanner (A). 26.Attacher le bac intrieur (C) l'aide de la vis Tite M3 8 (I).
S Tite M3 8 (H).
24.Levante la cubierta izquierda posterior de la 25.Deslice firmemente la bandeja interna (C) 27.Instale el tope de papel (F) en la cubierta
bandeja interna (C) e inserte el enganche hasta introducirla hasta el fondo. inferior del escner (A) con los dos tornillos
(34) en el ral (35) en la cubierta inferior (A) 26.Fije la bandeja interna (C) con el tornillo S P Tite M3 x 8 (I).
del escner. Tite M3 x 8 (H).
24. Heben Sie die hintere linke Ecke der inneren 25. Setzen Sie die innere Ablage (C) vorsichtig 27.Installieren Sie den Papieranschlag (F) an
Ablage (C) an und setzen Sie den Haken (34) komplett ein. der unteren Abdeckung des Scanners (A)
in die Schiene (35) an der unteren Abdeckung 26. Bringen Sie die innere Ablage (C) mit der S- mit 2 P-Tite-Schrauben M3 x 8 (I).
des Scanners (A) ein. Tite-Schraube M3 x 8 (H) an.
24.Sollevare l'angolo sinistro posteriore del vas- 25.Inserire saldamente il vassoio interno (C) 27.Installare il fermo carta (F) sul coperchio
soio interno (C) e inserire il gancio (34) nella fino a fine corsa. inferiore dello scanner (A) con le due viti P
guida (35) sul coperchio inferiore dello scan- 26.Fissare il vassoio interno (C) utilizzando la Tite M3 8 (I).
ner (A). vite S Tite M3 8 (H).
24.C) (34) 25.C) 27. 2 P M38I)

A) 35 26. 1 S M38H) F) A)
C)
24. (C) 25. (C) . 27. M38P (I)

(34) (A) 26. M38S (H) (A) (F)
(35) .5 (C) . .
24. (C) 25. (C) 27.(F)

(34) (A) 26. (C) M38S (H)1 (A) M38P (I)2
(35)
9
2
1
36

29.Install the left upper cover (2) using the 4 screws (1) removed in step 1.
*Take care to pass the cable through the breakaway part (36) of the left upper cover (2).
NOTICE
The left upper cover (2) will not fit in, if the breakaway cover (3) was not removed in step 2.
28.Refermer le capot avant (4).

29.Installez le capot suprieur gauche (2) l'aide des 4 vis (1) retires l'tape 1.
*Veillez passer le cble travers la partie dtachable (36) du capot suprieur gauche (2).
REMARQUE
Le capot suprieur gauche (2) ne rentre pas si le capot dtachable (3) n'a pas t retir l'tape
2.
28. Cierre la cubierta frontal (4).

29. Instale la cubierta superior izquierda (2) con los 4 tornillos (1) que quit en el paso 1.
*Tenga cuidado de pasar el cable a travs de la pieza de separacin (36) de la cubierta superior izquierda
(2).
AVISO
La cubierta superior izquierda (2) no entrar si no se ha quitado la cubierta de separacin (3) en el
paso 2.

29.Bringen Sie die linke obere Abdeckung (2) wieder an. Benutzen Sie die 4 Schrauben (1) aus
Schritt 1.
*Stellen Sie sicher, dass das Kabel durch die ffnung der Sollbruchstelle (36) der linken oberen
Abdeckung (2) gefhrt wird.
ANMERKUNG
Die linke obere Abdeckung (2) wird nicht passen, wenn die Abdeckung der Sollbruchstelle (3) in
Schritt 2 nicht entfernt wurde.
29.Installare il coperchio superiore sinistro (2) utilizzando le 4 viti (1) rimosse al punto 1.
*Prestare attenzione a far passare il cavo attraverso la parte ad aggancio rapido (36) del coper-
chio superiore sinistro (2).
AVVISO
Se non stato rimosso il coperchio ad aggancio rapido (3) al punto 2, non sar possibile montare il
coperchio superiore sinistro (2).
28. (4)
29. 1 4 (1) (2)
236

2 32
28. (4) .
29. 1 (1) 4 (2) .
(2) (36) .

2 (3) (2) .
28.(4)
29. 1 (1)4 (2)
(2) (36)

2 (3) (2)
10
English Notes for installing the JS-732
Check the firmware version of the machine.

If the version is older than the following , upgrade the firmware to the latest version.
Full-color machines(30/30,35/35,45/45,55/50ppm)
MAIN: 2LC_2F00.003.121, ENGINE: 2LC_1000.006.072, MMI: 2LC_7000.003.120
Monochrome machines(35,45,55ppm)
MAIN: 2LH_2F00.003.121, ENGINE: 2LF_1000.003.072, MMI: 2LC_7000.003.120
Franais Remarques pour l'installation de JS-732
Vrifiez la version du micrologiciel de la machine.

Si la version est plus ancienne que celle indique ci-aprs, effectuez la mise niveau du micrologiciel la version la plus rcente.
Machines entierement en couleurs(30/30,35/35,45/45,55/50ppm)

Machines monochromes(35/45/55ppm)
Espaol Notas sobre la instalacin del JS-732
Compruebe la versin del firmware de la mquina.

Si la versin es anterior a la siguiente, actualice el firmware a la versin ms reciente.
Maquinas a todo color(30/30,35/35,45/45,55/50ppm)

Maquinas monocromaticas(35/45/55ppm)
Deutsch Hinweise zur Installation des JS-732
berprfen Sie die Firmware-Version des Gerts.

Falls die Version lter als die folgende ist, sollten Sie die Firmware auf die neuste Version aktualisieren.
Farbgerte(30/30,35/35,45/45,55/50ppm)
Schwarz/wei-Gerte(35,45,55ppm)
Italiano Note per l'installazione di JS-732
Controllare la versione del firmware del sistema.

Se la versione precedente a quella indicata qui in basso, eseguire l'aggiornamento del firmware alla versione pi recente.
dispositivi a colori(30/30,35/35,45/45,55/50ppm)
solo per i dispositivi(35,45,55ppm)
JS-732

(30/30,35/35,45/45,55/50 )
MAIN: 2LC_2F00.003.121, ENGINE: 2LC_1000.006.072,MMI: 2LC_7000.003.120
(35,45,55 )
MAIN: 2LH_2F00.003.121, ENGINE: 2LF_1000.003.072,MMI: 2LC_7000.003.120
JS-732
.
(30/30,35/35,45/45,55/50 )
(35,45,55 )
JS-732

(30/30,35/35,45/45,55/50 )
MAIN: 2LC_2L00.003.121, ENGINE: 2LC_1000.006.072, MMI: 2LC_7000.003.120
(35,45,55 )
MAIN: 2LH_2L00.003.121, ENGINE: 2LF_1000.003.072, MMI: 2LC_7000.003.120
11
A
G (M4 8)
H (M3 8S)
I (M3 8P)
C
E
D F
E. Eject unit .................................................... 1 Be sure to remove any tape and/or cushioning

English
F. Stopper paper ............................................ 1 materials from the parts supplied.
Supplied parts G. M4 8 screw ............................................. 1
A. Scanner bottom cover ............................... 1 H. S Tite screw M3 8 ................................... 1
B. Drive unit ................................................... 1 I. P Tite screw M3 8 ................................... 2
C. Inner tray ................................................... 1
D. Eject unit cover .......................................... 1
E. Unit d'jection .......................................... 1 Veillez retirer les morceaux de bande adh-

Franais
F. Bute de papier ......................................... 1 sive et/ou les matriaux de rembourrage des
Pices fournies G. Vis M4 8.................................................. 1 pices fournies.
A. Capot infrieur du scanner ........................ 1 H. Vis S Tite M3 8 ....................................... 1
B. Unit d'entranement ................................. 1 I. Vis P Tite M3 8 ....................................... 2
C. Bac intrieur .............................................. 1
D. Capot de l'unit d'jection.......................... 1
E. Unidad de salida ........................................ 1 Asegrese de despegar todas las cintas y/o

Espaol
F. Tope de papel ............................................ 1 material amortiguador de las partes suministra-
Partes suministradas G. Tornillo M4 8 ........................................... 1 das.
A. Cubierta inferior del escner ..................... 1 H. Tornillo S Tite M3 8 ................................. 1
B. Unidad de accionamiento .......................... 1 I. Tornillo P Tite M3 8 ................................. 2
C. Bandeja interna ......................................... 1
D. Cubierta de la unidad de salida ................. 1
E. Ausgabeeinheit .......................................... 1 Stellen Sie sicher, dass smtliche Klebebnder

Deutsch
F. Papieranschlag .......................................... 1 und/oder Polstermaterial von den gelieferten
Gelieferte Teile G. Schraube M4 x 8........................................ 1 Teilen entfernt wurden.
A. Untere Abdeckung des Scanners .............. 1 H. S-Tite-Schraube M3 8............................. 1
B. Antriebseinheit........................................... 1 I. P-Tite-Schraube M3 8............................. 2
C. Innere Ablage ............................................ 1
D. Abdeckung der Ausgabeeinheit................. 1
E. Unit di espulsione .................................... 1 Rimuovere tutti i nastri adesivi e/o i materiali di

Italiano
F. Fermo carta ............................................... 1 protezione dalle parti fornite.
Parti di fornitura G. Vite M4 8................................................. 1
A. Coperchio inferiore dello scanner .............. 1 H. Vite S Tite M3 8 ...................................... 1
B. Unit guida ................................................ 1 I. Vite P Tite M3 8 ...................................... 2
C. Vassoio interno .......................................... 1
D. Coperchio dell'unit di espulsione ............. 1
E. .............................1
F. .............................1
G. M48 ............................1
A. ....................... 1 H. S M38 ....................1
B. ............................. 1 I. P M38 ....................2
C. ............................. 1
D. ......................... 1
E. ........................................ 1 ,
F. ........................................ 1 .
G. M48......................................... 1
A. ..................................... 1 H. M38S ............................. 1
B. ........................................ 1 I. M38P ............................. 2
C. ......................................... 1
D. ................................. 1
E. .........................1
F. ...................1

G. M48 ............................1
A. ................... 1 H. M38S ....................1
B. ......................... 1 I. M38P ....................2
C. ........................... 1
D. ................... 1
12
3
2
Before installing the JS-732, make sure that the Procedure 2.Push in the top and bottom hooks (3) and
MFPs main power switch is turned off and that 1.Remove the 2 screws (2) in the left ISU open the interface cover (4).
its power cord is unplugged from the power out- cover (1).
let.
Avant dinstaller l'JS-732, sassurer que linter- Procdure 2.Appuyer sur les crochets haut et bas (3) et
rupteur dalimentation principal du MFP est 1.Retirez les 2 vis (2) du capot gauche de ouvrir le capot de l'interface (4).
coup et que le cordon dalimentation est l'ISU (1).
dbranch de la prise secteur.
Antes de instalar el JS-732, asegrese de que Procedimiento 2.Presione los ganchos superior e inferior (3) y
el interruptor principal de la alimentacin de la 1.Quite los 2 tornillos (2) de la cubierta ISU abra la cubierta de la interfaz (4).
MFP est desconectado y que su cable de ali- izquierda (1).
mentacin est desenchufado de la toma de
corriente.
Vor dem Einbau des JS-732 muss der MFP- Verfahren 2.Drcken Sie die Haken (3) oben und unten
Hauptschalter ausgeschaltet und das Netzkabel 1.Entfernen Sie die 2 Schrauben (2) der linken ein und ffnen Sie die Schnittstellenabdeck-
von der Steckdose abgezogen sein. ISU-Abdeckung (1). ung (4).
Prima di installare l'unit JS-732, assicurarsi Procedura 2.Spingere i ganci (3) superiore e inferiore ed
che linterruttore principale dell'MFP sia spento 1.Rimuovere le 2 viti (2) sul coperchio ISU sin- aprire la copertura di interfaccia (4).
e che il suo cavo di alimentazione sia scollegato istro (1).
presa di corrente.
JS-732 MFP 2. (3) (4)

1. ISU (1) 2 (2)
JS-732 MFP 2. (3) (4)

OFF 1.ISU (1) (2) 2 .
. .
JS-732 MFP 2. (3)

OFF 1.ISU (1) (2)2 (4)
13
13
6
9
14
12
14
4 7
5
10
11
8
3.Remove the 2 screws (5) inside the interface 4.Open the front cover (7) on the MFP. 7.Remove the screw (11) from the fan cover
cover (4) and remove the left scanner cover 5.Pull out the paper conveyor cover (8). (10).
(6). 6.If the operation panel (9) is lowered, raise it 8.Remove the screw (12) and pull the upper
to the top position. right cover (13) outwards slightly while
removing the front right cover (14).
Remove the right front cover (14) by pulling
the part in the dotted circle outwards.
3.Retirez les 2 vis (5) l'intrieur du capot de 4.Ouvrir le capot avant (7) sur le MFP. 7.Retirez la vis (11) du capot du ventilateur
l'interface (4) et retirez le capot de scanner 5.Sortir le capot du transporteur du papier (8). (10).
gauche (6). 6.Si le panneau de commande (9) est abaiss, 8.Retirez la vis (12) et tirer lgrement le
le relever dans sa position maximum. capot suprieur droit (13) vers l'extrieur tout
en dposant le capot avant droit (14).Retirez
le capot avant droit (14) en tirant la partie
dans le cercle en pointills.
3.Quite los 2 tornillos (5) de interior de la cubi- 4.Abra la cubierta frontal (7) en la MFP. 7.Quite el tornillo (11) de la cubierta del venti-
erta de la interfaz (4) y quite la cubierta 5.Extraiga la cubierta de la unidad de trans- lador (10).
izquierda del escner (6). porte de papel (8). 8.Quite el tornillo (12) y saque la cubierta
6.Si el panel de trabajo (9) est bajo, levntelo superior derecha (13) ligeramente mientras
hasta la posicin superior. quita la cubierta frontal derecha (14).Quite la
cubierta frontal derecha (14) tirando hacia
afuera de la parte en el crculo punteado.
3.Entfernen Sie die 2 Schrauben (5) im 4.ffnen Sie die vordere Abdeckung (7) des 7. Entfernen Sie die Schraube (11) der Lfterab-
Inneren der Schnittstellenabdeckung (4) und MFP. deckung (10).
8. Entfernen Sie die Schraube (12) und ziehen
entfernen Sie die linke Scannerabdeckung 5.Entfernen Sie die Abdeckung des Papier- Sie die obere rechte Abdeckung (13) vorsichtig
(6). transports (8). nach auen, whrend Sie gleichzeitig die vor-
dere rechte Abdeckung (14) entfernen.
6.Falls das Bedienfeld (9) abgesenkt ist, brin- Entfernen Sie die rechte vordere Abdeckung
gen Sie es in die oberste Position. (14), indem Sie das Teil, das in der Zeichnung
mit einem gepunkteten Kreis markiert ist, nach
auen ziehen.
3.Rimuovere le 2 viti (5) all'interno della coper- 4.Aprire il pannello anteriore (7) sull'MFP. 7. Rimuovere la vite (11) dal coperchio ventola (10).
tura di interfaccia (4) e quindi rimuovere il 5.Estrarre il coperchio di trasporto carta (8). 8. Rimuovere la vite (12) e tirare il coperchio supe-
coperchio sinistro dello scanner (6). 6.Se il pannello operativo (9) abbassato, sol- riore destro (13) leggermente verso l'esterno men-
levarlo alla posizione in alto. tre si rimuove il coperchio anteriore destro (14).
Rimuovere il coperchio anteriore destro (14)
tirando verso l'esterno la parte nel cerchio tratteg-
giato.
3. (4) 2 (5) 4. MFP (7) 7. (10) 1 (11)

(6) 5. (8) 8. 1 (12)
6. (9) (13) (14)

(14)
3. (4) (5) 2 4.MFP (7) . 7. (10) (11) 1 .

(6) 5. (8) . 8. (12) 1
. 6. (9) (13)
. (14) .

(14) .
3.(4) 4.MFP (7) 7.(10) (11)1

(5)2 (6) 5.(8) 8. (12)1 (13)
6. (9) (14)

(14)

14
17
19
18
20
15 16
9.Remove the screw (15) and remove the 10.Remove the eject cover (17). 11.Remove the 2 M4 8 screws (black) (18)
operation panel lower cover (16). * Pull the lower front side to the left before and remove the rear tray cover (19) and
removing the cover. scanner bottom cover (20).
*The eject cover (17) which was removed is *The scanner bottom cover(20) which was
not used. removed is not used.
9.Retirez la vis (15) et retirez le capot infrieur 10.Retirez le capot djection (17). 11.Retirez les 2 vis M4 8 (noire) (18) et retirez
du panneau de commande (16). * Tirer le ct avant infrieur sur la gauche le capot du support arrire (19) et le capot
avant de retirez le capot. infrieur du scanner (20).
*Le capot de sortie (17) qui a t retir n'est *Le capot infrieur du scanner (20) qui a t
pas utilis. retir n'est pas utilis.
9.Quite el tornillo (15) y quite la cubierta infe- 10.Quite la cubierta de expulsin (17). 11.Quite los 2 tornillos M4 8 (negro) (18) y
rior del panel de trabajo (16). * Tire del lado frontal inferior hacia la izqui- quite la cubierta izquierda de la bandeja (19)
erda antes de quitar la cubierta. y la cubierta inferior del escner (20).
*No se utiliza la cubierta de expulsin (17) *No se utiliza la cubierta inferior del escner
que se quit. (20) que se quit.
9.Entfernen Sie die Schraube (15) und ent- 10.Entfernen Sie die Abdeckung der Ausgabee- 11.Entfernen Sie die 2 M4 x 8 Schrauben
fernen Sie die untere Abdeckung des Bedi- inheit (17). (schwarz) (18) und entfernen Sie die
enfelds (16). * Bevor Sie die Abdeckung entfernen, zie- Abdeckung des hinteren Fachs (19) und die
hen Sie die untere Vorderseite nach links. untere Abdeckung des Scanners (20).
*Die gerade entfernte Abdeckung des Papie- *Die gerade entfernte untere Scannerab-
rauslaufs (17) wird nicht mehr bentigt. deckung (20) wird nicht mehr bentigt.
9.Rimuovere la vite (15) e rimuovere il coper- 10.Rimuovere il coperchio di espulsione carta 11.Rimuovere le 2 viti M4 8 (nera) (18) e
chio inferiore del pannello operativo (16). (17). quindi rimuovere il coperchio posteriore del
* Tirare il lato anteriore in basso a sinistra vassoio (19) e il coperchio inferiore dello
prima di rimuovere il coperchio. scanner (20).
*Il coperchio di uscita (17) rimosso non viene *Il coperchio inferiore dello scanner (20)
utilizzato. rimosso non viene utilizzato.
9. (15) 10. (17) 11. 2 M48( )(18)

(16) (19) (20)
17 20
9. (15) 10. (17) . 11. M48(18) 2

(16) . (19) (20)
. .
(17) (20)
. .
9. (15)1 10.(17) 11. M48(18)2

(16) (19) (20)
(17)
(20)

15
B 23
18
23
B
22
21
12.Insert the hook (21) on the underside of the drive unit (B) into the respective positioning hole (22) 13. Plug the connector (23) from the drive unit (B)
in the back plate, using the location of the notch on the front as a guide. Then secure the drive into the MFP.
unit using the 2 M4 8 screws (black) (18) removed in step 11.
NOTICE
When installing the drive unit (B), take care not to rub it against the ribs on the top of the MFP
tray.
Hold the connector (23) out of the way so that it does not become trapped.
12. Insrer le crochet (21) sous l'unit d'entranement (B) dans le trou de positionnement appropri 13.Bancher le connecteur (23) de l'unit
(22) sur la plaque arrire, en prenant comme guide l'encoche l'avant. Puis fixer l'unit d'entranement (B) sur le MFP.
d'entranement avec les 2 vis M4 8 (noires) (18) retires au point 11.
AVIS
l'installation de l'unit d'entranement (B), veiller ne pas le frotter contre les nervures sur le
haut du bac MFP.
carter le connecteur (23) de sorte qu'il ne soit pas coinc.
12.Inserte el gancho (21) del lado inferior de la unidad de accionamiento (B) en el orificio de 13.Enchufe el conector (23) de la unidad de
posicin respectivo (22) de la placa posterior, con la ubicacin de la muesca en el frente como accionamiento (B) en la MFP.
gua. Despus, fije la unidad de accionamiento con los 2 tornillos M4 8 (negros) (18) quitados
en el paso 11.
AVISO
Durante la instalacin de la unidad de accionamiento (B), tenga cuidado de no rozar las nervadu-
ras de la parte superior de la bandeja de la MFP.Mantenga el conector (23) alejado para no atra-
parlo.
12. Setzen Sie die Haken (21) auf der Unterseite der Antriebseinheit (B) in die entsprechenden Aufnah- 13.Stecken Sie den Stecker (23) in die Antrieb-
men (22) der Rckwand. Benutzen Sie die Aussparungen auf der Vorderseite als Orientierung. seinheit (B) des MFP.
Befestigen Sie die Antriebseinheit mit den 2 M4 x 8 Schrauben (schwarz) (18), die Sie in Schritt 11
gelst haben.
HINWEIS
Beim Einsetzen der Antriebseinheit (B) achten Sie darauf, dass Sie diese nicht an den Nasen oben
in der Ablage des MFP scheuern.Fhren Sie den Stecker (23) so, dass dieser nicht eingeklemmt
werden kann.
12.Inserire il gancio (21) sul lato inferiore dell'unit guida (B) nel rispettivo foro di posizionamento 13.Inserire il connettore (23) dall'unit guida (B)
(22) sulla piastra posteriore, usando la posizione dell'intaglio sulla parte frontale come guida. nell'MFP.
Quindi fissare l'unit guida usando le 2 viti M4 8 (nere) (18) rimosse nel passo 11.
NOTIFICA
Quando si installa l'unit guida (B), fare attenzione a non sfregarla contro i rilievi sulla parte supe-
riore del vassoio MFP.
Mantenere il connettore (23) all'esterno in modo che esso non rimanga intrappolato.
12. (B) (21) (22) 13. (B) (23)

11 2 M4 8(18) MFP

(B) MFP
(23)
12. (B) (21) 13. (B) (23) MFP

(22) . 11 M4 8 ( )(18) .
2 .

(B) MFP
. (23) .
12. (B) (21) (22) 13. (B) (23)

11 M48(18)2 MFP

(B)
(23)
16
B 28 27
E
A
25
24
26
B E G(M4 8)
29
14.Insert the projection (24) on the back of the eject unit (E) into the hole (25) in the drive unit (B) 15.Insert the 2 hooks on the scanner bottom
and insert the projection on the front (26) into the hole (27) in the MFP frame to attach the eject cover (A) into the holes and secure the cover
unit (E). with the M4 8 screw (G).
Push the eject unit (E) to the right and fit the hook (28) in so that it clicks into place. NOTICE
NOTICE Take particular care to check that the hooks
When installing the eject unit, take care not to dislodge the paper eject actuator (29). on the rear are securely engaged before
After installing the unit, check the operation of the actuator. tightening the screws.
14.Insrer la projection (24) l'arrire de l'unit d'jection (E) dans le trou (25) de l'unit d'entrane- 15.Insrer les 2 crochets sur le capot infrieur
ment (B) et insrer la projection l'avant (26) dans le trou (27) du chssis de MFP pour attacher du scanner (A) dans les trous et fixer le
lunit d'jection (E).Pousser l'unit d'jection (E) vers la droite et emboter le crochet (28) capot avec une vis M4 8 (G).
jusqu'au dclic. AVIS
AVIS S'assurer tout particulirement que les cro-
l'installation de l'unit d'jection, veiller ne pas dplacer l'actionneur d'jection du papier (29). chets l'arrire sont bien engags avant de
Aprs avoir install l'unit, vrifier le bon fonctionnement de l'actuateur. serrer les vis.
14.Inserte el saliente (24) de la parte posterior de la unidad de salida (E) en el orificio (25) de la 15.Inserte los 2 ganchos de la cubierta inferior
unidad de accionamiento (B) e inserte el saliente del frente (26) en el orificio (27) de la carcasa del escner (A) en los orificios y fije la
de la MFP para fijar la unidad de salida (E).Presione la unidad de salida (E) hacia la derecha y cubierta con el tornillo M4 8 (G).
AVISO
encaje el gancho (28) hasta que escuche un clic. Antes de apretar los tornillos, tenga especial
AVISO cuidado de comprobar si los ganchos en la
Durante la instalacin de la unidad de salida, tenga cuidado de no desplazar el actuador de parte posterior estn enganchados de forma
expulsin de papel (29).Despus de instalar la unidad, compruebe el funcionamiento del actuador. segura.
14.Setzen Sie die Nase (24) an der Rckseite der Ausgabeeinheit (E) in das Loch (25) der Antrieb- 15.Setzen Sie die 2 Schrauben in die untere
seinheit (B). Dann setzen Sie die Nase (26) vorne in das Loch (27) des MFP-Rahmens, um die Abdeckung (A) des Scanners in die entspre-
Ausgabeeinheit (E) anzubringen.Schieben Sie die Ausgabeeinheit (E) nach rechts und drcken chenden Lcher und befestigen Sie die
Sie auf die Haken (28), damit diese einrasten. Abdeckung mit der M4 x 8 Schraube (G).
HINWEIS HINWEIS
Achten Sie beim Einsetzen der Ausgabeeinheit darauf, dass der Papierausgabesensor (29) in Prfen Sie sorgfltig, ob die Haken auf der
der korrekten Position verbleibt.Nachdem die Ausgabeeinheit installiert ist, prfen Sie die kor- Rckseite richtig eingerastet sind, bevor Sie
rekte Arbeitsweise des Sensors. die Schrauben festziehen.
14.Inserire la parte sporgente (24) sul retro dell'unit di espulsione (E) nel foro (25) dell'unit guida 15.Inserire i 2 ganci sul coperchio inferiore dello
(B), e inserire la parte sporgente sul lato anteriore (26) nel foro (27) del telaio dell'MFP per fissare scanner (A) nei fori e fissare il coperchio con
l'unit di espulsione (E).Spingere l'unit di espulsione (E) alla destra e inserire il gancio (28) in le viti M4 8 (G).
modo che esso scatti in posizione. Fare particolare attenzione per controllare
NOTIFICA che i ganci sul retro siano agganciati in
Quando si installa l'unit di espulsione, fare attenzione a non rimuovere l'attuatore (29) di espul- modo sicuro prima di stringere le viti.
sione carta.Dopo l'installazione dell'unit, controllare il funzionamento dell'attuatore.
14. (E) (24) (B) (25) 15. (A) 2

(26) MFP (27) (E) M4 8 (G)
(E) (28)

(29)

14. (E) (24) (B) (25) 15. (A) 2

(26) MFP (27) (E) . M4 8 (G)
(E) (28) . .

(29) .
.
.
14. (E) (24) (B) (25) (26) 15.(A) 2

(27) (E)
M48(G)1
(E) (28)

(29)

17
32 E
D 31
32
E 34
30
31
33
D
15 16
16.Insert the lower portion of the eject unit cover (D) into the right side of the MFP. 19.Re-attach the operation panel lower cover
17.Insert the ribs (31) at the top into the right side of the MFP main unit frame (32). (16) using the screw (15) removed in step 9.
18.Install the eject unit cover (D) by inserting its hook (33) into the hole (34) on the eject unit (E).
16.Insrer la portion infrieure du capot de l'unit d'jection (D) dans le ct droit de l'imprimante. 19. Rattacher le capot infrieur du panneau de
17.Insrer les nervures (31) au-dessus dans le ct droit du chssis de l'unit principale de l'impri- commande (16) avec la vis (15) dpose au
mante (32). point 9.
18.Installer le capot de l'unit djection (D) en insrant son crochet (33) dans le trou (34) sur l'unit
djection (E).
16.Inserte la parte inferior de la cubierta de la unidad de expulsin (D) en el lado derecho del MFP. 19.Vuelva a colocar la cubierta inferior del panel
17.Inserte las nervaduras (31) en la parte superior del lado derecho de la estructura (32) de la de trabajo (16) con el tornillo (15) quitado en
unidad principal del MFP. el paso 9.
18.Instale la cubierta (D) de la unidad de expulsin introduciendo su gancho (33) en el orificio (34)
de la unidad de expulsin (E).
16.Setzen Sie den unteren Teil der Abdeckung der Ausgabeeinheit (D) auf der rechten Seite des 19.Bringen Sie die untere Abdeckung (16) des
MFP ein. Bedienfelds wieder an. Benutzen Sie die
17.Setzen Sie die Lamellen (31) oben in den Rahmen (32) des MFP auf der rechten Seite ein. Schraube (15) aus Schritt 9.
18.Installieren Sie die Abdeckung der Ausgabeeinheit (D), indem Sie die Haken (33) in die Lcher
(34) der Ausgabeeinheit (E) einsetzen.
16.Inserire la parte inferiore del coperchio dell'unit di espulsione (D) sul lato destro dell'MFP. 19.Riapplicare il coperchio inferiore del pan-
17.Inserire le nervature (31) presenti sulla parte superiore, nel lato destro del telaio dell'unit princi- nello operativo (16) usando la vite (15)
pale dell'MFP (32). rimossa nel passo 9.
18.Installare il coperchio dell'unit di espulsione (D) inserendo i relativi ganci (33) nel foro (34)
sull'unit di espulsione (E).
16.D) 19. 9 (15)

17.3132 (16)
18.D) 33) E) 34
16. (D) MFP . 19. 9 (15)

17. (31) MFP (32) . (16)
18. (E) (34) (33) (D) . .
16.(D) MFP 19. 9 (15)1

17. (31) MFP (32) (16)
18.(D) (33) (E) (34)
18
35
13
C
35
12
14 C
10
11 8
C
20.Install the front right cover (14) using the 21.Insert the right side portion of the inner tray (C) in the main unit.
screw (12) removed in step 8. 22.While lowering the wall at the far end of the inner tray (C) so that it does not hit the rail (35), insert
Secure the fan cover (10) using the screw the inner tray (C) in the main unit.
(11) removed in step 7. 23.Raise and hold the wall at the far end of the inner tray (C) above the front side of the rail (35),
Close the paper conveyor cover (8). slide the inner tray (C) all the way in.
* Check that connector on the inside of the
fan cover (10) has not been dislodged.
20.Installer le capot avant droit (14) l'aide de 21.Insrer la portion de droite du bac intrieur (C) dans l'unit principale.
la vis (12) dpose l'tape 8. 22.Abaisser la cloison de l'extrmit la plus loigne du bac intrieur (C) afin qu'elle ne heurte pas le
Fixer le capot du ventilateur (10) l'aide de rail (35) et insrer le bac intrieur (C) dans l'unit principale.
la vis (11) dpose l'tape 7.
Refermer le capot du transporteur du papier 23.Soulever et maintenir la cloison de l'extrmit la plus loigne du bac intrieur (C) au-dessus de
(8). l'avant du rail (35) et faire coulisser le bac intrieur (C) jusqu'au fond.
* Vrifier que le connecteur l'intrieur du
capot du ventilateur (10) n'a pas boug.
20.Instale la cubierta frontal derecha (14) 21.Inserte el lado derecho de la bandeja interna (C) en la unidad principal.
usando el tornillo (12) quitado en el paso 8. 22.Mientras baja la pared en el extremo ms lejano de la bandeja interna (C) para que no golpee el
Asegure la cubierta del ventilador (10) ral (35), inserte la bandeja interna (C) en la unidad principal.
usando el tornillo (11) quitado en el paso 7. 23.Levante y sujete la pared en el extremo ms lejano de la bandeja interna (C) sobre la parte
Cierre la unidad de transporte de papel (8). frontal del ral (35), deslice la bandeja interna (C) hasta introducirla hasta el fondo.
* Compruebe si no se desplaz el conector
del interior de la cubierta del ventilador (10).
20. Bringen Sie die vordere rechte Abdeckung (14) 21.Setzen Sie den rechten Teil der inneren Ablage (C) in das Gert ein.
wieder an. Benutzen Sie die Schraube (12) aus 22.Senken Sie die Rckwand am hinteren Ende der inneren Ablage (C) ein wenig ab, so dass diese
Schritt 8.Bringen Sie die Lfterabdeckung (10)
wieder an. Benutzen Sie die Schraube (11) aus nicht die Schiene (35) berhrt. Gleichzeitig setzen Sie die innere Ablage (C) in das Gert ein.
Schritt 7.Schlieen Sie die Abdeckung des 23.Senken Sie die Rckwand am hinteren Ende der inneren Ablage (C) ein wenig ab, halten diese
Papiertransports (8). gleichzeitig ber der Vorderseite der Schiene (35) und setzen die innere Ablage (C) in das Gert
* Prfen Sie sorgfltig, dass der Stecker auf der
Innenseite der Lfterabdeckung (10) in der kor- ein.
rekten Position sitzt.
20.Installare il coperchio anteriore destro (14) uti- 21.Inserire la parte lato destro del vassoio interno (C) nell'unit principale.
lizzando la vite (12) rimossa nel punto 8. 22.Tenendo abbassata la parete sull'estremit distante del vassoio interno (C), in modo da non col-
Fissare il coperchio ventola (10) utilizzando la
vite (11) rimossa nel punto 7. pire la guida (35), inserire il vassoio interno (C) nell'unit principale.
Chiudere il coperchio di trasporto carta (8). 23.Sollevare e reggere la parete sull'estremit distante del vassoio interno (C) sopra il lato frontale
* Controllare che il connettore sull'interno del della guida (35), quindi inserire a fondo il vassoio interno (C).
coperchio della ventola (10) non sia stato
rimosso.
20. 8 1 (12) 21.C)

(14) 22.C) 35
7 1 (11) 23.35C)
(10)
(8)
(10)

20. 8 (12) 1 21. (C) .

(14) . 22. (35) (C)
7 (11) 1 (C) .
(10) . 23. (C) (35)
(8) . (C) .
(10)
.
20. 8 (12)1 21. (C)

(14) 22. (C) (35)
7 (11)1 23. (C) (35) (C)
(10)
(8)
(10)

19
36
H(M3 8S)
A
36
37
F A
C C I(M3 8P)
24.Raise the rear left corner of the inner tray (C) 25.Firmly slide the inner tray (C) all the way in. 27.IInstall the stopper paper (F) onto the scan-
and insert the hook (36) into the rail (37) on 26.Attach the inner tray (C) using the S Tite ner bottom cover (A) with the two P Tite
the scanner bottom cover (A). screw M3 x 8 (H). screw M3 8 (I).
24.Soulever le coin arrire gauche du bac intri- 25.Faire coulisser fermement le bac intrieur 27.Installer la bute de papier (F) sur le capot
eur (C) et insrer le crochet (36) dans le rail (C) jusqu'au fond. infrieur du scanner (A) avec les deux vis P
(37) sur le capot infrieur du scanner (A). 26.Attacher le bac intrieur (C) l'aide de la vis Tite M3 8 (I).
S Tite M3 8 (H).
24.Levante la cubierta izquierda posterior de la 25.Deslice firmemente la bandeja interna (C) 27.Instale el tope de papel (F) en la cubierta
bandeja interna (C) e inserte el enganche hasta introducirla hasta el fondo. inferior del escner (A) con los dos tornillos
(36) en el ral (37) en la cubierta inferior (A) 26.Fije la bandeja interna (C) con el tornillo S P Tite M3 x 8 (I).
del escner. Tite M3 x 8 (H).
24. Heben Sie die hintere linke Ecke der inneren 25. Setzen Sie die innere Ablage (C) vorsichtig 27.Installieren Sie den Papieranschlag (F) an
Ablage (C) an und setzen Sie den Haken (36) komplett ein. der unteren Abdeckung des Scanners (A)
in die Schiene (37) an der unteren Abdeckung 26. Bringen Sie die innere Ablage (C) mit der S- mit 2 P-Tite-Schrauben M3 x 8 (I).
des Scanners (A) ein. Tite-Schraube M3 x 8 (H) an.
24.Sollevare l'angolo sinistro posteriore del vas- 25.Inserire saldamente il vassoio interno (C) 27.Installare il fermo carta (F) sul coperchio
soio interno (C) e inserire il gancio (36) nella fino a fine corsa. inferiore dello scanner (A) con le due viti P
guida (37) sul coperchio inferiore dello scan- 26.Fissare il vassoio interno (C) utilizzando la Tite M3 8 (I).
ner (A). vite S Tite M3 8 (H).
24.C) (36) 25.C) 27. 2 P M38I)

A) 37 26. 1 S M38H) F) A)
C)
24. (C) 25. (C) . 27. M38P (I)

(36) (A) 26. M38S (H) (A) (F)
(37) . (C) . .
24. (C) 25. (C) 27.(F)

(36) (A) 26. (C) M38S (H)1 (A) M38P (I)2
(37)
20
2
1
6
7
4
28.nstall the left scanner cover (6) using the 2 30.Install the left ISU cover (1) using the 2
screws (5) removed in step 3. screws (2) removed in step 1.
29.Close the interface cover (4). 31.Close the front cover (7).
28.Installer le capot de scanner gauche (6) 30.Installer le capot gauche de l'ISU (1) avec
avec les 2 vis (5) retires au point 3. les 2 vis (2) dposes au point 1.
29.Fermer le capot de l'interface (4). 31.Refermer le capot avant (7).
28.Instale la cubierta izquierda del escner (6) 30.Instale la cubierta ISU izquierda (1) con los 2
con los 2 tornillos (5) quitados en el paso 3. tornillos (2) quitados en el paso 1.
29.Cierre la cubierta de la interfaz (4). 31. Cierre la cubierta frontal (7).
28.Bringen Sie die linke Scannerabdeckung (6) 30.Bringen Sie die linke ISU-Abdeckung (1)
wieder an. wieder an.
Benutzen Sie die 2 Schrauben (5) aus Benutzen Sie die 2 Schrauben (2) aus
Schritt 3. Schritt 1.
29.Schlieen Sie die Schnittstellenabdeckung 31. Schlieen Sie die vordere Abdeckung (7).
(4).
28.Installare il coperchio sinistro dello scanner 30.Installare il coperchio ISU sinistro (1) usando
(6) usando le 2 viti (5) rimosse nel passo 3. le 2 viti (2) rimosse nel passo 1.
29.Chiudere la copertura di interfaccia (4). 31.Chiudere il pannello anteriore (7).
28. 3 2 (5) 30. 1 2 (2)

(6) ISU (1)
29. (4) 31. (7)
28. 3 (5) 2 30. 1 (2) 2 ISU

(6) . (1) .
29. (4) . 31. (7) .
28. 3 (5)2 30. 1 (2)2 ISU

(6) (1)
29.(4) 31.(7)
21
RIGHT JOB SEPARATOR
A B
1 2 3
4 5 6
A B
7
8
9 10
11 12
13 14
BANNER GUIDE
B
A
C
2011.12
302K956720-01
1 2 3
B
C
A
4 1 5
2011.12
302K956720-01
FAX System
A B
Home Home Accessibility Display Visual. Accessibilit

Accueil Affich. accessibilit
Inicio Pantalla acceso
Startseite Zugriffsanzeige
1.
English
A different procedure is required depending on the product which is installed with this unit.Each procedure is described in the following
pages.
When installing the Fax system on a machine (A) which has the 'Home' key in the operation panel, see Page 1 to Page 13.
When installing the multiport on a machine (A) which has the 'Home' key in the operation panel, see Page 14 to Page 21.
When installing the Fax system on a machine (B) which has the 'Accessibility Display' key in the operation panel, see Page 22 to Page 34.
When installing the multiport on a machine (B) which has the 'Accessibility Display' key in the operation panel, see Page 35 to Page 41.
Franais
1.
Une procdure diffrente est requise selon le produit qui est install avec cette unit.Chaque procdure est dcrite dans les pages suivantes.
Lors de l'installation du fax sur une machine (A) disposant de la touche 'Accueil' sur le panneau de commande, voir de Page 1 Page 13.
Lors de l'installation du port multiple sur une machine (A) disposant de la touche 'Accueil' sur le panneau de commande, voir Page 14 Page 21.
Lors de l'installation du fax sur une machine (B) disposant de la touche 'Affich. accessibilit' sur le panneau de commande, voir de Page 22 Page 34.
Lors de l'installation du port multiple sur une machine (B) disposant de la touche 'Affich. accessibilit' sur le panneau de commande, voir Page 35
Page 41.
1.
Espaol
El procedimiento es diferente segn el producto que se instale con esta unidad.En las siguientes pginas, se describe cada procedimiento.
Al instalar el sistema de fax en una mquina (A) que dispone de la tecla 'Inicio' en el panel de controles, consulte las pginas de la 1 a la 13.
Al instalar un puerto mltiple en una mquina (A) que dispone de la tecla 'Inicio' en el panel de controles, consulte las pginas de la 14 a la 21.
Al instalar el sistema de fax en una mquina (B) que dispone de la tecla 'Pantalla acceso' en el panel de controles, consulte las pginas de la 22 a la
34.
Al instalar un puerto mltiple en una mquina (B) que dispone de la tecla 'Pantalla acceso' en el panel de controles, consulte las pginas de la 35 a la
41.
1.Deutsch
Je nach verwendetem Modell ist eine andere Vorgehensweise zur Installation dieses Teils erforderlich.Die unterschiedlichen Vorgehens-
weisen werden auf den folgenden Seiten erlutert.
Bei Installation des FAX-Systems in einem Gert (A), das ber die Taste 'Startseite' im Bedienfeld verfgt, siehe Seite 1 bis 13.
Bei Installation einer zweiten Leitung in einem Gert (A), das ber die Taste 'Startseite' im Bedienfeld verfgt, siehe Seite 14 bis 21.
Bei Installation des FAX-Systems in einem Gert (B), das ber die Taste 'Zugriffsanzeige' im Bedienfeld verfgt, siehe Seite 22 bis 34.
Bei Installation einer zweiten Leitung in einem Gert (B), das ber die Taste 'Zugriffsanzeige' im Bedienfeld verfgt, siehe Seite 35 bis 41.
1.Italiano
Si richiede una procedura diversa in funzione del prodotto su cui installata l'unit.Le singole procedure sono descritte nelle pagine seguenti.
Per l'installazione del modulo FAX su una macchina (A) dotata di tasto 'Home' sul pannello comandi, vedere le istruzioni da Pagina 1 a Pagina 13.
Per l'installazione di una porta multipla su una macchina (A) dotata di tasto 'Home' sul pannello comandi, vedere le istruzioni da Pagina 14 a Pagina 21.
Per l'installazione del modulo FAX su una macchina (B) dotata di tasto 'Visual. Accessibilit' sul pannello comandi, vedere le istruzioni da Pagina 22 a Pagina 34.
Per l'installazione di una porta multipla su una macchina (B) dotata di tasto Visual. Accessibilit sul pannello comandi, vedere le istruzioni da Pagina 35 a Pagina 41.
1.

' ' (A) P1-P13
' ' (A) P14-P21
' ' (B) P22-P34
' ' (B) P35-P41
1.
. .
' ' (A) 1 ~ 13 .
' ' (A) 14 ~ 21 .
' ' (B) 22 ~ 34 .
' ' (B) 35 ~ 41 .
1.

(A) 1 13
(A) 14 21
(B) 22 34
(B) 35 41
A E
C
B H
When installing the Fax system on a machine (A) which has the 'Home' key in the operation panel
Supplied parts C. Terminal seal.............................................. 1 Option
A. FAX circuit board ....................................... 1 D. Alphabet label ............................................ 1 H. Memory DIMM (128 MB) ........................... 1
B. Modular connector cable E. Memory DIMM (16 MB) ............................. 1
(120 V/Australian model only) F. PTT label (110V model only) ..................... 1 Be sure to remove any tape and/or cushioning
PJJWC0016Z (UL Listed.HUAN HSIN G. Approval label materials from the parts supplied.
Type TL:120 V only) .................................. 1 (Australian/New Zealand models only) ...... 2
Lors de l'installation du fax sur une machine (A) disposant de la touche 'Accueil' sur le panneau de commande
Pices fournies E. Mmoire DIMM (16 MB) ............................ 1 Veillez retirer les morceaux de bande adh-
A. Carte circuits FAX ................................... 1 sive et/ou les matriaux de rembourrage des
B. Cble du connecteur modulaire (modles Option pices fournies.
pour lAustralie/120 V seulement).............. 1 H. Mmoire DIMM (128 MB) .......................... 1
C. Joint de borne............................................ 1
D. Etiquette de lalphabet ............................... 1 (F) et (G) ne sont pas fournis.
Al instalar el sistema de fax en una mquina (A) que dispone de la tecla 'Inicio' en el panel de controles
Partes suministradas E. Memoria DIMM (16 MB) ............................ 1 Asegrese de quitar todas las cintas y/o mate-
A. Tarjeta de circuitos de fax .......................... 1 rial amortiguador de las partes suministradas.
B. Cable conector modular (slo para Opcin
modelos de 120 V/Australianos)................ 1 H. Memoria DIMM (128 MB) .......................... 1
C. Sello del terminal ....................................... 1
D. Etiqueta de alfabeto................................... 1 (F) y (G) no se suministran.
Bei Installation des FAX-Systems in einem Gert (A), das ber die Taste 'Startseite' im Bedienfeld verfgt
Enthaltene Teile Stellen Sie sicher, dass smtliche Klebebnder
A. FAX-Leiterplatte......................................... 1 Option und/oder Polstermaterial von den gelieferten
C. Verschlusskappe ....................................... 1 H. Speicher-DIMM (128 MB) .......................... 1 Teilen entfernt wurden.
D. Alphabetaufkleber...................................... 1
E. Speicher-DIMM (16 MB) ............................ 1
(B), (F) und (G) liegen nicht bei.
Per l'installazione del modulo FAX su una macchina (A) dotata di tasto 'Home' sul pannello comandi
Parti fornite Rimuovere tutti i nastri adesivi e/o i materiali di
A. Scheda a circuiti FAX ................................ 1 Opzioni protezione dalle parti fornite.
C. Guarnizione terminale ............................... 1 H. Memoria DIMM (128 MB) .......................... 1
D. Etichetta alfabetica .................................... 1
E. Memoria DIMM (16 MB) ............................ 1
(B), (F) e (G) non sono in dotazione.
' ' (A)

F. .............................1
A. ........................... 1
B. ............................... 1
C. ............................. 1 H. DIMM (128MB) .................1
D. ......................... 1
E. DIMM (16MB) ................. 1 (G)
' ' (A)
,
A. FAX ........................................... 1 H. DIMM128MB........................ 1 .
C. ............................................... 1
D. ........................................ 1
E. DIMM16MB......................... 1
B,F,(G) .
(A)

A. FAX ............................. 1 H. DIMM128MB..................1
B. ..................... 1
C. ........................... 1
E. DIMM16MB................... 1
(D),(F),(G)

1
NOTICE
machines.
(The generic procedure figures in this document show medium-speed MFPs.)
If the finisher is already installed, remove the finisher before installing FAX System(W).
Before starting installation, be sure to turn the main power switch of the machine off, and unplug the power plug from the wall outlet.
REMARQUE
chromes 65 et 80 ppm. (Dans ce document, les chiffres des processus gnriques renvoient aux MPF vitesse moyenne.)
Si le retoucheur est dj en place, le dposer avant de monter le FAX System(W).
Avant de commencer l'installation, s'assurer de mettre la machine hors tension et de dbrancher la fiche d'alimentation de la prise murale.
AVISO
Las referencias a las MFP de velocidad media de este documento corresponden a las mquinas a color de 30/30, 35/35, 45/45 y 55/50 ppm y a las mquinas monocromticas
de 35, 45 y 55 ppm.
Las referencias a las MFP de alta velocidad de este documento corresponden a las mquinas a color de 65/65 y 75/70 ppm y a las mquinas monocromticas de 65 y 80 ppm.
(Las ilustraciones de procedimientos genricos de este documento muestran las MFP de velocidad media.)
Si el finalizador ya se encuentra instalado, desmntelo antes de instalar el FAX System(W).
Antes de iniciar la instalacin, asegrese de apagar el interruptor de encendido de la mquina y desenchufar el cable de alimentacin de la toma de
pared.
ANMERKUNG
Angaben fr MFP der mittleren Leistungsklasse in dieser Anleitung gelten fr die 30/30, 35/35, 45/45 und 55/50 ppm Vollfarbenkopierer sowie fr die 35, 45 und 55 ppm Mono-
chrommaschinen.
Angaben fr MFP der Hochleistungsklasse in dieser Anleitung gelten fr die 65/65 und 75/70 ppm Vollfarbenkopierer sowie fr die 65 und 80 ppm Monochrommaschinen. (Die
Abbildungen der allgemeinen Prozeduren zeigen MFP der mittleren Leistungsklasse.)
Falls der Finisher schon installiert ist, mssen Sie ihn ausbauen, bevor Sie das FAX System(W) installieren.
Bevor Sie mit der Installation beginnen berzeugen Sie sich, dass der Netzschalter des Gerts ausgeschaltet und das Stromkabel aus der Steckdose
gezogen ist.
AVVISO
e 80 ppm. (Le figure della procedura generica riportate in questo documento mostrano le MFP a velocit media.)
Se la finitrice gi installata, rimuovere la finitrice prima di installare il FAX System(W).
Prima di iniziare l'installazione, spegnere la macchina e scollegare la spina dalla presa di corrente.
MFP 30/30 35/35 45/45 55/50 35 45 55

MFP 65/65 75/70 65 80 MFP
FAX System(W)
MFP 30/30 , 35/35 , 45/45 , 55/50 , 35 , 45 , 55 .

MFP 65/65 , 75/70 , 65 , 80 . MFP .
FAX System(W) .
.
MFP 30/30 35/35 45/45 55/50 35 45 55

MFP 65/65 75/70 65 80
MFP
FAX System(W)
OFF
2
3
E
2 H
Procedure 2.Install the memory DIMM (E) or the optional 3.Replace the cover (2) using the 2 screws (1).
Installing the memory DIMM memory DIMM (H) into the memory slot (3).
1.Remove 2 screws (1), and then remove the Install it with the IC side facing up.
cover (2). Insert it in the direction of the arrow until it
clicks.
Procdure 2.Installer la mmoire DIMM (E) ou la mmoire 3.Reposez le couvercle (2) l'aide des 2 vis (1).
Installation de la mmoire DIMM DIMM en option (H) dans la fente mmoire
1.Dposez les 2 vis (1) puis enlevez le couver- (3).
cle (2). L'installer avec le ct IC vers le haut.
L'insrer dans la direction de la flche
jusqu'au clic.
Procedimiento 2.Instale la memoria DIMM (E) o la memoria 3.Vuelva a colocar la cubierta (2) utilizando los
Instalacin de la memoria DIMM DIMM opcional (H) en la ranura para memo- 2 tornillos (1).
1.Quite 2 tornillos (1) y, despus, desmonte la ria (3).
cubierta (2). Instlela con la cara IC hacia arriba.
Insrtela en la direccin que indica la flecha
hasta que escuche un clic.
Vorgehensweise 2. Setzen Sie den DIMM-Speicher (E) oder den 3.Bringen Sie die Abdeckung (2) wieder mit
Installation der DIMM-Speichermodule optionalen DIMM-Speicher (H) in der Speicher- den 2 Schrauben (1) an.
1.Entfernen Sie 2 Schrauben (1) und nehmen steckplatz (3).
Sie dann die Abdeckung (2) ab. Installieren Sie die Platine mit den
Speicherbausteinen nach oben.
Schieben Sie das Modul in Pfeilrichtung, bis
es hrbar einrastet.
Procedura 2.Installare la memoria DIMM (E) oppure la 3.Ricollocare il coperchio (2) utilizzando le 2
Installazione della memoria DIMM memoria opzionale DIMM (H) nello slot viti (1).
1.Rimuovere 2 viti (1), e quindi rimuovere il memoria (3).
coperchio (2). Installarla con il lato IC rivolto verso l'alto.
Inserirla nella direzione della freccia finch
non scatta in posizione.
2. (E) H 3. 2 (1) (2)

DIMM 3
1. 2 (1) (2) IC

2. DIMM(E) DIMM(H) 3. (1) 2 (2)

DIMM (3) . .
1. (1) 2 (2) IC .
.
.
2.DIMME 3. (1)2
(2)
DIMM DIMM(H) (3)
1. (1)2 (2)
IC

3
OPT1
Removing the slot cover 5.Remove 2 screws (6) and then remove the
4.Remove the cover (4). OPT1 slot cover (5).
* For high-speed MFPs with/without the fin- * Do not use OPT2.
isher and for medium-speed MFPs with the
finisher installed.
Dpose du couvercle de la fente 5.Dposer les 2 vis (6) puis le couvercle de la

4.Dposer le couvercle (4). fente OPT1 (5).
* Pour les imprimantes multifonction * Ne pas utiliser OPT2.
grande vitesse avec/sans module de finition
et pour les imprimantes multifonction
vitesse moyenne avec le module de finition
install.
Desmontaje de la cubierta de la ranura 5.Quite 2 tornillos (6) y, despus, quite la cubi-

4.Quite la cubierta (4). erta de la ranura OPT1 (5).
*Para los MFP de velocidad alta con/sin * No utilice OPT2.
finalizador y para los MFP de velocidad
media con el finalizador instalado.
Entfernen der Einschubabdeckung 5.2 Schrauben (6) entfernen und dann die
4.Die Abdeckung (4) entfernen. Abdeckung (5) des Einschubs OPT1 ent-
* Bei schnellen MFPs mit/ohne Finisher oder fernen.
mittelschnellen MFPs mit installiertem Fin- * OPT2 nicht verrwenden.
isher.
Rimozione del coperchio vano 5.Rimuovere le 2 viti (6) e quinidi rimuovere il

4.Rimuovere il coperchio (4). coperchio (5) del vano OPT1.
* Per dispositivi MFP di fascia alta con/senza * Non utilizzare OPT2.
finisher e per dispositivi di fascia media con
finisher installato.
5. 2 (6) OPT1
4. (4) (5)
OPT2

5. (6) 2 OPT1
4. (4) . (5) .
MFP OPT2 .
MFP.
5. (6)2 OPT1
4.(4) (5)
MFP MFP OPT2

4
OPT1
7
6
A
6
Install the FAX circuit board.

6.Insert the FAX circuit board (A) along the groove in OPT1 and secure the board with two screws
(6) that have been removed in step 5.
Do not directly touch the FAX circuit board (A) terminal. Hold the top and bottom of the FAX circuit
board, or the projection of the board to insert the FAX circuit board (A).
Direct the label (7) on to the FAX circuit board (A) as indicated in the illustration and insert the
board along the groove.
Installer la carte circuits FAX.

6.Insrer la carte circuits FAX (A) le long de la rainure dans lOPT1 et la fixer laide des deux vis
(6) retires ltape 5.
Ne pas toucher directement la borne de la carte circuits FAX (A). Tenir les parties infrieure et
suprieure de la carte circuits FAX ou la saillie de la carte pour insrer la carte circuits FAX
(A).Orienter l'tiquette (7) de la carte circuits FAX (A) comme illustr et insrer la plaquette le
long de la rainure.
Instale la tarjeta de circuitos de fax.

6. Inserte la tarjeta de circuitos de fax (A) a lo largo de la ranura de OPT1 y asegrela con los dos tornillos
(6) que ha quitado en el paso 5.
No toque directamente el terminal de la tarjeta de circuitos del fax (A). Sujete las partes superior e infe-
rior de la tarjeta de circuitos de fax o la saliente de la tarjeta para insertar la tarjeta de circuitos de fax
(A).Oriente la etiqueta (7) en la tarjeta de circuitos del FAX (A) como se indica en la ilustracin e inserte
la tarjeta a lo largo de la ranura.
Installieren der FAX-Leiterplatte.

6.FAX-Leiterplatte (A) in die Nut des Einbauschachts OPT1 einsetzen und Leiterplatte mit den in
Schritt 5 ausgebauten Schrauben (6) befestigen.
Berhren Sie die Anschlsse der FAX-Platine (A) nicht mit den Fingern. Die FAX-Leiterplatte (A)
bein Einsetzen oben und unten oder an dem Vorsprung festhalten.
Die FAX-Leiterplatte (A) so in die Nut einsetzen, dass der Aufkleber (7) wie abgebildet zur
Leiterplatte zeigt.
Installare la scheda a circuiti FAX.

6.Inserire la scheda a circuiti FAX (A) lungo lincavo nellOPT1 e fissare la scheda con le due viti (6)
rimosse nelloperazione 5.
Non toccare direttamente il terminale della scheda a circuiti FAX (A). Per inserire il circuito FAX
(A), tenere lestremit superiore e la base della scheda a circuiti FAX, o la sporgenza della scheda
a circuiti FAX. Orientare l'etichetta (7) sulla scheda a circuiti FAX (A) come indicato nell'illustra-
zione e inserire la scheda lungo l'incavo.
6. OPT1 (A) 5 (6)

(A)
(A)
(A) (7)
FAX
6.OPT2 FAX (A) 5 (6) 2 .
FAX (A) .
FAX (A) .
FAX (A) (7) .
FAX
6.OPT1 FAX (A) 5 (6)2
FAX (A)
FAX (A)
FAX (A) (7)
5
B
Connect the MFP to the telephone line. For 100 V/120 V/Australian or Chinese models,
7.Plug the modular connector cable (8) into use the supplied modular connector cable (B).
the line terminal, and then connect the other
end to the telephone line.
Connecter le MFP la ligne de tlphone. Pour les modles 100 V/120 V/Australie ou
7.Brancher le cble du connecteur modulaire Chine, utilisez le cble connecteur modulaire
(8) la borne de la ligne, puis connecter (B) fourni.
l'autre extrmit la ligne de tlphone.
Conecte el MFP a la lnea telefnica. Para los modelos de 100 V/120 V/Australiano o
7.Enchufe el cable del conector modular (8) en Chino, utilice el cable conector modular (B)
el terminal de lnea y, a continuacin, suministrado.
conecte el otro extremo a la lnea telefnica.
Anschlieen des MFP an die Telefonleitung. Das mitgelieferte Modularsteckerkabel (B) fr

7.Telefonmodulkabel (8) in die Gertebuchse die 100-V/120-V/Australien- oder China-Modelle
einstecken und das Kabel an der Telefon- verwenden.
dose anschlieen.
Collegamento dellMFP alla linea del tele- Per modelli da 100 V/120 V/Australia o Cina, uti-
fono. lizzare il cavo connettore modulare (B) in dota-
7.Inserire il cavo connettore modulare (8) nel zione.
terminale della linea, e quindi collegare
l'altro terminale alla linea del telefono.
MFP 100V/120V/
7. (8) (B)

100V/120V/ /
7. (8) . (B) .

.
100V/120V/ /
7. (8) (B)

6
10
Connect the MFP to the separate phone (except for New Zealand model). If you don't connect the MFP to the separate
8.Plug the modular connector cable (9) into the telephone terminal, and then connect the other end phone, wipe the surface of the telephone termi-
to the separate phone. nal with alcohol and adhere the terminal seal (C)
upon the customer's request.
On 120 V models, be sure that it is not attached
over the top of the approval label (10).
Connecter le MFP au tlphone spar. Si le MFP nest pas connect au tlphone

8.Brancher le cble du connecteur modulaire (9) la borne du tlphone, puis connecter l'autre spar la demande du client, nettoyer la sur-
extrmit au tlphone spar. face de la borne de tlphone avec de lalcool et
apposer le joint de borne (C).
Sur les modles 120 V, attention ne pas
installer en recouvrant le haut de l'tiquette
d'approbation (10).
Conecte el MFP al telfono separado. Si no conecta el MFP a un telfono separado,

8.Enchufe el cable del conector modular (9) en el terminal del telfono y, a continuacin, conecte el limpie la superficie del terminal del telfono con
otro extremo al telfono separado. alcohol y pegue el sello del terminal (C), a solic-
itud del cliente.
En los modelos de 120 V, asegrese de que no
se fije sobre la etiqueta de aprobacin (10).
Anschlieen des MFP an das separate Telefon. Wenn der MFP nicht an das separate Telefon ange-
8.Das Telefonmodulkabel (9) in die Telefonbuchse einstecken und das andere Ende an das sepa- schlossen wird, die Oberflche der Telefonbuchse
rate Telefon anschlieen. mit Alkohol abwischen und Verschlusskappe (C)
einsetzen, falls vom Kunden gewnscht.
Bei 120-V-Modellen darauf achten, dass der
Aufkleber nicht den Genehmigungsaufkleber (10)
verdeckt.
Collegamento dellMFP al telefono separato. Nel caso in cui non si colleghi l'MFP al telefono
8.Inserire il cavo connettore modulare (9) nel terminale del telefono, e quindi collegare l'altro termi- separato, pulire la superficie del terminale del
nale al telefono separato. telefono con dell'alcol e applicare la guarnizione
terminale (C) a richiesta del cliente.
Sui modelli da 120 V, assicurarsi che essa non
venga applicata sopra letichetta di approvazi-
one (10).
MFP MFP
8. (9)
(C)
120V (10)

8. (9) TEL . . TEL
(C) .
120V (10)
.

8. (9) TEL
TEL
(C)
120V (10)

7
2
11
1
C
Seal the terminal (for New Zealand model). Wiring the modular connector cable 11.Reinstall the covers (11).
9.Wipe the surface of the telephone terminal (High-speed MFPs only)
with alcohol and adhere the terminal seal 10.Remove the covers (11) and run the modular 12.Install the cover (4) which was removed in
(C). connector cable as shown in the figure. step 4.
Perform this procedure for New Zealand * For high-speed MFPs with/without the fin-
model only. isher and for medium-speed MFPs with the
finisher installed.
Fermer hermtiquement la borne Cblage du cble connecteur modulaire 11.Reposer les couvercles (11).
(modle pour la Nouvelle-Zlande). (MFP grande vitesse uniquement)
9.Cette tape est superflue. 10.Dposer les couvercles (11) et implanter le 12. Installer le cache (4) qui a t retir l'tape 4.
cble connecteur modulaire comme illustr * Pour les imprimantes multifonction grande
par la figure. vitesse avec/sans module de finition et pour les
imprimantes multifonction vitesse moyenne
avec le module de finition install.
Selle el terminal Tendido del cable conector modular 11.Vuelva a instalar las cubiertas (11).
(para el modelo Nuevo Zelands). (Solo para las MFP de alta velocidad)
9.Este paso no es necesario. 10.Quite las cubiertas (11) y tienda el cable 12.Instale la cubierta (4) que se quit en el paso
conector modular como se muestra en la 4.
ilustracin. * Para los MFP de velocidad alta con/sin
finalizador y para los MFP de velocidad
media con el finalizador instalado.
Versiegeln der Anschlussbuchse Verlegung des Modularsteckerkabels 11.Die Abdeckungen (11) wieder anbringen.
(fr Neuseeland-Modell). (Nur MFP der Hochleistungsklasse)
9.Dieser Schritt ist nicht erforderlich. 10.Die Abdeckungen (11) entfernen und das 12.Installieren Sie die Abdeckung (4), die in
Modularsteckerkabel gem der Abbildung Schritt 4 entfernt wurde.
verlegen. * Bei schnellen MFPs mit/ohne Finisher
oder mittelschnellen MFPs mit installier-
tem Finisher.
Sigillare il terminale Cablaggio del cavo connettore modulare 11.Reinstallare i coperchi (11).
(per il modello Nuova Zelanda). (Solo per MFP a velocit alta)
9.Questo passo non richiesto. 10.Rimuovere i coperchi (11) e far passare il 12.Installare il coperchio (4) rimosso al punto 4.
cavo connettore modulare come indicato * Per dispositivi MFP di fascia alta con/senza
nella figura. finisher e per dispositivi di fascia media con
finisher installato.
( ) MFP 11.11
9. 10.11
12. 4 4

( ) MFP 11.11 .
9. . 10.11
. 12.4 (4) .
MFP
MFP.
( MFP 11.
11
) 10.
11
9. 12. 4 4

MFP MFP

8
15
13
12
12
14
Attach the alphabet labels (excluding 100 V models). 14.Remove the clear panel (15).
13.Insert a flat-head screwdriver at the tip indicated by the arrows (12) as shown on the left, and
slide the operation panel covers (13) (14) to remove them.
Apposer les tiquettes de lalphabet (Sauf sur les modles 100 V). 14.Dposer le panneau transparent (15).
13.Insrer un tournevis lame l'endroit repr par les flches (12) comme illustr ci-contre
gauche et faire glisser les couvercles du panneau de commande (13) (14) pour les dposer.
Fije las etiquetas de alfabeto (a excepcin de los modelos de 100 V). 14.Quite el panel transparente (15).
13.Inserte un destornillador de pala plana en la punta que indican las flechas (12) como se muestra
a la izquierda y deslice las cubiertas del panel de trabajo (13) (14) para quitarlas.
Anbringen der Alphabetaufkleber (ausgenommen 100-V-Modelle). 14.Die durchsichtige Platte (15) entfernen.
13.Einen flachen Schraubendreher an der links mit Pfeilen (12) bezeichneten Spitze einschieben
und die Bedienfeldabdeckungen (13) (14) verschieben, um sie dann abzunehmen.
Applicare le etichette alfabetiche (esclusi i modelli da 100 V). 14.Rimuovere il pannello trasparente (15).
13.Inserire un cacciavite a testa piana nel punto indicato dalla freccia (12) come mostrato sulla sinis-
tra, e slittare i coperchi (13) (14) del pannello operativo per rimuoverli.
(100V ) 14.15
13.121314
(100V ) 14. 15 .
13. 12 1314
.
(100V ) 14.
13.
9
16 D
16
15.Remove the operation panel sheet (16). 16.Wipe the area above the numeric keys on the operation panel sheet (16) with alcohol and attach
the alphabet labels (D).
In Asia and Oceania, use PQRS TUV WXYZ label, and do not use PRS TUV WXY and OPER
labels.
15.Dposer la tle du panneau de commande 16.Nettoyer l'alcool la surface au-dessus des touches numriques sur la tle du panneau de com-
(16). mande (16) et apposer les tiquettes alphabtiques (D).
En Asie et Ocanie, utiliser ltiquette PQRS TUV WXYZ et pas les tiquettes PRS TUV WXY et
OPER.
15.Quite la hoja del panel de trabajo (16). 16.Limpie el rea sobre las teclas numricas de la hoja del panel de trabajo (16) con alcohol y fije
las etiquetas de alfabeto (D).
En Asia y Oceana, utilice la etiqueta PQRS TUV WXYZ y no use las PRS TUV WXY ni las
OPER.
15.Die Bedienfeldfolie (16) entfernen. 16.Den Bereich ber den Zifferntasten an der Bedienfeldfolie (16) mit Alkohol abwischen und die
Alphabetaufkleber (D) hier anbringen.
In Asien und Ozeanien den Aufkleber PQRS TUV WXYZ verwenden; nicht die Aufkleber PRS
TUV WXY und OPER verwenden.
15.Rimuovere il foglio (16) del pannello opera- 16.Pulire larea sopra i tasti numerici sul foglio del pannello operativo (16) con alcool ed applicare le
tivo. etichette alfabetiche (D).
In Asia ed Oceania, utilizzare letichetta PQRS TUV WXYZ e non utilizzare le etichette PRS TUV
WXY e OPER.
15.16 16.16 (D)

PQRS TUV WXYZ PRS TUV WXY OPER
15.16 . 16.16 (D) .

PRS TUV WXY OPER PQRS TUV
WXYZ .
15. 16.
10
16 15 13
14
17.Attach the operation panel sheet (16). 18.Reinstall the clear panel (15). 19.Reinstall the operation panel covers (13)
(14).
17.Fixer la tle du panneau de commande (16). 18.Reposer le panneau transparent (15). 19.Reposer les couvercles du panneau de com-
mande (13) (14).
17.Fije la hoja del panel de trabajo (16). 18.Vuelva a instalar el panel transparente (15). 19.Vuelva a instalar las cubiertas del panel de
trabajo (13) (14).
17.Die Bedienfeldfolie (16) anbringen. 18.Die durchsichtige Platte (15) wieder anbrin- 19.Die Bedienfeldabdeckungen (13) (14) wie-
gen. der anbringen.
17.Applicare il foglio del pannello operativo 18.Reinstallare il pannello trasparente (15). 19.Reinstallare i coperchi (13) (14) del pannello
(16). operativo.
17.16 18.15 19.1314
17.16 . 18.15 . 19. 1314 .
17. 18. 19.
11
For Australian model
For New Zealand model
F G
Attach the PTT label (for China, 110 V models only). Attach the approval label (for Australian/New Zealand model only).
20.Attach the PTT label (F) after wiping with alcohol. 21.Attach the approval label (G) after wiping with alcohol.
Perform this procedure for Australian/New Zealand model only.
Fixer ltiquette dapprobation (pour la Chine, modles 110 V seule- Fixer ltiquette dapprobation (modle pour lAustralie/Nouvelle-
ment). Zlande seulement).
20.Cette tape est superflue. 21.Cette tape est superflue.
Coloque la etiqueta de aprobacin (para China, solo para los mode- Coloque la etiqueta de aprobacin (slo para los modelos Austra-
los de 110 V). liano/Nuevo Zelands)
20.Este paso no es necesario. 21.Este paso no es necesario
Den Genehmigungsaufkleber anbringen (fr China nur 110-V-Mod- Den Genehmigungsaufkleber anbringen (nur fr Australien/Neusee-
elle). land-Modell).
20.Dieser Schritt ist nicht erforderlich. 21.Dieser Schritt ist nicht erforderlich.
Applicare letichetta di approvazione (per Cina, solo per i modelli da Applicare letichetta di approvazione (solo per il modello Australia/
110 V). Nuova Zelanda).
20.Questo passo non richiesto. 21.Questo passo non richiesto.
( 110V ) ( / )
20. (F) 21.
( , 110V ) ( / )
20. . 21. .
(
110V ) ( / )
20. 21.
12
Initialize the FAX circuit board.
1.Plug the MFP into a power outlet, and turn on the main power.
2.Perform the maintenance mode U600 to initialize the FAX PWBs
Initialiser la carte circuits FAX.

1.Brancher le MFP sur une prise dalimentation et le mettre sous tension.
2.Excuter le mode maintenance U600 pour initialiser les cartes de cir-
cuit imprim du fax .
Inicialice la tarjeta de circuitos FAX.

1.Conecte el MFP a un receptculo de pared y encienda el interruptor
principal.
2.Ejecute el modo de mantenimiento U600 para inicializar los FAX PWB.
Initialisieren der FAX-Leiterplatte.

1.Netzstecker des MFP in eine Steckdose stecken und Hauptschalter
einschalten.
2.Fhren Sie den Wartungsmodus U600 aus, um die FAX-Karte zu ini-
tialisieren.
Inizializzare la scheda a circuiti FAX.

1.Collegare lMFP ad una presa di corrente e portare linterruttore princi-
pale su On.
2.Eseguire il modo manutenzione U600 per inizializzare le schede PWB
FAX.
1. MFP
2. U600
FAX
1.MFP ON
.
2. U600 FAX .
FAX
1.MFP ON

2. U600
FAX
13
A E
C
B H
When installing the multiport on a machine (A) which has the 'Home' key in the operation panel
B. Modular connector cable E. Memory DIMM (16 MB) ............................. 1 (D), (E), (F), (G) and (H) are not used.
(120 V/Australian model only) F. PTT label (110V model only) ..................... 1
PJJWC0016Z (UL Listed.HUAN HSIN G. Approval label Be sure to remove any tape and/or cushioning
Type TL:120 V only) .................................. 1 (Australian/New Zealand models only) ...... 2 materials from the parts supplied.
Lors de l'installation du port multiple sur une machine (A) disposant de la touche 'Accueil' sur le panneau de commande
Pices fournies E. Mmoire DIMM (16 MB) ............................ 1 Veillez retirer les morceaux de bande adh-
A. Carte circuits FAX ................................... 1 Option sive et/ou les matriaux de rembourrage des
B. Cble du connecteur modulaire (modles H. Mmoire DIMM (128 MB) .......................... 1 pices fournies.
pour lAustralie/120 V seulement).............. 1
C. Joint de borne............................................ 1 (F) et (G) ne sont pas fournis.
D. Etiquette de lalphabet ............................... 1 (D), (E) et (H) ne sont pas utiliss.
Al instalar un puerto mltiple en una mquina (A) que dispone de la tecla 'Inicio' en el panel de controles
A. Tarjeta de circuitos de fax .......................... 1 Opcin rial amortiguador de las partes suministradas.
B. Cable conector modular (slo para H. Memoria DIMM (128 MB) .......................... 1
modelos de 120 V/Australianos)................ 1
C. Sello del terminal ....................................... 1 (F) y (G) no se suministran.
D. Etiqueta de alfabeto................................... 1 (D), (E) y (H) no se utilizan.
Bei Installation einer zweiten Leitung in einem Gert (A), das ber die Taste 'Startseite' im Bedienfeld verfgt
Enthaltene Teile Option Stellen Sie sicher, dass smtliche Klebebnder
A. FAX-Leiterplatte......................................... 1 H. Speicher-DIMM (128 MB) .......................... 1 und/oder Polstermaterial von den gelieferten
C. Verschlusskappe ....................................... 1 Teilen entfernt wurden.
E. Speicher-DIMM (16 MB) ............................ 1 (B), (F) und (G) liegen nicht bei.
(D), (E) und (H) werden nicht bentigt.
Per l'installazione di una porta multipla su una macchina (A) dotata di tasto 'Home' sul pannello comandi
E. Memoria DIMM (16 MB) ............................ 1 (B), (F) e (G) non sono in dotazione.
(D), (E) e (H) non sono utilizzati.
' ' (A)

F. .............................1 (D), (E), (H)
A. ........................... 1
B. ............................... 1
C. ............................. 1 H. DIMM (128MB) .................1
D. ......................... 1
E. DIMM (16MB) ................. 1 (G)
' ' (A)
,
A. FAX ........................................... 1 H. DIMM128MB........................ 1 .
C. ............................................... 1
D. ........................................ 1
E. DIMM16MB......................... 1 B,F,(G) .
D,E,(H) .
(A)

A. FAX ............................. 1 H. DIMM128MB..................1
B. ..................... 1
C. ........................... 1
E. DIMM16MB................... 1 (D),(F),(G)

(E),(H)
14
NOTICE
machines.
(The generic procedure figures in this document show medium-speed MFPs.)
REMARQUE
chromes 65 et 80 ppm. (Dans ce document, les chiffres des processus gnriques renvoient aux MPF vitesse moyenne.)
AVISO
Las referencias a las MFP de velocidad media de este documento corresponden a las mquinas a color de 30/30, 35/35, 45/45 y 55/50 ppm y a las mquinas
monocromticas de 35, 45 y 55 ppm.
Las referencias a las MFP de alta velocidad de este documento corresponden a las mquinas a color de 65/65 y 75/70 ppm y a las mquinas monocromticas de
65 y 80 ppm. (Las ilustraciones de procedimientos genricos de este documento muestran las MFP de velocidad media.)
Antes de iniciar la instalacin, asegrese de apagar el interruptor de encendido de la mquina y desenchufar el cable de alimentacin de la toma de pared.
ANMERKUNG
Angaben fr MFP der mittleren Leistungsklasse in dieser Anleitung gelten fr die 30/30, 35/35, 45/45 und 55/50 ppm Vollfarbenkopierer sowie fr die 35, 45 und 55
ppm Monochrommaschinen.
Angaben fr MFP der Hochleistungsklasse in dieser Anleitung gelten fr die 65/65 und 75/70 ppm Vollfarbenkopierer sowie fr die 65 und 80 ppm Monochrommas-
chinen. (Die Abbildungen der allgemeinen Prozeduren zeigen MFP der mittleren Leistungsklasse.)
Bevor Sie mit der Installation beginnen berzeugen Sie sich, dass der Netzschalter des Gerts ausgeschaltet und das Stromkabel aus der Steckdose gezogen ist.
AVVISO
e 80 ppm. (Le figure della procedura generica riportate in questo documento mostrano le MFP a velocit media.)
MFP 30/30 35/35 45/45 55/50 35 45 55

MFP 65/65 75/70 65 80 MFP
FAX System(W)
MFP 30/30 , 35/35 , 45/45 , 55/50 , 35 , 45 , 55 .

MFP 65/65 , 75/70 , 65 , 80 . MFP .
FAX System(W) .
.
MFP 30/30 35/35 45/45 55/50 35 45 55

MFP 65/65 75/70 65 80
MFP
FAX System(W)
OFF
15
5
4 6
OPT2
Procedure 2.Remove 2 screws (6) and then remove the

Removing the slot cover OPT2 slot cover (5).
1.Remove the cover (4).
* For high-speed MFPs with/without the finisher and for medium-speed MFPs with the finisher
installed.
* This work is not required if a multiport is installed along with the fax system (OPT1).
Procdure 2.Dposer les 2 vis (6) puis le couvercle de la

Dpose du couvercle de la fente fente OPT2 (5).
1.Dposer le couvercle (4).
* Pour les imprimantes multifonction grande vitesse avec/sans module de finition et pour les
imprimantes multifonction vitesse moyenne avec le module de finition install.
* Cette opration n'est pas ncessaire si un port multiple est install avec le fax (OPT1).
Procedimiento 2.Quite 2 tornillos (6) y, despus, quite la cubi-

Desmontaje de la cubierta de la ranura erta de la ranura OPT2 (5).
1.Quite la cubierta (4).
* Para los MFP de velocidad alta con/sin finalizador y para los MFP de velocidad media con el
finalizador instalado.
* Esto no es necesario realizarlo si hay instalado un puerto mltiple con el sistema de fax (OPT1).
Vorgehensweise 2.2 Schrauben (6) entfernen und dann die

Entfernen der Einschubabdeckung Abdeckung (5) des Einschubs OPT2 ent-
1.Die Abdeckung (4) entfernen. fernen.
* Bei schnellen MFPs mit/ohne Finisher oder mittelschnellen MFPs mit installiertem Finisher.
*Dies ist nicht ntig, wenn eine zweite Leitung zusammen mit dem FAX-System (OPT1) installiert
ist.
Procedura 2.Rimuovere le 2 viti (6) e quinidi rimuovere il

Rimozione del coperchio vano coperchio (5) del vano OPT2.
1.Rimuovere il coperchio (4).
* Per dispositivi MFP di fascia alta con/senza finisher e per dispositivi di fascia media con finisher
installato.
* Questa operazione non richiesta quando con il modulo fax (OPT1) viene installata una porta
multipla.
2. 2 (6) OPT2
(5)
1. (4)

OPT1)
2. (6) 2 OPT2
(5) .
1. (4) .
MFP MFP.
(OPT1)
.
2. (6)2 OPT2
(5)
1.(4)
MFP MFP
(OPT1)
16
OPT2
6
7
A
6

3.Insert the FAX circuit board (A) along the groove in OPT2 and secure the board with two screws (6) that have been removed in step 2.
Do not directly touch the FAX circuit board (A) terminal.
Hold the top and bottom of the FAX circuit board, or the projection of the board to insert the FAX circuit board (A).
Direct the label (7) on to the FAX circuit board (A) toward left side and insert the board along the groove.

3.Insrer la carte circuits FAX (A) le long de la rainure dans lOPT2 et la fixer laide des deux vis (6) retires ltape 2.
Ne pas toucher directement la borne de la carte circuits FAX (A).
Tenir les parties infrieure et suprieure de la carte circuits FAX ou la saillie de la carte pour insrer la carte circuits FAX (A).
Orienter l'tiquette (7) de la carte circuits FAX (A) comme illustr et insrer la plaquette le long de la rainure.
Instale la tarjeta de circuitos de FAX.

3.Inserte la tarjeta de circuitos de fax (A) a lo largo de la ranura de OPT2 y asegrela con los dos tornillos (6) que ha quitado en el paso 2.
No toque directamente el terminal de la tarjeta de circuitos del FAX (A).
Sujete las partes superior e inferior de la tarjeta de circuitos de FAX o la saliente de la tarjeta para insertar la tarjeta de circuitos de FAX (A).
Oriente la etiqueta (7) en la tarjeta de circuitos del FAX (A) como se indica en la ilustracin e inserte la tarjeta a lo largo de la ranura.

3.FAX-Leiterplatte (A) in die Nut des Einbauschachts OPT2 einsetzen und Leiterplatte mit den in Schritt 2 ausgebauten Schrauben (6) befestigen.
Berhren Sie die Anschlsse der FAX-Platine (A) nicht mit den Fingern.
Die FAX-Leiterplatte (A) bein Einsetzen oben und unten oder an dem Vorsprung festhalten.
Die FAX-Leiterplatte (A) so in die Nut einsetzen, dass der Aufkleber (7) wie abgebildet zur Leiterplatte zeigt.

3.Inserire la scheda a circuiti FAX (A) lungo lincavo nellOPT2 e fissare la scheda con le due viti (6) rimosse nelloperazione 2.
Non toccare direttamente il terminale della scheda a circuiti FAX (A),
Per inserire il circuito FAX (A), tenere lestremit superiore e la base della scheda a circuiti FAX, o la sporgenza della scheda a circuiti FAX.
Orientare l'etichetta (7) sulla scheda a circuiti FAX (A) come indicato nell'illustrazione e inserire la scheda lungo l'incavo.
3. OPT2 (A) 2 (6)

(A)
(A)
(A) (7)
FAX
3.OPT2 FAX (A) 2 (6) 2 .
FAX (A) .
FAX (A) .
FAX (A) (7) .
FAX
3.OPT2 FAX (A) 2 (6)2
FAX (A)
FAX (A)
FAX (A) (7)
17
10
C
C
C C
Seal the terminal. On 120 V models, be sure that it is not attached

4.Wipe the surface of the telephone terminal with alcohol and adhere the terminal seal (C). over the top of the approval label (10).
The telephone terminal on the FAX circuit board installed to OPT2 is unavailable (invalid). Seal
the terminal securely to prevent a user from connecting a separate phone.
Fermer hermtiquement la borne. Sur les modles 120 V, attention ne pas

4.Nettoyer la surface de la borne de tlphone avec de lalcool, et apposer le joint de borne (C). installer en recouvrant le haut de l'tiquette
La borne de tlphone de la carte circuits FAX installe sur lOPT2 nest pas utilisable d'approbation (10).
(invalide). Fermer hermtiquement la borne pour empcher tout utilisateur de connecter un tl-
phone spar.
Selle el terminal. En los modelos de 120 V, asegrese de que no

4.Limpie la superficie del terminal de telfono con alcohol y pegue el sello de terminal (C). se fije sobre la etiqueta de aprobacin (10).
El terminal de telfono de la tarjeta de circuitos de FAX instalado en el OPT2 no est disponible
(invlido). Selle firmemente el terminal para evitar que un usuario conecte un telfono por sepa-
rado.
Versiegeln der Anschlussbuchse. Bei 120-V-Modellen darauf achten, dass der

4.Die Oberflche der Telefonanschlussbuchse mit Alkohol abwischen und die Verschlusskappe (C) Aufkleber nicht den Genehmigungsaufkleber
anbringen. (10) verdeckt.
Die Telefonanschlussbuchse der in OPT2 installierten FAX-Leiterplatte ist nicht verfgbar (ungl-
tig). Die Anschlussbuchse vollkommen versiegeln, um den Anschluss eines separaten Telefons
zu verhindern.
Sigillare il terminale. Sui modelli da 120 V, assicurarsi che essa non

4.Pulire la superficie del terminale del telefono con alcol e fare aderire la guarnizione terminale (C). venga applicata sopra letichetta di approvazi-
Il terminale del telefono sulla scheda a circuiti FAX installata su OPT2 non disponibile (invalido). one (10).
Sigillare il terminale saldamente per prevenire a un utente di collegare un telefono separato.
120V (10)
4. (C)
OPT2 ( )

120V (10)
4.TEL (C) . .
OPT2 FAX TEL .
.
120V 10

4.TEL (C)
OPT2 FAX TEL

18
B
17
Connect the MFP to the telephone line.

5.Plug the modular connector cable (17) into the line terminal, and then connect the other end to
the telephone line.
For 100 V/120 V/Australian or Chinese models, use the supplied modular connector cable (B).
Connecter le MFP la ligne de tlphone.

5.Brancher le cble du connecteur modulaire (17) la borne de la ligne, puis connecter l'autre
extrmit la ligne de tlphone.
Pour les modles 100 V/120 V/Australie ou Chine, utilisez le cble connecteur modulaire (B)
fourni.
Conecte el MFP a la lnea telefnica.

5.Enchufe el cable del conector modular (17) en el terminal de lnea y, a continuacin, conecte el
otro extremo a la lnea telefnica.
Para los modelos de 100 V/120 V/Australiano o Chino, utilice el cable conector modular (B)
suministrado.
Anschlieen des MFP an die Telefonleitung.

5.Telefonmodulkabel (17) in die Gertebuchse einstecken und das Kabel an der Telefondose
anschlieen.
Das mitgelieferte Modularsteckerkabel (B) fr die 100-V/120-V/Australien- oder China-Modelle
verwenden.
Collegamento dellMFP alla linea del telefono.

5.Inserire il cavo connettore modulare (17) nel terminale della linea, e quindi collegare l'altro termi-
nale alla linea del telefono.
Per modelli da 100 V/120 V/Australia o Cina, utilizzare il cavo connettore modulare (B) in dota-
zione.
MFP
5. (17)
100V/120V/ (B)

5. (17) . .
100V/120V/ / (B) .
5. (17)
100V/120V/ / (B)
19
11 2
Wiring the modular connector cable 7.Reinstall the covers (11).

(High-speed MFPs only)
6.Remove the covers (11) and run the modular 8.Install the cover (4) which was removed in
connector cable as shown in the figure. step 1.
*Run it by binding with the modular cords * For high-speed MFPs with/without the fin-
from the Fax System (OPT1). isher and for medium-speed MFPs with the
finisher installed.
Cblage du cble connecteur modulaire 7.Reposer les couvercles (11).

(MFP grande vitesse uniquement)
6.Dposer les couvercles (11) et implanter le 8. Installer le cache (4) qui a t retir l'tape 1.
cble connecteur modulaire comme illustr * Pour les imprimantes multifonction grande
par la figure. vitesse avec/sans module de finition et pour les
*Le faire passer avec les cordons modulai- imprimantes multifonction vitesse moyenne
res du fax (OPT1). avec le module de finition install.
Tendido del cable conector modular 7.Vuelva a instalar las cubiertas (11).
(Solo para las MFP de alta velocidad)
6.Quite las cubiertas (11) y tienda el cable 8.Instale la cubierta (4) que se quit en el paso
conector modular como se muestra en la 1.
ilustracin. * Para los MFP de velocidad alta con/sin
* Tindalo unindolo con los cables modula- finalizador y para los MFP de velocidad
res del sistema de fax (OPT1). media con el finalizador instalado.
Verlegung des Modularsteckerkabels 7.Die Abdeckungen (11) wieder anbringen.

(Nur MFP der Hochleistungsklasse)
6.Die Abdeckungen (11) entfernen und das 8.Installieren Sie die Abdeckung (4), die in
Modularsteckerkabel gem der Abbildung Schritt 1 entfernt wurde.
verlegen. * Bei schnellen MFPs mit/ohne Finisher oder
*Fhren Sie es zusammen mit dem Kabel mittelschnellen MFPs mit installiertem Fin-
des FAX-Systems (OPT1). isher.
Cablaggio del cavo connettore modulare 7.Reinstallare i coperchi (11).

(Solo per MFP a velocit alta)
6.Rimuovere i coperchi (11) e far passare il 8.Installare il coperchio (4) rimosso al punto 1.
cavo connettore modulare come indicato * Per dispositivi MFP di fascia alta con/senza
nella figura. finisher e per dispositivi di fascia media con
*Infilarlo collegandolo ai cavi modulari del finisher installato.
modulo fax (OPT1).
MFP 7.11
6.11
OPT1) 8. 1 4

MFP 7.11 .
6.11
. 8.1 (4) .
(OPT1) MFP
. MFP.
MFP 7.
11
6.11
8. 1 4
(OPT1)
MFP MFP

20
Initialize the FAX circuit board. 3. If the FAX circuit board has been added to OPT2 (to initialize the FAX circuit
1.Plug the MFP into a power outlet, and turn on the main power. board in OPT2)
2.If the FAX PWBs were installed simultaneously to OPT1 and OPT2 (all Initialize OPT2 by pressing [PORT2], and the Start key in this order in the
maintenance mode U698 and executing the maintenance mode U600. If
Fax PWBs are initialized), perform the maintenance mode U600 to ini-
[ALL] is selected in U698, both OPT1 and OPT2 are initialized.
tialize the FAX PWBs. For details, see the service manual.
Initialiser la carte circuits FAX. 3. Si la carte circuits FAX a t ajoute lOPT2 (pour initialiser la carte circuits
1.Brancher le MFP sur une prise dalimentation et le mettre sous tension. FAX dans lOPT2)
2.Si les cartes de circuit imprim du fax ont t installes en mme Initialiser lOPT2 en appuyant sur [PORT2] et la touche Dpart dans cet ordre en
temps que OPT1 et OPT2 (toutes les cartes de circuit imprim du fax mode de maintenance U698, et excuter le mode de maintenance U600. Si [ALL]
est slectionn dans U698, lOPT1 et lOPT2 sont tous deux initialiss. Pour plus
sont initialises), excuter le mode maintenance U600 pour initialiser
de dtails, se reporter au manuel dentretien.
les cartes de circuit imprim du fax.
Inicialice la tarjeta de circuitos FAX. 3. Si la tarjeta de circuitos de FAX se agreg a OPT2 (para inicializar la tarjeta
1.Conecte el MFP a un receptculo de pared y encienda el interruptor de circuitos de FAX en OPT2)
principal. Inicialice el OPT2 presionando [PORT2] y la tecla de Inicio en ese orden en el
modo de mantenimiento U698 y ejecutando el modo de mantenimiento U600.
2.Si se instalaron FAX PWB simultneamente a OPT1 y OPT2 (se ini- Si se selecciona [ALL] en U698, se inicializan ambos OPT1 y OPT2. Para
cializan todos los FAX PWB), ejecute el modo de mantenimiento U600 ms detalles, lea el manual de servicio.
para inicializar los FAX PWB.
Initialisieren der FAX-Leiterplatte. 3. Wenn die FAX-Leiterplatte zu OPT2 hinzugefgt worden ist (um die FAX-Leit-
1.Netzstecker des MFP in eine Steckdose stecken und Hauptschalter erplatte in OPT2 zu in7itialisieren)
einschalten. OPT2 initialisieren. Dazu [PORT2] und die Start-Taste im
Wartungsmodus U698 in dieser Reihenfolge drcken und den
2.Falls die FAX-Karten gleichzeitig in OPT1 und OPT2 installiert werden Wartungsmodus U600 ausfhren. Wenn [ALL] in U698 gewhlt wird, werden
(alle FAX-Karten werden initialisiert), fhren Sie den Wartungsmodus OPT1 und OPT2 initialisiert. Weitere Einzelheiten siehe Wartungsanleitung.
U600 aus, um die FAX-Karten zu initialisieren.
Inizializzare la scheda a circuiti FAX. 3. Se la scheda a circuiti stata aggiunta allOPT2 (per inzializzare la scheda
1.Collegare lMFP ad una presa di corrente e portare linterruttore princi- a circuiti FAX nellOPT2)
pale su On. Inizializzare OPT2 premendo [PORT2] e il tasto Avvio in questo ordine nel
2.Se sono state installate simultaneamente le schede FAX PWB su modo di manutenzione U698 ed eseguendo il modo di manutenzione U600.
OPT1 e OPT2 (tutte le schede FAX PWB sono inizializzate), eseguire Se viene selezionato [ALL] nel modo U698, entrambi OPT1 e OPT2 sono
il modo manutenzione U600 per inizializzare le schede FAX PWB. inizializzati. Per ulteriori dettagli leggere il manuale distruzioni.
3. OPT2
1. MFP (OPT2 )
2. OPT1 OPT2 OPT2 U698
U600 PORT2 U600
U698 ALL OPT1 OPT2

FAX 3. OPT2 (OPT2 FAX )

1.MFP ON U698 PORT2, .
. U600 FAX .
2.OPT1 OPT2 FAX ( FAX U698 ALL OPT1 OPT2
.
), U600 FAX
.
.
FAX 3.OPT2 (OPT2 FAX )

1.MFP ON U698 PORT2
U600 FAX
) U600 FAX
21
A E
C
B H
When installing the Fax system on a machine (B) which has the 'Accessibility Display' key in the operation panel
B. Modular connector cable E. Memory DIMM (16 MB) ............................. 1
(120 V/Australian model only) F. PTT label (110V model only) ..................... 1 Be sure to remove any tape and/or cushioning
PJJWC0016Z (UL Listed.HUAN HSIN G. Approval label materials from the parts supplied.
Type TL:120 V only) .................................. 1 (Australian/New Zealand models only) ...... 2
Lors de l'installation du fax sur une machine (B) disposant de la touche 'Affich. accessibilit' sur le panneau de commande
Pices fournies E. Mmoire DIMM (16 MB) ............................ 1 Veillez retirer les morceaux de bande
A. Carte circuits FAX ................................... 1 adhsive et/ou les matriaux de rembourrage
B. Cble du connecteur modulaire (modles Option des pices fournies.
pour lAustralie/120 V seulement).............. 1 H. Mmoire DIMM (128 MB) .......................... 1
C. Joint de borne............................................ 1
Al instalar el sistema de fax en una mquina (B) que dispone de la tecla 'Pantalla acceso' en el panel de controles
A. Tarjeta de circuitos de fax .......................... 1 rial amortiguador de las partes suministradas.
B. Cable conector modular (slo para Opcin
modelos de 120 V/Australianos)................ 1 H. Memoria DIMM (128 MB) .......................... 1
Bei Installation des FAX-Systems in einem Gert (B), das ber die Taste 'Zugriffsanzeige' im Bedienfeld verfgt
Enthaltene Teile Option Stellen Sie sicher, dass smtliche Klebebnder
A. FAX-Leiterplatte......................................... 1 H. Speicher-DIMM (128 MB) .......................... 1 und/oder Polstermaterial von den gelieferten
C. Verschlusskappe ....................................... 1 Teilen entfernt wurden.
E. Speicher-DIMM (16 MB) ............................ 1
(B), (F) und (G) liegen nicht bei.
Per l'installazione del modulo FAX su una macchina (B) dotata di tasto 'Visual. Accessibilit' sul pannello comandi
Parti fornite Opzioni Rimuovere tutti i nastri adesivi e/o i materiali di
A. Scheda a circuiti FAX ................................ 1 H. Memoria DIMM (128 MB) .......................... 1 protezione dalle parti fornite.
C. Guarnizione terminale ............................... 1
E. Memoria DIMM (16 MB) ............................ 1
(B), (F) e (G) non sono in dotazione.
' ' (B)

F. .............................1
A. ........................... 1
B. ............................... 1
C. ............................. 1 H. DIMM (128MB) .................1
D. ......................... 1
E. DIMM (16MB) ................. 1 (G)
' ' (B)
,
A. FAX ........................................... 1 H. DIMM128MB........................ 1 .
C. ............................................... 1
D. ........................................ 1
E. DIMM16MB......................... 1
B,F,(G) .
(B)

A. FAX ............................. 1 H. DIMM128MB..................1

B. ..................... 1
C. ........................... 1
E. DIMM16MB................... 1
(D),(F),(G)

22
NOTICE
REMARQUE
AVISO
ANMERKUNG
AVVISO
FAX System(W)
FAX System(W) .
.
FAX System(W)
OFF

23
3
2 3
1 E H
Procedure 2.Install the memory DIMM (E) or the optional 3.Replace the cover (2) using the 2 screws (1).
Installing the memory DIMM memory DIMM (H) into the memory slot (3)
1.Remove 2 screws (1), and then remove the on the lower level (FLS).
cover (2). Install it with the IC side facing down.
Insert it in the direction of the arrow until it
clicks.
Procdure 2.Installer la mmoire DIMM (E) ou la mmoire 3.Reposez le couvercle (2) l'aide des 2 vis (1).
Installation de la mmoire DIMM DIMM en option (H) dans la fente mmoire
1.Dposez les 2 vis (1) puis enlevez le couver- (3) se trouvant au niveau infrieur (FLS).
cle (2). L'installer avec le ct IC en bas.
L'insrer dans la direction de la flche
jusqu'au clic.
Procedimiento 2.Instale la memoria DIMM (E), o la memoria 3. Vuelva a colocar la cubierta (2) utilizando los 2
Instalacin de la memoria DIMM DIMM opcional (H), en la ranura para memo- tornillos (1).
1.Quite 2 tornillos (1) y, despus, desmonte la ria (3) en el nivel inferior (FLS).
cubierta (2). Instlelo con el lado IC hacia abajo.
Insrtela en la direccin que indica la flecha
hasta que escuche un clic.
Vorgehensweise 2. Setzen Sie das DIMM-Speichermodul (E) oder 3. Bringen Sie die Abdeckung (2) wieder mit den 2
Installation der DIMM-Speichermodule das optionale DIMM-Speichermodul (H) in die Schrauben (1) an.
1.Entfernen Sie 2 Schrauben (1) und nehmen untere Position (FLS) der Speicherbank (3) ein.
Sie dann die Abdeckung (2) ab. Mit der IC-Seite nach unten weisend install-
ieren.
Schieben Sie das Modul in Pfeilrichtung, bis
es hrbar einrastet.
Procedura 2.Installare la memoria DIMM (E) o la memoria 3. Ricollocare il coperchio (2) utilizzando le 2 viti (1).
Installazione della memoria DIMM DIMM opzionale (H) nello slot della memoria
1.Rimuovere 2 viti (1), e quindi rimuovere il (3) al livello inferiore (FLS).
coperchio (2). Installare con il lato IC rivolto verso il basso.
Inserirla nella direzione della freccia finch
non scatta in posizione.
2. DIMM (E) 3. 2 (1) (2)

DIMM DIMM (H) (FLS) (3)
1. 2 (1) (2) IC

2. DIMME DIMM(H) 3. (1) 2 (2)

DIMM (FLS) (3) .
1. (1) 2 (2) .
. IC .

.
2.DIMME 3. (1)2
(2)
DIMM DIMM(H) (FLS)
1. (1)2 (2) (3)
IC

24
OPT1
Removing the slot cover

4.Remove 2 screws (5) and then remove the OPT1 slot cover (4).
* Do not use OPT2.
Dpose du couvercle de la fente

4.Dposer les 2 vis (5) puis le couvercle de la fente OPT1 (4).
* Ne pas utiliser OPT2.
Desmontaje de la cubierta de la ranura

4.Quite 2 tornillos (5) y, despus, quite la cubierta de la ranura OPT1 (4).
* No utilice OPT2.
Entfernen der Einschubabdeckung

4. 2 Schrauben (5) entfernen und dann die Abdeckung (4) des Einschubs OPT1 entfernen.
* OPT2 nicht verrwenden.
Rimozione del coperchio vano

4.Rimuovere le 2 viti (5) e quinidi rimuovere il coperchio (4) del vano OPT1.
* Non utilizzare OPT2.
4. 2 (5) OPT1 (4)

OPT2

4. (5) 2 OPT1 (4) .
OPT2 .
4. (5)2 OPT1 (4)

OPT2
25
6
1
OPT1

5.Insert the FAX circuit board (A) along the groove in OPT1 and secure the board with two screws
(5) that have been removed in step 4.
Do not directly touch the FAX circuit board (A) terminal. Hold the top and bottom of the FAX circuit
board, or the projection of the board to insert the FAX circuit board (A).
Direct the label (6) on to the FAX circuit board (A) as indicated in the illustration and insert the
board along the groove.

5.Insrer la carte circuits FAX (A) le long de la rainure dans lOPT1 et la fixer laide des deux vis
(5) retires ltape 4.
Ne pas toucher directement la borne de la carte circuits FAX (A). Tenir les parties infrieure et
suprieure de la carte circuits FAX ou la saillie de la carte pour insrer la carte circuits FAX
(A).Orienter l'tiquette (6) de la carte circuits FAX (A) comme illustr et insrer la plaquette le
long de la rainure.
Instale la tarjeta de circuitos de fax.

5. Inserte la tarjeta de circuitos de fax (A) a lo largo de la ranura de OPT1 y asegrela con los dos tornillos
(5) que ha quitado en el paso 4.
No toque directamente el terminal de la tarjeta de circuitos del fax (A). Sujete las partes superior e infe-
rior de la tarjeta de circuitos de fax o la saliente de la tarjeta para insertar la tarjeta de circuitos de fax
(A).Oriente la etiqueta (6) en la tarjeta de circuitos del FAX (A) como se indica en la ilustracin e inserte
la tarjeta a lo largo de la ranura.

5.FAX-Leiterplatte (A) in die Nut des Einbauschachts OPT1 einsetzen und Leiterplatte mit den in
Schritt 4 ausgebauten Schrauben (5) befestigen.
Berhren Sie die Anschlsse der FAX-Platine (A) nicht mit den Fingern. Die FAX-Leiterplatte (A)
bein Einsetzen oben und unten oder an dem Vorsprung festhalten.
Die FAX-Leiterplatte (A) so in die Nut einsetzen, dass der Aufkleber (6) wie abgebildet zur
Leiterplatte zeigt.

5.Inserire la scheda a circuiti FAX (A) lungo lincavo nellOPT1 e fissare la scheda con le due viti (5)
rimosse nelloperazione 4.
Non toccare direttamente il terminale della scheda a circuiti FAX (A). Per inserire il circuito FAX
(A), tenere lestremit superiore e la base della scheda a circuiti FAX, o la sporgenza della scheda
a circuiti FAX. Orientare l'etichetta (6) sulla scheda a circuiti FAX (A) come indicato nell'illustra-
zione e inserire la scheda lungo l'incavo.
5. OPT1 (A) 4 (5)

(A)
(A)
(A) (6)
FAX
5.OPT1 FAX (A) 4 (5) 2 .
FAX (A) .
FAX (A) .
FAX (A) (6) .
FAX
5.OPT1 FAX (A) 4 (5)2
FAX (A)
FAX (A)
FAX (A) (6)
26
1
Connect the MFP to the telephone line. For 100 V/120 V/Australian or Chinese models,
6.Plug the modular connector cable (7) into the line terminal, and then connect the other end to the use the supplied modular connector cable (B).
telephone line.
Connecter le MFP la ligne de tlphone. Pour les modles 100 V/120 V/Australie ou
6.Brancher le cble du connecteur modulaire (7) la borne de la ligne, puis connecter l'autre Chine, utilisez le cble connecteur modulaire
extrmit la ligne de tlphone. (B) fourni.
Conecte el MFP a la lnea telefnica. Para los modelos de 100 V/120 V/Australiano o
6.Enchufe el cable del conector modular (7) en el terminal de lnea y, a continuacin, Chino, utilice el cable conector modular (B)
conecte el otro extremo a la lnea telefnica. suministrado.
Anschlieen des MFP an die Telefonleitung. Das mitgelieferte Modularsteckerkabel (B) fr

6.Telefonmodulkabel (7) in die Gertebuchse einstecken und das Kabel an der Telefondose die 100-V/120-V/Australien- oder China-Modelle
anschlieen. verwenden.
Collegamento dellMFP alla linea del telefono. Per modelli da 100 V/120 V/Australia o Cina, uti-
6.Inserire il cavo connettore modulare (7) nel terminale della linea, e quindi collegare l'altro termi- lizzare il cavo connettore modulare (B) in dota-
nale alla linea del telefono. zione.
MFP 100V/120V/
6. (7) (B)
100V/120V/ /
6. (7) . . (B) .
100V/120V/ /
6. (7)
(B)
27
9
1 C C
8 1
Connect the MFP to the separate phone ). If you don't connect the MFP to the separate
7.Plug the modular connector cable (8) into the telephone terminal, and then connect the other end phone, wipe the surface of the telephone termi-
to the separate phone. nal with alcohol and adhere the terminal seal (C)
upon the customer's request.
On 120 V models, be sure that it is not attached
over the top of the approval label (9).
Connecter le MFP au tlphone spar. Si le MFP nest pas connect au tlphone

7.Brancher le cble du connecteur modulaire (8) la borne du tlphone, puis connecter l'autre spar la demande du client, nettoyer la sur-
extrmit au tlphone spar. face de la borne de tlphone avec de lalcool et
apposer le joint de borne (C).
Sur les modles 120 V, attention ne pas
installer en recouvrant le haut de l'tiquette
d'approbation (9).
Conecte el MFP al telfono separado. Si no conecta el MFP a un telfono separado,

7.Enchufe el cable del conector modular (8) en el terminal del telfono y, a continuacin, conecte el limpie la superficie del terminal del telfono con
otro extremo al telfono separado. alcohol y pegue el sello del terminal (C), a solic-
itud del cliente.
En los modelos de 120 V, asegrese de que no
se fije sobre la etiqueta de aprobacin (9).
Anschlieen des MFP an das separate Telefon. Wenn der MFP nicht an das separate Telefon ange-
7.Das Telefonmodulkabel (8) in die Telefonbuchse einstecken und das andere Ende an das sepa- schlossen wird, die Oberflche der Telefonbuchse
rate Telefon anschlieen. mit Alkohol abwischen und Verschlusskappe (C)
einsetzen, falls vom Kunden gewnscht.
Bei 120-V-Modellen darauf achten, dass der
Aufkleber nicht den Genehmigungsaufkleber (9)
verdeckt.
Collegamento dellMFP al telefono separato. Nel caso in cui non si colleghi l'MFP al telefono
7.Inserire il cavo connettore modulare (8) nel terminale del telefono, e quindi collegare l'altro termi- separato, pulire la superficie del terminale del
nale al telefono separato. telefono con dell'alcol e applicare la guarnizione
terminale (C) a richiesta del cliente.
Sui modelli da 120 V, assicurarsi che essa non
venga applicata sopra letichetta di approvazi-
one (9).
MFP MFP
7. (8)
(C)
120V (9)

7. (8) TEL . . TEL
(C) .
120V (9)
.

7. (8) TEL
TEL
(C)
120V (9)

28
C
1 C
Seal the terminal

(for New Zealand model)
8.Wipe the surface of the telephone termi-
nal with alcohol and adhere the terminal
seal (C).
Perform this procedure for New Zealand
model only.
Fermer hermtiquement la borne

(modle pour la Nouvelle-Zlande)
8.Cette tape est superflue.
Selle el terminal
(para el modelo Nuevo Zelands)
8.Este paso no es necesario.
Versiegeln der Anschlussbuchse

(fr Neuseeland-Modell)
8.Dieser Schritt ist nicht erforderlich.
Sigillare il terminale
(per il modello Nuova Zelanda)
8.Questo passo non richiesto.
( )
8.
( )
8. .
( )
8.
29
13
11
10
10
12
Attach the alphabet labels (excluding 100 V models). 10.Remove the clear panel (13).
9.Insert a flat-head screwdriver at the tip indicated by the arrows (10) as shown on the left, and
slide the operation panel covers (11) (12) to remove them.
Apposer les tiquettes de lalphabet (Sauf sur les modles 100 V). 10.Dposer le panneau transparent (13).
9.Insrer un tournevis lame l'endroit repr par les flches (10) comme illustr ci-contre
gauche et faire glisser les couvercles du panneau de commande (11) (12) pour les dposer.
Fije las etiquetas de alfabeto (a excepcin de los modelos de 100 V). 10.Quite el panel transparente (13).
9.Inserte un destornillador de pala plana en la punta que indican las flechas (10) como se muestra
a la izquierda y deslice las cubiertas del panel de trabajo (11) (12) para quitarlas.
Anbringen der Alphabetaufkleber (ausgenommen 100-V-Modelle). 10.Die durchsichtige Platte (13) entfernen.
9.Einen flachen Schraubendreher an der links mit Pfeilen (10) bezeichneten Spitze einschieben
und die Bedienfeldabdeckungen (11) (12) verschieben, um sie dann abzunehmen.
Applicare le etichette alfabetiche (esclusi i modelli da 100 V). 10.Rimuovere il pannello trasparente (13).
9.Inserire un cacciavite a testa piana nel punto indicato dalla freccia (10) come mostrato sulla sinis-
tra, e slittare i coperchi (11) (12) del pannello operativo per rimuoverli.
(100V ) 10.13
9.101112
(100V ) 10. 13 .
9. 10 11
12
.
(100V ) 10.
9.
30
14
D
14
11.Remove the operation panel sheet (14). 12.Wipe the area above the numeric keys on the operation panel sheet (14) with alcohol and attach
the alphabet labels (D).
In Asia and Oceania, use PQRS TUV WXYZ label, and do not use PRS TUV WXY and OPER
labels.
11.Dposer la tle du panneau de commande 12.Nettoyer l'alcool la surface au-dessus des touches numriques sur la tle du panneau de com-
(14). mande (14) et apposer les tiquettes alphabtiques (D).
En Asie et Ocanie, utiliser ltiquette PQRS TUV WXYZ et pas les tiquettes PRS TUV WXY et
OPER.
11.Quite la hoja del panel de trabajo (14). 12.Limpie el rea sobre las teclas numricas de la hoja del panel de trabajo (14) con alcohol y fije
las etiquetas de alfabeto (D).
En Asia y Oceana, utilice la etiqueta PQRS TUV WXYZ y no use las PRS TUV WXY ni las
OPER.
11.Die Bedienfeldfolie (14) entfernen. 12.Den Bereich ber den Zifferntasten an der Bedienfeldfolie (14) mit Alkohol abwischen und die
Alphabetaufkleber (D) hier anbringen.
In Asien und Ozeanien den Aufkleber PQRS TUV WXYZ verwenden; nicht die Aufkleber PRS
TUV WXY und OPER verwenden.
11.Rimuovere il foglio (14) del pannello opera- 12.Pulire larea sopra i tasti numerici sul foglio del pannello operativo (14) con alcool ed applicare le
tivo. etichette alfabetiche (D).
In Asia ed Oceania, utilizzare letichetta PQRS TUV WXYZ e non utilizzare le etichette PRS TUV
WXY e OPER.
11.14 12.14 (D)

PQRS TUV WXYZ PRS TUV WXY OPER
11.14 . 12.14 (D) .

PRS TUV WXY OPER PQRS TUV
WXYZ .
11. 12.
31
11
14
13
12
13.Attach the operation panel sheet (14). 14.Reinstall the clear panel (13). 15.Reinstall the operation panel covers (11)
(12).
13.Fixer la tle du panneau de commande (14). 14.Reposer le panneau transparent (13). 15.Reposer les couvercles du panneau de com-
mande (11) (12).
13.Fije la hoja del panel de trabajo (14). 14.Vuelva a instalar el panel transparente (13). 15.Vuelva a instalar las cubiertas del panel de
trabajo (11) (12).
13.Die Bedienfeldfolie (14) anbringen. 14.Die durchsichtige Platte (13) wieder anbrin- 15.Die Bedienfeldabdeckungen (11) (12) wieder
gen. anbringen.
13.Applicare il foglio del pannello operativo 14.Reinstallare il pannello trasparente (13). 15.Reinstallare i coperchi (11) (12) del pannello
(14). operativo.
13.14 14.13 15.1112
13.14 . 14.13 . 15. 1112 .
13. 14. 15.
32
For Australian model
OPT2
OPT2
A2 B1 A2 B1
F G
For New Zealand model
OPT1
OPT1
Attach the PTT label (for China, 110 V models only). Attach the approval label (for Australian/New Zealand model only).
16.Attach the PTT label (F) after wiping with alcohol. 17.Attach the approval label (G) after wiping with alcohol.
Perform this procedure for Australian/New Zealand model only.
Fixer ltiquette dapprobation (pour la Chine, modles 110 V seule- Fixer ltiquette dapprobation (modle pour lAustralie/Nouvelle-
ment). Zlande seulement).
16.Cette tape est superflue. 17.Cette tape est superflue.
Coloque la etiqueta de aprobacin (para China, solo para los mode- Coloque la etiqueta de aprobacin (slo para los modelos Austra-
los de 110 V). liano/Nuevo Zelands)
16.Este paso no es necesario. 17.Este paso no es necesario.
Den Genehmigungsaufkleber anbringen (fr China nur 110-V-Mod- Den Genehmigungsaufkleber anbringen (nur fr Australien/Neusee-
elle). land-Modell).
16.Dieser Schritt ist nicht erforderlich. 17.Dieser Schritt ist nicht erforderlich.
Applicare letichetta di approvazione (per Cina, solo per i modelli da Applicare letichetta di approvazione (solo per il modello Australia/
110 V). Nuova Zelanda)
16.Questo passo non richiesto. 17.Questo passo non richiesto.
( 110V ) ( / )
16. (F) 17.
( , 110V ) ( / )
16. . 17. .
(
110V ) ( / )
16. 17.
33
Initialize the FAX circuit board.
1.Plug the MFP into a power outlet, and turn on the main power.
2.Perform the maintenance mode U600 to initialize the FAX PWBs
Initialiser la carte circuits FAX.

1.Brancher le MFP sur une prise dalimentation et le mettre sous tension.
2.Excuter le mode maintenance U600 pour initialiser les cartes de cir-
cuit imprim du fax .
Inicialice la tarjeta de circuitos FAX.

1.Conecte el MFP a un receptculo de pared y encienda el interruptor
principal.
2.Ejecute el modo de mantenimiento U600 para inicializar los FAX PWB.
Initialisieren der FAX-Leiterplatte.

1.Netzstecker des MFP in eine Steckdose stecken und Hauptschalter
einschalten.
2.Fhren Sie den Wartungsmodus U600 aus, um die FAX-Karte zu ini-
tialisieren.
Questo passo non richiesto.Inizializzare la scheda a circuiti FAX.

1.Collegare lMFP ad una presa di corrente e portare linterruttore princi-
pale su On.
2.Eseguire il modo manutenzione U600 per inizializzare le schede PWB
FAX.
1. MFP
2. U600
FAX
1.MFP ON
.
2. U600 FAX .
FAX
1.MFP ON

2. U600
FAX
34
A E
C
B H
When installing the multiport on a machine (B) which has the 'Accessibility Display' key in the operation panel
B. Modular connector cable E. Memory DIMM (16 MB) ............................. 1 (D), (E), (F), (G) and (H) are not used.
(120 V/Australian model only) F. PTT label (110V model only) ..................... 1
PJJWC0016Z (UL Listed.HUAN HSIN G. Approval label Be sure to remove any tape and/or cushioning
Type TL:120 V only) .................................. 1 (Australian/New Zealand models only) ...... 2 materials from the parts supplied.
Lors de l'installation du port multiple sur une machine (B) disposant de la touche 'Affich. accessibilit' sur le panneau de commande
Pices fournies E. Mmoire DIMM (16 MB) ............................ 1 (D), (E) et (H) ne sont pas utiliss.
A. Carte circuits FAX ................................... 1
B. Cble du connecteur modulaire (modles Option Veillez retirer les morceaux de bande
pour lAustralie/120 V seulement).............. 1 H. Mmoire DIMM (128 MB) .......................... 1 adhsive et/ou les matriaux de rembourrage
C. Joint de borne............................................ 1 des pices fournies.
Al instalar un puerto mltiple en una mquina (B) que dispone de la tecla 'Pantalla acceso' en el panel de controles
Partes suministradas E. Memoria DIMM (16 MB) ............................ 1 (D), (E) y (H) no se utilizan.
A. Tarjeta de circuitos de fax .......................... 1
B. Cable conector modular (slo para Opcin Asegrese de quitar todas las cintas y/o mate-
modelos de 120 V/Australianos)................ 1 H. Memoria DIMM (128 MB) .......................... 1 rial amortiguador de las partes suministradas.
Bei Installation einer zweiten Leitung in einem Gert (B), das ber die Taste 'Zugriffsanzeige' im Bedienfeld verfgt
Enthaltene Teile Stellen Sie sicher, dass smtliche Klebebnder
A. FAX-Leiterplatte......................................... 1 Option und/oder Polstermaterial von den gelieferten
C. Verschlusskappe ....................................... 1 H. Speicher-DIMM (128 MB) .......................... 1 Teilen entfernt wurden.
E. Speicher-DIMM (16 MB) ............................ 1 (B), (F) und (G) liegen nicht bei.
(D), (E) und (H) werden nicht bentigt.
Per l'installazione di una porta multipla su una macchina (B) dotata di tasto 'Visual. Accessibilit' sul pannello comandi
E. Memoria DIMM (16 MB) ............................ 1 (B), (F) e (G) non sono in dotazione.
(D), (E) e (H) non sono utilizzati.
' ' (B)

F. .............................1 (D),(E) (H)
A. ........................... 1
B. ............................... 1
C. ............................. 1 H. DIMM (128MB) .................1
D. ......................... 1
E. DIMM (16MB) ................. 1 (G)
' ' (B)
,
A. FAX ........................................... 1 H. DIMM128MB........................ 1 .
C. ............................................... 1
D. ........................................ 1
E. DIMM16MB......................... 1 B,F,(G) .
D,E,(H) .
(B)

A. FAX ............................. 1 H. DIMM128MB..................1

B. ..................... 1
C. ........................... 1
E. DIMM16MB................... 1 (D),(F),(G)

(E),(H)
35
NOTICE
REMARQUE
AVISO
ANMERKUNG
AVVISO
FAX System(W)
FAX System(W) .
.
FAX System(W)
OFF

36
OPT2
Procedure
Removing the slot cover
1.Remove 2 screws (5) and then remove the OPT2 slot cover (4).
Procdure
Dpose du couvercle de la fente
1.Dposer les 2 vis (5) puis le couvercle de la fente OPT2 (4).
Procedimiento
Desmontaje de la cubierta de la ranura
1.Quite 2 tornillos (5) y, despus, quite la cubierta de la ranura OPT2 (4).
Vorgehensweise
Entfernen der Einschubabdeckung
1.2 Schrauben (5) entfernen und dann die Abdeckung (4) des Einschubs OPT2 entfernen.
Procedura
Rimozione del coperchio vano
1.Rimuovere le 2 viti (2) e quinidi rimuovere il coperchio (1) del vano OPT2.
1. 2 (5) OPT2 (4)

1. (5) 2 OPT2 (4) .
1. (5)2 OPT2 (4)
37
6
OPT2
A
5

2.Insert the FAX circuit board (A) along the groove in OPT2 and secure the board with two screws (5) that have been removed in step 1.
Do not directly touch the FAX circuit board (A) terminal.
Hold the top and bottom of the FAX circuit board, or the projection of the board to insert the FAX circuit board (A).
Direct the label (6) on to the FAX circuit board (A) toward left side and insert the board along the groove.

2.Insrer la carte circuits FAX (A) le long de la rainure dans lOPT2 et la fixer laide des deux vis (5) retires ltape 1.
Ne pas toucher directement la borne de la carte circuits FAX (A).
Tenir les parties infrieure et suprieure de la carte circuits FAX ou la saillie de la carte pour insrer la carte circuits FAX (A).
Orienter l'tiquette (6) de la carte circuits FAX (A) comme illustr et insrer la plaquette le long de la rainure.
Instale la tarjeta de circuitos de FAX.

2.Inserte la tarjeta de circuitos de fax (A) a lo largo de la ranura de OPT2 y asegrela con los dos tornillos (5) que ha quitado en el paso 1.
No toque directamente el terminal de la tarjeta de circuitos del FAX (A).
Sujete las partes superior e inferior de la tarjeta de circuitos de FAX o la saliente de la tarjeta para insertar la tarjeta de circuitos de FAX (A).
Oriente la etiqueta (6) en la tarjeta de circuitos del FAX (A) como se indica en la ilustracin e inserte la tarjeta a lo largo de la ranura.

2.FAX-Leiterplatte (A) in die Nut des Einbauschachts OPT2 einsetzen und Leiterplatte mit den in Schritt1 ausgebauten Schrauben (5) befestigen.
Berhren Sie die Anschlsse der FAX-Platine (A) nicht mit den Fingern.
Die FAX-Leiterplatte (A) bein Einsetzen oben und unten oder an dem Vorsprung festhalten.
Die FAX-Leiterplatte (A) so in die Nut einsetzen, dass der Aufkleber (6) wie abgebildet zur Leiterplatte zeigt.

2.Inserire la scheda a circuiti FAX (A) lungo lincavo nellOPT2 e fissare la scheda con le due viti (5) rimosse nelloperazione 1.
Non toccare direttamente il terminale della scheda a circuiti FAX (A),
Per inserire il circuito FAX (A), tenere lestremit superiore e la base della scheda a circuiti FAX, o la sporgenza della scheda a circuiti FAX.
Orientare l'etichetta (6) sulla scheda a circuiti FAX (A) come indicato nell'illustrazione e inserire la scheda lungo l'incavo.
2. OPT2 (A) 1 (5)

(A)
(A)
(A) (6)
FAX
2.OPT2 FAX (A) 1 (5) 2 .
FAX (A) .
FAX (A) .
FAX (A) (6) .
FAX
2.OPT2 FAX (A) 1 (5)2
FAX (A)
FAX (A)
FAX (A) (6)
38
9
C C
Seal the terminal. On 120 V models, be sure that it is not attached

3.Wipe the surface of the telephone terminal with alcohol and adhere the terminal seal (C). over the top of the approval label (9).
The telephone terminal on the FAX circuit board installed to OPT2 is unavailable (invalid). Seal
the terminal securely to prevent a user from connecting a separate phone.
Fermer hermtiquement la borne. Sur les modles 120 V, attention ne pas

3.Nettoyer la surface de la borne de tlphone avec de lalcool, et apposer le joint de borne (C). installer en recouvrant le haut de l'tiquette
La borne de tlphone de la carte circuits FAX installe sur lOPT2 nest pas utilisable d'approbation (9).
(invalide). Fermer hermtiquement la borne pour empcher tout utilisateur de connecter un tl-
phone spar.
Selle el terminal. En los modelos de 120 V, asegrese de que no

3.Limpie la superficie del terminal de telfono con alcohol y pegue el sello de terminal (C). se fije sobre la etiqueta de aprobacin (9).
El terminal de telfono de la tarjeta de circuitos de FAX instalado en el OPT2 no est disponible
(invlido). Selle firmemente el terminal para evitar que un usuario conecte un telfono por sepa-
rado.
Versiegeln der Anschlussbuchse. Bei 120-V-Modellen darauf achten, dass der

3.Die Oberflche der Telefonanschlussbuchse mit Alkohol abwischen und die Verschlusskappe (C) Aufkleber nicht den Genehmigungsaufkleber (9)
anbringen. verdeckt.
Die Telefonanschlussbuchse der in OPT2 installierten FAX-Leiterplatte ist nicht verfgbar (ungl-
tig). Die Anschlussbuchse vollkommen versiegeln, um den Anschluss eines separaten Telefons
zu verhindern.
Sigillare il terminale. Sui modelli da 120 V, assicurarsi che essa non

3.Pulire la superficie del terminale del telefono con alcol e fare aderire la guarnizione terminale (C). venga applicata sopra letichetta di approvazi-
Il terminale del telefono sulla scheda a circuiti FAX installata su OPT2 non disponibile (invalido). one (9).
Sigillare il terminale saldamente per prevenire a un utente di collegare un telefono separato.
120V (9)
3. (C)
OPT2 ( )

120V (9)
3.TEL (C) . .
OPT2 FAX TEL .
.
120V 9
3.TEL (C)
OPT2 FAX TEL

39
15
Connect the MFP to the telephone line.

4.Plug the modular connector cable (15) into the line terminal, and then connect the other end to the telephone line.
For 100 V/120 V/Australian or Chinese models, use the supplied modular connector cable (B).
Connecter le MFP la ligne de tlphone.

4.Brancher le cble du connecteur modulaire (15) la borne de la ligne, puis connecter l'autre extrmit la ligne de tlphone.
Pour les modles 100 V/120 V/Australie ou Chine, utilisez le cble connecteur modulaire (B) fourni.
Conecte el MFP a la lnea telefnica.

4.Enchufe el cable del conector modular (15) en el terminal de lnea y, a continuacin, conecte el otro extremo a la lnea telefnica.
Para los modelos de 100 V/120 V/Australiano o Chino, utilice el cable conector modular (B) suministrado.
Anschlieen des MFP an die Telefonleitung.

4.Telefonmodulkabel (15) in die Gertebuchse einstecken und das Kabel an der Telefondose anschlieen.
Das mitgelieferte Modularsteckerkabel (B) fr die 100-V/120-V/Australien- oder China-Modelle verwenden.
Collegamento dellMFP alla linea del telefono.

4.Inserire il cavo connettore modulare (15) nel terminale della linea, e quindi collegare l'altro terminale alla linea del telefono.
Per modelli da 100 V/120 V/Australia o Cina, utilizzare il cavo connettore modulare (B) in dotazione.
MFP
4. (15)
100V/120V/ (B)

4. (15) . .
100V/120V/ / (B) .
4. (15)
100V/120V/ / (B)
40
(Initialize the FAX circuit board. 3.If the FAX circuit board has been added to OPT2 (to initialize the FAX
1.Plug the MFP into a power outlet, and turn on the main power. circuit board in OPT2)
2.If the FAX PWBs were installed simultaneously to OPT1 and OPT2 (all Initialize OPT2 by pressing [PORT2], and the Start key in this order in
Fax PWBs are initialized), perform the maintenance mode U600 to ini- the maintenance mode U698 and executing the maintenance mode
tialize the FAX PWBs. U600. If [ALL] is selected in U698, both OPT1 and OPT2 are initialized.
For details, see the service manual.
Initialiser la carte circuits FAX. 3. Si la carte circuits FAX a t ajoute lOPT2 (pour initialiser la carte circuits
1.Brancher le MFP sur une prise dalimentation et le mettre sous tension. FAX dans lOPT2)
2.Si les cartes de circuit imprim du fax ont t installes en mme Initialiser lOPT2 en appuyant sur [PORT2] et la touche Dpart dans cet ordre en
temps que OPT1 et OPT2 (toutes les cartes de circuit imprim du fax mode de maintenance U698, et excuter le mode de maintenance U600. Si [ALL]
est slectionn dans U698, lOPT1 et lOPT2 sont tous deux initialiss. Pour plus
sont initialises), excuter le mode maintenance U600 pour initialiser
de dtails, se reporter au manuel dentretien.
les cartes de circuit imprim du fax.
Inicialice la tarjeta de circuitos FAX. 3. Si la tarjeta de circuitos de FAX se agreg a OPT2 (para inicializar la tarjeta de
1.Conecte el MFP a un receptculo de pared y encienda el interruptor circuitos de FAX en OPT2)
principal. Inicialice el OPT2 presionando [PORT2] y la tecla de Inicio en ese orden en el
2.Si se instalaron FAX PWB simultneamente a OPT1 y OPT2 (se ini- modo de mantenimiento U698 y ejecutando el modo de mantenimiento U600. Si
se selecciona [ALL] en U698, se inicializan ambos OPT1 y OPT2. Para ms det-
cializan todos los FAX PWB), ejecute el modo de mantenimiento U600
alles, lea el manual de servicio.
para inicializar los FAX PWB.
Initialisieren der FAX-Leiterplatte. 3. Wenn die FAX-Leiterplatte zu OPT2 hinzugefgt worden ist (um die FAX-Leiter-
1.Netzstecker des MFP in eine Steckdose stecken und Hauptschalter platte in OPT2 zu in7itialisieren)
einschalten. OPT2 initialisieren. Dazu [PORT2] und die Start-Taste im
2.Falls die FAX-Karten gleichzeitig in OPT1 und OPT2 installiert werden Wartungsmodus U698 in dieser Reihenfolge drcken und den
Wartungsmodus U600 ausfhren. Wenn [ALL] in U698 gewhlt wird, werden
(alle FAX-Karten werden initialisiert), fhren Sie den Wartungsmodus
OPT1 und OPT2 initialisiert. Weitere Einzelheiten siehe Wartungsanleitung.
U600 aus, um die FAX-Karten zu initialisieren.
Inizializzare la scheda a circuiti FAX. 3. Se la scheda a circuiti stata aggiunta allOPT2 (per inzializzare la scheda a cir-
1.Collegare lMFP ad una presa di corrente e portare linterruttore princi- cuiti FAX nellOPT2)
pale su On. Inizializzare OPT2 premendo [PORT2] e il tasto Avvio in questo ordine nel modo
2.Se sono state installate simultaneamente le schede FAX PWB su di manutenzione U698 ed eseguendo il modo di manutenzione U600. Se viene
selezionato [ALL] nel modo U698, entrambi OPT1 e OPT2 sono inizializzati. Per
OPT1 e OPT2 (tutte le schede FAX PWB sono inizializzate), eseguire
ulteriori dettagli leggere il manuale distruzioni.
il modo manutenzione U600 per inizializzare le schede FAX PWB.
3. OPT2
1. MFP (OPT2 )
2. OPT1 OPT2 OPT2 U698
U600 PORT2 U600
U698 ALL OPT1 OPT2

FAX 3. OPT2 (OPT2 FAX )

1.MFP ON U698 PORT2, .
. U600 FAX .
.
), U600 FAX
.
.
FAX 3.OPT2 (OPT2 FAX )

1.MFP ON U698 PORT2
U600 FAX
) U600 FAX
41
STATO DI AGGIORNAMENTO
UPDATING STATUS
DATA PAGINE AGGIORNATE PAGINE CODICE

DATE UPDATED PAGES PAGES CODE
04/2015 1a EDIZIONE - 1st EDITION 1051 Y113351-4

d-Copia3500MF 4500MF 5500MFsmY113351-4 PDF

Uploaded by

Document Information

Original Title

Copyright

Available Formats

Share this document

Share or Embed Document

Sharing Options

Did you find this document useful?

Is this content inappropriate?

Copyright:

Available Formats

d-Copia3500MF 4500MF 5500MFsmY113351-4 PDF

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

Copier

Copyright 2015 Olivetti

RISK OF EXPLOSION IF BATTERY IS REPLACED BY AN INCORRECT TYPE. DISPOSE

IL Y A UN RISQUE DEXPLOSION SI LA BATTERIE EST REMPLACEE PAR UN MODELE

General warning. Warning of risk of electric shock.

Warning of high temperature.

General prohibited action. Disassembly prohibited.

Always ground the copier.

Always use parts having the correct specifications. ............................................................................

Remove toner completely from electronic components. .....................................................................

1-3 Maintenance Mode

(6) Paper jam at the duplex re-feeding part

(19) Paper is wrinkled. .........................................................................................................1-4-206

1-5 Assembly and disassembly

(1) Detaching and refitting the fuser unit.............................................................................. 1-5-45

1-6 Requirements on PWB Replacement

2-1 Mechanical Construction

2-2 Electrical Parts Layout

(5) Others............................................................................................................................... 2-2-9

This page is intentionally left blank.

Y113351-4 1-1-1 Service Manual

Main Standard 1024 MB

Service Manual 1-1-2 Y113351-4

Operating Humidity 15 to 80% RH

Document processor, Original cover, Paper feeder, Large capacity feeder,

Y113351-4 1-1-3 Service Manual

Scanning speed B/W : 80 images/min

Interface Ethernet (10 BASE-T/100 BASE-TX/1000 BASE-T)

NOTE: These specifications are subject to change without notice.

Service Manual 1-1-4 Y113351-4

1-1-2 Parts names

1. Original size indicator plate 9. Waste toner box

Y113351-4 1-1-5 Service Manual

17. Inner tray 27. Paper conveying unit lever

Service Manual 1-1-6 Y113351-4

1. Machine 6. Side deck

Y113351-4 1-1-7 Service Manual

(3) Operation panel

1. Program key 10. Power key 19. Memory indicator

Service Manual 1-1-8 Y113351-4

1-1-3 Machine cross section

1. Cassette paper feed section 7. Developer unit

Y113351-4 1-1-9 Service Manual

This page is intentionally left blank.

Service Manual 1-1-10 Y113351-4

1-2-1 Installation environment

1. Temperature: 10 to 32.5C/50 to 90.5F

4. Power source frequency: 50 Hz 2%/60 Hz 2%

30cm/11 13/16" 35cm/13 3/4"

Y113351-4 1-2-1 Service Manual

1-2-2 Unpacking and installation

Unpacking Installing other optional devices

Removing the eject spacer Installing the cassette heater (option)

Removing the tapes Connect the power cord

Installing the paper feeder (option) Installing toner

Release of lift plate stopper

Exit maintenance mode

Print out the user setting list

Make test copies

Completion of the machine installation.

Service Manual 1-2-2 Y113351-4

Moving the machine

Y113351-4 1-2-3 Service Manual

Supplied parts of key counter set ($9*5%):